Skip to main content
#
Full text of "Mathematical recreations and essays"

##
See other formats

mm t W III tHHWi'illHJiiiill 4 I I mm m\ '.lii \ 'ill' mmmw ■ Cihntmt ut ^ TV, -l. (lullini^ ^rci^tulr^ Int '^'^^^^^isley College Alumnae Assoc. Jhx iHnnnriitm Helen A. Shafer c> I MATHEMATICAL RECREATIONS AND ESSAYS ^O- . MACMILLAN A?fD CO.. Limited XONDON • BOMBAY • CALCUTTA MELBCURNE THE 3rACMILLAN C03IPANY NEW TOKK • BOSTON • CHICAGO DALLAS • SAX FRANCISCO THE MAC]\IILLAX CO. OF CANADA. Ltd. TORONTO MATHEMATICAL RECKEATIONS AND ESSAYS BY W.^W. EOUSE BALL, FELLOW OF TRINITY COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE. SIXTH EBITIOy. MACMILLAN AND CO., LIMITED ST MARTIN'S STREET, LONDON 1914 [All rights reserved] Copyright First Edition, February, 1892. Second Edition, May, 1892. Third Edition, 1896. Fourth Edition, 1905. Fifth Edition, 1911. Sixth Edition, 1914. 1 PREFACE. rpHE earlier part of this book contains an account of certain -^ Mathematical Recreations : this is followed by some Essays on subjects most of which are directly concerned with historical mathematical problems. I hasten to add that the conclusions are of no practical use, and that most of the results are not new. If therefore the reader proceeds further he is at least fore- warned. At the same time I think I may say that many of the questions discussed are interesting, not a few are associated with the names of distinguished mathematicians, while hitherto several of the memoirs quoted have not been easily accessible to English readers. A great deal of additional matter has been inserted since the work was first issued in 1892. The book is divided into two parts, but in both parts I have excluded questions which involve advanced mathematics. The First Part now consists of ten chapters, in which are described various problems and amusements of the kind usually termed Mathematical Recreations, Several of the questions mentioned in the first five chapters are of a somewhat trivial character, and had they been treated in any standard English work to which I could have referred the reader, I should have left them out: in the absence of such a work, I thought it better to insert them and trust to the judicious reader to omit them altogether or to skim them as he feels inclined. I may add that in discussing problems where the complete VI PREFACE solutions are long or intricate I have been generally content to indicate memoirs or books where the methods are set out at length, and to give a few illustrative examples. In several cases I have also stated problems which still await solution. The Second Part now consists of eleven chapters, mostly dealing with Historical Questions. It is with some hesitation that I have included in this part chapters on String Figures, Astrology, and Ciphers, but I think they may be interesting to my readers, even though the subjects are only indirectly con- nected with Mathematics. I have inserted detailed references, as far as I know them, to the sources of the various questions and solutions given; also, wherever I have given only the result of a theorem, I have tried to indicate authorities where a proof may be found. In general, unless it is stated otherwise, I have taken the references direct from the original works; but, in spite of considerable time spent in verifying them, I dare not suppose that they are free from all errors or misprints. I shall be grateful for notices of additions or corrections which may occur to any of my readers. I am indebted to my friend Mr G. N. Watson for his kindness in reading the proof-sheets of this (the fifth) edition, and for many helpful suggestions and comments. w. w. rousp: ball. Trinity College, Cambridge. October, 1911. NOTE TO THE SIXTH EDITION (1914). In this edition, besides trivial corrections and changes, a few additional recreations have be^n inserted, and Chapter XVIII has been re-written. Vil TABLE OF CONTENTS. PART I. i¥latf)ematiral aaerreatioitsi* Chapter I. Arithmetical Recreations. Baehet. Ozanam. Montucla ..... Elementary Questions on Numbers .... Determination of a number selected by someone Prediction of the result of certain operations Problems involving two numbers Miscellaneous Problems .... Problems with a Series of Numbered Things . Medieval Problems The Josephus Problem. Decimation Addendum on Solutions PAGE 2 3 4 7 10 12 14 18 23 27 Chapter II. Arithmetical Recreations (Continued). Arithmetical Fallacies » ... 28 Paradoxical Problems 31 Permutation Problems 32 Bachet's Weights Problem 34 Problems in Higher Arithmetio 36 Primes. Mersenne's Numbers. Perfect Numbers ... 37 Unsolved Theorems by Euler, Goldbach, Lagrange ... 39 Fermat's Theorem on Binary Powers 39 Fermat's Last Theorem 40 viii TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter III. Geometrical Recreations. Geometrical Fallacies '^^ Paradoxical Problems • ... 52 Map-Colouring Theorem 54 Physical Coufiguration of a Country 59 Addendum on a Solution 61 Chapter IV. Geometrical Recreations [Continued). Statical Games of Position 62 Three-in-a-row. Extension to p-in-a-row 62 Tesselation. Anallagmatic Problems 64 Colour-Cube Problem 67 Tangrams . 69 Dynamical Games of Position 69 Shunting Problems 69 Ferry-Boat Problems 71 Geodesic Problems 73 Problems with Counters or Pawns 74 Geometrical Puzzles with Rods 80 Paradromic Rings 80 Addendum on Solutions . « 81 Chapter V. Mechanical Recreations. Paradoxes on Motion 84 Laws of Motion 87 Force, Inertia. Centrifugal Force 87 Work. Stability of Equilibrium 89 Perpetual Motion 93 Models 97 Sailing quicker than the wind 93 Boat Moved by a Rope inside the Boat 101 Hauksbee's Law 101 Cut on Tennis-Balls, Cricket-Balls, Golf-BalJs 103 Flight of Birds 106 Curiosa Physica .• 107 Chapter VI. Chess-Board Recreations. Chess-Board Notation 109 Relative Value of the Pieces 110 The Eight Queens Problem 113 Maximum Pieces Problem 119 Minimum Pieces Problem . 119 Analogous Problems ... ..... 121 TABLE OF CONTENTS IX Re-Eutrant Paths on a Chess-Boaid Knight's Re-Entrant Path King's Re-Entrant Path . Rook's Re-Entrant Path . Bishop's Re-Entrant Path Miscellaneous Problems PAGE 122 122 133 133 134 134 Chapter VII. Magic Squares. Notes on the History of Mi'.gic Squares . Construction of Odd Magic Squares Method of De la Loubere and Bachet Method of De la Hire . Construction of Even Magic Squares First Method Method of De la Hire and Labosne Composite Magic Squares .... Bordered Magic Squares .... Magic Squares involving products . Magic Stars, etc Unsolved Problems ..... Hyper-Magic Squares Pan-Diagonal Squares Symmetrical Squares Doubly-Magic and Trebly-Magic Squares Magic Pencils Magic Puzzles Magic Card Square. Euler's Officers Problem Reversible Square .... Domino Squares .... Coin Squares Addendum on a Solution .... 138 139 140 142 144 145 149 152 152 154 154 155 156 156 162 163 163 166 166 167 168 169 169 Chapter VIII. Unicup.sal Problems. Euler's Problem 170 Definitions 172 Euler's Results ... 172 Illustrations 176 Number of Ways in which a Unicursal Figure can be described . . 177 Mazes 182 Rules for traversing a Maze 183 The History of Mazes 183 Examples of Mazes 186 Geometrical Trees 188 The Hamiltouian Game 189 TABLE OF CONTEI^TS Chapter IX. Kirkman's School-Girls Problem. PAGE History of the Problem 193 Solutions by One- Step Cycles 19o Examples when n=3, 9, 27, 33, 51, 57, 75, SI, 99 . . . 196 Solutions by Two-Step Cycles 199 Examples when w = 15, 27, 39, 51, 63, 75, 87, 99 . . . 200 Solutions by Three-Step Cycles 203 Examples n = 9, 21, 27, 33, 39, 45, 51, 57, 63, 69, 75, 81, 87, 93, 99 205 Solutions by the Focal MeiLod 209 Examples when w = 33, 51 210 Analytical Methods 211 Application when n = 27 with 13 as base 212 Examples when n = 15, 39 216 Number of Solutions 217 Walecki's Theorem 218 Problem of w^ Girls in n groups (Peirce) ...... 219 Examples when n= 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 219 Example when n is prime 220 Kirkman's Problem in Quartets, &c. 221 A Bridge Problem. Arrangements in Pairs , 221 Sylvester's Corollary to Kirkman's Problem 222 Steiner's Combinatorische Aufgabe ..... .4 . 223 Chapter X. Miscellaneous Proble:.i3. The Fifteen Puzzle The Tower of Hanoi Chinese Eings Algebraic Solution .... Solution in Binary Scale of Notation Problems connected with a Pack of Cards Shuffling a Pack .... Arrangements by Rows and Columns Bachet's Problem with Pairs of Cards The Three Pile Problem . Gergonne's Generalization The Mouse TrajD. Treize . 224 228 229 230 232 234 235 237 238 240 241 245 TABLE OF CONTENTS XI PART II. i^lferellaneoue? (Sefe^api^. Chapter XL The Mathematical Tripos. Medieval Course of Studies: Acts . The Eenaissance at Cambridge Eise of a Mathematical School Subject-Matter of Acts at different periods Degree Lists Oral Examinations always possible . Public Oral Examinations become customary, 1710-30 Additional work of Moderators. Stipends raised, 1731 Facilitates arrangement in order of merit Scheme of Examination in 1750 Eight of M.A.s to take part in it Scheme of Examination in 1763 >/Foundation of Smith's Prizes, 1768 Introduction of a Written Examination, circ. 1770 Description of the Examination in 177*2. Scheme of Examination introduced in 1779 System of Brackets Problem Paper in 1786 .... Description of the Examination in 1791 The Poll Part of the Examination A Pass Standard introduced . Problem Papers from 1802 onwards Description of the Examination in 1802. Scheme of Reading in 1806 Changes introduced in 1808 . Description of the Examination in 1816. Introduction of Analytical Notation Description of the Examination in 1820 and 1823 Alterations in Schemes of Study, 1824 Scheme of Examination in 1827 Scheme of Examination in 1833 All the papers marked . Scheme of Examination in 1839 Scheme of Examination in 1848 Creation of a Board of Mathematical Studies Scheme of Examiualion in 1873 PAGE 248 249 249 250 251 252 253 253 253 254 254 255 257 257 257 260 260 261 263 264 264 265 265 268 270 270 271 272 274 274 276 276 2T& 277 278 279 xu TABLE OF CONTENTS Scheme of Examination in 1882, 1883 . . . . Fall in number of Students reading Matbematics Scheme of Examination introduced in 1908 . Origin of term Tripos ....... Tripos Verses PAGE 280 281 281 281 282 Cha les Chapter XII. Three Classical Geometrical Problems. Statement of the Problems 284 The Duplication of the Cube. Legendary Origin of the Problem . . 285 Hippocrates's Lemma 287 Solutions by Archytas, Plato, Menaechmus, Apollonius, and Diodes . 287 Solutions by Vieta, Descartes, Gregory of St Vincent, and Newton The Trisection of an Angle Ancient Solutions quoted by Pappus Solutions by Pappus, Descartes, Newton, Clairaut, and The Quadrature of the Circle ..... Incommensurability of tt Definitions of tt Origin of symbol tt Methods of approximating to the numerical value of ir Geometrical methods of Approximation . Eesults of Egyptians, Babylonians, Jews Eesults of Archimedes and other Greek Writers Eesults of Eoman Surveyors and Gerbert Eesults of Indian and Eastern Writers Eesults of European Writers, 1200-1630 Theorems of Wallis and Brouncker Analytical methods of Approximation. Gregory's series Eesults of European Writers, 1699-1873 Geometrical Approximation Approximations by the Theory of Probability 290 291 291 292 293 294 295 296 296 296 297 297 298 298 300 302 303 303 305 305 Chapter XIII. The Parallel Postulate The Problem .... The Earliest Proof. Thales . Pascal's Proof .... Pythagorean and Euclidean Proof Features of the Problem . Ptolemy's Proof of the Postulate Proclus's Proof of the Postulate Wallis's Proof of the Postulate Bertrand's Proof of the Postulate 307 308 308 310 311 313 314 314 315 TABLE OF CONTENTS Xlll PAGE Playfair's Proof of the Postulate 316 Playfair's Rotational Proof of the Proposition 317 Legendre's First Proof of the Proposition ...... 318 Legendre's Analytical Proof of the Proposition 318 Lagrange's Memoir ........... 320 Other Parallel Postulates 320 Definitions of Parallels .......... 322 Non-Euclidean Systems 323 Comparison of Elliptic, Parabolic and Hyperbolic Geometries . 325 Chapter XIV. Insolubility of the Algebraic Quintic. The Problem 327 Lagrange's Examination of Solutions of Algebraic Equations . . 327 Demonstration that the Quintic is Insoluble. Abel. Galois . . 329 Order of the Radicals in any Solution 330 Chapter XV. Mersenne's Numbers. Mersenne's Enunciation of the Question Results already known Cases awaiting verification .... Table of Results History of Investigations Methods used in attacking the Problem . Lucas's Test by Residues By trial of divisors of known forms By indeterminate equations . By properties of quadratic forms . By the use of a Canon Arithmeticus By properties of binary powers By the use of the binarj' scale of notation By the use of Fermat's Theorem . Mechanical methods of Factorizing Numbers . 333 334 335 336 337 340 340 341 343 344 344 345 346 346 347 Chapter XVI. String Figures. Two Types of String Figures or Cat's-Cradles Terminology. Rivers and Haddon . European Varieties of Cat's-Cradles The Cradle .... Snuffer-Trays .... Cat's-Eye .... Fish-in-a-Dish Pound-of-Candles, Hammock, Lattice-Work, Other Forms Sequence of Forms ...,,,. 348 349 350 351 352 352 353 354 366 XIV TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE Oceanic Varieties of Cat's-Cradles 357 Openings A and B. Movement T 357 A Door 358 Climbing a Tree 359 Throwing the Spear 360 Triple Diamonds 361 Quadruple Diamonds 362 Multiple Diamonds 363 Many Stars 364 Owls 365 Single Stars. W. W 366 The Setting Sun 367 The Head Hunters 368 The Parrot Cage 368 See-Saw 369 Lightning 369 A Butterfly 370 String Tricks 371 The Lizard Trick 372 The Caroline Catch 372 Threading the Needle 373 The Yam Thief or Mouse Trick 374 Cheating the Halter 374 The Fly on the Nose 375 The Hand-Cuff Trick 375 The Elusive Loop . c 376 The Button-Hole Trick 377 The Loop Trick . . ....... 378 The Waistcoat Puzzle 378 Knots, Lashings , , 379 Chapter XVII. Astrology. Astrology. An Ancient Art Two Branches of Medieval Astrology: Natal and Horary Rules for Casting and Eeading a Horoscope . Houses and their Significations .... Planets and their Significations .... Zodiacal Signs and their Significations Knowledge that rules were worthless .... Notable Instances of Horoscopy Lilly's prediction of the Great Fire and Plague . Flamsteed's guess Cardan's Horoscope of Edward VI . . . 380 381 381 381 384 386 388 389 390 390 391 TAIILE OF CONTENTS XV Chapter XVIII. Cryptographs and CrrrTEKS. Authorities Cryptographs. Definition. Illustration . Ciphers. Definition. Illustration Essential Features of Cryptographs and Ciphers Cryptographs of Three Types .... Transposition Type. The Eoute Method Use of non-significant symbols. The Grille Use of broken symbols. The Scytale . Ciphers. Use of arbitrary symbols unnecessary Ciphers of Four Types Substitution Alphabets. Illustrations . Conrad's Tables of Frequency Ciphers of the Second Type. Illustrations Shifting Alphabets. Illustrations . Gronfeld's and the St Cyr Methods The Playfair Cipher .... Ciphers of the Fourth Type. Illustrations Desiderata in a good Cipher or Cryptograph . Cipher Machines On the Solution of Cryptographs and Ciphers Example Historical Ciphers Julius Caesar, Augustus, Bacon, Morse Cod Charles I Pepys De Kohan, Marie Antoinette . The Five Digit Code Dictionary . PAGE 395 395 396 397 397 397 400 402 403 403 403 405 406 409 <109 411 412 413 414 414 415 418 418 419 , 420 421 421 Chapter XIX. Hyper Space. Authorities .... Two subjects of speculation Space of Two Dimensions Space of One Dimension . Space of Four Dimensions Existence in such a world Arguments in favour of the existence of such a world Use of, to explain physical phenomena Non-Euclidean Geometries ...... Euclid's Axioms and Postulates. The Parallel Postulate Hyperbolic and Elliptic Geometries of Two Dimensions Non-Euclidean Geometries of Three or more Dimensions Non-Archimcdian Geometries of Two Dimensions . Non-Legendrian Geometry Semi-Euclidean Geometry ..... Truth of Axioms 424 425 425 426 426 427 428 430 433 433 433 435 436 436 436 437 XVI TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter XX. Time and its Measurement. PAGE Difficulty of the Subject 438 Simultaneity . , 438 Units for measuring Durations (days, weeks, months, years) . . 439 The Civil Calendar (Julian, Gregorian, Ac.) 443 The Ecclesiastical Calendar (Date of Easter) 446 Day of the Week corresponding to a given date 449 Means of measuring Time 450 Styles, Sun-dials, Sun-rings 450 Water-clocks, Sand-clocks, Graduated Candles .... 453 Clocks 454 Watches 455 Watches as Compasses 457 Chapter XXI. Matter and Ether Theories. Labile Ether Subject of Chapter. Views formerly held about Matter Hypothesis of Continuous Matter . Atomic Theories Popular Atomic Hypothesis . Boscovich's Hypothesis . Hypothesis of an Elastic Solid Ether Dynamical Theories .... The Vortex Eing Hypothesis The Vortex Sponge Hypothesis The Ether-Squirts Hypothesis The Electron Hypothesis Speculations due to investigations on Radio Le Bon's Suggestion Mendelejev's Hypothesis . The Bubble Hypothesis. Eequisites in a Theory .... Conjectures as to the Cause of Gravity . Conjectures to explain the finite number of specie Size of the Molecules of Bodies Mass of a Body affected by its Motion . Theory of Relativity Index ....... Notices or Books Activity s of Atoms 459 460 460 460 461 462 462 463 464 465 465 466 468 468 469 470 471 475 477 480 480 483 493 PART I. i^latl^ematiral J^etrfatfonE!. " Les hommes ne sont jamais jylus ingenieux que dans V invention desjeux; V esprit s'y trouve d son aise Apres lesjeux qui dependent uniquement des nomhres viennent les jeux ou entre la situation Apres les jeux oil ne/Urent que le nomhre et la situation viendraient les jeux ou entre le 7nouvement..,.Enjin il serait a souhaiter qu^on eut un cours entier desjeux, traiies mathematiquement." (Leibnitz: letter to De Montmort, July 29, 1715.) B. R. 2 CHAPTER I. ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS. I commence by describing some arithmetical recreations. The interest excited by statements of the relations between numbers of certain forms has been often remarked, and the majority of works on mathematical recreations include several such problems, which, though obvious to any one acquainted with the elements of algebra, have to many who are ignorant of that subject the same kind of charm that mathematicians find in the more recondite propositions of higher arithmetic. I devote the bulk of this chapter to these elementary problems. Before entering on the subject, I may add that a large proportion of the elementary questions mentioned here are taken from one of two sources. The first of these is the classical Prohlhnes plaisans et delectables, by Claude Caspar Bachet, sieur de Meziriac, of which the first edition was published in 1612 and the second in 1624 : it is to the edition of 1624 that the references hereafter given apply. Several of Bachet's problems are taken from the writings of Alcuin, Pacioli di Burgo, Tartaglia, and Cardan, and possibly some of them are of oriental origin, but I have made no attempt to add such references. The other source to which I alluded above is Ozanam's Beci^eations mathematiques et physiques. The greater portion of the original edition, published in two volumes at Paris in 1694, was a compilation from the works of Bachet, Mydorge, and Leurechon : this part is excellent, but the same cannot be said of the additions due to Ozanam. In the Biocjraphie Universelle allusion is made to subsequent editions en. l] ARI'J HMETICAL RECREATIONS 3 issued in 1720, 1735, 1741, 1778, and 1790; doubtless these references are correct, but the following editions, all of which I have seen, are the only ones of which I have any knowledge. In 1696 an edition was issued at Amsterdam. In 1723 — six years after the death of Ozanam — one was issued in three volumes, with a supplementary fourth volume, containing, among other things, an appendix on puzzles. Fresh editions were issued in 1741, 1750 (the second volume of which bears the date 1749), 1770, and 1790. The edition of 1750 is said to have been corrected by Montucla on condition that his name should not be associated with it; but the edition of 1790 is the earliest one in which reference is made to these corrections, though the editor is referred to only as Monsieur M***. Montucla expunged most of what was actually incorrect in the older editions, and added several historical notes, but un- fortunately his scruples prevented him from striking out the accounts of numerous trivial experiments and truisms which overload the work. An English translation of the original edition appeared in 1708, and I believe ran through four editions, the last of them being published in Dublin in 1790. Montucla's revision of 1790 was translated by C. Hutton, and editions of this were issued in 1803, in 1814, and (in one volume) in 1840 : my references are to the editions of 1803 and 1840. I proceed to enumerate some of the elementary questions connected with numbers which for nearly three centuries have formed a large part of most compilations of mathe- matical amusements. They are given here largely for their historical — not fur their arithmetical — interest ; and perhaps a mathematician may well omit this chapter. Many of these questions are of the nature of tricks or puzzles, and I follow the usual course and present them in that form. I may note however that most of them are not worth proposing, even as tricks, unless either the method employed is disguised or the result arrived at is different from that expected ; but, as I am not writing on conjuiing, I refrain from alluding to the 1 o 4 ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS [CH. I means of disguising the operations indicated, and give merely a bare enumeration of the steps essential to the success of the method used, though I may recall the fundamental rule that no trick, however good, will bear immediate repetition, and that, if it is necessary to appear to repeat it, a different method of obtaining the result should be used. To FIND A NUMBER SELECTED BY SOME ONE. There are innumerable ways of finding a number chosen by some one, provided the result of certain operations on it is known. I confine myself to methods typical of those commonly used. Any one acquainted with algebra will find no difficulty in framing new rules of an analogous nature. First Method*, (i) Ask the person who has chosen the number to treble it. (ii) Enquire if the product is even or odd: if it is even, request him to take half of it; if it is odd, request him to add unity to it and then to take half of it. (iii) Tell him to multiply the result of the second step by 3. (iv) Ask how many integral times 9 divides into the latter product : suppose the answer to be n. (v) Then the number thought of was 2n or 2?i + 1, according as the result of step (i) was even or odd. The demonstration is obvious. Every even number is of the form 2n, and the successive operations applied to this give (i) 6n, which is even; (ii) J6w = 37i; (iii) SxSn = 9n; (iv) ^9n = n; (v) 2n. Every odd number is of the form 2?i + 1, and the successive operations applied to this give (i) Qn + 3, which is odd; (ii) i(6?i + 3 + 1) = 871 + 2 ; (iii) 3(8?i + 2) = 9/^ + 6; (iv) ^ (9n + 6) = n+ a remainder ; (v) 2?i + 1, These results lead to the rule given above. Second Methodf. Ask the person who has chosen the number to perform in succession the following operations, (i) To multiply the number by 5. (ii) To add 6 to the product, (iii) To multiply the sum by 4. (iv) To add 9 to the product, (v) To multiply the sum by 5. Ask to be told the result of the last operation: if from this product 165 is subtracted, and * Baehet, Prohlejiies, Lyons, 1624, problem i, p. 53. t A similar rule was given by Baehet, problem iv, p. 74. CH. l] ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS 5 then the remainder is divided by 100, the quotient will be the number thought of originally. For let n be the number selected. Then the successive operations applied to it give (i) bn; (ii) 5?i + 6 ; (iii) 20/1 + 24; (iv) 20?i + 33, (v) 100;i + 165. Hence the rule. Third Method*. Request the person who has thought of the number to perform the following operations, (i) To multiply it by any number you like, say, a. (ii) To divide the product by any number, say, 6. (iii) To multiply the quotient by c. (iv) To divide this result by d. (v) To divide the final result by the number selected originally, (vi) To add to the result of operation (v) the number thought of at first. Ask for the sum so found : then, if acjhd is subtracted from this sum, the remainder will be the number chosen originally. For, if 71 was the number selected, the result of the first four operations is to form nac/bd ; operation (v) gives ac/bd ; and (vi) gives n -^ (ac/bd), which number is mentioned. But ac/bd is known ; hence, subtracting it from the number mentioned, 71 is found. Of course a, b, c, d may have any numerical values it is liked to assign to them. For example, if a =12, 6 = 4, c = 7, d = S it is sufficient to subtract 7 from the final result in order to obtain the number originally selected. Fourth Methudf, Ask some one to select a number less than 90. Request him to perform the following operations, (i) To multiply it by 10, and to add any number he pleases, a, which is less than 10. (ii) To divide the result of step (i) by 3, and to mention the remainder, say, b. (iii) To multiply the quotient obtained in step (ii) by 10, and to add any number he pleases, c, which is less than 10. (iv) To divide the result of step (iii) by 3, and to mention the remainder, say d, and the third digit (from the right) of the quotient; suppose this digit is e. Then, if the numbers a, b, c, d, e are known, the original number can be at once determined. In fact, if the number is ^x + y, where a; :}> 9 and yi^^, and if r is the * Bachet, problem v, p. 80. t Educational Times, London, May 1, 180o, vol. xlviii, p. 234. 6 ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS [CH. I remainder when a — h-^o(c — d) is divided by 9, we have 0) = e, y = 9 —r. The demonstration is not difficult. Suppose the selected num- ber is 9^+1/. Step (i) gives 90a; + IO1/ + a. Let y -h a = Sn -\- b, then the quotient obtained in step (ii) is 30a; + 3?/ + n. Step (iii) gives .300a; + SOy + lOn + c. Let n + c = Sm + d, then the quotient obtained in step (iv) is lOOx + lOy -{■ Sn -\- m, which I will denote by Q. Now the third digit in Q must be x, because, since y :^ S and a :|> 9, we have n :}> 5 ; and since n:^ 5 and c :^ 9, we have w ::f> 4 ; therefore lOy + 8n + m r)^ 99. Hence the third or hundreds digit in Q is x. Again, from the relations y -\- a = Sn + b and n-\-c= 3m + d, we have 9m — y = a — b + S(c — d) : hence, if r is the remainder when a — b + S(c — d) is divided by 9, we have y = 9 — r. [This is always true, if we make r positive ; but if a—b-\-S(c — d) is negative, it is simpler to take y as equal to its numerical value ; or we may prevent the occurrence of this case by assigning proper values to a and c] Thus ob and y are both known, and therefore the number selected, namely 9x-\-y, is known. Fifth Method*. Ask any one to select a number less than 60. Request him to perform the following operations, (i) To divide it by 3 and mention the remainder; suppose it to be a. (ii) To divide it by 4, and mention the remainder; suppose it to be b. (iii) To divide it by 5, and mention the remainder; suppose it to be c. Then the number selected is the remairider obtained by dividing 40a + 456 + 36c by 60. This method can be generalized and then will apply to any number chosen. Let a', b\ c', ... be a series of numbers prime to one another, and let p be their product. Let n be any number less than ^, and let a, 6, c, ... be the remainders when n is divided by a , b', c\ ... respectively. Find a number A which is a multiple of the product b'c'd' ... and which exceeds by unity a multiple of a. Find a number B which is a multiple of a'c'd' ... and which exceeds by unity a multiple * Bachet, problem vi, p. 84 : Bachet added, on p. 87, a note on the previous history of the problem. CH. l] ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS 7 of h', and similarly find analogous numbers C\ D, Rules for the calculation of A, B, G,... are given in the theory of numbers, but in general, if the numbers a', h' , c\ ... are small, the corresponding numbers A, J5, C, ... can be found by in- spection. I proceed to show that n is equal to the remainder when Aa -\- Bh -\- Gc ■\- . . . is divided by p. Let N = Aa + 56 + (7c + ..., and let M {x) stand for a multiple of x. Now A = M{a')-\-l, therefore Aa = M {a') -\- a. Hence, if the first term in N, that is Aa, is divided by a, the remainder is a. Again, 5 is a multiple of ac'd' Therefore Bh is exactly divisible by a Similarly Gc, Dd,... are each exactly divisible by a\ Thus every term in N, except the first, is exactly divisible by a'. Hence, if N is divided by a', the remainder is a. Also if n is divided by a\ the remainder is a. Therefore N-7i = M{a). Similarly N~n = M(b'), N-n = M{c'\ But a\ b\ c', ... are prime to one another. .-. N-n = M(a'b'c\..) = M(p), that is, N=M{jp) + n. Now n is less than p, hence if N is divided by p, the remainder is n. The rule given by Bachet corresponds to the case of a' = 3, y = 4, c'=5, p = 60, ^ = 40, 5 = 45, 0=36. If the number chosen is less than 420, we may take a' = 3, 6' = 4, c' = b., d' = 1 , p = 420, il = 280, 5 = 105, (7=336, i) = 120. To FIND THE RESULT OF A SERIES OF OPERATIONS PER- FORMED ON ANY NUMBER {unknown to the operator) without ASKING ANY QUESTIONS. All rules for solving such problems ultimately depend on so arranging the operations that the number disappears from the final result. Four examples will suffice. First Example*. Request some one to think of a number. Suppose it to be n. Ask him (i) to multiply it by any number you please, say, a; (ii) then to add, say, 6; (iii) then to divide * Bachet, problem viii, p. 102. 8 ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS [CH. I the sum by, say, c. (iv) Next, tell him to take ajc of the number originally chosen; and (v) to subtract this from the result of the third operation. The result of the first three operations is {na + 6)/c, and the result of operation (iv) is najc : the difference between these is hjc, and therefore is known to you. For example, if a = 6, 6 = 12, c = 4, then ajc = \\, and the final result is 3. Second Example*. Ask A to take any number of counters that he pleases : suppose that he takes n counters, (i) Ask some one else, say B, to take p times as many, where p is any number you like to choose, (ii) Request A to give q of his counters to B, where q is any number you like to select, (iii) Next, ask B to transfer to ^ a number of counters equal to p times as many counters as A has in his possession. Then there will remain in B's hands q{p-\-^) counters: this number is known to you ; and the trick can be finished either by mentioning it or in any other way you like. The reason is as follows. The result of operation (ii) is that B has pn + q counters, and A has n — g counters. The result of (iii) is that B transfers p{n — q) counters to A : hence he has left in his possession {pn + q)~- p(n — q) counters, that is, he has q(p-^l). For example, if originally A took any number of counters, then (if you chose p equal to 2), first you would ask B to take twice as many counters as A had done ; next (if you chose q equal to 3) you would ask A to give 3 counters to B; and then you would ask B to give to A a, number of counters equal to twice the number then in A's possession ; after this was done you would know that B had 3(2 + 1), that is, 9 left. This trick (as also some of the following problems) may be performed equally well with one person, in which case A may stand for his right hand and B for his left hand. Third Example. Ask some one to perform in succession the following operations, (i) Take any number of three digits, in which the difference between the first and last digits exceeds unity, (ii) Form a new number by reversing the order of * Bachet, problem xiii, p. 123 : Bachet presented the above trick in a form, somewhat more general, but less effective in practice. CH. l] ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS 9 the digits, (iii) Find the difference of these two numbers, (iv) Form another number by reversing the order of the digits in this difference, (v) Add together the results of (iii) and (iv). Then the sum obtained as the result of this last operation will be 1089. An illustration and the explanation of the rule are given below. (i) 237 100a + 106 + c (ii) 732 100c + 106 + g (iii) 495 lOO(a-c-l) + 90 + (10 + c-a) (iv) _594 100(10 + c-a)+ 90 + (a-c-l) (v) 1089 900 +180 + 9 The result depends only on the radix of the scale of notation in which the number is expressed. If this radix is r, the result is (r - 1) (r + 1)=^ ; thus if r = 10, the result is 9 x 11^, that is, 1089. Fourth Example*, The following trick depends on the same principle. Ask some one to perform in succession the following operations, (i) To write down any sum of money less than £12, in which the difference between the number of pounds and the number of pence exceeds unity, (ii) To reverse this sum, that is, to write down a sum of money ob- tained from it by interchanging the numbers of pounds and pence, (iii) To find the difference between the results of (i) and (ii). (iv) To reverse this difference, (v) To add to- gether the results of (iii) and (iv). Then this sum will be £12. 185. lid For instance, take the sum £10. 17^. od.', we have £ s. d. (i) 10 17 5 (ii) 5 17 10 (iii) 4 19 7 (iv) 7 19 4 (v) 12 18 11 « Educational Times Reprints, 1890, vol. i.iii, p. 78. 10 ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS [CH. T The following analysis explains the rule, and shows that the final result is independent of the sum written down initially. £ s. d. (i) a h c (ii) c h a (iii) a-c- 1 19 c-a + 12 (iv) c-a + 12 19 a-c- 1 (v) 11 38 11 Mr J. H. Schooling has used this result as the foundation of a slight but excellent conjuring trick. The rule can be generalized to cover any system of monetary units. Problems involving Two Numbers. I proceed next to give a couple of examples of a class of problems which involve two numbers. First Example'^. Suppose that there are two numbers, one even and the other odd, and that a person A is asked to select one of them, and that another person B takes the other. It is desired to know whether A selected the even or the odd number. Ask A to multiply his number by 2, or any even number, and B to multiply his by 3, or any odd number. Request them to add the two products together and tell you the sum. If it is even, then originally A selected the odd number, but if it is odd, then originally A selected the even number. The reason is obvious. Second Example^. The above rule was extended by Bachet to any two numbers, provided they are prime to one another and one of them is not itself a prime. Let the numbers be m and n, and suppose that n is exactly divisible by p. Ask A to select one of these numbers, and B to take the other. Choose a number prime to p, say q. Ask A to multiply his number by q, and B to multiply his number by ^. Request them to add the products together and state the sum. Then A originally selected m or n, according as this result is not or is divisible byp. The numbers, m = 7, n = 15, _p = 3, ^^ = 2, will illustrate the rest. Problems depending on the Scale of Notation. Many of the rules for finding two or more numbers depend on the * Bachet, problem ix, p. 107. + Bachet, problem xi, p. 113. CH. l] ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS 11 fact that in arithmetic an integral number is denoted by a succession of digits, where each digit represents the product of that digit and a power of ten, and the number is equal to the sum of these products. For example, 2017 signifies (2 X lO") + (0 X 10^) + (1 X 10) + 7 ; that is, the 2 represents 2 thousands, i.e. the product of 2 and 10^ the represents hundreds, i.e. the product of and 10^; the 1 represents 1 ten, i.e. the product of 1 and 10, and the 7 represents 7 units. Thus every digit has a local value. The application to tricks connected with numbers will be understood readily from three illustrative examples. First Example*. A common conjuring trick is to ask a boy among the audience to throw two dice, or to select at random from a box a domino on each half of which is a number. The boy is then told to recollect the two numbers thus obtained, to choose either of them, to multiply it by 5, to add 7 to the result, to double this result, and lastly to add to this the other number. From the number thus obtained, the conjurer sub- tracts 14, and obtains a number of two digits which are the two numbers chosen originally. For suppose that the boy selected the numbers a and h. Each of these is less than ten — dice or dominoes ensuring this. The successive operations give (i) ^a] (ii) 5a 4- 7; (iii) 10a + 14; (iv) 10(1 + 14 + 6. Hence, if 14 is subtracted from the final result, there will be left a number of two digits, and these digits are the numbers selected originally. An analogous trick might be performed in other scales of notation if it was thought necessary to disguise the process further. Second Example^. Similarly, if three numbers, say, a, h, c, are chosen, then, if each of them is less than ten, they can be * Some similar questions were given by Bachet in problem xii, p. 117 ; by Oughtred or Leake in the Mathematicall Recreations, commonly attributed to the former, London, 1653, problem xxxiv; and by Ozanam, part i, chapter x. Probably the Mathematicall Recreations were compiled by Leake, but as the work is usually catalogued under the name of W. Oughtred, I shall so describe it: it is founded on the similar work by J. Leurechon, otherwise known as n. van Etten, published in 1G26. t Bachet gave some similar (Questions in problem xii, p. 117. 12 ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS [CH. I found by the following rule, (i) Take one of the numbers, say, a, and multiply it by 2. (ii) Add 3 to the product, (iii) Multiply this by 5, and add 7 to the product, (iv) To this sum add the second number, b. (v) Multiply the result by 2. (vi) Add 3 to the product, (vii) Multiply by 5, and, to the product, add the third number, c. The result is 100a + 106 + c + 235. Hence, if the final result is known, it is sufficient to subtract 235 from it, and the remainder will be a number of three digits. These digits are the numbers chosen originally. Third Example*. The following rule for finding the age of a man born in the 19th century is of the same kind. Take the tens digit of the year of birth ; (i) multiply it by 5 ; (ii) to the product add 2 ; (iii) multiply the result by 2 ; (iv) to this product add the units digit of the birth-year ; (v) subtract the sum from 120. The result is the man's age in 1916. The algebraic proof of the rule is obvious. Let a and b be the tens and units digits of the birth-year. The successive opera- tions give (i) 5a; (ii) 5a + 2; (iii) lOci + 4; (iv) 10a + 4 + 6; (v) 120- (10a + 6), which is his age in 1916. The rule can be easily adapted to give the age in any specified year. Fourth Example^. Another such problem but of more difficulty is the determination of all numbers which are in- tegral multiples of their reversals. For instance, among numbers of four digits, 8712 = 4 x 2178 and 9801 = 9 x 1089 possess this property. Other Problems with numbers in the denary scale. I may mention here two or three other problems which seem to be unknown to most compilers of books of puzzles. First Problem. The first of them is as follows. Take any number of three digits : reverse the order of the digits : sub- tract the number so formed from the original number : then, if the last digit of the difference is mentioned, all the digits in the difference are known. * A similar question was given by Laisant and Perrin in their Algebre, Paris, 1892; and in L' Illustration for July 13, 1895. t L'lntermediaire des Matheinaticiens , Paris, voL xv, 1908, pp. 228, 278; vol. XVI, 1909, p. 34; vol. xix, 1912, p. 128. CH. l] ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS 13 For suppose the number is 100a + 106 + c, that is, let a be the hundreds digit of the number chosen, h be the tens digit, and c be the units digit. The number obtained by reversing the digits is 100c 4- 106 + a. The difference of these numbers is equal to (100a + c) - (100c + a), that is, to 99 (a - c). But a - c is not greater than 9, and therefore the remainder can only be 99, 198, 297, 396, 495, 594, 693, 792, or 891— in each case the middle digit being 9 and the digit before it (if any) being equal to the difference between 9 and the last digit. Hence, if the last digit is known, so is the whole of the remainder. Second Problem. The second problem is somewhat similar and is as follows, (i) Take any number ; (ii) reverse the digits ; (iii) find the difference between the number formed in (ii) and the given number; (iv) multiply this difference by any number you like to name; (v) cross out any digit except a nought; (vi) read the remainder. Then the sum of the digits in the remainder subtracted from the next highest multiple of nine will give the figure struck out. This is clear since the result of operation (iv) is a multiple of nine, and it is known that the sum of the digits of every multiple of nine is itself a multiple of nine. Empirical Problems. There are also numerous empirical problems, such as the following. With the ten digits, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0, express numbers whose sum is unity : each digit being used only once, and the use of the usual notations for fractions being allowed. With the same ten digits express numbers whose sum is 100. With the nine digits, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, express four numbers whose sum is 100. To the making of such questions there is no limit, but their solution involves little or no mathematical skill. Four Digits Problem. I suggest the following problem as being more interesting. With the digits 1, 2, ... w, express the consecutive numbers from 1 upwards as far as possible, say to p : four and only four digits, all different, being used in each number, and the notation of the denary scale (including decimals), as also algebraic sums, products, and positive integral powers, being allowed. If the use of the symbols 14 ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS [CH. I for square roots and factorials (repeated if desired a finite number of times) is also permitted, the range can be ex- tended considerably, say to q consecutive integers. If w = 4, I make jp = 88, (? = 264 ; if n = 5, _p = 231, ^ = 790 ; with the four digits 0, 1, 2, 3, ^^ = 36, q — 40. The problem is not easy, and these limits may be too low. Four Fours Problem. Another traditional recreation is, with the ordinary arithmetic and algebraic notation, to express the consecutive numbers as far as possible in terms of four " 4's." Everything turns on what we mean by ordinary notation. I take it that this allows the use of the denary scale {ex. gr. numbers like 44) and decimals ; the symbols for factorials and square roots (repeated if desired a finite number of times) ; and the symbols for addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, and brackets; but I consider that indices (other than first powers), not expressible by a " 4 " or " 4's," and roots (other than square roots) are excluded ; and that though a number like 2 can be expressed by one " 4," numbers like "2 and 22 are inadmissible. On these assumptions we can express every number up to and including 112. If we also allow the use of subfactorials * we can thus express every number up to and including 87 7 f. The similar problems of the expression by four"9's" in ordinary notation up to 132, and by four"3's," with the use of subfactorials, up to 153, present no difficulty. Problems with a series of things which are numbered. Any collection of things which can be distinguished one from the other — especially if numbered consecutively — afford easy concrete illustrations of questions depending on these ele- mentary properties of numbers. As examples I proceed to enumerate a few familiar tricks. The first two of these are commonly shown by the use of a watch, the last four may be exemplified by the use of a pack of playing cards. I present them in these forms. * Subf actorial n is written n| or n j and is equal to n\ (l-l/l! + l/2!-l/3! + ...±l/n!). + For the method used to obtain these results and extensions of them, see the Mathematical Gazette, May, 1912. CH. l] AKITHMETKJAL RECREATIONS 15 First Example*. The first of these examples is connected with the hours marked on the face of a watch. In this puzzle some one is asked to think of some hour, say, w, and then to touch a number that marks another hour, say, n. Then if, beginning with the number touched, he taps each successive hour marked on the face of the watch, going in the opposite direction to that in which the hands of the watch move, and reckoning to himself the taps as m, {m + 1 ), &c., the (7i + 12)th tap will be on the hour he thought of For example, if he thinks of v and touches ix, then, if he taps successively IX, Viii, VII, Vi, ..., going backwards and reckoning them respectively as 5, 6, 7, 8, . . . , the tap which he reckons as 21 will be on the v. The reason of the rule is obvious, for he arrives finally at the (n + 12 — m)th hour from w^hich he started. Now, since he goes in the opposite direction to that in which the hands of the watch move, he has to go over {n — m) hours to reach the hour m : also it will make no difierence if in addition he goes over 12 hours, since the only effect of this is to take him once completely round the circle. Now (ti + 12 — m) is always positive, since n is positive and m is not greater than 12, and therefore if we make him pass over (?^+ 12 — m) hours we can give the rule in a form which is equally valid whether m is greater or less than n. Second Example. The follow*ing is another well-kno^vn watch-dial problem. If the hours on the face are tapped suc- cessively, beginning at vii and proceeding backwards round the dial to VI, V, &c., and if the person who selected the number counts the taps, beginning to count from the number of the hour selected (thus, if he selected x, he would reckon the first tap as the 11th), then the 20th tap as reckoned by him will be on the hour chosen. For suppose he selected the ?ith hour. Then the 8th tap is on XII and is reckoned by him as the {n -\- 8)th ; and the tap * Bachet, problem xx, p. 155; Ougbtied or Leake, Mathematkall Rccrea- tiovs, London, 1653, p. 28. 16 ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS [CH. I which he reckons as (n + p)th. is on the hour (20 — p). Hence, putting p = 20 — n, the tap which he reckons as 20th is on the hour n. Of course the hours indicated by the first seven taps are immaterial : obviously also we can modify the presentation by beginning on the hour viii and making 21 consecutive taps, or on the hour ix and making 22 consecutive taps, and so on. Third Example. The following is another simple example. Suppose that a pack of n cards is given to some one who is asked to select one out of the first m cards and to remember (but not to mention) what is its number from the top of the pack ; suppose it is actually the icth card in the pack. Then take the pack, reverse the order of the top m cards (which can be easily effected by shuffling), and transfer y cards, where y<n — m, firom the bottom to the top of the pack. The effect of this is that the card originally chosen is now the (y •{• m — x + l)th. from the top. Return to the spectator the pack so rearranged, and ask that the top card be counted as the (x-\- l)th, the next as the (x + 2)th, and so on, in which case the card originally chosen will be the (y + m + l)th. Now y and m can be chosen as we please, and may be varied every time the trick is per- formed ; thus any one unskilled in arithmetic will not readily detect the method used. Fourth Example*. Place a card on the table, and on it place as many other cards from the pack as with the number of pips on the card will make a total of twelve. For example, if the card placed first on the table is the five of clubs, then seven additional cards must be placed on it. The court cards may have any values assigned to them, but usually they are reckoned as tens. This is done again with another card, and thus another pile is formed. The operation may be repeated either only three or four times or as often as the pack will permit of such piles being formed. If finally there are p such piles, and if the number of cards left over is r, then the sum of the number of pips on the bottom cards of all the piles will be 13 ( p - 4) + r. For, if a? is the number of pips on the bottom card of a pile, * A particular case of this problem was given by Bachet, problem xvn, p. 138. CH. l] ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS 17 the number of cards in that pile will be 13 — a?. A similar argument holds for each pile. Also there are 52 cards in the pack ; and this must be equal to the sum of the cards in the p piles and the r cards left over. .-. (13-^,) + (13-a'.3)+... + (13-^p) + r = 52, .*. ISp — (x^-{-Xo-\- ... -\- Xp) + ?' = 52, ,\ {Ci-\-a;o+ ... +Xp = ISp — 52 + r = 13(j^-4) + r. More generally, if a pack of n cards is taken, and if in each pile the sum of the pips on the bottom card and the number of cards put on it is equal to m, then the sum of the pips on the bottom cards of the piles will be {m + l)p + r — n. In an ecarte pack 71= 32, and it is convenient to take m= 15. Fifth Example. It may be noticed that cutting a pack of cards never alters the relative position of the cards provided that, if necessary, we regard the top card as following im- mediately after the bottom card in the pack. This is used in the following trick*. Take a pack, and deal the cards face upwards on the table, calling them one, two, three, &c. as you put them down, and noting in your own mind the card first dealt. Ask some one to select a card and recollect its number. Turn the pack over, and let it be cut (not shuffled) as often as you like. Enquire what was the number of the card chosen. Then, if you deal, and as soon as you come to the original first card begin (silently) to count, reckoning this as one, the selected card will appear at the number mentioned. Of course, if all the cards are dealt before reaching this number, you must turn the cards over and go on counting continuously. Sixth Example. Here is another simple question of this class. Remove the court cards from a pack. Arrange the remaining 40 cards, faces upwards, in suits, in four lines thus. In the first line, the 1, 2, ... 10, of suit ^; in the second line, the 10, 1, 2, ... 9, of suit B; in the third line, the 9, 10, 1, ... 8, of suit C; in the last line, the 8, 9, 10, 1, ... 7, of suit D. Next take up, face upwards, the first card of line 1, put below it the ♦ Bachet, problem xix, p. 152. B. R. 2 18 ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS [CH. I first card of line 2, below that the first card of line 3, and below that the first card of line 4. Turn this pile face downwards. Next take up the four cards in the second column in the same way, turn them face downwards, and put them below the first pile. Continue this process until all the cards are taken up. Ask someone to mention any card. Suppose the number of pips on it is n. Then if the suit is A, it will be the 4nth card in the pack ; if the suit is B, it will be the (4?i + 3)th card ; if the suit is C, it will be the (4?i + 6)th card ; and if the suit is D, it will be the {4m + 9)th card. Hence by counting the cards, cyclically if necessary, the card desired can be picked out. It is easy to alter the form of presentation, and a full pack can be used if desired. The explanation is obvious. Medieval Problems in Arithmetic. Before leaving the subject of these eleaientary questions, I may mention a few problems which for centuries have appeared in nearly every collection of mathematical recreations, and therefore may claim what is almost a prescriptive right to a place here. Fii'st Example. The following is a sample of one class of these puzzles. A man goes to a tub of water with two jars, of which one holds exactly 3 pints and the other 5 pints. How can he bring back exactly 4 pints of water ? The solution presents no difficulty. Second Example*. Here is another problem of the same kind. Three men robbed a gentleman of a vase, containing 24 ounces of balsam. Whilst running away they met a glass-seller, of whom they purchased three vessels. On reaching a place of safety they wished to divide the booty, but found that their vessels contained 5, 11, and 13 ounces respectively. How could they divide the balsam into equal portions ? Problems like this can be worked out only by trial. Third Example f. The next of these is a not uncommon * Some similar problems were given by Bachet, Appendix, problem in, p. 206; problem ix, p. 233: by Oughtred or Leake in the Mathematicall Recreations, p. 22: and by Ozanam, 1803 edition, vol. i, p. 174; 1840 edition, p. 79. Earlier instances occur in Tartaglia's writings. + Bachet, problem xxii, p. 170. CH. l] ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS 19 game, played by two people, say A and B. A begins by mentioning some number not greater than (say) six, B may add to that any number not greater than six, A may add to that again any number not greater than six, and so on. He wins who is the first to reach (say) 50. Obviously, if A calls 43, then whatever B adds to that, A can win next time. Similarly, if A calls 36, B cannot prevent A's calling 43 the next time. In this way it is clear that the key numbers are those forming the arithmetical progression 43, 36, 29, 22, 15, 8, 1 ; and whoever plays first ought to win. Similarly, if no number greater than m may be added at any one time, and n is the number to be called by the victor, then the key numbers will be those forming the arithmetical pro- gression whose common difference is m + 1 and whose smallest term is the remainder obtained by dividing n by m + 1. The same game may be played in another form by placing p coins, matches, or other objects on a table, and directing each player in turn to take away not more than m of them. Who- ever takes away the last coin wins. Obviously the key numbers are multiples of m + 1, and the first player who is able to leave an exact multiple of (m + 1) coins can win. Perhaps a better form of the game is to make that player lose who takes away the last coin, in which case each of the key numbers exceeds by unity a multiple of m + 1. Another variety* consists in placing p counters in the form of a circle, and allowing each player in succession to take away not more than m of them which are in unbroken sequence : m being less than p and greater than unity. In this case the second of the two players can always win. These games are simple, but if we impose on the original problem the restriction that each player may not add the same number more than (saj-) three times, the analysis becomes by no means easy. I have never seen this ex- tension described in print, and I will enunciate it at length. Suppose that each player is given eighteen cards, three of them marked 6, three marked 5, three marked 4, three * S. Loyd, Tit-Bits, London, July 17, Aug. 7, 1897. 2—2 20 ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS [CH. I marked 3, three marked 2, and three marked 1. They play alternately ; A begins by playing one of his cards ; then B plays one of his, and so on. He wins who first plays a card which makes the sum of the points or numbers on all the cards played exactly equal to 50, but he loses if he plays a card which makes this sum exceed 50. The game can be played by noting the numbers on a piece of paper, and it is not necessary to use cards. Thus suppose they play as follows. A takes a 4, and scores 4; B takes a 3, and scores 7; A takes a 1, and scores 8; B takes a 6, and scores 14; ^ takes a 3, and scores 17 ; jB takes a 4, and scores 21 ; ^ takes a 4, and scores 25; B takes a 5, and scores 30 ; A takes a 4, and scores 34 ; B takes a 4, and scores 38 ; A takes a 5, and scores 43. B can now win, for he may safely play 3, since A has not another 4 wherewith to follow it; and if A plays less than 4, B will win the next time. Again, suppose they play thus. A, 6; B, S; A, 1; B, Q; A, S; B, 4>; A, 2; B,5;A,1;B,5;A,2;B,5;A,2;B,S, ^ is now forced to play 1, and B wins by playing 1. A slightly different form of the game has also been sug- gested. In this there are put on the table an agreed number of cards, say, for example, the four aces, twos, threes, fours, fives, and sixes of a pack of cards — twenty-four cards in all. Each player in turn takes a card. The score at any time is the sum of the pips on all the cards taken, whether by A or B. He wins who first selects a card which makes the score equal, say, to 50, and a player who is forced to go beyond 50 loses. Thus, suppose they play as follows. A takes a 6, and scores 6; B takes a 2, and scores 8; A takes a 5, and scores 13; B takes a 2, and scores 15; A takes a 5, and scores 20; B takes a 2, and scores 22; A takes a 5, and scores 27 ; jB takes a 2, and scores 29 ; A takes a 5, and scores 34 ; B takes a 6, and scores 40 ; A takes a 1, and scores 41 ; B takes a 4, and scores 45 ; A takes a 3, and scores 48 ; B now must take 1, and thus score 49 ; and A takes a 1, and wins. In these variations the object of each player is to get to one of the key numbers, provided there are sufficient available CH. l] ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS 21 remaining numbers to let him retain the possession of each subsequent key number. The number of cards used, the points on them, and the number to be reached can be changed at will ; and the higher the number to be reached, the more difficult it is to forecast the result and to say whether or not it is an advantage to begin. Fourth Example. Here is another problem, more difficult and less well known. Suppose that m counters are divided into ?i heaps. Two players play alternately. Each, when his turn comes, may select any one heap he likes, and remove from it all the counters in it or as many of them as he pleases. That player loses who has to take up the last counter. To solve it we may proceed thus*. Suppose there are a^ counters in the rth heap. Express a^ in the binary scale, and denote the coefficient of 2^ in it by drp. Do this for each heap, and let 8p be the sum of the coefficients of 2^ thus determined. Thus Sp = dip + d^p + cl^p-^ ..., Then either Sq, Sx,S^,... are all even, which we may term an A arrangement, or they are not all even, which we may term a B arrangement. It will be easily seen that if one player, P, has played so as to get the counters in any A arrangement (except that of an even number of heaps each containing one counter), he can force a win. For the next move of his opponent, Q, must bring the counters to a 5 arrangement. Then P can make the next move to bring the counters again to an A arrangement, other than the exceptional one of an even number of heaps each con- taining only one counter. Finally this will leave P a winning position, ex. gr. two heaps each containing 2 counters. If that player wins who takes the last counter, the rule is easier. For if one player P has played so as to get the counters in any B arrangement, he can force a win, since the next move of his opponent Q must bring the counters to an A arrangement. Then P can make the next move to bring the counters again to a B arrangement. Finally this will leave P a winning position. Fifth Exajiiple. The following medieval problem is some- what more elaborate. Suppose that three people, P, y, R, * From a letter to me by Mr R. K. Morcom, August 2, 1910. 22 ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS [CH. I select three things, which we may denote by a, e, i respec- tively, and that it is desired to find by whom each object was selected*. Place 24 counters on a table. Ask P to take one counter, Q to take two counters, and R to take three counters. Next, ask the person who selected a to take as many counters as he has already, whoever selected e to take twice as many counters as he has already, and whoever selected i to take four times as many counters as he has already. Note how many counters remain on the table. There are only six ways of distributing the three things among P, Q, and R ; and the number of counters remaining on the table is different for each way. The remainders may be 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, or 7. Bachet summed up the results in the mnemonic line Par fer (1) Cesar (2) jadis (3) devint (5) si grand (6) prince (7). Corresponding to any remainder is a word or words containing two syllables : for instance, to the remainder 5 corresponds the word devint. The vowel in the first syllable indicates the thing selected by P, the vowel in the second syllable indicates the thing selected by Q, and of course R selected the remaining thing. Extension. M. Bourlet, in the course of a very kindly notice f of the second edition of this work, gave a much neater solution of the above question, and has extended the problem to the case of n people, Po, Pj, Pg, ..., Pn-i, each of whom selects one object, out of a collection of n objects, such as dominoes or cards. It is required to know which domino or card was selected by each person. Let us suppose the dominoes to be denoted or marked by the numbers 0, 1, ..., n — 1, instead of by vowels. Give one counter to Pj, two counters to Pg, and generally k counters to Pji. Note the number of counters left on the table. Next ask the person who had chosen the domino to take as many counters as he had already, and generally whoever had chosen the domino h to take n^ times as many dominoes as he had already: thus if P^ had chosen the domino numbered h, * Bachet, problem xxv, p. 187. t Bulletin dcs Sciences Matliematiques, Paris, 1893, vol. xvii, pp. 105 — 107. CII. l] ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS 23 he would take n^k counters. The total number of counters taken is '^n^k. Divide this by n, then the remainder will be the number on the domino selected by Pq ; divide the quotient by ??, and the remainder will be the number on the domino selected by Pi ; divide this quotient by n, and the remainder will be the number on the domino selected by P^ ; and so on. In other words, if the number of counters taken is expressed in the scale of notation whose radix is n, then the {h-\- l)th digit from the right will give the number on the domino selected byP/^. Thus in Bachet's problem with 3 people and 3 dominoes, we should first give one counter to Q, and two counters to P, while P would have no counters ; then we should ask the person who had selected the domino marked or a to take as many counters as he had already, whoever had selected the domino marked 1 or e to take three times as many counters as he had already, and whoever had selected the domino marked 2 or i to take nine times as many counters as he had already. By noticing the original number of counters, and observing that 3 of these had been given to Q and P, we should know the total number taken by P, Q, and P. If this number were divided by 3, the remainder would be the number of the domino chosen by P ; if the quotient were divided by 3 the re- mainder would be the number of the domino chosen by Q; and the final quotient would be the number of the domino chosen by P. Eojj^loration Problems. Another common question is con- cerned with the maximum distance into a desert which could be reached from a frontier settlement by the aid of a party of n explorers, each capable of carrying provisions that would last one man for a days. The answer is that the man who reaches the greatest distance will occupy nal{n + 1) days before he returns to his starting point. If in the course of their journey they may make depots, the longest possible journey will occupy ^ a (1 + i + J + . . . + Ijn ) days. TJie Josephiis Problem. Another of these antique problems consists in placing men round a circle so that if every mth man is killed, the remainder shall be certain specified individuals. Such problems can be ea«ily tsolvcd ompiricaliy. 24 ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS [CH. I Hegesippus* says that Josephus saved his life by such a device. According to his account, after the Romans had captured Jotapat, Josephus and forty other Jews took refuge in a cave. Josephus, much to his disgust, found that all except himself and one other man were resolved to kill them- selves, so as not to fall into the hands of their conquerors. Fearing to show his opposition too openly he consented, but declared that the operation must be carried out in an orderly way, and suggested that they should arrange themselves round a circle and that every third person should be killed until but one man was left, who must then commit suicide. It is alleged that he placed himself and the other man in the 31st and 16th place respectively. The medieval question was usually presented in the following form. A ship, carrying as passengers 15 Turks and 15 Christians, encountered a storm, and, in order to save the ship and crew, one-half of the passengers had to be thrown into the sea. Accordingly the passengers were placed in a circle, and every ninth man, reckoning from a certain point, was cast overboard. It is desired to find an arrangement by which all the Christians should be saved "f*. In this case we must arrange the men thus : GGGGTTTTTGCTGGGTCTTGGTTTGTTGGT, where G stands for a Christian and T for a Turk. The order can be recollected by the positions of the vowels in the follow- ing line : From numbers aid and art, never will fame depart, where a stands for l,e for 2, i for 3, o for 4, and u for 5. Hence the order is o Christians, u Turks, &c. If every tenth man were cast overboard, a similar mnemonic line is Rex paphi cum gente bona dat signa serena. An oriental setting of this decimation problem runs somewhat as follows. Once upon a time, there lived a rich farmer who had 30 children, 15 by his first wife who was dead, and 15 by his second wife. The latter woman was eager that her eldest son should inherit the property. Accordingly one dny she said to him, " Dear Husband, * De Bello Judaico, bk. in, chaps. 16 — 18. t Bachet, problem xxiii, p, 174. The same problem had been previously enunciated by Tavtaglia. CH. l] ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS 25 you are getting old. We ought to settle who shall be your heir. Let us arrange our 30 children in a circle, and counting from one of them remove every tenth child until there remains but one, who shall succeed to your estate." The proposal seemed reasonable. As the process of selection went on, the farmer grew more and more astonished as he noticed that the first 14 to disappear were children by his first ^vife, and he ob- served that the next to go would be the last remaining member of that family. So he suggested that they should see what would happen if they began to count backwards from this lad. She, forced to make an immediate decision, and reflecting that the odds were now 15 to 1 in favour of her family, readily assented. Who became the heir ? In the general case n men are arranged in a circle which is closed up as individuals are picked out. Beginning anywhere, we continually go round, picking out each mth man until only r are left. Let one of these be the man who originally occu- pied the pth place. Then had we begun with n+1 men, he would have originally occupied the (p-f-m)th place when p-{-m is not greater than n+1, and the (p + m. — n — l)th. place when p + m is greater than n + 1. Thus, provided there are to be r men left, their original positions are each shifted forwards along the circle ?n places for each addition of a single man to the original group*. Now suppose that with n men the last survivor (r = 1) occupied originally the p\h place, and that with {n-\-x) men the last survivor occupied the yih. place. Then, if we confine ourselves to the lowest value of x which makes y less than m, we have y=(p-\- mx) —(n + x). Based on this theorem we can, for any specified value of n, calculate rapidly the position occupied by the last survivor of the company. In effect, Tait found the values of n for which a man occupying a given position p, which is less than m, would be the last survivor, and then by repeated applications of the proposition, obtained the position of the survivor for intermediate values of n. * P. G. Tait, Collected Scientljic Fa^en, Cambridge, vol. n. 1900, pp. 432—435. 2g ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS [CH. I For instance, take the Josephus V^o^^^.t ^ToZv^d ThPn we know that the final survivor of 41 men o<=cupiea Then we know ^^_^^ ^^^^ ^^^^^ ^^ T^^en :7:7Z th t.^vor oL'upied originally the .th place. ite:lr;onsider only the --J^ ^tl^I ^^^^^^^^^^^ , less than «' /^ ^^^X/^/f^tiJ^ X , ^sitive and Now, we have to take a value ot x w ii ^ r " = \^.;Sr;S 349956 52i934, or 787401; and the 69127 If 5536 233304^ 3 14 21 47, 158, 237, 533, 1199, 4046, second place when »- J'f'^*' t'' ' nn65S. From these cAflQ i^fi'i'5 46085, 103691, 1181 lO^.or ill iujt'- ... lXhr.;pe-dapplicat.ns^^^ any intermediate values of « ^^^ P"— f,^ go^lth place ; by the man last taken. JJ^^ ^'^fj" ^^^ ^ ^h 1000000 men, with 100000 men, the 92620th place ana .V, R'^TTQSth Dlace are those which would be seleccea oy the 637798tn puce aie „„hiected to tnmation. bimiiaiiy <* originally m the 26th !='=,'^ « ?.t?° «? C« r- ,tt;'"^ CH. l] ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS 27 every Kh man is selected, all the Christians will be picked out for punishment. The problem is to find a, 6, h, and k. I suggest as a similar problem, to find an arrangement of c Turks and c Christians arranged in a circle, so that if beginning at a particular man, say the first, every hth. man is selected, all the Turks will be picked out, but if, beginning at the same man, every A;th man is selected, all the Christians will be picked out. This makes an interesting question because it is conceivable that the operator who picked out the victims might get confused and take h instead of h, or vice versa, and so consign all his iriends to execution instead of those whom he had intended to pick out. The problem is, for any given value of c, to find an arrangement of the men and the corresponding suitable values of h and h. Obviously if c = 2, then for an arrangement like T C G T Si solution is A = 4, A; = 3. If c = 3, then for an arrange- ment like TO TOOT a solution is /t = 7, A; = 8. If c = 4, then for an arrangement like T G T T G T G C a solution is h = 9, A; = 5 ; and so on. Is it possible to give similar arrangements for higher numbers ? ADDENDUM. Note. Page 13. Solutions of the ten digit problems are 35/70 + 148/296 = 1, or -01234 + -98765 = 1; and 50 + 49 + 1/2 + 38/76 = 100. A solution of the nine digit problem is 1-234 + 98-765=100, or 97 + 8/12 + 4/6 + 5/3 = 100; but if an algebraic sum is permissible a neater solution is 123-45-67 + 89 = 100, where the digits occur in their natural order. Note. Page 18. There are several solutions of the division of 24 ounces under the conditions specified. One of these solutions is as follows: The vessels can contain 24 oz. 13 oz. 11 oz. 5 oz. Their contents originally are... 24... 0... 0... 0... First, make their contents 0... 8... 11... 5... Second, make their contents ... 16... 8... 0... 0... Third, make their contents ... 16 ... ... 8 ... ... Fourth, make their contents ... 3 ... 13 ... 8 ... ... Fifth, make their contents 3 ... 8 ... 8 ... 5 ... Lastly, make their contents ... 8... 8... 8... 0... Note. Pages 26 — 27. The simplpst solution of the five Christians and five Turks problem isa=l, /i = ll, 6 = 9, A = 29. 28 CHAPTER 11. ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS CONTINUED. I devote this chapter to the description of some arithmetical fallacies, a few additional problems, and notes on one or two problems in higher arithmetic. Arithmetical fallacies. I begin by mentioning some instances of demonstrations* leading to arithmetical results which are obviously impossible. I include algebraical proofs as well as arithmetical ones. Some of the fallacies are so patent that in preparing the first and second editions I did not think such questions worth printing, but, as some correspondents expressed a contrary o])inion, I give them for what they are worth. First Fallacy. One of the oldest of these — and not a very interesting specimen — is as follows. Suppose that a = 6, then ah = a\ .'. ah-¥ = a''- h\ .'. 6 (a - 6) = (a + b) (a - h). .'. b = a-\-b. .-. b = 2b. .*. 1 = 2. * Of the fallacies given in the text, the first and second are well known ; the third is not new, but the earliest work in which I recollect seeing it is my Algebra, Cambridge, 1890, p. 430; the fourth is given in G. Chrystal's Algebra, Edinburgh, 1839, vol. ii, p. 150 ; the sixth is due to G. T. Walker, and, I believe, has not appeared elsewhere than in this book ; the seventh is due to D'Alembert; and the eighth to F. Galton. It may be worth re- cording (i) that a mechanical demonstration that 1 = 2 was given by R. Chartres in Knowledge, July, 1891; and (ii) that J. L. F. Bertrand pointed out that a demonstration that 1== -1 can be obtained from the proposition in the Integral Calculus that, if the limits are constant, the order of integration is indifferent ; hence the integral to x (from x = to a; = l) of the integral to y (from y = Otoy — l)oia, function <p should be equal to the integral to y (from y = to y = l) of the integral to x (from x = to x = l) of (p, but if tp={x'^~ y^)l{x'^ + y")-, this gives lir= - \ir. CH. Il] ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS 29 Second Fallacy. Another example, the idea of which is due to John Bernoulli, may be stated as follows. Wc have (—1)'*= 1. Take logarithms, .-. 2 log(- 1) = log 1 = 0. .*. log (- 1) = 0. .-. -l=eo. .-. -1 = 1. The same argument may be expressed thus. Let a; be a quantity which satisfies the equation e*= — 1. Square both sides, • » 6/ • — ■ J. • • • ^*tf • — - yjm • • ^ — \Jm • . C/ — O • Bute^=-1 and e'=i, .'. -1 = 1. The error in each of the foregoing examples is obvious, but the fallacies in the next examples are concealed somewhat better. Third Fallacy. As yet another instance, we know that \og{l -\-oo) = x — ^x'^ + ^a:^— If a;= 1, the resulting series is convergent; hence we have log2 = l-i + i-i + i-i + |-i + i-.... .-. 21og2 = 2-l + f-i + |-J + |-i + f-.... Taking those terms together which have a common denominator, we obtain 21og2 = H-i-J+i + f-i+4... = i-i + i-i + i- = log 2. Hence 2 = 1. Fourth Fallacy. This fallacy is very similar to that last given. We have log2 = l-i+i-i + i-i + ... ={a+j+i+...)+(4+i+K--)i-2(i+j+H--) = 0. Fifth Fallacy. We have ^ax \/b = \/ab. Hence V- 1 x V- 1 = V(- 1) (- 1), therefore, (V^)- = S^T, that is, - 1 = 1. 80 ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS [CH. II Sixth Fallacy. The following demonstration depends on the fact that an algebraical identity is true whatever be the symbols used in it, and it will appeal only to those who are familiar with this fact. We have, as an identity, V« — y = i \/y — X (i), where % stands either for + V— 1 or for — V— 1. Now an identity in x and y is necessarily true whatever numbers x and y may represent. First put x — a and y = h, ,*. s/a — h^is/h — a (ii). Next put x=^h and y = a, .*. \/h — a = i^a — h (iii). Also since (i) is an identity, it follows that in (ii) and (iii) the symbol i must be the same, that is, it represents + V— 1 or — V— 1 in both cases. Hence, from (ii) and (iii), we have ^/a-h^/b — a = ^^^/b — a^/a — b, .•. 1 = i\ that is, 1 = — 1. Seventh Fallacy. The following fallacy is due to D'Alem- bert*. We know that if the product of two numbers is equal to the product of two other numbers, the numbers will be in proportion, and from the definition of a proportion it follows that if the first term is greater than the second, then the third term will be greater than the fourth : thus, if ad = be, then aib = c : d, and if in this proportion a>b, then c> d. Now if we put a = d = l and b = c= — l we have four numbers which satisfy the relation ad = be and such that a>b; hence, by the proposition, c> d, that is, — 1 > 1, which is absurd. Eighth Fallacy. The mathematical theory of probability leads to various paradoxes : of these one specimenf will suffice. Suppose three coins to be thrown up and the fact whether each comes down head or tail to be noticed. The probability that all three coins come down head is clearly (1/2)', that is, is 1/8 ; * Opuscules Mathematiques, Paris, 1761, vol. i, p. 201. + See Nature, Feb. 15, Marcli 1, 1894, vol. xlix, pp. 365—360, 413. CH. Il] ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS 31 similarly the probability that all three come down tail is 1/8 ; hence the probability that all the coins come down alike (i.e. either all of them heads or all of them tails) is 1/4. But, of three coins thus thrown up, at least two must come down alike : now the probability that the third coin comes down head is 1/2 and the probability that it comes down tail is 1/2, thus the probability that it comes down the same as the other two coins is 1/2 : hence the 'probability that all the coins come down alike is 1/2. I leave to my readers to say whether either of these conflicting conclusions is right, and, if so, which is correct. Arithmetical Problems. To the above examples I may add the following standard questions, or recreations. The first of these questions is as follows. Two clerks, A and B, are engaged, ^ at a salary commencing at the rate of (say) £100 a year with a rise of £20 every year, .B at a salary commencing at the same rate of £100 a year with a rise of £5 every half-year, in each case payments being made half-yearly ; which has the larger income ? The answer is B ; for in the first year A receives £100, but B receives £50 and £55 as his two half-yearly paj^ments and thus receives in all £105. In the second year A receives £120, but B receives £60 and £65 as his two half-yearly payments and thus receives in all £125. In fact B will always receive £5 a year more than A. Another simple arithmetical problem is as follows. A hymn- board in a church has four grooved rows on which the numbers of four hymns chosen for the service are placed. The hymn- book in use contains 700 hymns. What is the smallest number of single figured numerals which must be kept in stock so that the numbers of any four different hymns selected can be displayed ? How will the result be affected if an inverted 6 can be used for a 9 ? The answers are 86 and 81. As another question take the following. A man bets l/?ith of his money on an even chance (say tossing heads or tails with a penny): he repeats this again and again, each time betting 1/nth of all the money then in his possession. If, finally, the number of times he has won is equal to the number 32 ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS [CH. 11 of times he has lost, has he gained or lost by the transaction ? He has, in fact, lost. Here is another simple question to which not unfrequently I have received incorrect answers. One tumbler is half-full of wine, another is half-full of water : from the first tumbler a teaspoonful of wine is taken out and poured into the tumbler containing the water: a teaspoonful of the mixture in the second tumbler is then transferred to the first tumbler. As the result of this double transaction, is the quantity of wine removed from the first tumbler greater or less than the quantity of water removed from the second tumbler ? In my experience the majority of people will say it is greater, but this is not the case. Here is another paradox dependent on the mathematical theory of probability. Suppose that a player at bridge or whist asserts that an ace is included among the thirteen cards dealt to him, and let p be the probability that he has another ace among the other cards in his hand. Suppose, however, that he asserts that the ace of hearts is included in the thirteen cards dealt to him, then the probability, q, that he has another ace among the other cards in his hand is greater than was the probability p in the first case. For, if r is the probability that when he has one ace it is the ace of hearts, we have p = r .q^ and since p, q, r are proper fractions, we must have q greater than p, which at first sight appears to be absurd. Permutation Problems. Many of the problems in per- mutations and combinations are of considerable interest. As a simple illustration of the very large number of ways in which combinations of even a few things can be arranged, I may note that there are 500,291833 different ways in which change for a sovereign can be given in current coins*, including therein the obsolescent double-florin, and crown ; also that as many as 19,958400 distinct skeleton cubes can be formed with twelve differently coloured rods of equal length f; while there are no less than (52!)/(13!/, that is, 53644,737765,488792,839237,440000 * The Tribune, September 3. 1906. t Mathematical Tripos, Cambridge, Part I, 1894. CH. Il] ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS 33 possible diflPerent distributions of hands at bridge or whist with a pack of fifty-two cards. Voting Problems. As a simple example on combinations I take the cumulative vote as affecting the representation of a minority. If there are p electors each having r votes of which not more than 5 may be given to one candidate, and n men are to be elected, then the least number of supporters who can secure the election of a candidate must exceed pr/{ns + r). The Knights of the Bound Table. A far more difficult permutation problem consists in finding as many arrangements as possible of n people in a ring so that no one has the same two neighbours more than once. It is a well-known proposition that n persons can be arranged in a ring in (n— l)!/2 different ways. The number of these arrangements in which all the persons have different pairs of neighbours on each occasion cannot exceed (n — l)(n — 2)/2, since this gives the number of ways in which any assigned person may sit between every possible pair selected from the rest. But in fact it is always possible to determine (n — l)(n — 2)/2 arrangements in which no one has the same two neiglibours on any two occasions. Solutions for various values of 7i have been given. Here for instance (if n = 8) are 21 arrangements* of eight persons. Each arrangement may be placed round a circle, and no one has the same two neighbours on any two occasions. 1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8 ; 1.2.5.6.8.7.4.3 ; 1.2.7.8.4.3.5.6; 1.3.5.2.7.4.8.6 , 1.3.7.4.6.8.2.5 ; 1.3.8.6.2.5.7.4; 1.4.2.6.3.8.5.7, 1.4.3.8.7.5.6.2, , 1.4.5.7.6.2.3.8; 1.5.6.4.3.7.8.2 , 1.5.7.3.8.2.6.4^ 1.5.8.2.4.6.3.7; 1.6.2.7.5.3.8.4 ; 1.6.3.5.8.4.2.7 1.6.4.8.2.7.3.5; 1.7.4.2.5.8.6.3 ; 1.7.6.3.2.4.5.8 , 1.7.8.5.6.3.4.2; 1.8.2.3.7.6.4.5 ; 1.8.4.5.3.2.7.6 1.8.6.7.4.5.2.3. The methods of determining these arrangements are lengthy, and far from easy. • Communicated to me by Mr E. G. B. Bergbolt, May, 1906, see The Secretary and The Queen, August, 1906. Mr Dudeney had given the problem for the case when 71 = 6 in 1905, and informs me that the problem has been solved by Mr B. D. Bewiey when n is even, and that he has a general method applicable when n is odd. Various memoirs on the subject have appeared in the mathe- matical journals. u. 34 ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS [CH. II The Manage Problem*. Another difficult permutation problem, suggested by Lucas, is concerned with the number x of possible arrangements of n married couples, seated alternately man and woman, round a table, the n wives being in assigned positions, and the n husbands so placed that a man does not sit next to his wife. The solution involves the theory of discordant permutations, and is far from easy. I content myself with noting the results when n does not exceed 10. When n = 3, ^ = 1 ; when ?i = 4, iz; = 2 ; when 9i = 5, ic = 13 ; when ?i = 6, a; = 80 ; when n = *7, x = 5l9; when n = 8, a; = 4738; when w=9, 0^ = 43387; and when n = 10, a;=439792. Bachet's Weights Problem f. It will be noticed that a considerable number of the easier problems given in the last chapter either are due to Bachet or were collected by him in his classical Prohlhnes. Among the more difficult problems proposed by him was the determination of the least number of weights which would serve to weigh any integral number of pounds from 1 lb. to 40 lbs. inclusive. Bachet gave two solutions : namely, (i) the series of weights of 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, and 32 lbs. ; (ii) the series of weights of 1, 3, 9, and 27 lbs. If the weights may be placed in only one of the scale-pans, the first series gives a solution, as had been pointed out in 1556 by Tartaglia|. Bachet, however, assumed that any weight might be placed in either of the scale-pans. In this case the second series gives the least possible number of weights required. His reasoning is as follows. To weigh 1 lb. we must have a 1 lb. weight. To weigh 2 lbs. we must have in addition either a 2 lb. weight or a 3 lb. weight ; but, whereas with a 2 lb. weight we can weigh 1 lb., 2 lbs., and 3 lbs., with a 3 lb. weight we can weigh 1 lb., (3 - 1) lbs., 3 lbs., and (3 4- 1) lbs. Another weight of ,. 9 lbs. will enable us to weigh all weights from 1 lb. to 13 lbs. ; and we get thus a greater range than is obtainable with any * Theorie des Nomhres, by E. Lucas, Paris, 1891, pp. 215, 491 — 495. + Bachet, Appendix, problem v, p. 215. X Trattato de' numeri e misure, Venice, 1556, voL ii, bk. i, chap, xvi, art. 32. CH. Il] ARITHMETICAL RECREATlONii 36 weight less than 9 lbs. Similarly weights of 1, 3, 9, and 27 lbs. suffice for all weights up to 40 lbs., and weights of 1, 3, 3^, ..., 3"~^ lbs. enable us to weigh any integral number of pounds from 1 lb. to (1 + 3 + 3^ + . . . 3"-^) lbs., that is, to i(3"-l)lbs. To determine the arrangement of the weights to weigh any given mass we have only to express the number of pounds in it as a number in the ternary scale of notation, except that in finding the successive digits we must make every remainder either 0, 1 , or — 1 : to effect this a remainder 2 must be written as 3 — 1, that is, the quotient must be increased by unity, in which case the remainder is — 1. This is explained in most text-books on algebra. Bachet's argument does not prove that his result is unique or that it gives the least possible number of weights required. These omissions have been supplied by Major MacMahon, who has discussed the far more difficult problem (of which Bachet's is a particular case) of the determination of all possible sets of weights, not necessarily unequal, which enable us to weigh any integral number of pounds from 1 to n inclusive, (i) when the weights may be placed in only one scale-pan, and (ii) when any weight may be placed in either scale-pan. He has investigated also the modifications of the results which are necessary when we impose either or both of the further condi- tions (a) that no other weighings are to be possible, and (b) that each weighing is to be possible in only one way, that is, is to be unique*. The method for case (i) consists in resolving l-\-x-\-x- + ...-\-x^ into factors, each factor being of the form 1 + x^ -{- x^^ -{-... + x^"^; the number of solutions depends on the composite character of n -}- 1. The method for case (ii) consists in resolving the expres- sion a:-" -f a;-"+^ + ...-|-^~^-f-l+a;-l-...-h a;"-^ + x'"- into factors, each factor being of the form x'"^^ -+-... -I- x'"' -j-l -\-x^-\- ... + a;"""; ^ the number of solutions depends on the composite character of 2n -I- 1. * See his article in the Quarterly Journal of Matheviatics, 16S6, vol. xxi, pp. 367 — 373. An account of the method is given in Nature, Dec. 4, 1600, vol. XLii, pp. 113—114. 3-2 36 ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS [CH. II Bachet's problem falls under case (ii), n = 40. MacMahon's analysis shows that there are eight such ways of factorizing a}~*° + x~^^ + , . . 4- 1 + . . . + '^"^ + ^^ First, there is the expres- sion itself in which a = 1, m=40. Second, the expression is equal to (1 — x^^)/a^^ (1 — x), which can be resolved into the product of (1 —x^)la;{l — x) and (1 — a;^^)/a^^(l — a;^); hence it can be resolved into two factors of the form given above, in one of which a = l, m = 1, and in the other a = 3, m = 13. Third, similarly, it can be resolved into two such factors, in one of which a = l, m = 4, and in the other a =9, m = 4. Fourth, it can be resolved into three such factors, in one of which a = l, m = l, in another a = 3, m=l, and in the other a = 9, m = 4. Fifth, it can be resolved into two such factors, in one of which a = 1, w = 13, and in the other a = 27, m = 1. Sixth, it can be resolved into three such factors, in one of which a=l, m = l, in another a = 3, m = 4, and in the other a =27, m=l. Seventh, it can be resolved into three such factors, in one of which a = 1, m = 4, in another a = 9, m = 1, and in the other a = 27, m= 1. Eighth, it can be resulved into four such factors, in one of which a = 1, m = 1, in another a = 3, m = 1, in another a = 9, m = 1, and in the other a = 27, m = 1. These results show that there are eight possible sets of weights with which any integral number of pounds from 1 to 40 can be weighed subject to the conditions (ii), (a), and (6). If we denote p weights each equal to w by w^, these eight solutions are 1^°; 1, 3'^; l\ 9'; 1, 3, 9*; V\ 27; 1, S\ 27; 1\ 9, 27; 1, 3, 9, 27. The last of these is Bachet's solution: not only is it that in which the least number of weights are employed, but it is also the only one in which all the weights are unequal. Problems in Higher Arithmetic. Many mathematicians take a special interest in the theorems of higher arithmetic: such, for example, as that every prime of the form 4?i+ 1 and every power of it is expressible as the sum of two squares*, and that the first and second powers can be expressed thus in only one way. For instance, 13 = 3^ + 2\ 13^ = 12-^ + 5^, 13^ = 46^ + 9^, * Fermat's Diophantus, Toulouse, 1670, bk. m, prop. 22, p. 127; or Brassinne's Precis, Paris, 1853, p. 65. CH. Il] ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS 37 and so on. Similarly 41 = :>2f 4^ 41-= 40•^ + 0^ 4l='= 28(r + lir>2, and so on. Propositions such as the one just (jiiotcd may be found in text-books on the theory of numbers and therefore lie outside the limits of this work, but there are one or two questions in higher arithmetic involving points not yet quite cleared up which may find a place here. I content myself with the facts and shall not give the mathematical analysis. Primes. The first of these is concerned with the possibility of determining readily whether a given number is prime or not. No test applicable to all numbers is known, though of course we can get tests for numbers of certain forms. It is difficult to believe that a problem which has completely baffled all modern mathematicians could have been solved in the seventeenth century, but it is interesting to note that in 1643, in answer to a question in a letter whether the number 100895,598109 was a prime, Fermat replied at once that it was the product of 898423 and 112303, both of which were primes. How many mathematicians to-day could answer such a question with ease ? Mersexne's Numhers* Another illustration, confirmatory of the opinion that Fermat or some of his contemporaries had a test by which it was possible to find out whether numbers of certain forms were prime, may be drawn from Mersenne's Cogitata Physico-Matliematica which was published in 1644. In the preface to that work it is asserted that in order that 2^-1 may be prime, the only values of _p, not greater than 257, which are possible are 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 13, 17, 19, 31, 67, 127, and 257. To these numbers 89 must be added. Some years ago I gave reasons for thinking that the number 67 is a misprint for 61. With these corrections the statement appears to be true, and it has now been verified for all except fifteen values of p: namely, 101, 103, 107, 109, 137, 139, 149, 157, 167, 193, 199, 227, 229, 241, and 257. Of these values, Mersenne asserted that p = 257 makes 2^-1 a prime, and that the other values * For rererences, see chapter x\ below. 38 ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS [CH. II make 2^ — 1 a composite number. The demonstration of the prime character of 2^— 1 when jj = 127 has not been published : and the verification in this case has not been corroborated by independent work. Mersenne's revsult could not have been obtained empirically, and it is impossible to suppose that it was worked out for every case ; hence it would seem that whoever first enunciated it was acquainted with certain theorems in higher arithmetic which have not been re-discovered. Perfect Numbers*. The theory of perfect numbers de- pends directly on that of Mersenne's Numbers. A number is said to be perfect if it is equal to the sum of all its integral subdivisors. Thus the subdivisors of 6 are 1, 2, and 3; the sum of these is equal to 6; hence 6 is a perfect number. It is probable that all perfect numbers are included in the formula 2^"^ (2^ — 1), where 2^ - 1 is a prime. Euclid proved that any number of this form is perfect; Euler showed that the formula includes all even perfect numbers; and there is reason to believe — though a rigid demonstration is wanting — that an odd number cannot be perfect. If we assume that the last of these statements is true, then every perfect number is of the above form. It is easy to establish that every number included in this formula (except when ^ = 2) is congruent to unity to the modulus 9, that is, when divided by 9 leaves a remainder 1; also that either the last digit is a 6 or the last two digits are 28. Thus, if j9= 2, 3, 5, 7,13, 17, 19, 31, 61, then by Mersenne's rule the corresponding values of 2^ — 1 are prime; they are 3, 7, 31, 127, 8191, 131071, 524287, 2147483647, 2305843009213693951; and the corresponding perfect numbers are 6, 28, 496, 8128, 33550336, 8589869056, 137438691328, 2305843008139952128, and 2658455991569831744654692615953842176. * On the theory of perfect numbers, see bibliographical references by H. Brocard, L'IntermSdiaire des Mathematiciens, Paris, 1S95, vol. n, pp. 52 — 54; and 1905, vol. xii, p. 19. The first volume of the second edition of the French translation of this book contains (pp. 280—294) a summary of the leading investigation on Perfect Numbers, as also some remarks on Amicable Numbers. CH. Il] ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS 39 Euler's BiQiTADRATE THEOREM*. Another theorem, believed to be true but as yet unproved, is that the arith- metical sum of the fourth powers of three numbers cannot be the fourth power of a number; in other words, we cannot find values of x, y, z, v, which satisfy the equation x* + y* + z*=^v*. The proposition is not true of an algebraical sum, for Euler gave more than one solution of the equation x* -{- y* = z* -\- v*, for instance, x = 542, y = 103, z = 859, v = 514. Goldbach's Theorem. Another interesting problem in higher arithmetic is the question whether there are any even integers which cannot be expressed as a sum of two primes. Probably there are none. The expression of all even integers not greater than 5000 in the form of a sum of two primes has been effected -f-, but a general demonstration that all even integers can be so expressed is wanting. Lagrange's Theorem:!:. Another theorem in higher arith- metic which, as far as I know, is still unsolved, is to the effect that every prime of the form 4?2 — 1 is the sum of a prime of the fbrm 4n 4- 1 and of double another prime also of the form 4?i + 1 ; for example, 23 = 13 + 2 x 5. Lagrange, however, added that it was only by induction that he arrived at the result. Fermat's Theorem on Binary Powers. Fermat enriched mathematics with a multitude of new propositions. With one exception all these have been proved or are believed to be true. This exception is his theorem on binary powers, in which he asserted that all numbers of the form 2"* + 1, where m= 2", are primes §, but he added that, though he was convinced of the truth of this proposition, he could not obtain a valid demonstration. • See Euler, Commentationes Arithmetic ae CoUectae, St Petersburg, 1849, vol. I, pp. 473—476 ; vol. ii, pp. 450—456. t Transactions of the Halle Academy {Naturforschung), vol. lxxii, Halle, 1897, pp. 5—214: see also L'IntermSdiaire des Mathematiciens, 1903, vol. x, and 1904, vol. xi. + Nouveaiix Blemoires de VAcademie Royale des Sciences, Berlin, 1775, p. 356. § Letter of Oct. 18, 1G40, Opera^ Toulouse, 1079, p. 162 : or Brassinne's Pricis, p. 143. 40 ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS [CH. II It may be shown that 2'^ + 1 is composite if m is not a power of 2, but of course it does not follow that 2'** + 1 is a prime if m is a power of 2, say, 2^ As a matter of fact the theorem is not true. In 1732 Euler* showed that if n= 5 the formula gives 4294,967297, which is equal to 641 x 6,700417 : curiously enough, these factors can be deduced at once from Fermat's remark on the possible factors of numbers of the form 2*" + 1, from which it may be shown that the prime factors (if any) of 2^'- + 1 must be primes of the form 64?i + 1. During the last thirty years it has been shown f that the resulting numbers are composite when ?i= 6, 7, 8, 9, 11, 12, 18, 23, 36, 38 and 73. The digits in the last of these numbers are so numerous that, if the number were printed in full with the type and number of pages used in this book, many more volumes would be required than are contained in all the public libraries in the world. I believe that Eisenstein asserted that the number of primes of the form 2'" + 1, where m = 2", is infinite: the proof has not been published, but perhaps it might throw some light on the general theory. Fermat's Last Theorem. I pass now to another assertion made by Fermat which hitherto has not been proved. This, which is sometimes known as Fermat's Last Theorem, is to the effect^ that no integral values of x, y, z can be found to satisfy the equation x^ ^ y^ — z^\ if n is an integer greater than 2. * Commentarli Academiae Scientiarum Petropolitanae, St Petersburg, 1738, vol. VT, p. 104 ; see also Novi Comm. Acad. Sci. Petrop., St Petersburg, 1764, vol. IX, p. 101 : or Commentationes Arithmeticae Collectae, St Petersburg, 1849, vol. I, pp. 2, 357. t For the factors and bibliographical references, see A. J. C. Cunningham and A. E. Western, Transactions of the London Mathematical Society, 1903, series 2, vol. i, p. 175 ; and J. C. Morehead and A. E. Western, Bulletin of the American Mathematical Society, 1909, vol. xvi, pp. 1—6. X Fermat's enunciation will be found in his edition of Diophantus, Toulouse, 1670, bk. II, qu. 8, p. 61 ; or Brassinne's Precis, Paris, 1853, p. 53. For bibliographical references, see the article on the theory of numbers in the Encyclopedic des Sciences Mathematiques : considerable additions are embodied in the French translation of this book which is therefore generally preferable to the German original. See also L'Intermediaire des Mather.iaticiens, Paris, 1908, vol. XV, p. 2S4. CH. Il] ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS 41 This proposition has acquired extr.K^rdiriary celebrity from the fact that no general demonstration of it has been given, but there is no reason to doubt that it is true. Fermat seems to have discovered its truth first* for the case n = 3, and then for the case n = 4). His proof for the former of these cases is lost, but that for the latter is extant f, and a similar proof for the case of n = 3 was given by Euler J:. These proofs depend upon showing that, if three integral values of as, y, z can be found which satisfy the equation, then it will be possible to find three other and smaller integers which also satisfy it: in this way finally we show that the equation must be satisfied by three values which obviously do not satisfy it. Thus no integral solution is possible. It would seem that this method is inapplicable except when ?i = 3 and n = 4. Fermat's discovery of the general theorem was made later. A demonstration can be given on the assumption that every number can be resolved in one and only one way into the product of primes and their powers. This assumption is true of real numbers, but it is not true when complex factors are admitted. For instance 10 can be expressed as the product of 3+1 and 3 - i, or of 3 4- 2 and 3 - 1, or of 2, 2 + i, and 2 - 1. It is possible that Fermat made some such erroneous supposition, though it is perhaps more probable that he discovered a rigorous demonstration. At any rate he asserts definitely that he had a valid proof — demonstratio mirabilis sane — and the fact that no theorem on the subject which he stated he had proved has been subsequently shown to be false must weigh strongly in his favour; the more so because in making the one incorrect statement in his writings (namely, that about binary powers) he added that he could not obtain a satisfactory demonstration of it. It must be remembered that Fermat was a mathematician of quite the first rank who had made a special study of the theory of numbers. The subject is in itself one of peculiar * See a Letter from Fermat quoted in my History of Mathematics, London, chapter xv. t Fermat's Diophanttts, note on p. 339; or Brassinne's Precis, p. 127. + Euler's Algebra (English trans. 1797), vol. n, chap, xv, p. 2-17. 42 ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS [CH. II interest and elegance, but its conclusions have little practical importance, and since his time it has been discussed by only a few mathematicians, while even of them not many have made it their chief study. This is the explanation of the fact that it took more than a century before some of the simpler results which Fermat had enunciated were proved, and thus it is not surprising that a proof of the theorem which he succeeded in establishing only towards the close of his life should involve great difficulties. In 1823 Legendre* obtained a proof for the case of n = 5; in 1832 Lejeune Dirichletf gave one for n=14; and in 1840 Lame and Lebesgue J gave proofs for w = 7. The proposition appears to be true universally, and in 1849 Kummer§, by means of ideal primes, proved it to be so for all numbers except those (if any) which satisfy three conditions. The proof is complicated and difficult, and there can be little doubt is based on considerations unknown to Fermat. It is not known whether any number can be found to satisfy these con- ditions. It was shown a considerable time ago, that there is no number less than 100 which does so. Recently the method has been developed by L. E. Dickson ||. His calculations show that Fermat's result is true if n is less than 6857. But mere numerical verifications have little value ; no one doubts the truth of the theorem, and its interest lies in the fact that we have not yet succeeded in obtaining a rigorous general demon- stration of it. The general problem was also attacked on other lines by Sophie Germain, who showed that it was true for all numbers except those (if any) which satisfied certain defined con- ditions. I may add that to prove the truth of the proposition when n is greater than 4, obviously it is sufficient to confine * Reprinted in his Theorie des Nombi'es, Paris, 1830, vol. n, pp. 361 — 368 : see also pp. 5, 6. t Crelle's Journal, 1832, vol. ix, pp. 390—393. X Liouville's Journal, 1841, vol. v, pp. 195—215, 276—279, 348—349. § References to Kummer's Memoirs are given in Smith's Report to the British Association on the Theory of Numbers, London, 1860. II See L'Intermediaire des Mathematiciens, Paris, 1908, vol. xv, pp. 247 — 248 ; Messenger of Mathematics, Cambridge, 1908, vol. xxxviii, pp. 14 — 32 ; and Quarterly Journal of Mathematics, Cambridge, 1908, vol. xl, pp. 27 — 45. CH. Il] ARITHMETICAL RECREATIONS 43 ourselves to cases where « is a prime. A prize * of 100;000 marks has been offered for a general proof, to be given bet ore 2U07. Naturally there has been much speculation as to how Fer- mat arrived at the result. The modern treatment of higher arithmetic is founded on the special notation and processes introduced by Gauss, who pointed out that the theory of discrete magnitude is essentially different from that of con- tinuous mngnitude, but until the end of the last century the theory of numbers was treated as a branch of algebra, and such proofs by Fermat as are extant involve nothing more than elementary geometry and algebra, and indeed some of his arguments do not involve any symbols. This has led some writers to think that Fermat used none but elementary algebraic methods. This may be so, but the following remark, which I believe is not generally known, rather points to the opposite conclusion. He had proposed, as a problem to the English mathematicians, to show that there was only one integral solution of the equation a?'^ + 2 = 3/' : the solution evidently being x = b, 2/ = 3- On this he has a notef to the effect that there was no difficulty in finding a solution in rational fractions, but that he had discovered an entirely new method — sane pulcherrima et subtilissima — which enabled him to solve such questions in integers. It was his intention to write a work \ on his researches in the theory of numbers, but it was never completed, and we know but little of his methods of analysis. I venture however to add my private suspicion that continued fractions played a not unimportant part in his researches, and as strengthening this conjecture I may note that some of his more recondite results — such as the theorem that a prime of the form 4n -f 1 is expressible as the sum of two squares — may be established with comparative ease by properties of such fractions. ♦ Ulntermidiaire des Mathematiciens, vol. xv, pp. 217—218, for references and details. t Fermat's Diophantus, bk. vi, prop. 19, p. 320; or Brassinne's Pricis, p. 122. I Fermat's Diophantus, bk. iv, prop. 31, p. 181 ; or Brassinne's Precis, p. 82. •i^ CHAPTER TIL GEOMETRICAL KECREATIONS. In this chapter and the next one I propose to enumerate certain geometrical questions the discussion of which will not involve necessarily any considerable use of algebra or arithmetic. Unluckily no writer like Bachet has collected and classified problems of this kind, and I take the following instances from my note-books with the feeling that they represent the subject but imperfectly. Most of this chapter is devoted to questions which are of the nature of formal propositions: the next chapter contains a description of various trivial puzzles and games, which the older writers would have termed geometrical. In accordance with the rule I laid down for myself in the preface, I exclude the detailed discussion of theorems which involve advanced mathematics. Moreover (with one or two exceptions) I exclude any mention of the numerous geomet- rical paradoxes which depend merely on the inability of the eye to compare correctly the dimensions of figures when their relative position is changed. This apparent deception does not involve the conscious reasoning powers, but rests on the inaccurate interpretation by the mind of the sensations derived through the eyes, and I do not consider such paradoxes as coming within the domain of mathematics. Geometrical Fallacies. Most educated Englishmen are acquainted with the series of logical propositions in geometry associated with the name of Euclid, but it is not known so generally that these propositions were supplemented originally by certain exercises. Of such exercises Euclid issued three CH. Ill] GEOMETRICAL RECREATIONS 45 series: two containing easy theorems or problems, and the third consisting of geometrical fallacies, the errors in which the student was required to find. The collection of fallacies prepared by Euclid is lost, and tradition has not preserved any record as to the nature of the erroneous reasoning or conclusions; but, as an illustration of such questions, I append a few demonstrations, leading to obviously impossible results. Perhaps they may amuse any one to whom they are new. I leave the discovery of the errors to the ingenuity of my readers. First Fallacy*. To prove that a right angle is equal to an angle which is greater than a right angle. Let A BCD be a rectangle. From A draw a line AE outside the rectanole, equal to AB or DC and making an acute angle with AB, as indicated in the diagram. Bisect CB in H, and through H draw HO at right angles to CB. Bisect CE in K, and through K draw KO at right angles to CE. Since CB and CE are not parallel the lines HO and KO will meet (say) at 0. Join OA, OE, OC, and OD. The triangles ODC and OAE are equal in all respects. For, since KO bisects CE and is perpendicular to it, we have * I believe that this and the fourth of these fallacies were first published in this book. They particularly interested Mr C. L. Dodgson ; see the Lewis Carroll Picture Book, London, 1899, pp. 20-4, 2Gu, where they appear in the form in which I originally gave them. 46 GEOMETRICAL RECREATIONS [CH. ill 00= OE. Similarly, since HO bisects GB and DA and is per- pendicular to them, we have OD = OA. Also, by construction, DC = AE. Therefore the three sides of the triangle ODC are equal respectively to the three sides of the triangle OAE. Hence, by Euc. I. 8, the triangles are equal ; and therefore the angle ODG is equal to the angle OAE. Again, since HO bisects DA and is perpendicular to it, we have the angle ODA equal to the angle OAD. Hence the angle ADC (which is the difference of ODC and ODA) is equal to the angle DAE (which is the difference of OAE and OAD). But ADC is a right angle, and DAE is necessarily greater than a right angle. Thus the result is impossible. Second Fallacy*. To prove that a part of a line is equal to the whole line. Let ABC be a triangle; and, to fix our ideas, let us suppose that the triangle is scalene, that the angle B is acute, and that the angle A is greater than the angle G. From A draw AD making the angle BAD equal to the angle (7, and cutting BG in D. From A draw AE perpendicular to BG. The triangles ABG, ABD are equiangular; hence, by Euc. VI. 19, /SABG : IS ABD = AG' : AD\ Also the triangles ABG, ABD are of equal altitude; hence, by Euc. VI. 1, l\ABG'. AABD = BG:BD, .-. AG':AD'=BG : BD. . AG^ _AD' •'• BG ~ BD • * See a note by M, Ooccoz in U Illustration, Paris, Jan. 12, 1895. CH. Ill] GEOMETRICAL RECREATIONS 47 Hence, by Enc. ii. 13, AB' + BG^ -2BG.be ^ AB'^ BD '-2BD . BE BG ~ BD ' .\^+BG-2BE=^~ + BD- 2BE, . ^^' BD-^^' EC • ^^^ - B^ '^^ _ ^B^ - BG . BD BG BD • .\ BG = BD, a result which is impossible. Third Fallacy*. To prove that the sum of the lengths of two sides of any triangle is equal to the length of the third side. A^ , , , ,D Let ABG be a triangle. Complete the parallelogram of which AB and BG are sides. Divide AB into n + 1 equal parts, and through the points so determined draw n lines parallel to BG. Similarly, divide BG into n + 1 equal parts, and through the points so determined draw n lines parallel to AB. The parallelogram ABGD is thus divided into (n + 1)^ equal and similar parallelograms. I draw the figure for the case in which n is equal to 3, then, taking the parallelograms of which ^C is a diagonal, as indicated in the diagram, we have AB + BG^AG + HJ + KL + MN + GH-^JK + LM + NG. A similar relation is true however large n may be. Now let n increase indefinitely. Then the lines AG, GH, &c. will * The Canterbury Puzzles, by H. E. Dudeney, London, 1907, pp. 26—28. 48 GEOMETRICAL RECREATIONS [CH. Ill get smaller and smaller. Finally the points (r, J, i, ... will approach indefinitely near the line AG, and ultimately will lie on it; when this is the case the sum of AG and GH will be equal to AH, and similarly for the other similar pairs of lines. Thus, ultimately, AB + BC^AH + HK + KM + MG = AG, a result which is impossible. Fourth Fallacy. To prove that every triangle is isosceles. Let ABG be any triangle. Bisect BG in D, and through D draw DO perpendicular to BG. Bisect the angle BAG by AO. First. If DO and ^0 do not meet, then they are parallel. Therefore ^10 is at ri-ht angles to BG. Therefore AB = AG. Second. If DO and AO meet, let them meet in 0. Draw OE perpendicular to AG. Draw OF perpendicular to AB. Join OB, OG. Let us begin by taking the case where is inside the triangle, in which case E falls on ^C and F on BG. The triangles AOF and AOE are equal, since the side ^0 is common, angle OAF= angle OAE, and angle OF A = angle OEA. Hence AF=AE. Also, the triangles BOF axid GOE are equal. For since OD bisects BG at right angles, we have OB = 00] also, since the triangles AOF and AOE are equal, we have 0F= OE; lastly, the angles at F and E are right angles. Therefoie, by Euc. I. 47 and I. 8, the triangles BOF and GOE are equal. Hence FB = EG. Therefore AF + FB ^ AE ■{■ EG, that is, AB = AG. The same demonstration will cover the case where DO and AO meet at D, as also the case where they meet outside BG but so near it that E and F fall on AG and AB and not on AG and AB produced. Next take the case where DO and AO meet outside the triangle, and E and F fall on AG and AB produced. Draw CH. Ill] GEOMETRICAL RECREATIONS 49 OE perpenrlionlar to AC produced. Draw OF perpendicular to ^^ produced. Join OB, 00. Following the same argument as before, from the equality of the triangles AOF and AOE, we obtain AF=AE\ and, from the equality of the triangles BOF and GOE, we obtain FB = EG. Therefore AF-FB = AE-EG, that is, AB = A G. Thus in all cases, w^hether or not DO and AO meet, and whether they meet inside or outside the triangle, we have AB=AG: and therefore every triangle is isosceles, a result which is impossible. Fifth Fallacy'*. To prove that 'ttJ^ is equal to ir/S. On the hypothenuse, BO, of an isosceles right-angled triangle, DBG, describe an equilateral triangle ABO, the vertex A being on the same side of the base as D is. On QA take a point H so that OH = GD. Bisect BD in K. Join HK and let it cut OB (produced) in L. Join DL. Bisect DL at 31, and through M draw MO perpendicular to DL. Bisect HL at N, and through N draw NO perpendicular to HL. Since DL and HL intersect, therefore MO and NO will also intersect ; moreover, since BDG is a right angle, MO and NO both slope away from DG and therefore they will meet on the side of DL remote from A. Join 00, OD, OH, OL. The triangles OMD and OML are equal, hence OD = OL. Similarly the triangles ONL and ONH are equal, hence OL = OH. Therefore OD = OH. Now in the triangles OCD and OGH, we have OD = OH, GD = GH (by construction), and * This ingenious fallacy is due to Captain Turton : it appeared for the first time in the third edition of this work. B. R. 4 50 GEOMETRICAL RECREATIONS [CH. HI OG common, hence (by Euc. I. 8) the angle OCD is equal to the angle OGH. Hence the angle BGD is equal to the angle BGH, that is, 7r/4 is equal to 7r/3, which is absurd. Sixth Fallacy*. To prove that, if two opposite sides of a quadrilateral are equal, the other two sides must he parallel. Let A BGD be a quadrilateral such that AB is equal to DG. Bisect AD in M, and through M draw MO at right angles to AD. Bisect BG in N, and draw NO at right angles to BG. If MO and NO are parallel, then AD and BG (which are at right angles to them) are also parallel. If MO and NO are not parallel, let them meet in ; then must be either inside the quadrilateral as in the left-hand diagram or outside the quadrilateral as in the right-hand diagram. Join OA, OB, OG, OD. Since OM bisects AD and is perpendicular to it, we have OA = OD, and the angle 0AM equal to the angle ODM. Similarly OB = 00, and the angle OBN is equal to the angle OGN. Also by hypothesis AB = DG, hence, by Euc. i. 8, the triangles OAB and ODG are equal in all respects, and therefore the angle AOB is equal to the angle DOG, Hence in the left-hand diagram the sum of the angles AOM, AOB is equal to the sum of the angles DOM, DOG; and in the right-hand diagram the difference of the angles AOM,AOB is equal to the difference of the angles DOM, DOG; and therefore in both cases the angle MOB is equal to the angle MOG, i.e. OM (or OM produced) bisects the angle BOG, But the angle NOB is equal to the angle NOG, i.e. ON bisects the angle BOG] hence OM and ON coincide in directioa * i^lathesis, October, 1893, series 2, vol. in, p. 224. CH. Ill] GEOMETRICAL KECREATIONS 51 Therefore AD and DC, which are perpendicular to this direc- tion, must be parallel. This result is not uuiversally true, and the above demonstration contains a flaw. Seventh Fallacy. The following argument is taken from a text-book on electricity, published in 1889 by two distinguished mathematicians, in which it was presented as valid. A given vector OP of length I can be resolved in an infinite number of ways into two vectors OM, MP, of lengths l\ I", and we can make Vjl" have any value we please from nothing to infinity. Suppose that the system is referred to rectangular axes Ox, Oy\ and that OP, OM, MP make respectively angles 6, 6'y 6" with Ox. Hence, by projection on Oy and on Ox, we have Z sin (9 = V sin 6' + I" sin 6\ Zcos(9 = rcos^'-}-rcos6'". n sin 9' -I- sin 6" \ tan^ = • • ncos6' + cos /' > where n^Vjl". This result is true whatever be the value of n. But n may have any value {ex. gr. ?i=x, or n = 0), hence tan 6 — tan 6' = tan 9"^ which obviously is impossible. Eighth Fallacy*. Here is a fallacious investigation of the value of tt: it is founded on well-known quadratures. The area of the semi-ellipse bounded by the minor axis is (in the usual notation) equal to ^irab. If the centre is moved off to an indefinitely great distance along the major axis, the ellipse degenerates into a parabola, and therefore in this particular limiting position the area is equal to two-thirds of the circum- scribing rectangle. But the first result is true whatever be the dimensions of the curve. .'. ^7rah= |a X 26, .-. 7r=8/3, a result which obviously is untrue. Ninth Fallacy. Ever-y ellipse is a circle. The focal distance of a point on an ellipse is given (in the usual notation) in terms * Tliis was communicated to me hy Mr 11, Chai ties. 1 o 52 GEOMETRICAL RECREATIONS [CH. Ill of the abscissa by the formula r=a+ex. Hence dr/dx=e. From this it follows that r cannot have a maximum or minimum value. But the only closed curve in which the radius vector has not a maximum or minimum value is a circle. Hence, every ellipse is a circle, a result which obviously is untrue. Geometrical Paradoxes. To the above examples I may add the following questions, which, though not exactly falla- cious, lead to results which at a hasty glance appear impossible. First Paradox. The first is a problem, sent to me by Mr W. Ronton, to rotate a plane lamina (say, for instance, a sheet of paper) through four right angles so that the effect is equivalent to turning it through only one right angle. Second Paradox. As in arithmetic, so in geometry, the theory of probability lends itself to numerous paradoxes. Here is a very simple illustration. A. stick is broken at random into three pieces. It is possible to put them together into the shape of a triangle provided the length of the longest piece is less than the sum of the other two pieces {cf. Euc. L 20), that is, provided the length of the longest piece is less than half the length of the stick. But the probability that a fragment of a stick shall be half^ the original length of the stick is 1/2. Hence the probability that a triangle can be constructed out of the three pieces into which the stick is broken would appear to be 1/2. This is not true, for actually the probability is 1/4. Third Paradox. The following example illustrates how easily the eye may be deceived in demonstrations obtained by actually dissecting the figures and re-arranging the parts. In fact proofs by superposition should be regarded with consider- able distrust unless they are supplemented by mathematical reasoning. The well-known proofs of the propositions Euclid I. 32 and Euclid I. 47 can be so supplemented and are valid. On the other hand, as an illustration of how deceptive a non- mathematical proof may be, I here mention the familiar paradox that a square of paper, subdivided like a chessboard into 64 small squares, can be cut into four pieces which being put CH. Ill] GEO:\IETUICAL RECREATIOMS 63 together form a figure containing 65 suoh small squares*. This is effected by cutting the original square into four pieces in the manner indicated by the thick lines in the first figure. If these four pieces are put together in the shape of a rectangle in the way shown in the second figure it will appear as if this rectangle contains 65 of the small squares. This phenomenon, which in my experience non-mathema- ticians find perplexing, is due to the fact that the edges of the four pieces of paper, which in the second figure lie along __J- "7 ^ t-ZZ ===/ •^ ■^ "^ ^^ ■*>, \ ■^^^ •^ ^ ^ B the diagonal AB, do not coincide exactly in direction. In reality they include a small lozenge or diamond-shaped figure, whose area is equal to that of one of the 64 small squares in the original square, but whose length AB'\^ much greater than its breadth. The diagrams show that the angle between the two sides of this lozenge which meet at A is tan~^| — tan~^|, that is, is tan~^^, which is less than 1J°. To enable the eye to distinguish so small an angle as this the dividing lines in the first figure would have to be cut with extreme accuracy and the pieces placed together with great care. This paradox depends upon the relation 5x13 — 8^=1. Similar results can be obtained from the formulae 13x34-212 = 1, 34x89-552=1,...; or from the formulae 5--3x8 = l, 132-8 X 21 = 1, 342-21 x55 = l,.... * I do not know who discovered this paradox. It \i given in various modem books, but I cannot find an earlier reference to it than one in the Zeitachrijt fUr Mathematik und Fhysik, Leipzig, 1868, vol. xiii, p. 102. 54 GEOMETRICAL RECREATIONS [CH. Ill These numbers are obtained by finding convergents to the con- tinued fraction 111 1+ 1 4.1 + 1 + —• A similar paradox for a square of 17 cells, by which it was shown that 289 was equal to 288, was alluded to by Ozanam*, who gave also the diagram for dividing a rectangle of ll by 3 into two rectangles whose dimensions appear to be 5 by 4 and 7 by 2. Turtons Seventy - Seven Puzzle. A far better dissection puzzle was invented by Captain Turton. In this a piece of cardboard, 11 inches by 7 inches, subdivided into 77 small equal squares, each 1 inch by 1 inch, can be cut up and re-arranged so as to give 78 such equal squares, each 1 inch by 1 inch, of which 77 are arranged in a rectangle of the same dimensions as the original rectangle from one side of which projects a small additional square. The construction is in- genious, but cannot be described without the use of a model. The trick consists in utilizing the fact that cardboard has a sensible thickness. Hence the edges of the cuts can be bevelled, but in the model the bevelling is so slight as to be imperceptible save on a very close scrutiny. The play thus given in fitting the pieces together permits the apparent pro- duction of an additional square. Colouring Maps. I proceed next to mention the geo- metrical proposition that not more than four colours are neces- sary in order to colour a map of a country {divided into districts) in such a way that no two contiguous districts shall he of the same colour. By contiguous districts are meant districts having a common line as part of their boundaries: districts which touch only at points are not contiguous in this sense. The problem was mentioned by A. F. Mobiusf in his Lectures in 1840, but it was not until Francis Guthrie J com- * Ozanam, 1803 edition, vol. i, p. 299. t Leipzig Transactions {Math.-jyhys. Glasse), 1885, vol. xxxvir, pp. 1—6. :J: See Proceedings 0/ the Royal Society of Edinburgh, July 19, 1880, vol. x, p. 728. CH. Ill] GE(JMETRICAL REOIIEATIOXS municated it to De Morgan about 1850 that attention was generally called to it : it is said that the fact had been familiar to practical map-makers for a long time previously. Through De Morgan the proposition then became generally known ; and in 1878 Cayley* recalled attention to it by stating that he could not obtain any rigorous proof of it. Probably the following argument, though not a formal demonstration, will satisfy the reader that the result is true. Let A, B, G be three contiguous districts, and let X be any other district contiguous with all of them. Then X must lie either wholly outside the external boundary of the area ABC or wholly inside the internal boundary, that is, it must occupy a position either like X or like X\ In either case there is no possible way of drawing another area Y whicli shall be contiguous with A,B,G, and X. In other words, it is possible to draw on a plane four areas which are contiguous, but it is not possible to draw five such areas. If ^, By C are not con- tiguous, each with the other, or if X is not contiguous with A, B, and G, it is not necessary to colour them all differently, and thus the most unfavourable case is that already treated. * Proceedings of the London Mathematical Society, 1878, vol. ix, p. 148, and Proceedings of the Royal Geographical Society, London, 1879, N.S., vol. i, pp. 259-261, where some of the difificulties ar« indicated. 56 GEOMETRICAL RECilEATlONS [CH. Ill Moreover any of the above areas may diminish to a point and finally disappear without affecting the argument. That we may require at least four colours is obvious from the above diagram, since in that case the areas A, B, G, and X would have to be coloured differently. A proof of the proposition involves difficulties of a high order, which as yet have baffled all attempts to surmount them. This is partly due to the fact that if, using only four colours, we build up our map, district by district, and assign definite colours to the districts as we insert them, we can always contrive the addition of two or three fresh districts which cannot be coloured differently from those next to them, and which accordingly upset our scheme of colouring. But by starting afresh, it would seem that we can always re-arrange the colours so as to allow of the addition of such extra districts. The argument by which the truth of the proposition was formerly supposed to be demonstrated was given by A.B.Kempe* in 1879, but there is a flaw in it. In 1880, Tait published a solution f depending on the theorem that if a closed network of lines joining an even number of points is such that three and only three lines meet at each point then three colours are sufficient to colour the lines in such a way that no two lines meeting at a point are of the same colour; a closed network being supposed to exclude the case w^iere the lines can be divided into two groups between which there is but one connecting line. This theorem may be true, if we understand it with the limitation that the network is in one plane and that no line * He sent his first demonstration across the Atlantic to the American Journal of Mathematics, 1879, vol. ii, pp. 193 — 200; but subsequently he communicated it in simplified forms to the London Mathematical Society, Transactions, 1879, vol. X, pp. 229—231, and to Nature, Feb. 26, 1880, vol. xxi, pp. 399—400. The flaw in the argument was indicated in articles by P. J. Heawood in the Quarterly Journal of Mathematics, Loudon, 1890, vol. xxiv, pp. 332 — 338; and 1897, vol, XXXI, pp. 270—285. t Proceedings of the Royal Society of Edinburgh, July 19, 1880, vol. x, p. 729 ; Philosophical Magazine, January, 1884, series 5, vol. xvu, p. 41 ; and Collected Scientific Papers, Cambridge, vol. ii, 1800, p. 93. CH. Ill] GEOMETUICAL RECUEATIONS 57 meets any other line except at one of the vertices, \vhich is all that we require for the map theorem; but it has not been proved. Without this limitation it is not correct. For instance the accompanying figure, representing a closed network in three dimensions of 15 lines formed by the sides of two pentagons and the lines joining their corresponding angular points, cannot be coloured as described by Tait. If the figure is in three dimensions, the lines intersect only at the ten vertices of the network. If it is regarded as being in two dimensions, only the ten angular points of the pentagons are treated as vertices of the network, and any other point of intersection of the lines is not regarded as such a vertex. Expressed in tech- nical language the difficulty is this. Petersen* has shown that a graph (or network) of the 2nth. order and third degree and without offshoots (or feuilles) can be resolved into three graphs of the 2?ith order and each of the first degree, or into two graphs of the 2nth. order one being of the first degree and one of the second degree. Tait assumed that the former resolution was the only one possible. The question is whether the limitations mentioned above exclude the second resolution. Assuming that the theorem as thus limited can be estab- lished, Tait's argument that four colours will suffice for a map is divided into two parts and is as follows. * See J. Petersen of Copenhagen, VIntermedinire des MatMmaticiens, vol. v, 1898, pp. 225—227; and vol. vi, 1899, pp. 30—38. Also Acta Madiematica, Stockholm, vol. xv, 1891, pp. 193—220. 58 GEOMETRICAL RECREATIONS [CH. Ill First, suppose that the boundary lines of contiguous dis- tricts form a closed network of lines joining an even number of points such that three and only three lines meet at each point. Then if the number of districts is 71 + 1, the number of boundaries will be Sn, and there will be 2n points of junction; also by Tait's theorem, the boundaries can be marked with three colours /3, 7, 8 so that no two like colours meet at a point of junction. Suppose this done. Now take four colours, A,B,G, D, wherewith to colour the map. Paint one district with the colour A; paint the district adjoining A and divided from it by the line y8 with the colour B ; the district adjoining A and divided from it by the line 7 with the colour 0; the district adjoining J. and divided from it by the line B with the colour I). Proceed in this way so that a line /3 always separates the colours A and B, or the colours G and D; a line 7 always separates A and (7, or D and B; and a line S always separates A and D, or B and G. It is easy to see that, if we come to a district bounded by districts already coloured, the rule for crossing each of its boundaries will give the same colour : this also follows from the fact that, if we regard ^, 7, 8 as indicating certain operations, then an operation like B may be represented as equivalent to the effect of the two other operations y8 aad 7 performed in succession in either order. Thus for such a map the problem is solved. In the second case, suppose that at any point four or more boundaries meet, then at any such point introduce a small district as indicated below: this will reduce the problem to the first case. The small district thus introduced may be >c coloured by the previous rule; but after the rest of the map is coloured this district will have served its purpose, it may be then made to contract without limit to a mere point and will disappear leaving the boundaries as they were at first. Although a proof of the four-colour theorem is still wanting, no one has succeeded in constructing a plane map which requires CH. Ill] GEOMETRICAL RECREATIONS 59 more than four tints to colour it, and there is no reason to doubt the correctness of the statement that it is not necessary to have more than four colours for any plane map. The number of ways in which such a map can be coloured with four tints has been also considered*, but the results are not suffi- ciently interesting to require mention here. I believe that in the corresponding question with solids in space of three dimensions not more than six tints are required to colour the exposed surfaces, but I have never seen any attempt to prove this extension of the problem. Physical Configuration of a Country. As I have been alluding to maps, I may here mention that the theory of the representation of the physical configuration of a country by means of lines drawn on a map was discussed by Cayley and Clerk Maxwellf. They showed that a certain relation exists between the number of hills, dales, passes, &c. which can co-exist on the earth or on an island. I proceed to give a summary of their nomenclature and conclusions. All places whose heights above the mean sea level are equal are on the same level. The locus of such points on a map is indicated by a contour-line. Roughly speaking, an island is bounded by a contour-line. It is usual to draw the successive contour-lines on a map so that the difference between the heights of any two successive lines is the same, and thus the closer the contour-lines the steeper is the slope, but the heights are measured dynamically by the amount of work to be done to go from one level to the other and not by linear distances. A contour-line in general will be a closed curve. This curve may enclose a region of elevation: if two such regions • See A. G. Dixon, Messenger of MatJiematics, Cambridtje, 1902-3, vol. xxxii, pp. 81—83. t Cayley on ' Contour and Slope Lines,' VhiloRophical Marjazine, London, October, 1859, eeiies 4, vol. xvui, pp. 264 — 268 ; Collected Works, vol. iv, pp. 108 — 111. J. Clerk Maxwell on 'Hills and Dales,' Philosophical Magazine, December, 1870, series 4, vol. xl, p|). 421—127; Collected Works, vol. ii, pp. 233—240. 60 GEOMETRICAL RECREATIONS [CH. Ill meet at a point, that point will be a crunode (i.e. a real double point) on the contour-line through it, and such a point is called a pass. The contour-line may enclose a region of de- pression: if two such regions meet at a point, that point will be a crunode on the contour-line through it, and such a point is called a fork or bar. As the heights of the corre- sponding level surfaces become greater, the areas of the regions of elevation become smaller, and at last become reduced to points: these points are the summits of the corresponding mountains. Similarly as the level surface sinks the regions of depression contract, and at last are reduced to points: these points are the bottoms, or immits, of the corresponding valleys. Lines drawn so as to be everywhere at right angles to the contour-lines are called lines of slope. If we go up a line of slope generally we shall reach a summit, and if we go down such a line generally we shall reach a bottom: we may come however in particular cases either to a pass or to a fork. Districts whose lines of slope run to the same summit are hills. Those whose lines of slope run to the same bottom are dales. A watershed is the line of slope from a summit to a pass or a fork, and it separates two dales. A watercourse is the line of slope from a pass or a fork to a bottom, and it separates two hills. \i n-\-l regions of elevation or of depression meet at a point, the point is a multiple point on the contour-line drawn through it; such a point is called a pass or a fork of the ni\i order, and must be counted as n separate passes (or forks). If one region of depression meets another in several places at once, one of these must be taken as a fork and the rest as passes. Having now a definite geographical terminology we can apply geometrical propositions to the subject. Let h be the number of hills on the earth (or an island), then there will be also h summits ; let d be the number of dales, then there will be also d bottoms ; let p be the whole number of passes, pi that of single passes, p^ of double passes, and so on ; let / be the whole number of forks, /i that of single forks, f of double CH. Ill] GEOMETRICAL RECREATIONS (>1 forks, and so on ; let w be the number of watercourses, then there will be also w watersheds. Hence, by the theureuis of Cauchy and Euler, A = 1 + j9j + 2j[;., + . . . , and w=^ (p, +/i) + 3 (p^ +/;) 4- .... These results can be extended to the case of a multiply- connected closed surface. ADDENDUM. N'ote. Page 52. The required rotation of the lamina can be effected thus. Suppose that the result is to be equivalent to turning it through a right angle about a point 0. Describe on the lamina a square OAlJC, Rotate the lamina successively through two right angles about the diagonal OB as axis and through two right angles about the side OA as axis, and the required result will be attained. K9 CHAPTER IV. GEOMETRICAL RECREATIONS CONTINUED. Leaving now the question of formal geometrical proposi- tions, I proceed to enumerate a few games or puzzles which depend mainly on the relative position of things, but I post- pone to cliapter x the discussion of such amusements of this kind as necessitate any considerable use of arithmetic or algebra. Some writers regard draughts, solitaire, chess, and such like games as subjects for geometrical treatment in the same way as they treat dominoes, backgammon, and games with dice in connection with arithmetic: but these discussions require too many artificial assumptions to correspond with the games as actually played or to be interesting. The amusements to which I refer are of a more trivial description, and it is possible that a mathematician may like to omit this chapter. In some cases it is difficult to say whether they should be classified as mainly arithmetical or geometrical, but the point is of no importance. Statical Games of Position. Of the innumerable statical games involving geometry of position I shall mention only three or four. Three-in-a-row. First, I may mention the game of three- in-a-row, of which noughts and crosses, one form of merrilees, and go-bang are well-known examples. These games are played on a board — generally in the form of a square con- taining n" small squares or cells. The common practice is for one player to place a white counter or piece or to make a cross on each small square or cell which he occupies : his opponent CH. IV] GEOMETRICAL RECREATIONS 63 similarly uses black counters or pieces or makes a nought on each cell which he occupies. Whoever first gets three (or any other assigned number) of his pieces in three adjacent cells and in a straight line wins. There is no difficulty in giving the complete analysis for boards of 9 cells and of 16 cells: but it is lengthy and not particularly interesting. M(^st of these games were known to the ancients*, and it is for that reason I mention them here. Three-in-a-row. Extension. I may, however, add an elegant but difficult extension which has not previously found its way, so far as I am aware, into any book of mathematical recreations. The problem is to place n counters on a plane so as to form as many rows as possible, each of which shall contain three and only three counters f. It is easy to arrange the counters in a number of rows equal to the integral part of {n — iy/8. This can be effected by the following construction. Let P be any point on a cubic. Let the tangent at P cut the curve again in Q. Let the tangent at Q cut the curve in A. Let PA cut the curve in B, QB cut it in G, PC cut it in D, QD cut it in E, and so on. Then the counters must be placed at the points P, Q, A, B, .,.. Thus 9 counters can be placed in 8 such rows ; 10 counters in 10 rows ; 15 counters in 24 rows ; 81 counters in 800 rows ; and so on. If however the point P is a pluperfect point of the nth order on the cubic, then Sylvester proved that the above con- struction gives a number of rows equal to the integral part of (n — l){n— 2)16. Thus 9 counters can be arranged in 9 rows, which is a well-known and easy puzzle; 10 counters in 12 rows; 15 counters in 30 rows ; and so on. Even this however is an inferior limit and may be ex- ceeded — for instance, Sylvester stated that 9 counters can be placed in 10 rows, each containing three counters ; I do not know how he placed them, but one way of so arranging them is * Becq de Fouqui^res, Lc Jeiix dcs Anciens, second edition, Paris, 1873, chop. XVIII. t Educational Times Reprints, 18G8, vol. viii, p. lOO; Ihid. 188G, vol. xt.v, pp. 127—128. 64 GEOMETRICAL RECREATIONS [CH. IV by putting them at points whose coordinates are (2, 0), (2, 2), (2, 4), (4, 0), (4, 2), (4, 4), (0, 0), (3, 2), (6, 4) ; another way is by putting them at the points (0, 0), (0, 2), (0, 4), (2, 1), (2, 2), (2, 3), (4, 0), (4, 2), (4, 4) ; more generally, the angular points of a regular hexagon and the three points (at infinity) of intersection of opposite sides form such a group, and therefore any projection of that figure will give a solution. At present it is not possible to say what is the maximum number of rows of three which can be formed from n counters placed on a plane. Extension to p-in-a-row. The problem mentioned above at once suggests the extension of placing n counters so as to form as many rows as possible, each of which shall contain p and only p counters. Such problems can be often solved immediately by placing at infinity the points of intersection of some of the lines, and (if it is so desired) subsequently projecting the diagram thus formed so as to bring these points to a finite distance. One instance of such a solution is given above. As examples I may give the arrangement of 10 counters in 5 rows, each containing 4 counters ; the arrangement of 16 counters in 1 5 rows, each containing 4 counters ; the arrange- ment of 18 counters in 9 rows, each containing 5 counters ; and the arrangement of 19 counters in 10 rows, each containing 5 counters. These problems I leave to the ingenuity of my readers. Tesselation. Another of these statical recreations is known as tesselatioD, and consists in the formation of geometrical designs or mosaics covering a plane area by the use of tiles of given geometrical forms. If the tiles are regular polygons, the resulting forms can be found by analysis. For instance, if we confine ourselves to the use of like tiles each of which is a regular polygon of n sides, we are restricted to the use of equilateral triangles, squares, or hex- agons. For suppose that to fill the space round a point where one of the angles of the polygon is situated we require m poly- gons. Each interior angle of the polygon is equal to (n—2)7r/n. Hence m (n — 2) w/n = 27r. Therefore (m - 2) (n - 2) = 4. Now from the nature of the problems m is greater than 2, and so is n. If m = 3, ?i = 6. If m > 3, then n<6, and since n>2, CH. IV] GEOMETRICAL KECREATIONS 65 we have in this case only to consider the vahies n = 3, 7i=4, and ?i = 5. If w = 3 we have m = 6. If n = 4 we have in = 4. If n= 5, m is non-integral, and this is impossible. Thus the only solutions are m — S and n = 6, m=4 and w = 4, ?/i=6 and n = 3 *. If, however, we allow the use of unlike tiles (ex. gr. regular hexagons, squares, and triangles), we can construct numerous geometrical designs covering a plane area; though it is im- possible to make such designs by the use of starred concave polygons f. The use of colours not only adds variety to the patterns, but introduces new considerations. One formation of a pavement by the employment of square tiles of two colours is illustrated by the common chess-board. In this the cells are coloured alter- nately white and black, or sometimes white and red. Another variety of a pavement made with square tiles of two colours was invented by SylvesterJ, who termed it anallagmatic. In the ordinary chess-board, if any two rows or any two columns are placed in juxtaposition, cell to cell, the cells which are side by side are either all of the same colour or all of different colours. In an anallagmatic arrangement, the cells are so coloured (with two colours) that when any two columns or any two rows are placed together side by side, half the cells next to one another are of the same colour and half are of different colours Anallagmatic pavements composed of m^ cells or square tiles can be easily constructed by the repeated use of the four elementary anallagmatic arrangements given in the angular spaces of the accompanying diagram. In these fundamental forms A represents one colour and B the other colour. The diamond-shaped figure in the middle of the diagram represents an anallagmatic pavement of 256 tiles which is symmetrical about its diagonals. In half the rows and half the columns * Monsieur A. Hermann has proposed an analogous theorem for polygons covering the surface of a sphere. t On this, see the second edition of the French translation of this work, Paris, 1908, vol. ii, pp. 26—37. X See Mathematical Questions from the Educational Times, London, vol. x, 1868, pp. 74—76 ; vol. lvi, 1892, pp. 97—99. The results are closely connected with theorems in the theory of equaiions, B. E. 6 66 GEOMETRICAL RECREATIONS [CH. IV each line has 10 white tiles and 6 black tiles, and in the re- maining rows and columns each line has 6 white tiles and 10 black tiles. Such an arrangement, where the difference between the number of white and black tiles used in each line is constant, and equal to Vm, is called isochromatic. If m is odd or oddly even, it is impossible to construct anallagmatic boards which are isochromatic. A B B B B A B B B B A B B B B A An Anallagmatic Isochromatic Pavement. Interesting problems can also be proposed when the tiles are triangular, whether equilateral or isosceles right-angled. Two equal isosceles right-angled tiles of different colours can be put together so as to make a square tile as shown in the margin. We can arrange four such tiles in no less than 256 different ways, making 64 distinct designs. With the use of more tiles the number of CH. IV] GEOMETRICAL RECREATIONS 67 possible ' designs increases with startling rapidity*. I content myself with giving two illustrations of designs of pavements constructed with sixty-four such tiles, all exactly alike. Examples of Tesselated Pavements. If more than two colours are used, the problems become increasingly difficult. As a simple instance of this class of problems I may mention one, sent to me by a correspondent who termed it Cross-Fours, wherein sixteen cardboard squares or tiles are used, the upper half of each being yellow, red, pink, or blue, and the lower half being gold, green, black, or white, no two tiles being coloured alike. Such tiles can be arranged in the form of a square so that in each vertical, horizontal, and diagonal line there shall be 8 colours and no more : they can be also arranged so that in each of these ten lines there shall be 6 colours and no more, or 5 colours and no more, or 4 colours and no more. Puzzles of this kind are but little known ; they are however not uninstructive. Colour-Cube Problem. As an example of a recreation analogous to tesselation I will mention the colour-cube problem f. Stripped of mathematical technicalities the problem may be enunciated as follows. A cube has six faces, and if six colours are chosen we can paint each face with a diHPeient colour. By permuting the order of the colours we can obtain * On this, see Lucas, Recreations Mathematiques, Paris, 1882-3, vol. ii, part 4 : hereafter I shall refer to this work by the name of the author. t By Major MacMahon ; an abstract of his paper, read before the London Mathematicid Society on Feb. 9, 1893, was given in Naiwe, Feb. 23, 1893, vol. xLvn, p. 406. 6-2 68 GEOMETRICAL RECREATIONS [OH. IV thirty such cubes, no two of which are coloured alike. Take anv one of these cubes, K, then it is desired to select eight out of the remaining twenty-nine cubes, such that they can be arranged in the form of a cube (whose linear dimensions are double those of any of the separate cubes) coloured like the cube K, and placed so that where any two cubes touch each other the faces in contact are coloured alike. Only one collection of eight cubes can be found to satisfy these conditions. These eight cubes can be determined by the following rule. Take any face of the cube K: it has four angles, and at each angle three colours meet. By permuting the colours cyclically we can obtain from each angle two other cubes, and the eight cubes so obtained are those required. A little consideration will show that these are the required cubes, and that the solution is unique. For instance suppose that the six colours are indicated by the letters a, 6, c, d, e, f. Let the cube K be put on a table, and to fix our ideas suppose that the face coloured / is at the bottom, the face coloured a is at the top, and the faces coloured 6, c, d, and e front respectively the east, north, west, and south points of the compass. I may denote such an arrangement by (/; a; 6, c, d, e). One cyclical permutation of the colours which meet at the north-east corner of the top face gives the cube (/; c; a, 6, d, e\ and a second cyclical permutation gives the cube (/; h\ c, a, d, e). Similarly cyclical permutations of the colours which meet at the north- west corner of the top face of ^ give the cubes (/; d\ b,a, c, e) and (/; c ; h^d, a, e). Similarly from the top south-west corner of K we get the cubes (/; e ; 6, c, a, d) and (/; d\ b, c, e, a) : and from the top south-east corner we get the cubes (/; e; a, c, d, b) and (/; 6 ; e, c, d, a). The eight cubes being thus determined it is not difficult to arrange them in the form of a cube coloured similarly to K, and subject to the condition that faces in contact are coloured alike; in fact they can be arranged in two ways to satisfy these conditions. One such way, taking the cubes in the numerical order given above, is to put the cubes 3, 6, 8, and 2 CH. IV] GEOMETRICAL RECREATIONS 69 at the SE, NE, NW, and SW corners of the bottom face ; of course each placed with the colour /at the bottom, while 3 and 6 have the colour b to the east, and 2 and 8 have the colour d to the west : the cubes 7, 1, 4, and 5 will then form the SE, NE, NW, and SW corners of the top face; of course each placed with the colour a at the top, while 7 and 1 have the colour 6 to the east, and 5 and 4 have the colour d to the west. If K is not given, the difficulty of the problem is increased. Similar puzzles in two dimensions can be made. Tangrams. The formation of designs by means of seven pieces of wood, namely, a square, a rhombus, and five triangles, known as tans, of fixed traditional shapes, is one of the oldest amusements in the East. Many hundreds of figures represent- ing men, women, birds, beasts, fish, houses, boats, domestic objects, designs, &c. can be made, but the recreation is not mathematical, and I reluctantly content myself with a bare mention of it. Dynamical Games of Position. Games which are played by moving pieces on boards of various shapes — such as merrilees, fox and geese, solitaire, backgammon, draughts, and chess — present more interest. In general, however, they permit of so many movements of the pieces that any mathematical analysis of them becomes too intricate to follow out completely. Games in which the possible movements are very limited may be susceptible of mathematical treatment. One or two of these are given later : here I shall confine myself mainly to puzzles and simple amusements. Shunting Problems. The first I will mention is a little puzzle which I bought some years ago and which was described as the "Great Northern Puzzle." It is typical of a good many problems connected with the shunting of trains, and though it rests on a most improbable hypothesis, I give it as a specimen of its kind. The puzzle shows a railway, DBF, with two sidings, DBA and FGA, connected at A. The portion of the rails at A which is common to the two sidings is long enough to permit of a single wagon, like P or Q, running in or out of it ; but is too short to contain the whole of an engine, like R. Hence, if 70 GEOMETRICAL RECREATIONS [CH. IV an engine rnns up one siding, such as DBA, it must come back the same way. Initially a small blork of wood, P, coloured to represent a wagon, is placed at 5 ; a similar block, Q, is placed at G \ and a longer block of wood, R, representing an engine, is placed at E. The problem is to use the^ engine R to interchange the wagons P and Q, without allowing any flying shunts. Another shunting puzzle, on sale in the streets in 1905, under the name of the " Chifu-Chemulpo Puzzle," is made as follows. A loop-line BGE connects two points B and ^ on a railway track AF, which is supposed blocked at both ends, as shown in the diagram. In the model, the track AF is 9 inches long, AB = EF= If inches, and AH = FK=^BG== DE^l inch. H K On the track and loop are eight wagons, numbered succes- sively 1 to 8, each one inch long and one-quarter of an inch broad, and an engine, e, of the same dimensions. Originally the wagons are on the track from A \>o F and in the order 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and the engine is on the loop. The construction and the initial arrangement ensure that at any one time there cannot be more than eight vehicles on the track. Also if eight vehicles are on it only the penultimate vehicle at either end can be moved on to the loop, but if less than eight are on the track then the last two vehicles at either end can be moved on to the loop. If the points at each end of the ioop- line are clear, it will hold four, but not more than four, vehicles. The object is to reverse the order of the wagons on the track. CH. IV] GEOMETRICAL RECREATIONS 71 SO that from ^ to i^ they will be numbered successively 8 to 1 ; and to do this by means which will involve as few transferences of the engine or a wagon to or from the loop as is possible. Twenty-six moves are required, and there is more than one solution in 26 moves. Other shunting problems are not uncommon, but these two examples will suffice. Ferry -Boat Problems, Everybody is familiar with the story of the showman who was travelling with a wolf, a .s^oat, and a basket of cal>bages ; and for obvious reasons was unable to leave the wolf alone with the goat, or the goat alone with the cabbages. The only means of transporting them across a river was a boat 80 small that he could take in it only one of them at a time. The problem is to show how the passage could be effected*. A somewhat similar problem is to arrange for the passage of a river by three men and three boys who have the use of a boat which will not carry at one time more than one man or two boys. Fifteen passages are required f. Problems like these were proposed by Alcuin, Tartaglia, and other medieval writers. The following is a common type of such questions. Three J beautiful ladies have for husbands three men, who -are young, gallant, and jealous. The party are travelling, and find on the bank of a river, over which they have to pass, a small boat which can hold no more than two persons. How can they cross the river, it being agreed that, in order to avoid scandal, no woman shall be left in the society of a man unless her husband is present ? Eleven passages are required. With two married couples five passages are required. The similar problem with four married couples is insoluble. Another similar problem is the case of n married couples who have to cross a river by means of a boat which can be rowed by one person and will carry ?i — 1 people, but not m^re, with the condition that no woman is to be in the society of a man unless her husband is present. Alcuin's problem given * Ozanam, 1803 edition, vol. i, p. 171 ; 1840 edition, p. 77. t H. E. Dudeney, The Tribune, October 4, 1906. X Bachet, Appendix, problem iv, p. 212. 72 GEOMETRICAL RECREATIONS [CH. IV above is the case of n=S. Let y denote the number of passages from one bank to the other which will be necessary. Then it has been shown that if 7i=3, 3/= 11; if w = 4, y = 9; and if w > 4, 2/ = 7. The following analogous problem is due to the late E. Lucas*. To find the smallest number x of persons that a boat must be able to carry in order that n married couples may by its aid cross a river in such a manner that no woman shall remain in the company of any man unless her husband is present ; it being assumed that the boat can be rowed by one person only. Also to find the least number of passages, say y, from one bank to the other which will be required. M. Delannoy has shown that if 71 = 2, then a; = 2, and y= 5. If n = S, then a; = 2, and 3/ = 11. If n = 4, then a? =3, and y = 9. If n=o, then a) = S, and 3/ = 11. And finally if n > 5, then ^ = 4, and y = 2n—l. M. De Fonteney has remarked that, if there was an island in the middle of the river, the passage might be always effected by the aid of a boat which could carry only two persons. If there are only two or only three couples the island is unnecessary, and the case is covered by the preceding method. His solution, involving Sn — S passages, is as follows. The first nine passages will be the same, no matter how many couples there may be : the result is to transfer one couple to the island and one couple to the second bank. The result of the next eight passages is to transfer one couple fi-om the first bank to the second bank, this series of eight operations must be repeated as often as necessary until there is left only one couple on the first bank, only one couple on the island, and all the rest on the second bank. The result of the last seven passages is to transfer all the couples to the second bank. It would however seem that if n is greater than 3, we need not require more than 6n — 7 passages from land to land. M. G. Tarry has suggested an extension of the problem, which still further complicates its solution. He supposes that * Lucas, vol. I, pp. 15—18, 237—238. CH. IV] GEOMETRICAL RECREATIONS 73 each husband travels with a harem of m wives or concubines ; moreover, as Moliammedan women are brought up in seclusion, it is reasonable to suppose that they would be unable to row a boat by themselves without the aid of a man. But perhaps the difficulties attendant on the travels of one wife may be deemed sufficient for Christians, and I content myself with merely mentioning the increased anxieties experienced by Moham- medans in similar circumstances. Geodesies. Geometrical problems connected with finding the shortest routes from one point to another on a curved surface are often difficult, but geodesies on a flat surface or flat surfaces are in general readily determinable. I append one instance*, though I should have hesitated to do so, had not experience shown that some readers do not readily see the solution. It is as follows. A room is 30 feet long, 12 feet wide, and 12 feet high. On the middle line of one of the smaller side walls and one foot from the ceiling is a wasp. On the middle line of the opposite wall and 11 feet from the ceiling is a fly. The wasp catches the fly by crawling all the way to it: the fly, paralysed by fear, remaining still. The problem is to find the shortest route that the wasp can follow. To obtain a solution we observe that we can cut a sheet of paper so that, when folded properly, it will make a model to scale of the room. This can be done in several ways. If, when the paper is again spread out flat, we can join the points repre- senting the wasp and the fly by a straight line lying wholly on the paper we shall obtain a geodesic route between them. Thus the problem is reduced to finding the way of cutting out the paper which gives the shortest route of the kind. Here is the diagram corresponding to a solution of the above question, where A represents the floor, B and D the longer side-walls, G the ceiling, and W and F the positions on the two smaller side-walls occupied initially by the wasp and fly. • This is due to Mr H. E. Dudeney. I heard a similar question propounded at Cambridge in 1903, but I first saw it in print in the Daily Hail, London, February 1, 1905. 74 GEOMETRICAL RECREATIONS [CH. IV In the diagram the square of the distance between W and F is (32)2 ^ (24)2; iiej^ce the distance is 40 feet. w «K N. Frohlems with Counters placed in a row. Numerous dynamical problems and puzzles may be illustrated with a box of counters, especially if there are counters of two colours. Of course coins or pawns or cards will serve equally well. I proceed to enumerate a few of these played with counters placed in a row. First Problem with Counters. The following problem must be familiar to many of my readers. Ten counters (or coins) are placed in a row. Any counter may be moved over two of those adjacent to it on the counter next be3^ond them. It is required to move the counters according to the above rule so that they shall be arranged in five equidistant couples. If we denote the counters in their initial positions by the numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, we proceed as follows. Put 7 on 10, then 5 on 2, then 3 on 8, then 1 on 4, and lastly 9 on 6. Thus they are arranged in pairs on the places originally occupied by the counters 2, 4, 6, 8, 10. Similarly by putting 4 on 1, then 6 on 9, then 8 on 3, then 10 on 7, and lastly 2 on 5, they are arranged in pairs on the places originally occupied by the counters 1, 3, 5, 7, 9. If two superposed counters are reckoned as only one, solutions analogous to those given above will be obtained by CH. IV] GEOMETRICAL RECREATIONS 75 putting 7 on 10, then 5 on 2, then .*> on 8, then 1 on 6, and lastly 9 on 4 ; or by putting 4 on 1, then 6 on 9, theu 8 on 3, then 10 on 5, and lastly 2 on 7 *. There is a somewhat similar game played with eight counters, but in this ease the four couples finally formed are not equi- distant. Here the transformation will be effected if we move 5 on 2, then 3 on 7, then 4 on 1, and lastly 6 on 8. This form of the game is applicable equally to (8 + 2n) counters, for if we move 4 on 1 we have left on one side of this couple a row of (8 + 2n — 2) counters. This again can be reduced to one of (8 + 271 — 4) counters, and in this way finally we have left eight counters which can be moved in the way explained above. A more complete generalization would be the case of n counters, where each counter might be moved over the m counters adjacent to it on to the one beyond them. For instance we may place twelve counters in a row and allow the moving a counter over three adjacent counters. By such movements we can obtain four piles, each pile containing three counters. Thus, if the counters be numbered consecutively, one solution can be obtained by moving 7 on 3, then 5 on 10, then 9 on 7, then 12 on 8, then 4 on 5, then 11 on 12, then 2 on 6, and then 1 on 2. Or again we may place sixteen counters in a row and allow the moving a counter over four adjacent counters on to the next counter available. By such movements we can get four piles, each pile containing four counters. Thus, if the counters be numbered consecutively, one solution can be obtained by moving 8 on 3, then 9 on 14, then 1 on 5, then 16 on 12, then 7 on 8, then 10 on 7, then 6 on 9, then 15 on 16, then 13 on 1, then 4 on 15, then 2 on 13, and then 11 on 6. Second Problem with Counters. Another problem f, oi a somewhat similar kind, is of Japanese origin. Place four florins (or white counters) and four halfpence (or black counteis) alternately in a line in contact with one another. It is rec^uired * Note by J. Fitzpatrick to a French translation of the third edition of tliis work, Paris, 1898. t Bibliotheca Mxthematica, 1896, series 3, vol. vi, p. 323; P. G. Tait, Philo- Bophical Magazine, London, January, 1884, series 5, vol. xvii, p. 39; or Collected Scientijic i'ajjers^ Cambridge, vol. ii, 1690, p. 93. 76 GEOMETRICAL RECREATIONS [CH. IV in four moves, each of a pair of two contiguous pieces, without altering the relative position of the pair, to form a continuous line of four halfpence followed by four florins. This can be solved as follows. Let a florin be denoted by a and a halfpenny by h, and let x x denote two contiguous blank spaces. Then the successive positions of the pieces may be represented thus : Initially . . . . xxabahabah. After the first move . . baababaxxb. After the second move . 6 a abxx a abb. After the third move . . bxxbaaaabb. After the fourth move . bbbb aaaax x. The operation is conducted according to the following rule. Suppose the pieces to be arranged originally in circular order, with two contiguous blank spaces, then we always move to the blank space for the time being that pair of coins which occupies the places next but one and uext but two to the blank space on one assigned side of it. A similar problem with 2n counters — n of them being white and n black — will at once suggest itself, and, if n is greater than 4, it can be solved in n moves. I have however failed to find a simple rule which covers all cases alike, but solutions, due to M. Delannoy, have been given* for the four cases where n is of the form 4m, 4?7i + 2, 47n + 1, or 4m + 3 ; in the first two cases the first ^n moves are of pairs of dissimilar counters and the last ^n moves are of pairs of similar counters; in the last two cases, the first move is similar to that given above, namely, of the penultimate and antepenultimate counters to the be- ginning of the row, the next J (w — 1) moves are of pairs of dissimilar counters, and the final J (n — 1) moves are of similar counters. The problem is also capable of solution if we substitute the restriction that at each move the pair of counters taken up must be moved to one of the two ends of the row instead of the condition that the final arrangement is to be continuous. * La Nature^ June, 1887, p. 10, CH. IV] GEOMETRICAL KECKEATlONS 77 Tait suggested a varir-.tion of the problem by making it a condition that the two coins to be moved shall also be made to interchange places ; in this form it would seem that five moves are required ; or, in the general case, ti + 1 moves are reijuired. Problems on a Cliess-hoard with Counters or Pawns. The following three problems require the use of a chess-board as well as of counters or pieces of two colours. It is more convenient to move a pawn than a counter, and if therefore I describe them as played with pawns it is only as a matter of convenience and not that they have any connection with chess. The first is characterized by the fact that in every position not more than two moves are possible ; in the second and third problems not more than four moves are possible in any position. With these limitations, analysis is possible. I shall not discuss the similar problems in which more moves are possible. First Problem with Pawns*. On a row of seven squares on a chess-board 3 white pawns (or counters), denoted in the diagram by "a"s, are placed on the 3 squares at one end, and 3 black pawns (or counters), denoted by " b "s, are placed on the 3 squares at the other end — the middle square being left vacant. Each piece can move only in one direction ; the " a " pieces can move from left to right, and the *' b " pieces from right to left. If the square next to a piece is unoccupied, it can move on a a a b b b to that ; or if the square next to it is occupied by a piece of the opposite colour and the square beyond that is unoccupied, thon it can, like a queen in draughts, leap over that piece on to the unoccupied square beyond it. The object is to get all the white pawns in the places occupied initially by the black pawns and vice versa. The solution requires 15 moves. It may be effected by moving first a w^hite pawn, then successively two black pawns, then three white pawns, then three black pawns, then three white pawns, then two black pawns, and then one white pawn. We can express this solution by saying that if we number the * Lucas, vol. n, part 5, pp. Ill — 143, 78 GEOMETRICAL RECREATIONS [CH. IV cells (a term used to describe each of the small squares on a chess-board) consecutively, then initially the vacant space occupies the cell 4 and in the successive moves it will occupy the cells 3, 5, 6, 4, 2, 1, 3, 5, 7, 6, 4, 2, 3, 5, 4. Of these moves, six are simple and nine are leaps. Similarly if we have n white pawns at one end of a row of 2w + l cells, and n black pawns at the other end, they can be interchanged in n (m + 2) moves, by moving in succession 1 pawn, 2 pawns, 3 pawns, ... n — 1 pawns, n pawns, n pawns, n pawns, n — 1 pawns, ... 2 pawns, and 1 pawn — all the pawns in each group being of the same colour and different from that of the pawns in the group preceding it. Of these moves 2n are simple and n^ are leaps. Second Problem with Pawns*. A similar game may be played on a rectangular or square board. The case of a square board containing 49 cells, or small squares, will illustrate this sufficiently: in this case the initial position is shown in the annexed diagram where the " a "s denote the pawns or pieces a a a a a a a a a a a a a a b b b b b b b b b b b b b a a a a a a a a a a b b b b b b b b b b of one colour, and the " b "s those of the other colour. The '* a" pieces can move horizontally from left to right or vertically down, and the " h " pieces can move horizontally from right to left or vertically up, according to the same rules as before. The solution reduces to the preceding case. The pieces in the middle column can be interchanged in 15 moves. In the course of these moves every one of the seven cells in that column is at some time or other vacant, and whenever that * Lucas, vol. H, part 5, p. 144. CH. IV] GEOMETRICAL RECREATIONS 79 is the case the pieces in the row containing the vacant cell can be interchanged. To interchange the pieces in each of the seven rows will require 15 moves. Hence to interchange all the pieces will require 15 + (7 x 15) moves, that is, 120 moves. If we place 2?i(n+l) white pawns and 2n{7i+l) black pawns in a similar way on a square board of (2/1+1)^ cells, we can transpose them in 2n (n + 1) (?z + 2) moves: of these 4?i(7i4-l) are simple and 2n^ (^+1) are leaps. Third Problem with Fawns. The followinsf analoorous problem is somewhat more complicated. On a square board of 25 cells, place eight white pawns or counters on the cells a b c — d 9 e h f * E B G D A F C denoted by small letters in the annexed diagram, and eight black pawns or counters on the cells denoted by capital letters : the cell marked with an asterisk (*) being left blank. Each pawn can move according to the laws already explained — the white pawns being able to move only horizontally from left to right or vertically downwards, and the black pawns being able to move only horizontally from right to left or vertically upwards. The object is to get all the white pawns in the places initially occupied by the black pawns and vice versa. No moves outside the dark line are permitted. Since there is only one cell on the board which is unoccupied, and since no diagonal moves and no backward moves are permitted, it follows that at each move not more than two pieces of either colour are capable of moving. There are how- ever a very large number of empirical solutions. In previous editions I have given a symmetrical solution in 48 moves, but the following, due to Mr H. E. Dudeney, is efiected in 46 moves : nhg*F/c*CBHh*GDFjehbacf'GABHEFjdg*Hhbc*CFj''GHh* 80 GEOMETRICAL RECKEATIONS [CH. IV the letters indicating the cells from which the pieces are suc- cessively moved. It will be noticed that the first twenty-three moves lead to a symmetrical position, and that the next twenty- two moves can be at once obtained by writing the first twenty- two moves in reverse order and interchanging small and capital letters. Similar problems with boards of various shapes can be easily constructed. Probably, were it worth the trouble, the mathematical theory of games such as that just described might be worked out by the use of Vandermonde's notation, described later in chapter vi, or by the analogous method employed in the theory of the game of solitaire*. Problems on a Chess-hoard with Chess-pieces. There are several mathematical recreations with chess-pieces, other than pawns. Some of these are given later in chapter VI. Geometrical Puzzles with Rods, etc. Another species of geometrical puzzles, to which here I will do no more than allude, are made of steel rods, or of wire, or of wire and string. Numbers of these are often sold in the streets of London for a penny each, and some of them afford ingenious problems in the geometry of position. Most of them could hardly be discussed without the aid of diagrams, but they are inexpensive to construct, and in fact innumerable puzzles on geometry of position can be made with a couple of stout sticks and a ball of string, or with only a box of matches : several examples are given in various recent English works. Most of them exemplify the difiiculty of mentally realizing the effect of geometrical altera- tions in a figure unless they are of the simplest character. Paradromic Rings. The fact just stated is illustrated by the familiar experiment of making paradromic rings by cutting a paper ring prepared in the following manner. * On the theory of the solitaire, see Reiss, 'Beitrage zur Theorie des Solitdr- Spiels,^ Crelle's Joiirnal, Berlin, 1858, vol. uv, pp. oil — 379 ; and Lucas, vol. i, part V, pp. 89 — 141. CH. IV] GEOMETRICAL RECREATIONS 81 Take a strip of paper or piece of tape, say, for convenience, an inch or two wide and at least nine or ten inches long, rule a line in the middle down the length AB of the strip, gum one end over the other end B, and we get a ring like a section of a cylinder. If this ring is cut by a pair of scissors along the ruled line we obtain two rings exactly like the first, except that they are only half the width. Next suppose that the end A is twisted through two right angles before it is gummed to B (the result of which is that the back of the strip at A is gummed over the front of the strip at B), then a cut along the line will produce only one ring. Next suppose that the end A is twisted once completely round {i.e. through four right angles) before it is gummed to B, then a similar cut produces two interlaced rings. If any of my readers think that these results could be predicted off-hand, it may be interesting to them to see if they can predict correctly the effect of again cutting the rings formed in the second and third experiments down their middle lines in a manner similar to that above described. The theory is due to J. B. Listing* who discussed the case when the end A receives m half-twists, that is, is twisted through mir, before it is gummed to B. If m is even we obtain a surface which has two sides and two edges, which are termed paradromic. If the ring is cut along a line midway between the edges, we obtain two rings, each of which has m half-twists, and which are linked together \m times. If m is odd we obtain a surface having only one side and one eJge. If this ring is cut along its mid-line, we obtain only one ring, but it has 2m half-twists, and if m is greater than unity it is knotted. ADDENDUM. Note. Page 64. One method of arranging 16 counters in 15 lines, as stated in the text, is as follows. Draw a regular re-entrant pentagon vertices A\j ^2) -^3? -^4> ^5, <^rid centre 0. The sides intersect in five * Vorstadien zur Topologic, Die Studieii, Gottingen, 1647, part x. B. R. 6 82 GEOMETRICAL RECREATIONS [CH. IV points Biy ... B^. These latter points may be joined so as to form a smaller regular re-entrant pentagon whose sides intersect in five points Ci, ... Cs. The 16 points indicated are arranged as desired {The Canter- bury Puzzles, 1907, p. 140). An arrangement of 18 counters in 9 rows, each containing 5 counters, can be obtained thus. From one angle, A of an equilateral triangle AA'A!\ draw lines AB, AE inside the triangle making any angles with A A'. Draw from A' and A" lines similarly placed in regard to A' A" and A" A. Let A'D' cut A"E" in F, and A'E' cut A"D" in G. Then AFG is a straight line. The 3 vertices of the triangle and the 15 points of inter- section of AD, AE, AF, with the similar pencils of Unes drawn from A'y A", will give an arrangement as required. An arrangement of 19 counters in 10 rows, each containing 5 counters, can be obtained by placing counters at the 19 points of intersection of the 10 Hnes .^= ±a, x= ±6, y= ±a, y= ±b, y= ±x: of these points two are at infinity. Note. Page 69. The Great Northern Shunting Problem is effected thus, (i) R pushes P into A. (ii) R returns, pushes ^ up to P in ^, couples Q to P, draws them both out to F, and then pushes them to E. (iii) P is now uncoupled, R takes Q back to A, and leaves it there, (iv) R returns to P, takes P back to (7, and leaves it there, (v) R running successively through F, i>, B comes to -4, draws Q out, and leaves it at B. Note. Page 70. One solution of the Chifu-Chemulpo Puzzle is as follows. Move successively wagons 2, 3, 4 up, i.e. on to the loop line. [Then push 1 along the straight track close to 5 ; this is not a " move."] Next, move 4 down, i.e. on to the straight track and push it along to 1. Next, move 8 up, 3 down to the end of the track and keep it there tempo- rarily, 6 up, 2 down, e down, 3 up, 7 up. [Then push 5 to the end of the track and keep it there temporarily.] Next, move 7 down, 6 down, 2 up, 4 up. [Then push e along to 1.] Next, move 4 down to the end of the track and keep it there temporarily, 2 down, 5 up, 3 down, 6 up, 7 up, 8 down to the end of the track, e up, 5 down, 6 down, 7 down. In this solution we moved e down to the track at one end, then shifted it along the track, and finally moved it up to the loop from the other end of the track. We might equally well move e down to the track at one end, and finally move it back to the loop from the same ^nd. In this solution the pieces successively moved are 2, 3, 4, 4, e, 8, 7, 3, 2, 6, 5, 5, 6, 3, 2, 7, 2, 5, C, 3, 7, e, 8, 5, 6, 7. 83 CHAPTER y. MECHANICAL RECREATIONS. I proceed now to enumerate a few questions connected with mechanics which lead to results that seem to me interesting from a historical point of view or paradoxical. Problems in mechanics generally involve more difficulties than problems in arithmetic, algebra, or geometry, and the explanations of some phenomena — such as those connected with the flight of birds — are still incomplete, while the explanations of many others of an interesting character are too difficult to find a place in a non- technical work. Here I exclude all transcendental meclianics, and confine myself to questions which, like those treated in the preceding chapters, are of an elementary character. The results are well-known to mnthematicians. I assume that the reader is acquainted with the funda- mental ideas of kinematics and dynamics, and is familiar with the three Newtonian laws ; namely, first that a body will continue in its state of rest or of uniform motion in a straight line unless compelled to change that state by some external force : second, that the change of momentum per unit of time is proportional to the external force and takes place in the direction of it: and third, that the action of one body on another is equal in magnitude but opposite in direction to the reaction of the second body on the first. The first and second laws state the principles required for solving any question on the motion of a particle under the action of given forces. The third law supplies the additional principle required for the solution of problems in which two or more particles iniiuence one another. 6-2 84j mechanical recreations [ch. V Motion. The difficulties connected with the idea of motion have been for a long time a favourite subject for paradoxes, some of which bring us into the realm of the philosophy of mathematics. Zeno's Paradoxes on Motion. One of the earliest of these is the remark of Zeno to the effect that since an arrow cannot move where it is not, and since also it cannot move where it is (that is, in the space it exactly fills), it follows that it cannot move at all. The answer that the very idea of the motion of the arrow implies the passage from where it is to where it is not was rejected by Zeno, who seems to have thought that the appearance of motion of a body was a phenomenon caused by the successive appearances of the body at rest but in different positions. Zeno also asserted that the idea of motion was itself incon- ceivable, for what moves must reach the middle of its course before it reaches the end. Hence the assumption of motion presupposes another motion, and that in turn another, and so ad infinitum. His objection was in fact analogous to the biological difficulty expressed by Swift: — " So naturalists observe, a flea hath smaller fleas that on him prey. And these have smaller fleas to bite 'em. And so proceed ad infinitum." Or as De Morgan preferred to put it " Great fleas have little fleas upon their backs to bite 'em, And little fleas have lesser fleas, and so ad infinitum. And the great fleas themselves, in turn, have greater fleas to go on; While these have greater still, and greater still, and so on." Achilles and the Tortoise. Zeno's paradox about Achilles and the tortoise is known even more widely. The assertion was that if Achilles ran ten times as fast as a tortoise, yet if the tortoise had (say) 1000 yards start it could never be overtaken. To establish this, Zeno argued that when Achilles had gone the 1000 yards, the tortoise would still be 100 yards in front of him ; by the time he had covered these 100 yards, it would still be 10 yards in front of him ; and so on for ever. Thus Achilles would get nearer and nearer to the tortoise but would never overtake it. Zeno regarded this as confirming his view that the popular idea of motion is self-contradictory. CH. V] MECHANICAL RECREATIONS 85 Zeno's Paradox on Time. The fallacy of Achilles and the Tortoise is usually explained by saying that though the time required to overtake the tortoise can be divided into an infinite number of intervals, as stated in the argument, yet these intervals get smaller and smaller in geometrical progression, and the sum of them all is a finite time : after the lapse of that time Achilles would be in front of the tortoise. Probably Zeno would have replied that this explanation rests on the assump- tion that space and time are infinitely divisible, an assumption which he would not have admitted. He seems further to have contended that while, to an accurate thinker, the notion of the infinite divisibility of time was impossible, it was equally impossible to think of a minimum measure of time. For suppose, he argued, that t is the smallest conceivable interval, and suppose that three horizontal lines composed of three consecutive spans ahc, a'b'c', a"h"c" are placed so that a, a\ a" are vertically over one another, as also h, h\ h" and c, c', c". Imagine the second line moved as a whole one span to the right in the time r, and simultaneously the third line moved as a whole one span to the left. Then 6, a', c" will be vertically over one another. And in this duration r (which by hypothesis is indivisible) a' must have passed vertically over the space a"h" and the space 6V. Hence the duration is divisible, contrary to the hypothesis. Tke Paradox of Tristram Shandy. Mr Russell has enun- ciated* a paradox somewhat similar to that of Achilles and the Tortoise, save that the intervals of time considered get longer and longer during the course of events. Tristram Shandy, as we know, took two years writing the history of the first two days of his life, and lamented that, at this rate, material would accumulate faster than he could deal with it, so that he could never finish the work, however long he lived. But had he lived long enough, and not wearied of his task, then, even if his life had continued as eventfuUy as it began, no part of his biograpliy would have remained unwritten. For if he wrote the events of ihe first day in the first year, he would write the * B. A. W. Russell, Principles oj Mathematics, Cambridge, 1903, vol. i, p. 368. 86 MECHANICAL RECREATIONS [CH. V events of the nth day in the nth. year, hence in time the events of any assigned day would be written, and therefore no part of his biography would remain unwritten. This argument might be put in the form of a demonstration that the part of a magnitude may be equal to the whole of it. Questions, such as those given above, which are concerned with the continuity of space and time involve difficulties of a high order. Many of the resulting perplexities are due to the assumption that the number of things in a collection of them is greater than the number in a part of that collection. This is axiomatic for a finite number of things, but must not be assumed as being necessarily true of infinite collections. Angular Motion. A non-mathematician finds additional difficulties in the idea of angular motion. For instance, there is a well-known proposition on motion in an equiangular spiral which shows that a body, moving with uniform velocity and as slowly as we please, may in a finite time whirl round a fixed point an infinite number of times. To a non- mathematician the result seems paradoxical if not impossible. The demonstration is as follows. The equiangular spiral is the trace of a point P, which moves along a line OP, the line OP turning round a fixed point with uniform angular velocity while the distance of P from decreases with the time in geometrical progression. If the radius vector rotates through four right angles we have one convolution of the curve. All convolutions are similar, and the length of each convolution is a constant fraction, say 1/nth, that of the con- volution immediately outside it. Inside any given convolu- tion there are an infinite number of convolutions which get smaller and smaller as we get nearer the pole. Now suppose a point Q to move uniformly along the spiral from any point towards the pole. If it covers the first convolution in a seconds, it will cover the next in ajn seconds, the next in ajn^ seconds, and so on, and will finally reach the pole in (a -f- ajn ■\- a/n^ -\- ajn^ -\- ) seconds, that is, in anl{n — 1) seconds. The velocity is uniform, CH. V] MECHANICAL RECREATIONS 87 and yet in a finite time, Q will have traversed an infinite number of convolutions and therefore have circled round the pole an infinite number of times*. Simple Relative Motion. Even if the philosophical diffi- culties suggested by Zeno are settled or evaded, the mere idea of relative motion has been often found to present difficulties, and Zeno himself failed to explain a simple phenomenon involving the principle. As one of the easiest examples of this kind, I may quote the common question of how many trains going from B to A a, passenger from A to B would meet and pass on his way, assuming that the journey either way takes 4J hours and that the trains start from each end every hour. The answer is 9. Or again, take two pennies, face upwards on a table and edges in contact. Suppose that one is fixed and that the other rolls on it without slipping, making one complete revolution round it and returning to its initial position. How many revolutions round its own centre has the rolling coin made ? The answer is 2. Laws of Motion, I proceed next to make a few remarks on points connected with the laws of motion. The first law of motion is often said to define force, but it is iu only a qualified sense that this is true. Probably the meaning of the law is best expressed in Clifford's phrase, that force is " the description of a certain kind of motion " — in other words it is not an entity but merely a convenient way of stating, without circumlocution, that a certain kind of motion is observed. It is not difficult to show that any other interpretation lands us in difficulties. Thus some authors use the law to justify a definition that force is that which moves a body or changes its motion; yet the same writers speak of a steam- engine moving a train. It would seem then that, according to them, a steam-engine is a force. That such statements are current may be fairly reckoned among mechanical paradoxes. * The proposition is put in this form in J. Richard's Philosophic de$ Mathematiques, Paris, 1903, pp. 119—120. 88 MECHANICAL RECREATIONS [CH. V The idea of force is difficult to grasp. How many people, for instance, could predict correctly what would happen in a question as simple as the following ? A rope (whose weight may be neglected) hangs over a smooth pulley ; it has one end fastened to a weight of 10 stone, and the other end to a sailor of weight 10 stone, the sailor and the weight hanging in the air. The sailor begins steadily to climb up the rope ; will the weight move at all ; and, if so, will it rise or fall ? In fact, it will rise. It will be noted that in the first law of motion it is asserted that, unless acted on by an external force, a body in motion continues to move (i) with uniform velocity, and (ii) in a straight line. The tendency of a body to continue in its state of rest or of uniform motion is called its inertia. This tendency may be used to explain various common phenomena and experiments. Thus, if a number of dominoes or draughts are arranged in a vertical pile, a sharp horizontal blow on one of those near the bottom will send it out of the pile, and those above will merely drop down to take its place — in fact they have not time to change their relative positions before there is sufficient space for them to drop vertically as if they were a solid body. On this principle depends the successful per- formance of numerous mechanical tricks and puzzles. The statement about inertia in the first law may be taken to imply that a body set in rotation about a principal axis passing through its centre of mass will continue to move with a uniform angular velocity and to keep its axis of rotation fixed in direction. The former of these statements is the assumption on which our measurement of time is based as mentioned below in chapter XX. The latter assists us to explain the motion of a projectile in a resisting fluid. It affords the explanation of why the barrel of a rifle is grooved ; and why, similarly, anyone who has to throw a flat body of irregular shape (such as a card) in a given direction usually gives it a rapid rotatory motion about a principal axis. Elegant illustrations of the fact just mentioned are afforded by a good many of the tricks of acrobats, CH. V] MECHANICAL RECREATIONS 89 though the full explanation of most of them also introduces other considerations. Thus it is a common feat to toss on to the top surface of an umbrella a penny so that it alights on its edge, and then, by turning round the stick of the umbrella rapidly, to cause the coin to rotate. By twisting the umbrella at the proper rate, the coin can be made to appear stationary and standing upright, though the umbrella is moving away underneath it, while by diminishing or increasing the angular velocity of the umbrella the penny can be made to run forwards or backwards. This is not a difficult trick to execute : it was introduced by Japanese conjurers. The tendency of a body in motion to continue to move in a straight line is sometimes called its centrifugal force. Thus, if a train is running round a curve, it tends to move in a straight line, and is constrained only by the pressure of the rails to move in the required direction. Hence it presses on the outer rail of the curve. This pressure can be diminished to some extent both by raising the outer rail, and by putting a guard rail, parallel and close to the inner rail, against which the wheels on that side also will press. An illustration of this fact occurred in a little known inci- dent of the American civil war*. In the spring of 1862 a party of volunteers from the North made their way to the rear of the Southern armies and seized a train, intendins" to destroy, as they passed along it, the railway which was the main line of communication between various confederate corps and their base of operations. They were however detected and pursued. To save themselves, they stopped on a sharp curve and tore up some rails so as to throw the engine which was following them off the line. Unluckily for themselves they were ignorant of dynamics and tore up the inner rails of the curve, an operation which did not incommode their pursuers, who were travelling at a high speed. The second law gives us the means of measuring mass, force, and therefore work. A given agent in a given time can do only a definite amount of work. This is illustrated by the ♦ Capturing a Locomotive by W. Pittenger, London, 1882, p. 104. 90 MECHANICAL RECREATIONS [CH. V fact that although, by means of a rigid lever and a fixed fulcrum, any force however small may be caused to move an}^ mass however large, yet what is gained in power is lost in speed — as the popular phrase runs. Montucla* inserted a striking illustration of this principle founded on the well-known story of Archimedes who is said to have declared to Hiero that, were he but given a fixed fulcrum, he could move the world. Montucla calculated the mass of the earth and, assuming that a man could work inces- santly at the rate of 116 foot-lbs. per second, which is a very high estimate, he found that it would take over three billion centuries, i.e. 3 x 10^^ years, before a particle whose mass was equal to that of the earth was moved as much as one inch against gravity at the surface of the earth : to move it one inch along a horizontal plane would take about 74,000 centuries. Stability of Equilibrium. It is known to all those who have read the elements of mechanics that the centre of gravity of a body, which is resting in equilibrium under its own weight, must be vertically above its base : also, speaking generally, we may say that, if every small displacement has the effect of raising the centre of gravity, then the equilibrium is stable, that is, the body when left to itself will return to its original position ; but, if a displacement has the effect of lowering the centre of gravity, then for that displacement the equilibrium is unstable; while, if every displacement does not alter the height above some fixed plane of the centre of gravity, then the equilibrium is neutral. In other words, if in order to cause a displacement work has to be done against the forces acting on the body, then for that displacement the equilibrium is stable, while if the forces do work the equilibrium is unstable. A good many of the simpler mechanical toys and tricks afford illustrations of this principle. Magic Bottles\. Among the most common of such toys are the small bottles — trays of which may be seen any day in the streets of London — which keep always upright, and cannot * Ozanam, 1803 edition, vol. ii, p. 18; 1840 edition, p. 202. t Ozanam, 1803 edition, vol. n, p. 15 ; 1840 edition, p. 201. CH. V] MECHANICAL RECREATIOiNS 91 be upset until their owner orders them to lie down. Such a bottle is made of thin glass or varnished paper fixed to the plane surface of a solid hemisphere or smaller segment of a sphere. Now the distance of the centre of gravity of a homogeneous hemisphere from the centre of the sphere is three-eighths of the radius, and the mass of the glass or varnished paper is so small compared with the mass of the lead base that the centre of gravity of the whole bottle is still within the hemisphere. Let us denote the centre of the hemisphere by G, and the centre of gravity of the bottle by G. If such a bottle is placed with the hemisphere resting on a horizontal plane and GO vertical, any small displacement on the plane will tend to raise G, and thus the equilibrium is stable. This may be seen also from the fact that when slightly dis- placed there is brought into play a couple, of whicli one force is the reaction of the table passing through C and acting vertically upward, and the other the weight of the bottle acting vertically downward at G. If G is below (7, this couple tends to restore the bottle to its original position. If there is drop^^ed into the bottle a shot or nail so heavy as to raise the centre of gravity of the whole above C, then the equilibrium is unstable, and, if any small displacement is given, the bottle falls over on to its side. Montucla says that in his time it was not uncommon to see boxes of tin soldiers mounted on lead hemispheres, and when the lid of the box was taken off the whole reg-iment sprang to attention. In a similar way we may explain how to balance a pencil in a vertical position, with its point resting on the top of one's finger, an experiment which is described in nearly every book of puzzles*. This is effected by taking a penknife, of which one blade is opened through an angle of (say) 120°, and sticking the blade in the pencil so that the handle of the penknife is below the fiuger. The centre of gravity is thus brought below the point of support, and a small displacement given to the ■ Ex. gr. Oughtre>l, Muthematicall Rccrealions, p. 2-i ; Ozanam, 1803 eJilion, vol. II, p. 14; 1810 edition, p. 2U0. 92 MECHANICAL RECREATIONS [CH. V pencil will raise the centre of gravity of the whole : thus the equilibrium is stable. Other similar tricks are the suspension of a bucket over the edge of a table by a couple of sticks, and the balancing of a coin on the edge of a wine-glass by the aid of a couple of forks* — the sticks or forks being so placed that the centre of gravity of the whole is vertically below the point of support and its depth below it a maximum. The toy representing a horseman, whose motion continually brings him over the edge of a table into a position which seems to ensure immediate destruction, is constructed in somewhat the same way. A wire has one end fixed to the feet of the rider; the wire is curved downwards and backwards, and at the other end is fixed a weight. When the horse is placed so that his hind legs are near the edge of the table and his fore- feet over the edge, the weight is under his hind feet. Thus the whole toy forms a pendulum with a curved instead of a straight rod. Hence the farther it swings over the table, the higher is the centre of gravity raised, and thus the toy tends to return to its original position of equilibrium. An elegant modification of the prancing horse was brought out at Paris in 1890 in the shape of a toy made of tin and in the figure of a man-f-. The legs are pivoted so as to be movable about the thighs, but with a wire check to prevent too long a step, and the hands are fastened to the top of a fl -shaped wire weighted at its ends. If the figure is placed on a narrow sloping plauk or strip of wood passing between the legs of the n, then owing to the -shaped wire any lateral displacement of the figure will raise its centre of gravity, and thus for any such displacement the equilibrium is stable. Hence, if a slight lateral disturbance is given, the figure will oscillate and will rest alternately on each foot: when it is supported by one foot the other foot under its own weight moves forwards, and thus the figure will walk down the plank though with a slight * Oughtred, p. oO; Ozanam, 1803 edition, vol. ii, p. 12; 1840 edition, p. 199. t La Nature, Paris, Much, 1891, CH. V] MECHANICAL RECREATIONS 93 reeling motion. Shortly after the publication of the third edition of this book an improved form of this toy, in the shape of a walking elephant made in heavy metal, was issued in England, and probably in that form it is now familiar to all who are interested in noticing street toys. Columbus's Egg. The toy known as Columbus's egg depends on the same principle as the magic bottle, though it leads to the converse result. The shell of the egg is made of tin and cannot be opened. Inside it and fastened to its base is a hollow truncated tin cone, and there is also a loose marble inside the shell. If the egg is held properly, the marble runs inside the cone and the egg will stand on its base, but so long as the marble is outside the cone, the egg cannot be made to stand on its base. Cones running up hill*. The experiment to make a double cone run up hill depends on the same principle as the toys above described ; namely, on the tendency of a body to take a position so that its centre of gravity is as low as possible. In this case it produces the optical effect of a body moving by itself up a hill. Usually the experiment is performed as follows. Arrange two sticks in the shape of a V, with the apex on a table and the two upper ends resting on the top edge of a book placed on the table. Take two equal cones fixed base to base, and place them with the curved surfaces resting on the sticks near the apex of the V, the common axis of the cones being horizontal and parallel to the edge of the book. Then, if properly arranged, the cones will run up the plane formed by the sticks. The explanation is obvious. The centre of gravity of the cones moves in the vertical plane midway between the two sticks and it occupies a lower position as the points of contact on the sticks get farther apart. Hence as the cone rolls up the sticks its centre of gravity descends. Perpetual Motion, The idea of making a machine which once set going would continue to go for ever by itself has been * Ozunam, 18U3 edition, vol. ii, p. 49 ; 1840 editiou, p. 216. 94 MKCHANICAL RECREATIONS [CH. V the ignis fatuus of self-taught mechanicians in much the same way as the quadrature of the circle has been that of self-taught geometricians. Now the obvious meaning of the third law of motion is that a force is only one aspect of a stress, and that whenever a force is caused another equal and opposite one is brought also into existence — though it may act upon a different body, and thus be immaterial for the particular problem considered. The law however is capable of another interpretation*, namely, that the rate at which an agent does work (that is, its action) is equal to the rate at which work is done against it (that is, its reaction). If it is allowable to include in the reaction the rate at which kinetic energy is being produced, and if work is taken to include that done against molecular forces, then it follows from this interpretation that the work done by an agent on a system is equivalent to the total increase of energy, that is, the power of doing work. Hence in an isolated system the total amount of energy is constant. If this is granted, then since friction and some molecular dissipation of energy cannot be wholly prevented, it must be impossible to construct in an isolated system a machine capable of perpetual motion. I do not propose to describe in detail the various machines for producing perpetual motion which have been suggested f, but the machine described below will serve to illustrate one of the assumptions commonly made by these inventors. The machine to which I refer consists of two concentric vertical wheels in the same plane, and mounted on a horizontal axle through their centre, G. The space between the wheels is divided into compartments by spokes inclined at a constant angle to the radii to the points whence they are drawn, and each compartment contains a heavy bullet. This will be clear from the diagram. Apart from these bullets, the wheels would be in equilibrium. Each bullet tends to turn the wheels round their axle, and the moment which measures this tendency is * Newton's Principles, last paragraph of the Scholium to the Laws of Motion, t Several of them have been described in H. Dirck's PerpeLaum Mobile, London, 1861, 2ud edition, 1870. CH. V] MECHANICAL llECIlEATlO^^iS 95 the product of the weight of the bullet and its distance from the vertical through G. The idea of the constructors of such machines was that, as the bullet in any compartment would roll under gravity to the lowest point of the compartment, the bullets on the right-hand side of the wheel in the diagram would be farther from the vertical throuo^h C than those on the left. Hence the sum of the moments of the weights of the bullets on the right would be greater than the sum of the moments of those on the left. Thus the wheels would turn continually in the same direction as the hands of a watch. The fallacy in the argument is obvious. Another large group of machines for producing perpetual motion depended on the use of a magnet to raise a mass which was then allowed to fall under gravity. Thus, if the bob of a simple pendulum was made of iron, it was thought that magnets fixed near the highest points which were reached by the bob in the swing of the pendulum would draw the bob up to the same height in each swing and thus give perpetual motion, but the inventors omitted to notice that the bob of the pendulum would gradually get magnetised. Of course it is only in isolated systems that the total amount of energy is constant, and, if a source of external energy can be obtained from which energy is continually introduced into the system, perpetual motion is, in a sense, possible ; though even here materials would ultimately wear out. Streams, wind, the 96 MECHANICAL RECREATIONS [CH. V solar heat, and the tides are among the more obvious of such sources. There was at Paris in the latter half of the eighteenth century a clock which was an ingenious illustration of such perpetual motion*. The energy which was stored up in it to maintain the motion of the pendulum was provided by the expansion of a silver rod. This expansion was caused by the daily rise of temperature, and by means of a train of levers it wound up the clock. There was a disconnecting apparatus, so that the contraction due to a fall of temperature produced no effect, and there was a similar arrangement to prevent over- winding. I believe that a rise of eight or nine degrees Fahrenheit was sufficient to wind up the clock for twenty-four hours. By utilizing the rise and fall of the barometer, James Cox, a London jeweller of the eighteenth century, produced, in an analogous way, a clock f which ran continuously without winding up. I have in my possession a watch which produces the same effect by somewhat different means. Inside the case is a steel weight, and if the watch is carried in a pocket this weight rises and falls at every step one takes, somewhat after the manner of a pedometer. The weight is raised by the action of the person who has it in his pocket in taking a step, and in falling it winds up the spring of the watch. On the face is a small dial showing the number of hours for which the watch is wound up. As soon as the hand of this dial points to fifty-six hours, the train of levers which winds up the watch disconnects automatically, so as to prevent over- winding the spring, and it reconnects again as soon as the watch has run down eight hours. The watch is an excellent time-keeper, and a walk of about a couple of miles is sufficient to wind it up for twenty- four hours. ♦ Ozanam, 1S03 edition, vol. ii, p. 105 ; 1840 edition, p. 238. t A full description of the mechanism will be found in the English Mechanic, April 30, 1909, pp. 288—289. CH. V] MECHANICAL RECREATIONS 97 Models. I may add here the observation, which is well known to mathematicians, but is a perpetual source of disap- pointment to ignorant inventors, that it frequently happens that an accurate model of a machine will work satisfactoril}^ while the machine itself will not do so. One reason for this is as follows. If all the parts of a model are magnified in the same proportion, say m, and if thereby a line in it is increased in the ratio m : 1, then the areas and volumes in it will be increased respectively in the ratios m? : 1 and m^ : 1. For example, if the side of a cube is doubled then a face of it will be increased in the ratio 4 : 1 and its volume will be increased in the ratio 8:1. Now if all the linear dimensions are increased m times then some of the forces that act on a machine (such, for example, as the weight of part of it) will be increased I'n? times, while others which depend on area (such as the sustaining power of a beam) will be increased only m? times. Hence the forces that act on the machine and are brought into play by the various parts may be altered in different proportions, and thus the machine may be incapable of producing results similar to those which can be produced by the model. The same argument has been adduced in the case of animal life to explain why very large specimens of any particular breed or species are usually weak. For example, if the linear dimen- sions of a bird were increased n times, the work necessary to give the power of flight would have to be increased no less than n^ times*. Again, if the linear dimensions of a man of height 5 ft. 10 in. were increased by one-seventh his height would become 6 ft. 8 in., but his weight would be increased in the ratio 512 : 843 {i.e. about half as much again), while the cross sections of his legs, which would have to bear this weight, would be increased only in the latio 64:49; thus in some respects he would be less etficieut than before. Of course the increased dimensions, length of limb, or size of muscle might be of greater advantage than the relative loss of strength ; hence the problem of what are the most efficient * Helmholtz, Gesammelte Ahhandlunrjen, Leipzig, 1881, vol. i, p. 165. B. R. 7 98 MECHANICAL RECREATIOXS [CH. V proportions is not simple, but the above argument will serve to illustrate the fact that the working of a machine may not be similar to that of a model of it. Leaving now these elementary considerations I pass on to some other mechanical questions. Sailing quicker than the Wind. As a kinematical paradox I may allude to the possibility of sailing quicker than the wind hloivs, a fact which strikes many people as curious. The explanation* depends on the consideration of the velocity of the wind relative to the boat. Perhaps, however, a non-mathematician will find the solution simplified if I con- sider first the effect of the wind-pressure on the back of the sail which drives the boat forward, and second the resistance to motion caused by the sail being forced through the air. When the wind is blowing against a plane sail the resultant pressure of the wind on the sail may be resolved into two components, one perpendicular to the sail (but which in general is not a function only of the component velocity in that direc- tion, though it vanishes when that component vanishes) and the other parallel to its plane. The latter of these has no effect on the motion of the ship. The component perpen- dicular to the sail tends to move the ship in that direction. This pressure, normal to the sail, may be resolved again into two components, one in the direction of the keel of the boat, the other in the direction of the beam of the boat. The former component drives the boat forward, the latter to lee- ward. It is the object of a boat-builder to construct the boat on lines so that the resistance of the water to motion forward shall be as small as possible, and the resistance to motion in a perpendicular direction (i.e. to leeward) shall be as large as possible ; and I will assume for the moment that the former of these resistances may be neglected, and that the latter is so large as to render motion in that direction impossible. Now, as the boat moves forward, the pressure of the air on the front of the sail will tend to stop the motion. As * Ozanam, 1803 edition, vol. iii, pp. 359, 367 ; 1840 edition, pp. 540, 543. CM. V] MECHANICAL RECKEATiOiNb 99 long as its component normal to the sail is less than the pressure of the wind behind the sail and normal to it, the resultant of the two will be a force behind the sail and normal to it which tends to drive the boat forwards. But as the velocity of the boat increases, a time will arrive when the pressure of the wind is only just able to balance the resisting force which is caused by the sail moving throingh the air. The velocity of the boat will not increase beyond this, and the motion will be then what mathematicians describe as ''steady." In the accompanying figure, let BAR represent the keel of a boat, B being the bow, and let SAL represent the sail. Suppose that the wind is blov/ing in the direction WA with a velocity u; and that this direction makes an angle 6 with the keel, i.e. angle V, A R= 6. Suppose that the sail is set so as to make an angle a with the keel, i.e. angle BAS = a, and therefore angle WAL = 6 -\- a. Suppose finally that v is the velocity of the boat in the direction AB. I have already shown that the solution of the problem depends on the relative directions and velocities of the wind and the boat; hence to find the result reduce the boat to rest by impressing on it a velocity v in the direction BA. The resultant velocity of v parallel to BA and of u parallel to WA will be parallel to SL, if v sin a = w sin (^ + a) ; and in this case the resultant pressure perpendicular to the sail vaoishes. Thus, for steady motion we have v sin a = t( sin (0 + a). Hence, whenever sin (^+ a) > sin a, we have v > u. Suppose, 7—2 100 MECHANICAL RECREATIONS [CH. V to take one instance, the sail to be tixed, that is, suppose a to be a constant. Then ?; is a maximum if ^ + a = Jtt, that is, if is equal to the complement of o.. In this case we have i} — xi cosec a, and therefore v is greater than u. Hence, if the wind makes the same angle a abaft the beam that the sail makes with the keel, the velocity of the boat will be greater than the velocity of the wind. Next, suppose that the boat is running close to the wind, so that the wind is before the beam (see figure below), then in the same way as before we have v sin ol — u sin {6 + a), or V sin o. — u sin 6, where <f> = angle ^VAS = 17— — a. Hence v=u sin <jb cosec a. Let w be the component velocity of the boat in the teeth of the wind, that is, in the direction A W. Then we have w = v cos BA W = V cos {a+ <l)) = u sin <^ cosec x cos (a + <^). If a is constant, this is a maximum when (f> = lir — ^a; and, if (j> has this value, then w = -^u {cosec a— 1). This formula shows that w is greater than u, if sin a < J. Thus, if the sails can be set so that a is less than sin~^J, that is, rather less than 19° 29', and if the wind has the direction above assigned, then the component velocity of the boat in the face of the wind is greater than the velocity of the wind. The above theory is curious, but it must be remembered that in practice considerable allowance has to be made for the fact that no boat for use on water can be constructed in which the resistance to motion in the direction of the keel can be wholly neglected, or which would not drift slightly to leeward if the wind was not dead astern Still this makes less CH. V] MECHANICAL RECREATIONS ICl difference than might be thouglit by a landsman. In the case of boats sailing on smooth ice the assumptions made are sub- stantially correct, and the practical results are said to agree closely with the theory. Boat moved by a Rope. There is a form of boat-racing, occasionally used at reg.'ittas, which affords a somewhat curious illustration of certain mechanical principles. The only thing supplied to the cre^v is a coil of rope, and they have, without leaving the boat, to propel it from one point to another as rapidly as possible. The motion is given by tying one end of the rope to the after thwart, and giving the other end a series of violent jerks in a direction parallel to the keel. I am told that in still water a pace of two or three miles an hour can be thus attained. The chief cause for this result seems to be that the friction between the boat and the water retards all relative motion, but it is not great enough to affect materially motion caused by a sufficiently big impulse. Hence the usual movements of the crew in the boat do not sensibly move the centre of gravity of themselves and the boat, but this does not apply to an impul- sive movement, and if the crew in making a jerk move their centre of gravity towards the bow n times more rapidly than it returns after the jerk, then the boat is impelled forwards at least n times more than backwards : hence on the whole the motion is forwards. Motion of Fluids and Motion in Fluids. The theories of motion of fluids and motion in fluids involve considerable difficulties. Here I will mention only one or two instances — mainly illustrations of Hauksbee's Law. Haiihshees Law. When a fluid is in motion the pressure is less than when it is at rest*. Thus, if a current of air is * See BesJint, Hydromechanics, Cambridge, 18G7, art. 119, where however it is assumed that the pressure is proportional to the density. Hauksbee was the earliest writer who called attention to the problem, but I do not know who first explained the phenomenon; some references to it are given by Willis, Camhridije PhilowpJdcal Traiiaactiona, 1830, vol. in, pp. 129 — 140. 102 MECHANICAL RECREATIONS [CH. V moving in a tube, the pressure on the sides of the tube is less than when the air is at rest — and the quicker the air moves the smaller is the pressure. This fact was noticed by Hauksbee nearly two centuries ago. In an elastic perfect fluid in which the pressure is proportional to the density, the law connecting the pressure, 'p, and the steady velocity, v, is ^ = Tla"'^, where n and a are constants : the establishment of the corresponding formula for gases where the pressure is proportional to a power of the density presents no difficulty. The principle is illustrated by a twopenny toy, on sale in most toy-shops, called the pneumatic mystery. This consists of a tube, with a cup-shaped end in which rests a wooden ball. If the tube is held in a vertical position, with the mouthpiece at the upper end and the cup at the lower end, then, if anyone blows hard through the tube and places the ball against the cup, the ball will remain suspended there. The explanation is that the pressure of the air below the ball is so much greater than the pressure of the air in the cup that the ball is held up. The same effect may be produced by fastening to one end of a tube a piece of cardboard having a small hole in it. If a piece of paper is placed over the hole and the experimenter blows through the tube, the paper will not be detached from the card but will bend so as to allow the egress of the air. An exactly similar experiment, described in many text- books on hydromechanics, is made as follows. To one end of a straight tube a plane disc is fitted which is capable of sliding on wires projecting from the end of the tube. If the disc is placed at a small distance from the end, and anyone blows steadily into the tube, the disc will be drawn towards the tube instead of being blown off the wires, and will oscillate about a position near the end of the tube. In the same way we may make a tube by placing two books on a table with their backs parallel and an inch or so apart and laying a sheet of newspaper over them. If anyone blows steadily through the tube so formed, the paper will be sucked in instead of being blown out. CH. V] MECHANiCAL RECREATIONS 103 The following experimeQt is explicable by the same aigii- ment. On the top of a vertical axis balance a thin horizontal rod. At each end of this rod fasten a small vertical square or sail of thin cardboard — the two sails being in the same plane. If anyone blows close to one of these squares and in a direction parallel to its plane, the square will move towards the side on which one is blowing, and the rod with the two sails will rotate about the axis. The experiments above described can be performed so as to illustrate Hauksbee's Law ; but unless care is taken other causes will be also introduced which affect the phenomena : it is however unnecessary for ray purpose to go into these details. Cut on a Tennis-Bail. Racquet and court-tennis players know that if a strong cut is given to a ball it can be made to rebound off a vertical wall and then (without striking the floor or any other wall) return and hit the wall again. This affords another illustration of Hauksbee's Law The effect had been noticed by Isaac Newton, who, in his letter to Oldenburg, February, 1672, N.S., says "I remembered that I had often seen *'a tennis-ball struck with an oblique racket describe such "a curve line. For, a circular as well as a progressive motion " being communicated to it by that stroke, its parts on that side " where the motions conspire, must press and beat the contiguous "air more violently than on the other; and there excite a "reluctancy and re-action of the air proportionably greater. " And. . .globular bodies," thus acquiring " a circulating motion. . . " ought to feel the greater resistance from the ambient aether " on that side where the motions conspire, and thence be con- " tinually bowed to the other." The question was discussed by Magnus in 1837 and by Tait in various papers from 1887 to 1896. The explanation* is that the cut causes the ball to rotate rapidly about an axis through * See Magnus on ^ Die Abiveichung der Geschosse^ in the Ahliandlungen der Alcademie der Wissenschajten, Berlin, 1852, pp. 1 — 23; Lord Rayleigh, ' On the irregular flight of a tennis ball,' Messenger of Mathematics, Cambridge, 1878, vol. vn, pp. 14 — 16; and P. G. Tait, Transactions Royal Society, Edinburgh, vol. xxTii, 1893; or Collected Scientific Papers^ Cambridge, vol. u, 1900, pp. 356—387, and references therein. 104 MECHANICAL RECREATIONS [CH. V its centre of fio^ure, and the friction of the surface of the ball on the air produces a sort of whirlpool. This rotation is in addition to its motion of translation. Suppose the ball to be spherical and rotating about an axis through its centre perpendicular to the plane of the paper in the direction of the arrow-head, and at the same time moving through still air from left to right parallel to FQ. Any motion of the ball perpendicular to PQ will be produced by the pressure of the air on the surface of the ball, and this pressure will, by Hauksbee's Law, be greatest where the velocity of the air relative to the ball is least, and vice versa. To find the velocity of the air relative to the ball we may reduce the centre of the ball to rest, and suppose a stream of air to impinge on the surface of the ball moving with a velocity equal and opposite to that of the centre of the ball. The air is not frictionless, and therefore the air in contact with the surface of the ball will be set in motion by the rotation of the ball and will form a sort of whirlpool rotating in the direction of the arrow-head in the figure. To find the actual velocity of this air relative to the ball we must consider how the motion due to the whirlpool is affected by the motion of the stream of air parallel to QP. The air at A in the whirlpool is moving against the stream of air there, and therefore its velocity is retarded : the air at B in the whirlpool is moving in the same direction as the stream of air there, and therefore its velocity is increased. Hence the relative velocity of the air at A is less than at B, and, since the pressure of the air is greatest where the velocity is least, the pressure of the air on the surface of the ball at A is greater than on that at B. Hence the ball is forced by this pressure in the direction from the line PQ, which we may CH. V] MECHANICAL RECREATIONS 105 suppose to represent the section of the vertical wall in a racquet- court. In other words, the ball tends to move at right angles to the line in which its centre is movincr and in the direction in which the surface of the front of the ball is being carried by the rotation. Sir J. J. Thomson has pointed out that if we consider the direction in which the nose (or foremost point) of the ball is travelling, we may sum up the results by saying that the ball always follows its nose. Lord Rayleigh has shown that the line of action of resulting force on the ball is perpendicular to the plane containing the direction (m) of motion of the centre of the ball and the axis (s) of spin, and its magnitude varies directly as the velocity of translation, the velocity of spin, and the sine of the angle between the lines m and s. In the case of a lawn tennis-ball, the shape of the ball is altered by a strong cut, and this introduces additional compli- cations. Sp{7i on a Cricket-Ball. The curl of a cricket-ball in its flight through the air, caused by a spin given by the bowler in delivering the ball, is explained by the same reasoning. Thus suppose the ball is delivered in a direction lying in a vertical plane containing the middle stumps of the two wickets. A spin round a horizontal axis parallel to the crease in a direction which the bowler's umpire would describe as positive, namely, counter clock- wise, will, in consequence of the friction of the air, cause it to drop, and therefore decrease the length of the pitch. A spin in the opposite direction will cause it to rise, and therefore lengthen the pitch. A spin round a vertical axis in the positive direction, as viewed from above, will make it curl sideways in the air to the left, that is, from leg to off. A spin in the opposite direction will make it curl to the right. A spin given to the ball round the direction of motion of the centre of the ball will not sensibly affect the motion through the air, though it would cause the ball, on hitting the ground, to break. Of course these various kinds of spin can be combined. Flight of Golf-Balls. The same argument explains the effect of the spin given to a golf-ball by impact with the club. Here the motion takes place for a longer interval of time^ and 106 MECHANICAL RECREATIONS [CH. V additional complications are introduced by the fact that the velocities of translation and rotation are retarded at different rates and that usually there will be some wind blowing in a cross direction. But generally we may say that the effect of the under-cut given by a normal stroke is to cause the ball to rise, and therefore to lengthen the carry. Also, if a wind is blowing across the line to the hole from right to left, a drive, if the player desires a long carry and has sufficient command over his club, should be pulled ; but an approach shot, if it is desired that the ball should fall dead, should be sliced because then the ball as soon as it meets the wind will tend to fall dead. Con- versely, if the wind is blowing across the course from left to right, the drive should be sliced if a long carry is desired, and an approach shot sViould be pulled if it is desired that the ball should fall dead. The questions involving the application of Hauksbee's Law are easy as compared with many of the problems in fluid motion. The analysis required to attack most of these problems is beyond the scope of this book, but one of them may be worth mentioning even though no explanation is given. The Theory of the Flight of Birds. A mechanical problem of great interest is the explanation of the means by which birds are enabled to fly for considerable distances with no (perceptible) motion of the wings. Albatrosses, to take an instance of special difficulty, have been known to follow for some days ships sailing at the rate of nine or ten knots, and sometimes for considerable periods there is no motion of the wings or body which can be detected, while even if the bird moved its wings it is not easy to understand how it has the muscular energy to propel itself so rapidly and for such a length of time. Of this phenomenon various explanations* have been suggested. Notable among these are Sir Hiram Maxim's of upward air- currents. Lord Rayleigh's of variations of the wind velocity at different heights above the ground, Dr S. P. Langley's of the * See G. H. Bi-yan in the Transactions of the British Association for 1896, vol. Lxvi, pp. 726—723. CH. V] MECHANICAL RECREATIONS 107 incessant occurrence of crusts of wind separated by lulls, and Dr Br3'-an's of vortices in the atmosphere. It now seems reasonably certain that the second and third of these sources of energy account for at least a portion of the observed phenomena. The effect of the third cause may be partially explained by noting that the centre of gravity of the bird with extended wings is slightly below the aeroplane or wing surface, so that the animal forms a sort of parachute. The effect of a sudden gust of wind upon such a body is that the aeroplane is set in motion more rapidly than the suspended mass, causing the structure to heel over so as to receive the wind on the under surface of the aeroplane, and this lifts the suspended mass giving it an upward velocity. When the wind falls the greater inertia of the mass carries it on upwards causing the aeroplane to again present its under side to the air; and if while the parachute is in this position the wind is still blowing from the side, the suspended mass is again lifted. Thus the more the bird is blown about, the more it rises in the air ; actually birds in flight are carried up by a sudden side gust of wind as we should expect from this theory. The fact that the bird is in motion tends also to keep it up, for it has been recently shown that a horizontal plane under the action of gravity falls to the ground more slowly if it is travelling through the air with horizontal velocity than it would do if allowed to fall vertically, hence the bird's forward motion causes it to fall through a smaller height between successive gusts of wind than it would do if it were at rest. Moreover it has been proved experimentally that the horse-power required to support a body in horizontal flight by means of an aeroplane is less for high than for low speeds : hence when a side-wind (that is, a wind at right angles to the bird's course) strikes the bird, the lift is increased in consequence of the bird's lor ward velocity. Curios A Physica. When I was writing the first edition of these Recreations, I put together a chapter, following this one, on " Some Piiysical Questions," dealing with problems such as, in the Theory of Sound, the explanation of the fact that in 108 MECHANICAL RECREATIONS [CH. V some of Captain Parry's experiments the report of a cannon, when fired, travelled so much more rapidly than the sound of the human voice that observers heard the report of the cannon when fired before that of the order to fire it* : in the Kinetic Theory of Gases, the complications in our universe that might be produced by "Maxwell's demon "f : in the Theory of Optics, the explanation of the Japanese "magic mirrors/'J which reflect the pattern on the back of the mirror, on which the light does not fall : to which I might add the theory of the " spectrum top," by means of which a white surface, on which some black lines are drawn, can be moved so as to give the impression§ that the lines are coloured (red, green, blue, slate, or drab), and the curious fact that the colours change with the direction of rotation : it has also been recently shown that if two trains of waves, whose lengths are in the ratio m — 1 : ??i + 1, be superposed, then every mth wave in the system will be big — thus the current opinion that every ninth wave in the open sea is bigger than the other waves may receive scientific confirma- tion. There is no lack of interesting and curious phenomena in physics, and in some branches, notably in electricity and magnetism, the difficulty is rather one of selection, but I felt that the connection with mathematics was in general either too remote or t(jo technical to justify the insertion of such a collection in a work on elementary mathematical recreations, and therefore I struck out the chapter. I mention the fact now partly to express the hope that some physicist will one day give us a collection of the kind, partly to suggest these questions to those who are interested in such matters. * The fact is well authenticated. Mr Earnshaw (Philosophical Transactions, London, 1860, pp. 133 — 148) explained it by the acceleration of a wave caused by the formation of a kind of bore, a view accepted by Clerk Maxwell and most physicists, but Sir George Airy thought that the explanation was to be found in physiology; see Airy's Sound, second edition, London, 1871, pp. 141, 142. t See Theory of Heat, by J. Clerk Maxwell, second edition, London, 1872, p. 308. X See a mei-uoir by W. E. Ayrton and J. Perry, Proceedings of the Royal Society of London, part i, 1879, vol. xxviii, pp. 127—148. § See letters from Mr C. E. Benham and others in Nature, 1894-5; and a paper read by Prof. G. D. Liveing before the Cambridge Philosophical Society, November 26, 1894. 10^ CHAPTER Yl, CHESS BOARD RECREATIONS. A chess-board and chess-men lend themselves to recreations many of which are geometrical. The problems are, however, of a distinct type, and sufficiently numerous to deserve a chapter to themselves. A few problems which might be included in this chapter have been already considered in chapter I v. The ordinary chess-board consists of 64 small squares, known as cells, arranged as shown below in 8 rows and 8 columns. Usually the cells are coloured alternately white and black, or white and red. The cells may be defined by the numbers 11, 12, &c., where the first digit denotes the number of the column. 18 28 38 48 58 68 78 88 17 27 37 47 57 67 77 87 16 26 36 46 56 66 76 86 85 84 15 25 35 45 55 65 75 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 13 23 33 43 53 63 73 83 32 12 22 32 42 52 62 72 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81 and the second digit the number of the row — the two digits representing respectively the abscissa and ordinate of the mid- points of the cells. I use this notation in the following pages. A generalized board consists of n^ cells arranged in n rows and 110 CHESS-BOARD RECREATIONS [CH. VI n columns. Most of the problems which I shall describe can be extended to meet the case of a board of n^ cells. The usual chess-pieces are Kings, Queens, Bishops, Knights, and Rooks or Castles; there are also Pawns. I assume that the moves of these pieces are known to the reader. With the game itself and with chess problems of the usual type I do not concern myself Particular positions of the pieces may be subject to mathematical analysis, but in general the moves open to a player are so numerous as to make it im- possible to see far ahead. Probably this is obvious, but it may emphasize how impossible it is to discuss the theory of the game effectively if I add that it has been shown that there may be as many as 197299 ways of playing the first four moves, and nearly 72000 different positions at the end of the first four moves (two on each side), of which 16556 arise when the players move pawns only*. Relative Value of Pieces. The first question to which I will address myself is the determination of the relative values of the different chess-pieces f. If a piece is placed on a cell, the number of cells it com- mands depends in general on its position. We may estimate the value of the piece by the average number of cells which it commands when placed in succession on every cell of the board. This is equivalent to saying that the value of a piece may be estimated by the chance that if it and a king are put at random on the board, the king will be in check : if no other re- striction is imposed this is called a simple check. On whatever cell the piece is originally placed there will remain 63 other cells on which the king may be placed. It is equally probable that it may be put on any one of them. Hence the chance that it will be in check is 1/63 of the average number of cells commanded by the piece. ♦ Vlntermediaire des Mathematiciens, Paris, December, 1903, vol. x, pp. 305 — 308 : also Royal Engineers Journal, London, August — November, 1889 ; or British Association Transactions, 1890, p. 745. t H. M. Taylor, Philosophical Magazine^ March, 1876, series 5, vol. i, pp. 221—229. CH. Vl] CHESS-BOARD RECREATIONS 111 A rook put on any cell commands 14 other cells. Wherever the rook is placed there will remain 63 cells on which the king may be placed, and on which it is equally likely that it will be placed. Hence the chance of a simple check is 14/63, that is, 2/9. Similarly on a board of rt? cells the chance is 2 (n - \)l{n' - 1), that is, 2/(n + 1). A knight when placed on any of the 4 corner cells like 11 commands 2 cells. When placed on any of the 8 cells like 12 and 21 it commands 3 cells. When placed on any of the 4 cells like 22 or any of the 16 boundary cells like 13, 14, 15, 16, it commands 4 cells. When placed on any of the 16 cells like 23, 24, 25, 26, it commands 6 cells. And when placed on any of the remaining 16 middle cells it commands 8 cells. Hence the average number of cells commanded by a knight put on a chess-board is (4x2-1-8x3-1- 20 x4-|- 16x6 + 16 x 8)/64, that is, 336/64. Accordingly if a king and a knight are put on the board, the chance that the king will be in simple check is 336/64 X 63, that is 1/12. Similarly on a board of n^ cells the chance is 8 (n — 2)/n'^ (n + 1). A bishop when placed on any of the ring of 28 boundary cells commands 7 cells. When placed on any ring of the 20 cells next to the boundary cells, it commands 9 cells. When placed on any of the 12 cells forming the next ring, it commands 11 cells. When placed on the 4 middle cells it commands 13 cells. Hence, if a king and a bishop are put on the board the chance that the king will be in simple check is (28 X 7 -h 20 X 9 -i- 12 X ll-f 4 X 13)/64 x 63, that is, 5/36. Similarly on a board of n^ cells, when n is even, the chance is 2 (2n — l)/3n (n + 1). When n is odd the analysis is longer, owing to the fact that in this case the number of white cells on the board differs from the number of black cells. I do not give the work, which presents no special difficulty. A queen when placed on any cell of a board commands all the cells which a bishop and a rook when placed on that cell would do. Hence, if a king and a queen are put on the board, the chance that the king will be in simple check is 2/9 + 5/36, that is, 13/36. Similarly on a board of n^ cells, when n is even, the chance is 2 {5n — l)/3?i (w + 1). 112 CHESS-BOARD RECREATIONS [CH. VI On the above assumptions the relative vahies of the rook, knight, bishop, and queen are 16, 6, 10, 26. According to Staunton's Chess-Player s Handbook the actual values, estimated empirically, are in the ratio of 548, 305, 350, 994 ; according to Von Bilguer the ratios are 540, 350, 360, 1000 — the value of a pawn being taken as 10. There is considerable discrepancy between the above results as given by theory and practice. It has been, however, sug- gested that a better test of the value of a piece would be the chance that w^hen it and a king were put at random on the board it would check the king without giving the king the opportunity of taking it. This is called a safe check as distin- guished from a simple check. Applying the same method as above, the chances of a safe check work out as follows. For a rook the chance of a safe check is (4 X 12 + 24 X 11 + 36 X 10)/64 x 63, that is, 1/6 ; or on a board of n^ cells is 2{n — 2)/n (/i + 1). For a knight all checks are safe, and therefore the chance of a safe check is 1/12 ; or on a. board of ?i^ cells is 8(n — 2)ln^{n + 1). For a bishop the chance of a safe check is 364/64 x 63, that is, 13/144; or on a board of n^ cells, when n is even, is 2 (n — 2) {2n — S)ISn^ (n + 1). For a queen the chance of a safe check is 1036/64 x 63, that is, 37/144 ; or on a board of ri" cells, is 2 {n - 2) {5n - 3)/3?i2 {n + 1), when n is even. On this view the relative values of the rook, knight, bishop, queen are 24, 12, 13, 37 ; while, according to Staunton, experi- ence shows that they are approximately 22, 12, 14, 40, and according to Von Bilguer, 18, 12, 12, 33. The same method can be applied to compare the values of combinations of pieces. For instance the value of two bishops (one restricted to white cells and the other to black cells) and two rooks, estimated by the chance of a simple check, are respectively 35/124 and 37/93. Hence on this view a queen in general should be more valuable than two bishops but less valuable than two rooks. This agrees with experience. An analogous problem consists in finding the chance that two kings, put at random on the board, will not occupy adjoin- ing cells, that is, that neither would (were such a move possible) CH. Vl] CHESS-BOARD RECREATIONS 113 check the other. The chance is 43/48, and therefore the chance that they will occupy adjoining cells is 5/48. If three kings are put on the board, the chance that no two of them occupy adjoining cells is 1061/1488. The corresponding chances* for a board of n^ cells are (n -l){n- 2) (n^ + Sn- 2)ln^ (n^ - 1) and (n - 1) (n - 2) (n' + 371^ - 20^1^ - 30n + lS2)/n' (n' - 1) (n^ - 2). The Eight Queens Problem f. One of the classical problems connected with a chess-board is the determination of the number of ways in which eight queens can be placed on a chess-board — or more generally, in which n queens can be placed on a board of n" cells — so that no queen can take any other. This was proposed originally by Franz Nauck in 1850. In 1874 Dr S. GUntherJ suggested a method of solution by means of determinants. For, if each symbol represents the cor- responding cell of the board, the possible solutions for a board of 71- cells are given by those terms, if any, of the determinant Ch 0, Ci 0. tts h 78 13. a. ^4 7b A di a. ^2n— 3 P2n— 2 ^2n— I in which no letter and no suffix appears more than once. The reason is obvious. Every term in a determinant con- tains one and only one element out of every row and out of every column : hence any term will indicate a position on the board in which the queens cannot take one another by moves rook-wise. Again in the above determinant the letters and suffixes are so arranged that all the same letters and all the * V Intcrmidiaire des Mathematiciens, Paris, 1897, vol. rv, p. 6, and 1901, vol. VIII, p. 140. t On the history of this problem see W. Ahrens, Mathematische Unter- haliungen und Spiele, Leipzig, 1901, chap. ix. X Grunert's Archiv der Mathematik und Physik, 1874, vol. LVi, pp. 281 — 202. B. R. 8 114 CHESS-BOARD RECREATIONS [CH. VI same suffixes lie along bishop's paths : hence, if we retain only those terms in each of which all the letters and all the suffixes are different, they will denote positions in which the queens cannot take one another by moves bishop- wise. It is clear that the signs of the terms are immaterial. In the case of an ordinary chess-board the determinant is of the 8th order, and therefore contains 8!, that is, 40320 terms, so that it would be out of the question to use this method for the usual chess-board of 64 cells or for a board of larger size unless some way of picking out the required terms could be discovered. A way of effecting this was suggested by Dr J. VV.L. Glaisher* in 1874, and so far as I am aware the theory remains as he left it. He showed that if all the solutions of n queens on a board of n^ cells were known, then all the solutions of a certain type for n + 1 queens on a board of {n-{-Vf cells could be deduced, and that all the other solutions of w + 1 queens on a board of {n + Xf cells could be obtained without difficulty. The method will be sufficiently illustrated by one instance of its application. It is easily seen that there are no solutions when n = 2 and ?i = 3. If n = 4 there are two terms in the determinant which give solutions, namely, b^c^js/Ss and c^^jb^'y^. To find the solutions when 71 = 5, Glaisher proceeded thus. In this case, Gllnther's determinant is di h Cs (h 65 13.2 as h C5 de 78 ^A «5 ^6 C7 ^4 75 ^6 CI7 bs ^5 Se 77 A Ctg To obtain those solutions (if any) which involve a^ it is sufficient to append a^ to such of the solutions for a board of 16 cells as do not involve a. As neither of those given above involves an a we thus get two solutions, namely, h^c^y^^^a^ and CsfizhyzCto- * Philosophical Magazine^ London, December, 1874, series 4, vol. xLvin, pp. 457—487. CH. Vl] CHESS-BOARD KECEEATIUNS 115 The solutions which involve a^ e^ and 65 can be written down by symmetry. The eight sohitions thus obtained are all dis- tinct ; we may call them of the first type. The above are the only solutions which can involve elements in the corner squares of the determinant. Hence the remaining solutions are obtainable from the determinant h Cz d. 13. «8 Ih C5 da 7» /54 (<5 h C7 ^. 75 /3. Clr hs 8e 77 13s If, in this, we take the minor of h.2 and in it replace by zero every term involving the letter b or the suffix 2 we shall get all solutions involving 63. But in this case the minor at once reduces to d^a^Bi^s- We thus get one solution, namely, bodss^ilSs- The solutions which involve ,8.2, B^, 8^, ^s, ^s, dg, and d^ can be obtained by symmetry. Of these eighfc solutions it is easily seen that only two are distinct : these may be called solutions of the second type. Similarly the remaining solutions must be obtained from the determinant Cs a. h C5 78 /3. a. be C7 75 A a, 77 If, in this, we take the minor of Cg, and in it replace by zero every term involving the letter c or the suffix 3, we shall get all the solutions which involve Cj. But in this case the minor vanishes. Hence there is no solution involving Cs, and therefore by symmetry no solutions which involve 73, 77, or C7. Had there been any solutions involving the third element in the first or last row or column of the determinant we should have described them as of the third type. 8—2 116 CHESS-BOARD RECREATIONS [CH. VI Thus in all there are ten and only ten solutions, namely, eight of the first type, two of the second type, and none of the third type. Similarly, if n = 6, we obtain no solutions of the first type, four solutions of the second type, and no solutions of the third type ; that is, four solutions in all. If n = 7, we obtain sixteen solutions of the first type, twenty-four solutions of the second tj^pe, no solutions of the third type, and no solutions of the fourth type ; that is, forty solutions in all. If ?z = 8, we obtain sixteen solutions of the first type, fifty-six solutions of the second type, and twenty solutions of the third type, that is, ninety- two solutions in all. It will be noticed that all the solutions of one type are not always distinct. In general, from any solution seven others can be obtained at once. Of these eight solutions, four consist of the initial or fundamental solution and the three similar ones obtained by turning the board through one, two, or three right angles ; the other four are the reflexions of these in a mirror : but in any particular case it may happen that the reflexions reproduce the originals, or that a rotation through one or two right angles makes no difference. Thus on boards of 4^, 5^, 6^ 7^ 8^ 92, 102 cells there are respectively 1, 2, 1, 6, 12, 46, 92 fundamental solutions ; while altogether there are respectively 2, 10, 4, 40, 92, 352, 724 solutions. The following collection of fundamental solutions may in- terest the reader. Each position on the board of the queens is indicated by a number, but as necessarily one queen is on each column I can use a simpler notation than that explained on page 109. In this case the first digit represents the number' of the cell occupied by the queen in the first column reckoned from one end of the column, the second digit the number in the second column, and so on. Thus on a board of 4* cells the solution 3142 means that one queen is on the 3rd square of the first column, one on the 1st square of the second column, one on the 4th square of the third column, and one on the 2nd square of the fourth column. If a fundamental solution gives rise to only four solutions the number which indicates it is placed CH. VI] CHESS-BOARD RECREATIONS 117 in curved brackets, ( ) ; if it gives rise to only two solutions the number which indicates it is placed in square brackets, [ ] ; the other fundamental solutions give rise to eight solutions each. On a board of 4^ cells there is 1 fundamental solution : namely, [3142]. On a board of 5* cells there are 2 fundamental solutions : namely, 14253, [25314]. It may be noted that the cyclic solutions 14253, 25314, 31425, 42531, 53142 give five super- posable arrangements by which five white queens, five black queens, five red queens, five yellow queens, and five blue queens can be put simultaneously on the board so that no queen can be taken by any other queen of the same colour. On a board of 6^ cells there is 1 fundamental solution: namely, (246135). The four solutions are superposable. The puzzle for this case is sold in the streets of London for a penny, a small wooden board being ruled in the manner shown in the diagram and having holes drilled in it at the points marked by dots. The object is to put six pins into the holes so that no two are connected by a straight line. On a board of 7^^ cells there are 6 fundamental solutions : namely, 1357246, 3572461, (5724613), 4613572, 3162574, (2574136). It may be noted that the solution 1357246 gives by cyclic permutations seven superposable arrangements. On a board of 8- cells there are 12 fundamental solutions : namely, 25713864, 57138642, 71386425, 82417536, 68241753, 36824175,64713528,36814752,36815724, 72418536, 26831475, (64718253). The arrangement in this order is due to Mr Oram. It will be noticed that the 10th, 11th, and 12th solutions some- what resemble the 4th, 6th, and 7th respectively. The 6th 118 CHESS-BOARD RECREATIONS [CH. VI solution is the only one in which no three queens are in a straight line. It is impossible* to find eight superposable so- lutions ; but we can in five typical ways pick out six solutions which can be superposed, and to some of these it is possible to add 2 sets of 7 queens, thus filling 62 out of the 64 cells with 6 sets of 8 queens and 2 sets of 7 queens, no one of which can take another of the same set. Here is such a solution : 16837425, 27368514, 35714286, 41586372, 52473861, 68241753, 73625140, 04152637. Similar superposition problems can be framed for boards of other sizes. On a board of 9^ cells there are 46 fundamental solutions, and on a board of 10- cells there are 92 fundamental solutions ; these were given by Dr A. Peinf. On a board of 11=* cells there are 341 fundamental solutions ; these have been given by Dr T. B. SpragueJ. On any board empirical solutions may be found with but little difiiculty, and Mr Derrington has constructed the following table of solutions : 2.4.1 2.4.1 3 3 for a board of 4? cells 2.4.6.1.3.5 2.4.6.1.8.5.7 2.4.6.8.3.1.7.5 2.4.1.7.9.6.3.5.8 2. 4. 6. 8. 10. 1.3. 5. 7. 9 2. 4. 6. 8. 10. 1.3. 5. 7. 9. 11 2. 4. 6. 8. 10. 12. 1.3. 5. 7. 9. 11 2 . 4 . 6 . 8 . 10 . 12 . 1 . 3 . 5 . 7 . 9 . 11 . 13 9 . 7 . 5 . 3. 1 . 13 . 11 . 6 . 4 . 2 . 14 . 12 . 10 . 8 15 . 9 . 7 . 5 . 3 . 1 . 13 . 11 . 6 . 4 . 2 . 14 . 12 . 10 . 8 2 . 4 . 6 . 8 . 10 . 12 . 14 . 16 . 1 . 3 . 5 . 7 . 9 . 11 . 13 . 15 2 . 4 . 6 . 8 . 10 . 12 . 14 . 16 . 1 . 3 . 5 . 7 . 9 . 11 . 13 . 15 . 17 2 . 4 . 6 . 8 . 10 . 12 . 14 . 16 . 18 . 1 . 3 . 5 . 7 . 9 . 11 . 13 . 15 . 17 2 . 4 . 6 . 8 . 10 . 12 . 14 . 16 . 18 . 1 . 3 . 5 . 7 . 9 . 11 . 13 . 15 . 17 . 19 12 . 10 . 8 . 6 . 4 . 2 . 20 . 18 . 16 . 14 . 9 . 7 . 5 . 3 . 1 . 19 . 17 . 15 . 13 21 . 12 . 10 . 8 . 6 . 4 . 2 . 20 . 18 . 16 . 14 . 9 . 7 . 5 . 3 . 1 . 19 . 17 . 15 11 13.11 62 72 8-^ 92 102 11" 12- 13- 142 152 1G2 172 182 192 20- 212 •t i> »» >> >i >» >» »> »> >» »> >> )» ») * See G. T. Bennett, The Messenger of Mathematics, Cambridge, June, 1909, vol. XXXIX, pp. 19 — 21. t Aufstellung von n Koniginnen auf einem Schachbrett von n^ Feldern, Leipzig, 1889. X Proceedings of the Edinburgh Mathematical Society, vol. xvii, 1898-9, pp. 43—68. CH. Vl] CHESS-BOARD RECREATIONS 119 and so on. The rule is obvious except when n is of the form 6m 4- 2 or Qin + 3. Maximum Pieces Problem*. The Eight Queens Problem suggests the somewhat analogous question of finding the maximum number of kings — or more generally of pieces of one t3rpe — which can be put on a board so that no one can take any other, and the number of solutions possible in each case. In the case of kings the number is 16; for instance, one solution is when they are put on the cells 11, 13, 15, 17, 31, 33, 35, 37, 51, 53, 55, 57, 71, 73, 75, 77. For queens, it is obvious that the problem is covered by the analysis already given, and the number is 8. For bishops the number is 14, the pieces being put on the boundary cells; for instance one solution is when they are put on the cells 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, there are 256 fundamental solutions. For knights the number is 32 ; for instance, they can be put on all the white or on all the black cells, and there are 2 fundamental solutions. For rooks it is obvious that the number is 8, and there are in all 8 ! solutions. Minimum Pieces Problem*. Another problem of a some- what similar character is the determination of the minimum number of kings — or more generally of pieces of one type — which can be put on a board so as to command or occupy all the cells. For kings the number is 9 ; for instance, they can be put on the cells 11, 14, 17, 41, 44, 47, 71, 74, 77. For queens the number is 5; for instance, they can be put on the cells 18, 35, 41, 76, 82. For bishops the number is 8; for instance, they can be put on the cells 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48. For knights the number is 12; for instance, they can be put on the cells 26, 32, 33, 35, 36, 43, 56, 63, 64, 66, 67, and 73— constituting four triplets arranged symmetrically. For rooks the number is 8, and the solutions are obvious. * Mr H. E. Dudcney has written on these problems m the WeeJdy Dispatch. 120 CHESS-BOARD RECREATIONS [CH. VI For queens the problem has been also discussed for a board of n^ cells where n has various values*. One queen can be placed so as to command all the cells when n = 2 or 3, and there is only 1 fundamental solution. Two queens are required when 71 = 4 ; and there are 3 fundamental solutions, namely, when they are placed on the cells 11 and 33, or on the cells 12 and 42, or on the cells 22, 23: these give 12 solutions in all. Three queens are required when ?i = 5 ; and there are 37 funda- mental solutions, giving 186 solutions in all. Three queens are also required when n = 6, but there is only 1 fundamental solution, namely, when the}?- are put on the cells 11, 35, and 53, giving 4 solutions in all. Four queens are required when 71 = 7, one solution is when they are put on the cells 12, 26, 41, 55. Jaenisch proposed also the problem of the determination of the minimum number of queens which can be placed on a board of n^ cells so as to command all the unoccupied cells, subject to the restriction that no queen shall attack the cell occupied by any other queen. In this case three queens are required when 71 = 4, for instance, they can be put on the cells 11, 23, 42 ; and there are 2 fundamental solutions, giving 16 solutions in all. Three queens are required when ti = 5, for instance, they can be put on the cells 11, 24, 43, or on the cells 11, 34, 53 ; and there are 2 fundamental solutions in all. Four queens are required when w = 6, for instance, when they are put on the cells 13, 36, 41, 64; and there are 17 fundamental solutions. Four queens are required when n=*I, and there is only 1 fundamental solu- tion, namely, that already mentioned, when they are put on the cells 12, 26, 41, 55, which gives 8 solutions in all. Five queens are required when n=8, and there are no less than 91 funda- mental solutions ; for instance, one is when they are put on the cells 11, 23, 37, 62, 76. I leave to any of my readers who may be interested in such questions the discussion of the corresponding problems for the * C. F. de Jaenisch, Applications de VAnalyse Mathematique au Jeu des Echecs, St Petersburg, 1862, Appendix, p. 244 et seg.; see also L' Inter mediaire des MatkcmaticienB, Paris, 1901, vol. viii, p. 88. CH. Vl] CHESS-BOARD RECREATIONS 121 other pieces *, and of the number of possible solutions in each case. A problem of the same nature would be the determination of the minimum number of queens (or other pieces) which can be placed on a board so as to protect one another and command all the unoccupied cells. For queens the number is 5 ; for instance, they can be put on the cells 24, 34, 44, 54 and 84. For bishops the number is 10; for instance, they can be put on the cells 24, 25, 34, 35, 44, 45, 64, 65, 74, and 75. For knights the number is 14; for instance, they can be put on the cells 32, 33, 36, 37, 43, 44, 45, 46, 63, 64, 65, 66, 73, and 76: the solution is semi-symmetrical. For rooks the number is 8, and a solution is obvious. I leave to any who are interested in the subject the determination of the number of solutions in each case. In connexion with this class of problems, I may mention two other questions, to which Captain Turton first called my attention, of a somewhat analogous character. The first of these is to place eight queens on a chess-board so as to command the fewest possible squares. Thus, if queens are placed on cells 21, 22, 62, 71, 73, 77, 82, 87, eleven cells on the board will not be in check; the same number can be obtained by other arrangements. Is it possible to place the eight queens so as to leave more than eleven cells out of check? I have never succeeded in doing so, nor in showing that it is impossible to do it. The other problem is to place m queens (m being less than 5) on a chess-board so as to command as many cells as possible. For instance, four queens can be placed in several ways on the board so as to command 58 cells besides those on which the queens stand, thus leaving only 2 cells which are not com- manded; for instance, queens may be placed on the cells 35, 41, * The problem for knights was discussed in Ulntermidiaire des Mathe- maticiens, Paris, 189G, vol. in, p. 58; 1897, vol. iv, pp. 15—17, 254; 1898, vol. V, pp. 87, 230—231. 122 CBESS-BOARD RECREATIONS [CH. VI 76, and 82. Analogous problems with other pieces will suggest themselves. There are endless similar questions in which combinations of pieces are involved. For instance, if queens are put on the cells 35, 41, 76, and 82 they command or occupy all but two cells, and these two cells may be commanded or occupied by a queen, a king, a rook, a bishop, or a pawn. If queens are put on the cells 22, 35, 43, and 54 they command or occupy all but three cells, and two of these three cells may be commanded by a knight which occupies the third of them. Re- Entrant Paths on a Chess-Board. Another problem connected with the chess-board consists in moving a piece in such a manner that it shall move successively on to every pos- sible cell once and only once. KnigMs Re-Entrant Path. I begin by discussing the classical problem of a knight's tour. The literature* on this subject is so extensive that I make no attempt to give a full account of the various methods for solving the problem, and I shall content myself by putting together a few notes on some of the solutions I have come across, particularly on those due to De Moivre, Euler, Vandermonde, WarnsdorfF, and Roget. On a board containing an even number of cells the path may or may not be re-entrant, but on a board containing an odd number of cells it cannot be re-entrant. For, if a knight begins on a white cell, its first move must take it to a black cell, the next to a white cell, and so on. Hence, if its path passes through all the cells, then on a board of an odd number of cells the last move must leave it on a cell of the same colour as that on which it started, and therefore these cells cannot be connected by one move. * For a bibliography see A. van der Linde, Geschichte und Literatur des Schachspiels, Berlin, 1874, vol. ii, pp. 101 — 111. On the problem and its history see a memoir by P. Volpicelli in Atti della Reale Accademia dei Linceiy Rome, 1872, vol. xxv, pp. 87 — 162 : also Applications de V Analyse Mathematique au Jeu des Echecs, by C. F. de Jaenisch, 3 vols., St Petersburg, 1862-3; and General Parmentier, Association Franraise pour I'avancement des ScienceSf 1891, 1892, 1894. CH. Vl] CHESS-BOARD RECREATIONS 123 The earliest solutions of which I have any knowledge are those given at the beginning of the eighteenth century by De Montmort and De Moivre*. They apply to the ordinary chess- board of 64 cells, and depend on dividing (mentally) the board into an inner square containing sixteen cells surrounded by an outer ring of cells two deep. If initially the knight is placed on a cell in the outer ring, it moves round that ring always in the same direction so as to fill it up completely — only going into the inner square when absolutely necessary. When the outer ring is filled up the order of the moves required for filling the remaining cells presents but little difficulty. If initially the knight is placed on the inner square the process must be reversed. The method can be applied to square and rectangular boards of all sizes. It is illustrated sufficiently by De Moivre 's solution which is given below, where the numbers 34 49 22 11 36 39 24 " 21 10 35 50 23 12 37 40 48 33 62 57 38 25 2 13 ' 20 51 54 63 60 41 26 I32 1 47 58 61 56 53r 14 3 |l9 8 55 52 59 64 27 42 46 31 6 17 44 29 4 15 7 18 45 30 5 16 A 28 30 21 6 15 28 19" 7 16 29 20 5 14 22 31 8 35 18 27 9 36 17 26 13 4 32 23 2 11 34 25 1 10 33 24 3 12 De Moivre^* Solution. Euler^s Thirty-six Cell Solution. Indicate the order in which the cells are occupied successively. I place by its side a somewhat similar re-entrant solution, due to Euler, for a board of 36 cells. If a chess-board is used it is convenient to place a counter on each cell as the knight leaves it. The earliest serious attempt to deal with the subject by * They were sent by their authors to Brook Taylor who seems to huve previously suggested the problem. I do not know where they were first pub- lished ; they were quoted by Ozanam and Moutucla, see Ozanam, 1803 edition, vol. I, p. 178 ; 1840 edition, p. 80. 124 CHESS-BOARD RECREATIONS [CH. VI mathematical analysis was made by Euler* in 1759 : it was due to a suggestion made by L. Bertrand of Geneva, who sub- sequently (in 1778) issued an account of it. This method is applicable to boards of any shape and size, but in general the solutions to which it leads are not symmetrical and their mutual connexion is not apparent. Euler commenced by moving the knight at random over the board until it has no move open to it. With care this will leave only a few cells not traversed : denote them by a, h, — His method consists in establishing certain rules by which these vacant cells can be interpolated into various parts of the circuit, and by ^vhich the circuit can be made re-entrant. The following example, mentioned by Legendre as one of exceptional difficulty, illustrates the method. Suppose that 55 58 29 40 27 44 19 22 22 25 50 39 52 35 60 "I 60 39 56 43 30 21 26 46 27 40 23 36 49 58 53 34 57 54 59 28 41 18 23 20 24 21 26 51 38 61 56 59 38 61 42 31 8 25 46 17 41 28 37 48 3 54 33 62 53 32 37 a 47 16 9 24 20 47 42 13 32 63 4 55 50 3 52 33 36 7 12 15 29 16 19 46 43 2 7 10 1 34 5 48 b 14 c 10 18 45 14 31 12 9 64 5 4 49 2 35 6 11 d 13 15 30 17 44 1 6 11 8 Figure i. Figure ii. Example of Euler^s Method. we have formed the route given in figure i above; namely, 1, 2, 3, ..., 59, 60; and that there are four cells left untraversed, namely, a, b, c, d. We begin by making the path 1 to 60 re-entrant. The cell 1 commands a cell p, where p is 32, 52, or 2. The cell 60 commands a cell q, where q is 29, 59, or 51. Then, if any of these values of p and q differ by unity, we can make the route ' MSmoires de Berlin for 1759, Berlin, 1766, pp. 310 — 337 ; or Commentationes Arithmeticae Collectae, St Petersburg, 1849, vol. i, pp. 337 — 355. CH. Vl] CHESS-BOARD RECREATIONS 125 re-entrant. This is the case here ii p = 52, q = 51. Thus the cells 1, 2, 3, ..., 51; 60, 59, ..., 52 form a re-entrant route of 60 moves. Hence, if we replace the numl)ers 60, 59, ..., 52 by 52, 53, . . . , 60, the steps will be numbered consecutively. I recom- mend the reader who wishes to follow the subsequent details of Euler's argument to construct this square on a piece of paper before proceeding further. Next, we proceed to add the cells a, b, d to this route. In the new diagram of 60 cells formed as above the cell a commands the cells there numbered 51, 53, 41, 25, 7, 5, and 3. It is in- different which of these we select : suppose we take 51. Then we must make 51 the last cell of the route of 60 cells, so that we can continue with a, b, d. Hence, if the reader will add 9 to every number on the diagram he has constructed, and then replace 61, 62, ..., 69 by 1, 2, ..,, 9, he will have a route which starts from the cell occupied originally by 60, the 60th move is on to the cell occupied originally by 51, and the 61st, 62nd, 63rd moves will be on the cells a, b, d respectively. It remains to introduce the cell c. Since c commands the cell now numbered 25, and 63 commands the cell now numbered 24, this can be effected in the same way as the first route was made re-entrant. In fact, the cells numbered 1, 2, ..., 24; 63, 62, ,.., 25, c form a knight's path. Hence we must replace 63, 62, ..., 25 by the numbers 25, 26, ..., 63, and then we can fill up c with 64. We have now a route which covers the whole board. Lastly, it remains to make this route re-entrant. First, we must get the cells 1 and 64 near one another. This can be effected thus. Take one of the cells commanded by 1, such as 28, then 28 commands 1 and 27. Hence the cells 64, 63, ..., 28; 1, 2, ..., 27 form a route; and this will be represented in the diagram if we replace the cells numbered 1, 2, ..., 27 by 27, 26, ..., 1. The cell now occupied by 1 commands the cells 26, 38, 54, 12, 2, 14, 16, 28; and the cell occupied by 64 commands the cells 13, 43, 63, 55. The cells 13 and 14 are consecutive, and therefore the cells 64, 63, ..., 14; 1, 2, ..., 13 form a route. 126 CHESS-BOARD RECREATIONS [CH. VI Hence we must replace the numbers 1, 2, ..., 13 by 13, 12, ..., 1, and we obtain a re-entrant route covering the whole board, which is represented in the second of the diagrams given above. Euler showed how seven other re-entrant routes can be deduced from any given re-entrant route. It is not difficult to apply the method so as to form a route which begins on one given cell and ends on any other given cell. Euler next investigated how his method could be modified so as to allow of the imposition of additional restrictions. An interesting example of this kind is where the first 32 moves are confined to one-half of the board. One solution of this is delineated below. The order of the first 32 moves 58 43 60 37 52 41 62 35 49 46 67 42 61 36 63 40 44 59 48 51 38 55 34 63 47 50 45 56 T 33 64 39 54 22 7 32 31 2 23 6 19 16 27 12 8 21 4 29 10 25 14 17 3 80 9 20 5 28 11 26 50 45 62 41 60 39 54 35 63 46 42 51 48 53 36 57 88 49 44 61 40 59 34 65 43 64 5 47 52 1 33 56 37 68 23 2 27 8 29 12 17 14 6 25 4 21 19 10 81 Is 3 22 7 28 9 30 13 Euler's Half-hoard Solution. Eogefs Half-board Solution, can be determined by Euler's method. It is obvious that, if to the number of each such move we add 32, we shall have a corresponding set of moves from 33 to 64 which would cover the other half of the board ; but in general the cell numbered 33 will not be a knight's move from that numbered 32, nor will 64 be a knight's move from 1. Euler however proceeded to show how the first 32 moves might be determined so that, if the half of the board con- taining the corresponding moves from 33 to 64 was twisted through two right angles, the two routes would become united and re-entrant. If x and y are the numbers of a cell reckoned from two consecutive sides of the board, we may call the cell CH. Vl] CHRSS-BOARD RECREATIONS 127 whose distances are respectively x and y from the opposite sides a complementary cell. Thus the cells (a?, y) and (9 — x, 9 — y) are complementary, where x and y denote respectively the column and row occupied by the cell. Then in Euler's solution the numbers in complementary cells differ by 32 : for instance, the cell (3, 7) is complementary to the cell (6, 2), the one is occupied by 57, the other b}^ 25. Roget's method, which is described later, can be also applied to give half-board solutions. The result is indicated above. The close of Euler's memoir is devoted to showing how the method could be applied to crosses and other rectangular figures. I may note in particular his elegant re-entrant sym- metrical solution for a square of 100 cells. The next attempt of any special interest is due to Vander- monde*, who reduced the problem to arithmetic. His idea was to cover the board by two or more independent routes taken at random, and then to connect the routes. He defined the position of a cell by a fraction x/y, whose numerator x is the number of the cell from one side of the board, and whose denominator y is its number from the adjacent side of the board; this is equivalent to saying that x and y are the co-ordinates of a cell. In a series of fractions denoting a knight's path, the differences between the numerators of two consecutive fractions can be only one or two, while the corre- sponding differences between their denominators must be two or one respectively. Also x and y cannot be less than 1 or greater than 8. The notation is convenient, but Vander- monde applied it merely to obtain a particular solution of the problem for a board of 64 cells: the method by which he effected this is analogous to that established by Euler, but it is applicable only to squares of an even order. The route that he arrives at is defined in his notation by the following fractions: 5/5, 4/3, 2/4, 4/5, 5/3, 7/4, 8/2, 6/1, 7/3, 8/1, 6/2, 8/3, 7/1, 5/2, 6/4, 8/5, 7/7, 5/8, 6/6, 5/4, 4/6, 2/5, 1/7, 3/8, 2/6, 1/8, 3/7, 1/6, 2/8, 4/7, 3/5, 1/4, 2/2, 4/1, 3/3, 1/2, 3/1, 2/3, 1/1, 3/2, 1/3, 2/1, 4/2, 3/4, 1/5, 2/7, 4/8, 3/6, * L'Hiistoire de VAcadeniie des Sciences for 1771, Paris, 1774, pp. 5GG— 574. 128 CHESS-BOARD RECREATIONS [CH. VI 4/4, 5/6, 7/5, 8/7, 6/8, 7/6, 8/8, 6/7, 8/6, 7/8, 5/7, 6/5, 8/4, 7/2, 5/1, 6/3. The path is re-entrant but unsymmetrical. Had he trans- ferred the first three fractions to the end of this series he would have obtained two symmetrical circuits of thirty-two moves joined unsymmetrically, and might have been enabled to advance further in the problem. Vandermonde also con- sidered the case of a route in a cube. In 1773 Collini* proposed the exclusive use of symmetrical routes arranged without reference to the initial cell, but con- nected in such a manner as to permit of our starting from it. This is the foundation of the modem manner of attacking the problem. The method was re-invented in 1825 by Prattf, and in 1840 by Roget, and has been subsequently employed by various writers. Neither Collini nor Pratt showed skill in using this method. The rule given by Roget is described later. One of the most ingenious of the solutions of the knight's path is that given in 1823 by Warnsdorff|. His rule is that the knight must be always moved to one of the cells from which it will command the fewest squares not already traversed. The solution is not symmetrical and not re-entrant ; moreover it is difficult to trace practically. The rule has not been proved to be true, but no exception to it is known : apparently it applies also to all rectangular boards which can be covered completely by a knight. It is somewhat curious that in most cases a single false step, except in the last three or four moves, will not affect the result. Wamsdorff added that when, by the rule, two or more cells are open to the knight, it may be moved to either or any of them indifferently. This is not so, and with great ingenuity two or three cases of failure have been constructed, but it would require exceptionally bad luck to happen accidentally on such a route. * Solution du Probleme du Cavalier au Jeu des Echecs, Mannheim, 1778. + Studies of Chess, sixth edition, London, 1825. X H. C. Wamsdorff, Des Rosselsprunges einfachste und allgemeinste Losung, Schmalkalden, 1823 : see also Jaenisch, vol. ii, pp. 56—61, 273 — 289. CH. Vl] CHESS-BOARD RECREATIONS 129 The above methods have been applied to boards of various shapes, especially to boards in the form of rectangles, crosses, and circles*. All the more recent investigations impose additional re- strictions : such as to require that the route shall be re-en- trant, or more generally that it shall begin and terminate on given cells. The simplest solution with which I am acquainted — and one which I believe is not generally known — is due to Rogetf. It divides the whole route into four circuits, which can be combined so as to enable us to begin on any cell and termi- nate on any other cell of a different colour. Hence, if we like to select this last cell at a knight's move from the initial cell, we obtain a re-entrant route. On the other hand, the rule is applicable only to square boards containing (4ny cells: for example, it could not be used on the board of the French jeu des dames J which contains 100 cells. Roget began by dividing the board of 64 cells into four quarters. Each quarter contains 16 cells, and these 16 cells can be arranged in 4 groups, each group consisting of 4 cells which form a closed knight's path. All the cells in each such path are denoted by the same letter Z, e, a, or p, as the case may be. The path of 4 cells indicated by the consonants I and the path indicated by the consonants p are diamond-shaped : the paths indicated respectively by the vowels e and a are square-shaped, as may be seen by looking at one of the four quarters in figure i below. Now all the 16 cells on a complete chess-board which are marked with the same letter can be combined into one circuit, and wherever the circuit begins we can make it end on any other cell in the circuit, provided it is of a different colour to the initial cell. If it is indifferent on what cell the circuit terminates we mav make the circuit re-entrant, and * See ex. gr. T. Ciccolini's work Del Cavallo degli Scacchi, Paris, 1836. t Philosophical Magazine, April, 1840, series 3, vol. xvi, pp. 305 — 309 ; see also the Quarterly Journal of Mathematics for 1877, vol. xiv, pp. 354 — 359. Some solutions, founded on Eoget's method, are given in the Leisure Hour^ Sept. 13, 1873, pp. 587—590 ; see also Ibid., Dec. 20, lt)73, pp. 813-815. b. u. 9 130 CHESS-BOARD KECREATIONS [CH. VI in this case we can make the direction of motion round each group (of 4 cells) the same. For example, all the cells marked p can be arranged in the circuit indicated by the successive numbers 1 to 16 in figure ii below. Similarly all the cells marked a can be combined into the circuit indicated by the numbers 17 to 32 ; all the I cells into the circuit 33 to 48 ; and all the e cells into the circuit 49 to 64. Each of the circuits indicated above is symmetrical and re-entrant. The consonant and the vowel circuits are said to be of opposite kinds. / € a P I e a P a P 1 e a P I e e I P a e I P a P a e I P a e I I e a P I e a P a P I e a P I e e I P a e I P a P a e I V a € I 34 51 32 16 38 63 18 3 31 14 35 52 17 2 39 54 50 33 16 29 56 37 4 19 13 30 49 36 1 20 17 65 40 48 63 28 9 44 22 5 27 12 45 64 21 8 41 58 62 47 10 25 60 43 6 23 11 26 61 46 7 24 59 42 Roget's Solution (i). RogeVs Solution (ii). The general problem will be solved if we can combine the four circuits into a route which will start from any given cell, and terminate on the 64th move on any other given cell of a different colour. To effect this Roget gave the two following rules. First. If the initial cell and the final cell are denoted the one by a consonant and the other by a vowel, take alternately circuits indicated by consonants and vowels, beginning with the circuit of 16 cells indicated by the letter of the initial cell and concluding with the circuit indicated by the letter of the final cell. Second. If the initial cell and the final cell are denoted both by consonants or both by vowels, first select a cell, Y, in the same circuit as the final cell, Z, and one move from it, next select a cell, X, belonging to one of the opposite circuits and one move from F. This is always possible. Then, leaving CH. Vl] CHESS-BOARD RECREATIONS 131 out the cells Z and F, it always will be possible, by the rule already given, to travel from the initial cell to the cell X in 62 moves, and thence to move to the final cell on the 64th move. In both cases however it must be noticed that the cells in each of the first three circuits will have to be taken in such an order that the circuit does not terminate on a corner, and it may be desirable also that it should not terminate on any of the border cells. This will necessitate some caution. As far as is consistent with these restrictions it is convenient to make these circuits re-entrant, and to take them and every group in them in the same direction of rotation. As an example, suppose that we are to begin on the cell numbered 1 in figure ii above, which is one of those in a p circuit, and to terminate on the cell numbered 64, which is one of those in an e circuit. This falls under the first rule : hence first we take the 16 cells marked jo, next the 16 cells marked a, then the 16 cells marked I, and lastly the 16 cells marked e. One way of effecting this is shown in the diagram. Since the cell 64 is a knight's move from the initial cell the route is re-entrant. Also each of the four circuits in the diagram is symmetrical, re-entrant, and taken in the same direction, and the only point where there is any apparent breach in the uniformity of the movement is in the passage from the cell numbered 32 to that numbered 33. A rule for re-entrant routes, similar to that of Roget, has been given by various subsequent writers, especially by De Polignac* and by Laquieref, who have stated it at much greater length. Neither of these authors seems to have been aware of Roget's theorems. De Polignac, like Roget, illustrates the rule by assigning letters to the various squares in the way explained above, and asserts that a similar rule is applicable to all even squares. * Comptes Rendiis, April, 1861 ; and Bulletin de la SorigtS Mathfmatique de France, 1881, vol. ix, pp. 17 — 24. t Bulletin de la Society Matlieinatique de France, 1880, vol. viii, pp. 82 — 102, 132—158. 9—2 132 CHESS-BOARD RECREATIONS [CH. VI Roget's method can be also applied to two half-boards, as- indicated in the figure given above on page 126. The method v^^hich Jaenisch gives as the most fundamental is not very different from that of Roget. It leads to eight forms, similar to that in the diagram printed below, in which the sum of the numbers in every column and every row is 260 ; but although symmetrical it is not in my opinion so easy to reproduce as that given by Roget. Other solutions, notably those by Moon and by Wenzelides, were given in former editions of this work. The two re-entrant routes printed below, each covering 32 cells, and together covering the board, are remarkable as constituting a magic square*. 63 22 15 40 1 42 59 18 U 39 64 21 60 17 2 43 37 62 23 16 41 4 19 58 24 13 38 61 20 57 44 3 11 36 25 52 29 46 5 56 26 51 12 33 8 55 30 45 35 10 49 28 53 32 47 6 50 27 34 9 48 7 54 31 15 20 17 36 13 64 61 34 18 37 14 21 60 35 12 63 25 16 19 44 5 62 33 56 38 45 26 59 22 55 4 11 27 24 39 6 43 10 57 54 40 49 46 23 58 3 32 9 47 28 51 42 7 30 53 2 50 41 48 29 52 1 8 31 Jaenischh Solution. Two Half Board Solutions. It is as yet impossible to say how many solutions of the problem exist. Legendref mentioned the question, but Minding J was the earliest writer to attempt to answer it. More recent investigations have shown that on the one hand the number of possible routes is less§ than the number of combinations of 168 things taken 63 at a time, and on the other hand is greater than 31,054144— since this latter number is the number of re-entrant paths of a particular type||. ♦ See A. Billy, Le Probleme du Cavalier des Echecs, Troyes, 1905. + Theorie des Nomhres, Paris, 2nd edition, 1880, vol. ii, p. 165. X Cambridge and Dublin Mathematical Journal^ 1852, vol. vii, pp. 147 — 156; and Crelle's Journal, 1853, vol. xliv, pp. 73—82. § Jaenisch, vol. ii, p. 268. II Bulletin de la Societe Mathematique de France, 1881, vol. ix, pp. 1—17. CH. Vl] CHESS-BOARD RECREATIONS 133 Analogous Problems. Similar problems can be constructed in which it is required to determine routes by which a piece moving according to certain laws {ex. gr. a chess-piece such as a king, &c.) can travel from a given cell over a board so as to occupy successively all the cells, or certain specified cells, once and only once, and terminate its route in a given cell. Euler's method can be applied to find routes of this kind: for instance, he applied it to find a re-entrant route by which a piece that moved two cells forward like a castle and then one cell like a bishop would occupy in succession all the black cells on the board. King's Re- Entrant Path. As one example here is a re- entrant tour of a king which moves successively to every cell 61 62 63 64 1 2 3 4 60 11 58 57 8 7 54 5 12 59 10 9 56 55 G 63 13 14 15 16 49 60 51 52 20 19 18 17 48 47 40 45 21 38 23 24 41 42 27 44 37 22 39 40 25 20 43 28 30 35 34 33 32 31 30 L!i King's Magic Tour on a Chess-Board. of the board. I give it because the numbers indicating the cells successively occupied form a magic square. Of course this also gives a solution of a re-entrant route of a queen covering the board. Book's Re-Entrant Path. There is no difficulty in con- structing re-entrant tours for a rook which moves successively to every cell of the board. For instance, if the rook starts from the cell 11 it can move successively to the cells 18, 88, 81, 71, 77, 67, 61, 51, 57, 47, 41, 31, 37, 27, 21, and so back to 11: this is a symmetrical route. Of course this also gives a solution of a re-entrant route for a kiiig or a queen covering the board. 134 CHESS-BOARD RECREATIONS [CH. VI If we start from any of the cells mentioned above, the rook takes sixteen moves. If we start from any cell in the middle of one of these moves, it will take seventeen moves to cover this route, but I believe that in most cases wherever the initial cell be chosen sixteen moves will suffice, though in general the route will not be symmetrical. On a board of n^ cells it is possible to find a route by which a rook can move successively from its initial cell to every other cell once and only once. Moreover* starting on any cell its path can be made to termi- nate, if n be even, on any other cell of a different colour, and, if n be odd, on any other cell of the same colour. Bishop's Re-Entrant Path. As yet another instance, a bishop can traverse all the cells of one colour on the board in seven- teen moves if the initial cell is properly chosen f; for instance, starting from the cell 11, it may move successively to the cells 55, 82, 71, 17, 28, 46, 13, 31, 86, 68, 57, 48, 15, 51, 84, m, 88. One more move will bring it back to the initial cell. From the nature of the case, it must traverse some cells more than once. Miscellaneous Problems. We may construct numerous such problems concerning the determination of routes which cover the whole or part of the board subject to certain conditions. I append a few others which may tax the ingenuity of those not accustomed to such problems. Routes on a Chess-Board. One of the simplest is the determination of the path taken by a rook, placed in the cell 11, which moves, one cell at a time, to the cell 88, so that in the course of its path it enters every cell once and only once. This can be done, though I have seen good mathematicians puzzled to effect it. A hasty reader is apt to misunderstand the conditions of the problem. Another simple problem of this kind is to move a queen from the cell 33 to the cell 66 in fifteen moves entering every cell once * L'Intermediaire des Mathematiciens, Paris, 1901, vol. viii, pp. 153 — 154. t H. E. Dudeney, The Tribune, Dec. 3, 1906. CH. Vl] CHESS-BOARD RECREATIONS 135 and only once, and never cro.sying its own track or entering a cell more than once*. A somewhat similar, but more difficult, question is the determination of the greatest distance which can be travelled by a queen starting from its own square in five consecutive moves, subject to the condition that it never crosses its own track or enters a cell more than oncef. In calculating the distance it may be assumed that the paths go through the centres of the cells. If the length of the side of a cell is one inch, the distance exceeds 33"95 inches. Another familiar problem can be enunciated as follows. Construct a rectangular board of vm cells by ruling in + 1 vertical lines and n + 1 horizontal lines. It is required to know how many routes can be taken from the top left-hand corner to the bottom right-hand corner, the motion being along the ruled lines and its direction being always either vertically doTNTiwards or horizontally from left to right. The answer is the number of permutations of m -I- n things, of which m are alike of one kind and n are alike of another kind: this is equal to {m-\-n)\ I mini. Thus on a square board containing 16 cells (i.e. one-quarter of a chess-board), where m = n = 4, there are 70 such routes ; while on a common chess-board, where m = n = 8, there are no less than 12870 such routes. A rook, moving ac- cording to the same law, can travel from the top left-hand cell to the bottom right-hand cell in (m-\-n — 2)! / (m— 1)! (?i — 1)! ways. Similar theorems can be enunciated for a parallele- piped. Another question of this kind is the determination of the number of closed routes through mn points arranged in m rows and n columns, following the lines of the quadrilateral net- work, and passing once and only once through each point |. Guarinis Problem. One of the oldest European problems connected with the chess-board is the following which was • H. E. Dudeney, The Trihune, Oct. 3, 1906. + Ibid., Oct. 2, 1906. + See C. F. Sainte-Marie in L^Intermediaire de$ Mathematiciens, Paris, vol. XI, March, 19U4, pp. 86—88. 136 CHESS-BOARD RECREATIONS [CH. VI propounded in 1512. It was quoted by Lucas in 1894, but I believe has not been published otherwise than in his works and the earlier editions of this book. On a board of nine cells, such as that drawn below, the two white knights are placed on the a D b C A d B c two top corner cells (a, d), and the two black knights on the two bottom corner cells (6, c) : the other cells are left vacant. It is required to move the knights so that the white knights shall occupy the cells b and c, while the black shall occupy the cells a and d. The solution is tolerably obvious. First, move the pieces from a to ^, from b to B, from c to C, and from d to D. Next, move the pieces from A to d, from B to a, from C to 6, and from D to c. The effect of these eight moves is the same as if the original square had been rotated through one right angle. Repeat the above process, that is, move the pieces successively from a to ^, from b to B, from c to G, from d to D; from A to d, from B to a, from G to 6, and from D to c. The required result is then attained. Queens' Problem. Another problem consists in placing sixteen queens on a board so that no three are in a straight line*. One solution is to place them on the cells 15, 16, 25, 26, 31, 32, 41, 42, 57, 58, 67, 68, 73, 74, 83, 84. It is of course assumed that each queen is placed on the middle of its cell. » H. E. Dudeney, The Tribune, November 7, 1906. 137 CHAPTER VII. MAGIC SQUARES. <. A Magic Square consists of a number of integers arranged in the form of a square, so that the sum of the numbers in every row, in every column, and in each diagonal is the same. If the integers are the consecutive numbers from 1 to n^ the square is said to be of the nth order, and it is easily seen that in this case the sum of the numbers in any row, column, or diagonal is equal to \n {n^ ■\- \) \ this number may be denoted by N. Unless otherwise stated, I confine my account to such magic squares, that is, to squares formed with consecu- tive integers from 1 upwards. The same rules however cover similar problems with 7t^ numbers in arithmetical progression. Thus the first 16 integers, arranged in either of the forms given in figures i and ii below, represent magic squares of the 16 3 2 13 5 10 11 8 9 6 7 12 .4 15 14 1 I ^ 15 10 3 6 4 5 16 9 14 11 2 7 1 8 13 12 Figure L Figure ii. fourth order, the sum of the numbers in any row, column, or diagonal being 34. Similarly figure iii on page 140, figure vii on page 143, figure xii on page 153, and figure xvi on page 157 represent magic squares of the fifth order ; figure xi on page loO represents a magic square of the sixth order; figure xviii on page 160 represents a magic square of the seventh 138 MAGIC SQUARES [CH. VII order, and figures xxii and xxiii on pages 163, 164 represent magic squares of the eighth order. The formation of these squares is an old amusement, and in times when mystical philosophical ideas were associated with particular numbers it was natural that such arrangements should be deemed to possess magical properties. Magic squares of an odd order were constructed in India before the Christian era according to a law of formation which is explained here- after. Their introduction into Europe appears to have been due to Moschopulus, who lived at Constantinople in the early part of the fifteenth century, and enunciated two methods for making such squares. The majority of the medieval astrologers and physicians were much impressed by such arrangements. In particular the famous Cornelius Agrippa (1486 — 1535) con- structed magic squares of the orders 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, which were associated respectively with the seven astrological "planets": namely, Saturn, Jupiter, Mars, the Sun, Venus, Mercury, and the Moon. He taught that a square of one cell, in which unity was inserted, represented the unity and eternity of God ; while the fact that a square of the second order could not be con- structed illustrated the imperfection of the four elements, air, earth, fire, and water; and later writers added that it was symbolic of original sin. A magic square engraved on a silver plate was sometimes prescribed as a charm against the plague, and one, namely, that represented in figure i on the last page, is drawn in the picture of Melancholy, painted in 1514 by Albert DUrer : the numbers in the middle cells of the bottom row give the date of the work. Such charms are still worn in the East. The development of the theory was at first due mainly to French mathematicians. Bachet gave a rule for the construc- tion of any square of an odd order in a form substantially equivalent to one of the rules given by Moschopulus. The formation of magic squares, especially of even squares, was con- sidered by Frenicle and Format. The theory was continued by Poignard, De la Hire, Sauveur, D'Ons-en-bray, and Des Ourmes. Ozanam included in his work an essay on magic squares which CH. VIl] MAGIC SQUARES 139 was ampliiied by Montucla. Like most algebraical problems, the construction of magic squares attracted the attention of Euler, but he did not advance the general theory. In 1837 an elaborate work on the subject was compiled by B. Violle, which is useful as containing numerous illustrations. I give the references in a footnote*. I shall confine myself to establishing rules for the con- struction of squares subject to no conditions beyond those given in the definition. I shall commence by giving rules for the construction of a square of an odd order, and then shall proceed to similar rules for one of an even order. It will be convenient to use the following terms. The spaces or small squares occupied by the numbers are called cells. The diagonal from the top left-hand cell to the bottom right-hand cell is called the leading diagonal or left diagonal. The diagonal from the top right-hand cell to the bottom left- hand cell is called the right diagonal. Magic squares of an odd order. I proceed to give three methods for constructing odd magic squares, but for simplicity I shall apply them to the formation of squares of the fifth order ; though exactly similar proofs will apply equally to any odd square. * For a sketch of the history of the subject and its bibliography see S. Giiuther's Gesehichte der mathematischen Wisseu.=^chaften, Leipzig, 1876, chapter iv ; and W. Ahrens, Mathematische Unterhaltungen und Spiele, Leipzig, 1901, chapter sii. The references in the text are to Bachet, Problemes plaisans, Lyons, 1624, problem xxi, p. 161 : Fr^nicle, Divers Ouvrages de Mathematique par Messieurs de V Academic des Sciences, Paris, 1693, pp. 423 — 483 ; with an appendix (pp. 484—507), containing diagrams of all the possible magic squares of the fourth order, 880 in number : Fermat, Opera Mathematica, Toulouse, 1679, pp. 173—178 ; or Brassinne's Precis, Paris, 1853, pp. 146—149 : Poignard, Traite des Quarres Sublimes, Brussels, 1704 : De la Hire, Mimoires de V Academic des Sciences for 1705, Paris, 1706, part i, pp. 127—171 ; part ii, pp. 364—382 : Sauveur, Construction des Quarr€s Magiques, Paris, 1710 : D'Ons-en-bray, Memoires de VAcadimie des Sciences for 1750, Paris, 1754, pp. 241 — 271 : Des Ournies, Mimoires de Mathematique et de Physique (French Academy), Paris, 1763, vol. IV, pp. 196 — 241 : Ozanam and Montucla, Recreations, part i, chapter xii : Euler, Commentationes Arithmeticae Collectae, St Petersburg, 1849, vol. II, pp. 503—602 : Violle, Traiti Complet des Carris Magiques, 3 vols, Paris, 1837-8. 140 MAGIC SQUARES [CH. VII ♦ De la Louhhe*s Method*. If the reader will look at figure iii he will see one way in which such a square containing 25 cells can be constructed. The middle cell in the top row is occupied by 1. The successive numbers are placed in their natural order in a diagonal line which slopes upwards to the right, except that (i) when the top row is reached the next number is written in the bottom row as if it came immediately above the top rov/ ; (ii) when the right-hand column is reached, the next number is written in the left-hand column, as if it immediately succeeded the right-hand column ; and (iii) when a cell which has been filled up already, or when the top right-hand square is reached, the path of the series drops to the row vertically below it and then continues to mount again. Probably a glance at the diagram in figure iii will make this clear. 17^ •^ 1 8 16 23 5'^ 7 14 16 4 6 13 20 22 10 12 19 21 3- 11 18 25 2 9 15 + 2 20 + 4 + 1 * 5 + 3 10 +6 20 + 3 + 5 5f2 10 + 4 15 + 1 + 4 5 + 1 10 + 3 15 + 5 20 + 2 5 + 5 10 + 2 15 + 4 20 + 1 0t3 10 fl 15 + 3 20 + 5 + 2 5+4 Figure iii. i - V Vo Figure iv. The reason why such a square is magic can be explained best by expressing the numbers in the scale of notation whose radix is 5 (or n, if the magic square is of the order n), except that 5 is allowed to appear as a unit-digit and is not allowed to appear as a unit-digit. The result is shown in figure iv. From that figure it will be seen that the method of construc- tion ensures that every row and every column shall contain one and only one of each of the unit-digits 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, the sum of which is 15 ; and also one and only one of each of the radix- digits 0, 5, 10, 15, 20, the sum of which is 50. Hence, as * De la Loubere, Du Royaume de Siam (Eng. Trans.), London, 1693, vol. n, pp. 227 — 247. De la Loubere was the envoy of Louis XiV to Siam in 1687-8, and there learnt this method. CH. VIl] MAGIC SQUARES 141 far as rows and columns are concerned, the square is magic. Moreover if the square is odd, each of the diagonals will contain one and only one of each of the unit-digits 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. Also the leading diagonal will contain one and only one of the radix-digits 0, 5, 10, 15, 20, the sum of which is 50; and if, as is the case in the square drawn above, the number 10 is the radix-digit to be added to the unit-digits in the right diagonal, then the sum of the radix-digits in that diagonal is also 50. Hence the two diagonals also possess the magical property. And generally if a magic square of an odd order n is constructed by De la Loubere's method, every row and every column must contain one and only one of each of the unit- digits 1, 2, 3, ..., 72; and also one and only one of each of the radix-digits 0, n, 2n, ..., n (n — 1). Hence, as far as rows and columns are concerned, the square is magic. Moreover each diagonal will either contain one and only one of the unit-digits or will contain n unit-digits each equal to ^ (n + 1). It will also either contain one and only one of the radix-digits or will contain n radix-digits each equal to ^n(n — l). Hence the two diagonals will also possess the magical property. Thus the square will be magic. I may notice here that, if we place 1 in any cell and fill up the square by De la Loubere's rule, we shall obtain a square that is magic in rows and in columns, but it will not in general be magic in its diagonals. It is evident that other squares can be derived from De la Loubere's square by permuting the symbols properly. For instance, in figure iv, we may permute the symbols 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 in 5 ! ways, and we may permute the symbols 0, 5, 15, 20 in 4 ! ways. Any one of these 5 ! arrangements combined with any one of these 4 ! arrangements will give a magic square. Hence we can obtain 2880 inagic squares of the fifth order of this kind, though only 720 of them are really distinct. Other squares can however be deduced, for it may be noted that from any magic square, \xiiether even or odd, other magic squares of the same order can be formed by the mere inter- 14j2 magic squares [CH. VII chano-e of the row and the column which intersect in a cell on a diagonal with the row and the column which intersect m the complementary cell of the same diagonal. *; Bachet proposed* a similar rule. In this, we begin by placing 1 in the cell above the middle one, and then we write the successive numbers in a diagonal line sloping upwards to the right, subject to the condition that when the cases (i) and (ii) mentioned under De la Loubere's method occur the rules there given are followed, but when the case (iii) occurs the path of the series, instead of going on to the cell already occupied, is continued from one cell to the cell next but one vertically above it. If this cell is above the top row the path continues from the corresponding cell in one of the bottom two rows following the analogy of rule (i) in De la Loubere's method. Bachet's method leads ultimately to this arrangement ; except that the rules are altered so as to make the line slope down- wards. This method also gives 720 magic squares of the fifth order. In the notation given later (see pp. 157, 158), De la Loubere's rule is equivalent to taking steps a = — 1, 6 = 1, and cross-steps x = l, y = 0. Bachet's form of it, as here enunciated, is equiva- lent to. taking steps a = - 1, 6 = 1, and cross-steps a? = - 2, 2/ = 0. - De la Hires Method^. I shall now give another rule for the formation of odd magic squares. To form an odd magic square of the order n by this method, we begin by constructing two subsidiary squares, one of the unit-digits, 1, 2, ..., n, and the other of multiples of the radix, namely, 0, /i, 2/i, . . . , (n — 1 ) n. We then form the magic square by adding together the numbers in the corresponding cells in the two subsidiary squares. De la Hire gave several ways of constructing such sub- sidiary squares. I select the following method (props, x and xiv of his memoir) as being the simplest, but I shall apply it to form a square of only the fifth order. It leads to the same results as the second of the two rules given by Moschopulus. * Bachet, Problem xxi, p. 161. t Meinoires de I'Academie des Sciences for 1705, part i, pp. 127—171. CH. VIl] MAGIC SQUARES 143 The first of the subsidiary squares (figure v, below) is constructed thus. First, 3 is put in the top left-hand corner, and then the numbers 1, 2, 4, 5 are written in the other cells of the top line (in any order). Next, the number in each cell of the top line is repeated in all the cells which lie in a diagonal line sloping downwards to the right (see figure v) according to the rule (ii) in De la Loubere's method. The cells filled by the same number form a broken diagonal. It follows that every row and every column contains one and only one 1, one and only one 2, and so on. Hence the sum of the numbers in every row and m every column is equal to 15; also, since we placed 3, which is the average of these numbers, in the top left-hand corner, the sum of the numbers in the left diagonal is 15; 3 4 1 5 2 2 3 4 1 5 5 2 3 4 1 1 5 2 3 4 4 \ 5 2 3 15 20 5 10 20 5 10 15 20 5 10 15 5 10 15 20 10 15 20 5 18 4 21 10 "12] 2 23 9 11 20 25 7 13 19 1 6 14 15 17 3 24 IG 5 22 8 First Subsidiary Square. Figure v. Second Subsidiary Sqxiare. Resulting Magic Square. Figure vi. Figure vii. and, since the right diagonal contains one and only one of each of the numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5, the sum of the numbers in that diagonal also is 15. The second of the subsidiary squares (figure vi) is con- structed in a similar way with the numbers 0, 5, 10, 15, and 20, except that the mean number 10 is placed in the top right- hand corner ; and the broken diagonals formed of the -same numbers all slope downwards to the left. It follows that every row and every column in figure vi contains one and only oneL 0, one and only one 5, and so on ; hence the sum of the numbers in every row and every column is equal to 50. Also the sum of the numbers in each diagonal is equal to 50. If now we add together the numbers in the corre6ponding cells of these two squares, we shall obtain 25 numbers such 144 MAGIC SQUARES [CH. VII that the sum of the numbers in every row, every column, and each diagonal is equal to 15 + 50, that is, to 65. This is represented in figure vii. Moreover, no two cells in that figure contain the same number. For instance, the numbers 21 to 25 can occur only in those five cells which in figure vi are occu- pied by the number 20, but the corresponding cells in figure v contain respectively the numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5; and thus in figure vii each of the numbers from 21 to 25 occurs once and only once. De la Hire preferred to have the cells in the subsidiary squares which are filled by the same number con- nected by a knight's move and not by a bishop's move ; and usually his rule is enunciated in that form. By permuting the numbers 1, 2, 4, 5 in figure v we get 4 ! arrangements, each of which combined with that in figure vi would give a magic square. Similarly by permuting the numbers 0, 5, 15, 20 in figure vi we obtain 4! squares, each of which might be combined with any of the 4! arrangements deduced from figure V. Hence altogether we can obtain in this way 144 magic squares of the fifth order. There are various other methods by which odd magic squares of any order can be constructed, but most or all of them depend on the form of n. I content myself here with the two methods described above; later, when discussing pandiagonal squares, I shall mention another rule for odd magic squares whose order is higher than three, which permits us to place a selected number in any cell we like. Magic squares of an even order. The above methods are inapplicable to squares of an even order. I proceed to give two methods for constructing any even magic square of an order higher than two. It will be convenient to use the following terms. Two rows which are equidistant, the one from the top, the other from the bottom, are said to be complementary. Two columns which are equidistant, the one from the left-hand side, the other from the right-hand side, are said to be complementary. Two cells in the same row, but in complementary columns, are said to be horizontally related. Two cells in the same column, CH. VIl] MAGIC SQUARES 145 but in complementary rows, are said to be vertically related, Two cells in complementary rows and columns are said to be skewly related ; thus, if the cell h is horizontally related to the cell a, and the cell d is vertically related to the cell a, then the cells h and d are skewly related; in such a case if the cell c is vertically related to the cell 6, it will be horizontally related to the cell d, and the cells a and c are skewly related: the cells a, h, c, d constitute an associated group, and if the square is divided into four equal quarters, one cell of an associated group is in each quarter. A horizontal interchange consists in the interchange of the numbers in two horizontally related cells. A vertical inter- change consists in the interchange of the numbers in two vertically related cells. A skew interchange consists in the interchange of the numbers in two skewly related cells. A cross intercha nge consists in the change of the numbers in any ^eTland in its horizontally related cell with the numbers in the cells skewly related to them ; hence, it is equivalent to two vertical interchanges and two horizontal interchanges. First Method*, This method is the simplest with which I am acquainted. Begin by filling the cells of the square with the numbers 1, 2, ...,7i^in their natural order commencing (say) with the top left-hand corner, writing the numbers in each row from left to right, and taking the rows in succession fi:om the top. I will commence by proving that a certain number of horizontal and vertical interchanges in such a square must make it magic, and will then give a rule by which the cells whose numbers are to be interchanged can be at once picked out. First we may notice that the sum of the numbers in each diagonal is equal to N^ where iV = ?i(?i^-|- l)/2; hence the diagonals are already magic, and will remain so if the numbers therein are not altered. Next, consider the rows. The sum of the numbers in the * It seems to have been first enunciated in 1889 by W. Firth, but later was independently discovered by various writers: see the Messenger of Mathematics, Cambridge, September, 1893, vol. xxm, pp. 65 — 69, and the Monist, Chicago, 1912, vol. XXII, pp. 53 — 81. I leave my account as originally written, though perhaps the procedure used by C. Planck in the latter paper is somewhat simpler. B. R. 10 146 MAGIC SQUARES [CH. VII a^tli row fi'om the top is N — n^ (n — 1x 4- 1)/2. The sum of the numbers in the complementary row, that is, the a;th row from the bottom, is iV + 71^ (n — 2a; + l)/2. Also the number in any cell in the a?th row is less than the number in the cell vertically related to it by 71 (?i — 2^7 + 1). Hence, if in these two rows we make 7?/2 interchanges of the numbers which are situated in vertically related cells, then we increase the sum of the numbers in the icth row by ti x ?i {n — 2a) + l)/2, and therefore make that row magic ; while we decrease the sum of the numbers in the complementary row by the same number, and therefore make that row magic. Hence, if in every pair of complementary rows we make ?i/2 interchanges of the numbers situated in vertically related cells, the square will be made magic in rows. But, in order that the diagonals may remain magic, either we must leave both the diagonal numbers in any row unaltered, or we must change both of them with those in the cells vertically related to them. The square is now magic in diagonals and in rows, and it remains to make it magic in columns. Taking the original arrangement of the numbers (in their natural order) we might have made the square magic in columns in a similar way to that in which we made it magic in rows. The sum of the numbers originally in the yth column from the left-hand side is N — n{n — 2y + 1)/2. The sum of the numbers originally in the complementary column, that is, the yih column from the right- hand side, is H + n(n— 2y + l)/2. Also the number originally in any cell in the yth column was less than the number in the cell horizontally related to it by n — 2y + 1. Hence, if in these two columns we had made n/'2 interchanges of the numbers situated in horizontally related cells, we should have made the sum of the numbers in each column equal to N. If we had done this in succession for every pair of complementary columns, we should have made the square magic in columns. But, as before, in order that the diagonals might remain magic, either we must have left both the diagonal numbers in any column unaltered, or we must have changed both of them with those in the cells horizontally related to them. CH. VIl] MAGIC SQUARES 147 It remains to show that the vertical and horizontal inter- changes, which have been considered in the last two paragraphs, can be made independently, that is, that we can make these interchanges of the numbers in complementary columns in such a manner as will not affect the numbers already interchanged in complementary rows. This will require that in every column there shall be exactly n/2 interchanges of the numbers in vertically related cells, and that in every row there shall be exactly n/2 interchanges of the numbers in horizontally related cells. I proceed to show how we can always ensure this, if n is greater than 2. I continue to suppose that the cells are initially filled with the numbers 1, 2, ..., ti^ in their natural order, and that we work from that arrangement. A doubly-even square is one where n is of the form 4m. If the square is divided into four equal quarters, the first quarter will contain 2m columns and 2m rows. In each of these columns take m cells so arranged that there are also m cells in each row^j and change the numbers in these 2??i^ cells and the 6m^ cells associated with them by a cross interchange. The result is equivalent to 27n interchanges in every row and in every column, and therefore renders the square magic. One way of selecting the 2m^ cells in the first quarter is to divide the whole square into sixteen subsidiary squares each a b b a b. ♦ a b // a • a b a b b a Figure viii. containing m' cells, which we may represent by the diagram above, and then we may take either the cells in the a squares or those in the b squares ; thus, if every number in the eight a squares is interchanged with the number skewly related to it the resulting square is magic. A magic square of the eighth order, constructed in this way, is shown in figure xxiii on page 164. 10—2 148 MAGIC SQUARES [CH. VII Another way of selecting the 2m^ cells in the first quarter would be to take the first m cells in the first column, the cells 2 to m+1 in the second column, and so on, the cells m+1 to 2/?i in the (m + l)th column, the cells m + 2 to 2m and the first cell in the (m + 2)th column, and so on, and finally the 2mth cell and the cells 1 to m — 1 in the 2mth column. A singly-even square is one where n is of the form 2 (2m + 1). If the square is divided into four equal quarters, the first quarter will contain 2m + 1 columns and 2m + 1 rows. In each of these columns take m cells so arranged that there are also m cells in each row: as, for instance, by taking the first m cells in the first column, the cells 2 to m + 1 in the second column, and so on, the cells m + 2 to 2m + 1 in the {m + 2)th column, the cells m + 3 to 2m + 1 and the first cell in the (m + 3)th column, and so on, and finally the (2m + l)th cell and the cells 1 to m — 1 in the (2m+l)th column. Next change the numbers in these m (2m + 1) cells and the 3m {2m + 1) cells associated with them by cross interchanges. The result is equivalent to 2m inter- changes in every row and in every column. In order to make the square magic we must have n/2, that is, 2m + 1, such inter- changes in every row and in every column, that is, we must have one more interchange in every row and in every column. This presents no difficulty; for instance, in the arrangement indicated above the numbers in the (2m + l)th cell of the first column, in the first cell of the second column, in the second cell of the third column, and so on, to the 2mth cell in the {2m + l)th column may be interchanged with the numbers in their vertically related cells ; this will make all the rows magic. Next, the numbers in the 2mth cell of the first column, in the (2m + l)th cell of the second column, in the first cell of the third column, in the second cell of the fourth column, and so on, to the (2m — l)th cell of the (2m + l)th column may be interchanged with those in the cells horizontally related to them; and this will make the columns magic without affecting the magical properties of the rows. It will be observed that we have implicitly assumed that m is not zero, that is, that n is greater than 2; also it would seem CH. VIlJ MAGIC SQUARES 149 that, if w = 1 and therefore n= 6, then the numbers in the diagonal cells must be included in those to which the cross interchange is applied, but, if n is greater than 6, this is not necessary, though it may be convenient. The construction of odd magic squares and of doubly-even magic squares is very easy. But though the rule given above for singly-even squares is not difficult, it is tedious of applica- tion. It is unfortunate that no more obvious rule — such, for instance, as one for bordering a doubly-even square — can be suggested for writing down instantly and without thought singly-even magic squares. De la Hires Method*. I now proceed to give another way, due to De la Hire, of constructing any even magic square of an order higher than two. In the same manner as in his rule for making odd magic squares, we begin by constructing two subsidiary squares, one of the unit-digits 1,2,3, ..., n, and the other of the radix- digits 0, n, 2n, ..., (n— l)n. We then form the magic square by adding together the numbers in the corresponding cells in the two subsidiary squares. Following the analogy of the notation used above, two numbers which are equidistant from the ends of the series 1, 2, 3, ..., n are said to be comple- mentary. Similarly numbers which are equidistant from the ends of the series 0, n, 2n, ..., (n — l)n are said to be comple- mentary. For simplicity I shall apply this method to construct a magic square of only the sixth order, though an exactly similar method will apply to any even square of an order higher than the second. The first of the subsidiary squares (figure ix) is constructed as follows. First, the cells in the leading diagonal are filled with the numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 placed in any order whatever that puts complementary numbers in complementary positions * Tlie rule is due to De la Hire (part 2 of his memoir) and is given by Montucla in his edition of Ozanam's work : I have used the modified enunci- ation of it inserted in Labosne's edition of Bachet's Problemes, as it saves the introduction of a third subsidiary square. I do not know to whom the modifi- cation is due. 150 MAGIC SQUARES [CH. VII {ex. gr. in the order 2, 6, 3, 4, 1, 5, or in their natural order 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6). Second, the cells vertically related to these are filled respectively with the same numbers. Third, each of the remaining cells in the first vertical column is filled either with the same number as that already in two of them or with the complementary number {ex. gr. in figure ix with a "1" or a "6") in any way, provided that there are an equal number of each of these numbers in the column, and subject also to proviso (ii) mentioned in the next paragraph. Fourth, the cells hori- zontally related to those in the first column are filled with the complementary numbers. Fifth, the remaining cells in the second and third columns are filled in an analogous way 1 5 4 3 2 6 6 2 4 3 5 1 6 5 3 4 2 1 1 5 3 4 .2 6 6 2 3 4 5 1 1 2 4 3 5 6 30 30 30 24 fi 24 24 C) C 18 18 12 12 12 IB 12 12 18 18 18 12 C 24 G 6 24 24 30 30 30 1 35 34 3 32 6 30 8 28 27 11 7 24 23 16 IG 14 19 13 17 21 22 20 18 12 26 9 10 29 25 31 2 4 33 5 36 First Subsidiary Square. Figure ix. Second Subsidiary Square. Figure x. Resulting Magic Square. Figure xi. to that in which those in the first column were filled : and then the cells horizontally related to them are filled with the comple- mentary numbers. The square so formed is necessarily magic in rows, columns, and diagonals. The second of the subsidiary squares (figure x) is con- structed as follows. First, the cells in the leading diagonal are filled with the numbers 0, 6, 12, 18, 24, 30 placed in any order whatever that puts complementary numbers in comple- mentary positions. Second, the cells horizontally related to them are filled respectively with the same numbers. Third, each of the remaining cells in the first horizontal row is filled either with the same number as that already in two of them or with the complementary number {ex. gr. in figure x with a "0" or a "30") in any way, provided (i) that there are an equal CH. VIl] MAGIC SQUARES 151 number of each of these numbers in the row, and (ii) that if any cell in the first row of figure ix and its vertically related cell are filled with complementary numbers, then the corre- sponding cell in the first row of figure x and its horizontally relat/ed cell must be occupied by the same number*. Fourth, the cells vertically related to those in the first row are filled with the complementary numbers. Fifth, the remaining cells in the second and the third rows are filled in an analogous way to that in which those in the first row were filled: and then the cells vertically related to them are filled with the complementary numbers. The square so formed is necessarily magic in rows, columns, and diagonals. It remains to show that proviso (ii) in the third step de- scribed in the last paragraph can be satisfied always. In a doubly-even square, that is, one in which n is divisible by 4, we need not have any complementary numbers in vertically related cells in the first subsidiary square unless we please, but even if we like to insert them they will not interfere with the satisfac- tion of this proviso. In the case of a singly-even square, that is, one in which n is divisible by 2, but not by 4, we cannot satisfy the proviso if any horizontal row in the first square has all its vertically related squares, other than the two squares in the diagonals, filled with complementary numbers. Thus in the case of a singly-even square it will be necessary in con- structing the first square to take care in the third step that in every row at least one cell which is not in a diagonal shall have its vertically related cell filled with the same number as itself: this is always possible if n is greater than 2. The required magic square will be constructed if in each cell we place the sum of the numbers in the corresponding cells of the subsidiary squares, figures ix and x. The result of this is given in figure xi. The square is evidently magic. Also every number from 1 to 36 occurs once and only once, for the numbers from 1 to 6 and from 31 to 36 can occur only in the top or the bottom rows, and the method of construction ensures that the * The insertion of this step evades the necessity of constructing (as Montucla did) a third subsidiary square. J 152 MAGIC SQUARES [CH. VII same number cannot occur twice. Similarly the numbers from 7 to 12 and from 25 to 30 occupy two other rows, and no number can occur twice ; and so on. The square in figure i on page 137 may be constructed by the above rules; and the reader will have no difficulty in applying them to any other even square. Other Methods for Constructing any Magic Square. The above methods appear to me to be the simplest which have been proposed. There are however two other methods, of less generality, to which I will allude briefly in passing. Both depend on the principle that, if every number in a magic square is multiplied by some constant, and a constant is added to the product, the square will remain magic. The first method applies only to such squares as can be divided into smaller magic squares of some order higher than two. It depends on the fact that, if we know how to construct magic squares of the mth and nth. orders, we can construct one y of the mnth order. For example, a square of 81 cells may be V considered as composed of 9 smaller squares each containing 9 cells, and by filling the cells in each of these small squares in the same relative order and taking the small squares themselves in the same order, the square can be constructed easily. Such squares are called Composite Magic Squares. The second method, which was introduced by Frenicle, con- sists in surrounding a magic square with a Border, Thus in figure xii on page 153 the inner square is magic, and it is surrounded with a border in such a way that the whole square is also magic. In this manner from the magic square of the 3rd order we can build up successively squares of the orders 5, 7, 9, &c., that is, any odd magic square. Similarly from the magic square of the 4th order we can build up successively any higher even magic square. If we construct a magic square of the first n^ numbers by bordering a magic square of (n — 2)^ numbers, the usual process is to reserve for the 4(7i— 1) numbers in the border the first 2 (n - 1) natural numbers and the last 2 (n — 1) numbers. Now the sum of the numbers in each line of a square of the order CH. VIl] BIAGIC SQUARES 153 (n - 2) is i (?? - 2) {(n - 2)»+ 1}, and the averasre is J{(n-2)Hll. Similarly the average number in a square of the t?th order is J (n^ + 1). The difference of these is 2 (n — 1). We begin then by taking any magic square of the order (n — 2), and we add to every number in it 2(n — 1); this makes the average number The numbers reserved for the border occur in pairs, n^ and 1, n* — 1 and 2, n^ — 2 and 3, &c., such that the average of each pair is ^ (n^ + 1), and they must be bordered on the square so that these numbers are opposite to one another. Thus the bordered square will be necessarily magic, provided that the sum of the numbers in two adjacent sides of the external border is correct. The arrangement of the numbers in the borders will be somewhat facilitated if the number n^-\-l—p (which has to be placed opposite to the number p) is denoted by p, but it is not worth while going into further details here. 1 2 19 20 23 8 18 IG 9 14 21 11 13 15 5 22 12 17 10 4 3 24 7 6 25 Bordered Magic Square. Figure xii. Since a doubly-even square can be formed with ease, this method would provide a simple way of constructing a singly- even square if definite rules for bordering a square could be laid down. I am however unable to formulate precise rules for this purpose. It will illustrate sufficiently the general method if I explain how the square in figure xii is constructed. A magic square of the third order is formed by De la Loubere's rule, and to every number in it 8 is added: the result is the inner square in figure xii. The numbers not used are 25 and 1, 24 and 2, 23 and 3, 22 and 4, 21 and 5, 20 and 6, 19 and 7, 18 and 8. The sum of each pair is 26, and obviously they must be placed at opposite ends of any line. 154 MAGIC SQUARES [CH. VII I believe that with a little patience a magic square of any order can be thus built up, and of course it will have the property that, if each border is successively stripped off, the square will still remain magic. This is the method of con- struction commonly adopted by self-taught mathematicians, some of whom seem to think that the empirical formation of such squares is a valuable discovery. I may add here (figure xiii) the following general solution of a magic square of the fourth order in which any numbers (not necessarily consecutive) are used*. There are eight indepen- dent quantities. V~v Y+v + y X+x-y Z^x Z + v-z X Y V-v+z Y-x + z V Z X+x - z X+x Z-v-y V-x + y Y+v 32768 4 2 4096 16 512 1024 128 256 32 64 2048 8 16384 8192 1 Figure xiii. Figure xiv. I may also mention that Montucla suggested the construc- tion of squares whose cells are occupied by numbers such that the product of the numbers in each row, column, and diagonal is constant. The formation of such figures is immediately deducible from that of magic squares, for if the consecutive numbers in a magic square are replaced by consecutive powers of any number m the products of the numbers in every line will be magic. This is obvious, for if the numbers in any line of a square are a, a\ a" , &c., such that %a is constant for every line in the square, then TimP' is also constant. For instance, figure xiv represents such a magic figure in which the product of the numbers in each line is 1,073,741,824 ; it is constructed from the magic square given in figure i on page 137. Magic Stars. Some elegant magic constructions on star- shaped figures (pentagons, hexagons, &c.) may be noticed in passing, though I will not go into details. One instance will suffice. Suppose a re-entrant octagon is constructed by the • E. Bergholt, Nature, London, vol. Lxxxm, Maj 26, 1910, pp. 368—369. CH. Vllj MAGIC SQUARES 155 intersecting sides of two equal concentric squares. It is required to place the first 16 natural numbers on the corners and points of intersection of the sides so that the sum of the numbers on the corner of each square and the sum of the numbers on eycry 15 Magic Star. Figure xv. side of each square is equal to 34. Eighteen fundamental solu- tions exist. One of these is given above*. There are magic circles, rectangles, crosses, diamonds, and other figures : also magic cubes, cylinders, and spheres. The theory of the construction of such figures is of no value, and I cannot spare the space to describe rules for forming them. In the above sketch, two questions remain unsolved. One is the determination of a definite rule for bordering a square ; such a rule might lead to a simpler method than that given above for forming oddly-even squares. The other is the determination of the number of magic squares of the fifth (or any higher) order. There is, in effect, only one magic square of the third order though by reflexions and rotations it can be presented in 9 forms. There are 880 magic squares of the fourth order, but by reflexions and rotations these v/ can be presented in 7040 forms. De la Hire showed that, * Communicated to me by Mr K. Strachey. 156 MAGIC SQUARES [CH. VII apart from mere reflexions and rotations, there were 57600 magic squares of the fifth order which could be formed by the methods he enumerated. Taking account of other methods, it would seem that the total number of magic squares of the fifth order is very large, perhaps exceeding half a million. Notwith- ' standing these two unsolved problems we may fairly say that the theory of the construction of magic squares as defined above has been worked out in sufficient detail — though not exhaustively, since methods other than those given above may be expounded. Accordingly attention has of late been chiefly directed to the construction of squares which, in addition to being magic, satisfy other conditions. I shall term such squares hyper-magic. Hypee-Magic Squares. Of hyper-magic squares, I will deal only with the theory of Pan-Diagonal and of Symmetrical Squares, though I will describe without going into details what are meant by Doubly and Trebly Magic Squares. Pandiagonal Squares. One of the earliest additional I conditions to be suggested was that the square should be magic ) along the broken diagonals as well as along the two ordinary diagonals*. Such squares are called Pandiagonal. They are also known as Nasik, or perfect, or diabolic squares. For instance, a magic pandiagonal square of the fourth order is represented in figure ii on page 137. In it the sum of the numbers in each row, column, and in the two diagonals is 34, as also is the sum of the numbers in the six broken diagonals formed by the numbers 15, 9, 2, 8, the numbers 10, 4, 7, 13, the numbers 3, 5, 14, 12, the numbers 6, 4, 11, 13, the numbers 3, 9, 14, 8, and the numbers 10, 16, 7, 1. It follows from the definition that if a pandiagonal square be cut into two pieces along a line between any two roAvs or * Squares of this type were mentioned by De la Hire, Sauveur, and Euler. Attention was again called to tbem by A. H. Frost in the Quarterly Journal of Mathematics, London, 1878, vol. xv, pp. 34—49, and subsequently their properties have been discussed by several writers. Besides Frost's papers I have made considerable use of a paper by E. McClintock in the American Journal of Mathe- matic^, vol. xix, 1897, pp. 99—120. CH. VIl] MAGIC SQUARES 157 any two columns, and the two pieces be interchanged, the new square so formed will be also pandiagoiially magic. Hence it is obvious that by one vertical and one horizontal transj)osition of this kind any number can be made to occupy any specified cell. Pandiagonal magic squares of an odd order can be con- structed by a rule somewhat analogous to that given by De la Loubere, and described above. I proceed to give an outline of the method. If we write the numbers in the scale of notation whose radix is w, with the understanding that the unit-digits run from 1 to n, it is evident, as in the corresponding explanation of why De la Loubere's rule gives a magic square, that all we have to do is to ensure that each row, column, and diagonal (whether broken or not) shall contain one and only one of each of the unit-digits, as also one and only one of each of the radix-digits. 7 20 3 11 24 13 21 9 17 5 19 2 15 23 6 25 8 16 4 12 1 14 22 10 18 5 + 2 15 + 5 0+3 10 \-\ 20 + 4 10 + 3 20+1 5 + 4 15 + 2 + 5 15 + 4 042 10 f 5 20 + 3 5 + 1 20 + 5 5 + 3 15+1 + 4 10 + 2 + 1 10 + 4 20 f 2 5 + 5 15 + 3 Figure xvi. Figure xvii. This is seen to be the case in the square of the fifth order delineated above, figures xvi and xvii. Let us suppose that we write the numbers consecutively, and proceed from cell to cell by steps, using the term step (a, h) to denote going a cells to the right and 6 cells up. Thus a step (a, h) will take us from any cell to the ath column to the right of it, to the ^th row above it, to the (6 -I- a)th diagonal above it sloping down to the right, and to the (6 — a)th diagonal above it sloping down to the left. In all cases we have the convention, as in De la Loubere's rule, that the move- ments along lines are taken cyclically ; thus a step n + a is equivalent to a step a. Of course, also, if a means going a cells 158 MAGIC SQUARES [CH. VII to the right, then — a will mean going a cells to the left ; thus if the 6th upper line is outside the square we take it as equivalent to the (n — 6)th lower line. It is clear that a and b cannot be zero, and that if a and b are prime to n (that is, if each has no divisor other than unity which also divides n) we can make n — 1 steps from any cell from which we start, before we come to a cell already occupied. Thus the first n numbers form a path which will give a different unit-digit in every row, column, and in one set of n diagonals ; of the other diagonals, n — 1 are empty, and one contains every unit-digit — thus they are constructed on magical lines. We must take some other step (h, k) from the cell n to get to an unoccupied cell in which we place the number w -h 1. Con- tinuing the process with n — \ more steps (a, b) we get another series of n numbers in various cells. If h and h are properly selected this second series will not interfere with the first series, and the rows, columns, and diagonals, as thus built up, will continue to be constructed on magical lines provided h and k are chosen so that the same unit-digit does not appear more than once in any row, column, and diagonal. We will suppose that this can be done, and that another cross-step Qi, k) of the same form as before enables us to continue filling in the numbers in compliance with the conditions, and that this process can be continued until the square is filled. If this is possible, the whole process will consist of n series of n steps, each series consisting oi n — \ uniform steps (a, b) followed by one cross-step (A, k). The numbers inscribed after the n cross-steps will be n + 1, 2w -♦- 1, 3n + l, ..., and these will be themselves connected by uniform steps {u, v\ where u = {n — \)a-\-h^k— a, mod. n, and v={n — \)b-{-k=k — b. I proceed to investigate the conditions that a, 6, A, and k must satisfy in order that the square can be constructed as above described with uniform steps (a, b) and {h, k). We notice at once that in order to secure the magic property in the rows and columns, we must have a and b prime to n ; and to secure it in the diagonals, we must have a and b unequal and b-¥ a and 6 — a prime to n. The leading numbers of the CH. VII] MAGIC SQUARES 159 n sequences of n numbers, namely 1, n-\-l, 2n+ 1, ..., are con- nected by steps (u, v), where « = h — a and v = k — b. Hence, if these are to fit in their places, we must also have u and v unequal, and u, v, n + v, and u — v prime to n. Also a, b, u, and V cannot be zero. Lastly the cross-steps (h, k) must be so chosen that in no case shall a cross-step lead to a cell already occupied. This would happen, and therefore the rule would fail, if p steps (a, h) from any cell and q steps {u, v) from it, w^here p and q are each less than n, should lead to the same cell. Thus, to the modulus n, we cannot have pa = qit, = q(h — a), and at the same time pb = qv = q {k — b). It is impossible to satisfy these conditions if n is equal to 3 or to a multiple of 3. For a and b are to be unequal, not zero, and less than n, and a + 6 is to be less than n and prime to n. Thus we cannot construct a pandiagonal square of the third order. Next I will show that, if n is not a multiple of 3, these conditions are satisfied when a = l, 6 = 2, h=0, k= — l, and therefore that in this case these values provide a particular solution of the general problem. It is at once obvious that in this case a and b are unequal, not zero, and prime to n, that 6 -f a and b — a are prime to n, and that the correspond- ing relations for u and v are true. The remaining condition for the validity of a rule based on these particular steps is that it shall be impossible to find integral values of p and q each less than n, which will simultaneously make p = ^q, and 2p = — dq. This condition is satisfied. Hence, any odd pan- diagonal square of an order which is not a multiple of 3 can be constructed by this rule. Thus, to form a pandiagonal square of the fifth order we may put 1 in any cell; proceed by four successive steps, like a knight's move, of one cell to the right and two cells up, writing consecutively numbers 2, 3, 4, 5 in each cell, until we come to a cell already occupied ; then take one step, like a rook's move, one cell down, and so on until the square is filled. This is illustrated by the square delineated in figure xvi. Further discussion of the general case depends on whether or not n is prime ; here I will confine myself to the simpler 160 MAGIC SQUARES [CH. VII alternative, and assume that n is prime : this will sufficiently illustrate the theory. From the above relations it follows that we cannot have pqa (k — h) = pqb (h — a), that is, ^iq (ak — bh) = 0. Therefore ak — bh cannot be a multiple of n, that is, it must be prime to n. If this condition is fulfilled, as well as the other conditions given above, each cross-step {h, k) can be made in due sequence, and the square can be constructed. The result that ak — bh is prime to n shows that the cross-step (/i, k) must be chosen so as to take us to an unoccupied ce'^ not in the same row, column, or diagonal (broken or not) as the initial number. By noting this fact we can in general place any two given numbers in two assigned cells. There are some advantages in having the cross-steps uniform with the other steps, since, as we shall see later, the square can then be written in a form symmetrical about the centre. This will be effected if we take h — — h,k = a. If n is prime our conditions are then satisfied if h be any number jfrom 2 to {n — 1)/2, if a be positive and less than b, and if a^ + 6^ be prime to n. We can, if we prefer, take h = h, k = — a; but it is not possible to take h = a and k = ^b, or h = — a and k = b, since they make u=iO or v = 0. For instance, if we use a knight's move, we may take a—1, 6 = 2. The square of the seventh order given below (figure xviii) 35 23 18 13 1 45 40 4 48 36 31 26 21 9 22 17 12 7 44 39 34 47 42 30 25 20 8 3 16 11 6 43 38 33 28 41 29 24 19 14 2 46 10 5 49 37 32 27 15 A Pandiagonal Symmetrical Square. Figure xviii. is constructed by this rule. But in the case of a square of the fifth order we cannot use a knight's move, since, if a= 1, and 6 = 2, we have a^ + b^ = 5. Hence the use of a knight's move is not applicable when n is 5, or a multiple of 5. CH. VII] MAGIC SQUARES 101 The construction of singly-even pandiagonal sqnares (that is those whose order is 4m + 2) is impossible, but that of doubly- even squares (that is, those whose order is 4m) is possible Here is one way of constructing a doubly-even square. Suppose the order of the square is 4m. and as before let us write the number in a cell in the scale 4m, that is, as 4mp + r so that p and r are the radix and unit-digits, with the conven- tion that r- cannot be zero. Place p„p„p„ ..„ p^^ ;„ ^rder m the cells m the bottom row. Proceeding from p. by steps (^m, 1) fill up 2m cells with it. And proceed similarly with the other radix-digits. Next place r„ n, ..., r,„ in order in the cells m the first column. Proceeding from r, by steps (1, 2m) fill up 2m cells with it. And proceed similarly with the other unit-digits. Then if we take for r„ r„ ..., r,„, the the values 0, 1, .... 2m -1, 4m -1, .... 2m, the square will be pand.agonally magic. I leave the demonstration to my readers The resulting square in the case when m = 1, « = 4, and the p and r subsidiary squares are shown below. This is the square represented in figure ii on page 137. 3 2 l\ 1 3 2 7j2 1 1 3 2 3 2 3 2 4 1 4 1 2 3 2 3 [T 4 1 4 12 + 3 8 + 2 + 3 4 + 2 + 4 4 + 1 12 + 4 8 + 1 12 + 2 — — — 8 + 3 + 2 4+3 1 + 1 4 + 4 12 + 1 8 + 4| Subsidiary p Square. Figure xix. Subsidiary r Sqtiare. Figure xx. Resulting Square. Figure xxi. The rows, columns, and all diagonals of pandiagonal squares possess the magic property. So also do a group of any n numbers connected cyclically by steps (c, d) provided the first two numbers of the group are such that when divided by n they have either different quotients or different remainders. Such groups include rows, columns, and diagonals as particular cases. Thus m the square delineated in figure ii on page 137 the numbers 1, 7, 10, 16 form a magic group whose sum is 34, connected 11 162 MAGIC SQUARES [CH. VII cyclically by steps (1, 3). Again in the square delineated in figure xviii on page 160, 10, 30, 1, 28, 48, 19, 39 form a magic group connected cyclically by steps (2, 3). Symmetrical Squares. It has been suggested that we might impose on the construction of a magic square of the order n the condition that the sum of any two numbers in cells geometrically symmetrical to the centre (eoo. gr. 22 and 28 in figure xviii) shall be constant and equal to n' + 1. Such squares are called Symmetrical. The construction of odd symmetrical squares of the order n, when n is prime to 3 and 5, involves no difficulty. We can begin by placing the mean number in the middle cell and work from that, either in both directions or forwards, making the number 1 follow after n^ ; we can also effect the same result by constructing any pandiagonal square of the order n and then transposing a certain number of rows and columns. If the rule given above on page 160, where a = 1, 6 = 2, A = 2, A; = — 1, be followed, this will lead to placing the number 1 in the (w+3)/2th cell of the top row : see, for instance, figure xviii. Such a square must be symmetrical, for if we begin with the middle number (n^ -\- 1)/2, which I will denote by m, in the middle cell, and work from it forwards with the numbers ni + l, m + 2, ..., and backwards with the numbers m—1, m — 2, ..., the pairs of cells filled by the numbers m + 1 and m — 1, m + 2 and VI — 2, &c., are necessarily situated symmetrically to the middle cell and the sum of each pair is 2m. I believe this was first pointed out by McClintock. The construction of doubly-even symmetrical pandiagonal squares is also possible, but the analysis is too lengthy for me to find room for it here. In a symmetrical square any n such pairs of numbers together with the number in the middle cell will form a magic group. For instance in figure xviii, the group 32, 18, 36, 14, 47, 3, and 25 is magic. So also is the group 47, 3, 35, 15, 13, 37, and 25. Thus in a symmetrical pandiagonal square, even of a low order, there are hundreds of magic groups of n numbers whose sum is constant. CH. VIl] MAGIC SQUARES 163 Bouhly-Magic Squares. In another species of hyper-magic squares the problem is to construct a magic square of the «th order in such a way that if the number in each cell is replaced by its mth power the resulting square shall also be magic. Here for example (see figure xxii) is a magic square* of the eighth order, the sum of the numbers in each line being equal 5 31 35 60 57 34 8 30 19 9 53 46 47 56 18 12 16 22 42 39 52 61 27 1 63 37 25 24 3 14 44 50 26 4 64 49 38 43 13 23 41 51 15 2 21 28 62 40 54 48 20 11 10 17 55 45 36 58 6 29 32 7 33 59 A Doubly-Magic Square, Figure xxii. to 260, so constructed that if the number in each cell is re- placed by its square the resulting square is also magic (the sum of the numbers in each line being equal to 11180). Trebly-Magic Squares. The construction of squares which shall be magic for the original numbers, for their squares, and for their cubes has also been studied. I know of no square of this kind which is of a lower order than 128. Magic Pencils. Hitherto I have concerned myself with numbers arranged in lines. By reciprocating the figures com- posed of the points on which the numbers are placed we obtain a collection of lines forming pencils, and, if these lines be numbered to correspond with the points, the pencils will be magic f. Thus, in a magic square of the nth order, we arrange n^ consecutive numbers to form 2/i + 2 lines, each containing * See M. Coccoz in L' Illustration, May 29, 1897. The subject has been studied by Messieurs G. Tarry, B. Portier, M. Coccoz and A. Rilly. More than 200 such squares have been given by the last-named in bis itude sur les Triangles et les Carres Magiqu£s aux deux premiers degres, Troyes, 1901. t See Magic Reciprocals by G. Frankenstein, Cincinnati, 1875. 11—2 164 MAGIC SQUARES [CH. VII n numbers so that the sum of the numbers in each line is the same. Reciprocally we can arrange n^ lines, numbered con- secutively to form 2n + 2 pencils, each containing n lines, so that in each pencil the sum of the numbers designating the lines is the same. For instance, figure xxiii represents a magic square of 64 1 2 02 Gl GO 59 7 8 9 10 54 53 52 51 15 IG 48 47 19 20 21 22 42 41 40 39 27 28 29 30 34 33 32 31 35 36 37 38 26 25 24 23 43 44 45 46 18 17 49 60 14 13 12 11 55 5C 57 58 6 5 4 3 G3 64 Figure xxiii. consecutive numbers arranged to form 18 lines, each of 8 numbers. Reciprocally, figure xxiv represents 64 lines arranged to form 18 pencils, each of 8 lines. The method of construc- tion is fairly obvious. The eight-rayed pencil, vertex 0, is cut by two parallels perpendicular to the axis of the pencil, and all the points of intersection are joined cross- wise. This gives 8 pencils, with vertices A,B, ... H ;S pencils, with vertices A\ ... H'\ one pencil with its vertex at ; and one pencil with its vertex on the axis of the last-named pencil. The sum of the numbers in each of the 18 lines in figure xxiii is the same. To make figure xxiv correspond to this we must number the lines in the pencil A from left to right, 1, 9, ..., 57, following the order of the numbers in the first column of the square: the lines in pencil B must be numbered similarly to correspond to the numbers in the second column of the square, and so on. To prevent confusion in the figure I have not in- serted the numbers, but it will be seen that the method of construction ensures that the sum of the 8 numbers which designate the lines in each of these 18 pencils is the same. CH. VIl] MAGIC SQUARES 165 We can proceed a step further, if the resulting figure is cut by two other parallel lines perpendicular to the axis, and if all the points of their intersection with the cross-joins be joined cross-wise, these new cross-joins will intersect on the Figure xxiv. axis of the original pencil or on lines perpendicular to it. The whole figure will now give 8^ lines, arranged in 244 pencils each of 8 rays, and will be the reciprocal of a magic cube of the 8th order. If we reciprocate back again we obtain a representation in a plane of a magic cube. 166 MAGIC SQUARES [CH. VII Magic Square Puzzles. Many empirical problems, closely related to magic squares, will suggest themselves; but most of them are more correctly described as ingenious puzzles than as mathematical recreations. The following will serve as specimens. Magic Card Square*. The first of these is the familiar problem of placing the sixteen court cards (taken out of a pack) in the form of a square so that no row, no column, and neither of the diagonals shall contain more than one card of each suit and one card of each rank. The solution presents no difficulty, and is indicated in figure xxvi below. There are 72 fundamental solutions, each of which by reflexions and reversals produces 7 others. Euler's Officers Problemf. A similar problem, proposed by Euler in 1779, consists in arranging, if it be possible, thirty- six officers taken fi:om six regiments — the officers being in six groups, each consisting of six officers of equal rank, one drawn from each regiment ; say officers of rank a, h, c, d, e, f, drawn fi:om the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, and 6th regiments — in a solid square formation of six by six, so that each row and each file shall contain one and only one officer of each rank and one and only one officer from each regiment. The problem is insoluble. Extension of Eider^s Problem. More generally we may investigate the arrangement on a chess-board, containing n^ cells, of n^ counters (the counters being divided into n groups, each group consisting of n counters of the same colour and numbered consecutively 1, 2, . . . , ti), so that each row and each column shall contain no two counters of the same colour or marked with the same number. Such arrangements are termed Eulerian Squares. * Ozanam, 1723 edition, vol. iv, p. 434. t Euler's Comvientationes Arithmeticae, St Petersburg, 1849, vol. n, pp. 802— 361. See also a paper by G. Tarry in the Comptes rendus of the French Associ- ation for the Advancement of Science, Paris, 1900, vol. ii, pp. 170—203 ; and various notes in L' Inter mediaire des Mathematiciens, Paris, vol. m, 1896, pp. 17, 90 ; vol. V, 1898, pp. 83, 176, 252 ; vol. vi, 1899, p. 251 ; vol. vn, 1900, pp. 14, 311. CH. VIl] MAGIC SQUARES 1G7 For instance, if n = 3, with three red counters a^, a^, a^, three white counters h^, b^, 63, and three black counters Ci, C2, Cg, we can satisfy the conditions by arranging them as in figure xxv below. If ?i = 4, then with counters a^, a^, a^, a^) ^1, ^2, ^3> K; Ci, C3, C3, C4; di, di, di, di, we can arrange them as in figure XX vi below. A solution when n ^ 5 is indicated in figure xxvii. -> a. b. C3 h Ci a._. <-'., «3 ^ «i ^a C3 d. C4 ^3 '^2 b. d, Cl ^ 63 f*4 <h Ci ^h f^-2 ^3 <f. ^5 K Cl d. <'a "4 '-^ d. ^\ «, ^ d. ^* «& ^ ^■i «3 ^4 ^6 Figure xxv. Figure xxvi. Figure xxvii. The problem is soluble if w is odd ; it is insoluble if n is of the form 2 (2m + 1). If solutions when n=a and when n = b are known, a solution when n= ab can be written down at once. The theory is closely connected with that of magic squares and need not be here discussed further. Reversible Magic Squares. The digits 0, 1, 2, 6, and 8, when turned upside down, can be read as 0, 1, 7, 9, and 8. This property has been utilized in constructing magic squares // ZZ 62 29 69 22 IZ Zl 2Z 61 19 12 Z2 19 21 6Z Meversible Magic Square. Figure xxviii. of non-consecutive numbers, which remain magic when the paper on which they are written is turned upside down. Here, for instance, figure xxviii*, is such a square in which only the digits 1, 2, 6 and their reversals are used. * Sec The Tribune, April 29, 1907. 168 MAGIC SQUARES [CH. VII Magic Domino Squares. Analogous problems can be made with dominoes. An ordinary set of dominoes, ranging from double zero to double six, contains 28 dominoes. Each domino is a rectangle formed by fixing two small square blocks together side by side: of these 56 blocks, eight are • • •• • • • • • • • • • •• • jV» • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • e • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 9 « e • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • e • • • • • • • • • Magic Domino Square. Figure xxix. blank, on each of eight of them is on.e pip, on each of another eight of them are two pips, and so on. It is required to arrange the dominoes so that the 56 blocks form a square of 7 by 7 bordered by one line of 7 blank squares and so that the sum of the pips in each row, each column, and in the two diagonals of the square is equal to 24. A solution* is given above. If we select certain dominoes out of the set and reject the others we can use them to make various magic puzzles. As instance, I give on the next page magic squares of this kind due to Mr Escott and Mr Dudeney. Numerous squares of this kind can be formed. * See V Illustration, July 10, 1897. CH. VIl] MAGIC SQUARES 169 • • • • « • • 1 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • '"'." • • • • • • • • ■■■■^ —■■— I aHHiM mmmmt mmmima ^^imm • • • • • • • • • • • . • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Magic Domino Squares. Figure xxx. Magic Coin Squares*. There are somewhat similar ques- tions concerned with coins. Here is one applicable to a square of the third order divided into nine cells, as in figure xxv above. If a five-shilling piece is placed in the middle cell Cj and a florin in the cell below it, namely, in 0.3, it is required to place the fewest possible current English coins in the remaining seven cells so that in each cell there is at least one coin, so that the total value of the coins in every cell is different, and so that the sum of the values of the coins in each row, column, and diagonal is fifteen shillings : it will be found that thirteen additional coins will suffice. Similar problems can be proposed with postage stamps. ADDENDUM. Note. Page 169. Magic Coin Squares. Taking the notation of figure xiv we must put a double-florin and a sixpence in cell Oj, two double-florins in cell 62) a half-crown in cell C3, a florin and a shilling in cell 63, a crown and a florin in cell a2> a crown and a half-crown in cell C2, a crown and a sixpence in cell 61. See The Strand Magazine, Londou, December, 1896, pp. 720, 721. 170 CHAPTER VIII. tJNICURSAL PROBLEMS. I propose to consider in this chapter some problems which arise out of the theory of unicursal curves. I shall commence with Fillers Problem and Theorems, and shall apply ^he results briefly to the theories of Mazes and Oeometrical Trees. The reciprocal unicursal problem of the Hamilton Game will be discussed in the latter half of the chapter. Euler's Problem. Euler's problem has its origin in a memoir* presented by him in 1736 to the St Petersburg Academy, in which he solved a question then under discussion as to whether it was possible to take a walk in the town of Konigsberg in such a way as to cross every bridge in it once and only once. The town is built near the mouth of the river Pregel, which there takes the form indicated below and includes the island of Kneiphof. In the eighteenth century there were (and according to Baedeker there are still) seven bridges in the positions shown in the diagram, and it is easily seen that with such an arrangement the problem is insoluble. Euler however did not confine himself to the case of Konigsberg, but discussed the general problem of any number of islands con- nected in any way by bridges. It is evident that the question " ' Solutio problematis ad Geometriam situs pertinentis,' Gommentarii Academiae Scientiarum Petropolitanae for 1736, St Petersburg, 1741, vol. viii, pp. 128 — 140. This has been translated into French by M. Ch. Henry; see Lucas, vol. I, part 2, pp. 21 — 33. CH. VIIl] UNICURSAL PROBLEMS 171 will not be affected if we suppose the islands to diminish to points and the bridges to lengthen out. In this way we ultimately obtain a geometrical figure or network. In the Kdnigsberg problem this figure is of the shape indicated below, the areas being represented by the points A^ B, G, D, and the bridges being represented by the lines I, m, n, p, q, r, s. Euler's problem consists therefore in finding whether a given geometrical figure can be described by a point moving so as to traverse every line in it once and only once. A more general question is to determine how many strokes are neces- sary to describe such a figure so that no line is traversed twice: this is covered by the rules hereafter given. The figure may be either in three or in two dimensions, and it may be repre- sented by lines, straight, curved, or tortuous, joining a number of given points, or a model may be constructed by taking a number of rods or pieces of string furnished at each end with a hook so as to allow of any number of them being connected together at one point. The theory of such figures is included as a particular case 172 UNICURSAL PROBLEMS [CH. VIII in the propositions proved by Listing in his Topologie*. I shall, however, adopt here the methods of Euler, and I shall begin by giving some definitions, as it will enable me to put the argument in a more concise form. A node (or isle) is a point to or from which lines are drawn. A branch (or bridge or path) is a line connecting two consecutive nodes. An end (or hook) is the point at each termination of a branch. The order of a node is the number of branches which meet at it. A node to which only one branch is drawn is a free node or a free end. A node at which an even number of branches meet is an even node : evidently the presence of a node of the second order is immaterial. A node at which an odd number of branches meet is an odd node. A figure is closed if it has no free end : such a figure is often called a closed network. A route consists of a number of branches taken in con- secutive order and so that no branch is traversed twice. A closed route terminates at a point from which it started. A figure is described unicursally when the whole of it is traversed in one route. The following are Euler's results, (i) In a closed net- work the number of odd nodes is even, (ii) A figure which has no odd node can be described unicursally, in a re-entrant route, by a moving point which starts from any point on it. (iii) A figure which has two and only two odd nodes can be described unicursally by a moving point which starts from one of the odd nodes and finishes at the other, (iv) A figure which has more than two odd nodes cannot be described com- pletely in one route; to which Listing added the corollary that a figure which has 2n odd nodes, and no more, can be described completely in n separate routes. I now proceed to prove these theorems. * Die Studien, Gottingen, 1847, part x. See also Tait on ^Listing's Topologie,^ Philosophical Magazine, London, January, 1884, series 5, vol. xvii, pp. 30 — 46; and Collected Scientific Papers, Cambridge, vol. n, 1900, pp. 85 — 98. The problem was discussed by J. C. Wilson in his Traversing of Geometrical Figures, Oxford, 1905. y CH. VIIl] UNICURSAL PROBLEMS 173 First, The number of odd nodes in a closed network is even. Suppose the number of branches to be b. Therefore the number of hooks is 26. Let kn be the number of nodes of the ?ith order. Since a node of the nth. order is one at which n branches meet, there are n hooks there. Also since the figure is closed, n cannot be less than 2. ,*. 2k2 + •3^'3 + 4Ar4 + . . . + nkn + . .. = 26. Hence Sk^ + bk^ + ... is even, /. Arg + ^5 + ... is even. Second. A figure which has no odd node can he described unicursally in a re-entrant route. Since the route is to be re-entrant it will make no difference where it commences. Suppose that we start from a node A. Every time our route takes us through a node we use up one hook in entering it and one in leaving it. There are no odd nodes, therefore the number of hooks at every node is even: hence, if we reach any node except A, we shall always find a hook which will take us into a branch previously untraversed. Hence the route will take us finally to the node A from which we started. If there are more than two hooks at ^, we can continue the route over one of the branches from A previously untraversed, but in the same way as before we shall finally come back to A. It remains to show that we can arrange our route so as to make it cover all the branches. Suppose each branch of the network to be represented by a string with a hook at each end, and that at each node all the hooks there are fastened together. The number of hooks at each node is even, and if they are unfastened they can be re-coupled together in pairs, the arrangement of the pairs being immaterial. The whole network will then form one or more closed curves, since now each node consists merely of two ends hooked together. If this random coupling gives us one single curve then the proposition is proved; for starting at any point we shall go along eveiy branch and come back to the initial point. But 174 UNICURSAL PROBLEMS [CH. VIII if this random coupling produces anywhere an isolated loop, i, then where it touches some other loop, M, say at the node P, unfasten the four hooks there (viz. two of the loop L and two of the loop M) and re-couple them in any other order: then the loop L will become a part of the loop M, In this way, by altering the couplings, we can transform gradually all the separate loops into parts of only one loop. For example, take the case of three isles, A, B, (7, each connected with both the others by two bridges. The most unfavourable way of re-coupling the ends at A, B, C would be to make ABA, AC A, and BOB separate loops. The loops ABA and AC A are separate and touch at A; hence we should re-couple the hooks at A so as to combine ABA and AC A into A one loop ABACA. Similarly, by re-arranging the couplings of the four hooks at B, we can combine the loop BCB with ABACA and thus make only one loop. I infer from Euler's language that he had attempted to solve the problem of giving a practical rule which would enable one to describe such a figure unicursally without knowledge of its form, but that in this he was unsuccessful. He however added that any geometrical figure can be de- scribed completely in a single route provided each part of it is described twice and only twice, for, if we suppose that every iM-anch is duplicated, there will be no odd nodes and the figure is unicursal. In this case any figure can be described com- pletely without knowing its form : rules to effect this are given below. Third. A figure which has two and only two odd nodes can he described unicursally hy a point which starts from one of the, odd nodes and finishes at the other odd node. CH. Vlll] UNICURSAL PROBLEMS 175 This at once reduces to the second theorem. Let A and Z be the two odd nodes. First, suppose that Z is not a free end. We can, of course, take a route from A to Z; if we imagine the branches in this route to be eliminated, it will remove one hook from A and make it even, will remove two hooks from every node intermediate between A and Z and therefore leave each of them even, and will remove one hook from Z and therefore will make it even. All the remaining network is now even: hence, by Euler's second proposition, it can be described unicursally, and, if the route begins at Z, it will end at Z. Hence, if these two routes are taken in succession, the whole figure will be described unicursally, be- ginning at A and ending at Z. Second, if Z is a free end, then we must travel from Z to some node, Y, at which more than two branches meet. Then a route from A to Y which covers the whole figure exclusive of the path from Y to Z can be determined as before and must be finished by travelling from Y to Z. Fourth. A figure having 2n odd nodes, and no more, can he described completely in n separate routes, n being a positive number. If any route starts at an odd node, and if it is continued until it reaches a node where no fresh path is open to it, this latter node must be an odd one. For every time we enter an even node there is necessarily a way out of it; and similarly every time we go through an odd node we use up one hook in entering and one hook in leaving, but whenever we reach it as the end of our route we use only one hook. If this route is suppressed there will remain a figure with 2n — 2 odd nodes. Hence n such routes will leave one or more networks with only even nodes. But each of these must have some node common to one of the routes already taken and therefore can be described as a part of that route. Hence the com- plete passage will require n and not more than n routes. It follows, as stated by Euler, that, if there are more than two odd nodes, the figure cannot be traversed completely in one route. 176 UMICURSAL PROBLEMS [CH. VIII The Konigsberg bridges lead to a network with four odd nodes; hence, by Euler's fourth proposition, it cannot be described unicursally in a single journey, though it can be traversed completely in two separate routes. The first and second diagrams figured below contain only even nodes, and therefore each of them can be described uni- cursally. The first of these is a regular re-entrant pentagon ; the second is the so-called sign-manual of Mohammed, said to have been originally traced in the sand by the point of his scimetar without taking it off the ground or retracing any part of the figure — which, as it contains only even nodes, is possible. The third diagram is taken fi:om Tait's article : it contains only two odd nodes, and therefore can be described unicursally if we start from one of them, and finish at the other. ^4 ^^7 The re-entrant pentagon, figured above, has some interest from having been used by the Pythagoreans as a sign — known as the triple triangle or pentagram star — by which they could recognize one another. It was considered symbolical of health, and probably the angles were denoted by the letters of the word vyUta, the diphthong et being replaced by a 6. lamblichus, who is our authority for this, tells us that a certain Pythagorean, when travelling, fell ill at a roadside inn where he had put up for the night ; he was poor and sick, but the landlord, who was a kind-hearted fellow, nursed him carefully and spared no trouble or expense to relieve his pains. However, in spite of all efforts, the student got worse. Feeling that he was djdng and unable to make the landlord any pecuniary recompense, he asked for a board on which he inscribed the pentagram star; this he gave to his host, begging him to hang it up outside so that all passers by might see it, and assuring him that the result CH. VIII] UNICURSAL PROBLEMS 177 would recompense him for his charity. The scholar died and was honourably buried, and the board was duly exposed. After a considerable time had elapsed, a traveller one day riding by saw the sacred symbol ; dismounting, he entered the inn, and after hearing the story, handsomely remunerated the landlord. Such is the anecdote, which if not true is at least well found. As another example of a unicursal diagram I may mention the geometrical figure formed by taking a (2n + l)gon and joining every angular point to every other angular point. The edges of an octahedron also form a unicursal figure. On the other hand a chess-board, divided as usual by straight lines into 64 cells, has 28 odd nodes: hence it would require 14 separate pen-strokes to trace out all the boundaries without going over any more than once. Again, the diagram on page 117 has 20 odd nodes and therefore would require 10 separate pen-strokes to trace it out. It is well known that a curve which has as many nodes as is consistent with its degree is unicursal. I turn next to discuss in how many ways we can describe a unicursal figure, all of whose nodes are even*. Let us consider first how the problem is affected by a path which starts from a node A of order 2n and returns to it, forming a closed loop L. If this loop were suppressed we should have a figure with all its nodes even, the node A being now of the order 2(w— 1). Suppose the original figure can be described in N ways, and the reduced figure in N' ways. Then each of these N' routes passes (n— 1) times through A, and in any of these passages we could describe the loop L in either sense as a part of the path. Hence N =2{n — l) N'. Similarly if the node A on the original figure is ot the order 2 {u + l)y and there are I independent closed loops which start from and reiurn to -4, we shall have N = 2hi (m -f- 1) (/z + 2) . . . (71 + ^ - 1 ) iV", where N' is the number of routes by which the figure obtained by suppressing these I loops can be described. * See G. Tarry, Association J^'ranc^aise pour VAvancement de$ Sciences, 1886, pp. 49 — 53. B. R. 12 178 UNICURSAL PROBLEMS [CH. VIII By the use of these results, we may reduce any unicursal figure to one in which there are no closed loops of the kind above described. Let us suppose that in this reduced figure there are k nodes. We can suppress one of these nodes, say A^ provided we replace the figure by two or more separate figures each of which has not more than k — 1 nodes. For suppose that the node A is of the order 2n, Then the 2/1 paths which meet at A may be coupled in n pairs in 1 . 3 . 5 ... (2?i— 1) ways and each pair will constitute either a path through J., or (in the special case where both members of the pair abut on another node B) a loop from A, This path or loop will form a portion of the route through A in which this pair of paths are concerned. Hence the number of ways of describing the original figure is equal to the sum of the number of ways of describing 1.3.5... (2n — 1) separate simpler figures. It will be seen that the process consists in successively suppressing node after node. Applying this process continually we finally reduce the figure to a number of figures without loops and in each of which there are only two nodes. If in one of these figures these nodes are each of the order 2/1 it is easily seen that it can be described in 2 x {2n — 1)! ways. We know that a figure with only two odd nodes, A and B, is unicursal if we start at A (or B) and finish at B (or A). Hence the number of ways in which it can be described uni- cursally will be the same as the number required to describe the figure obtained from it by joining A and B. For if we start at A it is obvious that at the B end of each of the routes which cover the figure we can proceed along BA to the node A whence we started. This theory has been applied by Monsieur Tarry* to deter- mine the number of ways in which a set of dominoes, running up to even numbers, can be arranged. This example will serve to illustrate the general method. A domino consists of a small rectangular slab, twice as long as it is broad, whose face is divided into two squares, * See the second edition of the French Translation of this work, Paris, 1908, vol. u, pp. 253—263 ; see also Lucas, vol. iv, pp. 145—150. CH. VIIl] UNICURSAL PROBLEMS 179 which are either blank or markod with 1, 2, 3... dots. An ordinary set contains 28 dominoes marked 6-6, 6-5, 6-4, 6-3, 6-2, 6-1, 6-0, 5-5, 5-4, 5-3, 5-2, 5-1, 5-0, 4-4, 4-3, 4-2, 4-li 4-0, 3-3, 3-2, 3-1, 3-0, 2-2, 2-1, 2-0, 1-1, 1-0, and 0-0. Dominoes are used in various games in most, if not all, of which the pieces are played so as to make a line such that consecutive squares of adjacent dominoes are marked alike. Thus if 6-3 is on the table the only dominoes which can be placed next to the 6 end are 6-6, 6-5, 6-4, 6-2, 6-1, or 6-0. Similarly the dominoes 3-5, 3-4, 3-3, 3-2, 3-1, or 3-0, can be placed next to the 3 end. Assuming that the doubles are played in due course, it is easy to see that such a set of dominoes will form a closed circuit*. We want to determine the number of ways in which such a line or circuit can be formed. Let us begin by considering the case of a set of 15 dominoes marked up to double-four. Of these 15 pieces, 5 are doubles. The remaining 10 dominoes may be represented by the sides and diagonals of a regular pentagon 01, 02, &c. The intersec- tions of the diagonals do not enter into the representation, and accordingly are to be neglected. Omitting these from our consideration, the figure formed by the sides and diagonals of the pentagon has five even nodes, and therefore is unicursal. Any unicursal route (ex. gr. 0-1, 1-3, 3-0, 0-2, 2-3, 3-4, 4-1, 1-2, 2-4, 4-0) gives one way of arranging these 10 dominoes. Suppose there are a such routes. In any such route we may put each of the five doubles in any one of two positions {ex. gr. * Hence if we remove one domino, say 5-4, we know that the line formed bj the rest of the dominoes must end on one side in a 5 and on the other in a 4. 12—2 180 UNICURSAL PROBLEMS [CH. VIII in the route given above the double-two can be put between 0-2 and 2-3 or between 1-2 and 2-4). Hence the total number of unicursal arrangements of the 15 dominoes is 2^a. If we arrange the dominoes in a straight line, then as we may begin with any of the 15 dominoes, the total number of arrangements is 15 . 2** . a. We have next to find the number of unicursal routes of the pentagon delineated above in figure A. At the node there are four paths which may be coupled in three pairs. If 1 and 2 are coupled, as also 3 and 4, we get figure B. If 1 and 3 are coupled, as also 2 and 4, we get figure G, If 1 and 4 are coupled, as also 2 and 3, we get figure D. Figure B. Figure G. Figure D. Let us denote the number of ways of describing figure B by 6, of describing figure C by c, and so on. The effect of suppressing the node in the pentagon A is to give us three quadrilaterals, 5, C, B. And, in the above notation, we have a = h -\- c-\-d. Take any one of these quadrilaterals, for instance D. We can suppress the node 1 in it by coupling the four paths which meet there in pairs. If we couple 1 2 with the upper of the paths 1 4, as also 1 3 with the lower of the paths 1 4, we get Figure E. Figure F. the figure E. If we couple 1 2 with the lower of the paths 1 4, as also 1 3 with the upper of the paths 1 4, we again get the figure E. If we couple 1 2 and 1 3, as also the two paths 1 4, we get the figure F. Then as above, d = 2e-^f. Similarly b = 2e +/, and c = 2e +/. Hence a — b-^c-rd = Qe-\-Sf, CH. VIIl] UNICURSAL PROBLEMS 181 We proceed to consider each of the reduced figures E and F. First take E, and in it let us suppress the node 4. For simplicity of description, denote the two paths 2 by y8 and /9', and the two paths 4 3 by 7 and 7. Then we can couple /? and 7, as also 13' and 7', or we can couple /S and y, as also /9' and 7 : each of these couplings gives the figure 0. Or we can couple /3 and 13', as also 7 and 7 : this gives the figure H. Thus e=2g + h. Each of the figures G and H has only two nodes. Hence by the formulae given above, we have ^ = 2.3.2=12, and /i = 2.2.2 = 8. Therefore e = 2g+h = ^2. Next take the figure F. This has a loop at 4. If we suppress this Q^- ^0 Figure G. Figure H. Figure J. loop we get the figure J, and /= 2j. But the figure /, if we couple the two lines which meet at 4, is equivalent to the figure G. Thus /= 2j = 2g = 24. Introducing these results we have a = 6e + Sf= 192 + 72 = 264. And therefore iV=15.2^a=126720. This gives the number of possible arrangements in line of a set of 15 dominoes. In this solution we have treated an arrangement from right to left as distinct from one which goes from left to right : if these are treated as identical we must divide the result by 2. The number of arrangements in a closed ring is 2^a, that is 8448. We have seen that this number of unicursal routes for a pentagon and its diagonals is 264. Similarly the number for a heptagon is h= 129976320. Hence the number of possible arrangements in line of the usual set of 28 dominoes, marked up to double-six, is 28 . 3^ h, which is equal to 7959229931520. The number of unicursal routes covering a polygon of nine sides is n = 2l^ 3^^ 5^ . 711 . 40787. Hence the number of possible arrangements in line of a set of 45 dominoes marked up to double-eight is 48 . 4^ . n*. * These numerical conclusions have also been obtained by algebraical analysis : see M. Reiss, Aniiali di Matematica, Milan, 1871, vol. v, pp. 63—120. 182 UNICURSAL PROBLEMS [CH. VIII Mazes. Everyone has read of the labyrinth of Minos in Crete and of Rosamund's Bower. A few modem mazes exist here and there — notably one, a very poor specimen of its kind, at Hampton Court — and in one of these, or at any rate on a drawing of one, most people have at some time threaded their way to the interior. I proceed now to consider the manner in which any such construction may be completely traversed even by one who is ignorant of its plan. The theory of the description of mazes is included in Euler's theorems given above. The paths in the maze are what previously we have termed branches, and the places where two or more paths meet are nodes. The entrance to the maze, the end of a blind alley, and the centre of the maze are free ends and therefore odd nodes. If the only odd nodes are the entrance to the maze and the centre of it — which will necessitate the absence of all blind alleys — the maze can be described unicursally. This follows from Euler's third proposition. Again, no matter how many odd nodes there may be in a maze, we can always find a route which will take us from the entrance to the centre without retracing our steps, though such a route will take us through only a part of the maze. But in neither of the cases mentioned in this paragraph can the route be determined without a plan of the maze. A plan is not necessary, however, if we make use of Euler's suggestion, and suppose that every path in the maze is dupli- cated. In this case we can give definite rules for the complete description of the whole of any maze, even if we are entirely ignorant of its plan. Of course to walk twice over every path in a labyrinth is not the shortest way of arriving at the centre, but, if it is performed correctly, the whole maze is traversed, the arrival at the centre at some point in the course of the route is certain, and it is impossible to lose one's way. I need hardly explain why the complete description of such a duplicated maze is possible, for now every node is even, and hence, by Euler's second proposition, if we begin at the entrance we can traverse the whole maze; in so doing we CH. VIIl] UNICURSAL PROBLEMS 183 shall at some point arrive at the centre, and finally shall emerge at the point from which we started. This description will require us to go over every path in the maze twice, and as a matter of fact the two passages along any path will be always made in opposite directions. If a maze is traced on paper, the way to the centre is generally obvious, but in an actual labyrinth it is not so easy to find the correct route unless the plan is known. In order to make sure of describing a maze without knowing its plan it is necessary to have some means of marking the paths which we traverse and the direction in which we have traversed them — for example, by drawing an arrow at the entrance and end of every path traversed, or better perhaps by marking the wall on the right-hand side, in which case a path may not be entered when there is a mark on each side of it. Of the various practical rules for threading a maze those enunciated by M. Tremaux seem to be the simplest*. These I proceed to explain. For brevity I shall describe a path or a node as old or new according as it has been traversed once before or not at all. Then the rules are (i) whenever you come to a new node, take any path you like ; (ii) whenever you come by a new path to an old node or to the closed end of a blind alley, turn back along the path by which you have just come ; (iii) whenever you come by an old path to an old node, take a new path, if there is one, but if not, an old path ; (iv) of course a path traversed twice must not be entered. I should add that on emerging at any node then, of the various routes which are permitted by these rules, it will be convenient always to select that which lies next to one's right hand, or always that which lies next to one's left hand. Few if any mazes of the type I have been considering (namely, a series of interlacing paths through which some route can be obtained leading to a space or building at the centre of the maze) existed in classical or medieval times. One class of what the ancients called mazes or labyrinths seems to have comprised any complicated building with numerous * Lucas, vol. I, part iii, p. 47 et aecj. 184 UNICURSAL PROBLEMS [CH. VIII vaults and passages*. Such a building might be termed a labyrinth, but it is not what is now usually understood by the word. The above rules would enable anyone to traverse the whole of any structure of this kind. I do not know if there are any accounts or descriptions of Rosamund's Bower other than those by Drayton, Bromton, and Knyghton: in the opinion of some, these imply that the bower was merely a house, the passages in which were confusing and ill-arranged. Another class of ancient mazes consisted of a tortuous path confined to a small area of ground and leading to a tree or shrine in the centre f. This is a maze in which there is no chance of taking a wrong turning; but, as the whole area can be occupied by the windings of one path, the distance to be traversed from the entrance to the centre may be considerable, even though the piece of ground covered by the maze is but small. Figure i. Figure ii. The traditional form of the labyrinth constructed for the Minotaur is a specimen of this class. It was delineated on the reverses of the coins of Cnossus, specimens of which are not uncommon ; one form of it is indicated in the accompanying diagram (figure i). The design really is the same as that * For instance, see the descriptions of the labyrinth at Lake Moeris given by Herodotus, bk. ii, c. 148; Strabo, bk. xvii, c. 1, art. 37; Diodorus, bk. i, cc. 61, 66; and Pliny, Hist. Nat., bk. xxxvi, c. 13, arts. 84 — 89. On these and other references see A. Wiedemann, Herodots zweites Buck, Leipzig, 1890, p. 522 et seq. See also Virgil, Aeneid, bk. v, c. v, 588; Ovid, Met., bk. viii, c. 5, 159; Strabo, bk. viii, c. 6. t On ancient and medieval labyrinths — particularly of this kind — see an article by Mr E. Trollope in The Archaeological Journal, 1858, vol. xv, pp. 216 — 235, from which much of the historical information given above is derived. CH. VIIl] UNICURSAL PROBLEMS 185 drawn in fisfiire ii, as can be easily seen by bending round a circle the rectangular figure there given. Mr Inwards has suggested* that this design on the coins of Cnossus may be a survival from that on a token given by the priests as a clue to the right path in the labyrinth there. Taking the circular form of the design shown above he sup- posed each circular wall to be replaced by two equidistant walls separated by a path, and thus obtained a maze to which the original design would serve as the key. The route thus indicated may be at once obtained by noticing that when a node is reached (i.e. a point where there is a choice of paths) the path to be taken is that which is next but one to that by which the node was approached. This maze may be also threaded by the simple rule of always following the wall on the right-hand side or always that on the left-hand side. The labyrinth may be somewhat improved by erecting a few additional barriers, without affecting the applicability of the above rules, but it cannot be made really difficult. This makes a pretty toy, but though the conjecture on which it is founded is ingenious it has no historical justification. Another suggestion is that the curved line on the reverse of the coins indicated the form of the rope held by those taking part in some rhythmic dance ; while others consider that the form was gradually evolved from the widely prevalent svastika. Copies of the maze of Cnossus were frequently engraved on Greek and Roman gems ; similar but more elaborate designs are found in numerous Roman mosaic pavements f. A copy of the Cretan labyrinth was embroidered on many of the state robes of the later Emperors, and, ajoparently thence, was copied on to the walls and floors of various churches J. At a later time in Italy and in France these mural and pavement decorations were developed into scrolls of great complexity, but consisting, as far as I know, always of a single line. Some of the best specimens now extant are on the walls of the * Knotoledge, London, October, 1892. t See ex. gr. Breton's Pompeia, p. 303. f Ozanam, Graphia aureae urbis Romae, pp. 92, 178. 186 UNICURSAL PROBLEMS [CH. VIII cathedrals at Lucca, Aix in Provence, and Poitiers; and on the floors of the churches of Santa Maria in Trastevere at Rome, San Vitale at Ravenna, Notre Dame at St Omer, and the cathedral at Chartres. It is possible that they were used to represent the journey through life as a kind of pilgrim's progress. In England these mazes were usually, perhaps always, cut in the turf adjacent to some religious house or hermitage : and there are some slight reasons for thinking that, when traversed as a religious exercise, a jpater or ave had to be repeated at every turning. After the Renaissance, such labyrinths were frequently termed Troy -Towns or Julian's Bowers. Some of the best specimens, which are still extant, or were so until recently, are those at Rockliff Marshes, Cumberland ; Asenby, Yorkshire ; Alkborough, Lincolnshire ; Wing, Rutlandshire ; Boughton-Green, Northamptonshire ; Comberton, Cambridge- shire; Saffron Walden, Essex; and Chilcombe, near Winchester. Maze at Hampton Court. The modern maze seems to have been introduced — probably from Italy — during the Renaissance, and many of the palaces and large houses built in England during the Tudor and the Stuart periods had labyrinths attached to them. Those adjoining the royal palaces at South wark, Greenwich, and Hampton Court were well known from their vicinity to the capital. The last of these was designed by London and Wise in 1690, for William III, who had a fancy for such conceits: a plan of it is given in various guide-books. For the majority of the sight-seers who enter, it is sufficiently CH. VIIl] UNICURSAL PROBLEMS 187 elaborate ; but it is an indifferent construction, for it can be described completely by always following the hedge on one side (either the right hand or the left hand), and no node is of an order higher than three. Unless at some point the route to the centre forks and subsequently the two forks reunite, forming a loop in which the centre of the maze is situated, the centre can be reached by the rule just given, namely, by following the wall on one side — either on the right hand or on the left hand. No labyrinth is worthy of the name of a puzzle which can be threaded in this way. Assuming that the path forks as described above, the more numerous the nodes and the higher their order the more difficult will be the maze, and the difficulty might be increased considerably by using bridges and tunnels so as to construct a labyrinth in three dimensions. In an ordinary garden and on a small piece of ground, often of an inconvenient shape, it is not easy to make a maze which fulfils these conditions. Here is a plan of one which I put up in my own garden on a plot of ground which would not allow of more than 36 by 23 paths, but it will be noticed that none of the nodes are of a high order. 188 UNICURSAL PROBLEMS [CH. VIII Geometrical Trees. Euler's original investigations were confined to a closed network. In the problem of the maze it was assumed that there might be any number of blind alleys in it, the ends of which formed free nodes. We may now progress one step further, and suppose that the network or closed part of the figure diminishes to a point. This last arrangement is known as a ti^ee. The number of unicursal descriptions necessary to completely describe a tree is called the base of the ramification. We can illustrate the possible form of these trees by rods, having a hook at each end. Starting with one such rod, we can attach at either end one or more similar rods. Again, on any free hook we can attach one or more similar rods, and so on. Every free hook, and also every point where two or more rods meet, are what hitherto we have called nodes. The rods are what hitherto we have termed branches or paths. The theory of trees — which already plays a somewhat important part in certain branches of modern analysis, and possibly may contain the key to certain chemical and biological theories — originated in a memoir by Cayley*, written in 1856. The discussion of the theory has been analytical rather than geometrical. I content myself with noting the following results. The number of trees with n given nodes is n'^~'\ If An is the number of trees with n branches, and Bn the number of trees with n free branches which are bifurcations at least, then {1 - x)-^ (1 - x^)-^^ (1 - a^)-^' = 1 + A,x + A^oc' + A,x^ + ..,, (1 - x)-^ (l - x'')-^^- (1 - x')-^^ = l-\-x + 2B,x' + 2B,x' + .... ♦ Philosophical Magazine, March, 1857, series 4, vol. xra, pp. 172—176 ; or Collected Works, Cambridge, 1890, vol. iii, no. 203, pp. 242—216 : see also the paper on double partitions, Philosophical Magazine, November, 18G0, series 4, vol. XX, pp. 337 — 341. On the number of trees with a given number of nodes, see the Quarterly Journal of Mathematics, London, 1889, vol. xxiii, pp. 376—378. The connection with chemistry was first pointed out in Cayley's paper on isomers, Philosophical Magazine, June, 1874, series 4, vol. xlvii, pp. 444—447, and was treated more fully in his report on trees to the British Association in 1875, Reports, pp. 257—305. CH. VIIl] UNICURSAL PROBLEMS 189 Using tliese formulae we can find successively the values of Ai,A2, ..., and Bi, B^, .... The values of An when n = 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, are 2, 4, 9, 20, 48, 115; and of B^ are 1, 2, 5, 12, 33, 90 I turn next to consider some problems where it is desired to find a route which will pass once and only once through each node of a given geometrical figure. This is the reciprocal of the problem treated in the first part of this chapter, and is a far more difficult question. I am not aware that the general theory has been considered by mathematicians, though two special cases — namely, the Hamiltonian (or Icosian) Game and the Knight's Path on a Chess-Board — have been treated in some detail. The Hamiltonian Game. The Hamiltonian Game consists in the determination of a route along the edges of a regular dodecahedron which will pass once and only once through every angular point. Sir William Hamilton*, who invented this game — if game is the right term for it — denoted the twenty angular points on the solid by letters which stand for various towns. The thirty edges constitute the only possible paths. The inconvenience of using a solid is considerable, and the dodecahedron may be represented conveniently in perspective by a flat board marked as shown in the first of the annexed diagrams. The second and third diagrams will answer our purpose equally well and are easier to draw. * See Quarterly Journal of Mathematics, London, 1862, voL v, p. 305 ; or Philosophical 2Iagazine, January, 1884, series 5. vol. xvii, p. 42; also Lucas, vol. II, part vii. 190 UNICURSAL PROBLEMS [CH. VIII The first problem is to go "all round the world," that is, starting from any town, to go to every other town once and only once and to return to the initial town ; the order of the n towns to be first visited being assigned, where n is not greater than five. Hamilton's rule for effecting this was given at the meeting in 1857 of the British Association at Dublin. ' At each angular point there are three and only three edges. Hence, if we approach a point by one edge, the only routes open to us are one to the right, denoted by r, and one to the left, denoted by I. It will be found that the operations indicated on opposite sides of the following equalities are equivalent, lrH = rlry rl^r=lrl, lrH = r^, rl^r = l\ Also the operation Z^ or r^ brings us back to the initial point: we may represent this by the equations To solve the problem for a figure having twenty angular points we must deduce a relation involving twenty successive operations, the total effect of which is equal to unity. By repeated use of the relation l^^rl^r we see that 1 = ^ = ^2^3 = {rl^r) I' = {rl^Y = K (^^'^) ^1" = {rH^rlY = jr^ (rl^r) IrlY = {r^Mrl]\ Therefore {r'l'(riyY=l (i), and similarly {Z V (Zr^j^ = 1 (ii). Hence on a dodecahedron either of the operations rrrlllrlrlrrrlllrlrl ... (i), II I r r r I r I r I I Irrrlrlr... (ii), indicates a route which takes the traveller through every town. The arrangement is cyclical, and the route can be commenced at any point in the series of operations by transferring the proper number of letters from one end to the other. The point at which we begin is determined by the order of certain towns which is given initially. CH. VIIl] UNICURSAL PROBLEMS 191 Thus, suppose that, we are told that we start from F and then successively go to B, A^ U, and T, and we want to find a route from T through all the remaining towns which will end at F. If we think of ourselves as coming into F from G, the path FB would be indicated by ^, but if we think of ourselves as coming into F from E, the path FB would be indicated by n The path from J5 to ^ is indicated by I, and so on. Hence our first paths are indicated either by lllr or hy rllr. The latter operation does not occur either in (i) or in (ii), and therefore does not fall within our solutions. The former operation may be regarded either as the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th steps of (ii), or as the 4th, 5th, 6th, and 7th steps of (i). Each of these leads to a route which satisfies the problem. These routes are FBA UTPONGDEJKLMQRSHGF, and FBAVTSRKLMQPONGDEJHGF. It is convenient to make a mark or to put down a counter at each corner as soon as it is reached, and this will prevent our passing through the same town twice. A similar game may be played with other solids provided that at each angular point three and only three edges meet. Of such solids a tetrahedron and a cube are the simplest instances, but the reader can make for himself any number of plane figures representing such solids similar to those drawn on page 189. Some of these were indicated by Hamilton. In all such cases we must obtain from the formulae analogous to those given above cyclical relations like (i) or (ii) there given. The solution will then follow the lines indicated above. This method may be used to form a rule for describing any maze in which no node is of an order higher than three. For solids having angular points where more than three edges meet — such as the octahedron where at each angular point four edges meet, or the icosahedron where at each angular point five edges meet — we should at each point have more than two routes open to us; hence (unless we suppress some of the edges) the symbolical notation would have to be 192 UNICURSAL PROBLEMS [CH. VITI extended before it could be applied to these solids. I offer the suggestion to anyone who is desirous of inventing a new game. Another and a very elegant solution of the Hamiltonian dodecahedron problem has been given by M. Hermary. It consists in unfolding the dodecahedron into its twelve penta- gons, each of which is attached to the preceding one by only one of its sides; but the solution is geometrical, and not directly applicable to more complicated solids. Hamilton suggested as another problem to start from any town, to go to certain specified towns in an assigned order, then to go to every other town once and only once, and to end the journey at some given town. He also suggested the con- sideration of the way in which a certain number of towns should be blocked so that there was no passage through them, in order to produce certain effects. These problems have not, so far as I know, been subjected to mathematical analysis. The problem of the knight's path on a chess-board is some- what similar in character to the Hamiltonian game. This I have already discussed in chapter VI. 193 CHAPTER IX. kirkman's school-girls problem. The Fifteen School-Girls Problem — first enunciated b}' T. P. Kirkman, and commonly known as Kirhnans Problem — consists in arranging fifteen things in ditferent sets of triplets. It is usually presented in the form that a school- mistress was in the habit of taking her girls for a daily walk. The girls were fifteen in number, and were arranged in five row^s of three each so that each girl might have two companions. The problem is to dispose them so that for seven consecutive days no girl will walk with any of her school-fellows in any triplet more than once. In the general problem, here discussed, we require to arrange n girls, where n is an odd multiple of 3, in triplets to walk out for y days, where y = (n — l)/2, so that no girl will walk with any of her school-fellows in any triplet more than once. The theory of the formation of all such possible triplets in the case of nine girls is comparatively easy, but the general theory involves considerable difficulties. Before describing any methods of solution, I will give briefly the leading facts in the history of the problem. For this and much of the material of this chapter I am indebted to 0. Eckenstein. Detailed refer- ences to the authorities mentioned are given in the bibliography mentioned in the footnote*. * The problem was first published in the Lady's and Gentleman's Diary for 1850, p. 48, and has been the subject of numerous memoirs. A bibliography of the problem by 0. Eckenstein appeared in the Messenger of Mathematics, Cambridge, July, 1911, vol. xli, pp. 33—36, B. R. 13 194 KIRKMAN*S SCHOOL-GIRLS PROBLEM [CH. IX The question was propounded in 1850, and in the same year solutions were given for the cases when n = 9, 15, and 27 ; but the methods used were largely empirical. The first writer to subject it to mathematical analysis was R. E,. Anstice who, in 1852 and 1853, described a method for solving all cases of the form 12m + 3 when 6m +1 is prime. He gave solutions for the cases when n=15, 27, 89. Sub- stantially, his process, in a somewhat simplified form, is covered by that given below under the heading Analytical Methods. The next important advance in the theory was due to B. Peirce who, in 1860, gave cyclical methods for solving all cases of the form 12?7i + 8 and 24??i + 9. But the processes used were complicated and partly empirical. In 1871 A. H. Frost published a simple method applicable to the original problem when ?i = 15 and to all cases when n is of the form 2""* — 1. It has been applied to find solutions when 71 = 15 and ?i = 63. In 1883 E. Marsden and A. Bray gave three-step cyclical solutions for 21 girls. These were interesting because Kirkman had expressed the opinion that this case was insoluble. Another solution when n = 21, by T. H. Gill, was given in the fourth edition of this book in 1905. His method though empirical appears to be applicable to all cases, but for high values of n it involves so much preliminary work by trial and error as to be of little value. A question on the subject which I propounded in the Educational Times in 1906, attracted the attention of L. A. Legros, H. E. Dudeney and 0. Eckenstein, and I received from them a series of interesting and novel solutions. As illustra- tions of the processes used, Dudeney published new solutions for 71= 27, S3, 51, 57, 69, 75, 87, 93, 111 ; and Eckenstein for 71= 27, 38, 39, 45, 51, 57, 69, 75, 93, 99, 111, 123, 135. I now proceed to describe some of the methods applicable to the problem. We can use cycles and combinations of them. I confine my discussion to processes where the steps of the cycles do not exceed three symbols at a time. It will be con- venient to begin with the easier methods, where however a CH. ix] kirkman's school-girls problem 195 certain amount of arrangement has to be made empirically, and then to go on to the consideration of the more general method. One-Step Cycles. As illustrating solutions by one-step cyclical permutations I will first describe Legros's method. Solutions obtained by it can be represented by diagrams, and their use facilitates the necessary arrangements. It is always applicable when n is of the form 24??! + 3, and seems to be also applicable when n is of the form 24??i + 9. Somewhat similar methods were used by Dudeney, save that he made no use of geometrical constructions. We have ?i = 2y -f 1 = 24??i + 3 or n= 2y -[-1 - 24m + 9. We may denote one girl by k, and the others by the numbers 1, 2, 3, ... 2y. Place k -at the centre of a circle, and the numbers 1, 2, 3, ... 2y at equidistant intervals on the circum- ference. Thus the centre of the circle and each point on its circumference will indicate a particular girl. A solution in which the centre of the circle is used to denote one girl is termed a central solution. The companions of k are to be different on each day. If we suppose that on the first day they are 1 and y+1, on the second 2 and y + 2, and so on, then the diameters through k will give for each day a triplet in which k appears. On each day we have to find 2{y — l)/3 other triplets satisfying the conditions of the problem. Every triplet formed from the remaining 2?/ — 2 girls will be represented by an inscribed triangle joining the points representing these girls. The sides of the triangles are the chords joining these 2^—2 points. These chords may be represented symbolically by [1], [2], [3], ... [i/— 1]; these numbers being proportional to the smaller arcs subtended. I will denote the sides of a triangle so repre- sented by the letters p, q, r, and I will use the term triad or grouping to denote any group of p, q, r which determines the dimensions of an inscribed triangle. I shall place the numbers of a triad in square brackets. If p, q, r are proportional to the smaller arcs subtended, it is clear that ii p -\- q is less than y, we have p -\-q = r', and if ^ 4- ^^ is greater than y we have p + q-\-r= 2y. If we like to use arcs larger than the 13—2 196 kirkman's school-girls problem [ch. IX semi-circnmference we mav confine ourselves to the relation 'p-\-q — r. In the geometrical methods described below, we usually first determine the dimensions of the triangles to be used in the solution, and then find how they are to be arranged in the circle. If (y — l)/3 scalene triangles, whose sides are jt?, g, r, can be inscribed in the circle so that to each triangle corresponds an equal complementary triangle having its equal sides parallel to those of the first and with its vertices at free points, then the system of 2 (3/ — l)/3 triangles with the corresponding diameter will give an arrangement for one day. If the system be per- muted cyclically 3/ — 1 times we get arrangements for the other y — \ days. No two girls will walk together twice, for each chord occupies a different position after each permutation, and as all the chords forming the (3/ — 1)/.3 triangles are unequal the same combination cannot occur twice. Since the triangles are placed in complementary pairs, one being y points in front of the other, it follows that after y — \ permutations we shall come to a position like the initial one, and the cycle will be completed. If the circle be drawn and the triangles cut out to scale, the arrangement of the triangles is facilitated. The method will be better understood if I apply it to one or two of the simpler cases. The first case is that of three girls, a, 6, c, walking out for one day, that is, w = 3, m = 0, 3/ = 1. This involves no discussion, the solution being (a. 6. c). The next case is that of nine girls walking out for four days, that is, ?i = 9, m = Oj 3/ = 4. The first triplet on the first day is (1. h. 5). There are six other girls represented by the points 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8. These points can be joined so as to form triangles, and each triangle will represent a triplet. We want to find one such triangle, with unequal sides, with its vertices at three of these points, and such that the triangle formed by the other three points will have its sides equal and parallel to the sides of the first triangle. The sides of a triangle are p, q, r. The only possible values are 1, 2, 3, and they satisfy the condition p + 5 = r. If a I CH. IX] KIPKMANS SCHOOL-GTRLS PROBLEM 197 triangle of this shape is placed with its vertices at the points 3, 4, 6, we can construct a complementary equal triangle, four points further on, having 7, 8, 2 for its vertices. All the points in the figure are now joined, and form the three triplets for the first day, namely (k. 1. 5), (3. 4. 6), (7. 8. 2). It is only necessary to rotate the figure one step at a time in order to obtain the triplets for the remaining three days. Another similar solution is obtained from the diameter (1. k. 5), and the triangles (2. 3. 8), (6. 7. 4). It is the reflection of the former solution. Figure i. The next case to which the method is applicable is when n — 27, m= 1, y = 13. Proceeding as before, the 27 girls must be arranged with one of them, k, at the centre and the other 26 on the cu'cumference of a circle. The diameter (1. k. 14) gives the first triplet on the first day. To obtain the other triplets we have to find four dissimilar triangles which satisfy the con- ditions mentioned above. The chords used as sides of these trianoles may be of the lengths represented symbolically by [1], [2], ... [12]. We have to group these lengths so that p-{-q = rovp-\-q-^r=2y; if the first condition can be satis- fied it is the easier to use, as the numbers are smaller. In this instance the triads [3, 8, 11], [5, 7, 12], [2, 4, 6], [1, 9, 10] will be readily found. Now if four triangles with their sides of these lengths can be arranged in a system so that all the vertices fall on the ends of different diameters (exclusive of the ends of the diameter 1, k, 14), it follows that the opposite ends of those diameters can be joined by chords giving a series of equal triangles, symmetrically placed, each liaving its sides parallel to those of a triangle of the first system. The following arrangement 198 kirkman's schooL'GIRls problem [CH. IX of triangles satisfies the conditions: (4?. 11. 25), (5. 8, 23), (6. 7. 16), (9. 13. 15). The complementary system is (17. 24. 12), (18. 21. 10), (19. 20 3), (22. 26. 2). These triplets with {k. 1. 14) give an arrangement for the first day; and, by rotating the system cyclically, the a,rrangements for the re- maining 12 days can be found immediately. I proceed to give one solution of this type for every remaining case where n is less than 100. From the result the triads or gi'oupings used can be obtained. It is sufficient in each case to give an arrangement on the first day, since the arrangements on the follov.iug days are at once obtainable by cyclical per- mutations. I take first the three cases, 33, 57, 81, where n is of the form 24m + 9. In these cases the arrangements on the other days are obtained by one-step cyclical permutations. For 33 girls, a solution is given by the system of triplets (2. 11. 16), (4. 6. 10), (5. 13. 30), (7. 8. 19), (9. 28. 31), and the complementary system (18. 27. 32), (20 22. 26), (21. 29. 14), (23. 24. 3), (25. 12. 15). These 10 triplets, together with that represented by (fc. 1. 17), will give an arrangement for the first day. For 67 girls, a possible arrangement of triplets is (18. 13. 50), (20. 11. 28), (21. 62. 3), (8. 10. 51), (4. 25. 26), (2. 6. 12), (7. 19. 33), (27. 43. 16), (37 14. 17). These, with the 9 complementary triplets, and the diameter triplet (1. k. 29), give an arrangement for the first day. For 81 girls an arrangement for the first day consists of the diameter triplet (1. ft. 41), the 13 triplets (3. 35. 42), (4. 10. 29), (5. 28. 56), (6. 26. 39), (7. 15. 17), (8. 11. 32), (13. 27 49), (14. 19. 30), (20. 37- 38), (21. 25. 52), (24. 36. 62), (18. 33. 63), (31. 40. 74), and the 13 complementary triplets. I take next the three cases, 51, 75, 99, where n is of the form 24??i + 3. In these cases the arrangements on the other days are obtained either by one-step or by two-step cyclical permutations. For 51 girls, an arrangement for the first day consists of the diameter triplet (fc. 1. 26), the 8 triplets (2. 9. 36), (4. 7. 25), (6. 10. 19), (8. 14. 22), (12. 17. 45), (13. 24. 48), (15. 16. 46), (18. 28. 30), and the 8 complementary triplets For 75 girls, an arrangement for the first day consists of the diameter triplet (k. 1. 38), the 12 triplets (2. 44. 55), (4. 11. 19), (5. 50. 66), (6. 52. 57), (8. 46. 58), (10. 59. 65), (12. 60. 64), (14 24. 68), (16 25. 72), (17. 3. 74), (33. 34. 73), (30. 32. 63), and the 12 complementary triplets. For 99 girls an arrangement for the first day consists of the diameter triplet (1. k. 50), the 16 triplets (2. 17. 47), (3. 9. 68), (4. 44. 82), (5. 12. 75), (6. 32. 42), (7. 23. 97), (8. 21. 30), (15. 20. 76), (16. 35. 85), (18. 45. 62), (22. 40. 63), (25. 37. 92), (28. 29. 80), (34. 38. 59), (39. 41. 73), (46. 49. 60), and the 16 complementary triplets. It is also possible to obtain, for numbers of the form 24m + 3, solutions which are uniquely two-step, but in these the complementary triangles are not CH. ix] kirkman's school-girls problem 199 placed symmetrically to each other. I give 27 girls as an instance, ueing the same triads as in the solution of this case given above. The triplets for the first day are {k. 1. 14), (2. 12. 3), (21. 5. 22), (20. 24. 26), (11. 15. 17), (8. 16. 19), (25. 7. 10), (6. 18. 13), and (23. 9. 4). From this tlie arrangements on the other days can be obtained by a two-step (but not by a one-step) cyclical permutation. It is uDnecessary to give more examples, or to enter on the question of how from one solution others can be deduced, or how many solutions of each case can be obtained in this way. The types of the possible triangles are found analytically, but their geometrical arrangement is empirical. The defect of this method is that it may not be possible to arrange a given grouping. Thus when n = 27, we easily obtain 24 different groupings, but two of them cannot be arranged geometrically to give solutions ; and whether any particular grouping will give a solution can, in many cases, be determined only by long and troublesome empirical work. The same objection applies to the two-step and three-step methods which are described below. Tiuo-Step Cycles. The method used by Legros was extended by Eckenstein to cases where n is of the form 127?i-f 3. When n is of this form and m is odd we cannot get sets of comple- mentary triangles as is required in Legros's method ; hence, to apply a similar method, we have to find 2(3/ — l)/3 different dissimilar inscribed triangles having no vertex in common and satisfying the condition p-\- q = r or p -\- q-\- r = 2y. These solutions are also central. Since there are 2y points on the cii'cumference of the circle the permutations, if they are to be cyclical, must go in steps of two numbers at a time. In Legros's method we represented one triplet by a diameter. But obviously it will answer our purpose equally well to represent it by a triangle with k as vertex and two radii as sides, one drawn to an even number and the other to an odd number: in fact this will include the diameter as a particular case. I begin by considering the case where we use the diameter (1. k. y) to represent one triplet on the first day. Here the chords used for sides of the triangles representing the other triplets must be of lengths [1], [2], ... [y - !]• Also each given 200 kirkman's school-girls problem [CH. IX length must appear twice, and the two equal lines so repre- sented must start one from an even number and the other from an odd number, so as to avoid the same combination of points occurring again when the sj^stem is rotated cyclically. Of course a vertex cannot be at the point 1 or y, as these points will be required for the diameter triplet (1. k. y). These remarks will be clearer if we apply them to a definite example. I take as an instance the case of 15 girls. As before we represent 14 of them by equidistant points numbered 1, 2, 3, ... 14 on the circumference of a circle, and one by a point h at its centre. Take as one triplet the diameter (1. k. 8). Then the sides p, q, r may have any of the values [1], [2], [3], [4], [5], [6], and each value must be wsed twice. On examination it will be found that there are only two possible groupings, namely [1, 1, 2], [2, 4, 6], [3, 3, 6], '[5, 5, 4], and [1, 2, 3], [1, 4, 5], [3, 5, 6], [2, 4, 6]. One of the solutions to which the first set of groupings leads is defined by the diameter (1. k. 8) and the four triplets (9. 10. 11), (4. 6. 14), (2. 5. 13), (3. 7. 12); see figure ii, below : of the four triangles used three are isosceles. The Figure ii. Figure iii. second set leads to solutions defined by the triplets {k. 1. 8), (4. 5. 7), (13. 14. 9), (3. 6. 11), (10. 12. 2), or by the triplets {k. 1. 8), (6. 7. 9), (3. 4. 13), (5. 11. 14), (10. 12. 2): in these solutions all the triangles used are scalene. If any one of these three sets of triplets is rotated cyclically two steps at CH. TX] KIRKMAN'S SCHOOL-GIRLS PROBLEM 201 a time, we get a solution of the problem for the seven cla3^s required. Each of these solutions b^ reflection and inversion gives rise to three others. Next, if we take {k. 1. 2) for one triplet on the first day we shall have the points 3, 4,... 14 for the vertices of the four triangles denoting the other triplets on that day. The sides must be of the lengths [1], [2], ... [7], of which [2], ... [6] must be used not more than twice and [1], [7] must be used only once. The [1] used must start from an even number, for otherwise the chord denoted by it would, when the system was rotated, occupy the position joining the points 1 and 2, which has been already used. The only possible groupings are [2, 4, 6], [2, 3, 5], [3, 4, 7], [1, 5, 6] ; or [2, 4, 6], [2, 5, 7], [1, 4, 5], [3, 3, 6] ; or [2, 4, 6], [2, 5, 7], [1, 3, 4], [3, 5, 6]. Each of these groupings gives rise to various solutions. For instance the first grouping gives a set of triplets {k. 1. 2), (3. 7. 10), (4. 5. 13), (6. 9. 11), (8. 12. 14). From this by a cyclical two-step per- mutation we get a solution. This solution is represented in figure iii. If we take {k. 1. 4) or {k. 1. 6) as one triplet on the first day, we get other sets of solutions. Solutions involving the triplets {k. 1. 2), {k. 1. 4), {k. 1. 6), {k. 1. 8), and other analogous solutions, can be obtained from the solutions illustrated i*n the above diagrams by re-arranging the symbols denoting the girls. For instance, if in figure iii, where all the triangles used are scalene, we replace the numbers 2, 8, 3, 13, 4, 6, 5, 11, 7, 9, 10, 14 by 8, 2, 13, 3, 6, 4, 11, 5, 9, 7, 14, 10, we get the solution {k. 1. 8), (4. 5. 7), etc., given above. Again, if in figure iii we replace the symbols 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7,^8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, k by 12, 2, 10, G, 1, 14, 5, 13, 9, 15, 4, 3, 11, 8, 7, we obtain a solution equivalent to that given by T. H. Gill and printed in the last edition of this book. In this the arrangement on the first day is (1. 6. 11), (2. 7. 12), (3. 8. 13), (4. 9. 14), (5. 10. 15). Tlie arrangements on the other days are obtained as before by rotating the system so de- lineated round 7 as a centre two steps at a time. Gill's arrangement is thus presented in its canonical form as a central two-stop cyclical jsolution. 202 KIRKMAN's school-girls problem [cH. IX I proceed to give one solution of this type for every remaining case where n is less than 100. In each case I give an arrangement on the first day; the arrangements for the other days can be got from it by a two-step cyclical permutation of the numbers. In the case of 27 girls, one arrangement on the first day is (fc. 1. 14), (19. 21. 20), (3. 9. 6), (13. 23. 18), (5. 17. 24), (7. 25. 16), (11. 15. 26), (10. 4. 2), (12. 22. 8). In the case of 39 girls, one arrangement for the first day is (fc. 1. 20), (35. 37. 36), (7. 13. 10), (19. 29. 24), (11. 25. 18), (3. 21. 12), (17. 33. 6), (15. 27. 2), (23. 31. 8), (5. 9. 26), (4. 16. 32), (14. 34. 38), (22. 28. 30). In the case of 51 girls, one arrangement for the first day is {k. 1. 26), (21. 23. 22), (11. 17. 14), (35. 45. 40), (25. 39. 32), (15. 33. 24), (13. 41. 2), (5. 31. 18), (19. 49. 34), (27. 43. 10), (9. 47. 28), (29. 37. 8), (3. 7. 30), (4. 20. 46), (6. 36. 42), (12. 16. 44), (38. 48. 50). In the case of 63 girls, one arrangement for the first day is (&. 1. 32), (57. 59. 58), (23. 29. 26), (37. 47. 42), (5. 53. 60), (17. 61. 8), (3. 43. 54), (7. 33. 20), (9. 39. 24), (27. 55. 10), (21. 45. 2), (11. 31. 52), (35. 51. 12), (13. 25. 50), (41. 49. 14), (15. 19. 48), (16. 18. 36), (6. 34. 38), (46. 56. 62), (22. 30. 44), (4. 28. 40). In the case of 75 girls, one arrangement for the first day is (fc. 1. 38), (23. 25. 24), (3. 9. 6), (29. 39. 34), (7. 21. 14), (51. 69. 60), (33. 55. 44), (11. 59. 72), (35. 65. 50), (37. 71. 54), (27. 63. 8), (15. 57. 36), (13. 41. 64), (43. 67. 18), (19. 73. 46), (31. 47. 2), (5. 17. 48), (53. 61. 20), (45. 49. 10), (30. 32. 52), (22. 26. 66), (56. 62. 70), (12.. 28. 74), (16. 40. 58), (4. 42. 68). In the case of 87 girls, one arrangement for the first day is (ft. 1. 44), (61. 63. 62), (73. 79. 76), (35. 45. 40), (11. 83. 4), (25. 43. 34), (59. 81. 70), (7. 33. 20), (41. 71. 56), (23. 75. 6), (27. 65. 46), (13. 57. 78), (5. 51. 28), (3. 39. 64), (15. 47. 74), (9. 67. 38), (31. 55. 86), (19. 85. 52), (21. 87. 72), (17. 29. 66), (69. 77. 30), (49. 53. 8), (10. 12. 24), (22. 26. 84), (18. 54. 60), (2. 50. 80), (32. 42. 58), (14. 36. 82), (16. 48. 68). In the case of 99 girls, one arrangement for the first day is {k. 1. 50), (47. 49. 48), (53. 59. 56), (55. 65. 60), (57. 71. 64), (23. 41. 32), (17. 39. 28), (63. 89. 76), (5. 35. 20), (3. 67. 84), (9. 69. 88), (29. 85. 8), (27. 79. 4), (25. 73. 98), (33. 77. 6), (21. 61. 90), (45. 81. 14), (51. 83. 18), (15. 43. 78), (13. 37. 74), (11. 31. 70), (75. 91. 34), (7. 19. 62), (87. 95. 42), (93. 97. 46), (58. 94. 96), (40. 44. 66), (10. 16. 26), (30. 38. 82), (68. 80. 2), (22. 36. 92), (24. 54. 72), (12. 52. 86). This method may be also represented as a one-step cycle. For if we denote the girls by a point k at the centre of the circle, and points aj, 6i, a^, h.^, a^, 63, ... placed in that order on the circumference, we can re- write the solutions in the suffix notation, and then the cyclical permutation of the numbers denoting the suffixes is by one step at a time. The one-step and two-step methods described above cover CH. ix] kirkman's school-gtrls problem 203 all cases except those where n is of the form 24m + 21. These I have failed to bring undt^r analogous rules, but we can solve them by recourse to the three-step cycles next described. Three-Step Cycles. The fact that certain cases are soluble by one-step cycles, and others by two-step cycles, suggests the use of three-step cycles, and the fact that n is a multiple of 3 points to the same conclusion. On the other hand, if we denote the n girls by 1, 2, 3, ... n, and make a cyclical permutation of three steps at a time (or if we denote the girls by cti, 6i, Ci, a^, h., Ca, ..., and make a cyclical permutation of the suffixes one step at a time), we cannot get arrangements for more than 7i/3 days. Hence there will remain (n — l)/2 — ??/3 days, that is, (n — 3)/6 days, for which we have to find other arrangements. In fact, however, we can arrange the work so that in addition to the cyclical arrangements for n/S days we can find (n — 3)/6 single triplets from each of which by a cyclical permutation of the numbers or suffixes an arrangement for one of these remaining days can be obtained ; other methods are also sometimes available. For instance take the case of 21 girls. An arrangement for the first day is (1. 4. 10), (2. 5. 11), (3. 6. 12), (7. 14. 18), (8. 15. 16), (9. 13. 17), (19. 20. 21). From this by cyclical permutations of the numbers three steps at a time, we can get arrangements for 7 days in all. The arrangement for the 8th day can be got from the triplet (1. 6. 11) by a three-step cyclical permutation of the numbers in it. Similarly the arrangement for the 9th day can be got from the triplet (2. 4. 12), and that for the 10th day from the triplet (3, 5. 10), by three-step cyclical permutations. This method was first used by A. Bray in 1883, and was subsequently developed by Dudeney and Eckenstein. It gives a solution for every value of n except 15, but it is not so easy to use as the methods already described, partly because the solution is in two parts, and partly because the treatment varies according as n is of the form 18??i-}-3, or 18m 4-9, or 18m + 15. Most of the difficulties in using it arit^e in the case when n is of the form 18m -f- 15. 204 KIRKMAN'S school-girls problem [CH. IX The geometrical representation is sufficiently obvious. In the methods used by Legros and Eckenstein, previously de- scribed, the girls were represented by 2y equidistant points on the circumference of a circle and a point at its centre. It is evident that we may with equal propriety represent all the girls by symbols placed at equidistant intervals round the circumference of a circle : such solutions are termed non- central. The symbols may be 1, 2, 3, ... n, or letters a,, 6i, Ci, o^2> &2> C.2, — Any triplet will be represented by a triangle whose sides are chords of the circle. The arrangement on any day is to include all the girls, and therefore the triangles re- presenting the triplets on that day are n/o in number, and as each girl appears in only one triplet no two triangles can have a common vertex. The complete three-step solution will require the determina- tion of a system of {n— l)/2 inscribed triangles. In the first part of the solution ?i/3 of these triangles must be selected to form an arrangement for the first day, so that by rotating this arrangement three steps at a time we obtain triplets for njZ days in all. In the second part of the solution we must assure ourselves that the remaining {n — 3)/6 triangles are such that from each of them, by a cyclical permutation of three steps at a time, an arrangement for one of the remaining {n — 3)/6 days is obtainable. As before we begin by tabulating the possible differences [1], [2], [3], ... [(?i — l)/2], whose values denote the lengths of the sides p, q, r of the possible triangles, also, we have either p + q — r OY p + q + r — n. From these values of p, q, r are formed triads, and in these triads each difference must be used three times and only three times. Triangles of these types must be then formed and placed in the circle so that the side denoting any assigned difference p must start once from a number of the form 3m, once from a number of the form 3m-f-l, and once from a number of the form Sm + 2. Also an isosceles triangle, one of whose sides is a multiple of three, cannot be used : thus in any particular triad a 3, 6, 9, ... cannot appear more than once. Save in some exceptional cases of high values of n, every triangle, one of whose CH. iX] KIRKMA.N*S SCHOOL-GIRLS PROBLEM 205 sides is a multiple of 3, must be used in the first part of the solution. In the whole arrangement every possible difference will occur n times, and, since any two assigned numbers can occur together only once, each diiference when added to a number must start each time from a different number. I will not go into further details as to how these trianoles are determined, but I think the above rules will be clear if I apply them to one or two easy examples. For 9 girls, the possible differences are [1], [2], [3], [4], each of which must be used three times in the construction of four triangles the lengths of whose sides p, q, r are such that p -^q z=,r OT p + q + r = 9. One possible set of triads formed from these numbers is [1, 2, 3], [1, 2, 3], [2, 3, 4], and [1, 4, 4]. Every triangle with a side of the length [3] must appear in the first part of the solution ; thus the triplets used in the first part of the solution must be obtained from the first three of these triads. Hence we obtain as an arrangement for the first day the triplets (1. 3. 9), (2. 4. 7), (5. 6. 8). From this, three-step cyclical permutations give arrangements for other two days. The remaining triad [1, 4, 4] leads to a triplet (1. 2. 6) which, by a three- step cyclical permutation, gives an arrangement for the remaining day. If we use the suffix notation, an arrangement for the first day is a^b^a^, hiC^h^, CiOfaCg. From this, by simple cyclical per- mutations of the suffixes, we get arrangements for the second and third days. Lastly, the triplet UibiCi gives, by cyclical permutation of the suffixes, the arrangement for the fourth day, namely, (ii&iCi, a^b^c^, a^biCz. For 15 girls, the . three-step process is inapplicable. The explanation of this is that two triads are required in the second part of the solution, and in neither of them may a 3 appear. The triads are to be formed from the differences [1], [2], ... [7], each of which is to be used three times, and the condition that in any particular triad only one 3 or one 6 ma}^ appear necessitates that six of the triads shall involve a 3 or a 6. Hence only one triad will be available for the second part pf the solution. 206 kirkman's school-girls problem [ch. IX I proceed to give one solution of this type for every remaining case where n is less than 100. I give some in the numerical, others in the suffix notation. The results will supply an indication of the process used. First, I consider those cases where n is of the form 18m + S. In these cases it is always possible to find 2m triads each repeated thrice, and one equilateral triad, and to use the equilateral and m triads in the first part of the solution, the 3 triplets representing any one of these m triads being placed in the circle at equal intervals from each other in the first day's arrangement. From this, three-step or one- step cyclical permutations give arrangements for 6m -l- 1 days in all. In the second part of the solution each of the m remaining triads is used thrice ; it suffices to give the first triplet on each day, since from it the other triplets on that day are obtained by a three-step cyclical permutation. For 21 girls an arrangement for the first day, for the first part of the solution, is (1. 4. 10), (8. 11. 17), (15. 18. 3), (2. 6. 7), (9. 13. 14), (16. 20. 21), (5. 12. 19). From this, three-step or one-step cyclical permutations give arrangements for 7 days in all. The first triplets used in the second part of the solution are (1. 3. 11), (2. 4. 12), (3. 5. 13). Each of these three triplets gives by a three- step cyclical permutation an arrangement for one of the remaining 3 days. For 39 girls, arrangements for 13 days can be obtained from the following arrangement of triplets for the first day: (1. 4. 13), (14. 17. 26), (27. 30. 39), (2. 8. 23), (15. 21. 36), (28. 34. 10), (7. 11. 12), (20. 24. 25), (33. 37. 38), (3. 5. 19), (16. 18. 32), (29. 31. 6), (9. 22. 35). From each of the 6 triplets (1. 8. 18), (2. 9. 19), (3. 10. 20), (1. 9. 20), (2. 10. 21), (3. 11. 22), an arrangement for one of the remaining 6 days is obtainable. For 57 girls, arrangements for 19 days can be obtained from the following arrangement of triplets for the first day: (1. 4. 25), (20. 23. 44), (39. 42. 6), (2. 8. 17), (21. 27. 36), (40. 46. 55), (3. 15. 33), (22. 34. 52), (41. 53. 14), (18. 19. 26), (37. 38. 45), (56. 57. 7), (13. 30. 35), (32. 49. 54), (51. 11. 16), (9. 29. 43), (28. 48. 5), (47. 10. 24), (12. 31. 50). From each of the 9 triplets (1. 3. 14), (2. 4. 15), (3. 5. 16), (1. 5. 30), (2. 6. 31), (3. 7. 32), (1. 11. 27), (2. 12. 28), (3. 13. 29), an arrangement for one of the remaining 9 days is obtainable. For 75 girls, arrangements for 25 days can be obtained from the following arrangement of triplets for the first day : (1. 4. 10), (26. 29. 35), (51. 54. 60), (3. 15. 36), (28. 40. 61), (53. 65. 11), (2. 17. 41), (27. 42. 66), (52. 67. 16), (13. 31. 58), (38. 56. 8), (63. 6. 33), (14. 21. 22), (39. 46. 47), (64. 71. 72), (7. 18. 20), (32. 43. 45), (57. 68. 70), (5. 9. 37), (30. 34. 62), (55. 59. 12), (19. 24. 50), (44. 49. 75), (69. 74. 25), (23. 48. 73). From each of the 12 triplets (1. 11. 30), (.2. 12. 31), (3. 13. 32), (1. 15. 35), (2. 16. 36), (3. 17. 37), (1. 17. 39), (2. 18.40), (3. 19. 41), (1. 18. 41), (2. 19. 42), (3. 20. 43), an arrangement for one of the remaining 12 days is obtainable. For 93 girls, arrangements for 31 days can be obtained from the following arrangement of triplets for the first day : (1. 76. 79), (32. 14. 17), (63. 45. 48), (13. 25. 55), (44. 56. 86), (75. 87. 24), (29. 50. 74), (60. 81. 12), (91. 19. 43), (20. 26. 59), (51. 57. 90), (82. 88. 28), (3. 30. 39), (34. 61. 70), (65. 92. 8), (27. 64. 71), (58. 2. 9), (89. 33. 40), (35. 36. 52), (66. 67. 83), (4. 5. 21), (11. 15. 37), (42. 46. 68), (73. 77. 6), (16. 18. 41), (47. 49. 72), (78. 80. 10), CH. ix] kirkman's school-girls problem 207 (23. 31. 69), (54. 62. 7), (85. 93. 38), (22. 53. 84). From each of the 15 triplets (1. 14. 42), (2. 15. 43), (3. 16. 41), (1. 33. 44), (2. 34. 45), (3. 35. 46), (1. IT. 30), (2. 12. 31), (3. 13. 32), (1. 6. 41), (2. 7. 42), (3. 8. 43), (1. 15. 35), (2. 16. 36), (3. 17. 37), an arrangement for one of the remaining 15 days is obtainable by a three- step cyclical permutation. Before leaving the subject of numbers of this type I give two other solutions of the case when n = 21, one to illustrate the use of the suffix notation, and the other a cyclical solution which is uniquely three-step. If we employ the suffix notation, the suffixes, with the type here used, are somewhat trying to read. Accordingly hereafter I shall write al, a2, ... , instead of aj, a.j, In the case of 21 girls, an arrangement for the first day is (al. a2. a4), (61. 62. 64), (cl. c2. c4), (a3. 66. c5), (63. c6. a5), (c3. a6. 65), (al. 67. cl). From this, by one-step cyclical permutations of the suffixes, we get arrangements for the 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th days. The arrange- ment for the 8th day can be obtained from the triplet (al. 62. c-i) by permuting the suffixes cyclically one step at a time. Similarly the arrangement for the 9th day can be obtained from the triplet (61. c2. a4) and that for the 10th day from the triplet (cl. rt2. 64). Thus with seven suffixes we keep 7 for each symbol in one triplet, and every other triplet depends on one or other of only two arrangements, namely, (1. 2. 4), or (3. 6. 5). If the solution be written out at length the principle of the method used will be clear. Cyclical solutions which are uniquely three-srep can also be obtained for numbers of the form 18»i-f3; in them the same triads can be used as before, but they are not placed at equal intervals in the circle. I give 21 girls as instance. The arrangements on the first 7 days can be obtained from the arrangement (1. 4. 10), (2. 20. 14), (15. 18. 3), (16. 17. 21), (8. 9. 13), (6. 7. 11), (5. 12. 19) by a three-step (but not by a one-step) cyclical permutation. From each of the triplets (1. 3. 11), (2. 4. 12), (3. 5. 13), an arrangement for one of the remaining 3 days is obtainable. Next, I consider those cases where n is of the form 18j7H-9. Here, regular solutions in the suffix notation can be obtained in all cases except in that of 27 girls, but if the same solutions are expressed in the numerical notation, the triads are irregular. Accordingly, except when n = 27, it is better to use the suffix notation. I will deal with the case when n = 27 after considering the cases when n = 45, 63, 81, 99. For 45 girls, an arrangement for the first day consists of the 5 triplets (al. al2. al3), (a2. a9. all), (a5. alO. 615), (a4. 63. c7), (a8. 66. cl4), and the 10 analogous triplets, namely, (61. 612. 613), (cl. cl2. cl3), (62. 69. 611), (c2. c9. ell), (65. 610. cl5), (c5. clO. al5), (64. c3. a7), (c4. a3. 67), (68. c6. al4), (c8. a6. 614). From these, by one-step cyclical permutations of the suffixes, the arrangements for 15 days can be got. Each of the 2 triplets (c4. 63. a7), (c8.66.al4), the 4 analogous triplets, namely, (a4.c3.67), (64.a3.c7), («8.c6.614), (68. a6. cl4), and the triplet (al. 61. cl), gives, by a one-step cyclical permuta- tion of the suffixes, an arrangement for one of the remaining 7 days. For 63 girls, an arrangement for the first day consists of the 7 triplets (al. alO. «9), (a5. a8. a3), (a4. al9. alo), (a7. al4. 621), (a20. 611. cl2), (al6. 613. cl8), (al7. 62, c6), and the 14 analogous triplets. From these, by 208 kirkman's school-girls problem [CH. IX one-step cyclical permutations of the suffixes, the arrangements for 21 days can be got. Each of the 10 triplets, consisting of the 3 triplets (c20. &11. al2), (cl6. 613, al8), (cl7. 62. a6), the 6 analogous triplets, and the triplet (al. 61. cl), gives, by a one-step cyclical permutation of the suffixes, an arrangement for one of the remaining 10 days. For 81 girls, an arrangement for the first day consists of the 9 triplets (a5. al. aS), (a3. alO. ali), {all. a21. a26), (a4. al2. a25), (a9. alS. 627), {a22. 620. cl9), {a24. 617. cl3), (al6. 66. cl), (a23. 615. c2), and the 18 analogous triplets. From these, by cyclical permutations of the suffixes, the arrangements for 27 days can be got. Each of the 13 triplets consisting of the 4 triplets (c22. 620. al9), (c24. 617. al3), (cl6. 66. al), (c23. 615. a2), the 8 analogous triplets, and the triplet (al. 61. cl), gives, by a cyclical permutation of the suffixes, an arrangement for one of the remaining 13 days. For 99 girls, an arrangement for the first day consists of the 11 triplets (al. a3. alO), (a2. a6. a20), (a4. al2. a7), (a8. a24. al4), (al6. al5. a28), (all. a22. 633), (a32. 630. c23), (rt31. 627. cl3), (a29. 621. c26), (a25. 69. cl9), (al7. 618. c5), and the 22 analogous triplets. From these, by cyclical permuta- tions of the suffixes, the arrangements for 33 days can be got. Each of the 16 triplets consisting of the 5 triplets (c32. 630. a23), (c31. 627. al3), (c29. 621. a26), (c25. 69. al9), (cl7. 618. a5), the 10 analogous triplets, and the triplet (al. 61. cl), gives, by a cyclical permutation of the suffixes, an arrangement for one of the remaining 16 days. For 27 girls, an arrangement of triplets for the first day is (1. 7. 10), (14. 17. 8), (27. 6. 9), (13. 20. 25), (11. 23. 18), (12. 16. 24), (21. 2. 4), (15. 22. 26), (19. 3. 5). From this, three-step cyclical permutations give arrangements for 9 days in all. The first triplets on the remaining 4 days are (1. 2. 3), (1. 6. 20), (1. 11. 15), (1. 17. 27), from each of which, by a three-step cyclical permutation, an arrange- ment for one of those days is obtainable. Regular solutions in the numerical notation can also be obtained for all values of n, except 9, where n is of the form 18??i-i-9. I give 27 girls as an instance. The first day's arrangement is (1. 2. 4), (10. 11. 13), (19. 20. 22), (8. 15. 23), (17. 24. 5), (26. 6. 14), (3. 25. 9), (12. 7. 18), (21. 16. 27); from this, arrangements for 9 days in all are obtained by one-step cyclical permutations. Each of the three triplets (1. 5. 15), (2. 6. 16), (3. 7. 17) gives an arrangement for one day by a three-step cyclical permutation. Finally the triplet (1. 10. 19), represented by an equilateral triangle, gives the arrangement on the last day by a one-step cyclical permutation. Lastly, I consider those cases where n is of the form 18ni-|-15. As before, the solution is divided into two parts. In the first part, we obtain an arrange- ment of triplets for the first day, from which arrangements for Qm + 5 days are obtained by three-step cyclical permutations. In the second part, we obtain the first triplet on each of the remaining Sm -f 2 days, from which the other triplets on that day are obtained by three-step cyclical permutations. For 33 girls, an arrangement in the first part is (1. 13. 19), (23. 11. 5), (3. 15. 21), (2. 4. 7), (12. 14. 17), (28. 30. 33), (6. 16. 25), (10. 20. 29), (8. 18. 27), (24. 31. 32), (9. 22. 26). The triplets in the second part are (25. 32. 33), (26. 33. 1), (10. 23. 27), (11. 24. 28), (1. 12. 23). CH. ix] kirkman's school-girls problem 209 For 51 girls, an arrangement in the first part is (17. 34. 51), (49. 16. 10), (11. 44. 50), (15. 33. 27), (19. 4. 46), (2. 38. 20), (21. 36. 45), (22. 25. 24), (5. 8. 7), (39. 42. 41), (43. 13. 20). (26. 47. 3), (9. 30. 37), (1. 14. 6), (35. 48. 40), (18. 31. 23), (28. 32. 12). The triplets in the second part are (29. 33. 13), (30. 34. 14), (1. 26. 12). (2. 27. 13), (3. 28. 14), (1. 11. 30), (2. 12. 31), (3. 13. 32). For 69 girls, an arrangement in the first part is (23. 46. 69), (31. 34. 43), (11. 8. 68), (54. 57. 66), (58. 52. 28), (35. 29. 5), (45. 51. 6), (16. 1. 49), (62. 47. 26), (39. 24. 3), (4. 55. 42), (50. 32. 19), (27. 9. 65), (40. 67. 18), (17. 44. 64), (63. 21. 41), (10. 14. 15), (33. 37. 38), (56. 60. 61), (25. 53. 36), (2. 30. 13), (48. 7. 59), (22. 20. 12). The triplets in the second part are (23. 21. 13), (24. 22. 14), (1. 8. 33), (2. 9. 34), (3. 10. 35), (1. 17. 36), (2. 18. 37), (3. 19. 38), (1. 41. 15), (2. 42. 16), (3. 43. 17). For 87 girls, an arrangement in the first part is (29. 58. 87), (76. 82. 73), (47. 53. 44), (15. 9. 18), (70. 1. 18), (41. 59. 71), (12. 30. 42), (4. 67. 31), (2. 26. 62), (60. 84. 33), (40. 79. 25), (11. 50. 83), (69. 21. 54), (43. 64. 63), (14. 35. 34), (72. 6. 5), (61. 16. 77), (32. 74. 48), (3. 45. 19), (28. 68. 66), (37. 86. 39), (10. 8. 57), (46. 80. 36), (22. 65. 75), (7. 17. 51), (85. 23. 78), (52. 20. 27). (49. 56. 81), (55. 38. 24). The triplets in the second part are (56. 39. 25), (57. 40. 26), (1. 5. 42), (2. 6. 43), (3. 7. 44), (1. 29. 6), (2. 30. 7), (3. 31. S), (1. 9. 20), (2. 10. 21), (3. 11. 22), (1. 14. 36), (2. 15. 37), (3. 16. 38). Before proceeding to the consideration of other methods I should add that it is also possible to obtain irregular solutions of cases where n is of any of these three forms. As an instance I give a three-step solution of 33 girls. A possible arrangement in the first part is (1. 4. 10), (14. 23. 26), (9. 15. 30), (3. 28. 33), (2. 6. 8), (11. 18. 27), (13. 24. 25), (5. 16. 20), (7. 17. 22), (21. 29. 31), (12. 19. 32). The triplets in the second part are (1. 2. 21), (1. 8. 30), (1. 3. 26), (1. 15. 20), (1. 17. 18). I describe this solution as irregular, since all, save one, of the triads used are different. The Focal Method. Another method of attacking the problem, comparatively easy to use in practice, is applicable when n is of the form 24?m + Sp, where p = 6g + 3. It is due to Eckeustein. Here it is convenient to use a geometrical repre.sentation by denoting 24;/i + 2p girls by equidistant numbered points on the circumference of a circle, and the remaining p girls by lettered points placed inside the circle; these p points are termed foci. The solution is in two parts. In the first part, we obtain an order from which the arrange- ments for 12m-\-p days are deducible by a two-step cycle of the numbers: in none of these triplets does more than one focus appear. In the second part, we find the arrange- ments for the remaining Sq + 1 days ; here the foci and the numbered points are treated separately, the former being a R. 14 210 kirkman's school-girls problem [CH. IX arranged by any of the methods used for solving the case of 6g + 3 girls, while of the latter a typical triplet is used on each of those days, from which the remaining triplets on that day are obtained by cyclical permutations. This method covers all cases except when n=15, 21, 39; and solutions by it for all values of n less than 200 have been written out. Sets of all the triplets required can be definitely determined. One way of doing this is by finding the primitive roots of the prime factors of 4m •}-2q + l, though in the simpler cases the triplets can be written down empirically without much trouble. An advantage of this method is that solutions of several cases are obtained by the same work. Suppose that we have arranged suitable triangles in a circle, having on its circumference 12m + p or 3c equidistant points, and let y be the greatest integer satisfying the indeterminate equation 2a; + 4^/ + 1 = c, where x = or a) = l, and a the highest multiple of 6 included in x + y, then sokitions of not less than y-hl—a cases can be deduced. Thus from a 27 circle arrangement where c = 9, y = 2, x = 0, a = 0, we can by this method deduce three solutions, namely when n = 57, 69, 81 ; from a 39 circle arrangement where c=13, 2/ = 3, ^ = 0, a = 0, we can deduce four solutions, namely when n = 81, 93, 105, 117. I have no space to describe the method fully, but I will give solutions for two cases, namely for 33 girls (?i = 33, m = 1, p = 3) where there are 3 foci, and for 51 girls (?i = 51, m = 1, p = 9) where there are 9 foci. For 33 girls we have 3 foci which we may denote by a, b, c, and 30 points which we may denote by the numbers 1 to 30 placed at equidistant intervals on the circumference of a circle. Then if the arrangement on the first day is (a. 5. 10), (b. 20. 25), (c. 15. 30), (1. 2. 14), (16. 17. 29), (4, 28. 2G), (19. 8. 11), (9. 7. 3), (24. 22. 18), (6. 27. 13), (21. 12. 28), a two-step cyclical per- mutation of the numbers gives arrangements for 15 days; that on the second day being (a. 7. 12), (6. 22. 27), &c. The arrangement on the 16th day is (a. 6. c), (1. 11. 21), (2. 12. 22), (3. 13. 23), . .(10 20.30). For 51 girls we have 9 foci which we may denote by a, b, c, CH. ix] kirkman's school-girls problem 211 d, e,f, g, h,j, and 42 points denoted by 1, 2, ... 42, placed at equidistant intervals on the circumference of a circle. Then if the arrangement on the first day is (a. 5. 6), (6. 26, 27), (c. 3. 10), {d. 24. .SI), (e. 19. 34), (/. 40. 13), (g. 39. 16), {k 18. 37), (j. 21. 42), (9. 11. 22), (30. 32. 1), (35. 41. 2), (14. 20. 23), (17. 29. 12), (38. 8. 33), (7. 15. 25), (28. 36. 4), a two-step cyclical per- mutation of the numbers gives arrangements for 21 days. Next, arrange the 9 foci in triplets by any of the methods already given so as to obtain arrangements for 4 days. From the numbers 1 to 42 we can obtain four typical triplets not already used, namely (1. 5. 21), (2. 6. 22), (3. 7. 23), (14. 28. 42). From each of these triplets we can, by a three- step cyclical permutation, obtain an arrangement of the 42 girls for one day, thus getting arrangements for 4 days in all. Combining these results of letters and numbers we obtain arrangements for the 4 days. Thus an arrangement for the first day would be (a. c.j), (b. d. g), {e.f. h), (1. 5. 21), (4. 8. 24), (7. 11. 27), (10. 14. 30), (13. 17. 33), (16. 20. 36), (19. 23. 39), (22. 26. 42;, (25. 29. 3), (28. 32. 6), (31. 35. 9), (34. 38. 12), (37. 41. 15), (40. 2. 18). For the second day the corresponding arrangement would be (d. f. c), (e. g. a), {h. j. b), (2. 6. 22), (5. 9. 25), &c. Analytical Methods. The methods described above, under the headings One-Step, Two-Step and Three-Step Cycles, involve some empirical work. It is true that with a little practice it is not difficult to obtain solutions by them when n is a low number, but the higher the value of n the more troublesome is the process and the more uncertain its success. A general arithmetical process has, however, been given by which it is claimed that some solutions for any value of n can be always obtained. Most of the solutions given earlier in this chapter can be obtained in this way. The essential feature of the method is the arrangement of the numbers by which the girls are represented in an order such that definite rules can be laid down for grouping them in pairs and triplets so that the differences of the numbers in each pair or triplet either are all different or are repeated as often as 14—2 212 KIRKMAN's school-girls problem [cH. IX may be required. The process depends on finding primitive roots of the prime factors of whatever number is taken as the base of the solution. When (ri — 1)/2 is prime, of the form 6u + l, and is taken as base, the order is obtainable at once, and the rules for grouping the numbers are easy of application ; owing to considerations of space I here confine myself to such instances, but similar though somewhat longer methods are applicable to all cases. I use the geometrical representation already explained. We have n—2y + l, and 3/ is a prime of the form 6u + 1. In forming the triplets we either proceed directly by arranging all the points in threes, or we arrange some of them in pairs and make the selection of the third point dependent on those of the two first chosen, leaving only a few triplets to be obtained otherwise. In the former case we have to arrange the numbers in triplets so that each difference will appear twice, and so that no two differences will appear together more than once. In the latter case we have to arrange the numbers so that the differences between the numbers in each pair comprise con- secutive integers from 1 upwards and are all different. In both cases, we commence by finding a primitive root of y, say cc. The residues to the modulus y of the 6w successive powers of oc form a series of numbers, el, e2, e3, . . . , comprising all the integers from 1 to 6w, and when taken in the order of the successive powers, they can be arranged in the manner required by definite rules. I will apply the method to the case of 27 girls from which the general theory, in the restricted case where y is a prime of the form 6u+l, will be sufficiently clear. In this case we have n=27, 3/= 13, u=2, and x = 2. I take 13 as the base of the analysis. I will begin by pairing the points, and this being so, it is convenient to represent the girls by a point k at the centre of a circle and points al, 61, a2, b2, ... at equidistant intervals on the circumference. We reserve k, al3, 613 for one triplet, and we have to arrange the other 24 points so as to form 8 triangles of certain types. The residues are in the order 2, 4, 8, 3, 6, 12, 11, 9, 5, 10, 7, 1, and these may be taken as the suffixes of the remaining ' a 's and ' 6 's. CH. ix] kirkman's school-girls problem 213 First arrange these residues in pairs so that every difference between the numbers in a pair occurs once. One rule, by which this can be effected, is to divide the residues into two equal sections and pair the numbers in the two sections. This gives (2. 11), (4. 9), (8. 5), (3. 10), (6. 7), (12. 1) as possible pairs. Another such rule is to divide the residue into six equal sections, and pair the numbers in the first and second sections, those in the third and fourth sections, and those in the fifth and sixth sections. This gives (2. 8), (4. 3), (6. 11), (12. 9), (5. 7), (10. 1) as possible pairs. Either arrangement can be used, but the first set of pairs leads only to scalene triangles. In none of the pairs of the latter set does the sum of the numbers in a pair add up to 13, and since this may allow the formation of isosceles as well as of scalene triangles, and thus increase the variety of the resulting solutions, I will use the latter set of pairs. We use these basic pairs as suffixes of the ' a 's, and each pair thus determines two points of one of the triangles required. We have now used up all the ' a 's. The third point associated with each of these six pairs of points must be a ' b' and the remaining six ' h 's must be such that they can be arranged in suitable triplets. Next, then, we must arrange the 6u residues el, e2, eS, ... in possible triplets. To do this arrange them cyclically in triplets, for instance, as shown in the first column of the left half of the annexed table. We write in the second column the differences between the first and second numbers in each triplet, in the third column the differences between the second and third numbers in each triplet, and in the fourth column the differences between the third and first numbers in each triplet. If any of these differences d is greater than Su we may replace it by the complementary number y — d: that this is permissible is obvious from the geometrical representation. By shifting cyclically the symbols in any vertical line in the first column we change these differences. We can, however, in this way always displace the second and third vertical lines in the first column so that the numbers in the second, third, and fourth columns include the numbers 1 to Sa twice over. This can be effected 214 KIRKMAN S SCHOOL-GIRLS PROBLEM [CH. IX thus. If any term in the residue series is greater than Su re- place it by its complementary number y — e. In this way, from the residue series, we get a derivative series dl, cZ2, c?3, ... such that any Su consecutive terms comprise all the integers from 1 to Su. The first half of this series may be divided into three equal divisions thus: (1) dly d^, dl, ... ; (2) d2, do, d8, ...; (3) dS, d6, d9, .... If the displacement is such that the first numbers in the second, third, and fourth columns are contained in different divisions, each difference must occur twice, and it will give a possible solution. Other possible regular arrange- ments give other solutions. Applying this to our case we have the residue series, 2, 4, 8, 3, 6, 12, 11, 9, 5, 10, 7, 1. The derivative series is 2, 4, 5, 3, 6, 1, 2, 4, 5, 3, 6, 1. The three divisions are (i) 2, 3 ; (ii) 4, 6 ; (iii) 5, 1. The cyclical arrange- ment we started wdth and the consequent differences are shown in the left half of the accompanying table. A cyclical change 2. 4. 8 2 4 6 2. 6. 5 4 1 3 3. 6. 12 3 6 4 8. 9. 1 6 5 2 11. 9. 5 2 4 6 11. 7. 8 4 1 3 10. 7. 1 3 6 4 10. 4. 12 6 5 2 as described above of the vertical lines of the symbols in the first column gives the arrangement in the right half of the table. Here each difference occurs twice and accordingly this gives a possible arrangement of the triplets, namely, 2, 6, 5 ; 3, 9, 1 ; 11, 7, 8; 10, 4, 12. These are the sufBxes of the '6's. We have now to use six of these 'b's in connection with the basic * a 's already determined, keeping the other six ' b s for the remaining two triangles. For instance we may obtain a scalene solution by taking as a suffix of the * h ' associated with any pair of * a 's, a number equal to the sum of the suffixes of the ' a 's. We thus get as a solution (a2. aS. 610), (a4>. aS. 67), (a6. all. 64), (al2. a9. 68), (ao. al. 612), (alO. al. 611), (62. 66. 6 5), (6 3. 69. 61), {k al3. 613). Or we might take as a suffix of the '6 ' associated with any pair of ' a's, the number midway between the suffixes CH. ix] kirkman's school-girls problem 215 of the 'a's on the 13 circle. This gives the following solution, in which the first six triangles are isosceles: (a2. aS. h5), (a4. aS. 610), (a6. all. 62), (al2. a9. 64), (a5. a7. 66), (alO. al. 612), (63. 69. 61), (611. 67. 68), {k. al3. 613). In the case of 27 girls, we may equally well represent the points by k at the centre of the circle and 26 equidistant points 1, 2,... 26 on the circumference. The points previously denoted by a and 6 with the suffix h are now denoted by the numbers 2h—l and 2h. Hence the basic pairs (2. 8), (4. 3), ...become (3. 15), (7. 5), (11. 21), (23. 17), (9. 13), (19. 1), and the corre- sponding scalene arrangement for the first day is (3. 15. 20), (7. 5. 14), ... {k. 25. 26). From this by a two-step cyclical permutation of the numbers, an arrangement for 13 days can be got. The case of 27 girls can also be treated by the direct formation of triplets. The triplets must be such that each difference is represented twice, but so that the groups of differences are different. There are analytical rules for forming such triplets somewhat analogous to those I have given for forming basic pairs, but their exposition would be lengthy, and I will not discuss them here. One set which will answer our purpose is (1. 12. 5), (2. 3. 10), (4. 6. 9), (8. 11. 7), giving respectively the differences [2, 6, 4], [1, 6, 5], [2, 3, 5], [3, 4, 1]. Now every difference c? in a 13 circle will correspond to d or IS — d in a 26 circle, and every residue e in a 13 circle will correspond to e or 1'3 + e in a 26 circle. Further, a triplet in the 26 circle must either have tliree even differences, or one even and two odd differences. Hence from the above sets we can get the following arrangement for the first day, (1.25.5) and (14.12.18) with differences [2,6,4], (15.3.10) and (2. 16. 23) with differences [12, 7, 5], (17. 6. 9) and (4. 19. 22) with differences [11, 3, 8], (21. 11. 20) and (8. 24. 7) with differences [10, 9, 1], and {k. 13. 26). From this by either a one-step or a two-step cyclical permutation of the numbers, an arrangement for 13 days can be got. I will not go into further details about the deduction of other similar solutions. A similar method is always applicable when n is of the form 24m + 3. 216 KIRKMAN S SCHOOL-GIRLS PROBLEM [CH. IX The process by pairing when 3/ is a prime of the form 6u-\-l is extremely rapid. For instance, in the case of 15 girls we have n = 15, 3/ = 7, w = 1, a?= 5. The order of the residues is 5, 4, 6, 2, 3, 1. By our rule we can at once arrange basic pairs (5. 4), (6. 2), (3. 1). From these pairs we can obtain numerous solutions. Thus using scalene triangles as above explained, we get as an arrangement for the first day (a 5, a 4, 62), (a 6. a 2. 61), (a3. al. 64), (63. 65. 66), (k. al. 67), from which by a one-step cyclical permutation of the numbers, arrangements for the seven days can be obtained. Using the basic pairs as bases of isosceles triangles, we get as an arrangement for the first day (a5. a4. 61), (a6. a2. 64), (a3. al. 62), (63. 65. 66), {k. al. hi). Again, take the case of 39 girls. Here we have n = 39, 2/= 19, i^=3, ^=3. The order of the residues is 3, 9, 8; 5, 15, 7; 2, 6, 18 ; 16, 10, 11 ; 14, 4, 12 ; 17, 13, 1. The basic pairs are (3. 5), (9. 15), (8. 7), (2. 16), &c. These are the sufiixes of the *a's. The possible triplets which determine what *6's are to be associated with these, and what ' 6 's are to be left for the remaining three triangles, can be determined as follows : From the residue series we obtain the derivative series 3, 9, 8, 5, 4, 7, 2, 6, 1, &c. The divisions are (i) 3, 5, 2; (ii) 9, 4, 6; (iii) 8, 7, 1. A cyclical arrangement like that given above leads to the result in the left half of the annexed table which does not satisfy our condition. A cyclical displacement of the symbols in the vertical lines in the first column leads to the arrangement given in the right half of the table, and shows 3. 9. 8 6 2 5 3. 15. 16 7 3 4 5. 15. 7 9 8 2 5. 6. 11 1 5 6 2. 6. 18 4 7 3 2. 10. 12 8 2 9 16. 10. 11 6 1 5 16. 4. 1 7 3 4 14. 4. 12 9 8 2 14. 13. 8 1 5 6 17. 13. 1 6 7 3 17. 9. 7 8 2 9 that (3. 15. 18), (5. 6. 11), &c. are possible triplets. From these results numerous solutions can be deduced in the same way as above. For instance one solution is (a 3. a 5. 64), CH. ix] kirkman's school-girls problem 217 (a9. al5. 612), (aS. a1. hll), (a2. al6. 69), {aQ, alO. 68), (al8. all. 65), (al4. all. 66), (a4. al3. 618), (ttl2. al. 616), (63. 610. 61), (62. 613. 67), (614. 615. 611), (A;. al9. 619). In the case of 39 girls we may also extend the method used above by which for 27 girls we obtained the solution (1. 25. 5), (14. 12. 18), .... We thus get a solution for 39 girls as follows: (1.25.18), (14.38.31), (27. 12. .5); (15.16.10), (28. 29. 23), (2. 3. 30); (17. 19. 35), (30. 32. 9), (4. 6. 22); (21. 24. 33), (34. 37. 7), (8. 11. 20); (13. 26. 39). From this the arrangements for the first 13 days are obtained either by a one-step or a three-step cyclical permutation of the numbers. The single triplets from each of which an arrangement for one of the other six days is obtainable are (1. 5. 15), (2. 6. 16), (3. 7. 17); (1. 9. 20), (2. 10. 21), (3. 11. 22). From each of these the arrangement for one day is obtainable by a three-step cyclical permutation of the numbers. These examples of the use of the Focal and Analytical Methods are given only by way of illustration, but they will serve to suggest the applications to other cases. When the number taken as base is composite, the formations of the series used in the Analytical Method may be troublesome, but the principle of the method is not affected, though want of space forbids my going into further details. Eckenstein, to whom the development of this method is mainly due, can, with the aid of a table of primitive roots and sets of numbers written on cards, within half an hour obtain a solution for any case in which n is less than 500, and can within one hour obtain a solution for any case in which n lies between 500 and 900. Number of Solutions. The problems of 9 and of 15 girls have been subjected to an exhaustive examination. It ha« been shown that all solutions of the problem of 9 girls are reducible to one type, and that the number of independent solutions is 840, where, however, any arrangement on Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday and Thursday, and the same arrangement on (say) Monday, Tuesday, Thursday and Wednesday are regarded as identical. [If they are regarded as different the number of possible independent solutions is 20,160.] The total number of 218 KIRKMAN'S school-girls problem [CH. IX possible arrangements of the girls in triplets for four days is (280)Y4!; hence the probability of obtaining a solution by a chance arrangement is about 1 in 300,000. All solutions of the problem of 15 girls are reducible to one of eleven types, distinguished by the number of cycles required for expressing them. The number of independent solutions is said to be 65 x(13!), but I do not vouch for the correctness of the result. The total number of ways in which the girls can walk out for a week in triplets is (455)'; so the probability that any chance way satisfies the condition of the problem is very small. Walecki's Theorem. It should be noticed that Walecki — quoted by Lucas — has shown that if a solution for the case of n girls walking out in triplets for (n — l)/2 days is known, then a solution for Sn girls walking out for (3n — l)/2 days can be deduced. For if an arrangement of the n girls Oi, ag, ..., a^ for (n— l)/2 days is known ; and also one of the n girls h^, h^, ...,&»; and also one of the n girls Ci, Ca, ..., Cn\ then obviously an arrangement of these 3n girls for (n — l)/2 days can be written down at once. A set of n triplets for another day will be given by ami>m+kCm+2k, where m is put equal to 1, 2, ..., n successivel3\ Here k may have any of the n values, 0, 1, 2, ..., (n — 1) ; but, wherever a suffix is greater than n, it is to be divided by n and only the remainder retained. Hence altogether we have an arrangement for (n — l)/2 + n days, i.e. for (Sn — l)/2 days. We might also form the known order of arrangements for (n — 1)/2 days for the three sets of girls, and then arrange the girls in triplets thus: (ci. a^. hn), (02- cl^. &n-iX ••• ('^n- ^7f &i)« from this, arrangements for n days can be obtained by one-step cyclical permutations of the a and h suffixes, keeping the c suffixes unchanged. Hence altogether we get, as before, arrangements for (ri — l)/2 + n days, i.e. for (8n — l)/2 days. I have given solutions for all values of n less than 100. Other solutions for some of these values could also be found by Walecki's Theorem. By that theorem we can also write down CH. ix] kirkman's school-girls problem 219 solutions for 3'"/i girls where n has any of the values given above. Extension to n^ Girls. Peirce suggested the corresponding problem of arranging n^ girls in n groups, each group containing n girls, on w + 1 days so that no two girls will be together in a group on more than one day. We may conveniently represent the girls by a point k at the centre of a circle and n^ — 1 equi- distant points on the circumference. When ?i = 2, we may arrange initially the 4 points in two pairs, one pair consisting of k and one of the points, say, 3, and the other pair of the remaining points (1. 2). These two pairs give the arrangement for the first day. From them, the solu- tion for the other day is obtained b}- a one-step cyclical permutation. When n = 3, we may arrange initially the 9 points in three triplets, namely, k and the ends of a diameter {k. 4. 8) ; a triangle (1. 2. 7) ; and the same triangle rotated through 180°, thus occupying the position (5. 6. 3). These three triplets give an arrangement for the first day. From them the solutions for the other days are obtained by one-step cyclical permutations. When n = 4, we may arrange initially the 16 points in four quartets, namely, k and three equidistant points, (k. 5. 10. \o); a quadrilateral (1. 2. 4. 8) ; the same quadrilateral rotated through 120° and 240°, thus occupying the positions (6. 7. 9. 13) and (11. 12. 14. 3). These four quartets give an arrangement for the first day. From them the solutions for the other days are obtained by one-step cyclical permutations. When n = 5, we may arrange initially the 25 points in five quintets, namely, k and four equidistant points, (/j. 6. 12. 18. 24); a pentagon (2. 3. 5. 13. 22) ; the same pentagon rotated through 90°, 180°, 270°, thus occupying the positions (8. 9. 11. 19. 4), (14. 15. 17. 1. 10), (20. 21. 23. 7. 16). These five quintets give an arrangement for the first day. From them the solutions for the other days are obtained by one-step cyclical permutations. There is a second solution (k 6. 12. 18. 24), (1. 2. 15. 17. 22), &c. Hitherto the case when n — (j has baffled all attempts to find a solution. 220 KIRKMAN S SCHOOL-GIRLS PROBLEM [CH. IX When 72 = 7 we may initially arrange the 49 points in seven groups namely {k. 8. 16. 24. 32. 40. 48), a group (1. 2. 5. 11. 31. 36. 38) and the same group rotated through 60°, 120°, 180°, 240°, 300°. There are three other solutions: in these the second group is either (2. 3. 17. 28. 38. 45. 47), or (3. 4. 6. 18. 23. 41. 45), or (3. 4. 14. 17. 26. 45. 47). When n = 8 there are three solutions, due to Eck en stein. If the first group is {k. 9. 18. 27. 36. 45. 54. 63), the second groupiseither(1.2.4.8.16.21.32.42), or (2.3.16.22.24.50.55.62), or (3. 4. 7. 19. 24. 26. 32. 56): the other groups in each solution heing obtained by successive addition of 9 to the number in the second group. When n is composite no general method of attacking the problem has been discovered, though solutions for various par- kl, k2, kn. al, a2, an. 61, 62, bn. kl, al, 62, c3, k2, a2, 64, c6, kS, a3, 66, c9, kn, an, bn, en, Arrangement on First Day Arrangement on Second Day ticular cases have been given. But when n is prime, we can proceed thus. Denote the n^ girls by the suffixed letters shown in the left half of the above table. Take this as giving the kl, k2, kd, fe4, ko, fc6, kl. al, a2, a3, a4, a5, a6, al. 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67. cl, c2, cB, c4, c5, c6, c7. dl, d2, d3, d4, do, dQ, dl. el, e2, eS, e4, e5, e6, el. fh /2, /3, /4, /5, /6, fl. Arrangement on the First Day I kl, al, 62, c3, d4, eo, /6. k2, a2, 64, c6, dl, e3, /5. ^•3, aS, 66, c2, do, el, /4. fe4, a4, 61, c5, d2, e6, /3. fc5, a5, 63, cl, d6, e4, /2. k6, a6, 65, c4, d3, e2, fl. kl, al, hi, cl, dl, el, fl. Arrangement on the Second Day arrangement on the first day. Then on the second day we may take as an arrangement that shown in the right half of the CH. ix] kirkman's school-girls problem 221 table. From the arrangement on the second day, the arrange- ments for the other days are obtained by one-step cyclical permutations of the suffixes of a, b, &c.; the suffixes of A; being unaltered. An example will make this clearer. For instance, when n = 7 the rule gives the arrangements for the first and second days shown in the second table. Kirkmans Problem in Quartets. The problem of arranging 4??i girls, where m is of the form 3n + 1, in quartets to walk out for (4/Ai,— 1)/3 days, so that no girl will walk with any of her school-fellows in any quartet more than once has been attacked. Methods snuilar to those given above are applicable, and solu- tions for all cases where m does not exceed 31, have been written out. Analogous methods seem to be applicable to corresponding problems about quintets, sextets, &c. Bridge Problem. Another analogous question is where we deal with arrangements in pairs instead of triplets. One problem of this kind is to arrange 4m members of a bridge club for 4m — 1 rubbers so that (i) no two members shall plav toofether as partners more than once, and (ii) each member shall meet every other member as opponent twice. The general theory has been discussed by E. H. Moore. To obtain cyclic solutions we may proceed thus. Denote the members by a point k at the centre of a circle and by 4?7i — 1 equidistant points, numbered 1, 2, 3, ... on the circumference. We can join the points 2, 3, 4, ... by chords, and these chords with {k. 1) give possible partners at the m tables in the first rubber. A one-step cyclical permutation of the numbers will give the arrangements for the other rubbers if, in the initial arrangement, (i) the lengths of the chords representing every pair of partners are unequal and thus appear only once, and (ii) the lengths of the chords representing every pair of opponents appear only twice. Solutions have been published for several values of m. In the following examples for m = 2, 3, 4, 10, I give an arrangement of the card tables for the first rubber : the arrangements for the subsequent rubbers being thence obtained by one-step cyclical permutations of the numbers. If 7?i=2, such an initial arrangement is {k. 1 against 5. 6) and (2. 4 against 3. 7). If m = 3, one such initial 222 kirkman's school-girls problem [ch. ix arrangement is (k. 1 against 5. 6), (2. 11 against 3. 9) and (4. 8 against 7. 10). If m = 4, such an inibial arrangement is {k. 1 against 6. 11), (2. 3 against 5. 9), (4. 12 against 13. 15), and (7. 10 against 8. 14). One example of a higher number will suffice; if m = 10 such an initial arrangement is (k. 1 against 14. 27), (2. 9 against 26. 6), (3. 17 against 12. 11), (5. 33 against 23. 21), (15. 39 against 19. 22), (16. 25 against 24. 30), (18, 36 against 34. 7), (28. 32 against 35. 13), (29. 37 against 4. 38) and (31. 8 against 20. 10). In some cases there are also solutions not reducible to single cycles. Sylvesters Corollary. To the original theorem J. J. Sylvester added the corollary that the school of 15 girls could walk out in triplets on 91 days until every possible triplet had walked abreast once, and he published a solution in 1861. The generalized problem of finding the greatest number of ways in which co girls walking in rows of a abreast can be arranged so that every possible combination of b of them may walk abreast once and only once has been solved for various cases. Suppose that this greatest number of ways is y. It is obvious that, if all the cc girls are to walk out each day in rows of a abreast, then x must be an exact multiple of a and the number of rows formed each day is oo/a. I confine myself to these cases. If such an arrangement can be made for z days, then we have a solution of the problem to arrange x girls to walk out in rows of a abreast for z days so that they all go out each day and so that every possible combination of h girls may walk together once, and only once. An example where the solution is obvious is if a; = 2n, a— 2, 6 = 2, in which case 3/ = ?i(27i — 1), z=2n — \. If we take the case a; =15, a = 3, 6=2, we find 3/ =35; and it happens that these 35 rows can be divided into 7 sets, each of which contains all the symbols ; hence ^=7. More generally, if a?= 5 X 3'^ a = 3, 6= 2, we find y = ^{x-\)ftx, z=-{x-\)l2. It will be noticed that in the solutions of the original fifteen school-girls problem and of Walecki's extension of it given above every possible pair of girls walk together once ; hence we might infer that in these cases we could determine z as well as y. CH. ix] kirkman's school-girls problem 223 The results of the last paragraph were given by Kirkman in 1850. In the same memoir he also proved that, if x=9, (X=3, b = o, then y = 84, ^ = 28; and if x=lo, a = 3, 6 = 3, 2/ =455, ^ = 91, but some of the extensions he gave are not correct. He showed, however, how 9 girls can be arranged to walk out 28 times (say 4 times a day for a week) so that in any day the same pair never are together more than once and so that at the end of the week each girl has been associated with every possible pair of her school-fellows. Three years later he attacked the problem when x — 2^\ a = 4, 6=3, but his analysis is open to objection. In 1867 S. Bills showed that if 57 = 15, a = 3, 6 = 2, then y = 35: and the method used will give the value of y, if a;=2'*— 1, a =3, 6=2. Shortly afterwards W. Lea showed that if a; =16, a =4, 6 = 3, then y= 140. These writers did not confine their discussion to cases where x is an exact multiple of a. Steiner's Problem. I should add that Kirkman's problem, but in a somewhat more general form, was proposed independently by J. Steiner in 1852, and, as enunciated by him, is known as Steiners Combinatorische Aufgabe. In substance Steiner sought to find for what values of n it is possible to arrange n things in triplets, so that every pair of things is contained in one and only one triplet: any triplet forming part of such an arrangement is called a triad. Also, if ?i is a number for which such an arrangement can be formed, he asked whether there are other arrangements that cannot be obtained from it by permutations of the things. Other problems proposed by him are as follows. When such an arrangement of triads has been made, is it possible to arrange the n things in sets of four, called tetrads, so that no one of the triads is contained in any tetrad, but every triplet which is not a triad is contained in one and only one tetrad ? And generally when an arrangement in ^^-ads has been made, is it possible to arrange the things in sets of k -{- 1-ads so that no /i-ad, where ^ :|> A:, is obtained in a A; + l-ad, and so that every A;-let tliat is not or does not contain an /i-ad is contained in one and only one k-v 1-ad ? 224 CHAPTER X. MISCELLANEOUS PROBLEMS. I propose to discuss in this chapter the mathematical theory of a few common mathematical amusements and games. I might have dealt with them in the first four chapters, but, since most of them involve mixed geometry and algebra, it is rather more convenient to deal with them apart from the problems and puzzles which have been described already; the arrange- ment is, however, based on convenience rather than on any logical distinction. The majority of the questions here enumerated have no connection one Avith another, and I jot them down almost at random. I shall discuss in succession the Fifteen Puzzle, the Tower of Hanoi, Chinese Rings, and some miscellaneous Problems connected with a Pack of Cards. The Fifteen Puzzle*. Some years ago the so-called Fifteen Puzzle was on sale in all toy-shops. It consists of a shallow wooden box — one side being marked as the top — in the form of a square, and contains fifteen square blocks or counters numbered 1, 2, 3, ... up to 15. The box will hold just sixteen such counters, and, as it contains only fifteen, they can be moved about in the box relatively to one another. Initially they are put in the box in any order, but leaving the sixteenth * Thdi'e are two articles on the subject in the American Journal of Matheviatics, 1879, vol. ii, by Professors Woolsey Johnson and Storey ; but the whole theory is deducible immediately from the proposition I give in the tesct. CH. X] MISCELLANEOUS PROBLEMS cell or small square empty; the puzzle is to move them so that finally they occupy the position shown in the first of the annexed figures. D Top of Box C n 4 1 ta Bottom of Box B We may represent the various stages in the game by sup- posing that the blank space, occupying the sixteenth cell, is moved over the board, ending finally where it started. The route pursued by the blank space may consist partly of tracks followed and again retraced, which have no effect on the arrangement, and partly of closed paths travelled round, which necessarily are cyclical permutations of an odd number of counters. No other motion is possible. Now a cyclical permutation of n letters is equivalent to n — 1 simple interchanges ; accordingly an odd cyclical permu- tation is equivalent to an even number of simple interchanges. Hence, if we move the counters so as to bring the blank space back into the sixteenth cell, the new order must differ from the initial order by an even number of simple interchanges. If therefore the order we want to get can be obtained from this initial order only by an odd number of interchanges, the problem is incapable of solution ; if it can be obtained by an even number, the problem is possible. Thus the order in the second of the diagrams given above is deducible from that in the first diagram by six interchanges ; namely, by interchanging the counters 1 and 2, 15 B. R. 226 MISCELLANEOUS PROBLEMS [CH. X 3 and 4, 5 and 6, 7 and 8, 9 and 10, 11 and 12. Hence the one can be deduced from the other by moving the counters about in the box. If however in the second diagram the order of the last three counters had been 13, 15, 14, then it would have required seven interchanges of counters to bring them into the order given in the first diagram. Hence in this case the problem would be insoluble. The easiest way of finding the number of simple inter- changes necessary in order to obtain one given arrangement from another is to make the transformation by a series of cycles. For example, suppose that we take the counters in the box in any definite order, such as taking the successive rows from left to right, and suppose the original order and the final order to be respectively 1, 13, 2, 3, 5, 7, 12, 8, 15, 6, 9, 4, 11, 10, 14, and 11, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 1, 9, 10, 13, 12, 8, 14, 15. We can deduce the second order from the first by 12 simple interchanges. The simplest way of seeing this is to arrange the process in three separate cycles as follows : — 1, 11, 8; 11, 8, 1; 13, 2, 3, 4, 12, 7, 6, 10, 14, 15, 9; 5. 2, 3, 4, 12, 7, 6, 10, 14, 15, 9, 13; 5. Thus, iLin the first row of figures 11 is substituted for 1, then 8 for 11, then 1 for 8, we have made a cyclical interchange of 3 numbers, which is equivalent to 2 simple interchanges (namely, interchanging 1 and 11, and then 1 and 8). Thus the whole process is equivalent to one cyclical interchange of 3 numbers, another of 11 numbers, and another of 1 number. Hence it is equivalent to (2 + 10 + 0) simple interchanges. This is an even number, and thus one of these orders can be deduced from the other by moving the counters about in the box. It is obvious that, if the initial order is the same as the required order except that the last three counters are in the order 15, 14, 13, it would require one interchange to put them in the order 13, 14, 15 ; hence the problem is insoluble. If however the box is turned through a right angle, so as CH. X] MISCELLANEOUS PROBLEMS 227 to make AB the top, this rotation will be equivalent to 13 simple interchanges. For, if we keep the sixteenth square always blank, then such a rotation would change any order such as 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, to 13, 9, 5, 1, 14, 10, 6, 2, 15, 11, 7, 3, 12, 8, 4, which is equivalent to 13 simple interchanges. Hence it will change the arrangement from one where a solution is impossible to one where it is possible, and vice versa. Again, even if the initial order is one which makes a solution impossible, yet if the first cell and not the last is left blank it will be possible to arrange the fifteen counters in their natural order. For, if we represent the blank cell by 6, this will be equivalent to changing the order 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 6, to 6, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15: this is a cyclical interchange of 16 things and therefore is equivalent to 15 simple interchanges. Hence it will change the arrangement from one where a solution is impossible to one where it is possible, and vice versa. So, too, if it were permissible to turn the 6 and the 9 upside down, thus changing them to 9 and 6 respectively, this would be equivalent to one simple interchange, and therefore would change an arrang:ement where a solution is impossible to one where it is possible. It is evident that the above principles are applicable equally to a rectangular box containing mn cells or spaces and mn - 1 counters which are numbered. Of course m may be equal to n. If such a box is turned through a right angle, and m and n are both even, it will be equivalent to m/i - 3 simple interchanges— and thus will change an impossible position to a possible one and vice versa-but unless both m and n are even the rotation IS equivalent to only an even number of interchanges. Similarly, if either m or w is even, and it is impossible to solve the problem' when the last cell is left blank, then it will be possible to solve ' It by leaving the first cell blank. 15-2 228 MISCELLANEOUS PROBLEMS [CH. X The problem may be made more difficult by limiting the possible movements by fixing bars inside the box which will prevent the movement of a counter transverse to their directions. We can conceive also of a similar cubical puzzle, but we could not work it practically except by sections. The Tower of Hanoi. I may mention next the ingenious puzzle known as the Tower of Hanoi. It was brought out in 1883 by M. Glaus (Lucas). It consists of three pegs fastened to a stand, and of eight circular discs of wood or cardboard each of which has a hole in the middle through which a peg can be passed. These discs are of different radii, and initially they are placed all on one peg, so that the biggest is at the bottom, and the radii of the successive discs decrease as we ascend : thus the smallest disc is at the top. This arrangement is called the Tower. The problem is to shift the discs from one peg to another in such a way that a disc shall never rest on one smaller than itself, and finally to transfer the tower {i.e. all the discs in their proper order) from the peg on which they initially rested to one of the other pegs. The method of efiecting this is as follows, (i) If initially there are n discs on the peg A, the first operation is to transfer gradually the top n — 1 discs from the peg A to the peg B, leaving the peg G vacant : suppose that this requires x separate transfers, (ii) Next, move the bottom disc to the peg G. (iii) Then, reversing the first process, transfer gradually the n — l discs from B to 0, which will necessitate x transfers. Hence, if it requires oc transfers of simple discs to move a tower of n — 1 discs, then it will require 2^7+1 separate transfers of single discs to move a tower of n discs. Now with 2 discs it requires 3 transfers, i.e. 2^—1 transfers ; hence with 3 discs the number of transfers required will be 2 (2^ - 1) + 1, that is, 2^ - 1. Proceeding in this way we see that with a tower of n discs it will require 2" — 1 transfers of single discs to effect the complete transfer. Thus the eight discs of the puzzle will require 255 single transfers. It will be noticed that every alternate move CH. X] MISCELLANEOUS PROBLEMS 229 consists of a transfer of the smallest disc from one peg to another, the pegs being taken in cyclical order : further if the discs be numbered consecutively 1, 2, 3, ... beginning with the smallest, all those with odd numbers rotate in one direction, and all those with even numbers in the other direction. De Parville gave an account of the origin of the toy which is a sufficiently pretty conceit to deserve repetition*. In the great temple at Benares, says he, beneath the dome which marks the centre of the world, rests a brass plate in which are fixed three diamond needles, each a cubit high and as thick as the body of a bee. On one of these needles, at the creation, God placed sixty-four discs of pure gold, the largest disc resting on the brass plate, and the others getting smaller and smaller up to the top one. This is the Tower of Bramah. Day and night unceasingly the priests transfer the discs from one diamond needle to another according to the fixed and immutable laws of Bramah, which require that the priest on duty must not move more than one disc at a time and that he must place this disc on a needle so that there is no smaller disc below it. When the sixty-four discs shall have been thus transferred from the needle on which at the creation God placed them to one of the other needles, tower, temple, and Brahmins alike will crumble into dust, and with a thunderclap the world will vanish. Would that other writers were in the habit of inventing equally interesting origins for the puzzles they produce ! The number of separate transfers of single discs which the Brahmins must make to effect the transfer of the tower is 2«^-l, that is, is 18,446744,073709,551615: a number which, even if the priests never made a mistake, would require many thousands of millions of years to carry out. Chinese RiNGSf. A somewhat more elaborate toy, known as Chinese Rings, which is on sale in most English toy-shops, * La Nature, Paris, 1884, part i, pp. 285—286. + It waa described by Cardan in 1550 in his De Subtilitate, bk. xv, paragraph 2, ed. Sponius, vol. iii, p. 587 ; by Wallis in his Algebra, Latin edition, 1693, Opera, vol. ii, chap, cxi, pp. 472—478 ; and allusion is made to it also in Ozanam's Recreations, 1723 edition, vol. iv, p. 439. 230 MISCELLANEOUS PROBLEMS [CH. X is represented in the accompanying figure. It consists of a number of rings hung upon a bar in such a manner that the ring at one end (say A) can be taken off or put on the bar at pleasure; but any other ring can be taken off or put on only when the one next to it towards A is on, and all the rest towards A are off the bar. The order of the rings cannot be changed. Only one ring can be taken off or put on at a time. [In the toy, as usually sold, the first two rings form an exception to the rule. Both these can be taken off or put on together. To simplify the discussion I shall assume at first that only one ring is taken off or put on at a time.] I proceed to show that, if there are n rings, then in order to disconnect them from the bar, it will be necessary to take a ring off or to put a ring on either J (2**+^ — 1) times or J (2"+^ — 2) times according as n is odd or even. Let the taking a ring off the bar or putting a ring on the bar be called a step. It is usual to number the rings from the free end A. Let us suppose that we commence with the first m rings off the bar and all the rest on the bar; and suppose that then it requires x—1 steps to take off the next ring, that is, it requires x—1 additional steps to arrange the rings so that the first m + 1 of them are off the bar and all the rest are on it. Before taking these steps we can take off CH. X] MISCELLANEOUS PROBLEMS 231 * the (m + 2)th ring and thus it will require x steps from our initial position to remove the (m+l)th and (m + 2)th rings. Suppose that these x steps have been made and that thus the first m + 2 rings are off the bar and the rest on it, and let us find how many additional steps are now necessary to take off the {m + 3)th and (m + 4)th rings. To take these off we begin by taking off the (m + 4)th ring : this requires 1 step. Before we can take off the {m + 3)th ring we must arrange the rings so that the (?7i+ 2)th ring is on and the first m 4- 1 rings are off: to effect this, (i) we must get the (m + l)th ring on and the first m rings off, which requires x — \ steps, (ii) then we must put on the (m + 2)th ring, which requires 1 step, (iii) and lastly we must take the (m + l)th ring off, which re- quires x — \ steps: these movements require in all j2 (a? — 1) + 1} steps. Next we can take the (m + 3)th ring off, which requires 1 step ; this leaves us with the first m + 1 rings off, the (m + 2)th on, the (m + 3)th off and all the rest on. Finally to take off the (m + 2)th ring, (i) we get the (m+l)th ring on and the first m rings off, which requires x—1 steps, (ii) we take off the (m + 2)th ring, which requires 1 step, (iii) we take the {in-\- l)th ring off, which requires x—\ steps: these movements require [2 (a; — 1) + 1} steps. Therefore, if when the first in rings are off it requires x steps to take off the {in + l)th and (m + 2)th rings, then the number of additional steps required to take off the {m + 3)th and (m+4)th rings is 1 + {2(a;- 1) + 1} + 1 + {2 (^- 1) + 1}, that is, is 4a7. To find the whole number of steps necessary to take off an odd number of rings we proceed as follows. To take off the first ring requires 1 step ; .'. to take off the first 3 rings requires 4 additional steps ; ^ 4,2 • • >> »» «-' )5 )> ^ 3> ii In this way we see that the number of steps required to take off the first 2n-\-\ rings is 1 + 4 + 4- -f ... + 4", which is equal to J- ( 22'*+=^-!). To find the number of steps necessary to take off an even number of rings we proceed in a similar manner. 232 MISCELLANEOUS PROBLEMS [CH. X To take off the first 2 rings requires 2 steps ; /. to take off the first 4 rings requires 2x4 additional steps ; • • « » >» " » )J ^ ^ -X 5, f, In this way we see that the number of steps required to take off the first 2n rings is 2 + (2 x 4) + (2 x 4^) + . . . + (2 x 4^-i), which is equal to | (22"+i - 2). If we take off or put on the first two rings in one step instead of two separate steps, these results become respectively 2^^ and 2''''-'- - 1. I give the above analysis because it is the direct solution of a problem attacked unsuccessfully by Cardan in 1550 and by WalKs in 1693, and which at one time attracted some attention. I proceed next to give another solution, more elegant though rather artificial. This, which is due to Monsieur Gros*, depends on a convention by which any position of the rings is denoted by a certain number expressed in the binary scale of notation in such a way that a step is indicated by the addition or subtraction of unity. Let the rings be indicated by circles : if a ring is on the bar, it is represented by a circle drawn above the bar ; if the ring is off the bar, it is represented by a circle below the bar. Thus figure i below represents a set of seven rings of which the first two are off the bar, the next three are on it, the sixth is off it, and the seventh is on it. Denote the rings which are on the bar by the digits 1 or alternately, reckoning from left to right, and denote a ring which is off the bar by the digit assigned to that ring on the bar which is nearest to it on the left of it, or by a if there is no ring to the left of it. Thus the three positions indicated below are denoted re- spectively by the numbers written below them. The position represented in figure ii is obtained from that in figure i by putting the first ring on to the bar, while the position repre- sented in figure iii is obtained from that in figure i by taking the fourth ring off the bar. * Theorie du Baguenodier, by L. Gros, Lyons, 1872. I take the account of this from Lucas, vol. i, part 7. CH. X] MISCELLANEOUS PROBLEMS 233 It follows that every position of the rings is denoted by a number expressed in the binary scale: moreover, since in going from left to right every ring on the bar gives a variation (that is, 1 to or to 1) and every ring off the bar gives a continu- ation, the effect of a step by which a ring is taken off or put on the bar is either to subtract unity from this number or to add unity to it. For example, the number denoting the position of the rings in figure ii is obtained from the number denoting that m figure i by adding unity to it. Similarly the number de- noting the position of the rings in figure iii is obtained from the number denoting that in figure i by subtracting unity from it. O OOP o o o o o o o o OOP o o o o ^ Q 1101000 1101001 1100111 Figure i. Figure ii. Figure iii. The position when all the seven rings are off the bar is denoted by the number 0000000 : when all of them are on the bar by the number 1010101. Hence to change from one position to the other requires a number of steps equal to the difference between these two numbers in the binary scale. The first of these numbers is 0: the second is equal to 2^ + 2* + 2^^ -}- 1, that is, to 85. Therefore 85 steps are required. In a similar way we may show^ that to put on a set of 2?i 4- 1 rings requires (1 + 2- + . . . + 2-'') steps, that is, i (22^+2 _ j) g^eps ; and to put on a set of 2n rings requires (2 + 2^ + . . . + 2^"~^) steps, that is, J (2""+i - 2) steps. I append a table indicating the steps necessary to take off the first four rings from a set of five rings. The diagrams in the middle column show the successive position of the rings after each step. The number following each diagram indicates that position, each number being obtained from the one above it by the addition of unity. The steps which are bracketed to- gether can be made in one movement, and, if thus effected, the whole process is completed in 7 movements instead of 10 steps: this is in accordance with the formula given above. 234 MISCELLANEOUS PROBLEMS [CH. X Gros asserted that it is possible to take from 64 to 80 steps a minute, which in my experience is a rather high estimate. If we accept the lower of these numbers, it would be possible to take off 10 rings in less than 8 minutes ; to take off 25 rings would require more than 582 days, each of ten hours work ; and to take off 60 rings would necessitate no less than 768614,336404,564650 steps, and would require nearly 55000,000000 years work — assuming of course that no mistakes were made. Initia . position After 1st step >i 2nd „ » 3rd „ ji 4th „ ?> 5th „ j> 6th „ jj 7th „ jj 8th „ >j 9th ,, jy 10th „ o o o o o P o o o 1 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o L2L o o o o o r^ o o o o o o o o 10101 10110 1 lOlllJ 11000 11001 1 iioio) 11011 11100 11101 11110 11111. Problems connected with a Pack of Cards. An ordinary pack of playing cards can be used to illustrate many questions depending on simple properties of numbers, or involving the relative position of the cards. In problems of this kind, the principle of solution generally consists in re-arranging the pack in a particular manner so as to bring the card into some definite position. Any such re-arrangement is a species of shuffling. I shall treat in succession of problems connected with Shuffling a Pack, Arrangements hy Rows and Columns, the Determination of a Pair out of ^n{n + l) Pairs, Gergonne's Pile Problem, and the game known as the Mouse Trap. CH. X] MISCELLANEOUS PROBLEMS 235 Shuffling a Pack. Any system of shuffling a pack of cards, if carried out consistently, leads to an arrangement which can be calculated ; but tricks that depend on it generally require considerable technical skill. Suppose for instance that a pack of n cards is shuffled, as is not unusual, by placing the second card on the first, the third below these, the fourth above them, and so on. The theo:^ of this system of shuffling is due to Monge*. The following are some of the results and are not difficult to prove directly. If the pack contains Qp + 4 cards, the (2jo 4- 2)th card will occupy the same position in the shuffled pack. For instance, if a complete pack of 52 cards is shuffled as described above, the 18th card will remain the 18th card. Again, if a pack of 10/) + 2 cards is shuffled in this way, the {2p + l)th and the (6^ + 2)th cards will interchange places. For instance, if an 6carte pack of 32 cards is shuffled as described above, the 7 th and the 20th cards will change places. More generally, one shuffle of a pack of 2p cards will move the card which was in the o^oth place to the x-fii place, where a^i = -^ (2p -\- Xq-\-V) if Xq is odd, and Xi = \ (2p — Xo + 2) if Xo is even, from which the above results can be deduced. By repeated applications of the above formulae we can show that the effect of m such shuffles is to move the card which was initially in the Xoth. place to the a^^th place, where 2»"+ia;;^ = (4j9 + l)(2"^-^±2"^-2± ... ±2 ± 1) ± 2^o + 2"» ± 1, the sign ± representing an ambiguity of sign. Again, in any pack of n cards after a certain number of shufflings, not greater than ?i, the cards will return to their primitive order. This will always be the case as soon as the original top card occupies that position again. To determine * Monge's investigations are printed in the Memoires de VAcadimie des Sciences, Paris, 1773, pp. 390 — 412, Among those who have studied the subject afresh I may in particular mention V. Bouniakowski, Bulletin physico-viatMma- tique de St Petersbourg, 1857, vol. xv, pp. 202 — 205, summarised iu the Nouvelles annales de mathematiques, 1858, pp. G6 — 67 ; T. de St Laurent, Memoires de V Academic de Gard, 1865 ; L. Tanner, Educational Times Re})rints, 1880, vol. xxxiii, pp. 73 — 75; M. J. Bourget, Lioxiville's Journal, 1882, pp. 413 — 434; and H. F. Baker, Transactions of the British Association for 1910, pp. 520 — 528. 236 MISCELLANEOUS PROBLEMS [CH. X the number of shuffles required for a pack of 2p cards, it is sufficient to put oom = ^o ^'Hd find the smallest value of m which satisfies the resulting equation for all values of ccq from 1 to 2p. It follows that, if m is the least number which makes 4"* — 1 divisible by 4p+l, then m shuffles will be required if either 2"* + 1 or 2"* — 1 is divisible by 4p + 1, otherwise 2m shuffles will be required. The number for a pack of 2^ + 1 cards is the same as that for a pack of 2p cards. With an ^cart6 pack of 32 cards, six shuffles are sufficient; with a pack of 2" cards, n + 1 shuffles are sufficient; with a fall pack of 52 cards, twelve shuffles are sufficient; with a pack of 13 cards ten shuffles are sufflcient ; while with a pack of 50 cards fifty shuffles are required ; and so on. W. H. H. Hudson* has also shown that, whatever is the law of shuffling, yet if it is repeated again and again on a pack of n cards, the cards will ultimately fall into their initial posi- tions after a number of shufflings not greater than the greatest possible L.c.M. of all numbers whose sum is n. For suppose that any particular position is occupied after the 1st, 2nd, ..., pth. shuffles by the cards Ai, Ao, ..., Ap re- spectively, and that initially the position is occupied by the card J-o- Suppose further that after the ^th shuffle Aq returns to its initial position, therefore Aq = Ap. Then at the second shuffling -ia succeeds ^1 by the same law by which Ai succeeded -4o at the first; hence it follows that previous to the second shuffling A2 must have been in the place occupied by Ai pre- vious to the first. Thus the cards which after the successive shuffles take the place initially occupied by A^ are A^, A3, ..., Ap, All that is, after the pth shuffle Ai has returned to the place initially occupied by it: and so for all the other cards xi^} ■"■%} •••, -0._p.-i. Hence the cards At,, A^, ..., Ap form a cycle of p cards, one or other of which is always in one or other of p positions in the pack, and which go through all their changes in p shufflings. Let the number n of the pack be divided into p, q, r^ ... such cycles, whose sum is n ; then the L. c. m. of p, q, r, ... is the • Educational Times Reprints^ London, 1865, vol. 11, p. 105. CH. X] MISCELLANEOUS PROBLEMS 237 utmost number of shufflings necessary before all the cards will be brought back to their original places. In the case of a pack of 52 cards, the greatest L.c.M. of numbers whose sum is 52 is 180180. Arrangements by Rows and Columns. A not uncommon trick, which rests on a species of shuffling, depends on the obvious fiict that if n^ cards are arranged in the form of a square of n rows, each containing n cards, then any card will be defined if the row and the column in which it lies are mentioned. This information is generally elicited by first asking in which row the selected card lies, and noting the extreme left- hand card of that row. The cards in each column are then taken up, face upwards, one at a time beginning with the lowest card of each column and taking the columns in their order from right to left — each card taken up being placed on the top of those previously taken up. The cards are then dealt out again in rows, from left to right, beginning with the top left-hand corner, and a question is put as to which row contains the card. The selected card will be that card in the row mentioned which is in the same vertical column as the card which was originally noted. The trick is improved by allowing the pack to be cut as often as is liked before the cards are re-dealt, and then giving one cut at the end so as to make the top card in the pack one of those originally in the top row. For instance, take the 1 5 9 13 2 6 10 14 3 7 11 15 4 8 12 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Figure L Figure ii. 238 MISCELLANEOUS PROBLEMS [CH. X case of 16 cards. The first and second arrangements may be represented by figures i and ii. Suppose we are told that in figure i the card is in the third row, it must be either 9, 10, 11, 12: hence, if we know in which row of figure ii it lies, it is determined. If we allow the pack to be cut between the deals, we must secure somehow that the top card is either 1, 2, 3, or 4, since that will leave the cards in each row of figure ii unaltered though the positions of the rows will be changed. Determination of a selected pair of cards out of 4?i(7i + l) GIVEN PAIRS*. Another common trick is to throw twenty cards on to a table in ten couples, and ask someone to select one couple. The cards are then taken up, and dealt out in a certain manner into four rows each containing five cards. If the rows which contain the given cards are indicated, the cards selected are known at once. This depends on the fact that the number of homogeneous products of two dimensions which can be formed out of four things is 10. Hence the homogeneous products of two dimen- sions formed out of four things can be used to define ten things Suppose that ten pairs of cards are placed on a table and someone selects one couple. Take up the cards in their 1 4 ■ 2 9 3 10 5 11 7 1 13 6 8 12 14 15 18 16 19 17 20 couples. Then the first two cards form the first couple, the next two the second couple, and so on. Deal them out in four rows each containing five cards according to the scheme shown above. * Bachet, problem xvii, avertissement, p. 146 et seq. CH. X] MISCELLANEOUS PROBLEMS 239 The first couple (1 and 2) are in the first row. Of the next couple (3 and 4), put one in the first row and one in the second. Of the next couple (5 and 6), put one in the first row and one in the third, and so on, as indicated in the diagram. After filling up the first row proceed similarly with the second row, and so on. Enquire in which rows the two selected cards appear. If only one line, the mih, is mentioned as containing the cards, then the required pair of cards are the mth. and (m+ l)th cards in that line. These occupy the clue squares of that line. Next, if two lines are mentioned, then proceed as follows. Let the two lines be the pth and the ^th and suppose q>p. Then that one of the required cards which is in the qth line will be the (q — ^)th card which is below the first of the clue squares in the pth. line. The other of the required cards is in the pth line and is the {q —p)th card to the right of the second of the clue squares. Bachet's rule, in the form in which I have given it, is applicable to a pack of n(n + l) cards divided into couples, and dealt in n rows each containing ti + 1 cards ; for there are ^n(n + l) such couples, also there are ^n(n-\-l) homogeneous products of two dimensions which can be formed out of n things. Bachet gave the diagrams for the cases of 20, 30, and 42 cards: these the reader will have no difficulty in constructing for himself, and I have enunciated the rule for 20 cards in a form which covers all the cases. I have seen the same trick performed by means of a sentence and not by numbers. If we take the case of ten couples, then after collecting the pairs the cards must be dealt in four rows each containing five cards, in the order indicated by the sentence Matas dedit nomen Cocis. This sentence must be imagined as written on the table, each word forming one line. The first card is dealt on the M. The next card (which is the pair of the first) is placed on the second m in the sentence, that is, third in the third row. The third card is placed on the a. The fourth card (which is the pair of the third) is placed on the second a, that is, fourth in the first row. Each 240 MISCELLANEOUS PROBLEMS [CH. X of the next two cards is placed on a t, and so on. Enquire in which rows the two selected cards appear. If two rows are mentioned, the two cards are on the letters common to the words that make these rows. If only one row is mentioned, the cards are on the two letters common to that row. The reason is obvious : let us denote each of the first pair by an a, and similarly each of any of the other pairs by an e, iy 0, c, d, m, n, s, or t respectively. Now the sentence Matas dedit nomen Cocis contains four words each of five letters ; ten letters are used, and each letter is repeated only twice. Hence, if two of the words are mentioned, they will have one letter in common, or, if one word is mentioned, it will have two like letters. To perform the same trick with any other number of cards we should require a different sentence. The number of homogeneous products of three dimensions which can be formed out of four things is 20, and of these the number consisting of products in which three things are alike and those in which three things are different is 8. This leads to a trick with 8 trios of things, which is similar to that last given — the cards being arranged in the order indicated by the sentence Lanata levete livini novoto. I believe that these arrangements by sentences are well- known, but I am not aware who invented them. Gergonne's Pile Problem. Before discussing Gergonne*s theorem I will describe the familiar three pile problem, the theory of which is included in his results. The Three Pile Problem*. This trick is usually performed as follows. Take 27 cards and deal them into three piles, face upwards. By " dealing " is to be understood that the top card is placed as the bottom card of the first pile, the second card in the pack as the bottom card of the second pile, the third card as the bottom card of the third pile, the fourth card on the top of the first one, and so on : moreover I assume that throughout * The trick is mentioned by Bachet, problem xvni, p. 143, but his analysis of it is insufficient. CH. X] MISCELLANEOUS PROBLEMS 24»1 the problem the cards are held in the hand face upwards. The result can be modified to cover any other way of dealing. Request a spectator to note a card, and remember in which pile it is. After finishing the deal, ask in which pile the card is. Take up the three piles, placing that pile between the other two. Deal again as before, and repeat the question as to which pile contains the given card. Take up the three piles again, placing the pile which now contains the selected card between the other two. Deal again as before, but in dealing note the middle card of each pile. Ask again for the third time in which pile the card lies, and you will know that the card was the one which you noted as being the middle card of that pile. The trick can be finished then in any way that you like. The usual method — but a very clumsy one — is to take up the three piles once more, placing the named pile between the other two as before, when the selected card will br the middle one in the pack, that is, if 27 cards are used it will be the 14th card. The trick is often performed with 15 cards or with 21 cards^ in either of which cases the same rule holds. Gergonne's Generalization. The general theory for a pack of 7?i"* cards was given by M. Gergonne*. Suppose the pack is arranged in m piles, each containing m^~'^ cards, and that, after the first deal, the pile indicated as containing the selected card is taken up ath ; after the second deal, is taken up 6th ; and so on, and finally after the mth deal, the pile containing the card is taken up kth. Then when the cards are collected after the mth deal the selected card will be nth from the top where if m is even, n = Jcni^-^ — pi^-^ + ... ^-hni —.a + l, if m is odd, n = hn^"'~'^ — jm''^~' + ... —hm + a. For example, if a pack of 256 cards (i.e. w = 4) was given, and anyone selected a card out of it, the card could be de- termined by making four successive deals into four piles of 64 cards each, and after each deal asking in which pile the • Gergonne's Annates de Mathimatiques, Nismes, 1813-4, voL I7, pp. 276 — 283. B. R. 16 242 MISCELLANEOUS PROBLEMS [CH. X selected card lay. The reason is that after the first deal you know it is one of sixty-four cards. In the next deal these sixty-four cards are distributed equally over the four piles, and therefore, if you know in which pile it is, you will know that it is one of sixteen cards. After the third deal you know it is one of four cards. After the fourth deal you know which card it is. Moreover, if the pack of 256 cards is used, it is immaterial in what order the pile containing the selected card is taken up after a deal. For, if after the first deal it is taken up ath, after the second hth, after the third cth, and after the fourth dtli, the card will be the (64>d — 16c + 4ib — a + l)th. from the top of the pack, and thus will be known. We need not take up the cards after the fourth deal, for the same argument will show that it is the (64 — 16c + 46 — a + l)th in the pile then indicated as containing it. Thus if a =3, 6 = 4, c = 1, d = 2, it will be the 62nd card in the pile indicated after the fourth deal as containing it and will be the 126th card in the pack as then collected. In exactly the same way a pack of twenty-seven cards may be used, and three successive deals, each into three piles of nine cards, will suffice to determine the card. If after the deals the pile indicated as containing the given card is taken up ath, 6th, and cth respectively, then the card will be the (9c — 36 + a)th in the pack or will be the (9 — 36 -}- a)th card in the pile indicated after the third deal as containing it. The method of proof will be illustrated sufficiently by considering the usual case of a pack of twenty-seven cards, for which m = 3, which are dealt into three piles each of nine cards. Suppose that, after the first deal, the pile containing the selected card is taken up ath : then (i) at the top of the pack there are a — 1 piles each containing nine cards ; (ii) next there are 9 cards, of which one is the selected card ; and (iii) lastly there are the remaining cards of the pack. The cards are dealt out now for the second time : in each pile the bottom 3 (a — 1) cards will be taken fi:'om (i), the next 3 cards from (ii), and the remaining 9 — 3a cards from (iii). CH. X] MISCELLANEOUS PROBLEMS 243 Suppose that the pile now indicated as containing the selected card is taken up hth : then (i) at the top of the pack are 9(6—1) cards; (ii) next are 9 — Sa cards; (iii) next are 3 cards, of which one is the selected card ; and (iv) lastly are the remaining cards of the pack. The cards are dealt out now for the third time : in each pile the bottom 3 (6 — 1) cards will be taken from (i), the next S — a cards will be taken from (ii), the next card will be one of the three cards in (iii), and the remaining S — Sh + a cards are from (iv). Hence, after this deal, as soon as the pile is indicated, it is known that the card is the (9 — 36 + a.)th from the top of that pile. If the process is continued by taking up this pile as cth, then the selected card will come out in the place 9 (c — 1) + (8 — 36 + a) + 1 from the top, that is, will come out as the (9c — 36 + a')th card. Since, after the third deal, the position of the card in the pile then indicated is known, it is easy to notice the card, in which case the trick can be finished in some way more effective than dealing again. If we put the pile indicated always in the middle of the pack we have a = 2, 6=2, c = 2, hence ti = 9c — 36 + a = 14, which is the form in which the trick is usually presented, as was explained above on page 241. I have shown that if a, 6, c are known, then n is determined. We may modify the rule so as to make the selected card come out in any assigned position, say the ?ith. In this case we have to find values of a, 6, c which will satisfy the equation n = 9c — 36 + ct, where a, 6, c can have only the values 1, 2, or 3. Hence, if we divide w by 3 and the remainder is 1 or 2, this remainder will be a; but, if the remainder is 0, we must decrease the quotient by unity so that the remainder is 3, and this remainder will be a. In other words a is the smallest positive number (exclusive of zero) which must be subtracted from n to make the difference a multiple of 3. Next let p be this multiple, i.e. p is the next lowest integer to n/3 : then Sp = 9c — 36, therefore ^ = 3c — 6. Hence 6 is 16—2 24<4« MISCELLANEOUS PROBLEMS [CII. X the smallest positive number (exclusive of zero) which must be added to p to make the sum a multiple of 3, and c is that multiple. A couple of illustrations will make this clear. Suppose we wish the card to come out 22nd from the top, therefore 22 = 9c — 36 + a. The smallest number which must be sub- tracted from 22 to leave a multiple of 3 is 1, therefore a = 1. Hence 22 = 9c -36 + 1, therefore 7 = 3c -6. The smallest number which must be added to 7 to make a multiple of 3 is 2, therefore 6=2. Hence 7 = 3c — 2, therefore c = 3. Thus a = 1, 6 = 2, c = 3. Again, suppose the card is to come out 21st. Hence 21 = 9c — 36 + a. Therefore a is the smallest number which subtracted from 21 makes a multiple of 3, therefore a = 3. Hence 6 = 3c — 6. Therefore 6 is the smallest number which added to 6 makes a multiple of 3, therefore 6 = 3. Hence 9 = 3c, therefore c = 3. Thus a = 3, 6 = 3, c = 3. If any difficulty is experienced in this work, we can proceed thus. Let a=fl? + l, 6 = 3 — 3/, c = z-{-l; then x, y, z may have only the values 0, 1, or 2. In this case Gergonne's equation takes the form ^z -\- Zy -\- x — n — 1. Hence, if n — 1 is expressed in the ternary scale of notation, x, y, z will be determined, and therefore a, 6, c will be known. The rule in the case of a pack of m"* cards is exactly similar. We want to make the card come out in a given place. Hence, in Gergonne's formula, we are given n and we have to find a, 6, . . . , /j. We can effect this by dividing n continually by m, with the convention that the remainders are to be alternately positive and negative and that their numerical values are to be not greater than m or less than unity. An analogous theorem with a pack of Im cards can be con- structed. C. T. Hudson and L. E. Dickson* have discussed the general case where such a pack is dealt n times, each time into I piles of m cards ; and they have shown how the piles must be * Educational Times Reprints, 1868, vol. ix, pp. 89 — 91 ; and Bulletin of the American Mathematical Society, New York, April, 1895, vol. i, pp. 184 — 186. CH. X] MISCELLANEOUS PKOBLEMS 245 taken up in order that after the nth deal the selected card may be rth from the top. The principle will be sufficiently illustrated by one example treated in a manner analogous to the cases already discussed. For instance, suppose that an ecarte pack of 32 cards is dealt into four piles each of 8 cards, and that the pile which contains some selected card is picked up ath. Suppose that on dealing again into four piles, one pile is indicated as containing the selected card, the selected card cannot be one of the bottom 2 (a — 1) cards, or of the top 8 — 2a cards, but must be one of the intermediate 2 cards, and the trick can be finished in any way, as for instance by the common conjuring ambiguity of asking someone to choose one of them, leaving it doubtful whether the one he takes is to be rejected or retained. The Mouse Trap. Treize. I will conclude this chapter with the bare mention of another game of cards, known as the Mouse Trap, the discussion of which involves some rather difficult algebraic analysis. It is played as follows. A set of cards, marked with the numbers 1, 2, 3, . . . , n, is dealt in any order, face upwards, in the form of a circle. The player begins at any card and counts round the circle always in the same direction. If the A;th card has the number k on it — which event is called a hit — the player takes up the card and begins counting afresh. According to Cayley, the player wins if he thus takes up all the cards, and the cards win if at any time the player counts up to n without being able to take up a card. For example, if a pack of only four cards is used and these cards come in the order 3214, then the player would obtain the second card 2 as a hit, next he would obtain 1 as a hit, but if he went on for ever he would not obtain another hit. On the other hand, if the cards in the pack were initially in the order 1423, the player would obtain successively all four cards in the order 1, 2, 3, 4. The problem may be stated as the determination of what hits and how many hits can be made with a given number of 246 MISCELLANEOUS PROBLEMS [CH. X cards ; and what permutations will give a certain number of hits in a certain order. Cayley* showed that there are 9 arrangements of a pack of four cards in which no hit will be made, 7 arrangements in which only one hit will be made, 3 arrangements in which only two hits will be made, and 5 arrangements in which four hits will be made. Prof. Steenf has investigated the general theory for a pack of n cards. He has shown how to determine the number of arrangements in which x is the first hit [Arts. 3 — 5] ; the number of arrangements in Avhich 1 is the first hit and x is the second hit [Art. 6] ; and the number of arrangements in which 2 is the first hit and x the second hit [Arts. 7 — 8] ; but beyond this point the theory has not been carried. It is obvious that, if there are n — 1 hits, the nth hit will necessarily follow. The French game of treize is very similar. It is played with a full pack of fifty-two cards (knave, queen, and king counting as 11, 12, and 13 respectively). The dealer calls out 1, 2, 3, ..., 13, as he deals the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, ..., 13th cards respectively. At the beginning of a deal the dealer offers to lay or take certain odds that he will make a hit in the thirteen cards next dealt. * Quarterly Journal of Mathematics , 1878, vol. xv, pp. 8 — 10. t Ibid., vol. XV, pp. 230—241. 247 PAKT 11. * 1^0 man of science should think it a waste of time to learn something of the history of his own subject ; nor is the investigation of laborious methods now fallen into disuse, or of errors once commonly accepted, the least valuable of mental disciplines." " The most wo7'thless book of a bygone day is a record worthy of preservation. Like a telescopic star, its obscurity m,ay render it unavailable for most purposes ; but it serves, in hands which know how to use it, to determine the 2^^<^c^s of more important bodies." (De Morgan.) 24>S CHAPTER XL THE MATHEMATICAL TRIPOS. The Mathematical Tripos has played so prominent a part in the history of education at Cambridge and of mathematics in England, that a sketch of its development* may be inter- esting to general readers. So far as mathematics is concerned the history of the University before Newton may be summed up very briefly. The University was founded towards the end of the twelfth century. Throughout the middle ages the studies were or- ganized on lines similar to those at Paris and Oxford. To qualify for a degree it was necessary to perform various exercises, and especially to keep a number of acts or to oppose acts kept by other students. An act consisted in effect of a debate in Latin, thrown, at any rate in later times, into syllogistic form. It was commenced by one student, the respondent, stating some proposition, often propounded in the form of a thesis, which was attacked by one or more oppone^its, the discussion being controlled by a graduate. The teaching was largely in the hands of young graduates — every master of arts being compelled to reside and teach for at least one year — * The following pages are mostly summarized from my Histoi-y of the Study of Mathematics at Cambridge, Cambridge, 1889. The subject is also treated in Whewell's Liberal Education, Cambridge, three parts, 1845, 1850, 1853; Wordsworth's Scholae Academicae, Cambridge, 1877 ; my own Origin and History of the Mathematical Tripos, Cambridge, 1880 ; and Dr Glaisher's Presidential Address to the London Mathematical Society, Transactions, vol. xvm, 1836, pp. 4—38. CH. Xl] THE MATHEMATICAL Till PCS 249 though no doubt Colleges and private hostels supplemented this instruction in the case of their own students. The Reformation in England was mainly the work of Cambridge divines, and in the University the Renaissance was warmly welcomed. In spite of the disorder and confusion of the Tudor period, new studies and a system of professional instruction were introduced. Probably the science (as distinct from the art) of mathematics, save so far as involved in the quadrivium, was still an exotic study, but it was not wholly neglected. Tonstall, subsequently the most eminent English arithmetician of his time, migrated, perhaps about 1495, from Balliol College, Oxford, to King's Hall, Cambridge, and in 1530 the University appointed a mathematical lecturer in the person of Paynell of Pembroke Hall. Most of the subsequent English mathematicians of the Tudor period seem to have been educated at Cambridge ; of these I may mention Record, who migrated, probably about 1535, from Oxford, Dee, Digges, Blundeville, Buckley, Billingsley, Hill, Bedwell, Hood, Richard and John Harvey, Edward Wright, Briggs, and Oughtred. The Elizabethan statutes restricted liberty of thought and action in many ways, but, in spite of the civil and religious disturbances of the early half of the 17th century, the mathe- matical school continued to grow. Horrox, Seth Ward, Foster, Rooke, Gilbert Clerke, Pell, Wallis, Barrow, Dacres, and Morland may be cited as prominent Cambridge mathematicians of the time. Newton's mathematical career dates from 1665 ; his repu- tation, abilities, and influence attracted general attention to the subject. He created a school of mathematics and mathe- matical physics, among the earliest members of which I note the names of Laughton, Samuel Clarke, Craig, Flamsteed, Whiston, Saunderson, Jurin, Taylor, Cotes, and Robert Smith. Since then Cambridge has been regarded as, in a special sense, the home of English mathematicians, and from 1706 onwards we have fairly complete accounts of the course of reading and work of mathematical students there. Until less than a century ago the form of the method of 250 THE MATHEMATICAL TRIPOS [CH. XI qualifying for a degree remained substantially unaltered, but the subject-matter of the discussions varied from time to time with the prevalent studies of the place. After the Renaissance some of the statutable exercises were " huddled," that is, were reduced to a mere form. To huddle an act, the proctor generally asked some question such as Quid est noinen? to which the answer usually expected was Nescio. In these exercises considerable license was allowed, particularly if there were any play on the words involved. For example, J. Brasse, of Trinity, was accosted with the question. Quid est aes ? to which he answered, Nescio nisi finis examinationis. It should be added that retorts such as these were only allowed in the pretence exercises, and a candidate who in the actual examination was asked to give a definition of happiness and replied an exemption from Payne — that being the name of the moderator then presiding — was plucked for want of discrimina- tion in time and place. In earlier years even the farce of huddling seems to have been unnecessary, for it was said in 1675 that it was not uncommon for the proctors to take " cautions for the performance of the statutable exercises, and accept the forfeit of the money so deposited in lieu of their performance.** In medieval times acts had been usually kept on some scholastic question or on a proposition taken from the Sentences. About the end of the fifteenth century religious questions, such as the interpretation of Biblical texts, began to be introduced. Some fifty or sixty years later the favourite subjects were drawn either from dogmatic theology or from philosophy. In the seventeenth century the questions were usually philo- sophical, but in the eighteenth century, under the influence of the Newtonian school, a large proportion of them were mathematical. Further details about these exercises and specimens of acts kept in the eighteenth century are given in my History of Mathematics at Cambridge. Here I will only say that they provided an admirable training in the art of presenting an argument, and in dialectical skill in attack and defence. The CH. Xl] THE MATHEMATICAL TRIPOS 251 mental strain in a contested act was severe. De Morgan, describing his act kept in 1826, wrote*: I was badgered for two hours with arguments given and answered in Latin — or what we call Latin — against Newton's first section, Lagrange's derived functions, and Locke on innate principles. And though I took off everything, and was pronounced by the moderator to have disputed magno honore, I never had such a strain of thought in my life. For the inferior opponents were made as sharp as their betters by their tutors, who kept lists of queer objections drawn from all quarters. Had the language of the discussions been changed to English, as was repeatedly urged from 1774 onwards, these exercises might have been retained with advantage, but the barbarous Latin and the syllogistic form in which they were carried on prejudiced their retention. About 1830 a custom grew up for the respondent and opponents to meet previously and arrange their arguments together. The discussions then became an elaborate farce, and were a mere public performance of what had been already rehearsed. Accordingly the moderators of 1839 took the re- sponsibility of abandoning them. This action was singularly high-handed, since a report of May 30, 1838, had recommended that they should be continued, and there was no reason why they should not have been reformed and retained as a useful feature in the scheme of study. On the result of the acts a list of those qualified to receive degrees was drawn up. This list was not arranged strictly in order of merit, because the proctors could insert names any- where in it, but by the beginning of the eighteenth century this power had become restricted to the right reserved to the vice-chancellor, the senior regent, and each proctor to place in the list one candidate anywhere he liked — a right which cjntinued to exist till 1828, though it was not exercised after 1792. Subject to the granting of these honorary degrees, this final list was arranged in order ot merit into wranglers and senior optimes, junior optimes, and poll-men. The bachelors on receiving their degrees took seniority according to their * Biuhjct of Paradoxes, by A. De Morgan, London, 1872, p. 305. 252 THE MATHEMATICAL TRIPOS [CU. XI order on this list. The title wrangler is derived from these contentious discussions; the title optime from the customary- compliment given by the moderator to a successful disputant, Domine..., optime disputasti, or even optime quidem disputasti, and the title of poll-man from the description of this class as ol The final exercises for the B.A. degree were never huddled, and until 1839 were carried out strictly. University officials were responsible for approving the subject-matter of these acts. Stupid men offered some irrefutable truism, but the ambitious student courted reputation by affirming some paradox. Prob- ably all honour men kept acts, but poll-men were deemed to comply with the regulations by keeping opponencies. The proctors were responsible for presiding at these acts, or seeing that competent graduates did so. In and after 1649 two examiners were specially appointed for this purpose. In 1680* these examiners were appointed by the Senate with the title of moderator, and with the joint stipend of four shillings for everyone graduating as B.A. during their year of office. In 1688 the joint stipend of the moderators was fixed at £40 a year. The moderators, like the proctors, were nominated by the Colleges in rotation. From the earliest times the proctors had the power of questioning a candidate at the end of a disputation, and probably all candidates for a degree attended the public schools on certain days to give an opportunity to the proctors, or any master that liked, to examine themf, though the opportunity was not always used. Different candidates attended on different days. Probably such examinations were conducted in Latin. But soon after 1710 1 the moderators or proctors began the custom of summoning on one day in January all candidates whom they proposed to question. The examination was held * See Grace of October 25, 1680. t Ex. gr. see De la Pryme's account of his graduation in 1694, Surtees Society, vol. liv, 1870, p. 32. X W. Eeneu, in bis letters of 1708-1710 describing the course for the B.A. degree, makes no mention of the Senate-House Examination, and I think it is a reasonable inference that it had not then been established. CH. XlJ THE MATHEMATICAL TRIPOS 253 in public, and from it the Senate-House Examination arose. The examination at this time did not last more than one day, and was, there can be no doubt, partly on philosophy and partly on mathematics. It is believed that it was always conducted in English, and it is likely that its rapid development was largely due to this. This introduction of a regular oral examination seems to have been largely due to the fact that when, in 1710, George I gave the Ely library to the University, it was decided to assign for its reception the old Senate-House — now the Catalogue Room in the Library — and to build a new room for the meetings of the Senate. Pending the building of the new Senate-House the books were stored in the Schools. As the Schools were thus rendered unavailable for keeping acts, considerable difficulty was found in arranging for all the candi- dates to keep the full number of statutable exercises, and thus obtaining opportunities to compare them one with another: hence the introduction of a supplementary oral examination. The advantages of this examination as providing a ready means of testing the knowledge and abilities of the candidates were so patent that it was retained when the necessity for some system of the kind had passed away, and finally it became systematized into an organized test to which all questionists were subjected. In 1731 the University raised the joint stipend of the moderators to £60 " in consideration of their additional trouble in the Lent Term." This would seem to indicate that the Senate-House Examination had then taken formal shape, and perhaps that a definite scheme for its conduct had become customary. As long as the order of the list of those approved for degrees was settled on the result of impressions derived from acts kept by the different candidates at different times and on different subjects, it was impossible to arrange the men in strict order of merit, nor was much importance attached to the order. But, with the introduction of an examination of all the candidates on one day, much closer attention was paid to 254 THE MATHEMATICAL TRIPOS [CH. XI securing a strict order of merit, and more confidence was felt in the published order. It seems to have been consequent on this that in and after 1748 (N.S.) the final lists were circulated, and it was further arranged that the names of the honorary optimes should be indicated. The lists from this time appear in the University calendars : the earlier lists from 1499, edited with biographical notes by C. M. Neale, were published in 1909. Of the detailed history of the examination until the middle of the eighteenth century we know nothing. From 1750 on- wards, however, we have more definite accounts of it. At this time, it would seem that all the men from each College were taken together as a class, and questions passed down by the proctors or moderators till they were answered : but the ex- amination remained entirely oral, and technically was regarded as subsidiary to the discussions which had been previously held in the schools. As each class contained men of very different abilities a custom grew up by which every candidate was liable to be taken aside to be questioned by any M.A. who wished to do so, and this was regarded as an important part of the examination. The subjects were mathematics and philosophy. The examination now continued for two days and a half. At the conclusion of the second day the moderators received the reports of those masters of arts who had voluntarily taken part in the examination, and provisionally settled the final list; while the last half-day was used in revising and re-arranging the order of merit. Richard Cumberland has left an account of the tests to which he was subjected when he took his B.A. degree in 1751. Clearly the disputations still played an important part, and it is difficult to say what weight was attached to the subsequent Senate-House Examination ; his reference to it is only of a general character. After saying that he kept two acts and two opponencies he continues*: The last time I was called upon to keep an act in the schools I sent in three questions to the Moderator, which he withstood as being all mathematical, and * Memoirs of Eichard Cumberland, London, 1806, pp. 78 — 79. CH. Xl] THE MATHEMATICAL TIUPOS 255 required me to conform to the usage of proposing one metaphysical question in the place of that, which I should think fit to withdraw. This was ground I never liked to take, and I appealed against his requisition: the act was accordingly put by till the matter of right should be ascertained by the statutes of the university, and in the result of that enquiry it was given for me, and my question stood I yielded now to advice, and paid attention to my health, till we were cited to the senate house to be examined for our Bachelor's degree. It was hardly ever my lot during that examination to enjoy any respite. I seemed an object singled out as every man's mark, and was kept perpetually at the table under the process of question and answer. It was found possible by means of the new examination to differentiate the better men more accurately than before ; and accordingly, in 1753, the first class was subdivided into two, called respectively wranglers and senior optimes, a division which is still maintained. The semi-official examination by M.A.s was regarded as the more important part of the test, and the most eminent residents in the University took part in it. Thus John Fenn, of Caius, 5th Avrangier in 1761, writes* : On the following Monday, Tuesday, and Wednesday, we sat in the Senate- house for public exainination ; during this time I was officially examined by the Proctors and Moderators, and had the honor of being taken out for examination by Mr Abbot, the celebrated mathematical tutor of St John's College, by the eminent professor of mathematics Mr Waving, of Magdalene, and by Mr Jebb of Peterhouse, a man thoroughly versed in the academical studies. This irregular examination by any master who chose to take part in it constantly gave rise to accusations of partiality. In 1763 the traditional rules for the conduct of the examin- ation took more definite shape. Henceforth the examiners used the disputations only as a means of classifying the men roughly. On the result of their " acts," and probably partly also of their general reputation, the candidates were divided into eight classes, each arranged in alphabetical order. The subsequent position of the men in the class was determined solely by the Senate- House Examination. The first two classes comprised all who were expected to be wranglers, the next four classes included * Quoted by C. Wordsworth, Scholae Academicae, Cambridge, 1877, pp. 30—31. 256 THE MATHEMATICAL TRIPOS [CH. XI the other candidates for honours, and the last two classes con- sisted of poll-men only. Practically anyone placed m either of the first two classes was allowed, if he wished, to take an aegrotat senior optime, and thus escape all further examination: this was called gulphing it. All the men from one College were no longer taken together, but each class was examined separately and vivd voce ; and hence, since all the students comprised in each class were of about equal attainments, it was possible to make the examination more effective. Richard \Vatson, of Trinity, claimed that this change was made by him when acting as moderator in 1763. He says*: There was more room for partiality... then [i.e. in 1759] than there is now; and I attribute the change, in a great degree, to an alteration which I introduced the first year I was moderator [i.e. in 1763], and which has been persevered in ever since. At the time of taking their Bachelor of Arts' degree, the young men are examined in classes, and the classes are now formed according to the abilities shown by individuals in the schools. By this arrangement, persons of nearly equal merits are examined in the presence of each other, and flagrant acts of partiality cannot take place. Before I made this alteration, they were examined in classes, but the classes consisted of members of the same College, and the best and worst were often examined together. It is probable that before the examination in the Senate-House began a candidate, if manifestly placed in too low a class, was allowed the privilege of challenging the class to which he was assigned. Perhaps this began as a matter of favour, and was only granted in exceptional cases, but a few years later it became a right which every candidate could exercise ; and I think that it is partly to its development that the ultimate predominance of the tripos over the other exercises for the degree is due. In the same year, 1763, it was decided that the relative position of the senior and second wranglers, namely, Paley, of Christ's, and Frere, of Caius, was to be decided by the Senate- House Examination and not by the disputations. Henceforward distinction in the Senate-House Examination was regarded as the most important honour open to undergraduates. * Anecdotes of the Life of Richard Watson by Ilimselff London, 1817, pp. 18—19. CH. Xl] THE MATHEMATICAL TRIPOS 257 In 1768 Dr Smith, of Trinity College, founded prizes for mathematics and natural philosophy open to two commencing bachelors. The examination followed immediately after the Senate-House Examination, and the distinction, being much coveted, tended to emphasize the mathematical side of the normal University education of the best men. Since 1883 the prizes have been awarded on the result of dissertations*. Additional prizes, awarded at the same time, and associated with the name of Lord Rayleighf, were founded in 1909. Until now the Senate- House Examination had been oral, but about this time, circ. 1770, it began to be the custom to dictate some or all of the questions and to require answers to be written. Only one question was dictated at a time, and a fresh one was not given out until some student had solved that previously read : a custom which by causing perpetual inter- ruptions to take down new questions must have proved very harassing. We are perhaps apt to think that an examination conducted by written papers is so natural that the custom is of long continuance, but I know no record of any in Europe earlier than the eighteenth century. Until 1830 the questions for the Smith's prizes were dictated. The following description of the Senate-House Examination as it existed in 1772 is given by JebbJ. The moderators, some days before the arrival of the time prescribed by the vice-chancellor, meet for the purpose of forming the students into divisions of six, eight, or ten, according to their performance in the schools, with a view to the ensuing examination. Upon the first of the appointed days, at eight o'clock in the morning, the students enter the senate-house, preceded by a master of arts from each college, who... is called the "father" of the college, ... After the proctors have called over the names, each of the moderators sends for a division of the students: they sit with him round a table, with pens, ink, and paper, before them : he enters upon his task of examination, and does not dismiss the set till the hour is expired. This examination has now for some years been held in the english language. * See Grace of October 25, 1883 ; and the Cambridge University Beporter^ October 23, 1883. t See Grace of February 11, 1909, and the Cambridge University Reporter, December 8, 1903. J The Works of J. Jcbb, London, 1787, vol. ii, pp. 290—297, B. R. 17 258 THE MATHEMATICAL TRIPOS [CH. XI The examination is varied according to the abilities of the students. The moderator generally begins with proposing some questions from the six books of Euclid, plain {sic) trigonometry, and the first rules of algebra. If any person fails in an answer, the question goes to the next. From the elements of mathematics, a transition is made to the four branches of philosophy, viz. mechanics, hydrostatics, apparent astronomy, and optics, as explained in the works of Maclaurin, Cotes, Helsham, Hamilton, Eutherforth, Keill, Long, Ferguson, and Smith. If the moderator finds the set of questionists, under examination, capable of answering him, he proceeds to the eleventh and twelfth books of Euclid, conic sections, spherical trigonometry, the higher parts of algebra, and sir Isaac Newton's Principia ; more particularly those sections, which treat of the motion of bodies in eccentric and revolving orbits; the mutual action of spheres, composed of particles attracting each other according to various laws ; the theory of pulses, propagated through elastic mediums ; and the stupendous fabric of the world. Having closed the philosophical examination, he sometimes asks a few questions in Locke's Essay on the human understanding, Butler's Analogy, or Clarke's Attributes. But as the highest academical distinctions are invariably given to the best proficients in mathematics and natural philosophy, a very superficial knowledge in morality and metaphysics will suffice. When the division under examination is one of the highest classes, problems are also proposed, with which the student retires to a distant part of the senate-house, and returns, with his solution upon paper, to the moderator, who, at his leisure, compares it with the solutions of other students, to whom the same problems have been proposed. The extraction of roots, the arithmetic of surds, the invention of divisers, the resolution of quadratic, cubic, and biquadratic equations ; together with the doctrine of fluxions, and its application to the solution of questions " de maximis et minimis," to the finding of areas, to the rectification of curves, the investigation of the centers of gravity and oscillation, and to the circumstances of bodies, agitated, according to various laws, by centripetal forces, as unfolded, and exemplified, in the fiuxional treatises of Lyons, Saunderson, Simpson, Emerson, Maclaurin, and Newton, generally form the subject matter of these problems. When the clock strikes nine, the questionists are dismissed to breakfast : they return at half-past nine, and stay till eleven ; they go in again at half-past one, and stay tiU three ; and, lastly, they return at half -past three, and stay till five. The hours of attendance are the same upon the subsequent day. On the third day they are finally dismissed at eleven. During the hours of attendance, every division is twice examined in form, once by each of the moderators, who are engaged for the whole time in this employment. As the questionists are examined in divisions of only six or eight at a time, but a small portion of the whole number is engaged, at any particular hour, with the moderators ; and, therefore, if there were no further examination, much time would remain unemployed. But the moderator's inquiry into the merits of the candidates forms the least material part of the examination. CH. Xl] THE MATHEMATICAL TRIPOS 259 The "fathers" of the respective colleges, zealous for the credit of the societies, of which they are the guardians, are incessantly employed in ex- amining those students, who appear most likely to contest the palm of glory with their sons. This part of the process is as follows : The father of a college takes a student of a different college aside, and, sometimes for an hour and an half together, strictly examines him in every part of mathematics and philosophy, which he professes to have read. After he hath, from this examination, formed an accurate idea of the student's abilities and acquired knowledge, he makes a report of his absolute or comparative merit to the moderators, and to every other father who shall ask him the question. Besides the fathers, all masters of arts, and doctors, of whatever faculty they be, have the liberty of examining whom they please ; and they also report the event of each trial, to every person who shall make the inquiry. The moderators and fathers meet at breakfast, and at dinner. From the variety of reports, taken in connection with their own examination, the former are enabled, about the close of the second day, so far to settle the comparative merits of the candidates, as to agree upon the names of four-and-twenty, who to them appear most deserving of being distinguished by marks of academical approbation. These four-and-twenty [wranglers and senior optimes] are recommended to the proctors for their private examination ; and, if approved by them, and no reason appears against such placing of them from any subsequent inquiry, their names are set down in two divisions, according to that order, in which they deserve to stand ; are afterwards printed ; and read over upon a solemn day, in the pres'^uce of the vice-chancellor, and of the assembled university. The names of the twelve [junior optimes], who, in the course of the examina- tion, appear next in desert, are also printed, and are read over, in the presence of the vice-chancellor, and of the assembled university, upon a day subsequent to the former. . . . The students, who appear to have merited neither praise nor censure, [the poll-men], pass unnoticed : while those, who have taken no pains to prepare themselves for the examination, and have appeared with discredit in the schools, are distinguished by particular tokens of disgrace. Jebb's statement about the number of wranglers and senior optimes is only approximate. It may be added that it was now frankly recognized that the examination was competitive*. Also that though it was open to any member of the Senate to take part in it, yet the determination of the relative merit of the students was entirely in the hands of the moderators f. Although the examination did not occupy more than three days it must have been a severe * "Emulation, which is the principle upon which the plan is constructed." The Works of J. Jebb, London, 1787, vol. in, p. 261. t Tlie Works of J. Jebb, London, 1787, vol. in, p. 272. 17—2 260 THE MATHEMATICAL TRIPOS [CH. XI physical trial to anyone who was delicate. It was held in winter and in the Senate-House. That building was then noted for its draughts, and was not warmed in any way : and, according to tradition, on one occasion the candidates on entering in the morning found the ink in the pots on their desks frozen. The University was not altogether satisfied* with the scheme in force, and in 1779 f the scheme of examination was amended in various respects. In particular the examination was extended to four days, a third day being given up entirely to natural religion, moral philosophy, and Locke. It was further announced J that a candidate would not receive credit for advanced subjects unless he had satisfied the examiners in Euclid and elementary Natural Philosophy. A system of brackets or " classes quam minimae " was now introduced. Under this system the examiners issued on the morning of the fourth day a provisional list of men who had obtained honours, with the names of those of about equal merit bracketed, and that day was devoted to arranging the names in each bracket in order of merit: the examiners being given explicit authority to invite the assistance of others in this work. Whether at this time a candidate could request to be re-ex- amined with the view of being moved from one bracket to another is uncertain, but later this also was allowed. Under the scheme of 1779 also the number of examiners was increased to four, the moderators of one year becoming, as a matter of course, the examiners of the next. Thus of the four examiners in each year, two had taken part in the examination of the previous year, and the continuity of the system of ex- amination was maintained. The names of the moderators appear on the tripos lists, but the names of the examiners were not printed on the lists till some years later. The right of any M.A. to take part in the examination was not affected, though henceforth it was exercised more sparingly, and I believe was not insisted on after 1785. But it became * See Graces of July 5, 1773, and of February 17, 1774. + See Graces of March 19, 20, 1779. t Notice issued by the Vice-Chancellor, dated May 19, 1779. CH. Xl] THE MATHEMATICAL TRIPOS 261 a regular custom for the moderators to invite particular M.A.s to examine and compare specified candidates. Milner, of Queens', was constantly asked to assist in this way. It was not long before it became an established custom that a candidate, who was dissatisfied with the class in which he had been placed as the result of his disputations, might challenge it before the examination began. This power seems to have been used but rarely ; it was, however, a recognition of the fact that a place in the tripos list was to be determined by the Senate- House Examination alone, and the examiners soon acquired the habit of settling the preliminary classes without exclusive reference to the previous disputations. The earliest extant paper actually set in the Senate-House, to which we can with certainty refer, is a problem paper set in 1785 or 1786 by W. Hodson, of Trinity, then a proctor. The autograph copy from which he gave out the questions was luckily preserved, and is in the library* of Trinity College. It must be almost the last problem paper which was dictated, instead of being printed and given as a whole to the candi- dates. The paper is as follows : 1. To determine the velocity with which a Body must be thrown, in a direction parallel to the Horizon, so as to become a secondary planet to the Earth ; as also to describe a parabola, and never return. 2. To demonstrate, supposing the force to vary as — , how far a body must fall both within and without the Circle to acquire the Velocity with which a body revolves in a Circle. 3. Suppose a body to be turned (sic) upwards with the Velocity with which it revolves in an Ellipse, how high will it ascend ? The same is asked supposing it to move in a parabola. 4. Suppose a force varying first as ^-^ , secondly in a greater ratio than .=-^ but less than y-g , and thirdly in a less ratio than ■=-, , in each of these Cases to determine whether at all, and where the body parting from the higher Apsid will come to the lower. 5. To determine in what situation of the moon's Apsid they go most forwards, and in what situation of her Nodes the Nodes go most backwards, and why ? • The Challis Manuscripts, iii, 61. There are two copies almost identical, one dated 1785, the other 1786. Probably the paper printed in the text was set in 178d. 262 THE MATHEMATICAL TRIPOS [CH. XI 6. In the cubic equation x^ + qx + r = which wants the second term ; sup- posing x = a + b and Sab= - q^ to determine the value of x. {sic.) 7. To find the fluxion of o:^ x (y** + 2"^)a . • 8. To find the fluent of -^ . a+x 9. To find the fluxion of the vi^^ power of the Logarithm of x, 10. Of right-angled Triangles containing a given Area to find that whereof the sum of the two legs AB + BC shall be the least possible. [This and the two following questions are illustrated by diagrams. The angle at B is the right angle.] 11. To find the Surface of the Cone ABC. [The cone is a right one on a circular base.] 12. To rectify the arc DB of the semicircle DBV. In cases of equality in the Senate-House Examination the acts were still taken into account in settling the tripos order : and in 1786 when the second, third, and fourth wranglers came out equal in the examination a memorandum was published that the second place was given to that candidate who dialectis magis est versatvs, and the third place to that one who in scholis sophistarum melius disputavit. There seem to have been considerable intervals in the examination by the moderators, and the examinations by the extraneous examiners took place in these intervals. Those candidates who at any time were not being examined occupied themselves with amusements, provided they were not too boisterous and obvious: probably dice and cards played a large part in them. Gunning in an amusing account of his examination in 1788 talks of games with a teetotum* in which he took part on the Wednesday (when Locke and Paley formed the subjects of examination), but " which was carried on with great spirit... by considerable numbers during the whole of the examination." About this time, 1790, the custom of printing the problem papers was introduced, but until 1828 the other papers con- tinued to be dictated. Since then all the papers have been printed. * H. Giinning, Reminiscences, second edition, London, 1855, vol. r, p. 82. CH. Xl] THE MATHEMATICAL TRIPOS 26 •"> I insert here the following letter* from William Gooch, of Caius, in which he describes his examination in the Senate- House in 1791. It must be remembered that it is the letter of an undergraduate addressed to his father and mother, and was not intended either for preservation or publication: a fact which certainly does not detract from its value. Monday | aft. 12. We have been examin'd this Morning in pure Mathematics & I've hitherto kept just about even with Peacock which is much more than I expected. We are going at 1 o'clock to be examin'd till 3 in Philosophy. From 1 till 7 I did more than Peacock ; But who did most at Moderator's Kooms this Evening from 7 till 9, 1 don't know yet ;— but I did above three times as much as the Sen' Wrangler last year, yet I'm afraid not so much as Peacock. Between One & three o'Clock I wrote up 9 sheets of Scribbling Paper so you may suppose I was pretty fully employ'd. Tuesday Night. I've been shamefully us'd by Lax to-day ; — Tho' his anxiety for Peacock mu?t (of course) be very great, I never suspected that his Partially {sic) w"^ get the better of his Justice. I had entertain'd too high an opinion of him to suppose it. — he gave Peacock a long private Examination & then came to me {I hop'd) on the same subject, but 'twas only to Bully me as much as he could, — whatever I said (tho' right) he tried to convert into Nonsense by seeming to misunderstand me. However I don't entirely dispair of being first, tho' you see Lax seems determin'd that I shall not. — I had no Idea (before I went into the Senate-House) of being able to contend at all with Peacock. Wednesday evening. Peacock & I are still in perfect Equilibrio & the Examiners themselves can give no guess yet who is likely to be first ; — a New Examiner (Wood of St. John's, who is reckon'd the first Mathematician in the University, for Waring doesn't reside) was call'd solely to examine Peacock & me only. — but by this new Plan nothing is yet determin'd. — So Wood is to examine us again to-morrow morning. Thursday evening. Peacock is declar'd first & I second, — Smith of this Coll. is either 8'^ or 9'^ & Lucas is either 10'^ or ll*'^. — Poor Quiz Carver is one of the ol ttoWoI; — I'm perfectly satisfied that the Senior Wranglership is Peacock's due, but certainly not 80 very indisputably as Lax pleases to represent it — I understand that he asserts 'twas 5 to 4 in Peacock's favor. Now Peacock & I have explain'd to each other how we went on, & can prove indisputably that it wasn't 20 to 19 in his favor ; — I cannot therefore be displeas'd for being plac'd second, tho' I'm provov'd {sic) with Lax for his false report (so much beneath the Character of a Gentleman.) — N.B. it is my very particular Request that you dont mention Lax's be- haviour to me to any one. * C. Wordsworth, Scholae Academicae, Cambridge, 1877, pp. 322—323. i>64 THE MATHEMATICAL TRIPOS [CH. XI Such was the form ultimately taken by the Senate-House Examination, a form which it substantially retained without alteration for nearly half-a-century. It soon became the sole test by which candidates were judged. The University was not obliged to grant a degree to anyone who performed the statutable exercises, and it was open to the University to refuse to pass a supplicat for the B.A. degree unless the candidate had presented himself for the Senate-House Examination. In 1790 James Blackburn, of Trinity, a questionist of exceptional abilities, was informed that in spite of his good disputations he would not be allowed a degree unless he also satisfied the examiners in the tripos. He accordingly solved one " very hard problem," though in consequence of a dispute with the authorities he refused to attempt any more*. It will be recollected that the examination was now com- pulsoiy on all candidates pursuing the normal course for the B.A. degree. In 1791 the University laid down rules f for its conduct, so ffir as it concerned poll-men, decreeing that those who passed were to be classified in four divisions or classes, the names in each class to be arranged alphabetically, but not to be printed on the official tripos lists. The classes in the final lists must be distinguished from the eight preliminary classes issued before the commencement of the examination. The men in the first six preliminary classes were expected to take honours ; those in the seventh and eighth preliminary classes were primd facie poll-men. In 1799 the moderators announced J that for the future they would require every candidate to show a competent knowledge of the first book of Euclid, arithmetic, vuglar and decimal fi-actions, simple and quadratic equations, and Locke and Paley. Paley's works seem to be held in esteem by modern divines, and his Evidences, though not his Philosophy, still remains (1905) one of the subjects of the Previous Examination, but his contemporaries thought less highly of his writings, or at any * H. Gunning, Beminiscences, second edition, London, 1855, vol. i, p. 182. t See Grace of April 8, 1791. X Communicated by the moderators to fathers of Colleges on January 18, 1799, and agreed to by the latter. CH. Xl] THE MATHEMATICAL TRIPOS 265 rate of his Philosophy. Thus Best is quoted by Wordsworth* as saying of Paley's Philosophy, " The tutors of Cambridge no doubt neutralize by their judicious remarks, when they read it to their pupils, all that is pernicious in its principles": so also Richard Watson, Bishop of Llandaff, in his anecdotal autobio- graphy -|-, says, in describing the Senate-House Examination in which Paley was senior wrangler, that Paley was afterwards known to the world by many excellent productions, " though there are some principles in his philosophy which I by no means approve." In 1800 the moderators extended to all men in the first four preliminary classes the privilege of being allowed to attempt the problem papers : hitherto this privilege had been confined to candidates placed in the first two classes. Until 1828 the problem papers were set in the evenings, and in the rooms of the moderator. The University Calendars date from 1796, and from 1802 to 1882 inclusive contain the printed tripos papers of the previous January. The papers from 1801 to 1820 and from 1838 to 1849 inclusive were also published in separate volumes, which are to be found in most public libraries. No problems were ever set to the men in the seventh and eighth preliminary classes, which contained the poll-men. None of the bookwork papers of this time are now extant, but it is believed that they contained but few riders. Many of the so-called problems were really pieces of bookwork or easy riders: it must however be remembered that the text-books then in circulation were inferior and incomplete as compared with modern ones. The Calendar of 1802 contains a diffuse account of the ex- amination. It commences as follows : On the Monday morning, a little before eight o'clock, the students, generally about a hundred, enter the Senate-House, preceded by a master of arts, who on this occasion is styled the father of the College to which he belongs. On two pillars at the entrance of the Senate-House are hung the classes and a paper denoting the hours of examination of those who are thought most competent to contend for honours. Immediately after the University clock has struck eight, * C. Wordsworth, Scholae Academicae, Cambridge, 1877, p. 123. + Anecdotes of the Life of Richard IVutson by Himself, London, 1817, p. 19. 266 THE MATHEMATICAL TRIPOS [CH. XI the names are called over, and the absentees, being marked, are subject to certain fines. The classes to be examined are called out, and proceed to their appointed tables, where they find pens, ink, and paper provided in great abundance. In this manner, with the utmost order and regularity, two-thirds of the young men are set to work within less than five minutes after the clock has struck eight. There are three chief tables, at which six examiners preside. At the first, the senior moderator of the present year and the junior moderator of the preceding year. At the second, the junior moderator of the present, and the senior moderator of the preceding year. At the third, two moderators of the year previous to the two last, or two examiners appointed by the Senate. The two first tables are chiefly allotted to the six first classes ; the third, or largest, to the ol iroWoi. The young men hear the propositions or questions delivered by the ex- aminers ; they instantly apply themselves ; demonstrate, prove, work out and write down, fairly and legibly (otherwise their labour is of little avail) the answers required. All is silence ; nothing heard save the voice of the examiners ; or the gentle request of some one, who may wish a repetition of the enunciation. It requires every person to use the utmost dispatch ; for as soon as ever the examiners perceive anyone to have finished his paper and subscribed his name to it another question is immediately given The examiners are not seated, but keep moving round the tables, both to judge how matters proceed and to deliver their questions at proper intervals. The examination, which embraces arithmetic, algebra, fluxions, the doctrine of infinitesimals and increments, geometry, trigonometry, mechanics, hydrostatics, optics, and astronomy, in all their various gradations, is varied according to circumstances : no one can anticipate a question, for in the course of five minutes he may be dragged from Euclid to Newton, from the humble arithmetic of Bonnycastle to the abstruse analytics of Waring. While this examination is proceeding at the three tables between the hours of eight and nine, printed problems are delivered to each person of the first and second classes ; these he takes with him to any window he pleases, where there are pens, ink, and paper prepared for his operations. The examination began at eight. At nine o'clock the papers had to be given up, and half-an-hour was allowed for breakfast. At half-past nine the candidates came back, and were examined in the way described above till eleven, when the Senate-House was again cleared. An interval of two hours then took place. At one o'clock all returned to be again examined. At three the Senate-House was cleared for half-an-hour, and, on the return of the candidates, the examination was continued till five. At seven in the evening the first four classes went to the senior moderator's rooms to solve problems. They were finally dis- missed for the day at nine, after eight hours of examination. CH. Xl] THE MATHEMATICAL TRIPOS 267 The work of Tuesday was similar to that of Monday: Wednesday was partly devoted to logic and moral philosophy. At eight o'clock on Thursday morning a first list was published with all candidates of about equal merits bracketed. Until nine o'clock a candidate had the right to challenge anyone above him to an examination to see which w^as the better. At nine a second list came out, and a candidate's right of challenge was then confined to the bracket immediately above his own. If he proved himself the equal of the man so challenged his name was transferred to the upper bracket. To challenge and then to fail to substantiate the claim to removal to a higher bracket w^as considered rather ridiculous. Revised lists were published at 11 a.m., 3 p.m., and 5 p.m., according to the results of the examination during that day. At five the whole examination ended. The proctors, moderators, and examiners then retired to a room under the Public Library to prepare the list of honours, which was sometimes settled without much difficulty in a few^ hours, but sometimes not before 2 a.m. or 3 a.m. the next morning. The name of the senior wrangler was generally announced at midnight, and the rest of the list the next morning. In 1802 there were eighty-six candidates for honours, and they were divided into fifteen brackets, the first and second brackets containing each one name only, and the third bracket four names. It is clear from the above account that the competition fostered by the examination had developed so much as to threaten to impair its usefulness as guiding the studies of the men. On the other hand, there can be no doubt that the carefully devised arrangements for obtaining an accurate order of merit stimulated the best men to throw all their energies into the work for the examination. It is easy to point out the double-edged result of a strict order of merit. The problem before the University was to retain its advantages while checking any abuses to which it might lead. It was the privilege of the moderators to entertain the proctors and some of the leading resident mathematicians the night before the issue of the final list, and to communicate that 268 THE MATHEMATICAL TRIPOS [CH. XI list in confidence to their guests. This pleasant custom survived till 1884. I revived the practice in 1890 when acting as senior moderator, but it seems to have now ceased. In 1806 Sir Frederick Pollock was senior wrangler, and in 1869 in answer to an appeal from De Morgan for an account of the mathematical study of men at the beginning of the century- he wrote a letter* which is sufficiently interesting to bear reproduction : I shcall write in answer to your inquiry, all about my books, my study, and my degree, and leave you to settle all about the proprieties which my letter may give rise to, as to egotism, modesty, &c. The only books I read the first year were Wood's Algebra (as far as quadratic equations), Bonnycastle's ditto, and Euclid (Simpson's). In the second year I read Wood (beyond quadratic equations), and Wood and Vince, for what they called the branches. In the third'year I read the Jesidfs Newton and Vince's Fluxions ; these were all the books, but there were certain mss. floating about which I copied — which be- longed to Dealtry, second wrangler in Kempthorne's year. I have no doubt that I had read less and seen fewer books than any senior wrangler of about my time, or any period since ; but what I knew I knew thoroughly, and it was completely at my fingers' ends, I consider that I was the last geometrical and fiuxional senior wrangler ; I was not up to the differential calculus, and never acquired it. I went up to college with a knowledge of Euclid and algebra to quadratic equations, nothing more ; and I never read any second year's lore during my first year, nor any third year's lore during my second ; ray forte was, that what I did know I could produce at any moment with perfect accuracy. I could repeat the first book of Euclid word by word and letter by letter. During my first year I was not a ' reading ' man (so called) ; I had no expectation of honours or a fellowship, and I attended all the lectures on all subjects — Harwood's anatomical, Woollaston's chemical, and Parish's mechanical lectures — but the examination at the end of the first year revealed to me my powers. I was not only in the first class, but it was generally understood I was first in the first class ; neither I nor any one for me expected I should get in at all. Now, as I had taken no pains to prepare (taking, however, marvellous pains while the examination was going on), I knew better than any one else the value of my examination qualities (great rapidity and perfect accuracy) ; and I said to myself, 'If you're not an ass, you'll be senior wrangler' ; and I took to 'reading' accordingly. A curious circumstance occurred when the Brackets came out in the Senate-house declaring the result of the examination : I saw at the top the name of Walter bracketed alone (as he was) ; in the bracket below were Fiott, Hustler, Jephson. I looked down and could not find my own name till I got to Bolland, when my pride took fire, and I said, ' I must have beaten that man, so I will look up again ' ; and on looking up carefully I found the nail had been passed through my name, and I was at the top bracketed alone, even above * Memoir of A. de Morgan, London, 1882, pp. 387—392. CH. Xl] THE MATHEMATICAL TRIPOS 269 Walter. You may judge what mj feelings were at this discovery; it is the only instance of two such brackets, and it made my fortune — that is, made me independent, and gave me an immense coDege reputation. It was said I was more than half of the examination before any one else. The two moderators were Hornbuclde, of St John's, and Brown (Saint Brown), of Trinity. The Johnian congratulated me. I said perhaps I might be challenged; he said, •Well, if you are you're quite safe — you may sit down and do nothing, and no one would get up to you in a whole day.' Latterly the Cambridge examinations seem to turn upon very different matters from what prevailed in my time. I think a Cambridge education has for its object to make good members of society — not to extend science and make profound mathematicians. The tripos questions in the Senate-house ought not to go beyond certain limits, and geometry ought to be cultivated and encouraged much more than it is. To this De Morgan replied : Your letter suggests much, because it gives possibility of answer. The branches of algebra of course mainly refer to the second part of Wood, now called the theory of equations. Waring was his guide. Turner — whom you must remember as head of Pembroke, senior wrangler of 1767 — told a young man in the hearing of my informant to be sure and attend to quadratic equations. • It was a quadratic,' said he, ' made me senior wrangler.' It seems to me that the Cambridge revivers were [Woodhouse,] Waring, Paley, Vince, Milner. You had Dealtry's mss. He afterwards published a very good book on fluxions. He merged his mathematical fame in that of a Claphamite Christian. It is something to know that the tutor's ms. was in vogue in 1800-1806. Now — how did you get your conic sections? How much of Newton did you read? From Newton direct, or from tutor's manuscript? Surely Fiott was our old friend Dr Lee. I missed being a pupil of Hustler by a few weeks. He retired just before I went up in February 1823. The echo of Hornbuckle's answer to you about the challenge has lighted on Whewell, who, it is said, wanted to challenge Jacob, and was answered that he could not beat [him] if he were to write the whole day and the other wrote nothing. I do not believe that Whewell would have listened to any such dissuasion. I doubt your being the last fluxional senior wrangler. So far as I know, Gipps, Langdale, Alderson, Dicey, Neale, may contest this point with you. The answer of Sir Frederick Pollock to these questions is dated August 7, 1869, and is as follows : You have put together as revivers five very different men. Woodhonse was better than Waring, who could not prove Wilson's (Judge of C. P.) guess about the property of prime numbers; but Woodhouse (I think) did prove it, and a beautiful proof it is. Vince was a bungler, and I think utterly insensible of mathematical beauty. Now for your questions. I did not get my conic sections from Vince. I copied a ms. of Dealtry. I fell in love with the cone and its sections, and 270 THE MATHEMATICAL TRIPOS [CH. XI everything about it. I have never forsal<en my favourite pursuit ; I delighted in such problems as two spheres touching each other and also the inside of a hollow cone, &c. As to Newton, I read a good deal (men now read nothing), but I read much of the notes. I detected a blunder which nobody seemed to be aware of. Tavel, tutor of Trinity, was not ; and he argued very favourably of me in consequence. The application of the Principia I got from mss. The blunder was this: in calculating the resistance of a globe at the end of a cylinder oscillating in a resisting medium they had forgotten to notice that there is a difference between the resistance to a globe and a circle of the same diameter. The story of Whewell and Jacob cannot be true. Whewell was a very, very considerable man, I think not a great man. I have no doubt Jacob beat him in accui-acy, but the supposed answer cannot be true; it is a mere echo of what actually passed between me and Hornbuckle on the day the Tripos came out — for the truth of which I vouch. I think the examiners are taking too practical a turn ; it is a waste of time to calculate actually a longitude by the help of logarithmic tables and lunar observations. It would be a fault not to know how, but a greater to be handy at it. A few minor changes in the Senate-House Examination were made in 1808*. A fifth day was added to the exami- nation. Of the five days thus given up to it three were devoted to mathematics, one to logic, philosophy, and religion, and one to the arrangement of the brackets. Apart from the evening paper the examination on each of the first three days lasted six hours. Of these eighteen hours, eleven were assigned to book- work and seven to problems. The problem papers were set from 6 to 10 in the evening. A letter fi'om Whewell dated January 19, 1816, describes his examination in the Senate-House f. Jacob. Whewell. Such is the order in which we are fixed after a week's examination... I had before been given to understand that a great deal depended upon being able to write the greatest possible quantity in the smallest time, but of the rapidity which was actually necessary I had formed the most distant idea. I am upon no occasion a quick writer, and upon subjects where I could not go on without sometimes thinking a little I soon found myself considerably behind. I was therefore surprised, and even astonished, to find myself bracketed off, as it is called, in the second place ; that is, on the day when a new division of the classes is made for the purpose of having a closer examina- tion of the respective merits of men who come pretty near to each other, I was not classed with anybody, but placed alone in the second bracket. The man * See Graces, December 15, 1808. t S. Douglas, Life of W. Whewell, London, 1881, p. 20. CH. Xr] THE MATHEMATICAL TRIPOS 27 1 who is at the head of the list is of Cains College, and was always expected to be very high, though I do not know that anybody expected to see him so decidedly superior as to be bracketed off by himself. The tendency to cultivate mechanical rapidity was a grave evil, and lasted long after Whewell's time. According to rumour the highest honours in 1845 were obtained by assiduous practice in writing*. The devotion of the Cambridge school to geometrical and fluxional methods had led to its isolation from contemporary continental mathematicians. Early in the nineteenth century the evil consequence of this began to be recognized ; and it was felt to be little less than a scandal that the researches of Lagrange, Laplace, and Legendre were unknown to many Cambridge mathematicians save by repute. An attempt to explain the notation and methods of the calculus as used on the Continent was made by R. Woodhouse, who stands out as the apostle of the new movement. It is doubtful if he could have brought analytical methods into vogue by himself; but his views were enthusiastically adopted by three students, Peacock, Babbage, and Herschel, who succeeded in carrying out the re- forms he had suggested. They created an Analytical Society which Babbage explained Avas formed to advocate "the principles of pure d-ism as opposed to the dot-Sige of the University." The character of the instruction in mathematics at the University has at all times largely depended on the text-books then in use, and the importance of good books of this class was emphasized by a traditional rule that questions should not be set on a new subject in the tripos unless it had been discussed in some treatise suitable and available for Cambridge students *!■. Hence the importance attached to the publication of the work on analytical trigonometry by Woodhouse in 1809, and of the works on the differential calculus issued by members of the Analytical Society in 1816 and 1820. In 1817 Peacock, who was moderator, introduced the symbols for differentiation into the papers set in the Senate- House * For a contemporary account of this see C. A. Bristed, Five Years in an English Univenity, New York, 1852, pp. 233—239. t See ex, gr. the Grace of November 14, 1827, referred to below. 272 THE MATHEMATICAL TRIPOS [CH. XI Examination. But his colleague continued to use the fluxional notation. Peacock himself wrote on March 17 of 1817 {i.e. shortly after the examination) on the subject as follows*: I assure you... that I shall never cease to exert myself to the utmost in the cause of reform, and that I will never decline any office which may increase my power to effect it. I am nearly certain of being nominated to the office of Moderator in the year 1818-19, and as I am an examiner in virtue of my office, for the next year I shall pursue a course even more decided than hitherto, since I shall feel that men have been prepared for the change, and will then be enabled to have acquired a better system by the publication of improved elementary books. I have considerable influence as a lecturer, and I will not neglect it. It is by silent perseverance only that we can hope to reduce the many-headed monster of prejudice, and make the University answer her char- acter as the loving mother of good learning and science. In 1818 all candidates for honours, that is, all men in the first six preliminary classes, were allowed to attempt the problems : this change was made by the moderators. In 1819 Peacock, who was again moderator, induced his colleague to adopt the new notation. It was employed in the next year by Whewell, and in the following year by Peacock again. Henceforth the calculus in its modern language and analytical methods were freely used, new subjects were in- troduced, and for many years the examination provided a mathematical training fairly abreast of the times. By this time the disputations had ceased to have any im- mediate effect on a man's place in the tripos. Thus Whewell *[*? writing about his duties as moderator in 1820, said : You would get very exaggerated ideas of the importance attached to it [an Act] if you were to trust Cumberland ; I believe it was formerly more thought of than it is now. It does not, at least immediately, produce any effect on a man's place in the tripos, and is therefore considerably less attended to than used to be the case, and in most years is not very interesting after the five or six best men : so that I look for a considerable exercise of, or rather demand for, patience on my part. The other part of my duty in the Senate House consists in manufacturing wranglers, senior optimes, etc. and is, while it lasts, very laborious. Of the examination itself in this year he wrote as follows J : * Proceedings of the Royal Society, London, 1859, vol. ix, pp. 538—539. t WhewelVs Writings and Correspondence, ed. Todhunter, London, 1876, vol. II, p. 36. J S. Douglas, Life of Whewell, London, 1881, p. 56. CH. Xl] THE MATHEMATICAL TRIPOS 27S The examination in the Senate House begins to-morrow, and is rather close work while it lasts. We are employed from seven in the morning till five in the evening in giving out questions and receiving written answers to them; and when that is over, we have to read over all the papers which we have received in the course of the day, to determine who have done best, which is a business that in numerous years has often kept the examiners up the half of 3very night ; but this year is not particularly numerous. In addition to all this, the examination is conducted in a building which happens to be a very beautiful one, with a marble floor and a highly ornamented ceiling; and as it is on the model of a Grecian temple, and as temples had no chimneys, and as a stove or a fire of any kind might disfigure the building, we are obliged to take the weather as it happens to be, and when it is cold we have the full benefit of it — which is likely to be the case this year. However, it is only a few days, and we have done with it. A sketch of the examination in the previous year from the point of view of an examinee was given by J. M. F. Wright*, but there is nothing of special interest in it. Sir George B. Airyf gave the following sketch of his recol- lections of the reading and studies of undergj-aduates of his time and of the tripos of 1823, in which he had been senior wrangler : At length arrived the Monday morning on which the examination for the B.A. degree was to begin.... "We were all marched in a body to the Senate-House and placed in the hands of the Moderators. How the "candidates for honours" were separated from the ol iroWoi I do not know, I presume that the Acts and the Opponencies had something to do with it. The honour candidates were divided into six groups: and of these Nos. 1 and 2 (united), Nos. 3 and 4 (united), and Nos. 5 and 6 (united), received the questions of one Moderator. No. 1, Nos. 2 and 3 (united), Nos. 4 and 5 (united), and No. 6, received those of the other Moderator. The Moderators were reversed on alternate days. There were no printed question-papers : each examiner had his bound manuscript of questions, and he read out his first question ; each of the examinees who thought himself able proceeded to write out his answer, and then orally called out "Done." The Moderator, as soon as he thought proper, proceeded with another question. I think there was only one course of questions on each day (terminating before 3 o'clock, for the Hall dinner). The examination continued to Friday mid-day. On Saturday morning, about 8 o'clock, the list of honours (manuscript) was nailed on the door of the Senate-House. It must be remembered that for students pursuing the normal course the Senate-House Examination still provided the only avenue to a degree. That examination involved a * Alma Mater, London, 1827, vol. ii, pp. 58—98. t See Nature, vol. xxxv, Feb. 24, 1887, pp. 397—399. See also his Auto- biography, Cambridge, 1896, chapter ii. B. R. IS 274 THE MATHEMATICAL TRIPOS [CH. XI loiowledge of the elements of moral philosophy and theology, an acquaintance with the rules of formal logic, and the power of reading and writing scholastic Latin, but mathematics was the predominant subject, and this led to a certain one-sidedness in education. The evil of this was generally recognized, and in 1822 various reforms were introduced in the University curriculum ; in particular the Previous Examination was estab- lished for students in their second year, the subjects being prescribed Greek and Latin works, a Gospel, and Paley's Evidences. Set classical books were introduced in the final examination of poll-men ; and another honour or tripos examin- ation was established for classical students. These alterations came into effect in 1824; and henceforth the Senate-House Examination, so far as it related to mathematical students, was known as the Mathematical Tripos. In 1827 the scheme of examination in the Mathematical Tripos was revised. By regulations* which came into opera- tion in January, 1828, another day was added, so that the examination extended over four days, exclusive of the day of arranging the brackets ; the number of hours of examination was twenty-three, of which seven were assigned to problems. On the first two days all the candidates had the same questions proposed to them, inclusive of the evening problems, and the examination on those days excluded the higher and more difficult parts of mathematics, in order, in the words of the report, " that the candidates for honours may not be induced to pursue the more abstruse and profound mathematics, to the neglect of more elementary knowledge." Accordingly, only such questions as could be solved without the aid of the differential calculus were set on the first day, and those set on the second day involved only its elementary applications. The classes were reduced to four, determined as before by the exercises in the schools. The regulations of 1827 definitely prescribed that all the papers should be printed. They are also noticeable as being the last which gave the examiners power to ask viva voce questions, though such questions were * See Grace, November 14, 1827. CH. Xl] THE MATHEMATICAL TRIPOS '^ 275 restricted to " propositions contained in the mathematical works commonly in use at the University, or examples and explanations of such propositions." It was further recommended that no paper should contain more questions than well-prepared students could be expected to answer within the time allowed for it, but that if any candidate, before the end of the time, had answered all the questions in the paper, the examiners might propose additional questions viva voce. The power of granting honorary optime degrees now ceased ; it had already fallen into abeyance. Henceforth the examination was conducted under definite rules, and I no longer concern myself with the traditions of the examination. In the same year as these changes became effective the examination for the poll degree was separated from the tripos with different sets of papers and a different schedule of subjects*. It was, however, still nominally considered as forming part of the Senate-House Examination, and until 1858 those who obtained a poll degree were arranged in four classes, described as fourth, fifth, sixth, and seventh, as if in continuation of the junior op times or third class of the tripos. The year 1828 therefore shows us the Senate-House Examination dividing into two distinct parts ; one known as the Mathematical Tripos, the other as the poll examination. Historically, the examination known as "the General" represents the old Senate-House Examination for the poll-men, but gradually it has been moved to an earlier period in the normal course taken by the men. In 1851 admission to the Classical Tripos f was allowed to others than those who passed the Mathematical Tripos, and thus provided a separate avenue to a degree. In 1852 another set of examinations, at first called " the Professor's Examinations," and now somewhat modified and known as " the Specials," was instituted for all poll-men to take before they could qualify for a degree. In 1858 the fiction that the poll examinations were part of the Senate- House Examination was abandoned, and subsequently they have been treated as providing an independent • See Grace, May 21, 1828, confirming a Eeport of Maixb 27, 1828. t See Grace of October 31, 1849. 18—2 276 THE MATHEMATICAL TRIPOS [CH. XI method of obtaining the degree : thus now the Mathematical Tripos is the sole representative of the old Senate-House Examination. Since 1858 numerous other ways of obtaining the degree have been established, and it is now possible to get it by showing proficiency in very special, or even technical subjects. Further changes in the Mathematical Tripos were introduced in 1833*. The duration of the examination, before the issue of the brackets, was extended to five days, and the number of hours of examination on each day was fixed at five and a half. Seven and a half hours were assigned to problems. The ex- amination on the first day was confined to subjects that did not require the differential calculus, and only the simplest applications of the calculus were permitted on the second and third days. During the first four days of the examination the same papers were set to all the candidates alike, but on the fifth day the examination was conducted according to classes. No reference was made to viva voce questions, and the preliminary classification of the brackets only survived in a permission to re-examine candidates if it were found necessary. This per- missive rule remained in force till 1848, but I believe that in fact it was never used. In December, 1834, a few unimportant details were amended. Mr Earnshaw, the senior moderator in 1836, informed me that he believed that the tripos of that year was the earliest one in which all the papers were marked, and that in previous years the examiners had partly relied on their impression of the answers given. New regulations came into force f in 1839. The examina- tion now lasted for six days, and continued as before for five hours and a half each day. Eight and a half hours were assigned to problems. Throughout the whole examination the same papers were set to all candidates, and no reference was made to any preliminary classes. It was no doubt in accordance with the spirit of these changes that the acts in the schools should * See Grace of April 6, 1832. + See Grace of May 30, 1838. CH. Xl] THE MATHEMATICAL TRIPOS 277 be abolished, but they were discontinned by the moderators of 1839 without the authority of the Senate. The examination was for the future confined* to mathematics. In the same year in which the new scheme came into force a proposal to again reopen the subject was rejected (March 6). The difficulty of bringing professorial lectures into relation with the needs of students has more than once been before the University. The desirability of it was emphasized by a Syndicate in February, 1843, which recommended conferences at stated intervals between the mathematical professors and examiners. This report foreshadowed the creation of a Mathematical Board, but it was rejected by the Senate on March 31. A few years later the scheme of the examination was again reconstructed by regulations f which came into effect in 1848. The duration of the examination was extended to eight days. The examination lasted in all forty-four and a half hours, twelve of which were devoted to problems. The first three days were assigned to specified elementary subjects; in the papers set on these days riders were to be set as well as book- work, but the methods of analytical geometry and the calculus were excluded. After the first three days there was a short interval, at the end of which the examiners issued a list of those who had so acquitted themselves as to deserve mathematical honours. Only those whose names were contained in this list were admitted to the last five days of the examination, which was devoted to the higher parts of mathematics. After the conclusion of the examination the examiners, taking into account the whole eight days, brought out the list arranged in order of merit. No provision was made for any rearrangement of this list corresponding to the examination of the brackets. The arrangements of 1848 remained in torce till 1873. * Under a badly-worded Grace passed on May 11, 1842, on the recommencla- tion of a syndicate on theological studies, candidates for mathematical honours were, after 1840, required to attend the poll examination on Paley's Moral Philosophy, the New Testament and Ecclesiastical History. This had not been the intention of the Senate, and on March 14, 1855, a Grace was passed making this clear. t See Grace of May 13, 1846, confirming a report of March 23, 1846. 278 THE MATHEMATICAL TRIPOS [CH. XI In the same year as these regulations came into force, a Board of Mathematical Studies (consisting of the mathematical professors, and the moderators and examiners for the current year and the two preceding years) was constituted* by the Senate. From that time forward their minutes supply a per- manent record of the changes gradually introduced into the tripos. I do not allude to subsequent changes which only concern unimportant details of the examination. In May, 1849, the Board issued a report in which, after giving a review of the past and existing state of the mathe- matical studies in the University, they recommended that the mathematical theories of electricity, magnetism, and heat should not be admitted as subjects of examination. In the following year they issued a second report, in which they recommended the omission of elliptical integrals, Laplace's coefficients, capillary attraction, and the figure of the earth considered as hetero- geneous, as well as a definite limitation of the questions in lunar and planetary theory. In making these recommendations the Board were only giving expression to what had become the practice in the examination. I may, in passing, mention a curious attempt which w^as made in 1853 and 1854 to assist candidates in judging of the relative difficulty of the questions asked. This was effected by giving to the candidates, at the same time as the examination paper, a slip of paper on which the marks assigned for the book-work and rider for each question were printed. I mention the fact merely because these things are rapidly forgotten and not because it is of any intrinsic value. I possess a complete set of slips which came to me fi'om Dr Todhunter. In 1856 there was an amusing difference of opinion between the Vice-Chancellor and the moderators. The Vice-Chancellor issued a notice to say that for the convenience of the University he had directed the tripos lists to be published at 8.0 a.m. as well as at 9.0 a.m., but when the University arrived at 8.0 the moderators said that they should not read the list until 9.0. Considerable changes in the scheme of examination were * See Grace of October 31, 1818, CH. Xl] THE MATHExMATICAL TKIPOS 279 introduced in 1873. On December 5, 1865, the Board had recommended the addition of Laplace's coefficients and the figure of the earth considered as heterogeneous as subjects of the examination; the report does not seem to have been brought before the Senate, but attention was called to the fact that certain departments of mathematics and mathematical physics found no place in the tripos schedules, and were neglected by most students. Accordingly, a syndicate was appointed on June 6, 1867, to consider the matter, and a scheme drawn up by them was approved in 1868* and came into effect in 1873. The new scheme of examination was framed on the same lines as that of 1848. The subjects in the first three days were left unchanged, but an extra day was added, devoted to the elements of mathematical physics. The essence of the modification was the greatly extended range of subjects intro- duced into the schedule of subjects for the last five days, and their arrangement in divisions, the marks awarded to the five divisions being approximately those awarded to the three days in proportion to 2, 1, 1, 1, 2/3 to 1 respectively. Under the new regulations the number of examiners was increased from four to five. The assignment of marks to groups of subjects was made under the impression that the best candidates would concentrate their abilities on a selection of subjects from the various divi- sions. But it was found that, unless the questions were made extremely difficult, more marks could be obtained by reading superficially all the subjects in the five divisions than by attaining real proficiency in a few of the higher ones : while the wide range of subjects rendered it practically impossible to thoroughly cover all the ground in the time allowed. The failure was so pronounced that in 1877 another syndicate was appointed to consider the mathematical studies and examina- tions of the University. They presented an elaborate scheme, but on May 13, 1878, some of the most important parts of it wtre rejected and their subsequent proposals, accepted on * See Grace of June 2, 1868. It was carried by a majority of only five in a house of 75. 280 THE MATHEMATICAL TRIPOS [CH. XI November 21, 1878 (by 62 to 49), represented a compromise which pleased few members of the Senate*. Under the new scheme which came into force in 1882 the tripos was divided into two portions : the first portion wns taken at the end of the third year of residence, the range of subjects being practically the same as in the regulations of 1848, and the result brought out in the customary order of merit. The second portion was held in the following January, and was open only to those who had been wranglers in the preceding June. This portion was confined to higher mathematics and appealed chiefly to specialists. The result was brought out in three classes, each arranged in alphabetical order. The moderators and examiners conducted the whole examination without any extraneous aid. In the next year or two further amendments were madef, moving the second part to the June of the fourth year, throwing it open to all men who had graduated in the tripos of the previous June, and transferring the conduct of the examination in Part II to four examiners nominated by the Board : this put it largely under the control of the professors. The range of subjects of Part II was also greatly extended, and candidates were encouraged to select only a few of them. It was further arranged that Part I might be taken at the end of a man's second year of residence, though in that case it would not qualify for a degree. A student who availed himself of this leave could take Part II at the end either of his third or of his fourth year as he pleased. The general effect of these changes was to destroy the homogeneity of the tripos. Objections to the new scheme were soon raised. Especially, it was said — whether rightly or wrongly — that Part I contained too many technical subjects to serve as a general educational training for any save mathe- maticians ; that the distinction of a high place in the historic list produced on its results tended to prevent the best men * See Graces of May 17, 1877; May 29, 1878; and November 21, 1878: and the Camhridge University Reporter, April 2, May 14, June 4, October 29, November 12, and November 26, 1878. t See Graces of December 13, 188o; June 12, 1884; February 10, 1885; October 29, 1885 ; and June 1, 1886, CH. Xl] THE MATHEMATICAL TRIPOS 281 taking it in their second year, though by this time they had read sufficiently to be able to do so ; and that Part II was so constructed as to appeal only to professional mathematicians, and that thus the higher branches of mathematics were neg- lected by all save a few specialists. Whatever value be attached to these opinions, the number of students studying mathematics fell rapidly under the scheme of 1886. In 1899 the Board proposed* further changes. These seemed to some members of the Senate to be likely to still further decrease the number of men who took up the subject as one of general education. At any rate the two main proposals were re- jected, February 15, 1900, by votes of 151 to 130 and 161 to 129. A few years later f the Board brought forv\^ard another scheme, proposing changes so sweeping as almost to destroy the identity of the Tripos. Under this the examination in Part II was abolished — a change on which all parties were agreed. There was introduced an examination, called Part I, confined to elementary mathematics, which could be taken as early as the second term of residence, and for which in certain cases of failure a student could present himself again, but this, although an examination for honours, did not qualify for a degree. In the new Part II, taken normally at the end of the third year of residence and qualifying for a degree, candidates were given some option in the subjects of their examination, and order of merit was abolished. The first examination under this scheme was held in 1908. The curious origin of the term tripos has been repeatedly told, and an account of it may fitly close this chapter. Formerly there were three principal occasions on which questionists were admitted to the title or degree of bachelor. The first of these was the comitia priora, held on Ash-Wednesday, for the best men in the year. The next was the comitia posteriora, which was held a few weeks later, and at which any student who had distinguished himself in the quadragesimal exercises subsequent * See Reports dated November 7, 1S09, and January 20, 1900. t See the Reports of the Special Board, Cavibridye UniverRity Reporter, May 29 and November 20, 1906, and the Graces of Feb. 2, 1907. The voting on the first Grace was 770 Placet and 641 Non-Placet. 282 THE MATHEMATICAL TlllPOS [CH. XI to Ash-Wednesday had his seniority reserved to him. Lastly, there was the comitia minora, for students who had in no special way distinguished themselves. In the fifteenth century an im- portant part in the ceremony on each of these occasions was taken by a certain "ould bachilour," who sat upon a three-legged stool or tripos before the proctors and tested the abilities of the would-be graduates by arguing some question with the " eldest son," who was selected from them as their representative. To assist the latter in what was often an unequal contest his " father," that is, the officer of his college who was to present him for his degree, was allowed to come to his assistance. Originally the ceremony was a serious one, and had a certain religious character. It took place in Great St Mary's Church, and marked the admission of the student to a position with new responsibilities, while the season of Lent was chosen with a view to bring this into prominence. The Puritan party objected to the observance of such ecclesiastical ceremonies, and in the course of the sixteenth century they introduced much license and buffoonery into the proceedings. The part played by the questionist became purely formal. A serious debate still some- times took place between the father of the senior questionist and a regent master who represented the University ; but the discussion was prefaced by a speech by the bachelor, who came to be called Mr Tripos just as we speak of a judge as the bench, or of a rower as an oar. Ultimately public opinion permitted Mr Tripos to say pretty much whafc he pleased, so long as it was not dull and was scandalous. The speeches he delivered or the verses he recited were generally preserved by the Registrary, and were known as the tripos verses: originally they referred to the subjects of the disputations then propounded. The earliest copies now extant are those for 1575. The University officials, to v/hom the personal criticisms in which the tripos indulged were by no means pleasing, repeatedly exhorted him to remember " while exercising his privilege of humour, to be modest withal." In 1740, says Mr Mullinger*, * J. B. Mullinger, The University of Cambridge^ Cambridge, vol. i, 1873, pp. 175—170. CH. Xl] THE MATHEMATICAL TRIPOS 283 "the authorities after condemning the excessive license of the tripos announced that the comitia at Lent would in future be conducted in the Senate-House ; and all members of the Uni- versity, of whatever order or degree, were forbidden to assail or mock the disputants with scurrilous jokes or unseemly witticisms. About the year 1747-8, the moderators initiated the practice of printing the honour lists on the back of the sheets containing the tripos verses, and after the year 1755 this became the invariable practice. By virtue of this purely arbitrary con- nection these lists themselves became known as the tripos; and eventually the examination itself, of which they represented the results, also became known by the same designation." The tripos ceased to deliver his speech about 1750, but the issue of tripos verses continued for nearly 150 years longer. During the latter part of this time they consisted of four sets of verses, usually in Latin, but occasionally in Greek, in which current topics in the University were treated lightly or seriously as the writer thought fit. They were written for the proctors and moderators by undergraduates or commencing bachelors, w^ho were supposed each to receive a pair of white kid gloves in recognition of their labours. Thus gradually the word tripos changed its meaning " from a thing of w^ood to a man, from a man to a speech, from a speech to sets of verses, from verses to a sheet of coarse foolscap paper, from a paper to a list of names, and from a list of names to a system of examination *." In 1895 the proctors and moderators, without consulting the Senate, sent in no verses, and thus, in spite of widespread regret, an interesting custom of many centuries standing was destroyed. No doubt it may be argued that the custom had never been embodied in statute or ordinance, and thus w^as not obligatory. Also it may be said that its continuance was not of material benefit to anybody. I do not think that such arguments are conclusive, and personally I regret the dis- appearance of historic ties unless it can be shown that they cause inconvenience, which of course in this case could not be asserted. * "Wordsworth, Scholae Academicae, Cambridge, 1877, p. 21. 284 CHAPTER XII. THREE CLASSICAL GEOMETBICAL PROBLEMS. Among the more interesting geometrical problems of anti- quity are three questions which attracted the special attention of the early Greek mathematicians. Our knowledge of geometry is derived from Greek sources, and thus these questions have attained a classical position in the history of the subject. The three questions to which I refer are (i) the duplication of a cube, that is, the determination of the side of a cube whose volume is double that of a given cube ; (ii) the triscction of an angle ; and (iii) the squaring of a circle, that is, the deter- mination of a square whose area is equal to that of a given circle — each problem to be solved by a geometrical construction involving the use of straight lines and circles only, that is, by Euclidean geometry. This limitation to the use of straight lines and circles implies that the only instruments available in Euclidean geometry are compasses and rulers. But the compasses must be capable of opening as wide as is desired, and the ruler must be of un- limited length. Further the ruler must not be graduated, for if there were two fixed marks on it we can obtain constructions equivalent to those obtained by the use of the conic sections. With the Euclidean restriction all three problems are in- soluble*. To duplicate a cube the length of whose side is a, ' * See F. C. Klein, Vortrage iiher ausgeiocihlte Fragen der Elementargeometrie, Leipzig, 1895. It is said that the earliest rigorous proof that the problems ■ were insoluble by Euclidean geometry was given by P. L. Wantzell in 1837. J CH. XIl] THREE GEOMETRICAL PROBLEMS 285 we have to find a line of length x, such that a? = 2a^ Again, to trisect a given angle, we may proceed to find the sine of the angle, say a, then, if x is the sine of an angle equal to one-third of the given angle, we have 4^^ =Hx — a. Thus the first and second problems, when considered analytically, require the solu- tion of a cubic equation ; and since a construction by means of circles (whose equations are of the form a^ -h y"^ -\- ax -\- hi/ + c = 0) and straight lines (whose equations are of the form or^+^y -f 7= 0) cannot be equivalent to the solution of a cubic equation, it is inferred that the problems are insoluble if in our constructions we are restricted to the use of circles and straight lines. If the use of the conic sections is permitted, both of these questions can be solved in many ways. The third problem is different in character, but under the same restrictions it also is insoluble. I propose to give some of the constructions which have been proposed for solving the first two of these problems. To save space I shall not draw the necessary diagrams, and in most cases I shall not add the proofs : the latter present but little difficulty. I shall conclude with some historical notes on approximate solutions of the quadrature of the circle. TJie Duplication of the Cube*. The problem of the duplication of the cube was known in ancient times as the Delian problem, in consequence of a legend that the Delians had consulted Plato on the subject. In one form of the story, which is related by Philoponusf, it is asserted that the Athenians in 430 B.C., when sufferinsf from the plague of eruptive typhoid fever, consulted the oracle at Delos as to how they could stop it. Apollo replied that they must double the size of his altar which was in the form of a cube. To the unlearned suppliants nothing seemed more easy, and a new altar was constructed either having each of its edges * See Hiatorla Prohlematis cle Cubi BupUcatione by N. T. Reimer, Gottingen, 1798; and Historia Prohlematis Cubi DupUcandi by C. H. Biering, Copenhagen, 1844 : also Das Delische Problem, by A. Sturm, Linz, 1895-7. Some notes on the subject are given in my History of Mathematics. t Philoponus ad Aristotelis Analytica Posteriora, bk. i, chap. vii. 286 THREE GEOMETRICAL PROBLEMS [CH. XII double that of the old one (from which it followed that the volume was increased eight-fold) or by placing a similar cube altar next to the old one. Whereupon, according to the legend, the indignant god made the pestilence worse than before, and informed a fresh deputation that it was useless to trifle with him, as his new altar must be a cube and have a volume exactly double that of his old one. Suspecting a mystery the Athenians applied to Plato, who referred them to the geometricians. The insertion of Plato's name is an obvious anachronism. Eratos- thenes* relates a somewhat similar story, but with Minos as the propounder of the problem. In an Arab work, the Greek legend was distorted into the following extraordinarily impossible piece of history, which I cite as a curiosity of its kind. "Now in the days of Plato," says the writer, " a plague broke out among the children of Israel. Then came a voice from heaven to one of their prophets, saying, ' Let the size of the cubic altar be doubled, and the plague will cease ' ; so the people made another altar like unto the former, and laid the same by its side. Nevertheless the pestilence continued to increase. And again the voice spake unto the prophet, saying, ' They have made a second altar like unto the former, and laid it by its side, but that does not pro- duce the duplication of the cube.' Then applied they to Plato, the Grecian sage, who spake to them, saying, * Ye have been neglectful of the science of geometry, and therefore hath God chastised you, since geometry is the most sublime of all the sciences.' Now, the duplication of a cube depends on a rare problem in geometry, namely...." And then follows the solu- tion of Apollonius, which is given Jater. If a is the length of the side of the given cube and x that of the required cube, we have a:^ = 2a^, that is, a; : a= ^2 : 1. It is probable that the Greeks were aware that the latter ratio is incommensurable, in other words, that no two integers can be found whose ratio is the same as that of \/2 : 1, but it did not therefore follow that they could not find the ratio by * Archimedis Oj^era cum Eutocii Commentariis, ed. Torelli, Oxford, 17S2, p. 144; ed. Heiberg, Leipzig, 1880-1, vol. iii, pp. 104 — 107. CH. Xli] THREE GEOMETRICAL PROBLEMS 287 geometry: in fiict, the side and diagonal of a square are instances of lines whose numerical measures are incommen- surable. I proceed now to give some of the geometrical constructions which have been proposed for the duplication of the cube*. With one exception, I confine myself to those which can be effected by the aid of the conic sections. Hippocrates f (circ. 420 B.C.) was perhaps the earliest mathe- matician who made any progress towards solving the problem. He did not: give a geometrical construction, but he reduced the question to that of finding two means between one straight line (a), and another twice as long (2a). If these means are a? and y, we have a : x — x : y = y : 2a, fi:om which it follows that cc^ = 2a^. It is in this form that the problem is always presented now. Formerly any process of solution by finding these means was called a mesolabum. One of the first solutions of the problem was that given by Archytasj in or about the year 400 B.C. His construction is equivalent to the following. On the diameter OA of the base of a right circular cylinder describe a semicircle whose plane is perpendicular to the base of the cylinder. Let the plane con- taining this semicircle rotate round the generator through 0, then the surface traced out by the semicircle will cut the cylinder in a tortuous curve. This curve will itself be cut by a right cone, whose axis is OA and semi-vertical angle is (say) 60°, in a point P, such that the projection of OP on the base of the cylinder will be to the radius of the cylinder in the ratio of the side of the required cube to that of the given cube. Of course the proof given by Archytas is geometrical ; and it is interesting to note that in it he shows himself familiar with the results of the propositions Euc. ill, 18, ill, 35, and xi, 19. To * On the application to this problem of the traditional Greek methods of analysis by Hero and Philo (leading to the solution by the use of Apollonius's circle), by Nicomedcs (leading to the solution by the use of the conchoid), and by Pappus (leading to the solution by the use of the cissoid), see Geometrical Analysis by J. Leslie, Edinburgh, second edition, 1811, pp. 247 — 250, 453. t Proclus, ed. Friedlein, pp. 212—213. X Archimcdis Opera, ed. Torelli, p. 14S ; ed. Heiberg, vol. iii, pp. 93 — 103. 288 THREE GEOMETRICAL PROBLEMS [CH. XII show analytically that the construction is correct, take OA as the axis of x, and the generator of the cylinder drawn through as axis of z, then with the usual notation, in polar co-ordinates, if a is the radius of the cylinder, we have for the equation of the surface described by the semicircle r=2a sin ; for that of the cylinder r sin =2a cos cf) ; and for that of the cone sin 6 cos (t>=2' These three surfaces cut in a point such that sin^ = ^, and therefore (r sin Oy = 2a^. Hence the volume of the cube whose side is r sin 6 is twice that of the cube w^hose side is a. The construction attributed to Plato* (circ. 360 B.C.) de- pends on the theorem that, if CAB and DAB are two right- angled triangles, having one side, AB, common, their other sides, AD and BC, parallel, and their hypothenuses, AC and BD, at right angles, then if these hypothenuses cut in P, we have PC :PB = FB : PA = PA : PD. Hence, if such a figure can be constructed having PD = 2P(7, the problem will be solved. It is easy to make an instrument by which the figure can be drawn. The next writer whose name is connected with the problem is Menaechmusf, who in or about 340 B.C. gave two solutions of it. In the first of these he pointed out that two parabolas having a common vertex, axes at right angles, and such that the latus rectum of the one is double that of the other, will intersect in another point whose abscissa (or ordinate) will give a solution. If we use analysis this is obvious; for, if the equations of the parabolas are y"^ — 2ax and x^ = ay, they intersect in a point whose abscissa is given hj c(^ = 2aK It is probable that this method was suggested by the form in which Hippocrates had cast the problem : namely, to find x and y so that a : X = X : y = y : 2a, whence we have x^ = ay and y^ = 2ax. The second solution given by Menaechmus was as follows. Describe a parabola of latus rectum I. Next describe a rect- angular hyperbola, the length of whose real axis is 4^, and * ArcJdmedis Opera, ed. Torelli, p. 135 ; ed. Heiberg, vol. iii, pp. 66 — 71. t IMd., ed. Torelli, pp. 141—143 ; ed. Heiberg, vol. iii, pp. 92—99. CH. Xll] THREE GEOMETRICAL PROBLEMS 289 having for its asymptotes the tangent at the vertex of the parabola and the axis of the parabola. Then the ordinate and the abscissa of the point of intersection of these curves are the mean proportionals between I and 21. This is at once obvious by analysis. The curves are x^ = ly and xy — 2l\ These cut in a point determined by x^ = 21^ and y^ = 4^^ Hence I : X = X : y = y : 21. The solution of Apollonius*, which was given about 220 B.C., was as follows. The problem is to find two mean proportionals between two given lines. Construct a rectangle OADB, of which the adjacent sides OA and OB are respectively equal to the two given lines. Bisect ^jB in G. With G as centre describe a circle cutting OA produced in a and cutting OB produced in h, so that aDh shall be a straight line. If this circle can be so described, it will follow that OA : Bb = Bb : Aa — Aa : OB, that is, Bb and Aa are the two mean proportionals between OA and OB. It is impossible to construct the circle by Euclidean geometry, but Apollonius gave a mechanical way of describing it. The only other construction of antiquity to which I will refer is that given by Diodes and Sporusf. It is as follows. Take two sides of a rectangle OA, OB, equal to the two lines between which the means are sought. Suppose OA to be the greater. With centre and radius OA describe a circle. Let OB produced cut the circumference in G and let A produced cut it in D. Find a point E on BG so that if BE cuts AB produced in F and cuts the circumference in G, then FE = EG. If E can be found, then OE is the first of the means between OA and OB. Diodes invented the cissoid in order to determine E, but it can be found equally conveniently by the aid of conies. In more modern times several other solutions have been suggested. I may allude in passing to three given by HuygensJ, * Archimedis Opera, ed. Torelli, p. 137 ; ed. Heiberg, vol. iii, pp. 76 — 79. The solution is given in my History of Mathematics, London, 1901, p. 84. t Ibid., ed. Torelli, pp. 138, 139, 141 ; ed. Heiberg, vol. m, pp. 78—84, 90-93. X Opera Varia, Leyden, 1724, pp. 393—396. B. R, 19 290 THREE GEOMETRICAL PROBLEMS [CH. XII but I will enunciate only those proposed respectively by Vieta, Descartes, Gregory of St Vincent, and Newton. Vieta's construction is as follows*. Describe a circle, centre 0, whose radius is equal to half the length of the larger of the two given lines. In it draw a chord AB equal to the smaller of the two given lines. Produce AB to E so that BE = AB. Through A draw a line AF parallel to OE. Through draw a line DOCi^G, cutting the circumference in D and G, cutting AF in F, and cutting BA produced in G, so that GF= GA. If this line can be drawn then AB : GG =GG : GA = GA : GB. Descartes pointed outf that the curves x^ = ay and x^ + y^= ay + bx cut in a point {x, y) such that a : x = x : y == y : h. Of course this is equivalent to the first solution given by Menaechmus, but Descartes preferred to use a circle rather than a second conic. Gregory's construction was given in the form of the following theorem |. The hyperbola drawn through the point of inter- section of two sides of a rectangle so as to have the two other sides for its asymptotes meets the circle circumscribing the rectangle in a point whose distances from the asymptotes are the mean proportionals between two adjacent sides of the rect- angle. This is the geometrical expression of the proposition that the curves xy = ab and x^ + y^ = ay + bx cut in a point (x, y) such that a : x = x : y=y : b. One of the constructions proposed by Newton is as folio ws§. Let GA be the greater of two given lines. Bisect GA in B. With centre and radius GB describe a circle. Take a point C on the circumference so that BG is equal to the other of the two given lines. From draw GDE cutting A G produced in D, and BG produced in E, so that the intercept DE = GB. Then ♦ Opera Mathematica, ed. Schooten, Leyden, 1646, prop, v, pp. 242—243. t Geometria, bk. iii, ed. Schooten, Amsterdam, 1659, p. 91. X Gregory of St Vincent, Opus Geometricum Quadraturae Circuli, Antwerp, 1647, bk. VI, prop. 138, p. 602. § Arithmetica Universalis, Ralphson's (second) edition, 1728, p. 242; see also pp. 2i3, 245. CH. Xll] THREE GEOMETRICAL PROBLEMS 291 BC : OD = OD : CE = GE : OA. Hence OD and CE are two mean proportionals between any two lines BC and OA. The Trisection of an Angle*. The trisection of an angle is the second of these classical problems, but tradition has not enshrined its origin in romance. The following two constructions are among the oldest and best known of those which have been suggested; they are quoted by Pappus f, but I do not know to whom they were due originally. The first of them is as follows. Let A OB be the given angle. From any point P in OB draw FM perpendicular to OA. Through P draw Pi2 parallel to 0^. On il/P take a point Q so that if OQ is produced to cut PR in R then QR = 2 . OP. If this construction can be made, then AOR = ^AOB. The solution depends on determining the position of R. This was effected by a construction which may be expressed analytically thus. Let the given angle be tan~^ (b/a). Construct the hyper- bola xy — ab, and the circle (x — of + {y — hf = ^ (a^ -I- 6^). Of the points where they cut, let x be the abscissa which is greatest, then PR = x— a, and tan~^ (^/^) = i tan~^ (^/<^)- The second construction is as follows. Let AOB be the given angle. Take OB = OA, and with centre and radius OA describe a circle. Produce AO indefinitely and take a point G on it external to the circle so that if GB cuts the circumference in D then GD shall be equal to OA. Draw OE parallel to GDB. Then, if this construction can be made, A OE = ^A OB. The ancients determined the position of the point G by the aid of the conchoid : it could be also found by the use of the conic sections. I proceed to give a few other solutions, confining myself to those effected by the aid of conies. * On the bibliography of the subject see the supplements to VIntermidiaire des Mathematiciens, Paris, May and June, 1904. t Pappus, Mathematicae CoUectiones, bk. iv, props. 32, '6'6 (cd. Commandino, Bonn, 1670, pp. 97 — 99). On the application to this problem of the traditional Greek methods of analysis see Geometrical Analysis, by J. Leslie, Edinburgh, second edition, 1811, pp. 245—247. 19—2 292 THREE GEOMETRICAL PROBLEMS [CH. XII Among other constructions given by Pappus* I may quote the following. Describe a hyperbola whose eccentricity is two. Let its centre be G and its vertices A and A'. Produce CA' to >S^ so that A'S=GA\ On AS describe a segment of a circle to contain the given angle. Let the orthogonal bisector oi AS cut this segment in 0. With centre and radius OA or OS describe a circle. Let this circle cut the branch of the hyperbola through A' in P. Then SOP = ^SOA. In modern times one of the earliest of the solutions by a direct use of conies was suggested by Descartes, who effected it by the intersection of a circle and a parabola. His con- struction f is equivalent to finding the points of intersection, other than the origin, of the parabola y^ = ios and the circle rjQ^^y'i — 13.x + ^ay = 0. The ordinates of these points are given by the equation 4y = 3y — a. The smaller positive root is the sine of one- third of the angle' whose sine is a. The demonstra- tion is ingenious. One of the solutions proposed by Newton is practically equivalent to the third one which is quoted above from Pappus. It is as follows |. Let A be the vertex of one branch of a hyperbola whose eccentricity is two, and let S be the focus of the other branch. On AS describe the segment of a circle con- taining an angle equal to the supplement of the given angle. Let this circle cut the S branch of the hyperbola in P. Then PAS will be equal to one-third of the given angle. The following elegant solution is due to Clairaut§. Let A OB be the given angle. Take OA — OB, and with centre and radius OA describe a circle. Join AB, and trisect it in H, K, so that AH = HK = KB. Bisect the angle A OB by 00 cutting AB in L. Then AH — 2.HL. With focus A, vertex if, and directrix OC, describe a hyperbola. Let the branch of * Pappus, Mathematicae Collectiones^ bk. iv, prop. 34, pp. 99 — 104. + Geometria, bk. in, ed. Schooten, Amsterdam, 1659, p. 91. X Arithmetica Universalis, problem xlii, Ralphson's (second) edition, London, 1728, p. 148 ; see also pp. 243—245. § I believe that this was first given by Clairaut, but I have mislaid my reference. The construction occurs as an example in the Geometry of GoiiicSf by G. Taylor, Cambridge, 1881, No. 308, p. 126. CH. XIl] THREE GEOMETR[CAL PROBLEMS 293 this hyperbola which passes through H cut the circle in P. Draw PM perpendicular to OC and produce it to cut the circle in Q. Then by the focus and directrix property we have AP : PM=AH :HL=2:1,.'.AP = 2.PM = PQ. Hence, by symmetry, AP=PQ= QR. /. AOP = POQ = QOR I may conclude by giving the solution which Chasles* regards as the most fundamental. It is equivalent to the following proposition. If OA and OB are the bounding radii of a circular arc AB, then a rectangular hyperbola having OA for a diameter and passing through the point of intersection of OB with the tangent to the circle at A will pass through one of the two points of trisection of the arc. Several instruments have been constructed by which mechanical solutions of the problem can be obtained. The Quadrature of the Circle f. The object of the third of the classical problems was the determination of a side of a square whose area should be equal to that of a given circle. The investigation, previous to the last two hundred years, of this question was fruitful in discoveries of allied theorems, but in more recent times it has been abandoned by those who are able to realize what is required. The history of this subject has been treated by competent writers in such detail that I shall content myself with a very brief allusion to it. Archimedes showed J (what possibly was known before) that the problem is equivalent to finding the area of a nght-angled * Traite des sections coniques, Paris, 1865, art. 37, p. 36. + See Montucla's Histoire des Recherches sur la Quadrature du Cercle, edited by P. L. Lacroix, Paris, 1831 ; also various articles by A. De Morgan, and especially his Budget of Paradoxes, London, 1872. A popular sketch of the subject has been compiled by H. Schubert, Die Quadratur des Zirkels, Hamburg, 1889 ; and since the publication of the earlier editions of these Recreations Prof. F. Rudio of Zurich has given an analysis of the arguments of Ajchimedes, Huygens, Lambert, and Legendre on the subject, with an intro- duction on the history of the problem, Leipzig, 1892. X Archimedit Opera, KvkKov fiirpricis, prop, i, ed. Torelli, pp. 203 — 205 ; ed. Heiberg, vol. i, pp. 258—201, vol. iii, pp. 2G9— 277. 294 THEEE GEOMETRICAL PROBLEMS [CH. XII triangle whose sides are equal respectively to the perimeter of the circle and the radius of the circle. Half the ratio of these lines is a number, usually denoted by tt. That this number is incommensurable had been long sus- pected, and has been now demonstrated. The earliest analytical proof of it was given by Lambert* in 1761 ; in 1803 Legendref extended the proof to show that tt^ was also incommensurable ; and recently Lindemann| has shown that tt cannot be the root of a rational algebraical equation. An earlier attempt by James Gregory to give a geometrical demonstration of this is worthy of notice. Gregory proved § that the ratio of the area of any arbitrary sector to that of the inscribed or circumscribed polygons is not expressible by a finite number of algebraical terms. Hence he inferred that the quadrature was impossible. This was accepted by Montucla, but it is not conclusive, for it is conceivable that some particular sector might be squared, and this particular sector might be the whole circle. In connection with Gregory's proposition above cited, I may add that Newton || proved that in any closed oval an arbitrary sector bounded by the curve and two radii cannot be expressed in terms of the co-ordinates of the extremities of the arc by a finite number of algebraical terms. The argument is condensed and difficult to follow: the same reasoning would show that a closed oval curve cannot be represented by an algebraical equation in polar co-ordinates. From this proposition no * Memoires de VAcademie de Berlin for 1761, Berlin, 17G8, pp. 265— 322. t Legendre's Geometry, Brewster's translation, Edinburgh, 1824, pp. 239— 245. X Ueber die Zahl tt, Mathematische Annalen, Leipzig, 1882, vol. xx, pp. 213 — 225. The proof leads to the conclusion' that, if re is a root of a rational integral algebraical equation, then e' cannot be rational : hence, if iri was the root of such an equation, e^* could not be rational ; but e"^ is equal to - 1, and therefore is rational ; hence iri cannot be the root of such an algebraical equation, and therefore neither can tt. § Vera Circuli et Hyperbolae Quadratura, Padua, 1668 : this is reprinted in Huygens's Opera Varia, Leyden, 1724, pp. 405— 4G2. II Principia, bk. i, section vi, lemma xxviii. CH. XIl] THREE GEOMETRICAL PROBLKMS 295 conclusion as to the quadrature of the circle is to be drawn, nor did Newton draw any. In the earlier editions of this work I expressed an opinion that the result presupposed a particular definition of the word oval, but on more careful reflection I think that the conclusion is valid without restriction. With the aid of the quadratrix, or the conchoid, or the cissoid, the quadrature of the circle is easy, but the construction of those curves assumes a knowledge of the value of tt, and thus the question is begged. I need hardly add that, if tt represented merely the ratio of the circumference of a circle to its diameter, the deter- mination of its numerical value would have but slight interest. It is however a mere accident that tt is defined usually in that way, and it really represents a certain number which would enter into analysis from whatever side the subject was approached. I recollect a distinguished professor explaining how different would be the ordinary life of a race of beings born, as easily they might be, so that the fundamental processes of arithmetic, algebra and geometry were different to those which seem to us so evident, but, he added, it is impossible to conceive of a universe in which e and tt should not exist. I have quoted elsewhere an anecdote, w^hich perhaps will bear repetition, that illustrates how little the usual definition of TT suggests its properties. De Morgan was explaining to an actuary what was the chance that a certain proportion of some group of people would at the end of a given time be alive ; and quoted the actuarial formula, involving tt, which, in answer to a question, he explained stood for the ratio of the circumference of a circle to its diameter. His acquaintance, who had so far listened to the explanation with interest, interrupted him and exclaimed, " My dear friend, that must be a delusion, what can a circle have to do with the number of people alive at the end of a given time ? " In reality the fact that the ratio of the length of the circumference of a circle to its diameter is the number denoted by ir does not afford the best analytical defini- tion of TT, and is only one of its properties. 296 THREE GEOMETRICAL PROBLEMS [cH. Xll The use of a single symbol to denote this number 3'14159... seems to have been introduced about the beginning of the eighteenth century. William Jones* in 1706 represented it by tt; a few years laterf John Bernoulli denoted it by c; Euler in 1734 used p, and in 1736 used c; Christian Goldback in 1742 used tt; and after the publication of Euler's Analysis the symbol tt was generally employed. The numerical value of tt can be determined by either of two methods with as close an approximation to the truth as is desired. The first of these methods is geometrical. It consists in calculating the perimeters of polygons inscribed in and circum- scribed about a circle, and assuming that the circumference of the circle is intermediate between these perimeters^. The ap- proximation would be closer if the areas and not the perimeters were employed. The second and modern method rests on the determination of converging infinite series for tt. We may say that the 7r-calculators who used the first method regarded ir as equivalent to a geometrical ratio, but those who adopted the modern method treated it as the symbol for a certain number which enters into numerous branches of mathematical analysis. It may be interesting if I add here a list of some of the approximations to the value of tt given by various writers §. This will indicate incidentally those who have studied the sub- ject to the best advantage. * Synopsis Palmariorum Matheseos, London, 1706, pp. 243, 263 et seq. t See notes by G. Enestrom in the Bibliotheca Mathematica, Stockholm, 1889, vol. m, p. 28; Ibid., 1890, vol. iv, p. 22. :;: The history of this method has been written by K. E. I. Selander, Uistorik ajver Ludolphska Talet, Upsala, 1868. § For the methods used in classical times and the results obtained, see the notices of their authors in M. Canter's Geschichte der Mathematik, Leipzig, vol. I, 1880. For medieval and modern approximations, see the article by A. De Morgan on the Quadrature of the Circle in vol. xix of the Penny Cyclopaedia, London, 1841; with the additions given by B. de Haan in the Verhandelingen of Amsterdam, 1858, vol. iv, p. 22 : the conclusions were tabulated, corrected, and extended by Dr J. W. L. Glaisher in the Messenger of Mathematics, Cambridge, 1873, vol. ii, pp. 119—128; and Ihid., 1874, vol. in, pp. 27—46. CH. XIl] THREE GEOMETRICAL PROBLEMS 297 The ancient Egyptians* took 256/81 as the value of tt, this is equal to 3'1605... ; but the rougher approximation of 3 was used by the Babylonians f and by the Jews J:. It is not unlikely that these numbers were obtained empirically. We come next to a long roll of Greek mathematicians who attacked the problem. Whether the researches of the members of the Ionian School, the Pythagoreans, Anaxagoras, Ilippias, Antipho, and Bryso led to numerical approximations for the value of TT is doubtful, and their investigations need not detain us. The quadrature of certain lunes by Hippocrates of Chios is ingenious and correct, but a value of tt cannot be thence deduced ; and it seems likely that the later members of the Athenian School concentrated their efforts on other questions. It is probable that Euclid §, the illustrious founder of the Alexandrian School, was aware that tt was greater than 3 and less than 4, but he did not state the result explicitly. The mathematical treatment of the subject began with Archimedes, who proved that tt is less than 3f and greater than 3ff, that is, it lies between 3-1428... and 3*1408... . He established II this by inscribing in a circle and circumscribing about it regular polygons of 96 sides, then determining by geometry the perimeters of these polygons, and finally assuming that the circumference of the circle was inter- mediate between these perimeters : this leads to a result from which he deduced the limits given above. This method is equivalent to using the proposition sin ^ < ^ < tan 6, where d — 'TT/QQ: the values of sin^ and tan ^ were deduced by Archimedes fi'om those of sin ^tt and tan ^tt by repeated bisections of the angle. With a polygon of n sides this * Ein mathematisches Handbiich der alten Aegypter {i.e. the Ebiiid papyrus), by A. Eisenlohr, Leipzig, 1877, arts. 100—109, 117, 124. t Oppert, Journal Asiatique, August, 1872, and October, 1874. X 1 Kings, ch. 7, ver. 23 ; 2 Chronicles, ch. 4, vcr. 2. § These results can be deduced from Euc. iv, 15, and iv, 8: see also book xii, prop. 16. II Archimedis Opera, KiJkXou iJ.hpr)(xis, prop, iii, ed. Torelli, Oxford, 1792, pp. 205 — 216; ed. Heiberg, Leipzig, 18S0, vol. i, pp. 263 — 271. 298 THREE GEOMETRICAL PROBLEMS [CH. XII process gives a value of tt correct to at least the integral part of (2 logri — 1*19) places of decimals. The result given by Archimedes is correct to two places of decimals. His analysis leads to the conclusion that the perimeters of these polygons for a circle whose diameter is 4970 feet would lie between 15610 feet and 15620 feet— actually it is about 15613 feet 9 inches. Apollonius discussed these results, but his criticisms have been lost. Hero of Alexandria gave* the value 3, but he quoted f the result 22/7 : possibly the former number was intended only for rough approximations. The only other Greek approximation that I need mention is that given by Ptolemy J, who asserted that tt = 3° 8' 80''. This is equivalent to taking tt = 3 + ^ + -g^gg = Sj^^ = 3*1416. The Roman surveyors seem to have used 3, or sometimes 4, for rough calculations. For closer approximations they often employed 3^ instead of 3f , since the fractions then introduced are more convenient in duodecimal arithmetic. On the other hand Gerbert§ recommended the use of 22/7. Before coming to the medieval and modern European mathe- maticians it may be convenient to note the results arrived at in India and the East. Baudhayana|| took 49/16 as the value of tt. Arya-BhataH, circ. 530, gave 62832/20000, which is equal to 31416. He showed that, if a is the side of a regular polygon of n sides inscribed in a circle of unit diameter, and if h is the side of a regular inscribed polygon of 2n sides, then 6^ = J — J (1 — a'^y\ From the side of an inscribed hexagon, he found successively the sides of polygons of 12, 24, 48, 96, 192, * Blensurae, ed. Hultscli, Berlin, 1864, p. 188. t Geometria, ed. Hultsch, Berlin, 1864, pp. 115, 136. X Almagest, bk. vi, chap. 7 ; ed. Halma, vol. i, p. 421. § (Euvres de Gerbert, ed. Olleris, Clermont, 1867, p. 453. II The Sulvasutras by G. Thibaut, Asiatic Society of Bengal, 1875, arta. 26—28. IF Legons de calcul d'Aryabhata, by L. Rodet in the Journal Asiatique, 1879, series 7, vol. xiii, pp. 10, 21. CH. XIl] THREE GEOMRTRICAL PROBLEMS 299 and 884 sides. The perimeter of the last is given as equal to V9*8694, from which his result was obtained by approxi- mation.. Brahmagupta*, circ. 650, gave VlO, which is equal to 81622.... He is said to have obtained this value by inscribing in a circle of unit diameter regular polygons of 12, 24, 48, and 96 sides, and calculating successively their perimeters, which he found to be V9^, Vim, V9^, V9^ respectively; and to have assumed that as the number of sides is increased indefinitely the perimeter would approximate to VlO. Bhaskara, circ. 1150, gave two approximations. Onef — pos- sibly copied from Arya- Bhata, but said to have been calculated afresh by Archimedes's method from the perimeters of regular polygons of 384 sides— is 3927/1250, which is equal to 31416: the otherj is 754/240, which is equal to 31416, but it is in- certain wliether this was not given only as an approximate value. Among the Arabs the values 22/7, VIO, and 62832/20000 were given by Alkarismi§, circ. 830; and no doubt were derived from Indian sources. He described the first as an approximate value, the second as used by geometricians, and th3 third as used by astronomers. In Chinese works the values 3, 22/7, 157/50 are said to occur: probably the last two results were copied from the Arabs. The Japanesejj approximations were closer. Returning to European mathematicians, we have the following successive approximations to the value of tt: many of those prior to the eighteenth century having been calculated originally with the view of demonstrating the incorrectness of some alleged quadrature. * Algebra... from Brahmegupta and Bhascara, trans, by H. T. Colebrooke, London, 1817, chap, xii, art. 40, p, 308. t Ibid., p. 87. X Ibid., p. 95. § The Algebra of Mohammed ben Musa, ed. by F. Eosen, London, 1831, pp. 71—72. II On Japanese approximations and the methods used, see P. Harzer, Transactions of the British Association for 1905, p. 325. 300 THREE GEOMETRICAL PROBLEMS [CH. XII Leonardo of Pisa*, in the thirteenth century, gave for tt the value 1440/458^, which is equal to 3'1418.... In the fifteenth century, Purbachf gave or quoted the value 62832/20000, which is equal to 3'1416 ; Cusa believed that the accurate value was } (V3 + \/6), which is equal to 31423...; and, in 1464, RegiomontanusJ: is said to have given a value equal to 314243. Vieta§, in 1579, showed that ir was greater than 31415926535/10^", and less than 31415926537/10^°. This was deduced from the perimeters of the inscribed and circumscribed polygons of 6 X 2^^ sides, obtained by repeated use of the formula 2 sin^ 1^ = 1 — cos ^. He also gave|| a result equivalent to the formula 2 _ V2 V(2 + V2) V{2 + V(2 + V2)} 7r~ 2 2 2 The father of Adrian MetiusH, in 1585, gave 355/113, which is equal to 3"14159292..., and is correct to six places of decimals. This was a curious and lucky guess, for all that he proved was that tt was intermediate between 377/120 and 333/106, whereon he jumped to the conclusion that he would obtain the true fractional value by taking the mean of fche numerators and the mean of the denominators of these fractions. In 1593 Adrian Romanus** calculated the perimeter of the inscribed regular polygon of 1073,741824 {i.e. 2^'^) sides, from which he determined the value of ir correct to 15 places of decimals. * Boncompagni's Scritti di Leonardo, voL ii {Practica Geometriae), Eome, 1862, p. 90. t Appendix to the De Triangulis of Regiomontanus, Basle, 1541, p. 131. J In his correspondence with Cardinal Nicholas de Cusa, De Quadratura Girculi, Nuremberg, 1533, wherein he proved that the cardinal's result was wrong. I cannot quote the exact reference, but the figures are given by com- petent writers and I have no doubt are correct. § Canon Mathematicus seu ad Triangula, Paris, 1579, pp. 56, 66 : probably this work was printed for private circulation only, it is very rare. II Vietae Opera, ed. Schooten, Leyden, 16i6, p. 400. ^ Arithmeticae libri duo et Geometriae, by A. Metius, Leyden, 1626, pp. 88— 89. [Probably issued originally in 1611.] ** Ideae Mathematicae, Antwerp, 1593 : a rare work, which I have never been able to consult. CH. XIl] THREE GEOMETRICAL PROBLEMS 301 L. van Cenlen devoted no inconsidorable part of his life to the subject. In 1596* he gave the result to 20 places of deci- mals : this was calculated by finding the perimeters of the inscribed and circumscribed regular polygons of 60 x 2^^ sides, obtained by the repeated use of a theorem of his discovery equivalent to the formula 1 — cos^ = 2 sin^ Jil. I possess a finely executed engraving of him of this date, with the result printed round a circle which is below his portrait. He died in 1610, and by his directions the result to 35 places of decimals (which was as far as he had calculated it) was engraved on his tombstone i* in St Peter's Church, Le3^den. His posthumous arithmetic J: contains the result to 32 places ; this was obtained by calculating the perimeter of a polygon, the number of whose sides is 2'\ i.e. 4,611686,018427,387904. Van Ceulen also com- piled a table of the perimeters of various regular polygons. Willebrord Snell§, in 1621, obtained from a polygon of 2^*' sides an approximation to 34 places of decimals. This is less than the numbers given by van Ceulen, but Snell's method was so superior that he obtained his 34 places by the use of a polygon from which van Ceulen had obtained only 14 (or perhaps 16) places. Similarly, Snell obtained from a hexagon an approximation as correct as that for which Archimedes had required a polygon of 96 sides, while from a polygon of 96 sides he determined the value of tt correct to seven decimal places instead of the two places obtained by Archimedes. The reason is that Archimedes, having calculated the lengths of the sides of inscribed and circumscribed regular polygons of n sides, assumed that the length of l/nth of the perimeter of the circle was intermediate between them; whereas Snell constructed • Vanden Circkel, Delf, 1596, fol. 14, p. 1 ; or De Circulo, Leyden, 1619, p. 3. t The inscription is quoted by Prof, de Haan in the Messenger of Mathematics, 1874, vol. Ill, p. 25. X De Arithmetische en Geometrische Foudavienten, Leyden, 1615, p. 163; or p. 144 of the Latin translation by W. Snell, published at Leyden in 1615 under the title Fundamenta Arithmetica et Gcometrica. This was reissued, togetlier with a Latin translation of the Vanden Circkel, in 1619, under the title De Circulo; in which see pp. 3, 29 — 32, 92. § Cyclometricus, Leaden, 1621, p. 55. 302 THREE GEOMETRICAL PROBLEMS [CH. XII from the sides of these polj^gons two other lines which gave closer limits for the corresponding arc. His method depends on the theorem 3 sin ^/(2 + cos ^) < ^ < (2 sin -J ^ + tan J B), by the aid of which a polygon of n sides gives a value of tt correct to at least the integral part of (4 log n — •2305) places of decimals, which is more than twice the number given by the older rule. Snell's proof of his theorem is incorrect, though the result is true. Snell also added a table* of the perimeters of all regular inscribed and circumscribed polygons, the number of whose sides is 10 X 2" where ii is not greater than 19 and not less than 3. Most of these were quoted from van Ceulen, but some were recalculated. This list has proved useful in refuting circle- squares. A similar list was given by James Gregory f. In 1630 Grienberger J, by the aid of Snell's theorem, carried the approximation to 39 places of decimals. He was the last mathematician who adopted the classical method of finding the perimeters of inscribed and circumscribed polygons. Closer approximations serve no useful purpose. Proofs of the theorems used by Snell and other calculators in applying this method were given by Huygens in a work§ which may be taken as closing the history of this method. In 1656 Wallisll proved that TT 2.2.4.4.6.6 ... Ji X.O.O.O.0.4.1 ... and quoted a proposition given a few years earlier by Viscount Brouncker to the effect that 7r_ P 32 5^ 4~ ^2+ 2 + 2 + ..., * It is quoted by Montucla, ed. 1831, p. 70. t Vera Circuli et Hyperbolae Quadratura, prop. 29, quoted by Huj'gens, Opera Varia, Leyden, 1724, p. 447. X Elementa Trigonometrica, Home, 1630, end of preface. § De Gircula Magnitudine Inventa, 1654 ; Opera Varia, pp. 851 — 387. The proofs are given in G. Pirie's Geometrical Methods of Approximating to the Value of IT, London, 1877, pp. 21—23. II Arithmetica Infiiiitorum, Oxford, 1656, prop. 191. An analysis of the investigation by Wallis was given by Cayley, Quarterly Journal of Mathematics^ 1839, vol. xxiii, pp. 165—169. CH. XIl] THREE GEOMETRICAL PROBLEMS 303 but neither of these theorems was used to any large extent for calculation. Subsequent calculators have relied on converging infinite series, a method that was hardly practicable prior to the in- vention of the calculus, though Descartes* had indicated a geometrical process which was equivalent to the use of such a series. The employment of infinite series was proposed by James Gregory f, who established the theorem that ^ = tan ^ - 1 tan^ e-\-^ tan' (9 - ..., the result being true only if 6 lies between — {tt and J tt. The first mathematician to make use of Gregory's series for obtaining an approximation to the value of tt was Abraham Sharp J:, who, in 1699, on the suggestion of Halley, determined it to 72 places of decimals (71 correct). He obtained this value by putting 0=^7r in Gregory's series. Machin§, earlier than 1706, gave the result to 100 places (all correct). He calculated it by the formula J TT = 4 tan~^ ^ — tan~^ ■^. De Lagnyll, in 1719, gave the result to 127 places of decimals (112 correct), calculating it by putting 6 = ^ir in Gregor3^"'s series. HuttonlF, in 1776, and Euler**, in 1779, suggested the use of • See Euler's paper in the Novi Commentarii Academiae Scientiarum, St Petersburg, 1763, vol. viii, pp. 157—168. t See the letter to Collins, dated Feb. 15, 1671, printed in the Coinmercium EpistoUcum, London, 1712, p. 25, and in the Macclesfield Collection, Corre- fpondence of Scientific Men of the Seventeenth Century^ Oxford, 1841, vol. ii. p. 216. X See Life of A. Sharp by W. Cudworth, London, 1889, p. 170. Sharp's work is given in one of the preliminary discourses (p. 53 et seq.) prefixed to H. Sherwin's Mathematical Tables. The tables were issued at London in 1705: probably the discourses were issued at the same time, though the earliest copies I have seen were printed in 1717. § W.Jones's Synopsis Pahnarionim, London, 1706, p. 243; and Maseres, Scriptores Logarithmici, London, 1796, vol. iii, pp. vii— ix, 155 — 164. il Histoire de VAcad€mie for 1719, Paris, 1721, p. 144. H Philosophical Transactions ^ 1776, vol. lxvi, pp. 476 — 492. •* Nova Acta Academiae Scientiarum Petropolitanae for 1793, St Petersburg, 1798, vol. XI, pp. 133 — 149: the memoir was read in 1779. 304 THREE GEOMETRICAL PROBLEMS [CH. XII the formula Jtt = tan~^ J + tan~^ i or Jtt = 5 tan"^ f + 2 tan~^ ^, but neither carried the approximation as far as had been done previously. Vega, in 1789*, gave the value of tt to 143 places of decimals (126 correct); and, in l794f, to 140 places (136 correct). Towards the end of the eighteenth century Baron Zach saw in the Radcliffe Library, Oxford, a manuscript by an unknown author which gives the value of tt to 154 places of decimals (152 coiTect). In 1837, the result of a calculation of vr to 154 places of decimals (152 correct) was published^. In 1841 Rutherford§ calculated it to 208 places of decimals (152 correct), using the formula J7r=4 tan~^ -J— tan~^ Y^^j^+tan"^ ■^. In 1844 Dase || calculated it to 205 places of decimals (200 correct), using the formula ^ir = tan~^ J + tan~^ -J + tan~^ J. In 1847 Clausen IF carried the approximation to 250 places of decimals (248 correct), calculating it independently by the formulae ^tt = 2 tan~^ J + tan'^ f and ^tt = 4 tan"^ i - tan"^ gfg- In 1853 Rutherford** carried his former approximation to 440 places of decimals (all correct), and William Shanks pro- longed the approximation to 530 places. In the same year Shanks published an approximation to 607 places ff : and in 1873 he carried the approximation to 707 places of decimals JJ. These were calculated from Machin's formula. In 1853 Richter, presumably in ignorance of what had been * Nova Acta Academiae Scientiarum Petropolitanae for 1790, St Petersburg, 1795, vol. IX, p. 41. t Thesaurus Logarithmorum {logarithmisch-trigonometrischer Tafeln), Jjei^^zig, 1794, p. 633. X J. F. Callet's Tables, etc., Precis Elenieataire, Paris, tirage, 1837. I have not verified this reference. § Philosophical Transactions, 1841, p. 283. II Crelle's Journal, 1844, vol. xxvii, p. 198. H Schumacher, Astronomische Nachrichten, vol. xxv, col. 207. ** Proceedings of the Royal Society, Jan. 20, 1853, vol. vi, pp. 273 — 275. +t Contributions to Mathematics, W. Shanks, London, 1853, pp. 86—87. XX Proceedings of the Royal Society, 1872-3, vol. xxi, p. 318; 1873-4, vol. XXII, p. 45. CH. XIl] THREE GEOMETRICAL PROBLEMS 805 done in England, found the value of tt to 333 places* of decimals (330 correct) ; in 1854 he carried the approximation to 400 places -f ; and in 1855 carried it to 500 placesj. Of the series and formulae by which these approximations have been calculated, those used by Machin and Dase are perhaps the easiest to employ. Other series which converge rapidly are the following: TT^l 1 J_ K3 1 6~2"'"2"3.2=='^2.4'5.2^ an( i = 22 tan- ^ + 2 tan- ^^ - 5 tan- j^^ - 10 tan- ^-j^ ; the latter of these is due to Mr Escott§. As to those writers who believe that they have squared the circle their number is legion and, in most cases, their ignorance profound, but their attempts are not worth discussing here. " Only prove to me that it is impossible," said one of them, " and I will set about it immediately " ; and doubtless the statement that the problem is insoluble has attracted much attention to ic. Among the geometrical ways of approximating to the truth the following is one of the simplest. Inscribe in the given circle a square, and to three times the diameter of the circle add a fifth of a side of the square, the result will differ from the circumference of the circle by less than one-seventeen- thousandth part of it. An approximate value of it has been obtained experimentally by the theory of probability. On a plane a number of equi- distant parallel straight lines, distance apart a, are ruled ; and a stick of length I, which is less than a, is dropped on the plane. The probability that it will fall so as to lie across one of the lines is 2Z/7ra. If the experiment is repeated many hundreds * GriinerVs Archiv, vol. xxi, p. 119. t Ibid., vol. xxm, p. 476: the approximation given in vol. xxii, p. 473, is correct only to 330 places. X Ibid., vol. XXV, p. 472; and Elbinger Anzeigen, No. 85. § VIntermediaire des Mathtmaticiens, Paris, Dec. 1896, vol. in, p. 276. B. R. 20 306 THREE GEOMETRICAL PROBLEMS [CH. XII of times, the ratio of the number of favourable cases to the whole number of experiments will be very nearly equal to this fraction: hence the value of tt can be found. In 1855 Mr A. Smith* of Aberdeen made 3204 trials, and deduced 7r = 3*1553. A pupil of Prof. De Morgan*, from 600 trials, deduced TT = 3-137. In 1864 Captain Foxf made 1120 trials with some additional precautions, and obtained as the mean value TT = 3-1419. Other similar methods of approximating to the value of tt have been indicated. For instance, it is known that if two numbers are written down at random, the probability that they will be prime to each other is 6/7r^ Thus, in one case:^ where each of 50 students wrote down 5 pairs of numbers at random, 154 of the pairs were found to consist of numbers prime to each other. This gives QJir^ = 154/250, from which we get 7r = 312. * A. De Morgan, Budget of Paradoxes, London, 1872, pp. 171, 172 [quoted from an article by De Morgan published in 1861]. t Messenger of Mathematics, Cambridge, 1873, vol. ii, pp. 113, 114. X Note on w by R. Chartres, Philosophical Magazine, London, series 6, vol. XXXIX, March, 1904, p. 315. 307 CHAPTER XIII. THE PARALLEL POSTULATE. In the last chapter I considered three classical problems. Another geometrical question, perhaps of greater interest, is concerned with whether the sum of the angles of a plane triangle is exactly equal to two right angles. This is a propo- sition which in ordinary textbooks on elementary geometry is enunciated — and properly so — as if it were undoubtedly true. In one sense this theorem, like the problems discussed in the last chapter, or like the algebraic solution of the general equation of the fifth degree, is insoluble; but the efforts to prove it aftbrd materials for an interesting chapter in the history of mathematics, since many of the demonstrations formerly proposed are fallacious. The fact however that in the reasoning there are pitfalls, logical as well as mathe- matical, adds to the interest of the discussion, and the treacherous nature of the path makes its safe passage the more interesting*. * The subject has been discussed by numerous writers. A good account of it to the end of the 18th century is given in the notes to J. Playfair's Elements of Geometry, Edinburgh, Ist edition, 1813, and in the Appendix to Geometry without Axioms by T. P. Thompson, London, 4th edition, 1833. For other and more recent researches, see H. Schotten, Flanim^trischen Unterrichts, vol. ii, Leipzig, 1893 ; F. Engel and P. Stackel, Die Theorie der Parallellinien, Leipzig, 1895, 1899; J. Richard, La Philosophie des Mathematiques, Paris, 1903; J. W. Withers, Euclid's Parallel Postulate, Chicago, 1905; M. Simon, Veher die Entwicklang der Elementar-geometrie, Leipzig, 1906. Some of the solutions offered have no interest, and are evidently fallacious. Hence I make no attempt to treat the subject exhaustively, but I mention the more plausible eli'orts. 20—2 308 THE PARALLEL POSTULATE [CH. XIII Earliest Proof. Thales. We know from Geminus that this proposition was one of the first general results discovered by the Greeks*. From the extant notices the following has been suggested, with considerable probability, as indicating the manner in which it was proved ; at any rate this demonstration involves nothing with which Thales, the traditional founder of the science of abstract geometry, was not acquainted, and it has been conjectured that it is in fact due to him. According to this view, it was, in the first place, stated (or more likely assumed) that in a rectangle the angles were right angles and the opposite sides equal. Hence the sum of the four angles is equal to four right angles. Next, by drawing a diagonal of a rectangle, it will be seen that any right-angled triangle can be placed in juxtaposition with an equal and similar triangle in such a way as to make up a rectangle: this step in the argument may have been suggested by the tiles used in paving floors. Hence the sum of the angles of a right-angled triangle is equal to two right angles. Lastly, any triangle ABC can be divided into two right-angled triangles by drawing a per- pendicular AD from the biggest angle A to the opposite side BG. The sum of the angles of the triangle ABB is equal to two right angles. Hence the sum of the angles B and BAD is equal to one right angle. Similarly the sum of the angles C and CAD is equal to one right angle. Hence the sum of the angles B, G, BAD, and CAD, that is, the sum of the angles of the original triangle ABC, is equal to two right angles. The only criticism I would make on this proof is that it rests frankly on the assumption that we can construct a rect- angle, and that the opposite sides of the rectangle are equal. This, unless we refer to direct observation or measurement, involves an assumption about parallel lines, which is equivalent to that made in Euclid's postulate. Pascal's Proof. Another proof, also resting immediately on experiment, to which I may here refer, was discovered by Pascal in the seventeenth century. It is interesting * G. J. Allman, Greek Geometry Jrom Thales to Euclid, Dublin, 1889, chap. i. CH. XIIl] THE PARALLEL POSTULATE 809 from its history. Pascal was a delicate and precocious boy, and in order to ensure his not being over-worked his father directed that his education should at first be only linguistic and literary, and should not include any mathematics. Natur- ally this excited the boy's curiosity, and one day, being about twelve years old, he asked in what geometry consisted. His tutor replied that it was the science of constructing exact figures and determining the relations between their parts. Pascal, stimulated no doubt by the injunction against reading it, gave up his playtime to the new amusement, and in a few weeks had discovered for himself several properties of recti- linear figures, and in particular the proposition in question. His proof is said* to have consisted in taking a triangular piece of paper and turning over the angular points to meet at the foot of the perpendicular drawn from the biggest angle to the opposite side. The conclusion is obvious from a figure, for if the paper be creased so that A is turned over to D, as also B and C, we get B = FDB, A=FDE, and C = EDC\ hence A + B^-C = EDF -h FDB + EDG = it. But we can only prove these relations on the assumption that when the paper is folded over BF and ^F will lie along DF, and thus that BF= FA = FB, and similarly that CE = EA = ED ; this assumption involves properties of parallel lines. A similar proof can be obtained by turning over the angular points to meet at the centre of the inscribed circle, and according to some accounts this was the method used by Pascal. I may add in passing that his father, struck by this evidence of Pascal's geometrical ability, * I believe that this rests merely on tradition. 310 THE PARALLEL POSTULATE [CH. XIII gave him a copy of Euclid's Elements, and allowed him to take up the subject for which evidently he had a natural aptitude. Pythagorean and Euclidean Proof. Leaving the above demonstrations which rest on observation and experiment, I proceed to the classical proof given by Euclid*. This was taken from the Pythagoreans t, and is generally attributed to Pythagoras himself The proof rests on properties of parallel lines, and the Pythagoreans must have prefaced it by some statement of those properties, but there is now no record as to how they treated parallels. Euclid's treatment of parallels is well known. There is no doubt that he put, at the beginning of his Geometry, certain definitions, axioms, and postulates ; but in the earliest manu- scripts, according to Pe3Tard, the assumption about parallels was not stated there, but was placed in the demonstration of his proposition 29 as a fact conformable to experience, which had to be assumed for the validity of the argument. If this be so, this exceptional treatment seems to indicate that, in Euclid's opinion, the assumption was of a different character to the other postulates, and the difficulty was faced frankly without any attempt to conceal it under a vague phraseology. Unluckily the postulate is often printed in modern school books as an axiom or a self-evident statement. This misplacement may have been due in the first instance to Theon of Alexandria who, about 370 a.d., lectured on Euclid's Geometry. Our modern texts of Euclid are mainly based on Theon 's lectures, and it is only comparatively recently that the commentaries on Euclid's teaching have been subjected to critical discussion. At any rate Euclid, either at the commencement of his work or more likely in the course of his demonstration, boldly assumed that if a straight line meets two other straight lines so as to make the sum of the two interior angles on one side of it less than two right angles, then these straight lines if continually produced will meet upon that side on which these * Euclid's Elements, book i, prop. 32. t Eudemus is our authority for this ; see Proclus, ed. G. Friedlein, Leipzig, 1873, p. 379. CH. XIIl] THE PARALLEL POSTULATE 311 angles are situated. Accepting this or some similar assumption, the demonstration is rigorous, and was given by him as follows. Take any triangle ABC. Produce the side BA to any distance AH, and through A draw a line AK parallel to BC. On the assumption that his postulate is true, Euclid showed (Euc. I. 29) that the angle ABC must be equal to the angle HAK, and the angle ACB to the angle KAC. Hence the sum of the three angles of the triangle ABC must be equal to the sum of the angles HAK, KAC, and CAB, that is, to two right angles. Euclid's postulate and this theorem mutually involve the one the other: if we can prove his postulate this theorem is true, if otherwise we can prove this theorem, then his postulate is true*. Hence the question with which I com- menced the chapter (namely whether the sum of the angles of a triangle is, and can be shown to be, equal to two right angles) comes in effect to asking whether Euclid's postulate is true and can be proved to be true. Features of the Problem. The postulate, as enunciated by Euclid, has the semblance of a proposition. For many centuries mathematicians believed that it could be directly deduced from the fundamental principles of geometry, and they devoted much labour to trying to prove it. The more notable of these attempts I propose to describe, but I may anticipate matters by saying that about a hundred years ago it was shown * The demonstration is given by J. Richard, La Philosophie des Mathema- tiques, Paris, 1903, pp. 81—84. 312 THE PARALLEL POSTULATE [CH. XIII that this postulate, or any of its equivalent forms, cannot be proved. Thus in every one of the proposed demonstrations there is either a fallacy, or some assumption similar to that made by Euclid. In order to be able to appreciate the criticisms on some of these attempts it will be convenient to preface the discussion by saying that the postulate and its conclusions do in fact involve considerations of the nature of the space considered. For example, we say that we can draw a line parallel to a given line, and that however far the lines are produced they will not meet. This is not at variance with what we observe, but we have never got to infinity to see what does happen there. Hence, though it is conformable to our experience we cannot say that it is actually true. In fact, it is not certain that the statement is absolutely true of the space we know. An example will show this. If small intelligent beings lived on a strictly circumscribed portion of the surface of a sphere, and evolved a geometry of figures drawn on that surface, they might form a body of propositions similar to those given by Euclid, and resting on the same axioms and assumptions. All their assumptions, except this postulate and the axiom about the impossibility of two straight lines enclosing a space, would be correct. But if the sphere were large enough, and they were confined to a comparatively small part of its surface, they would not be able to find out that this postulate about parallels was incorrect. Accordingly it would be not unreason- able that they should believe it to be true, though in fact it would be false. What is here said of the surface of a sphere is by way of illustration, but it indicates the possibility of the existence of surfaces such that consistent systems of geometries, closely resembling the Euclidean geometry, might be constructed dealing with figures drawn thereon. This question is men- tioned again later. The above remarks suffice, however, to show that the postulate involves properties of the space in which the figures are constructed. It follows that the best way of stating the postulate will be that which is directly CH. XIll] THE PARALLEL POSTULATE 313 characteristic of what we may call plane space, as opposed to other kinds of space. Euclid's statement answers this purpose, and it is remarkable that he should have thus gone to the root of the matter. By implication he admitted that the statement could not be demonstrated, and he frankly met the difficulty by telling his hearers that though he could not prove it, they must grant him the postulate as a foundation for his reasoning. Attempted Deinonstrations of the Postulate. I proceed now to describe a few of these attempts to prove the postulate or the proposition. Ptolemy s Proof of the Postulate. One of the earliest of these efforts to prove the postulate was due to Ptolemy, the astronomer, in the second century after Christ. It is as follows*. Let the straight line EFGH meet the two straight lines AB and CD so as to make the sum of the angles BFG and FGD equal to two right angles. It is required to prove that AB and CD are parallel. If possible let them not be parallel, then they will meet when produced say at M (or N). But the angle AFG is the supplement of BFG and is therefore equal to FGD. Similarly the angle FGG is equal to BFG. Hence the sum of the angles AFG and FGG is equal to two right angles, and therefore the lines BA and DC, if produced, will meet at M (or N). But two straight lines cannot enclose a space, therefore AB and GD cannot meet when produced, that is they are parallel. E Conversely, if AB and CD be parallel, then ^^and CG are not less parallel than FB and GD ; and therefore whatever be the sum of the angles AFG and FGC, such also must be the * Procius, ed. G. Friedleiu, Leipzig, 1873, pp. C62— 368. 314! THE PARALLEL POSTULATE [CH. XIII sum of the angles FGD and BFG. But the sum of the four angles is equal to four right angles, and therefore the sum of the angles BFG and FGD must be equal to two right angles. This proof is not valid. Apart fix)m all considerations about the nature of space, no reason is given why the sums of the angles on either side of the secant should be assumed to be equal. The whole question turns on whether the straight lines would not meet, even thouo:h the sum of the ansfles on one side is a little more than two right angles, and on the other a little less. It is conceivable that parallels might open out as they are prolonged, and thus that a straight line inclined at a small angle to one of them should never overtake the other, but chase it unsuccessfully through infinite space, just as a curve pursues its asymptote and never catohes it. Procluss Proof of the Postulate. Proclus, after criticising Ptolemy's demonstration, gave a proof of his own, but in the course of it he assumed that if two intersecting straight lines be produced far enough the distance between a point on one of them and the other line can be made greater than any assigned finite length, and that if two parallel straight lines be produced indefinitely the perpendicular from a point on one of them to the other remains finite. On these assumptions the postulate can be proved. But just as we cannot assume that two con- verging lines {ex. gr. a curve and its asymptote) will ultimately meet, so we must not assume that the distance between two diverging lines will be ultimately infinite. Wallis's Proof of the Postulate. I will give next a demonstra- tion oftered hy J. Wallis, Sa\*ilian Professor of Geometry, in a lecture deiiveicd at Oxlord on July 11, 1663. The substance of CH. XIIl] THE PARALLEL POSTULATE 315 his argijment may be put thus*. It is desired to prove that if two lines AB, CD meet a transversal HACK, so that the sum of the angles BAC, ACD is less than two right angles, then AB and CD must (if produced) meet. One of the angles BAC, ACD must be acute; suppose it is BAC. He first showed that, in this case, fi*om any point B in AB vi^e can draw a line BE which will cut J.C in ^, so that the sum of the angles BEC, ECD is equal to two right angles; hence the angle BE A is equal to the angle DC A. Then if we take the triangle BAE (drawn on J.^" as base and \v4th B as vertex) and construct a similar triangle on J. C as base, he proved that its vertex must be at a finite distance from AC, must lie on AB produced, and must lie on CD (produced if necessary). Hence AB and CD when produced must meet. The proof is ingenious, but it rests on the assumption that it is possible to construct a triangle on any specified scale similar to a given triangle. This cannot be considered axiomatic and in fact is not true of spherical triangles. The assumption, however, is made explicitly, and it can be used instead of Euclid's pc'stulate if it be thought desirable. Bertrand's Proof of the Postulate. The following is another interesting demonstration. It was originally given by Bertrand HA B K of Geneva "*•. Supp'>5e AX and BY are two lines which meet a third line HABK so that XAB + YBA < tt. It is required to show that AX and BY must cut. For simplicity, I draw the figure so that XAB ^ir '2 and therefore YBA <'ir.2, * J. Wallis, Opera, Oxford, 1693, vol. n, pp. 674—678. t I do not know where ox when it was firs: published. It was given by 9. F. Lacroix in his ElemenU de Gionntrie, Paris, 1802, p. 23. r) 16 THE PARALLEL POSTULATE [CH. XIII but this does not affect the argument. Produce AB indefi- nitely in both directions to H and K. Draw BZ perpen- dicular to AB, and denote the angle YBZ by a. Then the area between BY and BZ is the fraction w/tt of the space round B above UK, that is, oc/tt of the area of the plane above HK. Also the area between AX and BZ is the fraction ABjHK of the plane above HK. Now, however small a may be, w/tt is a definite finite fraction, but AB/HK is indefinitely small. Hence the area between BY and BZ is greater than the area between AX and BZ. But as long as 5 F does not cut AX the area between BY and BZ is less than that between AX and BZ. Hence BY must cut AX. The objection to this demonstration is that it depends upon a comparison of infinite areas. But we have no test by which we can compare such areas, and to consider the order of infinities involves questions outside the region of elementary geometry. There is also a more fundamental difficulty : the argument assumes that space is infinite, but it is possible that it may be boundless and finite, as, for instance, is the surface of a sphere. Play/airs Earlier Proof of the Postulate. I will mention next an attempt to prove this postulate by assuming that two lines which cut cannot be both parallel to another line, that is, that through a point one and only one straight line can be drawn parallel to a given straight line. It has been said that this assumption is not axiomatic, for a reason similar to that given above in my criticism of Ptolem3^'s Proof, but to most readers it seems simpler than Euclid's postulate, and as its meaning is easily grasped, some mathematicians prefer it to Euclid's postulate. Like the latter it is characteristic of the space considered. If this assumption is made, it is easy to show* that a transversal meeting two parallel straight lines makes the alternate angles equal, from which the other conclusions of Euclid follow. * Elements of Geometry, by J. Playfair, Edinburgh, 1st edition, 1813, book i. prop 29. The book is in the same form as Euclid's Elements except for the substitution of this postulate for that given by Euclid. CH. XIIl] THE PARALLEL POSTULATE 317 Personally I agree with those who consider Playfliir's assertion as axiomatic, that is, as being a part of our conception of plane space as derived from experience. This is not in- consistent with admitting that mathematicians can conceive a more general view of space {i.e. non-Euclidean space) and that to them the space of our experience is only, to the highest degree of approximation, Euclidean space*. But many writers do not accept Playfair's assertion as axiomatic. On such an issue no argument is possible. Attempted Direct Demonstrations of the Proposition. The difficulties connected with the subject of parallelism led to various attempts to prove the proposition directly and thence to deduce some property of parallelism equivalent to Euclid's postulate. Substantially this was the method used by Thales and Pascal. I will mention one or two of these attempts. Play fair s Rotational Proof of the Proposition. First I will describe an attempt, given by Playfair f in 1813. His argument is as follows. An angle is measured by the amount of turning H of a vector. Let ABC be any triangle. Suppose we have a rod A L placed along AB with one end dX A. If we rotate it clockwise round ^ as a pivot through the angle BAO it will move from AL to AK. It will make no difference if we now slide the rod along AK ^o that the end moves from A * See A. Cayley, British Association Report, London, 1883, p. 9. t See the notes appended to J. Playfair's Elements of Geometry, p. 432 in the fifth edition. Playfair finds the sum of the exterior angles and thence deduces the sum of the interior angles, but the method is the same as that given above. 318 THE PARALLEL POSTULATE [CH. XIII to G. If we now turn the rod, in the same direction as before, round (7 as a pivot through the angle ACB it will move from CK to GH. It will make no difference if we now slide it back along GB so that the end moves from G to B. If we now turn the rod, again in the same direction, round ^ as a pivot through the angle GBA it will move from BH to BA. We can then again slide the rod along BA so that the end B moves to A, when the rod will lie along AU, Thus the rotation, always in the same direction, successively through the three angles of the triangle produces exactly the same effect as a rotation through two right angles. The demonstration is incorrect. In fact it is assumed that if the angle ABG in the figure above on page 311 is equal to HAK, then BG and AK will be parallel. The fallacy can be seen at once by applying the argument to the case of a spherical triangle or to one whose sides are circular arcs all convex — or all concave — to its median point. Legendres First Proof of the Proposition. Legendre devoted special attention to the problem and offered various demonstra- tions of it. I give three of them. In one, which appears in the earlier editions of his Geometry, he tried to show that the sum of the angles of a triangle could not be greater than two right angles and could not be less than two right angles, and that therefore it must be equal to two right angles. His demonstra- tion assumes that if any number of equal triangles are placed in juxtaposition along a line it is possible to draw a triangle enclosing them all: the same assumption was made by T. P. Thompson. But unless we assume that space is infinite this is not justified : the insufficiency of the argument is clearly brought out by applying it to spherical triangles. Legendres Analytical Proof of the Proposition. I think however that the following is the most ingenious of the proofs given by Legendre*. A triangle ABG is completely deter- mined by one side and two angles, say, a, B, G. Given these, the triangle can be constructed, and therefore the angle A de- termined. Now if the unit of length be changed the measure • Elements de Geometrie, Paris, 12th edition, p. 281. CH. XIIl] THE PARALLEL POSTULATE 319 of a will be changed but the triangle, and therefore A, will not be altered. Hence A cannot depend on the value of a; accordingly it must depend only on B and (7, Now take a right-angled triangle DEF, of which D is the right angle. Draw DG perpendicular to EF. The angle EDG in the triangle EBG is calculated from the other two angles of that triangle, namely E and a right angle, in the same way as the angle F in the triangle DEF is calculated from the other two angles of that triangle, namely E and a right angle. Hence F is equal to EDG. Similarly E is equal to GDF. Therefore the sum of the angles F and E is equal to the sum of EDG and GDF, and therefore is a right angle. Hence the sum of the angles F, E, and D of the triangle DEF is equal to two right angles. Thus the result is proved for a right-angled triangle, and it will follow for any other triangle in the same way as in Thales's proof. J. Leslie criticised this proof on the ground that in the corresponding theorem of Spherical Trigonometry, we know that the expression for the value of the angle A involves ajR, where R is the radius of the sphere, and it is conceivable that in plane geometry there might be a length R' (the reciprocal of the space constant) which entered in a similar way in the problem : hence A might involve a and yet not change with the unit of measurement. To this it was replied that the point of Legendre's argument was that the discussion related only to plane geometry : this might, no doubt, be considered as the special case of spherical geometry in which R was inJ&nite ; if so, any term in the expression for A which involved ajR 320 THE PARALLEL POSTULATE [CH. XIII disappeared, and thus his reasoning was valid ; and to introduce an unknown quantity R' was contrary to all canons of reasoning. Legendre's Latest Proof of the Proposition. At the end of his life, 1833, Legendre showed* that if we could construct one triangle the sum of whose angles was equal to two right angles, then the sum of the angles of every triangle would be equal to two right angles. All attempts to obtain direct proofs that such a triangle existed failed. He showed, however, that if the sum of the angles of a triangle is not equal to two right angles then linear magnitudes can be determined by angular measurements. Assuming that this latter result is impossible, the proposition is proved. The second part of the argument is in effect a translation into geometry of the analytical proof given above. Lagranges Memoir. Legendre's great contemporary, La- grange, believed at one time that he had found a solution of the problem. It rested on establishing plane geometry by a generalization from geometry on a spherical surface. He commenced to read to the Institute a paper on the subject, but had hardly begun when he stopped abruptly, put his memoir in his pocket and saying " Gentlemen, I must think further about this," left the room. We do not know what his argument was, but doubtless some flaw in it flashed on him as he commenced his paper f. Other Parallel Postulates. Euclid's postulate is in accord- ance with experience, and like the axioms and other postulates it rests ultimately on the results of observation, but his statement of the property in question is not easy, and it requires some thought before the point is grasped. For this reason many attempts have been made to put it in other forms which are more likely to be readily granted by an ordinary reader. I enumerate two or three of these. It will be noticed that the demonstration offered by Wallis and the earlier one given by Playfair rest on alternative postulates about parallels. That assumed by Wallis is sufficient, * Memoires de Vlnstitut de France, Paris, 1833, vol. xii, pp. 367 — 410. The paper also contains an account of Legendre's earlier investigations. t A. de Morgan, Budget of Paradoxes^ London, 1872, p. 173. CH. XIll] THE PARALLEL POSTULATE 321 but is not axiomatic, as may be seen by its incorrectness when applied to spherical triangles. It was adopted by Carnot, Laplace, and J. Delboeuf. Playfair's axiom answers the purpose as well as Euclid's : this form was also used by Ludlam. Thales's assumption that a rectangle exists also suffices. This was assumed bv Clairaut. It has been suggested that Euclid's postulate might be re- placed by assuming that, if at a point ^ in a given line AB a line AX he drawn perpendicular to it, and at another point jB in AB s. line BY be drawn, making with it an acute angle, then AX and BY will cut. But essentially this is only Euclid's form expressed diagrammatically. Another alternative form which has been suggested is to the effect that through every point within an angle a line can be drawn intersecting both sides (substantially the view of Lorentz and Legendre). This also is sufficient, but the appli- cation is less easy than that of Euclid's postulate. It has also been proposed that we may reasonably assume that the distance between two parallel lines is always the same (Durer, T. Simpson, R. Simpson), or that a line which is every- where equidistant from a given straight line in the same plane is itself straight (Clavius). Neither of these forms is satisfactory. The conception of distance involves measurement, and this in turn involves a theory of incommensurable magnitudes. Thus before we can rest the theory on such a postulate, other as- sumptions have to be made, and the resulting discussion is neither simple nor clear. Legendre suggested that it was sufficient to assume that the lesser of two homogeneous magnitudes if multiplied by a sufficiently large number would exceed the greater of them. But to make use of this he had to introduce the assumptions and principles of the infinitesimal calculus, and this can hardly be regarded as permissible in elementary geometry. A different kind of postulate was suggested by Dodgson, who proposed* to replace Euclid's postulate by assuming that 2^ times the area of an equilateral four-sided figure inscribed • C. L. Dodgsou, Curiosa Mathematica, London, 1890, p. 35. B. R. 21 322 THE PARALLEL POSTULATE [CH. XIII in a circle is greater than the area of any one of the segments of the circle which lies outside it, where n is any positive integer. Granting that we can inscribe such a figure in a circle, this assumption seems obviously true. But a comparison by the eye of the area of a rectilineal figure with an incom- mensurable area bounded by a curve and a straight line is contrary to all the traditions of classical geometry and to what is usually regarded as permissible in elementary geometry. Definitions of Parallels, Other writers have tried to turn the difficulty by altering the definitions of parallel lines*. One of the best known suggestions made with this object defines parallel lines as lines which have the same direction, by which is meant lines which make the same angle with a line cutting them (Varignon, Bezout, Lacroix). The phrasings of the proposed definition vary slightly. There is no objection to this if the cutting line is fixed, but then it does not avoid the necessity of our having to assume some postulate. If, however, as is usual, the definition is taken to mean that parallel lines make equal angles with every secant, it involves an unwarrantable assumption. In fact it would seem that the term direction cannot be defined without predicating a theory or properties of parallels f. Another suggested definition which has met with some favour is to the effect that parallel lines are lines which neither recede from nor approach each other, that is, lines whose distance apart is always the same (Wolf, Boscovich, Bonnycastle). This definition is really equivalent to the postulates laid down by Diirer and Clavius, and to give a definition which involves a disputed assumption is worse than fi^ankly postulating the assumption. The definition, however, agrees with the popular view, but if we take a straight line, and erect at every point a perpendicular of given length, we have no right to assume that the locus of the extremities of these transverses will be a straight line, and even less right to assume that it is a * See J. Playfair, Elements of Geometry, Edinburgh, 1813; notes to book i, prop. 29. f W. Killing, Grundlagen der Geome'rie^ Paderborn, 1898. CH. XlTl] THE PARALLEL POSTULATE 323 straight line perpendicular to them ; and, unless we assume that the distance between the parallel lines is measured by a transverse pei'pendicular to both of them, we cannot use the definition to much purpose. D'Alembert avoided these diffi- culties by saying that one line is parallel to another if it contains two points on the same side of and equidistant from the other ; but this by itself is of no use, unless we assume Euclid's postulate or some smiilar property of parallels. These definitions, if they are to be useful, involve assump- tions. They slur over the real difficulty, and are less satisfactory than a frank statement of what is assumed. Non-Euclidean Systems*, It had long been well known that the postulate and proposition were not true in the corresponding geometry on a spherical surface — in fact the sum of the angles of a spherical triangle always exceeds two right angles — and since there were such difficulties in establishing the Euclidean postu- late in plane space, mathematicians began, rather more than a century ago, to consider whether that postulate was true either necessarily or in fact. It required courage, even genius, to make such a conjecture, for though on the one hand the postulate could not be proved, there was on the other no reason to doubt its correctness, and no conclusion inconsistent with observation had been deduced from it, while at first sight nothing seemed to justify the assumption that it was not true. Saccheri and Lambert raised this question in the eight- eenth century, but their investigations, though intelligent, were incomplete and attracted little attention. Gauss went further, as appears from his correspondence in 1829 and 1831, but even before then he had shown that the proposition and postulate could be proved to be true if it were admitted that a triangle could be drawn with an area greater than a given area; this, however, he rightly regarded as non-axiomatic. Later he discussed some of the properties of hyperbolic geometry. He did not publish his results, and they did not affect the treat- ment of the problem by other writers. * See R. Bonola, La Geometria Non-Eiiclidea, Bologna, 190G ; and D. M. Y. Somerville, Bibliography of Non-Euclidean Geometry, St Andrews, 1911. 21—2 324 THE PARALLEL POSTULATE [CH. XIll The credit of first showing that the postulate is not neces- sarily true is due to Lobatschewsky and the Bolyais. They boldly assumed that the postulate was not true and that through a point a number of straight lines can be drawn parallel to a given straight line. On this assumption, they deduced a consistent body of propositions, which is termed hyperbolic geometry. These investigations attracted but slight notice. The writers were almost unknown. N. I. Lobatschewsky, 1793 — 1856, was professor at Kasan, and his works were written in Russian. Wolfgang Bolyai, 1776 — 1856, was an eccentric, simple, rough- clad teacher in Transylvania. He now lies buried at his request under an apple tree, commemorating the three apples which, he said, had so profoundly affected the history of the human race — those of Eve and Paris, which had made earth a hell, and that of Newton which had raised earth again into the company of the heavenly bodies. His son John, 1802 — 1860, had excellent mathematical abilities, and worked out the principles of the new geometry, but he spent his life soldiering, and to him mathematics was only a recreation. Probably he valued his reputation as a musician far above his mathematical abili- ties. He was noted for his fiery temper ; in one of his quarrels he accepted the challenge of thirteen officers of a regiment on condition that after each duel he might play to each of them a piece on his violin. He is said to have vanquished them all, and been, in consequence, retired from the army. The subject, however, was "in the air," and attracted the attention of G. F. B. Riemann. Riemann was one of the most brilliant German mathematicians of the nineteenth century and, though short-lived, his writings have profoundly affected the development of the subject. His paper on the hypotheses on which geometry is founded was read in 1854. He showed that a consistent system of geometry of two dimensions can be con- structed in which all straight lines are of a finite length. This science, now known as elliptic geometry, is characterised by the fact that through a point no straight line can be drawn which if produced far enough will not meet every other line. The CH. XIIl] THE PAKALLEL POSTULATE 825 resulting geometry may be compared with the geometry of figures drawn on the surface of a sphere ; in it, space, though boundless, is finite. The discussion of Riemann's paper led to the discovery of the earlier researches of Lobatschewsky and the Bolyais. The subject has since been studied by several mathe- maticians of repute, notably by E. Beltrami and F. C. Klein. Here then we have three geometries — Elliptic, Euclidean (or Parabolic or Homaloidal) and Hyperbolic — each consistent on its own hypotheses, distinguished from one another according 9-s no straight line, or only one straight line, or a pencil of straight lines can be drawn through a point parallel to a given straight line. In the parabolic and hyperbolic systems straight lines are infinitely long : in the elliptic they are finite. In the hyperbolic system there are no similar figures of unequal size ; the area of a triangle can be deduced from the sum of its angles, which is always less than two right angles ; there is a finite maximum to the area of a triangle; and its angles can be made as small as we like by making its sides sufficiently long. In the elliptic system all straight lines, if produced, are of the same finite length; any two lines intersect ; and the sum of the angles of a triangle is always greater than two right angles. In the elliptic system it is possible to get from one point to a point on the other side of a plane without passing through the plane ; thus a watch- dial moving face upwards continuously forward in a plane in a straight line in the direction from the mark vi to the mark XII will finally appear to a stationary observer with its face downwards ; and if originally the mark III was to the right of the observer it will finally be on his left-hand. In spite of these and other peculiarities of hyperbolic and elliptic geometries, it is impossible to prove by observation that one of them is not true of the space in which we live. For in measurements in each of these geometries we must have a unit of distance ; and if we live in a space whose properties are those of either of these geometries, and such that the greatest distances with which we are acquainted {e.g. the distances of the fixed stars) are immensely smaller than any unit natural 326 THE PARALLEL POSTULATE [CH. XIII to the system, then it may be impossible for our observations to detect the discrepancies between these three geometries. It might indeed be possible for us by observations of the paral- laxes of stars to prove that the parabolic system and either the hyperbolic or the elliptic system were false, but never can it be proved by measurements that the Euclidean geometry is true. Similar difficulties might arise in connection with excessively minute quantities. In short, though the results of Euclidean geometry are more exact than present experiments can verify for finite things, such as those with which we have to deal, yet for much larger things or much smaller things, or for parts of space at present inaccessible to us, they may not be true. Even, however, if our space is only approximately Euclidean, the propositions of ordinary geometry are none the less true of Euclidean space, though that may not be the space of our experience. I mention later, in Chapter xix, some other problems connected with different kinds of space. azi CHAPTER XIV. INSOLUBILITY OF THE ALGEBRAIC QUINTIC. Another of the famous problems in the history of mathe- matics, which long proved an ignis fatuus to mathematicians, is the solution of the general algebraic equation of the fifth degree. By a solution of an algebraic equation we mean the expression, by a finite number of radicals and rational functions, of a root of it in terms of its coefficients. The solution of an algebraic quadratic equation presents but little difficulty. In the sixteenth century, solutions of the general cubic and quartic equations were obtained. It did not seem unnatural to suppose that by similar analytic methods the solution of quintic equations, as also those of a higher order, might be effected. This is now known to be impossible, and I propose to give a brief sketch of the reason why it is so. The proof rests on the fact that the equations x^ = \ and oc^—l have no common complex root. Quadratic, cubic and quartic equations can be solved by various methods ; but, in effect, all of them reduce the solution of the particular equation to the solution of one, called a resolvant, of a lower order. These methods fail when applied ■^o equations of an order higher than four. Lagrange was the earliest writer to ask whether this was necessarily the case. In 1770 and 1771 he published a critical examination of the known solutions of quadratic, cubic and quartic equations, and showed that such solutions were possible only because a function of the roots of such equations could be formed which had a smaller number of possible values than the order of the equation, and this function was such that its value could be determined. 328 INSOLUBILITY OF THE ALGEBRAIC QUINTIG [CH. XIV For instance, take the quadratic equation x"^ -{■ acc-\-h = 0. It has two roots Xi and x.2. We can reduce the solution to that of a simple equation because we can form a function of ^1 and X2 which has only one value, and this value can be deter- mined. Such a value is y = (x^ - x^y, since (xi — x.^'^ = (x^ — Xif. Moreover we have y = (xi — x^Y = (x^ + os^Y — 4}X^X2 — a^— 46. Thus y is known. Hence the roots of the quadratic are given by Xl "T X^ ^ Q/y Xi X2 ^^ V2/* Similarly, in the cubic equation x^ + ax^ ^hx + c==0, if y = (^1 + ft>^2 + <w^^3)^ where co is one of the complex cube roots of unity, then y is a function of the roots which has only two values, namely (^1 + (0X2 + co^x^y, which may be also written in the form (X2 + cox^ + (o'^x^y or (x^ + cox^ + co^x^y, and (x2 + coxi + (o^Xsf, which may be also written in the form (^3 + (0X2 + oy^x^y or (xi + (oXs + (o^Xzy. Let y and z denote these two values, that is, y = (xi + (0X2 + (o^XsY, and z = (x2 •{• (oxi + co'^x.^y. Then y-^z=-2ci'-^9ab-27c=A, say, and y2={a^-Sby=B, say. Thus y and z are the roots of t^ — At + B — 0, an equation which can be solved. And the roots of the cubic are determined by X^ "T" X2 ~T~ X^ -— ~" Ctf Xl + (0X2 + w^a^s = \/y, WXi +X2+ CO'X^ = i^/z. Again, in the quartic equation x* + ax^ + bx'^-\-cx-\-d~0, if y = (xi — X2 + X3 — x^y, then 3/ is a function of the roots which has only three values, namely, (xi— X2+ x^ — x^y or (a?2 — ^1+^4 — ^3?, (xi — X3 + x^ — X2y or {xs — Xx-\- X2 — ^4)^ and {x^ — x^-\r X2 — x.^^ or (^4 — Xi-\- Xs — x^f. If these values be denoted by y, z, and w, we have y-^z-\-\i — Sa^ — 86 = ^, say, yz-\- zu-{-uy= 3a* - 16a-6 + 166" + 166c - 64(^ = -B, say, and yzu = (a^ - 4a6 + 86)- = G, say. Hence y, ^r, u are the roots of the equation P — At^ ■\- Bt -^ C = 0. And the roots of the quartic are determined by Xy-^- X2-\- x^-\- x^ = — a, a^i - ^2 + ^3 - ^4 = "^y* Xi-X2 — x-i-\-x^ = V^, Xi-]-X2 — X-^ — Xi= VUc CH. XIV] INSOLUBILITY OF THE ALGEBRAIC QUINTIG 829 Lagrange showed that for an equation of the ??th degree, an analogous function y of the roots could be formed which had only n — 1 values, and which led to a resolvant of the degree n — 1, but that the coefficients of this latter equation could not be obtained without the previous solution of an equation of the degree {n — 2) !. Hence the form assumed for y did not provide a solution of a quintic or of an equation of a higher degree. But though he suspected that the general quintic and higher equations could not be solved algebraically, he foiled to prove it. The subject was next taken up by P. Ruffini, 1798 — 1806, but his analysis lacked precision. The earliest rigorous demonstration that quintic and higher equations cannot be solved in general terms was given by N. H. Abel in 1824, and published in Crelles Journal in 1826. The result was interesting, not only in itself, but as definitely limiting a field of investigation which had attracted many workers. Abel's proof was simplified by E. Galois* in 1831, and is now accessible in various text-books. Essentially the argument is as follows. Let rci, Xr,, x^, ... Xn be the roots of the equation f{x) = x^-\-ax"-^+...+k = 0. Any one of these roots, ajj, is a function (which will generally involve radicals) of the coefficients a, b, .... These coefficients are symmetrical functions of the roots, namely, a = Xx^, h = 'ZxiX2, .... If these values of a, h, ... be substituted in the expression for x^ we get, on simplification, an identity. If we interchange Xi and x.^, or any pair of roots, this will remain an identity. Similarly it will remain an identity, if we permute cyclically an odd number of roots, since such a permutation is equivalent to an interchange of a number of pairs of roots. For instance, if Xi and x.2 are the roots of the quadratic equation a^-{-ax-{-b = 0, we have o^i=h[-a + V{a2 - 46}] = i [(x^ + x^) + V{(^i + ^2)' - ^J^i^^a}] = i [(^1 + ^2) + (^1 - ^2)]. * See Liouville's Journal, Paris, 1846, vol. xi, pp. 417—433. 330 INSOLUBILITY OF THE ALGEBRAIC QUINTIC [CH. XIV This is an identity, and if we interchange x^ and x.^ it will remain an identity. Now suppose that we have a solution of the equation, that is, an expression for oc^ in terms of the coefficients, involving only a finite number of radicals and rational functions. This expression may be a sum of a number of quantities. To fix our ideas let us suppose that in one of these quantities we come first, in the order of operations, to a radical, say, the 2?th root of H, where we may without loss of generality take p as prime. Of course H is rational: it involves a, 6, c, ..., and therefore is a symmetrical function of x^, X2, .... Thepth root of H also will be rational, but it will not be symmetrical : let us denote it by (f){xi, x^, ... Xn). For instance, in the quadratic equation H=a' — 4:h = {xi + x.,)"^ — 4^1^72, which is a rational and symmetrical function of x^ and x^. But i\/H = <j) = Xi — x.2, which is not symmetrical, though it is rational. In the general case (j> is rational but not S}Tnmetrical. It involves the two roots, Xi and X2, and therefore it must change in value if they are interchanged. Further, since the values of (j) are determined by ^^ = H, and H does not vary when the roots are interchanged, one of the values of (f> must be deducible from the other by multiplying it by co, where w is a pih root (other than unity) of unity, that is. For instance, in the quadratic equation x- + ax-hh = 0, we observe that, if in </)(^i, Xo), that is, in iCi — a-o, we interchange a?i and a^g, we necessarily get ^{x.2, x^ — — <\i{x^, x^ since the two values of <^ are roots of (j>^ = H, where H is invariable. Hence if one is + »JH, the other must be + ^/H The relation thus reached, (p \X2, Xif X2, . ..^ = 0)Cp \Xif X2, X^y . . .Jf is an identity; hence if we interchange Xi and Xr,, we have (j>(Xi, X2, Xs, ...) = 0X^(572, a^i, Xs, ...). Hence &)*=!. And as co^l, we have a) = — 1. Since &)- = !, we have p = 2: this shows that in the expression for a root of CH. XIV] INSOLUBILITY OF THE ALGEBRAIC QUINTIC 331 an equation the first radical which occurs in the order of opera- tions must be of the second degree. In the case of a quadratic equation this concludes the dis- cussion, for there are only two roots which can be interchanged. We may note that if it were possible to take the value &> = 1, it would at once give x._, = x^, which, in the general case, is clearly impossible. We proceed to the case of a cubic or higher equation. We will first suppose that in the expression for x^ we substitute the above value of (/>, and combine it and similar square roots with the various rational functions of the coefficients, a, 6, .... As long as we only introduce such square roots we obtain a function of the roots, say K, susceptible of taking only two values, and therefore invariable when three (or any odd number) of the roots are permuted cyclically. This cannot lead to the determination of three or more roots. Hence we must, in this process of reduction and simplification, arrive, in the expression for a^i, at a radical, say the 5th root of /i, of a higher order than a square root. In this expression K will be invariable when three (or any odd number) of the roots are permuted cyclically. We can express the 9th root of -ST as a rational function of the roots "^{xi.x^, ... a?„), and, from the nature of the case, "^ takes different values when three roots are permuted cyclically. The values of y^ are roots of -v/r? = K. Accordingly, following the same argument as that given above, we have Y \X2, X^y Xij ... Xji) = CO 'Y' {^Xif X^f X-^, ... Xn)y where o) is a 5th root (other than unity) of unity. If we permute x^, x.2, x^ cyclically, we have T \'^3 J '^1 > ^) ^ii . . . ) = O) Y' yXo , X^, Xiy X^, • '•)} and -^ (xi, x^, x^, Xt, ...) = a)-v/r(a'3, x^, x^, x^, ...). Hence co^ = 1. We have previously shown that the first radical involved in the general expression for a root must be a square root, and now we see that the next radical must be a cube root. We observe that the solution usually given of a cubic confirms 332 INSOLUBILITY OF THE ALGEBRAIC QUINTIC [CH. XIV our analysis. The solution of the cubic a^ -\-bx + c = is generally written as x={- c/2 + sju]^ + {- c/2 - y/u\^, where u = cV^ 4- h^/27. In each term of the expression for x the first surd which occurs in the order of operations is a square root and the next surd a cube root. In the case of a cubic equation there are only three roots, and we cannot continue the process further. So also we cannot proceed further in the case of a quartic equation, for as we want to permute an odd number of roots cyclically we cannot permute more than three. We proceed to the case of an equation of the fifth or higher degree. We have already shown that in this case if, when we substitute in the expression for x^ the value of (/> and similar square roots, we arrive at a radical ^^K for which the equivalent rational function yjr takes different values when an odd number of the roots are permuted cyclically, it follows that if we per- mute three roots cyclically we get co^ =1, where o) is a root (other than unity) of w^ = 1. Hence q = S. Also if we permute five roots cyclically, we obtain by a similar argument o)" = 1. Thus q = 5. These equations for co and values of q are incon- sistent. In fact the argument shows that the first surd which has to be calculated in the general expression for Xi is a square root, and the next surd is at the same time a complex cube root of unity and a complex fifth root of unity. This is impossible. Hence an equation of the fifth or higher degree cannot be solved by a finite number of radicals and rational functions of the coefficients. It may be added that just as we can express the root of a cubic equation in terms of trigonometrical functions, so we can express the root of a quintic or sextic equation in terms of elliptic or hyperelliptic functions. But such functions lie outside the field of algebra. 333 CHAPTER XV. mersenne's numbers. One of the unsolved riddles of higher arithmetic, to which I alluded in the second chapter, is the discovery of the method by which Mersenne or his contemporaries determined values of p which make a number of the form 2^ — 1 a prime. It is convenient to describe such primes as Mersennes Numbers, a name which I believe I introduced. In this chapter, for shortness, I use N to denote a number of the form 2^ — 1. In a memoir in the Messenger of Mathematics in 1891 I gave a brief sketch of the history of the problem. I here repeat the facts in somewhat more detail, and add some notes on methods used in attacking the problem. Mersenne's enunciation of the results associated with his name is in the preface to his Cogitata*, The passage is as follows : Vbi fuerit operae pretium aduertere xxvm numeros a Petro Bungo pro perfectis exhibitos, capite xxviii, libri de Numeris, non esse omnes Perfectos, quippe 20 sunt imperfect!, adeovt [adeunt?] solos octo perfectos habeat qui sunt 6 regione tabulae Bungi, 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 10, 12, et 29 : quique soli perfecti sunt, vt qui Buugum habuerint, errori medicinam faciant. Porr6 numeri perfecti adeo rari sunt, vt vndecim dumtaxat potueriut hac- tenus inueniri: hoc est, alii tres a Bongianis differentes: neque enim vllus est alius perfectus ab illis octo, nisi superes exponentem numerum 62, progressionis duplae ab 1 incipientis. Nonus enim perfectus est potestas exponentis 68 minus 1. Decimus, potestas exponentis 128, minus 1. Vndecimua denique, potestas 25^, minus 1, hoc est potestas 257, vnitate decurtata, multiplicata per potestatem 256. • Cogitata Physico-MatJiemaiica, Paris, 1644, Praefatio Generalis, article 19. 334 mersenne's numbers [ch. xv Qui vndecim alios repererit, nouerit se analysim omnem, quae fuerit hacte- nus, superasse: memineritque interea nullum esse perfectum a 17000 potestate ad 32000; & nullum potestatum interuallum tantum assignari posse, quin detur illud absque perfectis. Verbi gratia, si fuerit exponens 1050000, nullus erit Humerus progressionis duplae vsque ad 2000000, qui perfectis numeris seruiat, hoc est qui minor vnitate, primus existat. Vnde clarum est quam rari sint perfecti numeri, <fc quam merito viris per- fectis comparentur ; esseque vnam ex maximis totius Matheseos difficultatibus, praescriptam numerorum perfectorum multitudiuum exhibere ; quemadmodum <fc agnoscere num dati numeri 15, aut 20 caracteribus constantes, sint primi necne, cum nequidem saeculum integrum huic examini, quocumque modo hactenus cognito, sufi&ciat. It is evident that, if p is not a prime, then N is composite, and two or more of its factors can be written down by inspection. Hence we may confine ourselves to prime values of p. Mersenne, in effect, asserted that the only values of p, not greater than 257, which make N a prime, are 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 13, 17, 19, 31, 67, 127, 257: to these numbers 89 must be added. I gave reasons, some years ago, for thinking that 67 here is a misprint for 61, and I assume this is so. With these cor- rections we have no reason to doubt the truth of the statement, but it has not been definitely established. There are 56 primes not greater than 257. The deter- mination of the prime or composite character of N for the 9 cases when p is less than 20 presents no difficulty: in only one of them is N composite. For 2 of the remaining 47 cases (namely, when jo=23 and 37) the decomposition of N had been given by Fermat. For 9 of them (namely, when p — 29, 43, 73, 83, 131, 179, 191, 239, 251) the factors of N were given by Euler. He also proved that N was prime when p = 31. Reuschle gave the factors of N when p = 47, and Plana the factors when p — 41. Landry and Le Lasseur discovered the factors in 9 cases, namely, when p — 53, 59, 79, 97, 113, 151, 211, 223, and 233. Seelhoff showed that N was prime when p = 61, Cunningham gave the factors when p = 71, 163, 173, and 197, Cole the factors when p = 67, Woodall the factors when p = 181, and Powers proved that iV was prime when p = 89. It has been asserted that the prime character of N when p = 127 has been established, but the proof has not been published or verified. CH. xv] mersenne's numbers 335 Thus there are 16 values of p for which Mersenne's state- ment still awaits verification. These are 101, 103, 107, 109, 127, 137, 139, 149, 157, 167, 193, 199, 227, 229, 241, 257. For these values N is (according to Mersenne) prime when j[) = 127 and 257, and is composite for the other values. If we admit that the character of N is known when p=12l, the number of cases yet to be verified is reduced to 15. To put the matter in another way. According to Mersenne's statement (corrected by the substitution of 61 for 67 and with the addition of 89 to his list) 43 of the 56 primes less than 258 make N composite and the remaining 13 primes make N prime. In 29 out of the 43 cases in which N is said to be composite we know its factors, and in 14 cases the statement is still unverified. In 11 out of the 13 cases in wdiich it is said that N is prime the statement has been verified, and in 2 cases it is still unverified. From the w^ording of the last clause in the above quotation it has been conjectured that the result had been communicated to Mersenne, and that he published it without being aware of how it was proved. In itself this seems probable. Pie was a good mathematician, but not an exceptional genius. It would be strange if he established a proposition which has baffled Euler, Lagrange, Legendre, Gauss, Jacobi, and other mathe- maticians of the first rank ; but if the proposition is due to Fermat, wdth whom Mersenne was in constant corresjoondence, the case is altered, and not only is the absence of a demon- stration explained, but we cannot be sure that we have attacked the problem on the best lines. The known results as to the prime or composite character of N, and in the latter case its smallest factor, are given in the table on the next page. The cases that remain as yet unverified are marked with an asterisk. Before describing the methods used for attacking the problem it will be convenient to state in more detail when and by whom these results were established. The factors (if any) of such values of N as are less than a million can be verified easily: they have been known for a lonoj time, and I need not allude to them in detail. 336 MERSENNES NUMBERS [CH. XV TABLE OF MERSENNE'S NUMBERS. 1 2 3 5 7 11 13 17 19 23 29 31 37 41 43 47 53 59 61 87 71 73 79 83 89 97 101 103 107 109 113 127 131 137 139 149 151 157 163 167 173 179 181 191 193 197 199 211 223 227 229 233 239 241 251 357 Value of N=2r'-1 Character Discoverer 1 prime 3 prime 7 prime 31 prime 127 prime 2047 = 23x89 composite 8191 prime 131071 prime 524287 prime 8388607 = 47x178481 composite Fermat 536870911 = 233x1103x2089 composite Euler 2147483647 prjiue Euler 137438953471 = 223 x 616318177 composite Fermat 2199023255551 = 13367 x 164511353 composite Plana 8796093022207 = 431 x 9719 x 2099863 composite Euler 2351 X 4513 X 13264529 composite Eeuschle 6361 X 69431 x 20394401 composite Landry 179951 X 3203431780337 composite Landry 2305843009213693951 prime Seelhoff = 0(193707721) composite Cole = (228479) composite Cunningham = 0(439) composite Euler = (2687) composite Le Lasseur = 0(167) composite Euler 618970019G42690137449562111 prime Powers = (11447) composite Le Lasseur 2535301200456458802993406410751 * « 10141204801825835211973625G43007 » » 162259276829213363391578010288127 » • (549037107316853453.366312041152511 * » = (3391) composite Le Lasseur 170141183460469231731087303715884105727 ♦ * = (2G3) composite * » Euler • =o*('i8i2ij ♦ composite * composite * composite » Le Lasseur * =o*(iV6287) Cunningham * s0(73d753) Cunningham = (359) composite Euler = 0(43441) composite \Voodall = 0(383) composite * composite * composite Euler * =0 (7487) Cunningham * =0(15193) Le Lasseur = 0(18287) composite * * composite Le Lasseur » = 0(1399) Le Lasseur = (479) composite ■ti- composite Euler « = (503) Euler ♦ » CH. xv] meksenne's numbers 337 The factors of N when p = ll, 23, and 37 had been indicated by Fermat*, some four years prior to the publication of Mersenne's work, in a letter dated October 18, 1640. The passage is as follows: En la progression double, si d'un nombre quarr6, g^n^ralement parlant, vous 6tez 2 ou 8 ou 32 Ac, les nombres premiers moindres de I'uuite qu'un multiple du quaternaire, qui mesureront le reste, feront I'effet requis. Comme de 25, qui est un quarr6, otez 2; le reste 23 mesurera la 11* puissance ~1; otez 2 de 49, le reste 47 mesurera la 23« puissance - 1. Otez 2 de 225, le reste 223 mesu- rera la 37° puissance - 1, &c. Factors of N when p = 29, 43, and 73 were given by Eulerf in 1732 or 1733. The fact that N is composite for the values p = 83, 131, 179, 191, 239, and 251 follows from a proposition enunciated, at the same time, by Euler to the effect that, if 4/1 + 3 and 8n + 7 are primes, then 2'^''+^ -1 = (mod. Sn + 7). This was proved by Lagrange | in his classical memoir of 1775. The proposition also covers the cases of ^ = 11 and p = 23. This is the only general theorem on the subject which has been yet established. The fact that iV is prime when ^ = 31 w^as proved by Euler§ in 1771. Fermat had asserted, in the letter mentioned above, that the only possible prime factors of 2^ + 1, when p was prime, were of the form 7ip + 1, where n is an integer. This was proved by Euler || in 1748, who added that, since 2^ ± 1 is odd, every factor of it must be odd, and therefore if p is odd n must be even. But if ^ is a given number we can define n much more closely, and Euler showed that, if p = 31, the prime factors (if any) of N w^ere necessarily primes of the form 248?i + 1 or 248n + 63 ; also they must be less than ^JSf, that is, than • Oeuvres de Fermat, Paris, vol. ii, 1894, p. 210; or Opera Blathematica, Toulouse, 1679, p. 164; or Brassiune's Precis, Paris, 1853, p. 144. f Commentarii Academiae Scientiarum Petropolitanae, 1738, vol. vi, p. 105; or Commentationes Arithmeticae Collectae, vol. i, p. 2. X Nouveaux Memoires de VAcademie des Sciences de Berlin, 1775, pp. 323 — 35G. § Histoire de VAcademie des Sciences for 1772, Berlin, 1774, p. 36. See also Legendre, Thiorie des Nombres, third edition, Paris, 1830, vol. i, pp. 222 — 229. II Novi Commentarii Academiae Scientiarum Petropolltanae, vol. i, p. 20; or Commentationes Arithmeticae Collectae, St Petersburg, 1849, vol. i, pp. 55, 56. B. s. 22 338 mersenne's numbers [ch. xv 46339. Hence it is necessary to try only forty divisors to see if N is prime or composite. The factors when p = 4>'7; the factor 1433 when p = l79, and the factor 1913 when p = 239, were given by Reuschle in 1856*. The factors of iV when ^ = 41 were given by Plana f in 1859. He showed that the prime factors (if any) are primes of the form 328n + l or 328w + 247, and lie between 1231 and ^/N, that is, 1048573. Hence it is necessary to try only 513 divisors to see if N is composite: the seventeenth of these divisors gives the required factors. This is the same method of attacking the problem which w^as used by Euler in 1771, but it would be laborious to employ it for values of p greater than 41. Plana J added the forms of the prime divisors of iV, if p is not greater than 101. That N is prime when ^5 = 127 seems to have been verified by Lucas § in 1876 and 1877. The demonstration has not been published. The discovery of factors of N for the values ^ = 53 and 59 is due apparently to F. Landry, who established theorems on the factors (if any) of numbers of certain forms. He seems to have communicated his results to Lucas, who quoted them in the memoir cited below ||. Factors of N when p = 79 and 113 were given first by Le Lasseur, and were quoted by Lucas in the same memoir||. A factor of N when p — 233 was discovered later by Le Lasseur, and was quoted by Lucas in 1882 IF. * C. G. Eeuschle, Neue Zahlentheoretische Tdbellen, Stuttgart, 1856, pp. 21, 22, 42—53. + G. A. A. Plana, Memorie della Eeale Accademia delle Scienze di Torino, Series 2, vol. xx, 1863, p. 130. X Ibid., p. 137. § Su/' la Theorie des Nomhres Premiers, Turin, 1876, p. 11; and Becherches sur les Ouvrages de Leonard de Pise, Rome, 1877, p. 26, quoted by A. J. C. Cunningham, Proceedings of the London mathematical Society, Nov. 14, 1895, vol. XXVII, p. 54. II American Journal of Mathematics, 1878, vol. i, pp. 234 — 238. H Recreations, 1882-8, vol. i, p. 241. CH. xv] mersenne's numbers 339 Factors of N when p = 97, 151, 211, and 223 were deter- mined subsequently by Le Lasseur, and were quoted by Lucas* in 1883. That N is prime when ^ = G1 had been conjectured by Landry and in 1886 a demonstration was offered by Seelhofff. His demonstration is open to criticism, but the fact has been verified by others J, and may be accepted as proved. Cunningham showed in 1895 § that 7487 is a factor of N when p = 197: in 1908 1| that 150287 is a fector of N when p = 163; in 190911 that 228479 is a factor of N when _p=7l; and in 1912** that 730753 is a factor of i\^ when J3=173. The factors of iV when p=:7l were discussed independently by Ramesam in 1912 ff. That iV'is not prime when ^=67 seems to have been verified by Lucas II in 1876 and 1877. The composite nature of N, when p = 67, was confirmed by E. Fauquembergue§§, and was also implied by Lucas in 1891. The fiactors were given by Cole|l|linl903. A factor of N when 2^ = 181 was discovered by Woodall in 1911M. ♦ Recreations, 1882-3, vol. n, p. 230. t P. H. H. Seelhoff, ZeiUcUrift fur Mathematik und Physik, 1886, vol. xxxi, p. 178. X See Weber-Wellstein, Encyclopaedic der Elementar -Mathematik, p. 48; and F. N. Cole, Bulletin of the American Mathematical Society, December, 1903, p. 136. § A. J. C, CunningTiam, Proceedings of the London Mathematical Society^ March 14, 1895, vol. xxvi, p. 261. II Ibid., April 30, 1908, vol. vi (2ad series), p. xxii. % L'Intennediaire des Matheniaticiens, Paris, 1909, vol. xvi, p. 252. ** Proceedings of the London Mathematical Society, April 11, 1912, vol. xi, p. xxiv. tt Nature, London, March 28, 1912, vol. lxxxix, p. 87. XX Sur la Theorie des Nombres Premiers, Turin, 1876, p. 11, quoted bj A. J. C. Cunningham, Proceedings of the London Mathematical Society, Nov. 14, 1895, vol. xxvii, p. 54, and Recherches sur les Ouvrages de Leonard de Pise, Rome, 1877, p. 26. §§ L' Intermediaire des Matheniaticiens, Paris, Sept. 1894, vol. i, p. 148. nil F. N. Cole, "On the Factoring of Large Numbers," Bulletin of the American Mathematical Society, December, 1903, pp. 134 — 137. nil H. J. Woodall, Nature, London, July 20, 1911, vol. lxxxvii, p. 73. 22—2 340 meksenne's numbers [ch. xv That N is prime when ^ = 89 was proved by Powers in 1911* Bickmore in the memoir i* cited below showed that 5737 is another factor of iV if p = 239. Cunningham has also shown that 55871 is another factor of iV if ^ = 151, and that 54217 is another factor of iV^ if ^ = 251. I turn next to consider the methods by which these results can be obtained. It is impossible to believe that the statement made by Mersenne rested on an empirical conjecture, but the puzzle as to how it was discovered is still, after more than 250 years, unsolved. I cannot offer any solution of the riddle. But it may be interesting to indicate some ways which have been used in attacking the problem. The object is to find a prime divisor q (other than iV and 1) of a number N when N is of the form 2P — 1 and p is a prime. I may observe that Lucas J showed that if we find the residue (mod N) of each term of the series 4, 14, 194, ... -m^, constructed according to the law Un+i = tin — 2, then N is prime if the first residue which is zero lies between the (p— l)/2th and the ^th residues. If an earlier residue is zero the theorem does not help us, but if none of the p residues is zero, N is composite. The application of the theorem to high numbers is so laborious that for the cases still unverified we are driven to seek other methods. It can be easily shown that the prime divisor q must be of the form 2pt + 1. Also q must be of one of the forms 8i ± 1 : for N is of the form 2A^ — B\ where A is even and B odd, hence § any factor of it must be of the form 2a^ — h\ that is, of the form 8i ± 1, and 2 must be a quadratic residue of q. The theory of residues is, however, of but little use in finding * K. E. Powers, American Mathematical Monthly, November, 1911, vol. xvni, pp. 195—197. t C. E. Bickmore, Messenger of Mathematics, Cambridge, 1895, vol. xxv, p. 19. :J: American Journal of Mathematics, 1878, vol. i, p. 316. § Legendre, Theorie des Nomhres, third edition, Paris, 1830, vol. i, § 143. In the case of Mersenne's numbers, B = h=l. CH. XV] mersenne's numbers 341 factors of the cases that still await solution, though the possi- bility some day of finding a complete series of solutions by properties of residues must not be neglected*. Our present knowledge of the means of factorizing iV has been summed up in the statement f that a prime factor of the form 2pt-^l can be found directly by rules due to Legendre, Gauss, and Jacobi, when ^= 1, 3, 4, 8, or 12 ; and that a factor of the form 2ptt'-\-l can be found indirectly by a method due to Bickmore when ^ = 1, 3, 4, 8, or 12, and t' is an odd integer greater than 3. But this only indicates how little has yet been done towards finding a general solution of the problem. First. There is the simple but crude method of trying all possible prime divisors q which are of the form 2pt-{-l as well as of one of the forms 8i ±1. The chief known results for the smaller factors may be summarized by saying that a prime of this form, when t is odd, will divide N when ^=1, if p=ll, 23, 83, 131, 179, 191, 239^ or 251 ; when t = 3, if ^ = 37, 73, or 233 ; when t = 5,if p = 43 [ when t = 15, if ;? = 113; when ^ = 17, if p = 79; when ^=19' ifp = 29, or 197; when t=25, if p = 47; when ^ = 41, if p^22S; when t = 59,ifp = 97; when ^ = 163, if jt^ = 41 ; when t = 461, if p = 163 ; when t = 1525, if p = 59 ; when t = 1609, if i? = 71. Similarly for even values of t, a prime of this form will divide N when « = 4, if ^ = 11, 29, 179, or 239; when i = 8, if ^ = 11; when ^=12, if ;) = 239; when ^ = 36, if j9 = 29,' or 211; when ^ = 60, if p = 53, or 151; when t=120, if ^ = 181; when j5 = 2112, if |)=173; and when i= 1445580 if jo = 67. Of the 29 cases in which we know that the statement of the composite character of i\r is correct all save 7 can be easily verified by trial in this way. For, neglecting all values of t not * For methods of finding the residue indices of 2 see Bickmore, Messenger of Mathematics, Cambridge, 1895, vol. xxv, pp. 15-21; see also A. J. C. Cunning- ham on 2 as a 16-ic residue. Proceedings of the London Mathematical Society 1895-6, vol. xxvn, pp. 85-122; and on Haupt-exponents of 2, Quarterly Journal 0/ Pure and Applied Mathematics, Cambridge, 1906, vol. xxxvii, pp. 122—145. t Transactions of the British Association for the Advaticemcnt of Science (Ipswich Meeting), 1895, p. 614. 342 mersenne's numbers [ch. XV exceeding, say, 60 which make q either composite or not of one of the forms 8^ ± 1, we have in each case to try only a com- paratively small number of divisors. Of the 7 other cases m which Mersenne's statement of the composite character of N has been verified, one verification (p = 41) is due to Plana, who frankly confessed that the result was reached " par un heureux hasard"; and a second is due to Landry (^5 = 59), who did not explain how he obtained the factors. The third is due to Cole (p = 67) who established it by the use of quadratic residues of N, three others {p = 71, 163, and 173) are due to Cunningham and one is due to Woodall. The last five verifications involved laborious numerical work, and it is possible that the results would have been obtained as easily by trial of prime divisors of the form 2^^ + 1. Of the 11 cases in which we know that the statement ol the prime character of N is correct all save two (namely, when ^5=61 and p = 89) may be verified by trial in this way, for the number of possible factors is not large. Thus practically we may say that simple empirical trials would at once lead us to all the conclusions known except m the cases of 2^ = 41 due to Plana, of ^9 = 59 due to Landry, of p = 61 due to Seelhoff, of p=67 due to Cole, of ;) = 71, 163, and 173 due to Cunningham, of p = 181 due to Woodall, and of ;> = 89 due to Powers. In fact, save for these nine results the conclusions of all mathematicians to date could be obtained by anyone by a few hours' arithmetical work. As p increases the number of factors to be tried increases so fast that, if p is large, it would be practically impossible to apply the test to obtain large factors. This is an important point, for Colonel Cunningham has stated that in the cases still awaiting verification there are no factors less than 1,000,000. Hence, we may take it as reasonably certain that this cannot have been the method by which the result was originally obtained; nor, as here enunciated, is it likely to give many factors not yet known. Of course it is possible there may be ways by which the number of possible values of t might be further limited, and if we could find them we might thus CH. XV] MERSENNES NUMBERS 343 diminish the number of possible factors to be tried, but it will be observed that the values of iV which still await verification are very large, for instance, when ^ = 257, N contains no less than 78 digits. It is hardly necessary to add that if q is known and is not very large we can determine whether or not it is a factor of N without the labour of performing the division. For instance, if we want to verify that q = 13367 is a factor of N v/hen p = 41, we proceed thus. Take the power of 2 nearest to q or to its square-root. We have, to the modulus g, 2'^ =16384 = 3017 = 7x431, ,-. 2^^ =49 (-1377) = -638, .-. 2=' =-319, .-. 2"+^ = (3017) (-319) = !, .-. 2" =1. Second. We can proceed by reducing the problem to the sdution of an indeterminate equation. It is clear that we can obtain a factor of N if we can express it is the difference of the squares, or more generally of the Tith povers, of two integers ii and v. Further, if we can express a nultiple of N, say mN, in this form, we can find a factor of mJS and (with certain obvious limitations as to the value of ?/i) ihit will lead to a factor of N. It may be also added that if m can be found so that N/m is expressible as a continued fraction of a3ertain form, a certain continuant* defined by the form of the continued fraction is a factor of N. Snce N can always be expressed as the difference of two squajes, this method seems a natural one by which to attack the poblem. If we put iV = n^ + a = (71 + by - (6^ + 2hn - a), we cai make use of the known forms of u and v, and thus * Set J. G. Birch in the Messenger of Mathematics ^ Cambridge, 1902, vol. XXII, pp.52 — 55. 344 mersenne's numbers [ch. xv obtain an indeterminate equation between two variables x and y of the form where H and K are numbers which can be easily calculated. Integral values of x and y where y < K will determine values of u and v, and thus give factors of N. We can also attack the problem by indeterminate equations in another way. For the factors must be of the form 2pt + 1 and 8j9s + 1, hence = 2P-1 = 2(2P-i-l) + l, .'. As^-t + Spst = {2P-^-l)lp = (say) a + 8/;/3. Hence 45 + i = a4-8p^, and st-^ — x, where x'if- ^ and t is odd. These results again lead to an indeterminate equation. But, in both cases, unless p is small, the resulting equatiois are intractable. Third. A not uncommon method of attacking problens such as this, dealing with the factorization of large numbers, is through the theory of quadratic forms*. At best this is a difficult method to use, and we have no reason to think tiat it would have been employed by a mathematician of the seventeenth century I here content myself with alludng to it. Fourth, There is yet another way in which the prollem might be attacked. The problem will be solved if we can find an odd prime q so that to it as modulus ^P^y = Zy and ^ = z, Avhere y and z may have any values we like to choost. If such values of q, y, and z can be found, we have 2^ (2^ — T) = 0. Therefore 2^ = 1, that is, 5' is a divisor of N, \ * For a sketch of this see G. B. Mathev/s, Theory of Numbers, part '., Cam- bridge, 1891, pp. 261—271. See also F. N. Cole's paper, " On the Fact»ring of Large Numbers," Bulletin of the American Mathematical Society, Decembr, 1903, pp. 134 — 137; and Quadratic Partitions by A. J. C. Cunningham, Londai, 1904. CH. xv] mersenne's numbers 345 For example, to the modulus 23, we have 2« =3, Also 2' =32. Therefore 2^*^ - 2^ = 0, .-. 21^-1 =0. Without going further into the matter we may say that the d priori determination of the values of q, y, and z introduces us to an almost untrodden field. It is just possible (though I should suppose unlikely) that the key to the riddle is to be found on methods of finding q, y, z, to satisfy the above con- ditions. For instance, if we could say what was the remainder when 2* was divided by a prime q of the form 2pt + 1, and if the remainders were the same when x = u and (v = v, then to the modulus q we should have 2^ = 2", and therefore 2"~" = 1. It should however be noted that Jacobi's Canon Arithmeticus and the similar canon drawn up by Cunningham would, if carried far enough, enable us to solve the problem by this method. Cunningham's Canon gives the solution of the con- gruence 2^ = R for all prime moduli less than 1000, but it is of no use in determining factors of N larger than 1000. It is however possible that if i? or ^ have certain forms an extended canon of this kind might be constructed, and thus lead to a solution of the problem Fifth. It is noteworthy that the odd values of p specified by Mersenne are primes of one of the four forms 2? + 1 or 2^ + 3, but it is not the case that all primes of these forms make N a prime, for instance, N is composite if ^ = 2^ + 3 = 11 or if p = 2^-3 = 29. This fact has suggested to more than one mathematician the possibility that some test as to the prime or composite character of N when p is of one of these forms may be dis- coverable. Of course this is merely a conjecture. There is however this to say for it, that we know that Fermat* had paid attention to numbers of this form. * For instance, see above, pp. 39, 40. 346 mersenne's numbers [ch. xv Sixth. The number N when expressed in the binary scale consists of 1 repeated p times. This has suggested whether the work connected with the determination of factors of N might not with advantage be expressed in the binary scale. A method based on the use of properties of this scale has been indicated by G. de Longchamps*, but as there given it would be unlikely to lead to the discovery of large divisors. I am, however, inclined to think that greater advantages would be gained by working in a scale whose radix was ^p or may-be 8^ — the resulting numbers being then expressed by a reasonably small number of digits. In fact when expressed in the latter scale in only one out of the cases in which the factors of N are known does the smallest factor contain more than two digits. Seventh. I have reserved to the last the description of the method which seems to me to be the most hopeful. We know by Fermat's Theorem that if x-\-\ is a prime then 2^ — 1 is divisible by ^ + 1. Hence if 2pt + 1 is a prime we have, to the modulus 2pt -I- 1, ^~" 2*^« -1=0, /. (2P - 1) (1 + 2^ + 2^^^ + . . . + 2(2«-i)p) = 0. Hence, a divisor of 2^ — 1 will be kno^wn, if we can find a value of t such that ^pt + 1 is prime and the second factor is prime to it. This method may be used to establish Euler's Theorem of 1732. For if we put ^ = 1, and if 2^ + 1 is a prime, we have, to the modulus 2p + 1, (22>-l)(2^-|-l) = 0. Hence 2^ = 1 if 2^ + 1 is prime to 2p + 1. This is the case if ^ = 4w + 3. Hence 2p + 1 is a factor of iV if ^ = 11, 23, 83, 131, 179, 191, 239, and 251, for in these cases 2p-\-l is prime. The problem of Mersenne's Numbers is a particular case of the determination of the factors of a^—1. This has been * Comptcs Rendns de VAcademie des Scierices, Paris, 1877, vol. lxxxv, pp. 950—952. CH. xv] mersenne's numbers 347 the subject of investigations by many mathematicians : an outline of their conclusions has been given by Bickmore*. I ought also to add a reference to the general method suggested by Lawrence f for the factorization of any high number: it is possible that Fermat used some method analogous to this. Finally, I should add that machines t have been devised for investigating whether a number is prime, but I do not know that any have been constructed suitable for numbers as large as those involved in the numbers in question. * Messenger of Mathematics, Cambridge, 1895-6, vol. xxv, pp. 1 — 44; also 1896-7, vol. XXVI, pp. 1—38 ; see also a note by Mr E. B. Escott in the Messenger , 1903-4, vol. XXXIII, p. 49. + F. W. Lawrence, Messenger of Mathematics , Cambridge, 1894-5, vol. xxiv, pp. 100 — 109 ; Quarterly Journal of Mathematics , Cambridge, 1896, vol. xxviii, pp. 285 — 311; and Transactions of the London Mathematical Society, May 13, 1897, vol. XXVIII, pp. 465 — 475. X F. W. Lawrence, Quarterly Journal of Mathematics, Cambridge, 1896, already quoted, pp. 310 — 311 ; see also C. A. Laisant, Comptes Rendus, Association Franqais pour I' Avanccmerit des Sciences, 1891 (Marseilles), vol. xx, pp. 165 — 168. 348 CHAPTER XVI. STRING FIGURES. An amusement of considerable antiquity consists in tlie production of figures, known as Cat's-Cradles, by twisting or weaving on the hands an endless loop of string, say, from six to seven feet long. The formation of these figures is a fascinating recreation with an interesting history. It cannot, with accuracy, be described as mathematical, but as I de- liberately gave this book a title which might allow me a free hand to write on what I liked, I propose to devote a chapter to an essay on certain string figures*. The subject is ex- tensive. I propose however merely to describe the production of a few of the more common forms, and do not concern myself with their ethnographical aspects. Should, as I hope, some of my readers find the results interesting, they may serve as an introduction to innumerable other forms which, with a little ingenuity, can be constructed on similar lines. First we must note that there are two main types of the string figures known as Cat's-Cradles. In one, termed the European or Asiatic Variety, common in England and parts of Europe and Asia, there are two players one of whom, at each move, takes the string from the other. In this, the more * For my knowledge of the subject I am mainly indebted to Dr A. C. Haddon, of Cambridge ; to String Figures by C. F. Jayne, New York, 1906 ; and to articles by W. I. Pocock and others in Folk-Lore, and the Journal of the Anthropological Society. Since writing this chapter I have come across another book on the subject by K. Haddon, London, 1911 : it contains descriptions of fifty Figures and a dozen String Tricks. CH. XVl] STilING FIGUKES 349 usual forms produced are supposed to suggest the creations of civilized man, such as cradles, trays, dishes, candles, &c. In the other, termed the Oceanic Variety, common among the aborigines of Oceania, Africa, Australasia and America, there is generally (but not always) only one player. In this, the more usual forms are supposed to represent, or be connected with, natural objects, such as the sun and moon, lightning, clouds, animals, &c., and on the whole these are more varied and interesting than those of the European type. There are a large number of known forms of each species, and it is easy to produce additional forms as yet undescribed. We can pass from a figure of the European type to one of the Oceanic type and vice versa, but it is believed that this transformation is an invention of recent date and has no place in the history of the game. To describe the construction of these figures we need an accurate terminology. The following terms, introduced by Rivers and Haddon*, are now commonly used. The part of a string which lies across the palm of the hand is described as palmar, the part lying across the back of the hand as dorsal. The part of a string passed over a thumb, finger or fingers is a loop. A loop is described or distinguished by the projection — such as the thumb, index, middle-finger, ring-finger, or little-finger of either the right or the left hand — over which it passes. The part of the loop on the thumb side of a loop is termed radial, the part on the little-finger side is called idnar; thus each loop is composed of a radial string and an ulnar string. If, as is not uncommon, the figure is held by some one, with his hands held apart, palm facing palm and the fingers pointing upwards, then the radial string of any loop is that nearest him, and the ulnar string is that farthest from him ; in this case we may use the terms far and near instead of ulnar and radial. If there are two or more loops on one finger (or other object), the one nearest the root of the finger is termed proximal, the one nearest the tip or * Torres Straits Siring Figures, by \V. H. E. Rivers and A. C. Haddon, Man, London, 1902, pp. 147, 143. 350 STRING FIGURES [CH. XVI free end of the finger is termed distal. If the position of the hands is unambiguous, it is often as clear to speak of taking up a string from above or below it as to say that we take it from the distal or proximal side. The following descriptions are I believe sufficient to enable anyone to construct the figures, and I do not attempt to make them more precise. They are long, but this is only because of the difficulty of explaining the movements in print, and the figures are produced much more easily than might be inferred from the elaborate descriptions. Unless the contrary is stated all of them are made with a piece of string, some seven feet long, whose ends are tied together. In the descriptions I assume that after every movement the hands are separated so as to draw the strings tight. In the diagrams the string is represented by two parallel lines : this enables us to indicate whether one string appears in front of or behind another. Unless otherwise stated the diagrams show the figures as seen by the operator. I recommend any one desirous of making the Figures and not already acquainted with the subject to commence with the Oceanic Varieties described on pp. 357 to 371, where only one operator is required. Cafs-Cradles, European Varieties. I begin by discussing the form of Cat's-Cradle known in so many English nurseries. It is typical of the European Variety. It is played by two persons, F and Q, each of whom in turn takes the string off the fingers of the other. In the following descriptions, the terms near and far, or radial and ulnar, refer to the player from whom the string is being taken. In most of the forms two or more parallel horizontal strings are stretched between the hands of the player who is holding the string, and the other strings cross one another forminof an even number of crosses. When there are more than two such crosses, two will usually be at the ends of the figure near the hands, and two at the sides nearer the middle of the figure. Parallel strings, if taken up, are usually taken up by hooking each little-finger in one of them. A cross, if taken up. CH. XVIJ STKINQ FIGURES 351 is usually taken by inserting the thumb and index-finger of one hand in opposite angles of the cross, holding the cross with the thumb and finger, and then turning the plane containing the thumb and finger through one or two right angles. When one player takes the strings from the other, it is assumed that he draws his hands apart so as to keep the string stretched. The initial figure is termed the Cradle \ from this we can produce Snuffer-Trays. From Snuffer- Trays we can obtain forms known as a Pound- of- Candles, Cat's-Eye, and Trellis- Bridge. From each of these forms again we can proceed in various ways. I will describe first the figures produced when the string is taken off so as to lead successively from the Cradle to Snuffer-Trays, Cat's-Eye, and Fish-in-a-Dish. This is the normal sequence. The Cradle — see figure i — is formed by six loops, three on each hand : there are two horizontal strings, one near and the other far, and two pairs of strings which cross one another, each cross being over one of the horizontal strings. Figure i. The Cradle. The Cradle is produced thus. First. One of the operators, P, loops the string over the four fingers of each hand, which are held upright, pahn towards pahn, the near or radial string lying between the thumbs and index-fingers, and the far or ulnar string beyond the little fingers. Second. P puts a second loop on the right hand by bending it over outside the radial string and up into the loop. There are now two dorsal strings and one palmar string on the right hand. Third. P puts a similar loop on the left hand by bending it over outside the radial string and up into the space between the hands. Lastly. P with the back of the right middle- finger takes up from the proximal side {i.e. from below) the left palmar string. And then similarly with the back of the left middle- finger takes up from the proximal side that part of the right palmar 352 STRING FIGURES [CH. XVI string which lies across the base of the right middle-finger. The hands are now drawn apart so as to make the strings taut. The figure known as Snuffer -Trays — see figure ii — is formed by six loops, three on each hand. Four of the strings cross diamond-wise in the middle so as to form two side crosses and two end crosses, the other two strings are straight, one beinor near and the other far. All the strings lie in a horizontal plane. This figure is also known as Soldier's Bed, the Church Window, and the Fish-Pond. Figure ii. Sauffer -Trays. Snuffer-Trays can be got from the Cradle thus. I suppose that the Cradle is held by one operator, P, and that the other operator, Q, faces P. First. Q inserts the thumb and index-finger of his left hand from his far side in those angles of the cross of the Cradle farthest from him which lie towards P's hands. Similarly Q inserts the thumb and index-finger of his right hand from his near side in those angles of the cross nearest to him which lie towards P's hands, both thumbs being towards P's right hand, and his index-fingers towards P's left hand. Second. Q takes hold of each cross by the tips of the thumb and finger, then pulls each cross outwards {i.e. away from the centre of the figure) over and beyond the corresponding horizontal string, then down, and then round the corresponding horizontal strings. Third. Q turns the thumbs and fingers upwards through a right angle, thus passing the cross up between the two horizontal strings. By this motion the thumb and index-finger of each hand (still holding the crossed strings) are brought against the horizontal strings. Lastly. Q, having pushed his fingers up, releases the crosses by separating his index-fingers from his thumbs, and drawing his hands apart removes the string from P's hands. The diagram represents the figure as seen by P. Gafs-Eye — see figure iii — also is formed by six loops, three on each hand. There are two near (or radial) thumb strings, two far (or ulnar) index strings, while the radial thumb and ulnar index strings form a diamond-shaped lozenge in the middle of the figure, giving rise to two side crosses and two end crosses. All the strings lie in a horizontal plane. STRING FIGUKES 353 Figure iii. Cafs-Eye. Cafs-Eye can be got from Scuffer-Trays thus. I suppose tbat Snuffer- Trays is held by Q. First. P inserts the thumb and index-finger of each hand from below into those angles of the two side crosses of Snuffer-Trays which lie towards Q's hands, both thumbs being towards Q's left hand. Second. P takes hold of each cross with the thumbs and fingers and pulls it downwards, then he separates his hands thus bringing each cross below its corresponding horizontal string, and continuing the motion he passes the cross outside, round, and then above the horizontal string. Third. P turns each thumb and finger inwards {i.e. towards the centre of the figure) between the two horizontal strings through two right angles taking the horizontal strings with them. Lastly. P pushes his fingers down, separates the index-fingers from the thumbs, and then, drawing his hands apart, removes the figure from Q'a hands. The figure now is in a horizontal plane ; but for clearness I have drawn it as seen by Q, when P lifts his hands up. Fish-in-a-Dish — see figure iv — is composed of a central lozenge (the dish) on which rest lengthwise two strings (the fish). There are two loops on each hand. Figure iv. Fish-in- a-Bish. B. B. 23 354 STRING FIGURES [CH. XVI Fish-in-a-Dish is produced from Cat's-Eye thus. I suppose that Cat's-Eye is held by P in the norraal position, his fingers pointing down, and the figure lying in a horizontal plane. First. Q puts the thumb and index-finger of each hand from above into those angles of the two side crosses which lie towards P's hands, both thumbs being towards P's right hand. Second. Q turns each hand inwards (i.e. towards the centre of the figure) through two right angles, and as he does so, catches the sides of the central diamond on the thumb and index-fingers. At the end of the motion the thumbs and fingers will be pointing upwards. Lastly. Q draws his hands apart and thus takes the figure off P's hands. The diagram represents the figure as seen by Q. The same result is produced if Q inserts his thumbs and index-fingers from below into the two side crosses, and turns his hands inwards through two right angles. There are a few other standard forms which may be mentioned. In the first place instead of proceeding directly from Snuffer- Trays to Cat's-Eye, we can obtain the latter figure through three intermediate forms known as a Pound- of-Gandles, the Hammock, and Lattice-Work. The figure last named is the same as Snuffer-Trays, though it is held some- what differently, and from it we can obtain Cat's-Eye by similar movements to those described above when forming it from Snuffer-Trays, though it will be held somewhat differently. A Pound-of -Candles is formed by six parallel strings held in a horizontal plane. It is, in fact, only an extension sideways of the figure obtained in the course of the formation of the Cradle before the palmar strings are taken up ; and, if desired, it can be obtained in that way. A Pound-of- Candles is produced from Snuffer- Trays (assumed to be held by Q) thus. First. P inserts the thumb and index-finger of each hand from above into those angles of the two side crosses which lie towards Q's hands. Second. P takes hold of each cross, Hfts it, and takes it above, and then round the corresponding horizontal string. Third. P turns each hand up- wards between the horizontal string through two right angles ; this brings each horizontal string on to the thumbs and index-finger of the hand corresponding to it. Lastly, P separates his thumbs and index-fingers, and drawing his hands apart he takes the figure off Q's hands. This corresponds exactly with the process above described by which Cat's-Eye is obtained from Snuffer-Trays, except that the side crosses are taken from above instead of from below. The Hammock is an inverted Cradle and can be obtained directly from it without any intermediate forms. The Hammock is also known as Bahys-Cot and the Manger. The Hammock can be obtained from a Pound-of-Candles (assumed to be held by P) thus. First. Q, holding his right-hand palm upwards, hooks with his CH. XVl] STRING FIGURES 355 right little-finger the ulnar thumb string from above, and then pulls it up and over the three index strings. Second. Q passes his left hand, held palm up- wards, from above through the loop on the right little-finger, and with the little- finger of the left hand he hooks the radial index string, and pulls it up and over the pair of thumb strings. Third. Q places the thumb and index-finger of the right hand from the far side of P below the pair of far index strings, and similarly he places the thumb and index of the left hand from the near side of P below the pair of near thumb strings. Fourth. Q turns his hands inwards and upwards through two right angles ; by this motion the thumbs and indices will take up these two pairs of strings. Lastly. Q separates his index-fingers from his thumbs, and drawing his hands apart removes the figure from P's hands. Lattice- Work. The form known as Lattice- Work is the same as Snuffer- Trays, except that it is held with the fingers pointing downwards. Lattice-Work can be produced from the Hammock (assumed to be held ^y Q) ^7 the same process as that described above for the production of Snuffer-Trays from the Cradle, namely by P inserting the thumb and index- finger of each hand from the outside in the crosses ; then pulling each cross outwards, then up and over the corresponding horizontal string ; and finally turning each hand downwards through a right angle. Also, since it is the same as Snuffer-Trays, though held differently, it can be produced from Snuffer-Trays by P putting his thumbs and fingers pointing downwards in the place of those of Q which are pointing upwards. Other standard forms are Trellis-Bridge, Double-Crowns, Suspension-Bridge, Tridents, and See-Saw. For the formation of these I give only a brief outline of the necessary steps. Trellis-Bridge can be produced from Snuffer-Trays by the second player booking his little-fingers from above in the two parallel strings, one in one string and one in the other, pulling the loops so formed over and down to opposite sides, and taking up the side crosses from above and turning the hands inwards through two right angles. Double-Crowns can be got from Cat's-Eye by the second player putting the thumb and index-finger of each hand through the far and near angles of the end crosses, either from above or below, and making the usual turning movement inwards through two right angles. Suspension-Bridge can be got from Fish-in-a-Dish by the second player hooking his httle-fingers in the two parallel strings that form the dish, one in one string and one in the other, pulling the loops so formed up, then taking up the side crosses from above, and turning the hands inwards towards the centre of the figure throagh two right angles. Suspension-Bridge can be also obtained from Double-Crowns. Tridents is produced from Suspension-Briuge by the second player releasing the left-hand thumb and index-tiuger, and then drawing his hands ai art. 23—2 356 STRING FIGURES [CH. XVI See-Saw is an arrangement of the string which each pla5'er in turn draws out. It is said that in such figures children draw the string backwards and forwards to the chant of a doggerel line See Saio Johnnie Maw, See San Johnnie Man (Jayne, p. xiii). One form of it can be obtained from the Cradle, which I will suppose is held by P, thus. Q takes one of the straight strings with the index-finger of one hand and the other straight string with the index-finger of the other hand ; P then slips his hands out of the loops romid them but retains the middle -fingers in the loops on them. If now P separates his hands the loops held by Q diminish, and vice versa. Another variety is obtained by P taking the ulnar base string from below in his mouth and then withdrawing his hands from the loops while retaining his middle-fingers in their respective loops : in this way we obtain a sawing figure of three loops. The forms above described may be arranged in sequence in tabular form, as shown below. It will be noticed that parallel strings when taken up may be pulled up or down, and they may be crossed or not. So too in the horizontal figures there are often a pair of side crosses and a pair of end crosses, and either pair may be taken from above or from below, and in many cases may be crossed or not as is desired. Frequently also one player Q can insert two fingers in a pair of crosses and if P leaves go Q may, by drawing his hands apart, produce a new figure. By combining these motions we can obtain various forms, and can secure sequences SnuSer-Trays Cat's-Cradle 1 See-Saw Cat's-Eye Fish-in-a- Dish (Numerous Forms) 1 Donble- Crowns Pound-of- Candles Manger Cat's-Eye 1 Trellis-Bridge of them. The movements and forms described above will how- ever illustrate the process sufiSciently. CH. XVl] STRING FIGURES 357 Cat*s-Cradles, Oceanic Varieties. I will next enumerate a few forms of the Oceanic Variety. One or two specimens of this type are known in England, but they may be recent importa- tions, perhaps by sailors, and not indigenous. There are so many examples of this kind, that it is difficult to select specimens, but those I have chosen will serve to illustrate the methods. In many cases the figures can be formed in more ways than one. I again emphasize the fact that the figures are produced much more easily than might be inferred from the lengthy descriptions given. This is so partly because I have tried to mention every detail of the process, and partly because I con- stantly describe similar movements with the two hands as if they were made consecutively, whereas in practice to produce the figures effectively the movements should be simultaneous. I may add further that frequently two or more of the move- ments mentioned can be combined in one, and when practicable this is desirable. Also usually the more rapidly the movements are made the better is the presentation. By rotating the wrists, considerable play is given to the figure, and the move- ments are facilitated. Where two loops are on one finger, it is generally advisable to place one on the tip and the other on the base of the finger so as to keep them distinct. Once a figure has been constructed or the rule given for making it understood, the brief description of the method (which in many cases I insert after the exposition of the rule) will suffice for the reproduction of the figure. Openings A and B. The greater number of Oceanic figures begin with the same initial steps known as Opening A or Opening B. These steps I proceed to describe. Opening A. In Opening A, the operator commences by placing the string on the left hand as follows. The hands are held with the fingers pointing up- wards, and palm facing palm. The tips of the left thumb and little-finger are put together, and a loop of the string put over them. On opening the hand it will be found that the string from the far (or ulnar) side passes round the back of the little-finger, then between the ring and little-finger, then across the palm, then between the index and thumb, and then round the back of the thumb to the near (or radial) side of the hand. The string is then taken up similarly by the right hand. The hands are now drawn apart. This is called the " first position." 358 STRING FIGURES [CH. XVI Next with the back of tho index of the right hand take up from the proximal side {i.e. from below) the left palmar string, and return : in these descriptions the word return is used to mean a return to the position occupied at the beginning of the movement by the finger or fingers concerned. Then, similarly, with the back of the index of the left hand take up from the proximal side that part of the right palmar string which lies across the base of the right index, and return. The figure now consists of six loops on the thumb, index, and little-finger of each hand. The resulting figure, in a horizontal plane, is shown in the diagram, looking down at it from above. Opening A. Opening B. Opening B is obtained as above, save that, in the second part of the Opening, the right palmar string is taken up by the left index before the left palmar string is taken up by the right index. In most of the figures described below it is immaterial whether we begin with Opening A or Opening B. Movement T. There is also another movement which is made in the construction of many of the figures and which may be described once for all. This movement is when we have on a finger two loops, one proximal and the other distal, and the proximal loop is puUed up over the distal loop, then over the tip of the finger, and then dropped on the palmar side. I term this the Movement T. A Door. The first example I will give is a Door — see figure V — which comes from the Apache Red Indians. It affords a good introduction to the Oceanic Varieties, for it is one of the easiest figures to construct, as the movements are simple and involve no skill in manipulation. The rubbing the hands together in the final movement has nothing to do with the formation of the figure, though it adds to its effective presentation. The diagram represents the final figure held in a horizontal plane. CH. XVl] STflING FIGURES 359 Figure v. A Door. The Door is produced thus (Jayne, pp. 12 — 15). First. Take up the string in the form of Opening A. Second. With the right thumb and index lift the left index loop off that finger, put it over the left hand, and drop it on the left wrist. Make a similar movement with the other hand. Third. "With the dorsal tip of the right thumb take up the near right little-finger string, and return. Make a similar movement with the other hand. Fourth. With the dorsal tip of the right little-finger take up the far right thumb string, and return. Make a similar movement with the other hand. Fifth. Keeping all the loops in position on both hands, with the left hand grasp tightly all the strings where they cross in the centre of the figure, and pass this bunch of strings from left to right between the right thumb and index {i.e. from the palmar side to the back of the hand), and let them lie on the back of the hand between the thumb and finger. Next with the left thumb and index take hold of the two loops already on the right thumb, and draw them over the tip of the right thumb. Then, continuing to hold these two loops, let the bunch of strings still lying between the right index and thumb slip over the right thumb to the palmar side, and after this replace these loops on the right thumb. Make a similar set of movements with the other hand. Sixth. With the right thumb and index lift the left wrist loop from the back of the left wrist up over the tips of the left thumb and fingers, and let it fall on the palmar side. Make a similar movement with the other hand. Finally. Eub the palms of the hands together, separate the hands, and the Door will appear. More briefly thus. Opening A. Index strings over wrists. Each thumb over one and takes up one. Each little-finger takes up one. Thumb loops over groups of strings. Wrist loops over hands. Extend. Climbing a Tree. I select this as another easy example starting from Opening A. The tree — see figure vi — consists of two straight strings, which slope slightly towards one another: if the figure here delineated is turned through a right angle, 360 STRING FIGURES [CH. XVl the straight lines representing the tree will be upright, and this is the way in which the figure is normally produced. Up this tree, some loops, which represent a boy, are made to ascend. The production is very simple, but it is interesting because the design, and nothing more, was obtained from the Blacks of Queensland, and this is a conjectural restoration, by Pocock, of the way it was produced. Figure vi. Boy Climbing a Tree. The Boy Climbing a Tree may be produced thus. First. Take up tihe string in the form of Opening A. Second. Pass the little-fingers over four strings (namely, all the strings except the near or radial thumh string), then with the backs of the little-fingers take up the near thumb string, and return. Third. Make movement T on the little-finger loops. Fourth. Bend the right index over that part of the right palmar string which lies along the base of the finger, and press the tip of the finger on the palm. Make a similar movement with the left index. Fifth. Holding the strings loosely, release the thumbs and pull the index loops over the knuckles so that they hang on the cross strings. Finally. Put the far (or ulnar) little-finger string under one foot or on any fixed object. Then release the little-fingers, and pull steadily with the index- fingers on the strings they hold. This will cause the loop round the two straight strings to rise. The two strings starting from the foot represent the tree, and the loops, which ascend on them, as the fingers pull, represent the boy climbing up the tree. If in the fourth movement we put the middle-fingers instead of the index-fingers through the index loops, we shall slightly modify the result. More briefly thus. Opening A. Each little-finger over 4, and take up one. T to little-finger loops. Each index on palm. Release thumbs. Index loops over knuckles. Far little-finger string under foot. Release little-fingers, and pull. Throwing the Spear is a New Guinea figure. It is peculiar in that the design can be transferred or thrown from one hand to the other as often as is desired. The construction is very simple. Throioing the Spear was obtained by Haddon. It is made thus (Jayne, pp. 131 — 132). First. Take up the string in the form of Opening A. Second. CH. XVl] STKING FIGURES 361 Take the loop off the left index, put it on the right index, and pass it down the finger over the right index loop to the base of the finger. Third. Take off from the right index the original right index loop, release it, and extend the hands. This is the spear, the handle being held by the left hand. More briefly thus. Opening A. Left index loop off finger, and then over right index loop to base of right index. Release original right index loop, and pull. To throw the spear from one hand to the other, proceed thus. Put the left index between the left ulnar thumb string and the left radial little- finger string, then push it up from below into the right index loop. Then opening the right hand, drawing it sharply to the right, and at the same time taking the right index out of its loop, the spear is transferred to the other hand. The process can be indefinitely repeated with one hand or the other. Diamonds. Numerous lattice-work forms have been col- lected in which diamonds or lozenge-shaped figures are strung in a row, or in two or more rows, between two parallel strings. I describe a few of these. Triple Diamonds. This is an interesting figure — see fig^ure vii — and lends itself to a catch described hereafter. It comes from the Natik natives in the Caroline Islands, but possibly is of negro origin. It is not symmetrical. Figure vii. Triple Diamonds. The formation of Triple Diamonds is described by Mrs Jayne (pp. 142—146), and may be effected as follows. First. Take up the string in the form of Opening A. Second. Take the right hand out of all the loops, and let the string hang straight down from the left hand, which is held upright with the fingers pointing upwards. Third. Put the tips of the right thumb and little- finger together, and insert them from the right side into the left index loop. 362 STRING FIGURES [CH. XVI Next, separate the ri.elit thumb and little-finger, take the loop off the left index, and draw the hands apart. Fourth. Put the right index-finger under the left palmar string, and draw the loop out on the back of the finger. Fifth. Bend the right thumb over one string (viz. the near or radial right index string), take up from below on the back of the thumb the far or ulnar right index string, and return. Sixth. Bend the left thumb away from you over one string (viz. the far or ulnar thumb string) and take up from below on its back the near or radial little-finger string, and return. Seventh. With the back of the tip of the right index-finger pick up from below the near right index string, and return. Eighth. With the back of the tip of the left index pick up from below the far left thumb string (not the string passing across the palm), and return. These strings on the index-fingers should be kept well up at the tips by pressing the middle-fingers against them, and the radial left thumb string should now cross between the left thumb and index ; if it be not in this position it should be shifted there. Ninth. Make movement T on the thumb loops of each hand. Lastly. Release the loops from the little-fingers, and extend the figure between the thumbs and the tips of the index-fingers : it is usual but not necessary, at the same time, to rotate the hands to face outwards. More briefly thus. Opening A. Right hand out. Right little-finger and thumb through index loop. Right index takes up palmar string. Each thumb over one and takes up one. Right index picks up near right index string and left index picks up far left thumb string. T to thumb loops. Release little- fingers and extend. Quadruple Diamonds. This design — see figure viii — was given me by a friend who was taught it when a boy in Lancashire. It is the same as one described by Mrs Jayne (pp. 24 — 27), which was derived by her from the Osage Red Indians. Figure viii. Quadruple Diamonds, Quadruple Diamonds can be produced thus. First. Take up the string in the form of Opening A. Second. Release the thumbs. Third. Pass the right thumb away from you under all the strings, and take up from below with the back of the thumb the far right litfcle-finger string, and return. Make a similar movement with the other hand. Fourth. Pass each thumb away from CH. XVl] STRING FIGURES 863 you over the near index string, and take up from below with the back of the thumb the corresponding far index string, and return. Fifth. Release the little-fingers. Sixth. Pass each little-finger towards you over one string (viz. the near index string) and take up from below on the back of the little-finger the corresponding far thumb string, and return. Seventh. Release the thumbs. Eighth. Pass each thiimb away from you over the two index strings and take up from below, with the back of the thumb, the corresponding far little-finger string, and return. Ninth. With the right thumb and index pick up the left near index string, close to the left index and above the left palmar string, and put it over the tip of the left thumb. Next make movement T on the left thumb loops. Make a similar movement with the other hand. Finally. Insert each index into the snia,ll triangle near it whose sides are formed by the corresponding palmar string and its immediate continuation. Then, rotate the right hand counter-clockwise and the left hand clockwise. In making this movement the little-finger loops and the proximal index loops will fall off, and for the production of the figure it is essential they should do so. At the end of the movement the palms of the hands should be facing outwards and away from you, the thumbs lowest and pointing away from you, and the index-fingers pointing upwards. On separating the hands the Diarnonds will appear. It is a matter of indifference whether the top string is taken on the middle-fingers or on the index-fingers. If the fourth step be taken before the third we get a form of Double Diamonds. More briefly thus. Opening A. Let go thumbs. Each thumb under 3 and takes up one. Each thumb over one and picks up one. Release little-fingers. Each Httle-finger over one and picks up one. Release thumbs. Each thumb over 2 and picks up one. Near index strings on tips of thumbs. T to loops on thumbs. Index-fingers in triangle. Release little-fingers, and extend. Multiple Diamonds. In the figures above described the diamonds are in a row. I give an instance — see figure ix — de- rived from the Natik natives, where the diamonds are in three rows. The reader will be easily able to introduce modifications in the process of the formation of Multiple Diamonds which will lead to other figures which he can thus invent for himself. Figure ix. Mxtltiple Diamovda. Multiple Diamonds may be formed thus (Jayne, pp. 1.50—156). First. Take up the string in the form of Opening A. Srcond. With the teeth draw the far little-finger string towards you over all the strings. Then, bending the left 864 STRING FIGURES [CH. XVI index over the left string of the loop held by the teeth, pick up from below on the back of the index the right string of the loop, and return. Next betid the right index over to the left, and pick up from below on its back the left string of the loop, and return. Release the loop held by the teeth. Third. Release the thumbs. Fourth. Put each thumb away from you, under both index loops, and pick up on its back the near little-finger string, and return. Fifth. Pass each thumb up over the lower near index string, and put its tip from below into the upper index loop. Sixth. Make movement T on the thumb loops. Seventh. Withdraw each index from the loop which passes around both thumb and index. Eighth. Transfer the thumb loops to the index-fingers by putting each index from below into the thumb loop, and withdrawing the thumb. Ninth. Repeat the fourth movement, namely, put each thumb away from you under both index loops, and pick up on its back the near little-finger string, and return. Tenth. Repeat the fifth movement, namely, pass each thumb up over the lower near index string, and put its tip from below into the upper index loop. Eleventh. Make movement T on the thumb loops. Twelfth. Bend each middle-finger over the upper far index string, and take up from below on the back of the finger the lower near index string {i.e. the one passing from index to index), and return. Lastly. Keeping the middle and index-fingers close together, release the loops from the little-fingers, and extend the figure keeping the palms turned away from you. Many Stars. A somewhat similar figure — see figure x — is made by the Navaho Mexican Indians, and by the Oregon Indians. The Oregon method is much the more artistic, since the movements are carried on by both hands simultaneously Figure x. Many Stars. and symmetrically, and the one hand is not used to arrange the strings on the other hand. But I give the Navaho method partly because it is easier to perform and partly because, by slightly varying the movements, it gives other interesting figures. CH. XVl] STRING FIGURES *S(io Many Stars. The formation of this figure has been described by Haildon {American Anthropologist, vol. v, 1903, p. 222) and Mrs Jayne (pp. 48 — 53). It is produced thus. First. Take up the string in the form of Openiiig A. Second. Pass each thumb away from you over three strings (viz. the far thumb and both index strings) and pick up from below on its back the near little- finger string, and return. Ttiird. Bend each middle-finger down towards you over two strings (viz. both the index strings) and take up from below on its back the far thumb string, and return. Fourth. Release the thumbs. Fifth. Pass each thumb away from you over one string (viz. the near index string), under the remaining five strings, and pick up on its back the far little-finger string, and return. Sixth. Release the little-fingers. Seventh. Take the far string of the right middle-finger loop, pass it under the near string of that loop, and then, taking it over the other strings, put it over the tips of the right thumb and index, so as to be the distal loop on them. Release the right middle- finger. Make a similar movement with the other hand. Eighth. Make movement T on the loops on the thumbs and index-fingers. There is now on each hand a string passing from the thumb to the index, and on each of these strings are two loops, one nearer you than the other. Ninth. Bend each thumb away from you over the upper string of these nearer loops. Lastly. Rotate the hands so that the palms face away from you, the fingers point up, and the thumbs are stretched as far from the hands as possible. More briefly thus. Opening A. Each thumb over 3 and picks up one. Each middle-finger over 2 and picks up one. Release thumbs. Each thumb over one, under 5, and picks up one. Release little-fingers. Take up near string of each middle-finger loop, turn it over, and transfer it to tips of corresponding thumb and index-finger. T to loops on thumbs and index-fingers. Place thumbs on upper strings of near loops. Rotate, and extend. Owls. Certain figures, called Owls, can be produced like Many Stars save for the interpolation or the alteration of one movement. Their resemblance to Owls is slight, but they Figure xi. An Owl, 366 STRING FIGURES [CH. XVI ma}^ be talsen without much straining to represent Bats. One instance — see figure xi — will suffice. The example of an Owl which I select is produced thus (Jayne, pp. 54 — 55). Immediately after taking up the string in the form of Opening A, give a twist to the index loops by bending each index down between the far index string and the near little-finger string and, keeping the loop on it, bringing it towards you np between the near index string and the far thumb string. Continue with the second and subsequent movements described in Many Stars. In another example (Jayne, pp. 55 — 56) all the movements are the same as in Many Stars save that in the fifth movement the far little-finger string is drawn from above, instead of from below, through the thumb loops. Single Stars. Other figures, which we may call Single Stars or Diamonds, can be produced like Many Stars save for the alteration or omission of one movement. One instance — see figure xii — will suffice. Figure xii. North Star. The example of the Single Stars which I select is termed the North Star^ and is produced thus (Jayne, p. 65). Replace the second, third, and fourth movements in Many Stars by the following. Bend each middle-finger towards you over the index loop, and take up from below on the back of the finger the far thumb string. Release the thumbs, and return the middle-fingers. The effect of this is to transfer the thumb loops to the middle-fingers. This is followed by the fifth and subsequent movements described in Many Stars. This figure may at our option be regarded as a single or double diamond. W. W. Another elegant design, forming two interlaced W's, can be produced somewhat similarly. This figure is made in the same way as North Star, except that after transferring the thumb loops to the middle -fingers, a twist is given to each middle-finger loop by bending each middle-finger down on the far side of the far middle-finger string and (keeping the loop on it) bringing it towards you up between the near middle-finger string and the far index string. CH. XVl] STIUNG FlGUliES 307 The reader who has followed me in my descriptions of the movements for producing Many Stars will find it easy to make other modifications which lead to other figures. The Setting Sun is derived from the Torres Straits natives. This figure, if well done, is effective, but the process is some- what long. The method and result illustrate another type of string figure. The Setting Sun is produced thus (Rivers and Hadlon, p. 150; Jayne, pp. 21—24). First. Take up the string in the form of Opening A. Second. Pass the little-fingers over four strings (viz. the radial or near little-fiuger string, the index loops, and the ulnar or far thumb string), insert them into the thumb- loops from above, take up with the backs of the little-fingers the near thumb string, and return. TJdrd. Release the thumbs. Fourth. Pass the thumbs under the index loops, take up from below the two near strings of the little- finger loops and return, passing under the index loops. Fifth. Release the little-fingers. Sixth. Pass the little-fingers over the index loops, and take up from below the two far strings of the thumb loops and return. This arrange- ment is known as the Lem Opening. I continue, from the Lem Opening, the movements for the production of the Setting Sun. Seventh. Transfer the loop on the left index to the right index ; and then transfer the loop originally on the right index to the left index, by taking it over the original left index loop. Eighth. Pass the right middle-finger from the distal side {i.e. from above) through the right index loop and take up from the proximal side {i.e. from below) the two far thumb strings. Return the middle-finger through the index loops. Make similar movements with the other hand. Ninth. Release the thumbs and index- fingers. Tenth. Pass the thumbs from below into the middle-finger loops, and then transfer the middle-finger loops to the thumbs. Extend the figure with the thumbs towards the body. There will now be in the middle of the figure a triangle whose apex is towards your body, whose base is formed by the two far little-finger strings, and whose sides are formed by the mid-parts of the two near thumb strings. On either side of this triangle is a small four-sided figure. Eleventh. Insert the index-fingers from above into these quadrilaterals, and with the backs of the index-fingers take up the strings forming the sides of the triangle, and return. Twelfth. Put eacli middle-finger from above through the index loop, and take up from below the two far thumb strings, and return through the index loop. Thirteenth. Release the thumbs and index-fingers, put the index-fingers into the middle-fingor loops to make thum wider ; and with the thumbs manipulate the figure so as to make an approxi- mate semicircle (the sun on the horizon) with four diverging loops (the rays). Finally. Release the loops on the index and middle-fingers, separate the hands, and the semicircle will slowly disappear representing the setting of the sun. 368 STRING FIGURES [CH. XVI The Head Hunters is another and more difficult example, in which the Lem Opening is used. It too is derived from the Torres Straits, and is interesting because it is a graphical illustration of a story. The Head Hunters are produced thus (Rivers and Haddon, p. 150; Jayne, pp^ 16 — 20). First. Make the Lem Opening, which involves six movements. Continue thus. Seventh. Insert the index-fingers from below into the central triangle and take up on their backs the near thumb strings. Eighth. Loop the lowest or proximal index string of each hand over the two upper or distal strings and over the tip of the index on to its palmar aspect. Ninth. Release the thumbs. Tenth. Take the index loops oft the right hand, twist them tightly three or four times, and let the twist drop. Similarly form a twist out of the loops on the left index. This is the figure. If now the little- finger loops are drawn slowly apart, the two index loops will approach each other and become entangled. One represents a Murray man, and the other a Dauar man. They " fight, fight, fight," and, if worked skilfully, one loop, the victor, eventually remains, while a kink in the string represents all that is left of the other loop. The victorious loop can now be drawn to one hand along the two strings, sweeping the kink in front of it: it represents the victor carrying off the head of his opponent. Sometimes, if the two index loops are twisted exactly alike, they both break up, representing a duel fatal to both parties. In the hands of the Murray man who showed the figure to Dr Haddon, the result of the fight always led to the defeat of the Dauar warrior. It is not easy to make the figure so as to secure a good fight. For the benefit of any who wish to predict the result I may add that if, in the first position, there be a knot in the right palmar string the left loop will be usually victorious over the right loop, and vice versa. The Parrot Gage. As another instance I give the Parrot Cage. This is a string figure made by Negroes on the Gold Coast in West Africa. The construction and design are not interesting in themselves, but the method used is somewhat different to those employed in the foregoing examples, and for this reason I insert it. The Parrot Cage is made thus (Yoruba Figures by J. Parkinson, Journal of the Anthropological Institute, London, 1906, vol. xxxvi, p. 136). First. Take up the string in the form of Opening A. Second. Transfer the little-finger loops of each hand to the ring-fingers of that hand, the index loops to the middle- fingers, and the thumb loops to the index-fingers. By an obvious modification of Opening A, the string can be taken up initially in this form. Third. Lace the dorsal loops thus. Turn the back of the right hand upwards, pull the dorsal string of the ring-finger loop a little way out, and through it pass the dorsal string of the middle-finger loop. Similarly pass the dorsal string of the index loop CH. XVl] STRING FIQUKES 3G9 through the middle-finger loop, and then put the index loop on the thumb. Pull all the strinps taut. Kepeat the same movements with the other hand. Fourth. Lace the palmar loops thus. Holding the right hand with the fingers pointing upwards, take up with the dorsal tip of the right thumb the nearest string wliich passes from hand to hand, pass the string already on the thumb over the string so taken up and then over the tip of the thumb on to the far and palmar side of the thumb. Eepeat the same process successively with the far index string, with the near middle-finger string, with the far proximal middle- finger string, with the remaining far middle-finger string, and with the far ring-finger string. Repeat all these movements with the left hand. Finally. Transfer the thumb loops to the little-fingers, and extend the figure. This is the cage. See-Saiv. I described above a couple of See-Saw figures made from the European Opening. Such figures can be also produced from Opening A. A See-Saw arrangement can be made by two players, P and Q, thus (Haddon quoted by Jayne, p. xiii). First. The string is taken up by P, with his hands pointing upwards and palm facing palm, in the form of Opening A. Second. Q hooks his right index from above in the straight thumb string and pulls it away from P. Third. Q, passing his hand from P over the other strings, hooks his left index in the stniight little-finger string, and pulls it towards P. Finally. F releases all but the index loops. The sawing movement can then be made. Ligldning. I proceed next to give two examples of figures which do not start from Opening A : both are easy to produce. The first instance I select, known as Lightning — see figure xiii — is derived from the North American Red Indians. The final movement should be performed sharply, so that the zig-zag lightning may flash out suddenly. Figure xiii. Zig-zag Lightning. Lightning is produced thus (Jayne, pp. 216—219). Fir»t. Hold the string in one place between the tips of the thumb and index-finger of the right hand and in another place between the tips of the thumb and index-finger of the left hand, so that a piece passes between the hands and the rest hangs down in a loop. With the piece between the hands make a ring, hanging down, by putting the right-hand string away from you over the left-hand string. Next, insert B. R. 24 370 STRING FIGURES [CH. XVI tlie index-fingers towards you in the ring and put the thumbs away from you into the long hanging loop. Separate the hands, and turn the index-fingers upward and outward with the palms of the hands facing away from you. Then, turn the hands so that the palms are almost facing you, and the thumbs and the palms come toward you and point upward. You now have a long crossed loop on each thumb and a single cross in the centre of the figure. This is the Navaho Opening. I continue from the Navaho Opening the movements for the production of Lightning. Second. Pass each thumb away from you over the radial or near index string and take up from below with the back of the thumb the far index string, and return the thumb to its former position. Third. Pass each middle- finger toward you over the near index string, and take up from below on the back of the finger the far thumb string and return the middle-finger to its original position. Fourth. Bend each ring-finger toward you over the far middle-finger string, take up from below with the back of the finger the near index string, and return the ring-finger to its position. Fifth, Pass each little-finger over the far ring-finger string, take up from below on the back of the finger the far middle-finger string, and return the little- finger to its position. You now have two twisted strings passing between the two little-fingers, two strings laced round the other fingers, and two loose strings (which may represent thunder clouds) passing over the thumbs. Sixth. Holding the hands with the fingers pointing upwards, put the tips of the thumbs from below (or if it is easier, from above) into the small spaces between the little-fingers and the twisted strings on them. Finally. With the thumbs raise (or depress, as the case may be) the near ring-finger string, and separate the hands so as to make the little-finger strings taut, turn the hands outwards so that the palms are away from you, and at the same time throw or jerk the thumb loops off the thumbs so that they hang away from you over the tightly drawn strings between the little-fingers. These movements will cause the strings between the little-fingers to untwist, making the lightning spring into view. The diagram represents the figure when the thumb in the sixth movement is inserted from below in the loop. More briefly thus. Form Navaho Ring. Each thumb over 2 and takes up one. Each middle-finger over one and takes up one. Each ring-finger over one and takes up one. Each little-finger over one and takes up one. Each thumb released, placed under (or over) the near little-finger string, and pressed up (or down) while hands are rotated. A Butterfly. As yet another of figures of this kind I will give the formation of that known as a Butterfly — see figure xiv. It is also derived from the North American Red Indians. The Butterfly is produced as follows (Jayne, pp. 219 — 221). Begin with the Navaho Opening, that is, make the first movements as when forming Lightning. Second. Twist each index loop by rotating each index down toward you and up again. In all make (say) three or four such twists on each index loop. Third. Put the right thumb from below into the right index loop, and, without removing CH. XVl] STRING FIGURES 371 the index, eephrate the thumb from the index. Make movement T on the thumb loops. Repeat tlie movement with the other hand. Fourth. Bring the hands close together with the index and thumb of the one hand pointing toward the index and thumb of the other hand; then hang the right index loop /3 on the tip of the left index, and the right thumb loop 5 on the tip of the left thumb. Thus Figure xiv. A Butterfly. on the left index there are two loops, a and /3 ; on the left thumb there are two loops, 7 and 5 ; and the right hand is free. Fifth. Put the tips of the right index and thumb against the left thumb knuckle. Take up with the right index from the proximal side the loop 5 and take up with the right thumb from the distal side the loop y. With the right thumb and index grasp the loops a and /S where they lie on the top of the left index. Remove the left hand. Then, holding the right hand up, from the left, put the left index into the loop /3, and the left thumb into the loop a. Finally. Placing the hands with the thumbs up and the fingers pointing away from you, draw the hands slowly apart, and when the strings have partially rolled up in the middle of the figure pull down with the middle, the ring, and the little-fingers of each hand the far index string and the near thumb string. The butterfly will now appear ; its wings being held up by the strings extended between the widely separated thumbs and index-fingers, and its proboscis appearing on the strings held down by the other fingers. More briefly thus. Form Navaho Ring. Twist index loops. Thumbs into index loops and T to thumb loops. Take up figure afresh with thumbs and index-fingers, and pull. There are numerous other figures which can be formed from an endless loop of string. For examples I refer the reader to Mrs Jayne's fascinating volume. String Tricks. Of string tricks there are two classes. One comprises tricks in which the hand of one player is unexpectedly caught by the other player pulling one string or certain strmgs in the figure, whereas it is left free if other strings are pulled. 2i— 2 372 STRING FIGURES [CH. XVI The other comprises tricks where the string is released from or is made to take some position which prima facie is impossible. Aborigines are usually very proud of their ability to perform such feats, and Mrs Jayne acutely remarks that it is " delightful to witness their pleasure when they are successful, and their gratification at the observer s astonishment, which it will amply pay him to make very evident." The Lizard Twist. I give a couple of examples of Catch- Tricks. The first I select is one brought by Rivers and Haddon from the Torres Straits. If a loop of string hangs from (say) the left hand and if the right hand is twisted once round one of the strings of the loop, the right hand or wrist will be caught when the string is pulled by the left hand. If the right hand is twisted first round one string of the loop and then round the other string, it will in general be caught more firmly. The Lizard movement is a way of taking the twist on the second string so as to undo the effect of the first twist. There is no difficulty in taking up the string so that the hand is caught. To take up the string so that the hand is not caught, proceed thus (Rivers and Haddon, Man, 1902, p. 152 ; Jayne, pp. 337—339). First. Hold the string by the left hand, held rather high, the string hanging down on the right and left sides in a loop. Second. Put the right hand away from you through the loop. Turn the right hand round the right pendant string clockwise ; this will be done by pointing the fingers to the right, then towards you, and then upwards. Third. Keeping the fingers pointing upwards, move the right hand to the left between your body and the pendant strings, then clockwise beyond the left pendant string, then away from you, then to the right, and finally towards you through the loop. Lastly. Draw the hand down and to the right, and it will come free from the noose round the wrist. The Caroline Catch. The other example of a Catch-Trick which I propose to describe is derived from natives in the Caroline Isles. First, form the figure described above (p. 361) as Triple Diamonds. Next a second person puts his hand through the middle-lozenge shaped space in this figure. Then his wrist will be caught in a loop if the strings be dropped from the right hand and the left-hand strings pulled to the left. On the other hand his wrist will not be caught if the strings be dropped from the left hand, and the right-hand strings pulled to the right. CH. XVl] STRING FIGURES 373 Of the second class of string tricks there are numerous examples familiar to English schoolboys — presumably well- known over large parts of the world, and I conjecture of considerable antiquity. In many old journals and books written for boys these are described, but such descriptions are often vague. Recently W. I. Pocock and Mrs Jayne have described some of them in accurate language. I give as typical examples : Threading the Needle ; the Yam Thief, otherwise known as the Mouse Trick ; the Halter ; the Fly on the Nose ; the Hand- Cuff ; and the Elusive Loop. Of these the first, second, and fifth, are well-known. I owe my knowledge of the others to Mrs Javne's book*. Threading the Needle. This is a familiar trick. The effect is that a small loop (representing the eye of the needle) held by the left thumb and index is threaded by a string held by the right hand throughout the motion. The trick is best worked with a single piece of string, but a doubled string will answer the purpose. Threading the Needle is performed thus (Jayne, pp. 354 — 355). First. Take hold of a piece of string, ABC, some three or four feet long, at a point B about 8 inches from one end A. Hold this piece AB in the left palm and hold the left hand so that the thumb points to the right. Second. Holding the other end, C, of the string with the right hand, wind the rest of the string BC, beginning with the B end, round the left thumb, above the thuml) when moving towards the body and under the thumb when moving away from the body. Leave about 6 inches at the end C unwound. Third. Out of this 6 inches, make a small loop by carrying the end of C held by the right hand to the far side of the rest of the loop. With the tips of the left thumb and index-finger hold this loop where the strings cross so that it stands erect. Fourth. Pick up with the right thumb and index-finger the end A of the piece of string AB whicli is in the left palm and open the left palm. Make this piece of string AB taut, and carry the end of it A to the right close under iiud between the left thumb and index. If this is properly done the piece AB will pass near B between the far and near portions of the cross of the loops, and then will be caught by the left thumb and index : thus between the thumb and index there are now three pieces of string. Fifth. Make passes with the end A as if you * The second is described by Rivers and Haddon in ^^lm, London, October, 1902, pp. 141, 153. All, except the Hand-Cnfif, are described in C. F. Jayne's Strinp Figures, New York, 1906, chapter viii. See, also, W. I. Pocock, Folk- Lore, London, 1906, pp. 349—373. 374 STRING FIGURES [CH. XVI were trying to thread it through the erect loop held by the left hand. Lastly. Pass the right hand sharply to the left over and beyond the left hand. This will carry the piece AB beyond the two strings of the loop. Hence the loop which is still held up by the left thumb and index appears to have been threaded by the right-hand string, but in reality the part of the string which hangs from the right hand is drawn between the left thumb and index up into the loop. The Yam Thief or Mouse Trick. This is also a familiar trick, and is interesting as having stories connected with its performance. The Yam Thief or Mouse Trick is effected thus (Jayne, pp. 340 — 343). First. Hold the left hand with the palm facing you, the thumb upright, and the fingers pointing to the right. With the right hand, loop the string over the left thumb, cross the strings, and let one string hang down over the palm and the other over the back of the left hand. Second. Pass the right index from below under {i.e. on the proximal side of) the pendant palmar string and then between the left thumb and index, and with the palmar tip of the right index loop up a piece of the string hanging on the back of the left hand. Pull this loop back between the left thumb and index and on the upper (or distal) side of the left palmar string. Then with the right index give the loop one twist clockwise, and put it over the left index. Pull the two pendant strings in order to hold tight the loops on the thumb and index. Third. In the same way pass the right index from below under the pendant palmar string and then between the left index and middle-fingers, and with the palmar tip of the right index loop up a piece of the pendant dorsal string. Pull it back between the left index and the middle-fingers and on the upper side of the left palmar string. With the right index give the loop one twist clock- wise, and put it over the left middle-finger. Fourth. In the same way pick up a loop of the pendant dorsal string, and put it on the left ring-finger. Fifth. In the same way pick up a loop of the pendant dorsal string, and put it on the left little-finger. Sixth. Take oft the left thumb loop, or slip it to the tip of the thumb and hold it between the left thumb and index. The pendant dorsal string on the left hand can be pulled to show that the loops are still on the fingers. Finally. Pull the left pendant palmar string and all the string will come away. In one version of the story the thumb loop represents the owner of a yam or cabbage patch. He is supposed to be asleep. The loops successively taken up from the dorsal string represent the yams or cabbages dug up by a thief from the patch, and secured by him in bundles on the fingers. The loop coming off the thumb represents the owner waking, and going out to see what is the matter. He walks down the dorsal side, sees the yams, pulls at the dorsal string, is satisfied that his yams are still on the ground, and returns to catch the thief. Meanwhile the thief walks down the palmar side of the hand, and as the owner returns from the dorsal side, the left palmar string is pulled and the thief disappears with the stolen yams. Cheating the Halter. This is a trick of the Philippinoes. CH. XVl] STRING FIGURES 375 A halter is put round the neck, but by a movement, which in effect reverses the turn on the neck, the string, when pulled, comes off. The Halter Trick is performed thus (Jayne, pp. 339—340). First. Put your head through a loop of string, and let the rest of the loop hang down in front of you. Second. Pass the right string round the neck from the left side, draw the loop tight, and let it hang down in front of you. Third. Put the hanging loop on the hands, and form Opening A. Fourth. Pass the index loops over the head, and remove the hands and fingers from the other loops ; a loop now hangs down in front of you. Lastly. If this loop, or either string of it, be pulled all the strings will come off the neck. We can vary the presentation by twisting the left string round the neck from the right side. In this case we must use Opening B. The Fly on the Xose. In this trick the string seems to come away although looped on to the nose. The Fly on the Nose is performed thus (Jayne, pp. 348 — 349). First. Hold the string at some point with the thumb and index-finger of one hand ; and take hold of the string at a place, some 9 or 10 inches off, with the thumb and index of the other hand. Second. Make a small ring hanging down by passing the right hand to the left and on the near side of the string held by the left hand. There is now a long loop and a small ring, both hanging down, the right string of the ring being the left string of the loop. Third. Hold the place where the strings cross between the teeth, the string originally held by the right hand being on the lower side. Hold the strings or one string of the long loop with the left hand. Fourth. Place the right index from the far side through the ring, taking the ring string up to the root of the fingers. Close the right fist, and carry the fist (holding the ring) round in a circle, first back to the far side, then to the right, and 80 on round the right string of the loop, to its original position. Fifth. Open the index, keeping the rest of the fist shut, and put the tip of the index on the tip of the nose. Finalbj. Let go with the mouth and pull the left string of the loop. The whole string will then come away. Of course the same result can be obtained if the ring is made by passing the right hand to the left on the far side of the string held by the left hand, so that when the cross is held in the mouth the string originally held by the right hand is uppermost. But in this case the ring should be taken by the left index, which is carried round the left string of the loop. The Hand-Cuff Trick. This is a very ancient string trick. Two players, P and Q, are connected thus. One end of a piece of string is tied round P's right wrist, the other is tied round his left wrist. Another piece of string is passed through the space bounded by the string tied to P's wrist, his body, and his 376 STRING FIGURES [CH. XVI arms. The ends of this piece are then tied one on Q's right wrist, and the other on Q's left wrist. The players desire to free themselves from the entanglement. The Hand-Cuff Trick. Either player can free himself thus. First. P takes up a small loop L near the middle of the string tied to his wrists, and pulling the loop to one of Q's wrists on the palmar side of it, pa-.^ses it, from the elbow to the finger side, between Q's wrist and the loop on that wrist. Next, P draws this loop L sufficiently far through until he is able to pass it, first over Q's hand, and then under the wrist loop on the outer side of Q's wrist, passing this time from the finger to the elbow side of Q. When in this position P can pull his own string clear of Q on the outer side of Q's arm. The Elusive Loop. This is a trick in which a loop is offered to some one, and then unexpectedly disappears. Almost any of the forms in which the string is so arranged that if pulled it runs off the fingers — and there are many examples of this kind, ex. gr. the Yam Thief — lends itself to this presentation. I give an instance derived from the Torres Straits where the loop is supposed to represent a Yam. The offer of the Elusive Yam is performed thus (Jayne, pp. 352 — 354). First. Take up the string in the first position. Second. Pass each index away from you over the little-finger string and to the far side of it, draw the string towards you in the bend of the index, and then turn the index up towards you in its usual position, thus twisting the string round the tip of the finger. Third. Pass each thumb away from you under the far index string, pick up from below on the back of the thumb the near index string which crosses the palm obliquely, and return the thumb under the near thumb string to its original position. Fourth. Pass each little-finger towards you over the far index string, and pick up from below on the back of the little -finger the near string which passes directly from hand to hand, and return the little-finger. Fifth. Pass each thumb away from you, and pick up from below the near string of the figure, and return the thumb. Lastly. Release the loop from the left index, and hold it erect between the left index and thumb. This loop represents a Yam. One boy, who is supposed to be hungry, says Have you any food for me ? Thereupon another boy, who has made the figure, offers the loop or Yam to the first boy saying, Take it if you can. On this the first boy grabs at the Yam, while the second boy pulls the right-hand strings. If the former is quick enough he gets the Yam, but if not, it disappears, and all the strings with it. The same trick can be repeated with the right hand. More briefly thus. First position. Index-fingers, take up twist on far string. Thumbs, under one, pick up palmar near index string, and return imder two. Little fingers, pick up near string. Thumbs, pick up near string. Release loop from left index. CH. XVl] STRING FIGURES 377 There also are some string tricks which must be fjimiliar to most of my readers. I give as well-known examples the Button-Hole Trick and the Loop Trick. These require no skill and present no difficulty. It is with some hesitation that I describe them, but age gives them a certain claim. I have no idea when or by whom they were invented. The devices used are so obvious that the tricks will hardly bear repetition. The Button-Hole Trick. In this a loop of string is passed through a button-hole or ring, and on each side of the hole a finger or thumb is put into the loop on that side. The object is to free the loop from that hole. It may be done in several ways which however do not differ in principle. I give two methods. The Button-Hole Trick may be done thus. First. Pass a loop of string through a button-hole or key-ring. Second. Hold the thumbs npripht, and insert them from below in the two loops one on each side of the button-hole. Move the hands a little out from the body and towards each other. Third. Hook the right little-finger into the right-hand string of the left thumb loop, and pull it across to the right hand. Fourth. Pass the left hand above the right little- finger loop, hook the left little-finger into the left hand string of the right thumb loop and pull it across to the left hand. Fifth. Drop the right thumb loop and put the right thumb into the right little-finger loop. Finally. Withdraw both little-fingers, and separate the hands ; the string will then come off the button- hole. In fact the effect of the movements described is to get both thumbs in one loop. This trick may be also performed by two people, P and Q, by the following movements, the description of which I take from Pocoek's paper in Folk- Lore, 1906, p. 355. First. Pass a loop of the string through a ring. Second. P, holding his thumbs upright, inserts them from below in the two loops, one ou each side of the x*ing. The string nearest him will be the radial, that farthest from him the ulnar string Third. Q, who is facing P, puts his left index from below into the loop on P's right thumb. Q then takes up on the back of his left index-finger the ulnar string at some point, say H, of it between the ring and P's right thumb. At the same time Q, with the inside of his left little-finger, hojks the same string at some point between // and P'a right thumb and draws it towards himself. Thus there is now one loop on the back of Q's left index-finger and another on the inside of his left little- finger. Fourth. Q places the tip of his left index-finger on the tip of P's right thumb and transfers the loop on that finger to P's thumb. At the same time Q draws the little-finger loop well away towards P's left side. Fifth. Q pusbes his left index from above into the loop near P's left thumb but on the other side of the ring, and with the back of the finger he picks up the radial string. Sixth. Q transfers this index loop to P's right thumb, by touching the tips ns 378 STRING FIGURES [CH. XVI before. Seventh. Q grasps the ring with his right hand, and at the same time drops the little-finger loop. Finally. P separates his hands and the ring comes away from the string. The Loop Trick is merely an illustration of how easily an unobservant person can be deceived. It requires two persons, P and Q, and is performed thus. The Loop Trick. A string is looped on the index-fingers held upright of a player P : thus there are two parallel strings, a near and a far one. The loop is taken up by another player, Q, thus. First. Q presses his left index on both strings about half-way between P's hands and holds them firmly down. Second. P moves his right index over the strings until the tip meets the tip of his left index, and if he likes shifts the right index loop from the right finger to the base of the left finger. Lastly. Q slips his left index off the distal string, and at the same time pulls the left index, which now rests on only one string, and of course the loop comes away. This is the common presentation of the trick, but W. I. Pocock remarks that it is somewhat less easy to detect the method used if the strings be struck sharply down with the right hand at the instant when the left index is pulled. The Waistcoat Puzzle. There is one other trick of this type which was, I believe, published for the first time in this book in 1888. It is applicable to a man wearing a coat and waist- coat of the usual pattern. The problem is to take off the waistcoat, which may be unbuttoned, without pulling it over the head and without taking off the coat. Those of my readers who are conversant with the history of white magic will recollect that Pinetti, the celebrated conjurer of the eighteenth century, in his performance at Versailles before the French court in 1782, relieved some of the courtiers of their shirts without disturbing the rest of their attire. It was his most striking trick, and not a very seemly one. In fact he threw a shawl over the person operated on, and then pulled the back of the shirt over his head ; an obvious method which I have barred in the waistcoat trick. The victim and the spectators were uncritical, and Pinetti's technical skill was sufficient to conceal the modus operandi from them. The Waistcoat Puzzle can be done thus. First. Take the left corner (or lappel) of the coat and push it through the left armhole of the waistcoat, from outside to inside. Second. Put the left hand and arm through the same CH. XVl] STKING FIGURES 379 armhole. The effect of this is to leave the left arm hole of the waistcoat at the back of the neck. TJiird. Take the right lappel of the coat and put it through the left armhole of the waistcoat. Fourth. Put the right hand and arm through the same armhole. Finally. Pass the waistcoat down the right sleeve of the coat. I should have liked to add another section to this chapter on knots and lashings. Some references to the mathematics of the subject will be found in papers by Listing, Tait, Boddicker *, but its presentation in a popular form is far from easy, and this chapter has already run to dimensions which forbid any ex- tension of it. * J. B. Listing, Vorstudien zur Topologie, Die Studien, Gottingen, 1847, Part X ; 0. Boddicker, Erweiteruvg dcr Gauss'schen Theorie der Venchlinqungen, Stuttgart, 1876 ; and P. G. Tait, Collected Scientific Papers, Cambridge, vol. i, 1898, pp. 273 — 347. The more common forms of knots and lashings and their special uses are described in most, naval, engineering, and scouting manuals. 380 CHAPTER XVII. ASTROLOGY. Astrologers professed to be able to foretell the future, and within certain limits to control it. I propose to give in this chapter a concise account of the rules they used for this purpose*. I have not attempted to discuss the astrology of periods earlier than the middle ages, for the technical laws of the ancient astrology are not known with accuracy. At the same time there is no doubt that, as far back as we have any definite historical information, the art was practised in the East ; that thence it was transplanted to Egypt, Greece, and Rome ; and that the medieval astrology was founded on it. It is probable that the rules did not differ materially from those described in this chapterf , and it may be added that the more intelligent thinkers of the old world recognized that the art had no valid pretences to accuracy. I may note also that the history of the development of the art ceases with the general acceptance of the Copernican theory, after which the practice of astrology rapidly became a mere cloak for imposture. * I have relied mainly on the Manual of Astrology by Eaphael — whose real name was R. C. Smith — London, 1828, to which the references to Eaph6,el hereafter given apply ; and on Cardan's writings, especially his commentary on Ptolemy's work and his Geniturarum Exempla. I am indebted also for various references and gossip to Whewell's History of the Inductive Sciences ; to various works by Raphael, published in London between 1825 and 1832 ; and to a pamphlet by M. Uhlemann, entitled Grundziige der Astronomie und Astro- logie, Leipzig, 1857. t On the influences attributed to the planets, see The Dialogue of Bardesan on Fate, translated by W. Cureton in the Spicilegium Syriacum, London, 1855. CH. XVIl] ASTROLOGY 381 All the rules of the medieval astrology — to which I confine myself — are based on the Ptolemaic astronomy, and originate in the Tetr-abiblos* which is said, it may be falsely, to have been written by Ptolemy himself. The art was developed by numerous subsequent writers, especially by Albohazenf, and Firmicus. The last of these collected the works of most of his predecessors in a volume J, which remained a standard authority until the close of the sixteenth century. I may begin by reminding the reader that though there was a fairly general agreement as to the methods of procedure and interpretation — which alone I attempt to describe — yet there was no such thing as a fixed code of rules or a standard text-book. It is therefore difficult to reduce the rules to any precise and definite form, and almost impossible, within the limits of a chapter, to give detailed references. At the same time the practice of the elements of the art was tolerably well established and uniform, and I feel no doubt that my account, so far as it goes, is substantially correct. There were two distinct problems with which astrologers concerned themselves. One was the determination in general outline of the life and fortunes of an enquirer : this was known as natal astrology, and was effected by the erection of a scheme of nativity. The other was the means of answering any specific question about the individual : this was known as horary astrology. Both depended on the casting or erecting of a horoscope. The person for whom it was erected was known as the native. A horoscope was cast according to the following rules §. The space between two concentric and similarly situated squares was divided into twelve spaces, as shown in the annexed dia- gram. These twelve spaces were known technically as houses ; they were numbered consecutively 1, 2, ..., 12 (see figure); and * There is an English translation by J. Wilson, London [n.d.] ; and a French translation is given in Raima's edition of Ptolemy's works, t De Judiciis Astrorum, ed. Liechtenstein, Basle, 1571. X Astronomicorum, eight books, Venice, 1499. § Raphael, pp. 91— 1U9. 382 ASTROLOGY [CH. XVII were described as the first house, the second house, and so on. The dividing lines were termed cusps: the line between the houses 12 and 1 was called the cusp of the first house, the line between the houses 1 and 2 was called the cusp of the second house, and so on, finally the line between the houses 11 and 12 was called the cusp of the twelfth house. Each house had also a name of its own — thus the first house was called the ascendant house, the eighth house was called the house of death, and so on — but as these names are immaterial for my purpose I shall not define them. " Next, the positions which the various astrological signs and planets had occupied at some definite time and place (for instance, the time and place of birth of the native, if hi? nativity was being cast) were marked on the celestial sphere. This sphere was divided into twelve equal spaces by great circles drawn through the zenith, the angle between any two consecutive circles being 30°. The first circle was drawn through the East point, and the space between it and the next circle towards the North corresponded to the first house, and sometimes was called the first house. The next space, proceed- ing from East to North, corresponded to the second house, and CH. XVIl] ASTROLOGY 383 SO on. Thus each of the twelve spaces between these circles corresponded to one of the twelve houses, and each of the circles to one of the cusps. - In delineating* a horoscope, it was usual to begin by in- serting the zodiacal signs. A zodiacal sign extends over 30°, and was marked on the cusp which passed through it : by its side was written a number indicating the distance to which its influence extended in the earlier of the two houses divided by the cusp. Next the positions of the planets in these signs were calculated, and each planet was marked in its proper house and near the cusp belonging to the zodiacal sign in which the planet was then situated : it was followed by a number indicating its right ascension measured from the beginning of the sign. The name of the native and the date for which the horoscope was cast were inserted usually in the central square. The diagram near the end of this chapter is a facsimile of the horoscope of Edward VI as cast by Cardan and will serve as an illustration of the above remarks. We are now in a position to explain how a horoscope was read or interpreted. Each house was associated with certain definite questions and subjects, and the presence or absence in that house of the various signs and planets gave the answer to these questions or information on these subjects. These questions cover nearly every point on which informa- tion would be likely to be sought. They may be classified roughly as follows. For the answer, so far as it concerns the native, to alLquestions connected with his life and health, look in house 1 ; for questions connected with his wealth, refer to house 2 ; for his kindred and communications to him, refer to 3 ; for his parents and inheritances, refer to 4 ; for his children and amusements, refer to 5 ; for his servants and illnesses, refer to 6 ; for his marriage and amours, refer to 7 ; for his death, refer to 8 ; for his learning, religion, and travels, refer to 9 ; for his trade and reputation, refer to 10; for his friends, refer to 11 ; and finally for questions connected with his enemies, refer to house 12. — " • Eaphiiel, pp. 118—131. 384 ASTROLOGY [CH. XVII I proceef\ to describe briefly the influences of the planets, and shall then mention those of the zodiacal signs ; I should note however that in practice the signs were in many respects considered to be more influential than the planets. The astrological " planets " were seven in number, and in- cluded the Sun and the Moon. They were Saturn or the Great Infortune, Jupiter or the Great Fortune, Mars or the Lesser Infortune, the Sun, Venus or the Lesser Fortune, Mercury, and the Moon : the above order being that of their apparent times of rotation round the earth. Each of them had a double signification. In the first place it impressed certain characteristics, such as good fortune, feeble- ness, &c., on the dealings of the native with the subjects con- nected with the house in which it was located; and in the second place it imported certain objects into the house which would affect the dealings of the native with the subjects of that house. "- To describe the exact influence of each planet in each house would involve a long explanation, but the general effect of their presence may be indicated roughly as follows*. The presence of Saturn is malignant : that of Jupiter is propitious : that of Mars is on the whole injurious: that of the Sun indicates respectability and moderate success: that of Venus is rather favourable : that of Mercury implies rapid practical action : and lastly the presence of the Moon merely faintly reflects the influence of the planet nearest her, and suggests rapid changes and fickleness. Besides the planets, the Moon's nodes and some of the more prominent fixed stars f also had certain influences. — These vague terms may be illustrated by taking a few simple cases. For example, in casting a nativity, the life, health, and general career of the native were determined by the first or ascendant house, whence comes the expression that a man's fortune is in the ascendant. Now the most favourable planet * Eaphael, pp. 70—90, pp. 204—209. t Eapliael, pp. 129—131. CH. XVll] ASTROLOGY 385 was Jupiter. Therefore, if at the instant of birth Jupiter was in the first house, the native might expect a long, happy, healthy life; and being born under Jupiter he would have a "jovial" disposition. On the other hand, Saturn was the most unlucky of all the planets, and was as potent as malignant. If at the instant of birth he was in the first house, his potency might give the native a long life, but it would be associated with an angry and unhappy temper, a spirit covetous, revengeful, stern, and unloveable, though constant in friendship no less than in hate, which was what astrologers meant by a "saturnine" character. Similarly a native born under Mercury, that is, ^\^th Mercury in the first house, would be of a mercurial nature, while anyone born under Mars would have a martial bent. Moreover it was the prevalent opinion that a jovial person would have his horoscope affected by Jupiter, even if that planet had not been in the ascendant at the time of birth. Thus the horoscope of an adult depended to some extent on his character and previous life. It is hardly necessary to point out how easily this doctrine enabled an astrologer to make the prediction of the heavens agree with facts that were known or probable. In the same way the other houses are affected. For in- stance, no astrologer, who believed in the art, would have wished to start on a long journey when Saturn was in the ninth house or house of travels ; and if, at the instant of birth, Saturn was in that house, the native would always incur con- siderable risk on his journeys. Moreover every planet was affected to some extent by its aspect (conjunction, opposition, or quadrature) to every other planet according to elaborate rules* which depended on their positions and directions of motion : in particular the angular distance between the Sun and the Moon — sometimes known as the " part of fortune " — was regarded as specially important, and this distance affected the whole horoscope. In general, conjunction was favourable, quadrature unfavourable, and oppo- sition ambiguous. ♦ Eaphael, pp. 132—170. B. R. 25 386 ASTBOLOGY [CH. XVII Each planet not only influenced the subjects in the house in which it was situated, but also imported certain objects into the house. Thus Saturn was associated with grandparents, paupers, beggars, labourers, sextons, and gravediggers. If, for example, he was present in the fourth house, the native might look for a legacy from some such person; if he was present in the twelfth house, the native must be careful of the con- sequences of the enmity of any such person; and so on. Similarly Jupiter was associated generally with lawyers, priests, scholars, and clothiers ; but, if he was conjoined with a malignant planet, he represented knaves, cheats, and drunkards. Mars indicated soldiers (or, if in a watery sign, sailors on ships of war), masons, doctors, smiths, carpenters, cooks, and tailors ; but, if afflicted with Mercury or the Moon, he denoted the presence of thieves. The Sun implied the action of kings, goldsmiths, and coiners ; but, if afflicted by a malignant planet, he denoted false pretenders. Venus imported musicians, em- broiderers, and purveyors of all luxuries; but, if afflicted, prostitutes and bullies. Mercury imported astrologers, philo- sophers, mathematicians, statesmen, merchants, travellers, men of intellect, and cultured workmen ; but, if afflicted, he signified the presence of pettifoggers, attorneys, thieves, messengers, footmen, and servants. Lastly, the presence of the Moon introduced sailors and those engaged in inferior offices. I come now to the influence and position of the zodiacal signs. So far as the first house was concerned, the sign of the zodiac which was there present was even more important than the planet or planets, for it was one of the most important indications of the duration of life. Each sign was connected with certain parts of the body — ex. gr. Aries influenced the head, neck and shoulders — and that part of the body was affected according to the house in which the sign was. Further each sign was associated with certain countries and connected the subjects of the house in which the sign was situated with those countries: ex. gr. Aries was associated especially with events in England, France, Syria, Verona, Naples, &c. CH. XVIl] ASTKOLOGY 3§V The sign in the first house determined also the character and appearance of the native*. Thus the character of a native born under Aries (m) was passionate; under Taurus (/) was dull and cruel ; under Gemini (m) was active and ingenious ; under Cancer (/) was weak and yielding ; under Leo (7/^) was generous, resolute, and ambitious ; under Virgo (/) was sordid and mean ; under Libra {m) was amorous and pleasant ; under Scorpio (/) was cold and reserved ; under Sagittarius (m) was generous, active, and jolly; under Capricorn (/) was weak and narrow ; under Aquarius {in) was honest and steady ; and under Pisces (/) was phlegmatic and effeminate. Moreover the signs were regarded as alternately masculine and feminine, as indicated above by the letters m or / placed after each sign. A masculine sign is fortunate, and all planets situated in the same house have their good influence rendered thereby more potent and their unfavourable influence mitigated. But all feminine signs are unfortunate, their direct effect is evil, and they tend to nullify all the good influence of any planet which they afflict {i.e. with which they are connected), and to increase all its evil influences, while they also import an element of fickleness into the house and often turn good influences into malignant ones. The precise effect of each sign was different on every planet. I think the above account is sufficient to enable the reader to form a general idea of the manner in which a horoscope was cast and interpreted, and I do not propose to enter into further details. This is the less necessary as the rules — especially as to the relative importance to be assigned to various planets when their influence was conflicting — were so vague that astro- logers had little difficulty in finding in the horoscope of a client any fact about his life of which they had information or any trait of character which they expected him to possess. That this vagueness was utilized by quacks is notorious, but no doubt many an astrologer in all honesty availed himself of it, whether consciously or unconsciously. It must be re- membered also that the rules were laid down at a time when * Raphael, pp. 01 — 09. 25—2 386 j68 astrology [CH. XVII men were unacquainted with exact sciences, with the possible exception of mathematics, and further that, if astrology had been reduced to a series of inelastic rules applicable to all horo- scopes, the number of failures to predict the future correctly would have rapidly led to a recognition of the folly of the art. As it was, the failures were frequent and conspicuous enough to shake the faith of most thoughtful men. Moreover it was a matter of common remark that astrologers showed no greater foresight in meeting the difficulties of life than their neigh- bours, while they were neither richer, wiser, nor happier for their supposed knowledge. But though such observations were justified by reason they were often forgotten in times of diffi- culty and danger. A prediction of the future and the promise of definite advice as to the best course of action, revealed by the heavenly bodies themselves, appealed to the strongest desires of all men, and it was with reluctance that the futility of the advice w^as gradually recognized. The objections to the scheme had been stated clearly by' several classical writers. Cicero* pointed out that not one of the futures foretold for Pompey, Crassus, and Caesar had been verified by their subsequent lives, and added that the planets, being almost infinitely distant, cannot be supposed to affect us. He also alluded to the fact, which was especially pressed by Pliny f, that the horoscopes of twins are practically identical though their careers are often very different, or as Pliny put it, every hour in every part of the world are born lords and slaves, kings and beggars. In answer to the latter obvious criticism astrologers replied by quoting the anecdote of Publius Nigidius Figulus, a cele- brated Roman astrologer of the time of Julius Caesar. It is said that when an opponent of the art urged as an objection the different fates of persons born in two successive instants, Nigidius bade him make two contiguous marks on a potter's wheel, which was revolving rapidly near them. On stopping the wheel, the two marks were found to be far removed from * Cicero, De Divinatione, ii, 42. f Pliny, Historia NaturaliSy vii, 49 ; xxix, 1. CH. XVIl] ASTROLOGY 389 each other. Nigidius received the name of Figulus, the potter, in remembrance of this story, but his argument, says St Augustine*, who gives us the narrative, was as fragile as the ware which the wheel manufactured. On the other hand Seneca and Tacitus may be cited as being on the whole favourable to the claims of astrology, though both recognized that it was mixed up with knavery and fraud. An instance of successful prediction which is given by the latter of these writers f may be used more correctly as an illustration of how the ordinary professors of the art varied their predictions to suit their clients and themselves. The story deals with the first introduction of the astrologer Thra- syllus to the emperor Tiberius. Those who were brought to Tiberius on any important matter were admitted to an inter- view in an apartment situated on a lofty cliff in the island of Capreae. They reached this place by a narrow path over- hanging the sea, accompanied by a single freedman of great bodily strength ; and on their return, if the emperor had con- ceived any doubts of their trustworthiness, a single blow buried the secret and its victim in the ocean. After Thrasyllus had, in this retreat, stated the results of his art as they concerned the emperor, the latter asked the astrologer whether he had calculated how long he himself had to live. The astrologer examined the aspect of the stars, and while he did this showed, as the narrative states, hesitation, alarm, increasing terror, and at last declared that the present hour was for him critical, perhaps fatal. Tiberius embraced him, and told him he was right in supposing he had been in danger but that he should escape it ; and made him thenceforth a confidential counsellor. But Thrasyllus would have been but a sorry astrologer had he not foreseen such a question and prepared an answer which he thought fitted to the character of his patron. A somewhat similar story is told;]: of Louis XI of France. ♦ St Augustine, De Civitate Dei, bk. v, chap, iii; Opera Omnia, ed. Migne, vol. vii, p. 143. t Annales, vi, 22 : quoted by Whewell, History of the Inductive Sciences, vol. I, p. yi3. + Personal Characteristics from French History, by Baron F. RotLscliilJ, 390 ASTROLOGY [CH. XV 11 He sent for a famous astrologer whose death he was meditating and asked him to show his skill by foretelling his own future. The astrologer replied that his fate was uncertain, but it was so inseparably interwoven with that of his questioner that the latter would survive him but by a few hours, whereon the superstitious monarch not only dismissed him uninjured, but took steps to secure his subsequent safety. The same anecdote is also related of a Scotch student who, being captured by Algerian pirates, predicted to the Sultan that their fates were so involved that he should predecease the Sultan by only a few weeks. This may have been good enough for a barbarian, but with most civilized monarchs probably it would be less effectual, as certainly it is less artistic, than the answer of Thrasyllus. I may conclude by mentioning a few notable cases of horoscopy. Among the most successful instances of horoscopy enumerated by Raphael * is one by W. Lilly, given in his Monarchy or No Monarchy, published in 1651, in which he predicted a plague in London so terrible that the number of deaths should exceed the number of coffins and graves, to be followed by " an exorbi- tant fire." The prediction w^as amply verified in 1665 and 1666. In fact Lilly's success was embarrassing, for the Committee of the House of Commons, which sat to investigate the causes of the fire and ultimately attributed it to the papists, thought that he must have known more about it than he chose to declare, and on October 25, 1666, summoned him before them: Lilly proved himself a match for his questioners. An even more curious instance of a lucky hit is told of Flamsteedf, the first astronomer royal. It is said that an old lady who had lost some property wearied Flamsteed by her perpetual requests that he would use his observatory to discover London, 1896, p. 10. The story was introduced by Sir Walter Scott in Quentin Durward, chap. xv. * Manual of Astrology, p. 37. t The story, though in a slightly different setting, is given in The London Chrovicle, Dec. 3, 1771, and it is there stated that Flamsteed attributed the result to the direct action of the devil. CH. XVIl] ASTROLOGY ,Sbx> her property for her. At hist, tired out with her importunities, he determined to show her the folly of her demand by making a prediction, and, after she had found it false, to explain again to her that nothing else could be expected. Accordingly he drew circles and squares round a point that represented her house and filled them with all sorts of mystical symbols. Suddenly striking his stick into the ground he said, " Dig there and you will find it." The old lady dug in the spot thus indicated, and found her property ; and it may be conjectured that she believed in astrology for the rest of her life. Perhaps the belief that the royal observatory was built for such purposes may still be held, for De Morgan, writing in 1850, says that "persons still send to Greenwich to have their fortunes told, and in one case a young gentleman wrote to know who his w4fe was to be, and what fee he was to remit." It is easier to give instances of success in horoscopy than of failure. Not only are all ambiguous predictions esteemed to be successful, but it is notorious that prophecies which have been verified by the subsequent course of events are remembered and quoted, while the far more numerous instances in which the prophecies have been falsified are forgotten or passed over in silence. As exceptionally well-authenticated instances of failures I may mention the twelve cases collected by Cardan in his Geniturarum Exempla. These are good examples because Cardan was not only the most eminent astrologer of his time, but was a man of science, and perhaps it is not too much to say was accustomed to accurate habits of thought; moreover, I believe he was honest in his belief in astrology. To English readers the most interesting of these is the horoscope ot Edward VI of England, the more so as Cardan has left a full account of the affair, and has entered into the reasons of his failure to predict Edward's death. To show how Cardan came to be mixed up in the transaction I should explain that in 1552 Cardan went to Scotland to prescribe for John Hamilton, the archbishop of St Andrews, who was ill with asthma and dropsy and about whose treatment the 39^ >2 ASTROLOGY [CH. XVII ph}-icians had disagreed*. On his return through London, Carcxn stopped with Sir John Cheke, the Professor of Greek at CamHdge, who was tutor to the young king. Six months previously, Edward had been attacked by measles and small-pox whch had made his health even weaker than before. The King's guardians were especially anxious to know how long he would live, and they asked Cardan to cast Edward's nativity with particular reference to that point. The Italian was granted an audience in October, of which he wrote a full account in his diary, quoted in the Geniturarum Exempla. The king, says hef, was "of a stature somewhat below the middle height, pale faced, with grey eyes, a grave aspect, decorous, and handsome. He was rather of a bad habit of body than a sufferer from fixed diseases, and had a somewhat projecting shoulder-blade." But, he continues, he was a boy of most extraordinary wit and promise. He was then but fifteen years old and he was already skilled in music and dialectics, a master of Latin, English, French, and fairly proficient in Greek, Italian, and Spanish. He " filled with the highest expectation every good and learned man, on account of his ingenuity and suavity of manners.... When a royal gravity was called for, you would think that it was an old man you saw, but he was bland and companionable as became his years. He played upon the lyre, took concern for public affairs, was liberal of mind, and in these respects emulated his father, who, while he studied to be [too] good, managed to seem bad." And in another place J: he * Luckily they left voluminous reports on the case and the proper treatment for it. The only point on which there was a general agreement was that the phlegm, instead of being expectorated, collected in his Grace's brains, and that thereby the operations of the intellect were impeded. Cardan was celebrated for his success in lung diseases, and his remedies were fairly successful in curing the asthma. His fee was 500 crowns for travelling expenses from Pavia, 10 crowns a day, and the right to see other patients; the archbishop actually gave him 2300 crowns in money and numerous presents in kind ; his fees from other persons during the same time must have amounted to about an equal sum (see Cardan's De Libris Propriis, ed. 1557, pp. 159 — 175 ; Gonsilia Medica, Opera, vol. ix, pp. 124 — 148 ; De Vita Propria, ed. 1557, pp. 138, 193 et seq.). t I quote from Morley's translation, vol. n, p. 135 et se^' X De Reruvi Varietate, p. 285. CH. XVIl] ASTROLOGY 393 describes him as "that boy of wondrous hopes." At the close of the interview Cardan begged leave to dedicate to Edward a work on which he was then engaged. Asked the subject of the woi-k, Cardan replied that he began by showing the cause of comets. The subsequent conversation, if it is reported correctly, shows good sense on the part of the young king. I J 57 nicimdecimoSlcb.nor, lymmUS'd VieridielondinJ, R*^ Hv^tU Uiodrdi SexH, ./ 9j -V -iv "^ I have reproduced above a facsimile of Cardan's original drawing of Edward's horoscope. The horoscope was cast and read with unusual care. I need not quote the minute details given about Edward's character and subsequent career, but obviously the predictions were founded on the impressions derived from the above-mentioned interview. The conclusion about his length of life was that he would certainly live past middle age, though after the age of 55 years 3 months and 17 days various diseases would fall to his lot*. In the following July the king died, and Cardan felt it necessary for his reputation to explain the cause of his error. The title of his dissertation is Quae i^ost consideravi de eodemf. In effect his explanation is that a weak nativity can never be * Geniturarum Exempla, p. 19. t Ibid., p. 23. 394 ASTROLOGY [Cli. XVII predicted from a single horoscope, and that to have ensured success he must have cast the nativity of every one with whom Edward had come intimately into contact; and, failing the necessary information to do so, the horoscope could be regarded only as a probable prediction. This was the argument usually offered to account for non- success. A better defence would have been the one urged by Raphael* and by Sou they f that there might be other planets unknown to the astrologer which had influenced the horoscope, but I do not think that medieval astrologers assigned this reason for failure. I have not alluded to the various adjuncts of the art, but astrologers so frequentl}^ claimed the power to be able to raise spirits that perhaps I may be pardoned for remarking that I believe some of the more important and elaborate of these deceptions were effected not infrequently by means of mirrors and lenses or perhaps by the use of a magic lantern, the pictures beinof sometimes thrown on to a fixed surface or a mirror and at other times on to a cloud of smoke which caused the images to move and finally disappear in a fantastic way capable of many explanations!. I would conclude by repeating again that though the practice of astrology was so often connected with impudent quackery, yet one ought not to forget that most physicians and men of science in medieval Europe were astrologers or believers in the art. These observers did not consider that its rules were definitely established, and they laboriously collected much of the astronomical evidence that was to crush it. Thus, though there never was a time when astrology was not practised by knaves, there was a period of intellectual development when it was honestly accepted as a difficult but a real science. * The Familiar Astrologer, London, 1832, p. 248. t The Doctor, chap. xcii. X See ex. gr. the life of Cellini, chap, siii, Eoscoe's translation, pp. 144 — 146. See also Sir David Brewster's Letters on Natural Magic, 395 CHAPTER XVIII. CRYPTOGRAPHS AND CIPHERS. The art of constructing cryptographs or ciphers — intelligible to those who know the key and unintelligible to others — has been studied for centuries. Their usefulness on certain occasions, especially in time of war, is obvious, while their right interpre- tation may be a matter of great importance to those from whom the key is concealed. But the romance connected with the subject, the not uncommon desire to discover a secret, and the implied challenge to the ingenuity of all from whom it is hidden, have attracted to the subject the attention of many to whom its utility is a matter of indifference. Among the best known of the older authorities on the subject are J. Tritheim of Spanheim, G. Porta of Naples, G. Cardan, J. F. Niceron, J. Wilkins, and E. A. Poe. More modern writers are J. E. Bailey in the Encyclopaedia Britan- nica, E. B. von Wostrowitz of Vienna, 1881, F. Delastelle of Paris, 1902, and J. L. Kluber of Tubingen, 1909. My know- ledge, however, is largely the result of casual reading, and I prefer to discuss the subject as it has presented itself to me, with no attempt to make it historically complete. Most writers use the words cryptograph and cipher as synonymous. I employ them, however, with different mean- ings, which I proceed to define. A cryptograph may be defined as a manner of writing in which the letters or symbols employed are used in their normal sense, but are so arranged that the communication is intelligible 396 CRYPTOGRAPHS AND CIPHERS [CH. XVIII only to those possessing the key: the word is also sometimes used to denote the communication made. A simple example is a communication in which every word is spelt backwards. Thus: ymene deveileb ot eh gniriter troper noitisop no ssorc daor. A cipher may be defined as a manner of writing by characters arbitrarily invented or by an arbitrary use of letters, words, or characters in other than their ordinary sense, intelligible only to those possessing the key: the word is also sometimes used to denote the communication made. A simple example is when each letter is replaced by the one that immediately follows it in the natural order of the alphabet, a being replaced by 6, b by c, and so on, and finally 2 by a. In this cipher the above message would read: fofnz cfm^fwfe up cf sfujsjoh sfqpsu qptjujpo po dsptt spbe. In both cryptographs and ciphers the essential feature is that the communication may be freely given to all the world though it is unintelligible save to those who possess the key. The key must not be accessible to anyone, and if possible it should be known only to those using the cryptograph or cipher. The art of constructing a cryptograph lies in the concealment of the proper order of the essential letters or words : the art of constructing a cipher lies in concealing what letters or words are represented by the symbols used. In an actual communication cipher symbols may be arranged cryptographically, and thus further hinder a reading of the message. Thus the message given above might be put in a cryptographic cipher as ZTifof efiufjmfc pufc hojsjufs uspqfs opjujtptq op ttpsd ebps. If the message were written in a foreign language it would further diminish the chance of it being read by a stranger through whose hands it passed. But I may confine myself to messages in English, and for the present to simple cryptographs and ciphers. A communication in cryptograph or cipher must be in CH. XVIIl] CRYi'TOGRAPHS AND CIPHERS 397 writing or in some permanent form. Thus to make small muscular movements — such, ex. gr., as talking on the fingers, or breathing long and short in the Morse dot and dash system, or making use of pre-arranged signs by a fan or stick, or flashing signals by light — do not here concern us. The mere fixct that the message is concealed or secretly conveyed does not make it a cryptograph or cipher. The majority of stories dealing with secret communications are concerned with the artfulness with which the messasfe is con- cealed or conveyed and have nothing to do with cryptographs or ciphers. IMany of the ancient instances of secret communi- cation are of this type. Illustrations are to be found in messages conveyed by pigeons, or wrapped round arrows shot over the head of a foe, or written on the paper wrapping of a cigarette, or by the use of ink which becomes visible only when the recipient treats the paper on which it is written by some chemical or physical process. Again, a communication in a foreign language or in any recognized notation like shorthand is not an instance of a cipher. A letter in Chinese or Polish or Russian might be often used for conveying a secret message from one part of England to another, but it fails to fulfil our test that if published to all the world it would be concealed, unless sub- mitted to some special investigation. On the other hand, in practice, foreign languages or systems of shorthand which are but little known may serve to conceal a communication better than an easy cipher, for in the last case the key may be found with but little trouble, while in the other cases, though the key may be accessible, it is probable that there are only a few who know where to look for it. Cryptographs. I proceed to enumerate some of the better known types of cryptographs. There are at least three distinct types. The types are not exclusive, and any particular crypto- graph may comprise the distinctive feature of two or all the types. First Type of Cryptographs {Transposition Type). A crypto- graph of the first type is one in which the successive letters 398 CRYPTOGRAPHS AND CIPHERS [CH. XVIII or words of the message are re-arranged in some pre-determined manner. One of the most obvious cryptographs of this type is to write each word or the message itself backwards. Here is an instance in which the whole message is written backwards: tsop yh tnes tnemeergafo seniltuo smret ruo tpecca yeht. It is unnecessary to indicate the division into words by leaving spaces between them, and we might introduce capitals or make a pretence of other words, as thus : Ts opyhtne sine meer gafos eniltu smret ruot peccaye ht. A recipient who was thus mis-led would be very careless. Preferably, according to modern practice, we should write the message in groups of five letters each : the advantage of such a division being that the number of such groups can be also communicated, and the casual omission of letters thus detected. Systems of this kind which depend on altering the places of letters or lines in some pre-arranged manner have always been common. One example is where the letters which make up the communication are written vertically up or down. Thus the message : The pestilence continues to increase, might be written thus: eio tnlit sntioeth acsncnse ereuecep. The cryptograph might be further obscured by writing the 32 letters according to the Route Method described below. Another method is to write successively the 1st, 18th, 35th letters of the original message, and then the 2nd, 19th, 36th letters, and so on. If, however, we know the clue number, say c, it is easy enough to read the communication. For if it divides into the number of letters n times with a remainder r it suffices to re-write the message in lines putting ?i -I- 1 letters in each of the first r lines, and n letters in each of the last c — r lines, CH. XVIIl] CRYPTOGRAPHS AND CIPHERS 399 and then the communication can be read by reading the columns downwards. For instance, if the following communication, containing 270 letters, were received: Ahtze ipqhg esoae ouazs eseiua eqtonu sfdth enzce sjteo ttqiz yczht zjioa rhqet tjrfe sftnz mroom ohyea rziaq neorn hreot lennk aerwi zesju asjod eziojz zszjb rritt jnfjl weuzr oqyfo htqay eizsl eopji dihal oalhp epkrh eanaz srvli irnosi adygt pekij scerq vvjqj qctjqn yjint kaehs hhsnh goaot qefqe miesa yquni tpebq stzam ztqrj, and the clue number were 17 we should put 16 letters in each of the first 15 lines and 15 letters in each of the last ^ lines. The communication could then be discovered by reading the columns downwards : the letters J, q and z marking the ends of w^ords. A better cryptograph of this kind may be made by arranging the letters cyclically, and agreeing that the communication is to be made by selected letters, as, for instance, every seventh, second, seventh, second, and so on. Thus if the communication were Ammunition too low to allow of a sortie, which consists of 32 letters, the successive significant letters would come in the order 7, 9, 16, 18, 25, 27, 2, 4, 13, 15, 24, 28, 5, 8, 20, 22, 1, 6, 21, 26, 11, 14, 32, 10, 31, 12, 17, 23, 3, 29, 30, 19— the numbers being selected as in the decimation problem given above at the end of chapter I, and being struck out from the 32 cycle as soon as they are determined. The above communication would then read Ttrio oalmo laoon msueo aivotn lioti fw. This is a good method, but it is troublesome to use, and for that reason is not to be recommended. In another cryptograph of this type, known as the Route Method, the words are left unaltered, but are re-arranged in a 11 8 13 2 15 4 w X 1 10 17 6 y z 9 12 7 14 8 16 5 pre-determined manner. Thus, to take a very simple example, the words might be written in tabular form in the order shown ^QQ CEYPTOGEAPHS AND CIPHEES [CH. XVIU in the diagram, certain spaces being filled with dummy words xvz,..., and the message being sent in the order U, 8 13 2, 15 4 w X 1 .. This method was used successfully by the Fe'de^als iA the American Civil War, 1861-1865, equivalents for proper names being used. It is easy to work, but the key would soon be discovered by modem experts. A double cryptograph is said to have been used by the Nihilists in Russia from 1890-1900. Such double transpo- sitions are always awkward, and mistakes, which woxdd make the message unintelligible, may be easily introduced but if time is of little importance, and the message is unlikely to fall into the hands of any but ordinary officials, the concealment is fairly effective, though a trained specialist who had several messages in it could work out the key. Second Type of Cryptographs. A cryptograph of the second tvne is one in which the message is expressed m ordinary writing, but in it are introduced a number of dummies or non significant letters or digits thus concealmg which of the letters are relevant. , One way of picking out those letters which are relevant is by the use of a perforated card of the shape of (say) a sheet of note-paper, which when put over such a sheet perniits only such letters as are on certain portions of it to be v.sibla Such a card is known as a grille. An example of a grille with four openings is figured below. A communication made in this \ way may be easily concealed from anyone who does not possess a card of the same pattern. If the recipient possesses such CH. XVIIl] CKYl'TOGRAPHS AND CIPHERS 401 a card he has only to apply it in order to read the message. This method was used by Richelieu. The use of the grille may be rendered less easy to detect if it be used successively in different positions, for instance, with the edges AB and CD successively put along the top of the paper containing the message. Below, for instance, is a message which, with the aid of the grille figured above, is at once intelligible. On applying the grille to it with the line AB along the top HK we get the first half of the communica- tion, namely, 1000 i^ifles se. On applying the grille with the H K 981 NTT 261 070 523 479 100 OKI SON SON AHY DTG BFS PUM OLT KFE LJO EGX AEU QJT EGO FLE HVE WLA FML AES REM REM ODA TIM ^SE YZZ EPD QJC EKS OEF line CD along the top HK we get the rest of the message, namely, nt to L to-day. The other spaces in the paper are filled with non-significant letters or numerals in any way we please. Of course any one using such a grille would not divide the sheet of paper on which the communication was written into cells, but in the figure I have done so in order to render the illustration clearer. We can avoid the awkward expedient of having to use a perforated card, which may fall into undesired hands, by introducing a certain pre-arranged number of dummies or non-significant letters or symbols between those which make up the message. For instance, we might arrange that (say) only every alternate second and third letter shall be relevant. Thus the first, third, sixth, eighth, eleventh, &c., letters are those that make up the message. Such a communication would be two and a half times as long as the message, and this might 26 B. R. 402 CRYPTOGRAPHS AND CIPHERS [CH. XVIII be a great disadvantage if time in sending the message was of importance. Another method, essentially the same as the grille method, is to arrange that every nth. word shall give the message, the other words being non-significant, though of course inserted as far as possible so as to make the complete communication run as a whole. But the difficulty of composing a document of this kind and its great length render it unsuitable for any purpose except an occasional communication comj)osed at leisure and sent in writing. This method is said to have been used by the Earl of Argyle when plotting against James II. Third Type of Cryptographs. A kind of secret writing which may perhaps be considered to constitute a third type of cryptograph is a communication on paper which is legible only when the paper is folded in a particular way. An example is a message written across the edges of a strip of paper wrapped spiral-wise round a stick called a scytale. When the paper is unwound and taken off the stick the letters appear broken, and may seem to consist of arbitrary signs, but by wrapping the paper round a similar stick the message can be again read. This system is said to have been used by the Lace- demonians. The concealment can never have been effectual against an intelligent reader who got possession of the paper. As another illustration take the appended communication which ^■^^ 4; ^m^^^ wm ^ -\^^^-h' \^m:^ ^ ^ B B c^^SH is said to have been given to the Young Pretender during his wanderings after Culloden. If it be creased along the lines BB and (70 (CO being along the second line of the second score), and then folded over, with B inside, so that the crease lies CH. XVlIl] CRYPTOGRAPHS AND CIPHERS 403 over the line A (which is the second line of the first score) thus leaving only the top and bottom of the piece of paper visible, it will be found to read Conceal yourself, your foes look for you. I have seen what purports to be the original, but of the truth of the anecdote I know nothing, and the desirability of con- cealing himself must have been so patent that it was hardly necessary to communicate it by a cryptograph. Cipliers. I proceed next to some of the more common types of ciphers. It is immaterial whether we employ special char- acters to denote the various letters ; or whether we use the letters in a non-natural sense, such as the letter z for a, the letter y for h, and so on. In the former case it is desirable to use symbols, for instance, musical notes, which are not likely to attract special notice. Geometrical figures have also been used for the same purpose. It is not even necessary to employ written signs. Natural objects have often been used, as in a necklace of beads, or a bouquet of flowers, where the different shaped or coloured beads or different flowers stand for different letters or words. An even more subtle form of disguising the cipher is to make the different distances between consecutive knots or beads indicate the different letters. Of all such systems we may say that a careful scrutiny shows that different symbols are being used, and as soon as the various symbols are distinguished one from the other no additional complication is introduced, while for practical purposes they give more trouble to the sender and the recipient than those written in symbols in current use. Accordingly I confine myself to ciphers written by the use of the current letters and numerals. There are four types of ciphers. First Type of Ciphers. Simple Substitution Alphabets. A cipher of the first type is one in which the same letter or word is always represented by the same symbol, and this symbol always represents the same letter or word. Perhaps the simplest illustration of a cipher of this type is to employ one language, written as far as practical in the alphabet of another language. It is said that during the Indian Mutiny messages in English, but written in Greek 26—2 404 CRYPTOGRAPHS AND CIPHERS [CH. XVIII characters, were used freely, and successfully baffled the in- genuity of the enemy, into whose hands they fell. A common cipher of this type is made by using the actual letters of the alphabet, but in a non-natural sense as indicating other letters. Thus we may use each letter to represent the one immediately following it in the natural order of the alphabet — the letters being supposed to be cyclically arranged — a standing for h wherever it occurs, h standing for c, and so on, and finally z standing for a: this scheme is said to have been used by the Carthaginians and Romans. More generally we may write the letters of the alphabet in a line, and under them re-write the letters in any order we like. For instance ahcdefghijhlmnopqrstuviuxyz olkmazsqxeufy rthcwbvnidgjp In such a scheme, we must in our communication replace a by 0, h by I, etc. The recipient will prepare a key by re- arranging the letters in the second line in their natural order and placing under them the corresponding letter in the first line. Then whenever a comes in the message he receives he will replace it by an e; similarly he will replace b by s, and so on. A cipher of this kind is not uncommonly used in military signalling, the order of the letters being given by the use of a key word. Ciphers of this class were employed by the British forces in the Sudan and South African campaigns. If, for instance, Pretoria is chosen as the key word, we wTite the letters in this order, striking out any which occur more than once, and continue with the unused letters of the alphabet in their natural order, writing the whole in two lines thus : pretoiahc dfg h z y X lu V u s qn 111 I k j Then in using the cipher p is replaced by z and vice versa, r by y, and so on. A long message in such a cipher would be easily discoverable, but it is rapidly composed by the sender and read by the receiver, and for some purposes may be useful. CH. XVIIl] CRYPTOGRAPHS AND CIPHERS 405 especially if the discovery of the purport of the message is, after a few hours, immaterial. The key to ciphers of this type may usually be found by using tables of the normal frequency with which letters may be expected to occur. Such tables, and other characteristic features of the English, French, German, Italian, Dutch, Latin, and Greek languages, were given by D. A. Conrad in 1742*. His results have since been revised, and extended to Russian, Spanish, and other tongues. In English the percentage scale of frequency of the letters is approximately as follows: — e, 12*0; t, 9"4; a, 7*8 0, 7-5; ^, 7'4; n, 7-3; s, 6-8; r, 59; h, 57; d, 3-9; l, 3-6; u, 3*0 c, 2-8; m, 2-7; / 2-5; p, 1-9; g, 1-8; y, 1-8; 6, 1-7; w, VI] v, 11 k, 0*6; j, 0'3; q, 03; x, 0*3; z, 0"2. The order of frequency for combinations of two letters is th, he, in, an, on, re, ti, er, it, nt, es, to, st; of three letters is the, ion, &c., &c.; of four letters is tion, that, &c., &:c., and of double letters is tt, ss, &c., &c. Other peculiarities, such as that h, I, m, n, v, and y, when at the begin- ning of a word, must be followed by a vowel, that q must be followed by u and another vowel, have been classified and are important. I need not go here into further details. Unless, however, the message runs to 400 words or more, we cannot reasonably expect to find the scale of frequency the same as in Conrad's Table. In ciphers of this class it is especially important to avoid showing the division into words, for a long word may easily betray the secret. For instance, if the decipherer has reason to suspect that the message related to something connected with Birmingham, and he found that a particular word of ten letters had its second and fifth letters alike, as also its fourth and tenth letters, he would naturally see how the key would work if the word represented Birmingham, and on this hypo- thesis would at once know the letters represented by eight symbols. With reasonable luck this should suffice to enable him to tell if the hypothesis was tenable. To avoid this risk it * Gentleman's Magazine, 1742, vol. xn, pp. 133--135, ISf^— 186, 241—242, 473—475. See also the (Jolleclcd Works oj E. A. Foe in 4 volumes, vol. i, p. 30 et seq^. 406 CRYPTOGRAPHS AND CIPHERS [CH. XVIII is usual to send the cipher in groups of five letters, and, before putting it into cipher, to separate the words in the message by- letters like j, q, x, z. Ciphers of this type suggest themselves naturally to those approaching the subject for the first time, and are commonly made by merely shifting the letters a certain number of places forward. If this is done we may decrease the risk of detection by altering the amount of shifting at short (and preferably irregular) intervals. Thus it may be agreed that if initially we shift every letter one place forward then whenever we come to the letter (say) n we shall shift every letter one more place forward. In this way the cipher changes continually, and is essentially changed to one of the third class ; but even with this improvement it is probable that an expert would decode a fairly long message without much difficulty. We can have ciphers for numerals as well as for letters: such ciphers are common in many shops. Any word or sentence containing ten different letters will answer the purpose. Thus, an old tradesman of my acquaintance used the excellent precept Be just Man — the first letter representing 1, the second 2, and so on. In this cipher the price 10/6 would be marked bnjt. This is an instance of a cipher of the first type. Second Type of Ciphers. A cipher of the second type is one in which the same letter or word is, in some or all cases, repre- sented by more than one symbol, and this symbol always repre- sents the same letter or word. Such ciphers were uncommon before the Renaissance, but the fact that to those who held the key they were not more difficult to write or read than ciphers of the first type, while the key was not so easily discovered, led to their common adoption in the seventeenth century. A simple instance of such a cipher is given by the use of numerals to denote the letters of the alphabet. Thus a may be represented by 11 or by 37 or by 63, 6 by 12 or by 38 or by 64, and so on, and finally z by 36 or by 62 or by 88, while we can use 89 or 90 to signify the end of a word and the numbers 91 to 99 to denote words or sentences which con- stantly occur. Of course in practice no one would employ the CH. XYIIl] CRYPTOGRAPHS AND CIPHERS 407 numbers in an order like this, which suggests their meaning, but it will serve to illustrate the principle. The cipher can be improved by introducing after every (say) eleventh digit a non-significant digit. If this is done the recipient of the message must erase every twelfth digit before he begins to read the message. With this addition the difficulty of discovering the key is considerably increased. The same principle is sometimes applied with letters instead of numbers. For instance, if we take a word (say) of n letters, preferably all different, and construct a table as shown below of n^ cells, each cell is defined by two letters of the key word. Thus, if we choose the word smoking-cap we shall have 100 S 31 K I N — P z J t d n X G c A i 8 m p • t d n b r s a b 1 V c m w 8 q a d n h r b 1 V e y i s c m g q a k e o y h r b 1 M ~K k u e f P z I o V f P z w g q N G y i j t k u C A s P cells, and each cell is determined uniquely by the two letters denoting its row and column. If we fill these cells in order with the letters of the alphabet we shall have a system similar to that explained above, where a will be denoted by ss or og or no, and so for the other letters. The last 22 cells may be used to denote the first 22 letters of the alphabet, or better, three or four of them may be used after the end of a word to show that it is ended, and the rest may be used to denote words or sentences which are likely to occur frequently. The statement in cipher however is twice as loug as when it is in clear. Like the similar cipher with numbers this can be improved 408 CRYPTOGRAPHS AND CIPHERS [CH. XVllI by introducing after every 7?2th letter any single letter which it is agreed shall be non-significant. To decipher a communication so written it is necessary to know the clue word and the clue number. Here for instance is a communication written in the above cipher with the clue word smoking-cap, and with 7 as the clue number: ngmks igrio icpss amcks cakqi gnass nxmig poasu iamno cmpam inscn ogcpn cisyi ksTcam sssgn nncae kknoo mklisc pcmsc hgpng siaws sgigg ndiic a. In this sentence the letters denoting the 79th, 80th, 81st, and 82nd cells have been used to denote the end of a word, and no use has been made of the last 18 cells. Another cipher of this type is made as follows. The sender and recipient of the message furnish themselves with identical copies of some book. In the cipher only numerals are used, and these numerals indicate the locality of the letters in the book. For example, the first letter in the communication might be indicated by 79-8-5, meaning that it is the 5th letter in the 8th line of the 79th page. But though secrecy might be secured, it would be very tedious to prepare or decode a message, and the method is not as safe as some of those de- scribed below. Another cipher of this type is obtained by the sender and receiver agreeing on some common book of reference and further on a number which, if desired, may be communicated as part of the message. To employ this method the page of the book indicated by the given number must be used. The first letter in it is taken to signify a, the next h, and so on — any letter which occurs a second time or more frequently being neglected. It may be also arranged that after n letters of the message have been ciphered, the next n letters shall be written in a similar cipher taken from the ^th following page of the book, and so on. Thus the possession of the code-book would be of little use to anyone who did not also know the numbers employed. It is so easy to conceal the clue number that with ordinary prudence it would be almost impossible for an unauthorized person to discover a message sent in this cipher. CH. XVIIl] CRYPTOGRAPHS AND CIPHERS 409 The clue number may be communicated indirectly in many ways. For instance, it may be arranged that the number to be used shall be the number sent, plus (say) q, or that the nmnbcr to be used shall be an agreed multiple of the number actually sent. Third Type of Ciphers. Complex Shifting Alphabets. A cipher of the third type is one in which the same symbol represents sometimes one letter or word and sometimes another. A simple example, known as Gronf eld's Method, is the employ- ment of pre-arranged numbers in shifting forward the letters that make the communication. For instance, if we agree on the key number 6814, then the first letter in the communica- tion is replaced by the sixth letter which follows it in the natural order of the alphabet: for instance, if it were an a it would be replaced by g. The next letter is replaced by the eighth letter which follows it in the natural order of the alphabet: for instance, if it were an a it would be replaced by i. The next letter is replaced by the first after it ; the next by the fourth after it ; the next by the sixth ; and so on to the end of the message. Of course to read the message the reci- pient would reverse the process. If the letters of the alphabet are written at uniform intervals along a ruler, and another ruler similarly marked with the digits is made to slide along it, the letter corresponding to the shifting of any given number of places can be read at once. Here is such a message : — Cisvg vuniya vijnp vgzsi yhpjp tuoiy. Such ciphers are easy to make and read by those who have the key. But in recent years their construction has been subjected to critical analysis, and experts now can generally obtain the key number if the message contains 80 or 100 words; an example of the way by which this is done is given below. It would be undesirable to allow the division into words to appear in the message, and either the words must be run on continuously, or preferably the less common letters j, q, z may be used to mark the division of words and the message then written in five letter groups. It is most important to conceal the number of digits in the 410 CRYPTOGRAPHS AND CIPHERS [CH. XVI II key number. The difficulty of discovering the key number is increased if after every (say) 77ith letter (or word) a non-significant letter is inserted. I suggest this as an improvement in the cipher. Here for instance is a communication written in this cipher with the clue numbers 4276 and 7: atpzn hvaocu xhiep xafwg hzniy prpsi khdkz yygkq prgez uytlk ohldi fehzm xlpog quyit cmgxk ckuex vsqka ziagg sigay tnvvs styvu aslyw gjuzm csfct qhpwj vaepf xhibw pxiul txlav vtqzo xivkvt uvvfh cqhxn pvism phzmq tuwxj ykeev Itif. The recipient would begin by striking out every eighth letter. He would then shift back every letter 4, 2, 7, 6, 4, 2, &c., places respectively, and in reading it, would leave out the letters j, q, and z as only marking the ends of words. With these modifications, this is an excellent cipher, and it has the additional merit of not materially lengthening the message. It can be rendered still more difficult by arranging that either or both the clue numbers shall be changed according to some definite scheme, and it may be further agreed that they shall change automatically every day or week. A similar system, now known as the St Cyr Method, was proposed by Wilkins *. He took a key word, such as prudentia, and constructed as many alphabets as there were letters in it, each alphabet being arranged cyclically and beginning respectively with the letters p, r, u, d, e, n, t, i, and a. He thus got a table like the following, giving nine possible letters which might stand for any letter of the alphabet. Using this we may vary the cipher in successive words or letters of the communication. Thus the message The prisoners have mutinied and seized the railway station would, according as the cipher changes in successive words or letters, read as Hiut fhziedvhi bujjy pxwmqmhg erh er^vmrq max zirteig station or as Hyy svvkunthm lehx uuhzgmiq tvd gvcciq mqe frcoanr atpkcrr. The name by which the method is known is derived from the fact that it was taught at St Cyr under Napoleon. This system is said to have been widely employed by both armies in the Franco-German war in 1870 — 1871. The construction of military ciphers must be so simple that messages can be rapidly * Mercury, by J. Wilkins, London, 1641, pp. 59, 60. CH. XVIIl] CRYPTOGRAPHS AND CIPHERS 411 enciphered and decoded by non-experts: the St Cyr code fulfils this requirement. a h c d f g h i k 1 m n T q 3 s t u V w X y z P a r s t u V w X y z a b c d e f h i k 1 m n r s t u V w X y z a b c d e f g h i k 1 m n o P q u V w X y z a b c d e f g h 1 k 1 m n P q r •a s t d e f g h i k 1 m n P q r s- t u V w X y z b c d~ e f g' h 1 k 1 m n P q r s t u V w X y z a b c n t i P q r s t u V TV z y z a b c d e f g h i k 1 m s u V w X y z a b c d e f g h i k i m n P q r k 1 m u P q r s t u V w X y z a b c d e f g a b c d e f g h i 1 k 1 m n P q r s t u V w X y z The St Cyr scheme is essentially the same as Gronfeld's. For instance, in the St Cyr system the key word gihe leads to the same result as the key number 6814 by Gronfeld's method. One advantage of the St Cyr system over that advocated by Gronfeld is that key words are more easily recollected than key numbers. Another advantage comes from the fact that the employment of v>^ords is equivalent to using 26 digits instead of 10 : thus the key word hings is equivalent to a number whose digits, from left to right, are 11, 9, 14, 7, 19. Messages in this cipher of any considerable length can be read by the same rules as are used to discover the key in Gronfeld's code. To hamper a decipherer I recommend the introduction, as in Gronfeld's method, of a non-significant letter after every 7?ith letter. The Beaufort Cipher, introduced in the British Navy by Admiral Beaufort in 1857, is of the St Cyr type. Its inventor thought it insoluble, but French writers have shown that no special difficulties occur in the discovery of the key word in the solution, though the analysis is tedious. A far better system of this kind is the Playfair Cipher. In this 25 cells arranged in the form of a square are filled by the letters of a key word such as Manchester (striking out any 412 CllYPTOGRAPHS AND CIPHERS [CH. XVIU letter which occurs more than once) and the remaining letters of the alphabet, thus : — m a n c h e s t r b d f 9 i u k I P V 10 X y z Only 25 cells are available, so k has been used for both h and g. The message is then divided into pairs of consecutive letters, but to prevent any pair consisting of the same two letters, a dummy letter like z is, when necessary, introduced. If both letters of a pair appear in the same vertical (or horizontal) line of the square, each of them is replaced by the letter in the square immediately to its right (or below it) — the letters in every line being treated as in cyclical order. If the letters in a pair do not appear in the same line in the square they must necessarily be at opposite angles of some rectangle, and they are replaced by those at the other angles of the rectangle, each by that which is in the same horizontal line. Thus the message will 'meet you at noon would first be written wi Iz Im ez et yo ua tn oz on ; then be put in cipher as yf iiiu ha hv sr xp Ih gt ux xt] and finally be sent as yfuwk ahvsr xplhg tuxxt. It is curious that this cipher is not used more extensively, for the discovery of the key is a most difficult problem, even to specialists. Fourth Type of Ciphers. A cipher of the fourth type is one in which each letter is always represented by the same symbol, but more than one letter may be represented by the same symbol. Such ciphers were not uncommon at the beginning of the nineteenth century, and were usually framed by means of a key sentence containing about as many letters as there are letters in the alphabet. CH. XVIIl] CRYPTOGRAPHS AND CIPHERS 413 Thus if the key phrase is The fox jumped over the garden gate, we write under it the letters of the alphabet in their usual sequence as shown below: T h e f X j um 2^ e d over the garden gate, ah c d ef g h i j k I mnop qrs t u vw x y z ah c. Then we write the message replacing a hy t or a, b hy h or t, c hy e, d by/, and so on. Here is such a message. Mfoemho nea ge eoo jmdJiohg avfteg ev ume afrmeo. But it will be observed that in the cipher a may represent a or u, d may represent I or w, e may represent c or k or o or 5 or x, g may represent t or z, h may represent b or r, o may represent e or m, r may represent p or v, and t may represent a or 6 or q. And the recipient, in deciphering it, must judge as best he can what is the right meaning to be assigned to these letters when they appear. An instance of a cipher of the fourth type is afforded by a note sent by the Duchesse de Berri to her adherents in Paris, in which she employed the key phrase I e g u V e r n e me n t provisoire. ah cdefghijklmn o p qr st uv xy. Hence in putting her message into cipher she replaced a by l^ h hy e, c by g, and so on. She forgot however to supply the key to the recipients of the message, but her friend Berryer had little difficulty in reading it by the aid of the rules I have indicated, and thence deduced the key phrase she had employed. Desiderata in Cryptographs and Ciphers. Having men- tioned various classes of cryptographs and ciphers, I may add that the shorter a message in cryptograph, the more easily it is read. On the other hand, the longer a message in cipher, the easier it is to get the key. In choosing a cipher for practical purposes, which will usually imply that it can be telegraphed or telephoned, we should seek for one in which only current letters, symbols, or words are employed ; such that its use does not unduly lengthen the message; such that the key to it can be reproduced at will and need not be kept in a form which 414 CRYPTOGRAPHS AND CIPHERS [CH. XVIII might betray the secret to an unauthorized person; such that the key to it changes or can be changed at short intervals; and such that it is not ambiguous. Many ciphers of the second and third types fulfil these conditions; in particular the Gronfeld or St Cyr Method, or the Playfair Cipher, may be noted. A cipher written cryptograph ically, or a cryptograph written in cipher, or a cipher again enciphered by another process, is almost insoluble even by experts, unless accidents reveal something in the construction, but it is troublesome to make, and such elaborate processes are suited only for the study, where the time spent in making them up and deciphering them is not of much consequence. Cipher Machines. The use of instruments giving a cipher, which is or can be varied constantly and automatically, has been often recommended*. The possession of the key of the instrument as well as a knowledge of the clue word is necessary to enable anyone to read a message, but the risk of some instru- ment, when set, falling into unauthorized hands must be taken into account. Since equally good ciphers can be constructed without the use of mechanical devices I do not think their employment can be recommended. On the Solution of Cryptographs and Ciphers. Much in- genuity has been shown in devising means for reading messages written in cryptograph or cipher. It is a fascinating pursuit, but I can find space for only a few remarks about it. In such problems we must begin by deciding whether the message is a cryptograph or a cipher. If it is a combi- nation of both, the problem is one of extreme difficulty, and is likely to baffle anyone but a specialist, but such combinations are unusual, and most secret messages belong to one class or the other. If the scale of frequency of the letters agrees generally with Conrad's Table, presumably the message is in cryptograph, * See, for instance, the descriptions of those devised by Sir Charles Wheat- stone, given in his Scientific Papers, London, 1879, pp. 342—347; and by Capt. Bazeries in Comptes Eendus, Association Frangais four I'Avancement des Sciences, vol. xx (Marseilles), 1891, p. ICO et tteq. CH. XVIll] CUYPTOGKArHS AND CIPHERS 415 though we must allow for the possibility that dummy letters, like^', k, X, and z, have been introduced either to separate words or deliberately to confuse those not in the secret. A short sentence of this kind may be read by an amateur, but only an expert is likely to discover the key to a long and well con- structed cryptographic message. If the message is long enough, say about 80 words, and the scale of frequency of particular letters differs markedly from Conrad's scale, there is a presumption that the message is in cipher. If the numbers of the two scales agree generally, probably a simple substitution alphabet has been used, i.e. it is a cipher of the first type, and generally the discovery of the key is easy. If it is not a cipher of this type, we must next try to find whether it is of any of the other recognised types. The majority of other ciphers are included in Gronfeld's number (or the St Cyr word) system, and here I will confine myself to a discussion of how such ciphers may be read. The discovery of a key to a cipher of this kind is best illustrated by a particular case. I will apply the method to the message cisvg vumya vijnp vgzsi yhpjp woiy. This is an example of a Gronfeld's cipher with no additional complications introduced, but the message is short, and it so hajopens that the letters used are not in the normal scale of frequency ; yet it can be read with ease and certainty. The first thing is to try to find the number of digits in the key number. Now we notice that the pair of letters vg occurs twice, with an interval of 12. If in each case these represent the same pair of letters in the original message, the number of digits in the key number must be 12 or a divisor of 12. Again the pair of letters ij occurs twice, with an interval of 8, and this suggests that the number of digits in the key number is 8 or a divisor of 8. Accordingly we conjecture that the key number is one of either 2 or 4 digits: this conclusion is strengthened by noting the intervals between the recurrences of the same letters throughout the message. We may put 2 on one side till after we have tried 4, for anyone using Gron- feld's method would be unlikely to employ a key number less 416 CRYPTOGRAPHS AND CIPHERS [cH. XVIII than 100. Accordingly we first try 4, and if that fails try 2. Had no clue of this kind been obtained from the recurrence of a pair of letters, we should have had to try successively making the key numbers comprise 2, 3, 4, 5, . . . digits, but here (and in most messages) a cursory examination suggests the number of digits in the key number. We commence then by assuming provisionally that the key number has 4 digits. Accordingly we must now re-write our message in columns, each of 4 letters, giving altogether 4 lines, thus : Q 9 y 3 9 y v y i V a n z h w s u V p s p V m i V i j i If the Gronfeld method was used, the letters in each of these lines were obtained from the corresponding letters in the original message by a simple substitution alphabet. Had the message been long we could probably obtain this alphabet at once by Conrad's Table. Here, however, the message is so short that the Table is not likely to help us decisively, and we must expect to be obliged to try several shifts of the alphabet in each line. In the first line y occurs three times, and g twice. Accord- ing to Conrad's Table, the most common letters in English are e, t, a, 0, i, n, s, r, h. Probably y stands for one of these and g for another. If y is made to stand successively for each of these, it is equivalent to putting every letter 6 places back- ward, where 6 is successively 20, 5, 24, 10, 16, 11, 6, 7, 17. Similarly, making g stand successively for e, t, a, o, i, n, s, r, h, we have 6 equal to 2, 13, 6, 18, 24, 19, 14, 15, 25. Altogether this gives us 16 systems for the representation of the first line. We might write these out on 16 slips, and provisionally reject any slip in which many unusual letters appear, but obviously, the most probable hypothesis is that where y stands for s, and g for a, both of which changes give ^ = 6, or that where y stands for a, and g for ^, both of which changes give ^ = 24: these give for the first line either w, a, s, d, a, s, j, s, or e, i, a, I, i, a, ?', a. CH. XVIIl] CRYPTOGRAPHS AND CIPHERS 417 In the second line no letter occurs more than once, so we get no chie from Conrad's Table. This could not happen if the message were of any considerable length. In the third line p occurs twice, and s twice. Hence, as before, we must make p and s successively stand for the letters e, t, a, 0, i, n, s, r, h. These give respectively 6= 11, 22, 15, 1, 7, 2, 23, 24, 8, and ^ = 14, 25, 18, 4, 10, 5, 0, 1, 11. Altogether this gives us 16 systems for the representation of this line. Obviously the most probable hypothesis is that where ^=11, p z= e, s = h, OT that where 6= 1, p = o, and s = r: these give for the third line either h,j, k, e, h, e, d, or r, t, u, o, r, o, n. In the fourth line i occurs three times. As before, make i stand successivel}^ for e, t, a, o, i, n, s, r, h. Of these the first, where ^ = 4, is the most probable. The slip corresponding to this is r, i, e, r, e, f, e. Now try combinations of these slips each in its proper line until, when we read the message in columns, we get the begin- ning of a word; if words appear in more than one column it is almost certain that we are right. We begin by taking the five slips which are indicated as being specially probable. The slip in the first line derived from ^ = 6, the slip in the third line derived from ^=1, and the slip derived from ^ = 4 in the fourth line give w . rra . tis . ued . or a . res . ofj . 7ies, and of course the solution is obvious. The key number was 6814, and the message is deciphered by using 6814 backwards. The corre- sponding St Cyr key word is gibe> The message was Warrant issued for arrest of Jones. If the combination of the slips is troublesome we can some- times get assistance by choosing those combinations which make the recurring pairs of letters (here vg and ij) represent pairs which occur in Conrad's Table. Also the occurrence of double letters in the cipher will often settle what combinations of slips are possible. It may be said that this is a tedious operation. Of course it is. Deciphering is bound to be troublesome, but a great deal of the work can be done by unskilled clerks working under the direction of experts. The longer the message, the fewer the D. K. 27 418 CRYPTOGRAPHS AND CIPHERS [CH. XVIII slips we have to try, and had the above message been three times as long, we could have solved the problem with half the trouble. The above example was not complicated by employing dummy letters or artificial alphabets: their use increases the difficulty of the decipherer, but if the message is a long one, the difficulties are not insuperable. Specialists, especially if working in combination, are said to select the right methods with almost uncanny quickness. This chapter has already run to such a length that I cannot find space to describe more than one or two ciphers that appear in history. It is said that Julius Caesar in making secret memoranda was accustomed to move every letter four places forward, writing d for a, e for h, &c. This would be a very easy instance of a cipher of the first type, but it may have been effective at that time. His nephew Augustus sometimes used a similar cipher, in which each letter was moved forward one place*. Bacon proposed a cipher in which each letter was denoted by a group of five letters consisting of A and B only. Since there are 32 such groups, he had 6 symbols to spare, which he could use to separate words or to which he could assign special meanings. A message in this cipher would be five times as long as the original message. This may be compared with the far superior system of the five (or four) digit code- book system in use at the present time. In the Morse code employed in telegraphy, as in the Baconian system, only two signs are used, commonly a dot or a short mark or a motion to the left, and a dash or a long mark or a motion to the right. The Morse Alphabet is as follows: a ( ), b ( • • ), c ( — ), d ( ), ^ (•)> /( \9{ Xh(-'''\i{''),j( ),k( ), l( ), ^( X^( )>o( \p( \q( ), ^( )> s('--),t{—), u{ ), v{ ), w ( ),x{ ), * Of some of Caesar's correspondence, Suetonius says (cap. 56) si quis investigare et persequi velit, quartam elementorwn literani, id est, d pro a, et perinde reliquas commutet. And of Augustus he says (cap. 88) quoties autemper notas scribit, b pro a, c pro b, ac deinceps eadem ratione, sequentes literas ponit; pro X autem duplex a. CH. XVIIl] CRYPTOGRAPHS AND CIPHERS 419 y ( ), z ( ). Since there are 30 possible per- mutations of two signs taken not more than four together, this leaves four signals unemployed, ( ), ( ), (• ), ( ), which might have been utilized for special signals. In telegraphy there are also recognized signs or combinations for numerals, for the ends of words and messages, and for various calls between the sender and the recipient of a message. Charles I used ciphers freely in important correspondence — the majority being of the second type. He was foolish enough to take a cabinet, containing many confidential notes in cipher, with him to the field of Naseby, where they fell into the hands of Fairfax*. In these papers each letter was repre- sented by a number. Clues were provided by the King who had written over the number the letter which it represented. Thus in two letters written in 1643, a is represented by 17 or 18, h by 13, c by 11 or 12, c^ by 5, g by 7 or 8 or 9 or 10, / by 15 or 16, g by 21, h by 31 or 32, i by 27 or 28, k by 25, I by 23 or 24, m by 42 or 44, n by 39 or 40 or 41, o by 35 or 36 or 37 or 38, p by 33 or 34, r by 50 or 51 or 52, 5 by 47 or 48, t by 45 or 46, u by 62 or 63, w by 58, and y by 74 or 77. Numbers of three digits were used to represent particular people or places. Thus 148 stood for France, 189 for the King, 260 for the Queen, 354 foi: Prince Rupert, and so on. Further, there were a few special symbols, thus ^1 stood for of, n\ for to, and /I for is. The numbers 2 to 4 and 65 to 72 were non- significant, and were to be struck out or neglected by the recipient of the message. Each symbol is separated from that which follows it by a full-stop. A similar, though less elaborate, system was used by the French in the Peninsular War. An excellent illustration of the inherent defects of this method is to be found in the writings of the late Sir Charles Wheatstone. A paper in cipher, every page of which was initialed by Charles I, and countersigned by Lord Digby, was purchased some years * First Report of the Royal Commisiion on Historical Mayiimcrijits, 1870, pp. 2, 4. 27—2 420 CR^PTOGRAPJdS AND CIPHERS [CH. XVllI ago by the British Museum. It was believed to be a state paper of importance. It consists of a series of numbers with- out any clue to their meaning, or any indication of a division between words. The task of reading it was rendered the more difiScult by the supposition, which proved incorrect, that the document was in English ; but notwithstanding this, Sir Charles Wheatstone discovered the key*. In this cipher a was repre- sented by any of the numbers 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, or 17, 6 by 18, 19, and so on, while some 65 special words were represented by particular numbers: in all about 150 different symbols were used. The famous diary of Samuel Pepys is commonly said to have been written in cipher, but in reality it is written in shorthand according to a system invented by T. Sheltonf. It is however somewhat difficult to read, for the vowels are usually omitted, and Pepys used some arbitrary signs for terminations, particles, and certain words — so far turning it into a cipher. Further, in certain places, where the matter is such that it can hardly be expressed with decency, he changed from English to a foreign language, or inserted non-significant letters. Shelton's system had been forgotten when attention was first attracted to the diary. Accordingly we may say that, to those who first tried to read it, it was written in cipher, but Pepy's contemporaries would have properly described it as being written in shorthand, though with a few modifications of his own invention. A system of shorthand specially invented for the purpose is a true cipher. Such a system in which the letters were represented by four strokes varying in length and position was employed by Charles I. Another such system in which each letter is represented either by a dot or by a line of constant length was used by the Earl of Glamorgan, better known by his subsequent title of Marquis of Worcester, in 1645; each of these * The document, its translation, and the key used, are given iu Wheatstone 's Scientific Papers, London, 1879, pp. 321—341. t Tachy-graphy, by T. Shelton. The earliest edition I have seen is dated 1641. A somewhat similar system by W. Cartwright was issued by J. Eich under the title Semographie, London, 1644. CH. XVIIl] CRYPTOGRAPHS AND CIPHERS 421 was a cipher of the first type arirl iiad the defects inherent in almost every cipher of this kind: in fact Glamorgan's letter was deciphered, and the system was discovered by H. Dircks*. Obsolete systems of shorthand f may be thus used as ciphers. It is always difficult to read a very short message in cipher, since necessarily the clues are few in number. When the Chevalier de Rohan was sent to the Bastille, on suspicion of treason, there was no evidence against him except what might be extracted from Monsieur Latruaumont. The latter died without making any admission. De Rohan's friends had ar- ranged with him to communicate the result of Latruaumont's examination, and accordingly in sending him some fresh body linen they wrote on one of the shirts Mg dulhxcclgu ghj yontj, Im ct idgc alj. For twenty-four hours de Rohan pored over the message, but, failing to read it, he admitted his guilt, and was executed November 27, 1674 The cipher is a simple one of the first type, but the communication is so short that unless the key were known it would not be easy to read it. Had de Rohan suspected that the second word was pvisonnier, it would have given him 7 out of the 12 letters used, and as the first and third words suggest the symbols used for I and t, he could hardly have failed to read the message. Marie Antoinette used what was in effect a St Cyr cipher, consisting of 11 substitution alphabets employed in succession. The first alphabet was n, o, p, z, a, h, I, m\ the next, 0, p, q, m, n; the next /j, q, r, n, o; and so on. An expert would easily read a message in this cipher. One of the systems in use to-day is the five digit code- book cipher, to which I have already alluded. In this, a code dictionary is prepared in which every word likely to be used is printed, and the words are numbered consecutively 00000, 00001, ... up, if necessary, to 99999. Thus each word is • Life of the Marquis of Worcester by H. Dircks, London, 1865. Worcester's system of shorthand was described by him in his Century of Inventions , London, 1683, sections 3, 4, 5. + Various systems, includinej those used in classical and medieval times, are described in the History of Shortiiand by T. Anderson, London, 1862. 422 CRYPTOGRAPHS AND CIPHERS [CH. XVIII represented by a number of five digits, and there are 10*^ such numbers available. The message is first written down in words. Below that it is written in numbers, each word being replaced by the number corresponding to it. To each of these numbers is added some definite pre-arranged clue number — the words in the dictionary being assumed to be arranged cyclically, so that if the resulting number exceeds 10^ it is denoted onl}^ by the excess above 10\ The resulting numbers are sent as a message. On receipt of the message it is divided into consecutive groups of five numbers, each group representing a word. From each number is subtracted the pre-arranged clue number, and then the message can be read off by the code dictionary. If and when such a message is published, the construction of the sentences is usually altered before publication, so that the key may not be discoverable by anyone in possession of the code- book or who has seen the cipher message. This is a rule applicable to all cryptographs and ciphers. This is a cipher with 10^ symbols, and as each symbol consists of five digits, a message of n words is denoted by 5n digits, and probably is not longer than the message when written in the ordinary way. Since however the number of words required is less than 10^ the spare numbers may be used to represent collocations of words which constantly occur, and if so the cipher message may be slightly shortened. If the clue number is the same all through the message it would be possible by not more than 10^ trials to discover the message. This is not a serious risk, but, slight though it is, it can be avoided if the clue number is varied; the clue number might, for instance, be 781 for the next three words, 791 for the next five words, 801 for the next seven words, and so on. Further it may be arranged that the clue numbers shall be changed every day; thus on the seventh day of the month they might be 781, 791, &c., and on the eighth day 881, 891, &c., and so on. This cipher can however be further improved by inserting at some step, say after each mth digit, an unmeaning digit. For example, if, in the original message written in numbers, we CH. XVIIl] CRYPTOGRAPHS AND CIPHERS 423 insert a 9 after every seven digits we shall get a collection of words (each represented by five digits), most of which would have no connection with the original message, and probably the number of digits used in the message itself would no longer be a multiple of 5. Of course the receiver has only to reverse the process in order to read the message. It is however unnecessary to use five symbols for each word. For if w^e make a similar code with the twenty-six letters of the alphabet instead of the ten digits, four letters for each word or phrase would give us 26^ that is, 456976 possible variations. Thus the message would be shorter and the power of the code increased. Further, if we like to use the ten digits and the twenty-six letters of the alphabet — all of which are easily telegraphed — we could, by only using three symbols, obtain 36^ that is, 4G656 possible words, which would be sufficient for all practical purposes. This code, at any rate with these modifications, is unde- cipherable by strangers, but it has the disadvantages that those who use it must always have the code dictionary available, and that it takes a considerable time to code or decode a com- munication. For practical purposes its use would be confined to communications which could be deciphered at leisure in an office. ^24 CHAPTER XIX. HYPER-SPACE*. I propose to devote the remaining pages to the considera- tion, from the point of view of a mathematician, of certain properties of space, time, and matter, and to a sketch of some hypotheses as to their nature. Philosophers tell us that space, time, and matter are the "categories under which phj^sical phenomena are concerned." They cannot be defined, and such * On the possibility of the existence of space of more than three dimensions see C. H. Hinton, Scientific Romances, London, 1886, a most interesting work, from which I have derived much assistance in compiling the earlier part of this chapter; his later work, The Fourth Dimension, London, 1904, may be also consulted. See also G. F. Kodwell, Nature, May 1, 1873, vol. viii, pp. 8, 9 ; and E. A. Abbott, Flatland, London, 1884. On Non-Euclidean geometry, see chapter xiii above. The theory is due primarily to N. I. Lobatschewsky, Geomctrische Untersuchtingen zur Theorie der Parallellinien, Berhn, 1840 (originally given in a lecture in 1826) ; to C. F. Gauss {ex. gr. letters to Schumacher, May 17, 1831, July 12, 1831, and Nov. 28, 1846, printed in Gauss's collected works); and to J. Bolyai, Appendix to the first volume of his father's Tcntamen, Maros-Vasarkely, 1832 ; though the subject had been discussed by J. Saccheri as long ago as 1733 : its development was mainly the work of G. F. B. Kiemann, Ueher die Hypothesen welche der Geo- metric zu Grunde liegen, written in 1854, Gottinger Abhandlungen, 1866-7, vol. xin, pp. 131 — 152 (translated in Nature, May 1 and 8, 1873, vol. viii, pp. 14—17, 36—37) ; H. L. F. von Helmholtz, Gottinger Nachrichten, June 3, 1868, pp. 193 — 221 ; and E.Beltrami, Saggio di Interpretazione della Geometria non-Euclidean Naples, 1868, and the Annali di Matematica, series 2, vol. ii, pp. 232 — 255 : see an article by von Helmholtz in the Academy, Feb. 12, 1870, vol. i, pp. 128 — 131. In recent years the theory has been treated by several mathematicians. On hyper-space, see V. Schlegel, Enseignement Mathematique, Paris, vol. ii, 1900; and D. M. Y. Somerville, Bibliography of Non-Euclidean Geometry y St Andrews, 1911. CH. XIX] HYPER-SPACE 425 explanations of them as have been offered involve difficulties of the highest order and are far from simplifying our conceptions of them. I shall not discuss the metaphysical theories that profess to account for the origin of our conceptions of them, for these theories rest on assertions which are incapable of definite proof — a foundation which does not commend itself to a scientific student. The means of measuring space, time, and mass, and the investigation of their properties fall within the domain of mathematics. I devote this chapter to considerations connected with space, leaving the subjects of time and mass to the following two chapters. I confine my remarks to two speculations which recently have attracted considerable attention. These are (i) the possi- bility of the existence of space of more than three dimensions, and (ii) the possibility of kinds of geometry, especially of tw^o dimensions, other than those which are treated in the usual text-books : some aspects of the latter question have been already considered in chapter xiil. These problems are related. The term hyper-space was used originally of space of more than three dimensions, but now it is often employed to denote also any non-Euclidean space. I attach the wider meaning to it, and it is in that sense that this chapter is on the subject of hyper-space. In regard to the first of these questions, the conception of a world of more than three dimensions is facilitated by the fact that there is no difficulty in imagining a world confined to only two dimensions — which we may take for simplicity to be a plane, though equally well it might be a spherical or other surface. We may picture the inhabitants of flatland as moving either on the surflice of a plane or between two parallel and adjacent planes. They could move in any direction along the plane, but they could not move perpendicularly to it, and would have no consciousness that such a motion was possible. We may suppose them to have no thickness, in which case they would be mere geometrical abstractions; or, preferably, we may 426 HYPER-SPACE [CH. XIX think of them as having a small but uniform thickness, in which case they would be realities. Several writers have amused themselves by expounding and illustrating the conditions of life in such a world. To take a very simple instance* a knot is impossible in flatland, a simple alteration which alone would make some difference in the experience of the inhabitants as compared with our own. If an inhabitant of flatland was able to move in three dimensions, he would be credited with supernatural powers by those who were unable so to move; for he could appear or disappear at will, could (so far as they could tell) create matter or destroy it, and would be free from so many constraints to which the other inhabitants were subject that his actions would be inexplicable to them. We may go one step lower, and conceive of a world of one dimension — like a long tube — in which the inhabitants could move only forwards and backwards. In such a universe there would be lines of varying lengths, but there could be no geometrical figures. To those who are familiar with space of higher dimensions, life in line-land would seem somewhat dull. It is commonly said that an inhabitant could know only two other individuals; namely, his neighbours, one on each side. If the tube in which he lived was itself of only one dimension, this is true ; but we can conceive an arrangement of tubes in two or three dimensions, where an occupant would be conscious of motion in only one dimension, and yet which would permit of more variety in the number of his acquaintances and con- ditions of existence. Our conscious life is in three dimensions, and naturally the idea occurs whether there may not be a fourth dimension. No inhabitant of flatland could realize what life in three dimensions * It is obvious that a knot cannot be tied in space of two dimensions. As long ago as 1876, F. C. Klein showed that knots cannot exist in space of four dimensions ; see Mothematische Annalen, Leipzig, 1876, vol. ix, p. 478. It is not easy to give a definition of a knot in hyper-space, but, taking it in its ordinary sense, it would seem that it is only in space of three dimensions that knots can be tied in strings : see D. M. Y. Somerville, Messenger of Mathe- matics, N.S., vol. XXXVI, 1907, pp. 139—144. CH. XIX] HYPER-SPACE 427 would mean, though, if he evolved an analytical geometry applicable to the world in which he lived, he might be able to extend it so as to obtain results true of that world in three dimensions which would be to him unknown and inconceivable. Similarly we cannot realize what life in four dimensions is like, though we can use analytical geometry to obtain results true of that world, or even of worlds of higher dimensions. Moreover the analogy of our position to the inhabitants of Hatland enables us to form some idea of how inhabitants of space of four dimensions would regard us. Just as the inhabitants of flatland might be conceived as being either mere geometrical abstractions, or real and of a uniform thickness in the third dimension, so, if there is a fourth dimension, we may be regarded either as having no thickness in that dim.ension, in which event we are mere (geometrical) abstractions — as indeed idealist philosophers have asserted to be the case — or as having a uniform thickness in that dimension, in which event we are living in four dimensions although we are not conscious of it. In the latter case it is reasonable to suppose that the thickness in the fourth dimension of bodies in our world is small and possibly constant; it has been conjectured also that it is comparable with the other dimensions of the molecules of matter, and if so it is possible that the constitution of matter and its fundamental properties may supply experi- mental data which will give a physical basis for proving or disproving the existence of this fourth dimension. If we could look down on the inhabitants of flatland we could see their anatomy and what was happening inside them. Similarly an inhabitant of four-dimensional space could see inside us. An inhabitant of flatland could get out of a room, such as a rectangle, only through some opening, but, if for a moment he could step into three dimensions, he could reappear on the other side of any boundaries placed to retain him. Similarly, if we came across persons who could move out of a closed prison-cell without going through any of the openings in it, there might be some reason for thinking that they did it by 428 HYPER-SPACE [CH. XIX passing first in the direction of the fourth dimension and then back again into our space. This however is unknown. Again, if a finite solid was passed slowly through flatland, the inhabitants would be conscious only of that part of it which was in their plane. Thus they would see the shape of the object gradually change and ultimately vanish. In the same way, if a body of four dimensions was passed through our space, we should be conscious of it only as a solid body, namely, the section of the body by our space, whose form and appearance gradually changed and perhaps ultimately vanished. It has been suggested that the birth, growth, life, and death of animals may be explained thus as the passage of finite four-dimensional bodies through our three-dimensional space. I believe that this idea is due to Hinton. The same argument is applicable to all material bodies. The impenetrability and inertia of matter are necessary conse- quences ; the conservation of energy follows, provided that the velocity with which the bodies move in the fourth dimension is properly chosen: but the indestructibility of matter rests on the assumption that the body does not pass completely through our space. I omit the details connected with change of density as the size of the section by our space varies. We cannot prove the existence of space of four dimensions, but it is interesting to enquire whether it is probable that such space actually exists. To discuss this, first let us consider how an inhabitant of flatland might find arguments to support the view that space of three dimensions existed, and then let us see whether analogous arguments apply to our world. I commence with considerations based on geometry and then proceed to those founded on physics. Inhabitants of flatland would find that they could have two triangles of which the elements were equal, element to element, and yet which could not be superposed. We know that the explanation of this fact is that, in order to superpose them, one of the triangles would have to be turned over so that its under- surface came on to the upper side, but of course such a movement would be to them inconceivable. Possibly however they might CH. XIX] HYPER-SPACE . 429 have suspected it by noticing that inhabitants of one-dimensional space might experience a similar difficulty in comparing the equality of two lines, ABC and CB'A\ each defined by a set of three points. We may suppose that the lines are equal and such that corresponding points in them could be superposed by rotation round C — a movement inconceivable to the inhabitants — but an inhabitant of such a world in moving along from A to A' would not arrive at the corresponding points in the two lines in the same relative order, and thus might hesitate to believe that they were equal. Hence inhabitants of flatland might infer by analogy that by turning one of the triangles over through three-dimensional space they could make them coincide. We have a somewhat similar difficulty in our geometry. We can construct triangles in three dimensions — such as two spherical triangles — whose elements are equal respectively one to the other, but which cannot be superposed. Similarly we may have two helices whose elements are equal respectively, one having a right-handed twist and the other a left-handed twist, but it is impossible to make one fill exactly the same parts of space as the other does. Again, we may conceive of two solids, such as a right hand and a left hand, which are exactly similar and equal but of which one cannot be made to occupy exactly the same position in space as the other does. These are difficulties similar to those which would be experi- enced by the inhabitants of flatland in comparing triangles; and it may be conjectured that in the same way as such difficulties in the geometry of an inhabitant in space of one dimension are explicable by temporarily moving the figure into space of two dimensions by means of a rotation round a point, and as such difficulties in the geometry of flatland are explicable by temporarily moving the figure into space of three dimensions by means of a rotation round a line, so such difficulties in our geometry would disappear if we could temporarily move our figures into space of four dimensions by means of a rotation round a plane — a movement which of course is inconceivable to us. Next we may enquire whether the hypothesis of our exist- ence in a space of four dimensions affords an explanation of 430 HYPER-SPACE [CH. XIX any difficulties or apparent inconsistencies in our physical science*. The current conception of the luminiferous ether, the explanation of gi'avity, and the fact that there are only a finite number of kinds of matter, all the atoms of each kind being similar, present such difficulties and inconsistencies. To see whether the hypothesis of a four-dimensional space gives any aid to their elucidation, we shall do best to consider first the analogous problems in two dimensions. We live on a solid body, which is nearly spherical, and which moves round the sun under an attraction directed to it. To realize a corresponding life in flatland we must suppose that the inhabitants live on the rim of a (planetary) disc which rotates round another (solar) disc under an attraction directed towards it. We may suppose that the planetary world thus formed rests on a smooth plane, or other surface of constant curvature ; but the pressure on this plane and even its existence would be unknown to the inhabitants, though they would be conscious of their attraction to the centre of the disc on which they lived. Of course they would be also aware of the bodies, solid, liquid, or gaseous, which were on its rim, or on such points of its interior as they could reach. Every particle of matter in such a world would rest on this plane medium. Hence, if any particle was set vibrating, it would give up a part of its motion to the supporting plane. The vibrations thus caused in the plane would spread out in all directions, and the plane would communicate vibrations to any other particles resting on it. Thus any form of energy caused by vibrations, such as light, radiant heat, electricity, and possibly attraction, could be transmitted from one point to another without the presence of any intervening medium which the inhabitants could detect. If the particles were supported on a uniform elastic plane film, the intensity of the disturbance at any other point would vary inversely as the distance of the point from the source of * See a note by myself in the Messenger of Mathematics, Cambridge, 1891, vol. XXI, pp. 20 — 24, from which the above argument is extracted. The question has been treated by Hinton on similar lines. CH. XIX] HYPER-SPACE 431 disturbance ; if on a uniform elastic solid medium, it would vary inversely as the square of that distance. But, if the supporting medium was vibrating, then, wherever a particle rested on it, some of the energy in the plane would be given up to that particle, and thus the vibrations of the intervening medium would be hindered when it was associated with matter. If the inhabitants of this two-dimensional world were sufficiently intelligent to reason about the manner in which energy was transmitted they would be landed in a difficulty. Possibly they might be unable to explain gravitation between two particles — and therefore between the solar disc and their disc — except by supposing vibrations in a rigid medium between the two particles or discs. Again, they might be able to detect that radiant light and heat, such as the solar light and heat, were transmitted by vibrations transverse to the direction from which they came, though they could realize only such vibrations as were in their plane, and they might determine experimentally that in order to transmit such vibrations a medium of great rigidity (which we may call ether) was necessary. Yet in both the above cases they would have also distinct evidence that there was no medium capable of resisting motion in the space around them, or between their disc and the solar disc. The explanation of these conflicting results lies in the fact that their universe was supported by a plane, of which they were necessarily unconscious, and that this rigid elastic plane was the ether which transmitted the vibrations. Now suppose that the bodies in our universe have a uniform thickness in the fourth dimension, and that in that direction our universe rests on a homogeneous elastic body whose thick- ness in that direction is small and constant. The transmission of force and radiant energy, without the intervention of an intervening medium, may be explained by the vibrations of the supporting space, even though the vibrations are not them- selves in the fourth dimension. Also we should find, as in fact we do, that the vibrations of the luminiferous ether are hindered when it is associated with matter. I have assumed 432 HYPER-SPACE [CH. XIX that the thickness of the supporting space is small and uniform, because then the intensity of the energy transmitted from a source to any point would vary inversely as the square of the distance, as is the case ; whereas if the supporting space was a body of four dimensions, the law would be that of the inverse cube of the distance. The application of this hypothesis to the third difficulty mentioned above — namely, to show why there are in our universe only a finite number of kinds of atoms, all the atoms of each kind having in common a number of sharply defined properties — will be given later*. Thus the assumption of the existence of a four-dimensional homogeneous elastic body on which our three-dimensional universe rests, affords an explanation of some difficulties in our physical science. It may be thought that it is hopeless to try to realize a figure in four dimensions. Nevertheless attempts have been made to see what the sections of such a figure would look like. If the boundary of a solid is (p {x, y, z) — 0, we can obtain some idea of its form by taking a series of plane sections by planes parallel to 2: = 0, and mentally superposing them. In four dimensions the boundary of a body would be <^ (a?, y, z, w) — 0, and attempts have been made to realize the form of such a body by making models of a series of solids in three dimensions formed by sections parallel to t(; = 0. Again, we can represent a solid in perspective by taking sections by three co-ordinate planes. In the case of a four-dimensional body the section by each of the four co-ordinate solids will be a solid, and attempts have been made by drawing these to get an idea of the form of the body. Of course a four-dimensional body will be .bounded by solids. The possible forms of regular bodies in four dimensions, analogous to polyhedrons in space of three dimensions, have been discussed by Stringhamf. * See below, p. 475. t American Journal oj Mathematics, 1880, vol. in, pp. 1 — 14. CH. XIX] HYPEK-SPACE 433 I now turn to the second of the two problems mentioned at the beginning of the chapter: namely, the possibility of there being kinds of geometry other than those which are treated in the usual elementary text-books. This subject is so technical that in a book of this nature I can do little more than give a sketch of the argument on which the idea is based. The Euclidean system of geometry, with which alone most people are acquainted, rests on a number of independent axioms and postulates. Those which are necessary for Euclid's geometry have, within recent years, been investigated and scheduled. They include not only those explicitly given by him, but some others which he unconsciously used. If these are varied, or other axioms are assumed, we get a different series of propo- sitions, and any consistent body of such propositions constitutes a system of geometry. Hence there is no limit to the number of possible non-Euclidean geometries that can be constructed. Among Euclid's axioms and postulates is one on parallel lines, which is usually stated in the form that if a straight line meets two straight lines, so as to make the sum of the two interior angles on the same side of it less than two right angles, then these straight lines being continually produced will at length meet upon that side on which are the angles whose sum is less than two right angles. Expressed in this form the axiom is far from obvious, and from early times numerous attempts have been made to prove it. All such attempts failed, and it is now known that the axiom cannot be deduced from the other axioms assumed by Euclid. I have already discussed this question in chapter xiii, and I do not propose to add here anything more. The conclusion was that three consistent systems of geometry could be constructed, termed respectively hyperbolic, parabolic or Euclidean, and elliptic. These are dis- tinguished from one another according as no straight line (that is, a geodetic line), or only one straight line, or a pencil of straight lines can be drawn through a point parallel to a given straight line. To work out a body of propositions relating to figures on a surface (that is, a two-dimensional space) analogous to that given B. R. 28 434 HYPER-SPACE [CH. XIX by Euclid relating to figures drawn on a plane, it is necessary that it should be possible at any point on the surface to con- struct a figure congruent to a given figure ; this is equivalent to saying that if we take up a triangle drawn anywhere on the surface and move it to another part of the surface, it will lie flat on the surface there. This is so only if the measure of curvature at every point of the surface is constant. Such surfaces of constant curvature are spherical surfaces, where the product is positive; plane surfaces, where it is zero; pseudo- spherical surfaces, where it is negative. A tractroid, that is, a figure produced by the revolution of a tractrix about its asymp- tote, is an example of a pseudo-spherical surface ; it is saddle- shaped at every point. Hence on spheres, planes, and tractroids we can construct these systems of geometry. And these systems are respectively examples of hyperbolic, Euclidean, and elliptic geometries. Moreover if any surface is bent without dilation or contrac- tion, the measure of curvature remains unaltered. Thus from these three surfaces we can form others on which congruent figures, and therefore consistent systems of geometry, can be constructed. For instance, a plane can be rolled into a cone or cylinder, and the system of geometry on a conical or cylindrical surface will be similar to that on a plane. Similarly a hemi- sphere can be rolled up into a sort of spindle, and the system of geometry on such a spindle will be similar to that on a sphere. In fact there are three kinds of surfaces of constant positive curvature, which are respectively spherical, spindle-shaped, and bolster-shaped, and on each of these a system of hyperbolic geometry can be constructed. So too there are three kinds of surfaces of constant negative curvature. Throughout this discussion I have tacitly assumed that the measure of distance employed remains the same wherever it is employed. If this is not so, we may evolve in plane space non-Euclidean geometries which are not inconsistent with ex- perience. Suppose, to take one example, that a foot-rule shrunk as it w^as moved away from some point of the plane — as it might do by a fall of temperature. Then a distance, which we CH. XIX] HYPER-SPACE 435 should describe as finite, micrht when measured by this rule appear to be infinite, since repeated applications of the ever- shortening rule would not cover it. Thus the boundary of what we should describe as a finite area round the point would to those who were confined to the area of this foot-rule appear to be infinitely distant from the point. If the law of shrinking be properly chosen, the geometry of figures in this area would be hyperbolic. The length of the foot-rule might also alter in such a way as to lead to an elliptic geometiy*. Thus the conception of hyperbolic, Euclidean, and elliptic geometries can be reached from the theory of the measure of distances as well as from the theory of parallels and of con- gruent figures. This view has led to further discussion of the essential characteristics of space by F. C. Klein, S. Lie, D. Hilbert, M. L. Gerard, A. N. Whitehead, and others. The above remarks refer only to space of two dimensions. Naturally there arises the question whether there are different kinds of non- Euclidean space of three or more dimensions. Kiemann showed that there are three kinds of non-Euclidean space of three dimensions having properties analogous to the three kinds of non-Euclidean space of two dimensions already discussed. These are differentiated by the test whether at every point no geodetical surface, or one geodetical surface, or a fasciculus of geodetical surfaces can be drawn parallel to a given surface : a geodetical surface being defined as such that every geodetic line joining two points on it lies wholly on the surface. It may be added that each of the three systems of geometry of two dimensions described above may be deduced as properties of a surface in each of these three kinds of non-Euclidean space of three dimensions. It is evident that the properties of non-Euclidean space of three dimensions are deducible only by the aid of mathematics, and cannot be illustrated materially, for in order to realize or construct surfaces in non-Euclidean space of two dimensions we think of or use models in space of three dimensions ; similarly * See A. Cayley, Collected Mailieinatical Fa^era, Cambridge, 1396, vol. xi, p. -iiio et seq. 28—2 436 HYPER-SPACE [CH. XIX the only way in which we could construct models illustrating non-Euclidean space of three dimensions would be by utilizing space of four dimensions. We may proceed yet further and conceive of non-Euclidean geometries of more than three dimensions, but this remains, as yet, an unworked field. Returning to the former question of non-Euclidean geome- tries of two dimensions, I wish again to emphasize the fact that, if the axioms enunciated in the usual books on elementary geometry are replaced by others, it is possible to construct other consistent systems of geometry. For instance, just as one kind of non-Euclidean geometry has been constructed by assuming that Euclid's parallel postulate is not true, so D. Hilbert and M. Dehn of Gottingen have elaborated another kind, known as non- Archimedian geometry. Archimedes had assumed as axiomatic that if A and B are magnitudes of the same kind and order, it is possible to find a multiple of A which is gTeater than B, which implied that the geometrical magnitudes considered are continuous. If this be denied, Hilbert and Dehn showed* that it is still possible to construct consistent systems of geometry closely analogous to that given by Euclid. Assuming that in these a pencil of straight lines can be drawn through a point parallel to a given straight line, then in one form, known as the non-Legendrian system, the angle-sum of a triangle is greater than two right angles, while in another form, termed the semi- Euclidean system, the sum-angle is equal to two right angles. I do not however concern myself here further with these systems, for the methods and results appeal only to the professional mathematician. On the other hand the elliptic, parabolic, and hyperbolic systems described in chapter X have a special interest, from the somewhat sensational fact that they lead to no results necessarily inconsistent with the properties, as far as we can observe them, of the space in which we live ; we are not at present acquainted with any other systems which are con- sistent with our experience. We may, however, fairly say that of these systems the Euclidean is the simplest. • M. Dehn, Matheinatischen Annalen, Leipzig, 1900, vol. Lvn, pp. 404—439. CH. XIX] HYPER-SPACE 437 If we go a step further and ask what is meant by saying that a geometry is true or false we land ourselves in an inter- minable academic dispute. Some philosophers hold that certain axioms are necessarily true independent of all experience, or at any rate are necessarily true as far as our experience extends. Others agree with Poincare, that the selection of a geometry is really a matter of convenience, and that that geometry is the best which enables us to state the known physical laws in the simplest form ; or, more generally, that it is desirable to choose axioms and to define quantities so as to permit the expression in as simple a way as possible of all observed laws and facts in nature. But for practical purposes the conclusion is immaterial, and at any rate the discussion belongs to metaphysics rather than mathematics. 438 CHAPTER XX. TIME AND ITS MEASUREMENT. The problems connected with time are totally different in character from those concerning space which I discussed in the last chapter. I there stated that the life of people living in space of one dimension would be uninteresting, and that probably they would find it impossible to realize life in space of higher dimensions. In questions connected with time we find ourselves in a somewhat similar position. Mentally, we can realize a past and a future — thus going backwards and forwards — actually we go only forwards. Hence time is analogous to space of one dimension. Were our time of two dimensions, the conditions of our life would be infinitely varied, but we can form no con- ception of what such a phrase means, and I do not think that any attempts have been made to work it out. The idea of time, when we examine it carefully, involves many difficulties. For instance, we speak of an instant of time as if it were absolutely definite. If so we could represent it by a point on a line, and the idea of simultaneity would be simple, for two events could be regarded as simultaneous when their representative points were coincident. But in reality sensations have an appreciable duration, even though it be very small. This duration may be represented by an interval on a line, and it would seem reasonable to say that two events are simultaneous when their representative intervals have a common part ; hence two events which are simultaneous with the same event are not necessarily simultaneous with one another. Here, however, I exclude these quasi-metaphysical questions, and concern myself CH. XX] TIME AND ITS MEASUREMENT 439 mainly with questions concerninc^ the measurement of time, and I shall treat these rather from a historical than from a physical point of view. In order to measure anything we must have an unalterable unit of the same kind, and we must be able to determine how often that unit is contained in the quantity to be measured. Hence only those things can be measured which are capable of addition to things of the same kind. Thus to measure a length we may take a foot-rule, and by applying it to the given length as often as is necessary, we shall find how many feet the length contains. But in comparing lengths we assume as the result of experience that the length of the foot-rule is constant, or rather that any alteration in it can be determined ; and, if this assumption was denied, we could not prove it, though, if numerous repetitions of the experiment under varying conditions always gave the same result, probably we should feel no doubt as to the correctness of our method. It is evident that the measurement of time is a more difficult matter. We cannot keep a unit by us in the same way as we can keep a foot-rule ; nor can we repeat the measurement over and over again, for time once passed is gone for ever. Hence we cannot appeal directly to our sensations to justify our measurement. Thus, if we say that a certain duration is four hours, it is only by a process of reasoning that we can show that each of the hours is of the same duration. The establishment of a scientific unit for measuring dura- tions has been a long and slow affair. The process seems to have been as follows. Originally man observed that certain natural phenomena recurred after the interval of a day, say from sunrise to sunrise. Experience — for example, the amount of work that could be done in it — showed that the length of every day was about the same, and, assuming that this was accurately so, man had a unit by which he could measure durations. The present subdivision of a day into hours, minutes, and seconds is ai'titicial, and apparently is derived £iom the Babyionians, 440 TIME AND ITS MEASUREMENT [CH. XX Similarly a month and a year are natural units of time though it is not easy to determine precisely their beginnings and endings. So long as men were concerned merely with durations which were exact multiples of these units or which needed only a rough estimate, this did very well ; but as soon as they tried to compare the different units or to estimate durations measured by part of a unit they found difficulties. In particular it cannot have been long before it was noticed that the duration of the same day differed in different places, and that even at the same place different days differed in duration at different times of the year, and thus that the duration of a day was not an invariable unit. The question then arises as to whether we can jfind a fixed unit by which a duration can be measured, and whether we have any assurance that the seconds and minutes used to-day for that purpose are all of equal duration. To answer this we must see how a mathematician would define a unit of time. Probably he would say that experience leads us to believe that, if a rigid body is set moving in a straight line without any external force acting on it, it will go on moving in that line ; and those times are taken to be equal in which it passes over equal spaces : similarly, if it is set rotating about a principal axis passing through its centre of mass, those times are taken to be equal in which it turns through equal angles. Our experiences are consistent with this statement, and that is as high an authority as a mathematician hopes to get. The spaces and the angles can be measured, and thus dura- tions can be compared. Now the earth may be taken roughly as a rigid body rotating about a principal axis passing through its centre of mass, and subject to no external forces affecting its rotation : hence the time it takes to turn through four right angles, i.e. through 360°, is always the same; this is called a sidereal day: the time to turn through one twenty-fourth part of 360°, i.e. through 15°, is an hour: the time to turn through one-sixtieth part of 15°, i.e. through 15', is a minute : and so oJi. CH. XX] TIME AND ITS MEASUREMENT 441 If, by the progress of astronomical research, we find that there are external forces affecting the rotation of the earth, mathematics would have to be invoked to find what the time of rotation would be if those forces ceased to act, and this would give us a correction to be applied to the unit chosen. In the same way we may say that although an increase of temperature affects the length of a foot-rule, yet its change of length can be determined, and thus applied as a correction to the foot-rule when it is used as the unit of length. As a matter of fact there is reason to think that the earth takes about one sixty-sixth of a second longer to turn through four right angles now than it did 2500 years ago, and thus the duration of a second is just a trifle longer to-day than was the case when the Romans were laying the foundations of the power of their city. The sidereal day can be determined only by refined astro- nomical observations and is not a unit suitable for ordinary purposes. The relations of civil life depend mainly on the sun, and he is our natural time-keeper. The true solar day is the time occupied by the earth in making one revolution on its axis relative to the sun ; it is true noon when the sun is on the meridian. Owing to the motion of the sun relative to the earth, the true solar day is about four minutes longer than a sidereal day. The true solar day is not however always of the same duration. This is inconvenient if we measure time by clocks (as now for nearly two centuries has been usual in Western Europe) and not by sun-dials, and therefore we take the average duration of the true solar day as the measure of a day : this is called the mean solar day. Moreover to define the noon of a mean solar day we suppose a point to move uniformly round the ecliptic coinciding with the sun at each apse, and further we suppose a fictitious sun, called the mean sun, to move in the celestial equator so that its distance from the first point of Aries ii) the same as that of this point : it is mean noon when this mean sun . is on the meridian. The mean solar day is divided into hours, minutes, and seconds ; and these are the usual units of time in civil life. 44)2 TIME AND ITS MEASUREMENT [CH. XX The time indicated by our clocks and watches is mean solar time; that marked on ordinary sun-dials is true solar time. The difference between them is the equation of time : this may amount at some periods of the year to a little more than a quarter of an hour. In England we take the Greenwich meridian as our origin for longitudes, and instead of local mean solar time we take Greenwich mean solar time as the civil standard. Of course mean time is a comparatively recent invention. The French were the last civilized nation to abandon the use of true time : this was in 1816. Formerly there was no common agreement as to when the day began. In parts of ancient Greece and in Japan the interval from sunrise to sunset was divided into twelve hours, and that from sunset to sunrise into twelve hours. The Jews, Chinese, Athenians, and, for a long time, the Italians, divided their day into twenty-four hours, beginning at the hour of sunset, which of course varies every day : this method is said to have been used as late as the latter half of the nineteenth century in certain villages near Naples, except that the day began half-an-hour after sunset — the clocks being re-set once a week. Similarly the Babylonians, Assyrians, Persians, and until recently the modern Greeks and the inhabitants of the Balearic Islands counted the twenty-four hours of the day from sunrise. Until 1750, the inhabitants of Basle reckoned the twenty-four hours from our 11.0 p.m. The ancient Egyptians and Ptolemy counted the twenty-four hours from noon: this is the practice of modern astronomers. In Western Europe the day is taken to begin at midnight — as was first suggested by Hipparchus — and is divided into two equal periods of twelve hours each. The week of seven days is an artificial unit of time. It had its origin in the East, and was introduced into the West probably during the second century by the Poman emperors, and, except during the French Pevolution, has been subsequently in general use among civilized races. The names of the days are derived from the seven astrological planets, arranged, as was customary, in the order of their apparent times of rotation round tlie earth, CH. XX] TIME AND ITS MEASUREMENT 443 namely, Saturn, Jupiter, Mars, the Sun, Venus, Mercury, and the Moon. The twenty-four hours of the day were dedicated successively to these planets : and the day was consecrated to the planet of the first hour. Thus if the first hour was dedicated to Saturn, the second would be dedicated to Jupiter, and so on ; but the day would be Saturn's day. The twenty-fourth hour of Saturn's day would be dedicated to Mars, thus the first hour of the next day would belong to the Sun ; and the day would be Sun's day. Similarly the next day would be Moon's day ; the next, Mars's day ; the next, Mercury's day; the next, Jupiter's day; and the next, Venus's day. The astronomical month is a natural unit of time depending on the motion of the moon, and containing about 29J- days. The months of the calendar have been evolved gradually as convenient divisions of time, and their history is given in numerous astronomies. In the original Julian arrangement the months in a leap year contained alternately 31 and 30 days, while in other years February had 29 days. This was altered by Augustus in order that his month should not be inferior to one named after his uncle. The solar tropical year is another natural unit of time. According to a recent determination, it contains 365*242216 days, that is, 365^- 5^- 48°^ 47'--4624. Civilized races usually number the passing years consecutively from some fixed date. The Romans reckoned from the traditional date of the foundation of their city. In the sixth century of our era it was suggested that the birth of Christ was a more fitting epoch from which to reckon dates, but it was not until the ninth century that this suggestion was generally adopted. The Egj^ptians knew that the year contained between 365 and 366 days, but the Romans did not profit by this information, for Numa is said to have reckoned 355 days as constituting a year — extra months being occasionally intercalated, so that the seasons might recur at about the same period of the year. In 46 B.C. Julius Caesar decreed that thenceforth the year should contain 365 days, except that in every fourth or leap 444> TIME AND ITS MEASUREMENT [CH. XX year one additional day should be introduced. He ordered this rule to come into force on January 1, 45 B.C. The change was made on the advice of Sosigenes of Alexandria. It must be remembered that the year 1 A.D. follows imme- diately 1 B.C., that is, there is no year 0, and thus 45 B.C. would be a leap year. All historical dates are given now as if the Julian calendar was reckoned backwards as well as forwards from that year*. As a matter of fact, owing to a mistake in the original decree, the Romans, during the first 36 years after 45 B.C., intercalated the extra day every third year, thus pro- ducing an error of 3 days. This was remedied by Augustus, who directed that no intercalation of an extra day should be made in any of the twelve years A.u.c. 746 to 757 inclusive, but that the intercalation should be again made in the year A.U.C. 761 (that is, 8 A.D.) and every succeeding fourth year. The Julian calendar made the year, on an average, con- tain 365*25 days. The actual value is, very approximately, 365"242216 days. Hence the Julian year is too long by about 11 J minutes: this produces an error of nearly one day in 128 years. If the extra day in every thirty-second leap year had been omitted — as was suggested by some unknown Persian astronomer — the error would have been less than one day in 100,000 years. It may be added that Sosigenes was aware that his rule made the year slightly too long. The error in the Julian calendar of rather more than eleven minutes a year gradually accumulated, until in the sixteenth century the seasons arrived some ten days earlier than they should have done. In 1582 Gregory XIII corrected this by omitting ten days from that year, which therefore contained only 355 days. At the same time he decreed that thenceforth every year which was a multiple of a century should be or not be a leap j^ear according as the multiple was or was not divisible by four. The fundamental idea of the reform was due to Lilius, who died before it was carried into effect. The work of framing the new calendar was entrusted to Clavius, who explained the * Herscbel, Astronomy, London, lltli ed. 1871, arts. 916 — 919. CH. XX] TIME AND ITS MEASUREMENT 445 principles and necessary rules in a prolix but accurate work* of over 700 folio pages. The plan adopted was due to a suggestion of Pitatus made in 1552 or perhaps 1537 : the alternative and more accurate proposal of Stoffler, made in 1518, to omit one day in eveiy 134 years, being rejected by Lilius and Clavius for reasons which are not known. Clavius believed the year to contain 365*2425432 days, but he framed his calendar so that a year, on the average, contained 365*2425 days, which he thought to be wrong by one day in 3323 years : in reality it is a trifle more accurate than this, the error amounting to one day in about 3600 years. The change was unpopular, but Ricciolif tells us that, as those miracles which take place on fixed dates — ex. gr. the liquefaction of the blood of S. Januarius — occurred according to the new calendar, the papal decree was presumed to have a di\dne sanction — Deo ipso huic correctioni Gregorianae sub- scribente — and was accepted as a necessary evil. In England a bill to carry out the same reform was intro- duced in 1584, but was withdrawn after being read a second time; and the change was not finally eifected till 1752, when eleven days were omitted from that year. In Roman Catholic countries the new style was adopted in 1582. In the German Lutheran States it was made in 1700. In England, as I have said above, it was introduced in 1752; and in Ireland it was made in 1782. It is well known that the Greek Church still adheres to the Julian calendar. The Mohammedan year contains 12 lunar months, or 354J days, and thus has no connection with the seasons. The Gregorian change in the calendar was introduced in order to keep Easter at the right time of year. The date of Easter depends on that of the vernal equinox, and as the Julian calendar made the year of an average length of 365*25 days instead of 365*242216 days, the vernal equinox came earlier and earlier in the year, and in 1582 had regreded to within about ten days of February. * Romani Galendarii a Greg. XIII Eestituti Explication Kome, 1603. t Chronologia ReJ'ormata, Bonn, 1669, vol. n, p. 206. 446 TIME AND ITS MEASUREMENT [CH. XX The rale for determining Easter is as follows*. In 325 the Nicene Council decreed that the Roman practice should be followed ; and after 463 (or perhaps, 530) the Roman practice required that Easter-day should be the first Sunday after the full moon which occurs on or next following the vernal equinox — full moon being assumed to occur on the fourteenth day from the day of the preceding new moon (though as a matter of fact it occurs on an average after an interval of rather more than 14J days), and the vernal equinox being assumed to fall on March 21 (though as a matter of fact it sometimes falls on March 22). This rule and these assumptions were retained by Gregory on the ground that it was inexpedient to alter a rule with which so many traditions were associated ; but, in order to save disputes as to the exact instant of the occurrence of the new moon, a mean sun and a mean moon defined by Clavius were used in applying the rule. One consequence of using this mean sun and mean moon and giving an artificial definition of full moon is that it may happen, as it did in 1818 and 1845, that the actual full moon occurs on Easter Sunday. In the British Act, 24 Geo. II. cap. 23, the explanatory clause which defines full moon is omitted, but practically full moon has been interpreted to mean the Roman ecclesiastical full moon; hence the Anglican and Roman rules are the same. Until 1774 the German Lutheran States employed the actual sun and moon. Had full moon been taken to mean the fifteenth day of the moon, as is the case in the civil calendar, then the rule might be given in the form that Easter-day is the Sunday on or next after the calendar full moon which occurs next after March 21. Assuming that the Gregorian calendar and tradition are used, there still remains one point in this definition of Easter which might lead to different nations keeping the feast at different times. This arises from the fact that local time is introduced. For instance the difference of local time between * De Morgan, Com;panion to the Almanac, London, 1815, pp. 1 — 36 ; ibid., 1846, pp. 1—10. CH. XX] TIME AND ITS MEASUREMENT 447 Rome and London is about 50 minutes. Thus the instant of the first full moon next after the vernal equinox might occur in Rome on a Sunday morning, say at 12.30 a.m., while in England it would still be Saturday evening, 11.40 p.m., in which case our Easter would be one week earlier than at Rome. Clavius foresaw the difficulty, and the Roman Communion all over the world keep Easter on that day of the month which is determined by the use of the rule at Rome. But presumably the British Parliament intended time to be determined by the Greenwich meridian, and if so the Anglican and Roman dates for Easter might differ by a week ; whether such a case has ever arisen or been discussed I do not know, and I leave to ecclesiastics to say how it should be settled. The usual method of calculating the date on which Easter- day falls in any particular year is involved, and possibly the following simple rule* may be unknown to some of my readers. Let m and n be numbers as defined below, (i) Divide the number of the year by 4, 7, 19; and let the remainders be a, 6, c respectively, (ii) Divide 19c + m by 30, and let d be the remainder, (iii) Divide 2ci + 46 + 6c^ + n by 7, and let e be the remainder, (iv) Then the Easter full moon occurs d days after March 21; and Easter-day is the (22 + c? + e)th of March or the (cZ + e — 9)th day of April, except that if the calculation gives (i = 29 and e= 6 (as happens in 1981) then Easter-day is on April 19 and not on April 26, and if the calculation gives d = 28, e = 6, and also c > 10 (as happens in 1954) then Easter- day is on April 18 and not on April 25, that is, in these two cases Easter falls one week earlier than the date given by the rule. These two exceptional cases cannot occur in the Julian calendar, and in the Gregorian calendar they occur only very rarely. It remains to state the values of m and n for the par- ticular period. In the Julian calendar we have m = 15, n = 6. In the Gregorian calendar we have, from 1582 to 1699 in- clusive, m = 22, 71 = 2; from 1700 to 1799, m=23, n = 3; from 1800 to 1899, m = 23, n==4>; from 1900 to 2099, m = 24, *■ It is due to Gauss ; his proof is given in Zacb's Monatliche Coirespondeiiz, August, 1800, vol. u, pp. 221—230. 448 TIME AND ITS MEASUREMENT [CH. XX w = 5; from 2100 to 2199, m = 24, n = 6; from 2200 to 2299, m = 25, n = 0; from 2300 to 2399, m=26, 7^ = 1; and from 2400 to 2499, m=25, n=l. Thus for the year 1908 we have m = 24, n = 5 ; hence a = 0, 6 = 4, c=8; d = 26; and e = 2: therefore Easter Sunday was on April 19. After the year 4200 the form of the rule will have to be slightly modified. The dominical letter and the golden number of the ecclesi- astical calendar can be at once determined from the values of h and c. The epact, that is, the moon's age at the beginning of the year, can be also easily calculated from the above data in any particular case ; the general formula was given by Delambre, but its value is required so rarely by any but professional astronomers and almanac-makers that it is un- necessary to quote it here. We can evade the necessity of having to recollect the values of m and n by noticing that, if iV is the given year, and if {N/oo} denotes the integral part of the quotient when N is divided by x, then m is the remainder when 15 + ^ is divided by 30, and n is the remainder when 6 + 77 is divided by 7 : where, in the Julian calendar, f = 0, and 77 = ; and, in the Gregorian calendar, ^= {i\^/100} - {i\^/400} - {i\^/300}, and 97={iV/100}-{iV/400}-2. If we use these values of m and n, and if we put for a, b, c their values, namely, a = iV^-4 (i\^/4}, h = N-'7 {N/7}, c = iV^— 19 {i\^/19}, the rule given on the last page takes the following form. Divide 19iY- {N/19} + 15 + f by 30, and let the remainder be d. Next divide 6(N+d + l)- {N/4i} +7) by 7, and let the remainder be e. Then Easter full moon is on the dth day after March 21, and Easter-day is on the (22 -\- d + e)th. of March or the {d + e-9)th of April as the case may be ; except that if the calculation gives d = 29, and e = 6, or if it gives d = 2S, e = 6, and c> 10, then Easter-day is on the (d + e — 16)th of April. Thus, if A^= 1920, we divide 19 (1920) - 101 -1- 15 -t- (19 - 4 - 6) by 30, CH. XX] TIME AND ITS MEASUREMENT 449 which gives d=13, and then we proceed to divide 6(1920 + 13 + l)-480 + (19-4-2) by 7, which gives e = : therefore Easter-day will be on April 4. The above rules cover all the cases worked out with so much labour by Clavius and others*. I may add here a rule, quoted by Zcller, for determining the day of the week corresponding to any given date. Suppose that the pih day of the ^th month of the year N anno domini is the 7'th day of the week, reckoned from the preceding Saturday. Then r is the remainder when ;? + 2^+ {3 (5 + \)ib]-\-N[Nm-'n is divided by 7 ; provided January and February are reckoned respectively as the 13th and 14th months of the preceding year. For instance, Columbus first landed in the New World on October 12, 1492. Here p = 12, ^ = 10, iV=1492, 17 = 0. If we divide 12 + 20 + 6 + 1492 + 373 by 7 we get r = 6 ; hence it was on a Friday. Again, Charles I was executed on January 30, 1G49 N.S. Here ^ = 30, g=13, xV=1648, 77 = 0, and we find r = 3 ; hence it was on a Tuesday. As another example, the battle of Waterloo was fought on June 18, 1815. Here ^ = 18, q = Q, N = 1815, 7} = 12, and we find r = 1 ; hence it took place on a Sunday. Various rules have been given for obtaining these results with less arithmetical calculation, but they depend on the construction of tables which must be consulted in all cases. One rule of this kind is given in Whitakers Almanac. Lightning calculators use such rules and commit the tables to memory. The same results can be also got by mechanical contrivances. The best instrument of this kind with which * Most of the above-mentioned facts about the calendar are taken from Delambre's Astrononiie, Paris, 1814, vol. iii, chap, xxxviii ; and his Histoire de Vustronornie modcrnc, Paris, 1821, vol. i, chap, i: see also A. De Moi^'an, The Book of Almanacs, London, 1851 ; S. Butcher, The Ecclesiastical Calendar, Dublin, 1877; and C. Zeller, Acta Mathematica, Stockholm, 1887, vol. ix, jip. 131 — 136: on the chronological details see J. L. Ideler, Lehrbuch der Chronologie, Berlin, 1831. B. R. 29 450 TIME AND ITS MEASUREMENT [CH. XX I am acquainted is one called the World's Calendar, invented by J. P. Wiles, and issued in London in 1906. I proceed now to give a short account of some of the means of measuring time which were formerly in use. Of devices for measuring time, the earliest of which we have any positive knowledge are the styles or gnomons erected in Egypt and Asia Minor. These were sticks placed vertically in a horizontal piece of ground, and surrounded by three concentric circles, such that every two hours the end of the shadow of the stick passed from one circle to another. Some of these have been found at Pompeii and Tusculum. The sun-dial is not very different in principle. It consists of a rod or style fixed on a plate or dial; usually, but not necessarily, the style is placed so as to be parallel to the axis of the earth. The shadow of the style cast on the plate by the sun falls on lines engraved there which are marked with the corresponding hours. The earliest sun-dial, of which 1 have read, is that made by Berosus in 540 B.C. One was erected by Meton at Athens in 433 B.C. The first sun-dial at Rome was constructed by Papirius Cursor in 306 B.C. Portable sun-dials, with a compass fixed in the face, have been long common in the East as well as in Europe. Other portable instruments of a similar kind were in use in medieval Europe, notably the sun-rings, hereafter described, and the sun-cylinders *. I believe it is not generally known that a sun-dial can be so constructed that the shadow will, for a short time near sunrise and sunset, move backwards on the dialf. This was discovered by Nonez. The explanation is as follows. Every day the sun appears to describe a circle round the pole, and the line joining the point of the style to the sun describes a right cone whose axis points to the pole. The section of this cone by the dial is the curve described by the '■' Thus Chaucer in iheShipman's Tale, "by my chilindre it is prime of day," and Lydgate in the Siege of Thebes, "by my chilyndre I gan anon to see. ..that it drew to nine." • t Ozanam, 1803 edition, vol. ni, p. 321 ; 1840 edition, p. 529. Cfl. XX] TIME AND ITS MEASUREMENT 451 extremity of the shadow, and is a conic. In our latitude the sun is above the horizon for only part of the twenty-four hours, and therefore the extremity of the shadow of the style describes only a part of this conic. Let QQ' be the arc described by the extremity of the shadow of the style from sunrise at Q to sunset at Q', and let S be the point of the style and F the foot of the style, i.e. the point where the style meets the plane of the dial. Suppose that the dial is placed so that the tangents drawn from F to the conic QQ' are real, and that P and P', the points of contact of these tangents, lie on the arc QQ\ If these two conditions are fulfilled, then the shadow will regrede through the angle QFF as its extremity moves from Q to P, it will advance through the angle FFF' as its extremity moves from P to P\ and it mil regrede through the angle P'FQ' as its extremity moves from P' to Q'. If the sun's apparent diurnal path crosses the horizon — as always happens in temperate and tropical latitudes — and if the plane of the dial is horizontal, the arc QQ' will consist of the whole of one branch of a hyperbola, and the above con- ditions will be satisfied if F is within the space bounded by this branch of the hyperbola and its as3niiptotes. As a particular case, in a place of latitude 12° N. on a day when the sun is in the northern tropic (of Cancer) the shadow on a dial whose face is horizontal and style vertical will move backwards for about two hours between sunrise and noon. If, in the case of a given sun-dial placed in a certain position, the conditions are not satisfied, it will be possible to satisfy them by tilting the sun-dial through an angle properly chosen. This was the rationalistic explanation, offered by the French encyclopaedists, of the miracle recorded in connection with Isaiah and Hezekiah*. Suppose, for instance, that the style is perpendicular to the face of the dial. Draw the celestial sphere. Suppose that the sun rises at M and culminates at i\', and let Z be a point between M and N on the sun's diurnal path. Draw a great circle to touch the sun's diurnal path MLN at Z, let this great circle cut the celestial meridian in A * 2 Kii)gs, chap, xx, vv. 9—11. 29-2 452 TIME AND ITS MEASUREMENT [CH. XX and A\ and of the arcs AL, A'L suppose that AL i's> the less and therefore is less than a quadrant. If the style is pointed to Ay then, while the sun is approaching L, the shadow will regrede, and after the sun passes L the shadow will advance. Thus if the dial is placed so that a style which is normal to it cuts the meridian midway between the equator and the tropic, then between sunrise and noon on the longest day the shadow will move backwards through an angle sin~^ (cos (o sec \(o) — cot~^ {sin © cos (Z — Jo) (cos^ I — sin^ to) ~ ^), where I is the latitude of the place and w is the obliquity of the ecliptic. The above remarks refer to the sun-dials in ordinary use. In 1892 General Oliver brought out in London a dial with a solid style, the section of the style being a certain curve whose form was determined empirically by the value of the equation of time as compared with the sun's declination*. The shadow of the style on the dial gives the local mean time, though of course in order to set the dial correctly at any place the latitude of the place must be known : the dial may be also set so as to give the mean time at any other locality whose longitude relative to the place of observation is known. The sun-ring ov ring-dial is another instrument for measuring solar time-|*. One of the simplest type is figured in the diagram below. The sun-ring consists of a thin brass band, about a quarter of an inch wide, bent into the shape of a circle, which slides between two fixed circular rims — the radii of the circles being about one inch. At one point of the band there is a hole; and when the ring is suspended from a fixed point attached to the rims so that it hangs in a vertical plane con- taining the sun, the light from the sun shines through this hole and makes a bright speck on the opposite inner or concave surface of the ring. On this surface the hours are marked, and, if the ring is properly adjusted, the spot of light will fall on the hour which indicates the solar time. The '* An account of this sun-dial with a diagram was given in Knowledge^ London, July 1, 1892, pp. 133, 134. t See Ozanam, 1803 edition, vol. iii, p. 317 ; 1810 edition, p. 526. CH. XX] TIME AND ITS MEASUREMENT 4.33 adjustment for the time of year is made as follows. The rims between which the band can slide are marked on their outer or convex side with the names of the months, and the band containing the hole must be moved between the rims until the hole is opposite to that month for which the ring is being used. For determining times near noon the instrument is reliable, but for other hours in the day it is accurate only if the time of year is properly chosen, usually near one of the equinoxes. This defect may be corrected by marking the hours on a curved brass band affixed to the concave surface of the rims. I possess two specimens of rings of this kind. These rings were distributed widely. Of my two specimens, one was bought in the Austrian Tyrol and the other in London. Astrolabes and sea-rings can be used as sun-rings. Clepsydras or water-clocks, and hour-glasses or sand-clocks, afford other means of measuring time. The time occupied by a given amount of some liquid or sand in running through a given orifice under the same conditions is always the same, and by noting the level of the liquid which has run through the orifice, or which remains to run through it, a measure of time can be obtained. 454 TIME AND ITS MEASUREMENT [CH. XX The burning of graduated candles gives another way of measuring time, and we have accounts of those used by Alfred the Great for the purpose. Incense sticks were used by the Chinese in a similar way. Modern clocks and watches* comprise a train of wheels turned by a weight, spring, or other motive power, and regu- lated by a pendulum, balance, fly-wheel, or other moving body whose motion is periodic and time of vibration constant. The direction of rotation of the hands of a clock was selected originally so as to make the hands move in the same direction as the shadow on a sun-dial whose face is horizontal — the dial being situated in our hemisphere. The invention of clocks with wheels is attributed by tradition to Pacificus of Verona, circ. 850, and also to Gerbert, who is said to have made one at Magdeburg in 996 : but there is reason to believe that these were sun-clocks. The earliest wheel-clock of which we have historical evidence was one sent by the Sultan of Egypt in 1232 to the Emperor Frederick II, though there seems to be no doubt that they had been made in Italy at least fifty years earlier. The oldest clock in England of which we know anything was one erected in 1288 in or near Westminster Hall out of a fine imposed on a corrupt Lord Chief Justice. The bells, and possibly the clock, were staked by Henry VIII on a throw of dice and lost, but the site was marked by a sun-dial, destroyed early in the nineteenth century, and bearing the inscription Discite justiciam moniti. In 1292 a clock was erected in Canter- bury Cathedral at a cost of £30. One erected at Glastonbury Abbey in 1325 is at present in the Kensington Museum and is in excellent condition. Another made in 1326 for St Albans Abbey showed the astronomical phenomena, and seems to have been one of the earliest clocks that did so. One put up at Dover in 1348 is still in good working order. The clocks at Peterborough and Exeter were of about the same date, and portions of them remain in situ. Most of these early clocks * See Clock and Watch Maldng by Lord Griinthorpe, 7th edition, London, 1883. CH. XX] TIME AND ITS MEASUKEMENT 455 were regulated by horizontal balances: pendulums being then unknown. Of the elaborate clocks of a later date, that at Strasburg made by Dasypodius in 1571, and that at Lyons constructed by Lippcus in 1598, are especially famous: the former was restored in 1842, though in a manner which de- stroyed most of the ancient works. In 1370 Vick constructed a clock for Charles V with a weight as motive power and a vibrating escapement— a great improvement on the rough time-keepers of an earlier date. The earliest clock regulated by a pendulum seems to have been made in 1621 by a clockmaker named Harris, of Co vent Garden, London, but the theory of such clocks is due to Huygens*. Galileo had discovered previously the isochronism of a pendulum, but did not apply it to the regulation of the motion of clocks. Hooke made such clocks, and possibly dis- covered independently this use of the pendulum : he invented or re-invented the anchor pallet. A watch may be defined as a clock which will go in any position. Watches, though of a somewhat clumsy design, were made at Nuremberg by P. Hole early in the sixteenth century — the motive power being a ribbon of steel, wound round a spindle, and comiected at one end with a train of wheels which it turned as it unwound. Possibly a few similar timepieces had been made in the previous century; by the end of the sixteenth century they were not uncommon. At first they were usually made in the form of fanciful ornaments such as skulls, or as large pendants, but about 1620 the flattened oval form was introduced, rendering them more convenient to carry in a pocket or about the person. In the seventeenth century their construction was greatly improved, notably by the introduction of the spring balance by Huygens in 1674, and independently by Hooke in 1675 — both mathematicians having discovered that small vibrations of a coiled spring, of which one end is fixed, are practically isochronous. The fusee had been used by R. Zech of Prague in 1525, but was re-invented by Hooke. * Jlorologiuiu Oscillatoiium, Paris, 1G73. 456 TIME AND ITS MEASUREMENT [CH. XX Clocks and watches are usually moved and regulated in the manner indicated above. Other motive powers and other devices for regulating the motion may be met with occasionally. Of these I may mention a clock in the form of a cylinder, usually attached to another weight as in Atwood's machine, which rolls down an inclined plane so slowly that it takes twelve hours to roll down, and the highest point of the face always marks the proper hour*. A water-clock made on a somewhat similar plan is described by Ozanamf as one of the sights of Paris at the beginning of the last century. It was formed of a hollow cylinder divided into various compartments each containing some mercury, so arranged that the cylinder descended with uniform velocity between two vertical pillars on which the hours were marked at equidistant intervals. Other ingenious ways of concealing the motive power have been described in the columns of La KatureX- Of such mysterious timepieces the following are not uncommon examples, and probably are known to most readers of this book. One kind of clock consists of a glass dial suspended by two thin wires; the hands however are of metal, and the works are concealed in them or in the pivot. Another kind is made of two sheets of glass in a frame containing a spring which gives to the hinder sheet a very slight oscillatory motion — imper- ceptible except on the closest scrutiny — and each oscillation moves the hands through the requisite angles. Some so-called perpetual motion timepieces were described above on page 96. Lastly, I have seen in France a clock the hands of which were concealed at the back of the dial, and carried small magnets; pieces of steel in the shape of insects were placed on the dial, and, following the magnets, served to indicate the time. The position of the sun relative to the points of the compass * Ozanam, 1803 edition, vol. n, p. 39 ; 1840 edition, p. 212 ; or La Nature^ Jan. 23, 1892, pp. 123, 124. t Ozanam, 1803 edition, vol. ii, p. 68 ; 1840 edition, p. 225. X See especially the volumes issued in 1874, 1877, and 1878. CH. XX] TIME AND ITS MEASUREMENT 457 determines the solar time. Conversely, if we take the time given by a watch as being the solar time — and it will differ from it by only a few minutes at the most — and we observe the position of the sun, we can find the points of the compass*. To do this it is sufficient to point the hour-hand to the sun, and then the direction which bisects the angle between the hour and the figure xii will point due south. For instance, if it is four o'clock in the afternoon, it is sufficient to point the hour-hand (which is then at the figure iiii) to the sun, and the figure ii on the watch will indicate the direction of south. Again, if it is eight o'clock in the morning, we must point the hour-hand (which is then at the figure viii) to the sun, and the figure X on the watch gives the south point of the compass. Between the hours of six in the morning and six in the evening the angle between the hour and xil which must be bisected is less than 180°, but at other times the angle to be bisected is greater than 180°; or perhaps it is simpler to say that at other times the rule gives the north point and not the south point. The reason is as follows. At noon the sun is due south, and it makes one complete circuit round the points of the compass in 24 hours. The hour-hand of a watch also makes one complete circuit in 12 hours. Hence, if the watch is held in the plane of the ecliptic with its face upwards, and the figure xii on the dial is pointed to the south, both the hour- hand and the sun will be in that direction at noon. Both move round in the same direction, but the angular velocity of the hour-hand is twice as great as that of the sun. Hence the rule. The greatest error due to the neglect of the equation of time is less than 2°. Of course in practice most people, instead of holding the face of the watch in the ecliptic, would hold it horizontal, and in our latitude no serious error would be thus introduced. * The rule is given by W. H. Richards, Military Topography , London, 1883, p. 31, though it is not stated quite correctly. I do not know who first enunciated it. 458 TIME AND ITS MEASUREMENT [CH. XX In the southern hemisphere where at noon the sun is due north the rule requires modification. In such places the hour- hand of a watch (held face upwards in the plane of the ecliptic) and the sun move in opposite directions. Hence, if the watch is held so that the figure xii points to the sun, then the direction which bisects the angle between the hour of the day and the figure XII will point due north. 4,5y CHAPTER XXI. MATTER AND ETHER THEORIES. Matter, like space and time, cannot be defined, but either the statement that matter is whatever occupies space or the statement that it is anything which can be seen, touched, or weighed, suggests its more important characteristics to anyone already familiar with it. The means of measuring matter and some of its properties are treated in most text-books on mechanics, and I do not propose to discuss them. I confine the chapter to an account of some of the hypotheses formerly held by physicists as to the ultimate constitution of matter, but I exclude metaphysical conjectures which, from their nature, are incapable of proof and are not subject to mathematical analysis. The question is intimately associated with the explanation of the phenomena of attraction, light, chemistry, electricity, and other branches of physics. I commence with a list of some of the more plausible of the hypotheses formerly proposed which accounted for the obvious properties of matter, and shall then discuss how far they explain or are consistent with other facts*. The interest of the list is * For the earlier investigations I have based my account mainly on Itecent Advances in Physical Science, by P. G. Tait, Edinburgh, 1876 (chaps, xii, xiii); and on the article Atom by J. Clerk Maxwell in the Encyclopaedia Britannica or his Collected Works, vol. ii, pp. 445 — 484. For the more recent speculations see J. J. Thomson, Electricity and Matter, Westminster, 1904 ; J. Larmor, Aether and Matter, Cambridge, 1900 ; and E, T. Whittaker, IlistM'y of the 'Theories of Aether and Electricity, Dublin, 1910. 460 MATTER AND ETHER THEORIES [CH. XXI j largely historical, for within the last few years new views as to the constitution of matter have been propounded, which cannot be discussed satisfactorily in a book like this. I. Hypothesis of Continuous Matter. It may be supposed that matter is homogeneous and continuous, in which case there is no limit to the infinite divisibility of bodies. This view was held by Descartes*. This conjecture is consistent with the facts deducible by untrained observation, but there are many other phenomena for which it does not account ; moreover there seems to be no way of reconciling such a structure of matter either with the facts of chemical changes or with the results of spectrum analysis. At any rate the theory must be regarded as extremely im- probable. II. Atomic Theories. If matter is not continuous we must suppose that every body is composed of aggregates of molecules. If so, it seems probable that each such molecule is built up by the association of two or more atoms, that the number of kinds of atoms is finite, and that the atoms of any particular kind are alike. As to the nature of the atoms the following hypotheses have been made. (i) Popular Atomic Hypothesis. The popular view is that every atom of any particular kind is a minute indivisible article possessing definite qualities, everlasting in its form and properties, and infinitely hard. This statement is plausible, but the difficulties to which it leads appear to be insuperable. In fact we have reason to think that the atoms which form a molecule are composite systems in incessant vibration at a rate characteristic of the molecule, and it is most probable that they are elastic. Newton seems to have hazarded a conjecture of this kind when he suggested f that the difficulties, connected with the fact that the velocity of sound was one-ninth greater than that required by theory, might be overcome if the particles of air * Descartes, Principia, vol. ii, pp. 18, 23. t Newton, Principia, bk. n, prop. 50. CH. XXl] MATTER AND ETHER THEORIES 461 were little rigid spheres whose distance from one another under normal conditions was nine times the diameter of any one of them. This was ingenious, but obviously the view is untenable, because, if such a structure of air existed, the air could not be compressed beyond a certain limit, namely, about 1/1 021st part of its original volume, which has been often exceeded. The true explanation of the difficulty noticed by Newton was given by Laplace. (ii) Boscovich's Hypothesis. In 1759 Boscovich suggested* that the facts might be explained by supposing that an atom was an infinitely small indivisible mass which was a centre of force — the law of force being attractive for sensible distances, alternately attractive and repulsive for minute distances, and repulsive for infinitely small distances. In this theory all action between bodies is action at a distance. He explained the apparent extension of bodies by sapng that two parts are consecutive (or similarly that two bodies are in contact) when the nearest pair of atoms in them are so close to one another that the repulsion at any point between them is sufficiently great to prevent any other atom coming between them. It is essential to the theory that the atom shall have a mass but shall not have dimensions. This hypothesis is not inconsistent with any known facts, but it has been described, perhaps not unjustly, as a mere mathematical fiction, and certainly it is opposed to the apparent indications of our senses. At any rate it is artificial, though it may be a prejudice to regard that as an argument against its adoption. To some extent this view was accepted by Faraday. Sir William Thomson, afterwards Lord Kelvin, showed f that, if we assume the existence of gravitation, then each of the above hypotheses will account for cohesion. * Philosophiae NaUtralis Theoria Redacta ad Unicam Legem Firnim, Vienna, 1759. t Proceedings of the Eoyal Society of Edinburgh, April 21, 1SG2, vol. iv, pp. 60i— 606. 462 MATTER AND ETHER THEORIES [CH. XXI (iii) Hypothesis of an Elastic Solid Ether. Some physicists tried to explain the known phenomena by properties of the medium through which our impressions are derived. By postu- lating that all space is filled with a medium possessed of many of the characteristics of an elastic solid, it was shown by Fresnel, Green, Cauchy, Neumann, MacCullagh, and others that a large number of the properties of light and electricity may be explained. In spite of the difficulties to which this hypothesis necessarily leads, and of its inherent improbability, it has been discussed by Stokes, Lam^, Boussinesq, Sarrau, Lorentz, Lord Rayleigh, and Kirchhoff. This hypothesis was modified and rendered somewhat more plausible by von Helmholtz, Lommel, Ketteler*, and Voigt, who based their researches on the assumption of a mutual reaction between the ether and the material molecules located in it : on this view the problems connected with refraction and dispersion have been simplified. Finally, Sir William Thomson in his Baltimore Lectures, 1885, suggested a mechanical ana- logue to represent the relations between matter and this ether, by which a possible constitution of the ether can be realized. He also suggested later a form of labile ether, from whose properties most of the more familiar physical phenomena can be deduced, provided the arrangement can be considered stable ; a labile ether is an elastic solid, and its properties in two dimensions may be compared with those of a soap-bubble film, in three dimensions. It is, however, difficult to criticize any of these hypotheses as a theory of the constitution of matter until the arrangement of the atoms or their nature is more definitely expressed. III. Dynamical Theories. In more recent years the suggestion was made that the so-called atoms may be forms of motion (ex. gr. permanent eddies) in one elementary material known as the ether ; on this view all the atoms are constituted of the same matter, but the physical conditions are different for the different kinds of atoms. It has been said that there is an * Theoretische Ojptik, Braunschweig, 1885. CH. XXl] MATTER AND ETHER THEORIES 463 initial difficulty in any such hypothesis, since the all-pervading elementary fluid must possess inertia, so that to explain matter we assume the existence of a fluid possessing one of the chief characteristics of matter. This is true as far as it goes, but it is not more unreasonable than to attribute all the fundamental properties of matter to the atoms themselves, as is done by many writers. The next paragi-aph contains a statement of one of the earliest attempts to formulate a dynamical atomic hypothesis. (i) The Vortex Ring Hypothesis. This hypothesis assumes that each atom is a vortex ring in an incompressible frictionless homogeneous fluid. Vortex rings — though, since friction is brought into play, of an imperfect character — can be produced in air by many smokers. Better specimens can be formed by taking a card- board box in one side of which a circular hole is cut, filling it with smoke, and hitting the opposite side sharply. The tendency of the particles forming a ring to maintain their annular connection may be illustrated by placing such a box on one side of a room in a direct line with the flame of a lighted candle on the other side. If properly aimed, the ring will travel across the room and put out the flame. If the box is filled only with air, so that the ring is not visible, the experiment is more effective. In 1858 von Helmholtz* showed that a closed vortex filament in a perfect fluid is indestructible and retains certain characteristics always unaltered. In 1867 Sir William Thomson propounded f the idea that matter consists of vortex rings in a fluid which fills space. If the fluid is perfect we could neither create new vortex rings nor destroy those already created, and thus the permanence of the atoms is explained. Moreover the atoms would be flexible, compressible, and in incessant vibration * Crelle\^ Journal, 1858, vol. lv, pp. 25 — 55 ; translated by Tait in the Philosophical Magazine, .June, 1867, supplement, series 4, vol. xxxiii, pp. 485 — 512. t Proceedings of the Royal Society of Edinburgh, Feb. 18, 1867, vol. vi, pp. 94—105. 464 MA.TTER AND ETHIOR THEORIES [CH. XXI at a definite fundamental rate. This rate is very rapid, and Sir William Thomson gave the number of vibrations per second of a sodium ring as probably being greater than 10". By a development of this hypothesis Sir J. J. Thomson* showed, some years ago, that chemical combination may be explained. He supposed that a molecule of a compound is formed by the linking together of vortex filaments representing atoms of different elements : this arrangement may be compared with that of helices on an anchor ring. For stability not more than six filaments may be combined together, and their strengths must be equal. Another way of explaining chemical combination on the vortex atom hypothesis has been suggested by W. M. Hicks. It is known f that a spherical mass of fluid, whose interior possesses vortex motion, can move through liquid like a rigid sphere, and he has shown that one of these spherical vortices can swallow up another, thus forming a compound element. (ii) The Vortex Sponge Hypothesis. Any vortex atom hj^pothesis labours under the difficulty of requiring that the density of the fluid ether shall be comparable with that of ordinary matter. In order to obviate this and at the same time to enable it to transmit transversal radiations Sir William Thomson suggested what has been termed, not perhaps very happily, the vortex sponge hypothesis |: this rests on the assumption that laminar motion can be propagated through a turbulently moving inviscid liquid. The mathematical difficulties con- nected with such motion have prevented an adequate dis- cussion of this hypothesis, and I confine myself to merely mentioning it. These hypotheses, of vortex motion in a fluid, account for the indestructibility of matter and for many of its properties. But in order to explain statical electrical attraction it would * A Treatise on the Motion of Vortex Rings, Cambridge, 1883. + See a memoir by M. J. M. Hill in the Pliilosophical Transactions of the Royal Society, London, 1894, part i, pp. 213—246. J Philosophical Magazine, London, October, 1887, series 5, vol. xxiv, pp. 342 —353. CH. XXl] MATTER AND ETHER THEORIES 4G5 seem necessary to suppose that the ether is elastic; in other words, that an electric field must be a field of strain. If so, complete fluidity in the ether would be impossible, and hence the above theories are now regarded as untenable. (iii) The Ether-Squirts Hypothesis. Karl Pearson* sug- gested another dynamical theory in which an atom is conceived as a point at which ether is pouring into our space from space of four dimensions. If an observer lived in two-dimensional space filled with ether and confined by two parallel and adjacent surfaces, and if through a hole in one of these surfaces fresh ether were squirted into this space, the variations of pressure thereby produced might give the impression of a hard impenetrable body. Similarly an ether- squirt from space of four dimensions into our space might give us the impression of matter. It seems necessary on this hypothesis to suppose that there are also ether-sinks, or atoms of negative mass ; but as ether- squirts would repel ether-sinks we may suppose that the latter have moved out of the universe known to our senses. By defining the mass of an atom as the mean rate at which ether is squirting into our space at that point, we can deduce the Newtonian law of gravitation, and by assuming certain periodic variations in the rate of squirting we can deduce some of the phenomena of cohesion, of chemical action, and of electro- magnetism and light. But of course the hypothesis rests on the assumption of the existence of a world beyond our senses. (iv) Tlie Electron Hypothesis. MacCullagh, in 1837 and 1839, proposed to account for optical phenomena on the as- sumption of an elastic ether possessing elasticity of the type required to enable it to resist rotation. This suggestion has been recently modified and extended by Sir Joseph Larmorf, and, as now enunciated, it accounts for many of the electrical and magnetic (as well as the optical) properties of matter. * American Journal of Mathematics, 1891, vol. xiii, pp. 309 — 362. t Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society, Loudon, 1894, pp. 719 822 ; 1895, pp. 695—743. B. li. 30 466 MATTER AND ETHER THEORIES [CH. XXI The hypothesis is however very artificial. The assumed ether is a rotationally elastic incompressible fluid. In this fluid Larmor introduces monad electric elements or electrons, which are nuclei of radial rotational strain. He supposes that these electrons constitute the basis of matter. He further supposes that an electrical current consists of a procession of these electrons, and that a magnetic particle is one in which these entities are revolving in minute orbits. Djmamical considera- tions applied to such a system lead to an explanation of nearly all the more obvious phenomena. By further postulating that the orbital motion of electrons in the atom constitute it a fluid vortex it is possible to apply the hydrodynamical pulsatory theory of Bjerknes or Hicks and obtain an explanation of gravitation. Thus on this view mass is explained as an electrical mani- festation. Electricity in its turn is explained by the existence of electrons, that is, of nuclei of strain in the ether, which are supposed to be in incessant and rapid motion. Whilst, to render this possible, properties are attributed to the ether which are apparently inconsistent with our experience of the space it fills. Put thus, the hypothesis seems very artificial. Perhaps the utmost we can say for it is that, from some points of view, it may, so far as analysis goes, be an approximation to the true theory; in any case much work will have to be done before it can be considered established even as a working hypothesis. (v) Recent Developments. Most of the above was written in 1891. Since then investigations on radio-activity have opened up new avenues of conjecture which tend to strengthen the electron theory as a working hypothesis. More than thirty years ago Clerk Maxwell had shown that light and electricity were closely connected phenomena. It was then believed that both were due to waves in the hypothetical ether, but it was supposed that the phenomena of matter on the one side and of light and electricity on the other were sharply distinguished one from the other. The difterences, however, between matter and light tend to disappear as investigations proceed. In 1895 CH. XXl] MATTER AND ETHER THEORIES 4G7 Rontgen established the existence of rays which could produce light, which had the same velocity as light, which were not affected by a magnet, and which could traverse wood and certain other opaque substances like glass. A year later Becquerel showed that uranium was constantly emitting rays which, though not affecting the eye as light, were capable of producing an image on a photographic plate. Like Rontgen rays they can go through thin sheets of metal ; like heat rays they burn the skin; like electricity they generate ozone from oxygen. Passed into the air they enable it to conduct the electric current. Their speed has been measured and found to be rather more than half that of light and electricity. It was soon found that thorium possessed a similar property, but in 1903 Curie showed that radium possessed radio-activity to an extent previously unsuspected in any body, and in fact the rays were so powerful as to make the substance directly visible. Further experiments show^ed that numerous bodies are radio-active, but the effects are so much more marked in radium that it is convenient to use that substance for most experimental pur- poses. Radium gives off no less than three kinds of rays besides a radio-active emanation. In these discharges there appears to be a gradual change from what had been supposed to be an elementary form of matter to another. This leads to the belief that of the known forms of matter some, perhaps even all, are not absolutely stable. On the other hand, it may be that only radio-active bodies are unstable, and that in their disintegration we are watching the final stage in the evolution of stable and constant forms of matter. It may, however, in any case turn out that some, or perhaps all, of the so-called elements may be capable of resolution into different combinations of electrons or electricity. At an earlier date J. J. Thomson had concluded that the glow, seen when an electric current passes through a high vacuum tube, is due to a rush of minute particles across the tube. He calculated their weight, their velocity, and the charge of electricity transported by or represented by them, and found SO— 2 468 MATTER AND ETHER THEORIES [CH. XXI these to be constant. They were deflected like Becquerel rays. All space seems to contain them, and electricity, if not identical with them, is at least carried by them. This suggested that these minute particles might be electrons. If so, they might thus give the ultimate explanation of electricity as well as matter, and the atom of the chemist would be not an irreducible unit of matter, but a system comprising numerous such minute particles. These conclusions are consistent with those subse- quently deduced from experiments with radium. In 1904 the hypothesis was carried one stage further. In that year J. J. Thomson investigated the conditions of stability of certain systems of revolving particles; and on the h3^pothesis that an atom of matter consists of a number of particles carrying negative charges of electricity revolving in orbits within a sphere of positive electrification he deduced many of the pro- perties of the different chemical atoms corresponding to different possible stable systems of this kind. His scheme led to results agreeing closely with the results of Mendelejev's periodic hypo- thesis according to which some or all of the properties of an element are a periodic function of its atomic weight. An interesting consequence of this view is that Franklin's description of electricity as subtle particles pervading all bodies may turn out to be substantially correct. It is also remarkable that corpuscles somewhat analogous to those whose existence was suggested in Newton's corpuscular theory of light should be now supposed to exist in cathode and Becquerel rays. (vi) These facts have been utilized by G. Le Bon who suggested that electricity and matter may be regarded as intermediate stages in the flux of the ether, the former being one stage in the incessant dissociation of matter which arises from ether and ultimately is resolved again into ether. The theory is ingenious but appears untenable. (vii) Ether as matter. Recently another hypothesis as to the nature of the ether was put forward by J). I. Mendelejev, the distinguished chemist. In the grouping of the elements ac- cording to his periodic law, there were originally twelve series CM. XXl] MATTER AND ETHER THEORIES 469 and eight groups. All the elements since discovered have fallen into place in the sequence, and possess properties in general accordance with his grouping, but helium, argon, and other similar inactive elements, constitute a ninth or zero group. In this scheme hydrogen, with an atomic weight 1*008, is in the first series and first group. It has the lowest atomic weight of any element yet known, but there may be lighter elements, ex. gr. one in the first series and zero group. Mendelejcv has however suggested that just as a zero group has been now discovered so there may be a zero series ; and that the element (if there is one) in the zero group and zero series might be expected to possess properties closely resembling those of the hypothetical ether. It would be the lightest and simplest form of matter, of great elasticity, and with an atomic weight of perhaps about 1/10^ as compared with hydrogen. The velocity of its atoms would be so great as to make it all pervading, and it would appear to be capable of doing all that is required fi:om the mysterious ether. The hypothesis is attractive and intelligible. (viii) The Bubble Hypothesis''^, The difficulty of conceiving the motion of matter through a solid elastic medium has been met in another way, namely, by suggesting that what we call matter is a deficiency of the ether, and that this region of deficiency can move through the ether in a manner somewhat analogous to that in which a bubble can move in a liquid. To express this in technical language we may suppose the ether to consist of an arrangement of minute uniform spherical gi-ains piled together so closely that they cannot change their neigh- bours, although they can move relatively one to another. Places where the number of grains is less or greater than the number necessary to render the piling normal, move through the medium, as a wave moves through water, though the grains do not move with them. Places where the ether is in excess of the normal amount would repel one another and move away * 0. Reynolds, Submechanics of the Universe, Cambridge, 1903. 470 MATTER AND ETHER THEORIES [CH. XXI out of our ken, but places where it is below the normal amount would attract each other according to the law of gravity, and constitute particles of matter which would be indestructible. It is alleged that the theory accounts for the known phenomena of gravity, electricity, and light, provided the size of its grains is properly chosen. Reynolds has calculated that for this purpose their diameter should be rather more than 5 x 10~^^ centimetres, and that the pressure in the medium would be about 10^ tons per square centimetre. This theory is in itself more plausible than the electron hypothesis, but its consequences have not 3^et been fully worked out. Returning from these novel hypotheses to the classical theories of matter, we may now proceed a step further. Before a hypothesis on the structure of matter can be ranked as a scientific theory we may reasonably expect it to afford some explanation of three facts. These are (a) the Newtonian law of attraction ; (b) the fact that there are only a finite number of ultimate kinds of matter — such as oxygen, iron, etc. — which can be arranged in a series such that the properties of the successive members are connected by a regular law; and (c) the main results of spectrum analysis. In regard to the first point (a), we can say only that none of the above theories are inconsistent with the known laws of attraction ; and as far as the ether-squirts, the electron, and the bubble h5rpotheses are concerned, they have been elaborated into a form from which the gravitational law of attraction can be deduced. But we may still say that as to the cause of gravity — or indeed of force — we know nothing.